.18^.
^,
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
£/ ;^4^^
i?..
C <'
V#/^'
fc ^^
/^
!.0
I.I
1125
i !r IS
12.0
1.8
1.25 1.4
1.6
-• 6" -
►
^
^
^.
/
/
> N>*
"^ J^'
/s«
Photographic
Sciences
Corporation
23 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER. N.Y. 14580
(716) 872-4503
y''
w.
CIHM/ICMH
Microfiche
Series.
CIHM/ICMH
Collection de
microfiches.
Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques
\
>.
Technical and Bibliographic Notas/Notas tachniquas at bibliographiquas
Tha Instituta has atiamptad to obtain tha baat
original copy avaiiabia for filming. Faaturaa of this
copy which may ba bibliographicaliy uniqua,
which may altar any of tha imagaa in tha
raprodiiction, or which may significantly ehcnga
tha usual mathod of filming, ara chaokad batow.
D
Colourad covars/
Couvartura da coulaur
r~1 Covars damagad/
D
Couvartura andommagia
Covars rastorad and/or laminatad/
Couvartura rastaurte at/ou palliculte
I — I Covar titia missing/
D
D
□
La titra da couvartura manqua
Colourad maps/
Cartes gAographiques fi couleur
Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/
Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire)
r~~1 Colourad plates and/or illustrations/
□
Planches et/ou illustrationa en couleur
Bound with other material/
Reii* avec d'autras documents
Tight binding may cause shadows or dictortion
along interior margin/
La re liure serrie peut causer de I'ombre ou de la
distorsion l« long da la marge intirieure
Blank leaves added during restoration may
appear within tha text. Whenever possible, these
have been omitted from filming/
II se peut que certainaa pagea blanehea ajoutiaa
lore d'une restauration apparaissent dans la texte,
mais, iorsque cela Atait possibie, cea pages n'ont
pas iti filmias.
Additional comments:/
Commentairas supplAmantaires;
L'Institut a rr.icrofiim* la meilleur axamplaire
qu'il lui a iti possible de se procurer. Lss ditaits
de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-d..re uniques du
point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier
une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger una
modification dans la mithode normaia de filmage
sont indiqute ci-deskous.
The I
to th
r~n Coloured peges/
D
Pagee de couleur
Pagea damaged/
Pagea endommagtes
Pages restored and/oi
Pages restauries «t/ou pelliculies
Pages discoloured, stained or foxe<
Pages dicolories, tacheties ou piquAes
Pages detached/
Pages ditachies
Showthroughy
Transparence
Quality of prir
QualitA Inigale de I'impression
Includes supplementary matarii
Comprend du ma'iiriti suppl^mentaire
Only edition available/
Seule Edition disponible
r — I Pagea damaged/
I I Pages restored and/or laminated/
rri Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/
I I Pages detached/
r~7] Showthrough/
I j Quality of print varies/
r~~| Includes supplementary material/
r~| Only edition available/
The
pcsa
of til
filmi
Origi
begi
the I
sion
othe
first
sion
or ill
The
shall
TINl
whi(
Map
difffl
entii
bagi
right
requ
metl
Pages wholly or partially obscured by et-rata
slips, tissues, etc., have been ref limed to
ensure the best poiisibie image/
Les pages totalemant ou partieilement
obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure,
etc., ont it^ fiimies A nouveau de fa^on d
obtenir la meilieure image possible.
This item i« filmed at the reduction ratio checked belovi^/
Ce document est filmA au tat.x de reduction indiqui ci-dessous.
10X 14X 18X 7r*X
f
26X
30X
y\
I2X
16X
20X
24X
28X
32X
The copy filmed here has been reproduced thanks
to the generosity of:
National Library of Canada
L'aocemplaire filiTi6 fut reproduit grAce A la
g6n6rosit6 de:
Biblloth^que nationale du Canada
The images appearing here are the best quality
possible considering the condition and legib'Mty
of the original copy and in keeping with the
filming contract specifications.
Les images suivantes ont 6t6 reproduites av^c le
plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et
de ta netteti de •'exempiaire filmi, et en
conformity avec les conditions du contrat de
filmage.
Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed
beginning with the front cover and ending on
the last page with a printed or illustrated impres-
sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All
other original copies are filmed beginning on the
first page w>ch a printed or illustra;:ed impres-
sion, and ending on the last page with a printed
or illustrated impression.
Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en
papier est imprimAe sont film^s en commenpant
par le premier plat et en terminant soit par la
dernidre page qui comporte une empreinte
d'impression ou d'illustration, soit par \<3 second
plat, selon le cas. Tous les autres exemplaires
originaux sont fllm^s en commenqant par ia
premidre page qui comporte une empreinte
d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par
la dernidre page qui comporte une telle
empreinte.
The last recorded frame on each microfiche
shall contain the symbol -'^> (meaning "CON-
TINUED "), or the symbol V (meaning "END"),
whichever applies.
Un des symboles suivants apparaftra sur ia
dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon ie
cas: ie symbole — ► signifie "A SUIVRE", ie
symbole V signifie 'FIN".
Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at
different reduction ratios. Those too large to be
entirely included in one exposure are filmed
beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to
right and top to bottom, as many frames as
required. The following diagrr^Yis illustrate the
method:
Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre
film^s d des taux de reduction diff^rents.
Lorsque le document est trap grand pour fitre
reprjduit en un seui cliche, 11 est film6 d partir
de Tangle supirieur gauche, de gauche d droite,
et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre
d'images n^cessaire. Les diagrammes suivants
illustrent la mSthode.
1 2 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
N«
1^
National Library Bibliotheque nationale
of Canada du Canada
i^
THE HIGH SCHOOL
German Grammar
WITH APPENDICES, EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION
AND VOCABULARIES
BY
Vv^. H. VAN DER SMISSEN, M. A.
Lecturer on German, Universitv College. Toronto.
AND
- W. H. ERASER, B. A.
Lecturer on It.u.n .n. Sp.n.h. UN.vERsn-v Colleoe. Toronto; l.te French
AND German Master, Upper Canada College.
Authorized by the Education Department of Ontario.
TORONTO:
THE COPP, CLARK COMPANY. LIMITED.
1890.
PF3))
Entered according to Act of the Parliament of Canada, in the year one thousar.d ei^ht
hunted and eighty-eight, by Thk Copp, C.hk Company. Lmitkd. 1„ the fflce o
the Minister of Agriculture.
printtsd bt
Thb Copp, Clark Compaw, Lt».
TORONTO.
-8M
Q^L
PREFACE.
In presenting this Grammar to the Public fh. . ,.k
be overburdened n'^H ^ .! '^'"""' "'^>' "<" « 'he outset
toodffiturr^lTufe Ct^^^^^^^
as for instance the declension „f '"P^"''"" '""'J^"'
before bein. dis mlsed T "'''''"■"'™^' '^ '""7 '^^ated
tmtion of e^ch ruTe "°" '^"^"'"^^ "« ^^^ '" "'"-
I" the Exercises, especial care has been taken th^f n„
pt: Tot t!;r t r™"^^ T'^' '" -'^^- - -^^^
Iess;ns ' " -'-espondm. lesson, but also of pa.t
' shor s-s ::tp"; :l\~' '^ ^^-^^^ - -"
|es..^_ These or. exerc-s^Ct::— ruVt
sons should ],e omitted by the el -m^L ,' '^'■
-ot in an, case be taken 4 ^^^::Zi!^'' '"' ^'°""
duditrpriv^Jv'oiiT'tr'"'"' '"^ '"'^•^"'^^' ">= -^^ (--
oositioL,rsd piiSt :lt:"7''' ''^''™'='p^'p^^^^^
-h the fundaJenta. pri::i;ts'": X^ X' ^ th"
-p.et.on of Lesson XXII, the pupi, ^^b/ 4"'e,Ti ^^
I
IV
PREFACE.
for reading easy German texts. The Modal Auxiliaries, how-
ever, could not be introduced in their proper connection until
the strong verbs had been disposed o(, and where they occur
in reading texts must be treated as anomalous forms until Lesson
XXXIII is reached.
Special care has been taken to call attention to and explain
those points in which German differs from English usage,
particularly with regard to the prepositions and their puzzling
idioms, the use of participles and the construction of participial
clauses, the order of words and construction of sentences.
The Historical Sketch in Lesson LI I does not claim to be
more than rudimentary, and such terms only are employed in
explaining phonetic laws, as are likely to be familiar to junior
pupils.
In the Vocabulary, only such meanings of words are given
as occur in the exercises ; for the principal parts of strong and
irregular verbs the pupil is referred to the proper section of the
Grammar. Similar references are given under the prepositions
and pronouns.
The Index has been made as full as possible, and it is hoped
that it will be of no little assistance to both teacher and pupil.
In writing this Grammar, the authors have freely consulted,
among others, the grammars of Heyse, Whitney and Brandt,
Vernaleken's "Deutsche Syntax," and the various works of
Sanders, especially his great " Dictionary," his " Sprachbriefe,"
and his "Satzbau und Wortfolge der deutschen Sprache."
For some of the examples in Lesson XLIX, as well as the sen-
tences in Exercise G, the authors are indebted to Buchheim's
''German Prose Composition."
University College,
Toronto, May, 1888.
CONTENTS.
-•o*-
Preface ......
Introduction. — Alphabet ..'**'
Examples of Pronunciation
General Remarks on Pronunciation .
Quantity of Vowels ....
Accentuation
Orthography
German Script
LESSON
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
IX.
X.
PART I.
Present Indicative of ^o6cn, to have .
Use of Cases. — Definite Article
liefer Model. — Imperf. Indie, of (joaf It, to
have
mm Model. - Indef. Article. - Present and
Imperf. Indie, of ffin, to be ...
Declension of Substantives : — gWalCt Model,
or -I, -m, 11, -r Stems • . . '.
Present and Imperfect of tBertfll, to become.
— Construction of Principal Sentences
Declension of Substantives: — i3oI)l| Model.
— Question Order
Conjugation of rjoBftf, to have. — Place of
Participle and Infinitive ....
Weak Conjugation : IfllJeil. - Dependent Sen-
tences—Prepositions with Accusative only
Weak Verbs (continued). — Declension of
Substantives : - ^otf Model, or Plural in -ft
PAGE
17-
i8.
20.
22.
25-
28.
32.
36.
41-
47-
PAGE
iii
I
6
8
9
10
II
»3
§§
1,2
3-5
6,7
8-is
16-18
19, 20
21 23
24-26
27-aA
35-37
LESSON
XI.
XII.
XIII.
A
XIV.
V.
B.
XVI.
C.
XVII.
:i
XVIII.
XIX.
:
XX.
XXI.
li
XXII
|!
XXIII.
XXIV.
XXV.
i
XXVI.
XXVII.
D.
CONTENTS,
Personal Pronouns ....
, Possessive Adjectives. Use of Artici»is ..
Construction of Sentences : — Place of Ob-
jects, Adverbs, etc. - Prepositions with Da-
tive only
Additional Remarks on Pe'-sonai I'ronouns
and Prepositions
Conjugation of ff|n, to be. Declension of
Substantives : Weak or n Stems: j^nabf
Model
Mixed Declension. - Double Plurals. - Pre
positions governing Dative or Accusative
Anomalies of Declension
Declension of Substantives: Recapitulation
— Proper Names. — Prepositions with Gen
itive
Proper Names. - J'oreign Substantives .
Gender of Substantives. — Interrogative Pro
nouns and Adjectives. — Indirect State
nients and Questions ....
Gender of Substantives (concluded). - - Gen
eral Rei'iarks. - Double Gender
Relative Pronouns. — Irregular Weak Verbs
Declension of Attributive Adjectives; Strong
Form. - Conjugation of Strong Verbs
Passive Voice ... ...
Declension of Adjectives : Weak and Mixed
— Strong Verbs : bcifteu Model .
Possessive Pronouns.-- Strong Verbs: Hciften
Model
Declension of Adjectives (concluded) : Table,
General Remarks. — Strong Verbs: fdjtC^Cn
and fccdtfll Models
Comparison of Adjectives. — Strong Verbs :
friercn Model
Demonstrative Pronouns. — Strong Verbs :
finflCJi Model
Indefinite Pronouns. — Strong Verbs: fpin=
nctl and ^clfcn Models ....
On Certain Adjectives and Pronouns .
PACK
52. 38-42
5«- 43. 44
64. 45, 46
70. 47 St
72. 52-59
80.
87.
60 65
66 69
89.
95-
70-75
76-78
97-
79-88
105.
in.
89-91
92-99
iiS.
lOO-III
126.
112-114
134-
iiS-irS
142.
119. 120
147.
121-124
154-
125-131
162.
132 144
171.
178.
145-159
160 162
iJSSON
aXVIII.
XXIX.
XXX.
XXXI.
XXXII.
XXXIII.
XXXIV.
XXXV.
XXXVI.
E.
XXXVII.
XXXVIII.
XXXIX.
XL.
F.
CONTENTW.
Numerals : — Cardinals and Ordinals, —
Strong Verbs: f)irfll|ftl Model
Indefinite Numerals.— Strong Verbs: effrii
Model . . .
Derivative 1,'umerals. — Time, Measure,
Date. - Strong Verbs : f|f)lagf 11 Model .
Adverbs. -Strong Verbs: faacn Model
Adverbs (continued): Formation and Com-
parison. — Table of Strong Verbs and
General Remarks on the same
Adverbs (continued) : Idioms. Irregular
VAGE
ss
Strong Verbs
Modal Auxiliaries
Modal Auxiliaries (continued): Idiom
Compound Verbs
On Certain Prefixes
Reflexive and Impersonal Verbs .
Prepositions governing the Genitive
Prepositions (continued) : -- Idioms
Conjunctions. — Interjections
Conjunctions. —Additional Remarks
XLI.
XLII.
XLIII.
XLIV.
XLV.
XLVI.
XLVII.
XLVIII.
XLIX.
L.
G.
PART II.
SYNTAX.
Syncax of the Cases. - Nominative and
Genitive
Syntax of the Cases. Dative and Accusa-
tive
Indicative Mood : Syntax of its Tenses
Sul)junctive and Conditional Moods
Imperative and Infinitive Moods.
Infinitive Mood (continued)
The Participles . . . . ,,
Concord and Apposition
Apposition (continued): Appositive Ad
jectives. —Syntax of the Preposition
Word-Order .
4 • • ,
Complex Sentences ^-Clause-Order .
i8o. 163-16
1S9. 168-18
iy6. i82-i8<
204. 1S7, I St
210. 1S9-19/
217. 195, i9(
225. !97-j9<;
233. 20O-2Or
-39- 203-208
246. 209-21'?
249- 214 22c
257. 221-23^
264. -25-23^
-73- 235-24C
282. 241
2S6.
242-24;
. 291.
-4'^255
• -99-
256-262
• 304-
263-268
• 311-
269-272
318.
273-27S
• 3'-S-
279-284
■ 334-
-
285-289
• 341.
290, 291
. 34S.
-9-301
• 3^-
302-306
/
CON 1 EM'S.
PART III.
WORD-FORMATION AND HISTORICAL SKETCH.
""•^'' PAGE §S
LI. Word-Formation : Derivation and Composition 364. 307-321
UI. Historical Sketch of the Language, Grimm's Law,
374 322-326
Umlaut
APPENDICES.
A. Substantives of 2/hlcr Model with Umlaut
B. Masculine Monosyllables of .'piinb Model
C. Feminines of (2ol)n Model .
Z>. Irregular Foreign Substantives .
£. Neuter Monosyllables vof Jpimb Model
/^. Weak Masculines not ending in -e
G. Substantives of Mixed t)eclension
G* Double Plurals with Different Meaning
/^. Plurals of Abstract Substantives .
/. Exceptions to the Rules on Gender
/. Double Genders ....
at: Monosyllabic Adjectives without Umlaut in
parison . .
L. Strong Verbs net given in the Lists
Com
Exercises in Composition
Abbreviations
Vocabulary:
Index
j Germ an- English
( English- Gerr:.an
381. I^
381. 22
382. 22
382. 22
382. 2X ,
3^3- 5;
383- 6i
384. 64
384. 66
385. 80,89,90
388.
389.
389.
91
125
19a
PAOJ
404
405
423
440
INTRODUCTION.
(FoK Rbfbrrnck ohlv.)
22
33
33
ax,
5/
6i
64
66
89,90
91
PAOJ
404
405
423
440
Characters.
91 a
3) b
« c
5 f
@ 9
THE GERMAN ALPHABET.
Name.
a/i
bay
tsay
day
ay
gay
Sound.
like a in G/ther; neier as in
L</11, hat, c./re.
as in En^r., except at end of
vyord or syll., when pron.
like/.
before n, e, i, and l;, like ts ;
otherwise like /'/ in words
from French, before e and i
like ss. '
as in Eng., except at end of word
or s>ll., when pron. like /.
long, like a in g^-me; .short,
like e in p^-n; when final or
in unaccented prehxes, like
short a m Louisa.
as in English.
always hard, before all vowels
and before 1, m, n, v, like^-
in ^ive; at end of words and
sylls., or before otner con-
sonants, like Germ, d- m
words from French, before c
and i, like s in pleasure.
Observe the dif .
ference between
% and U.
53 and %'^
h, h, \) and
6 and (S;
c and e.
D and 0.
G and 6;
e and c.
f and f.
& and i^
THE GERMAN ALPHABET.
laracters. i Name.
Sound.
*
3 i
3 i
hah
ee
yot
f k
u/l
8 J ell
?i{ m ^w
51 It .^/z
^ |1 I Mr
i
tR r I ^7v
<S f $ ! i^.rr
always aspirated befo- 3 voweis,
as in //at; sHent before con-
sonants, after t, betA^een
vowels, and when final.
long, like e in he; short, like /
in sk/n.
like y in ^et ; In words from .
French, like s in pleanire.
Observe the dif-
ference between
h, I), i) and
as in English.
9i and m.
3}UndS;
m and n?.
9? and ?fi.
like Eng. rwith strong guttural
roll ; formed by making the
tongue convex^ and check-
ing the breath by gently
pressing the middle of the
tongue against the roof of
the mouth.
before vowels, like 2 in .^one,
or s in daiJ-y ; before conson-
ants, and when final, like s in
ye-f/ but see fc^, ft, fp, below.
y IS used at the end of words,
otherwise f.
?)i and ^:
r and j.
f and f.
THE GEKMAN ALPHABET.
Characters.
Nnme.
Z i
U u
8 a
/t^y
Sound.
00
fow
vay
iks
ypsilofi
tset
as in Eng. ; t^ also like /,• ti in
foreign words, preceding an-
other vowel, like ise,
long, like ^^in hooV, short, like
00 in ioo\..
like Eng./in Germ, words; in
foreign words, like Eng. v.
like Eng. v, except after fc^ and
%, when pron. like Eng. w.
like ks, even when initial.
like the Germ, vowel i • or
like tt. *
like t$.
Observe the dit-
ference between
U and ST.
% and ^;
»/ b/ i ^.
J and r.
MODIFIED VOWELS (UMLAUTS).
Characters.
6 (Oc) ii
U(Uc) ii
Sound.
like the (^,erm. vowel e. (The forms 9(e etc
graph;i)""'' '^ '^'^^ ^^"' ^" '"°^-" -'^--
'^bu[ itth hJ" '"""'f'f ' """^^y ^^'^^ French .,.,
but with hps rounded and nearly closed.
nearly like French u; there is no corresponding,
sound m Eng. Pronounced with lips ounded
^nd pointed, as for whistling. '^ounaed
THE GERMAN ALPHABET.
Characters,
DOUBLE VOWELS.
Sound.
»a
aa
like long a (a in f^rm).
(Stt
ee
" " e (a " c^re).
Oo
00
" " (never like Eng. oo).
DIPHTHONGS.
Charactcr3.
m at
m ri
?(u au
*tt(«cu) au
Oftt cu
Sound.
like / in f/re.
like ou in h(7«r.
like oy in j^rj/.
like /V in b'Ad (not found at the beginning of
words); in the unaccented syls. of foreign
words, i and e are pronounced separately.
CONSON NTAL DIGRAPHS AND TRIGRAPHS.
Characters,
rfl
Sound.
after a, o, u, au, like cA in Scotch locA ,-
softer after d, e, i, ij, u, au, eu ; it does
not occur at the beginning, except in for-
eign words, where it is pronounced like /^
before a, o, u, and like final d) before e, i.
In B>ench words it has the sound of sA,
as m French; c^.§' when in one syll. =- x.
THE GERMAN ALPHABET.
Characters.
Sound.
m
ft
fi6
*
like Eng. r/C-,- when divided between two
lines, IS written f-f ; not found at begin-
ning. *
pronounce both p and f distinctly.
as in Eng. ; in foreign words only.
like s/i in Eng. ; but when the g is in a
distinct syll., pron. separately.
like soft s/i/> in Eng. at the beginning; other-
wise like sp.
like soft s/i^ in Eng. at the beginning; other-
wise like sf.
like ss- f5 replaces [f after long vowels in the
middle of a word, and always when final
Hence ^Juf^ (long u), gen. guje^; hut^clnh
(short u), gen. ^-(uffeg; and bei^en, bi§, ae.
mifen. Diphthongs are always followed by
^. Not found at the beginning.
like fs. It stands for 33. Not found at the
beginning.
I
EXAMPLES OF PKONUNCIATION.
EXAMPLES OF PRONUNCIATION.
Simple Vowels.
« long., ear, 6.U„,„; short ..f„U,W„„„,S„„„
in formative svlls foil h^r ^ ^
of „cr,a,„c„, „„■„,.,, «,,„,4 £;,;;,; ;;«-^y".
3ong:™,M>:,m,c;short:f,m,,„itH;tcn.
O ong.. Ja„ r„o,„ ^„(,„. ^^^^^^ ^^___^
«ong:^„,b„,«„u,; short: 3:«,,tte, bum., „;«•
?) long: ^^„am% %.^'r, short: 3)it,rte, ®,jfte'm
Double Vowels (all long).
««:§.«, «„(,etaat. I gc:mcc,I«r,S,et.
On : Soot, 2Koo«, Sm.
MoDiFrED Vowels (Umlauts).
«|ong: aiir,f«,„c,^rS„cn; short: ^iitte, fi3m,„e, fja,
O ong: 0(,J.„e,etrlime; short: (iinnte, ®iit,e iffnen
U^ong:PtU«r,ftM; short: §iitte,faac„,4„
9!
^i : 2«ot, i)oln, d)hin.
®i : mcin, ^citcr, hkihin.
-*« • v«*«*v, AOuMuit^ tauten.
Diphthongs (all long).
^n: ^cute, ncM, ?eutc.
3c : bre, ^icr, ticf (in somr
foreign words, pron
2mU),
wiMHHwiMaMiiMn,. . „
EXAMPLES OF PRONUNCIATION. 7
Simple Consonants.
^^^^H"/') ah,&xah,oh.
c soft (== /j) g^^^j^ (Teremonie, aicero.
^^^''^n^o diah,m,m.
<. (« ^// m French words) . (SJeuie, ©age, ^age.
6 mute 1 ^^^t' ^'*'' ^^"^^'^ ^"^^^^"'
( diatiil mum,
( (= ^// in French words) . . ^aroufie, ^ournat.
r ' • 1^*^^^/ murrcn, ^aar, etern,
. . ^ ®rbe, ^rebiger.
f initial and medial (== s in
^ ,. '^.''''^^ '^^"'^e. i-iefer, Sattel, -pdufer.
g f nal (= . in ye.) .... ^,,g^ ^.^^^ ^^^ ^^.^^^^ ^^^^^^^
i m foreign words before i
^'"'^^ nationaf, ^Patient.
j,,inGerm.words(=/). . t,on, «ater, ^Better.
in^foreign words(= z.) . . 9?ouem6er, biuibieren, 3rbt.o!at.
( (after fc^ and 3 = Eng. ...) . @cblt.efter, fc^n^er, atnei, ^luerf.
Ximtial(=^.) i-eryc^, ^eno^^on.
'''■)••. 3ierbe, ju, atran^ig, gorn.
r^n^ltr .tw :!/r-f ^- ^- th^r equivalents
binations,.o.of;M;^;-^;::rK^^^
« GENERAL REMARKS ON PRONUNCIATION.
Consonantal Digraphs and Trigraphs
initial (= ^) „,,
(-4' guttural) . . gj^i,,.,g^ gjj^^.^,^
* j "medial and final (guttural) | ^'^t Sor^ee, ^ot^, Su^ 33re,^
I in French worH. , - ... ./^!*'^' ''^\ ^''^''' '^^^^''
P\
in French words {=. s/i) .
(in same syll. = x)
W (= sh)
p initial (= s/ii softened) .
f^ initial (= s/ip softened) .
ff (preceding vowel short) .
G^arlatan, (f^icane.
2)a(^^, Dr^g, £at^g, STi^fe.
^ferb, ♦pfennig, p^feix.
®(^af, Sr^nee, (gj^iff; but
pron. g separately when
it belongs to a different
syll.,as:i)auo--d)en, ©an^=
cfien.
SKinb, fic^en, Sfengel, (5tu6e.
I>uren, (i^ruc^e, (S|iorn.
maffcn, fiiffcn, raffen, 2J?effe.
«
final (preced,„g vowe, ,o„g) 5«„ij, g„^, j^„^ fe^. fVuge.).
final (preceding vowel short) -J S'"'' fe^"- Saffes), Mog (gen
< 3Joffe.S),3Iu§(gen.3^Iuf[j8).
A. GENERAL REMARKS ON PRONUNCIATION
.he'vl!:, "r;;::":" f .^ '=°""' ^"^ ""-^ pronunciation of
especiallv .h't f „ ""P°"'"' P°'"* '" •>« attended to-
o;^:tcroft,:^^7:'«;::;tj---,aveasHad°;
from the teacher. ^ "' "'""'' """^t ''^ '«^™e«>
s.
I fen.
^tff; but
jJy when
different
Ltion of
led to J
i shade
k after
es.
<f^>r, or
iarnec*
QUANTITY OF VoVVELS. g
3. The only difficult consonant-sounds are:
r, with strong guttural roll.
fc initial, and medial before vowels, which is like s in
daijy, or z in ^one.
S final = ss in English.
1^ (and g final), which must be learned from the
teacher.
^.tJ^^ P'-<'"""ciation of the following consonants, though
-^t difficult, dwfers from the English pronunciation :
b final =J>.
c before d, e, t = fs.
h final = t.
g never like ^ in ^«-esture.
g final see above.
I = 7 m j-et.
^ ==/in Germ, words.
in == z', except after f d; and *.
3 = /«f.
I
5. There are no silent letters in German, except h before
onsonants after t (see below), and between vowels" thus e
m (Snake, Jtnabc must be heard.
B. QUANTITY OF VOWELS.
Long: Double vowels and diphthongs are always Ion?
Simple vowels are long before a single consonant, b fore^"
r "bXrndt^rV ' "^" ""' """" '' ' ~- '
the vowel short before a single consonant. ^ '' '""'^
nofeThli ?""t '°"°"''^ ''^ " """■'^'^ ^o"^""^"' (b«t see
svl !ll° ' '", ""'"''• ^"' »"''™='tive and terminal
be t f^ ' "''^ -""^^ ™*^'^ "'^f-^ "*' -nd all vowels
ro
ACCENTUATION.
•mooo -J „rtf,, -beside.'; Cm-I "rui,-- °V. ^'"f''!^''^! ^""X.
'I'aufi, 'pone'- (Bf„h .1, i .' "' ""' ' ^•'"■"' 'Easter';
.-Ho.i.,4 j^;-^^^^^^^^^^^^^
vowe>. accolding . Ije '^a^ll'^f;!'; rl"""'' "'"'»"'' =" "'* '-«
«.'^.t.t;\?e:!:::t:;:t:;rs's\Lr^^^^^
3- The vowel „ is always ulg bX" " "" "™"^' ^'"'"•
Exercise in- Quantitv of Vowels.
(Accent on (l„t ,yll. „( di„y;i,.,
Stalt, @taat «,„ «crt raiif ' <f . " 5 -'« ' ';""""' ®"""' ®«'t^'
««mme, «„«! " ' ^"^'' ^'"^'^ 'l^""- !>'»', fl«, ^eer,
C. ACCENTUATION.
The principal accent is on the ra^Ua/syU. i„ simole Germ
words, wliether primitive or derived '^
.erf- :Z.™" '■ ■'*^'-'"- ■" -" "-e .he principal accent „„ the
# ■.
ORTllOGKAPHY.
II
nt on the
3ut one:
of form
it, when
I -ie are
a. se|>a
u.!^r- '"'' '''-' '-'- ^-^^^^--' ^-"-^- sy„s.are always
2. In compound substantives, adjectives and verbs, the first component
generally has the principal accent; in other con.poun Is (prepositions ad
. verb.al conjunctions, etc.). generally the last conlponent ^P"^""^""^' ^^■
flc-f Jr '/er-""' '"'"' "' ""'" """^^'= ^''^ ""' ^"'^- ^«^-'
Exercises in Accentuation.
1. Simple words: Dh'lniiiimg, tiljrlidjfcit, (?)>(, J^infterniS autia fbnr
I:;;; s:r ''' ^""^' '^^^^^"'"' ^^^"''^' ^^^^'^^^^SS itj?:::
2. Compound words: %nmns, aiifflttjcil, Srimcublid tntofdfii «„t
„ ^; ^r''^"- ®"'*"'"'' 'f'™'''fl''>^' ?rofeffovn., lUflobif, Samitir ^„f(n,
religiot% ajJoinimcnt, nioiutmnttaf. / "i"Mu;ieieii,
D. ORTHOGRAPHY.
capt! irL'^'"^^^- ''-' ^"^°^^^"^^ --^^'^ - -^"- with
i_. Words beginning a paragraph or sentence (after a
period), and the first word of each line in poetry.
2. All substantives and words used as such, as: ber 2Betfe
the wise man ' ; ba^ Stcrbcn, ' dying,' etc. ' '
Note. -Substantives used as adverbs are not written wifh r.n'. i
as: movflciKS, al)eitbi\ wnttei. ^M^h capitals,
4- Ordinal numeral;, and pronouns in tlfl^-. - . . . ,
^« <^.o|e, .K.ede.c. the .L.^IJ/^J-^.S
T2
ADDITIONAL KliAlARKS.
the Fifth'; 3hrc m.mt. 'Her Majesty'; Seine ^urA
laudit,* His Serene Highness.' "^^^
• E. RECENT CHANCES IN ORTHOCRAPHY
f, -S, rit^r^r ^ " '"^ ^^^-"™ "^ -^'^-'»^'
I. in derivative sylls. ; .fUmifltum, IhmiiXm, etc.
^. after ( medial and final : ^m, Slat, tot, lucrj, etc.
3. before <i,pl,t],ong.s .• Jior, (o„or. X,\l, etc.
4. before short vowels : Jurm etc
the ^p-.se„. senior ....or, edition, tt ,e«, L";'-.:.^!:;,',;; -;',:;;
F. ADDITIONAL REMARKS.
I. The use of Italics being unknown in Gennan print an
emp as„ed word is printed with larger spaces between'th
letters, as: ,* {,„[,c m,r eincn So^„, <i have but .«. son '
plur'. StV'™'''" ™''''' "'™'' '"'' ^"''='"'' '''^"^'^^ «5»'"'
3. The modified ,„wels as capitals are always written «
C, U, not (as formerly) %c, Oe, lie. ■
octbe[d)en
^er written
capital, to
thening
etc.
neet with
r, ami in
rejected
rint, an
2en the
le son.'
33oot,
ten^.
THE GERMAN SCRIPT.
^
z^:^
^
,:,Z^
/^
.J?^^
SIMPLE LETTERS.
^'.^
::^>^
.^z^
/^^
^
^A^
^.
^,
/^^
x<i^^^
»4
//
THE GERMAN Sv.Rl|»T.
UMLAUTS.
^^^ ^:
^
DOUBLE VOWELS.
.-^/>
y
ty^o-ty
DIPHTHONGS.
/^ .x^r^^yj-
^ ^///> ^^
L/tA
fp
//
/'-^.^v>;^ /^-y>'^^
CONSONANTAL DIGRAPHS AND TRICRAPHS.
,.-^
THE GERMAN SCRlPt.
Observe carefully the Difference between i
CAPITALS.
'5
SMALL LETTERS.
• and *\ ^ fcnd ^y ^ and ^^ ^ and^^.
SPECIMEN OF GERMAN SCRIPT.*
and
I.
CO
>^-C>... ."rL.^ y^j^ ,:^; P y- 9
/-yy- .. ^;.-. ^^.^„ .jr..^.;,f
(f'
^
-»•*' -»^-^ r« >»•-/» r
/' /o'' <-^ (2^
^ ^^ r^ n*-
'^..- ^^'... .X;.^.r^ C^'^.. .^ . ^^^;^. /
6. '-if?^;.
y
* Ti
wuht^rofEriv?;:''' "^ ""''""" "' '"' ""■ ""••^^^ ■"-"=•'
i6
THE GERMAN SCRr?T.
-^•»--r-«-»-«. .»£_
<^
q£^J:L^
'■*--K^ •»-*-1
'<J^*^.^^^^ ^^ ^^^^
Remarks. I. Observe the ...../..//, of the small letters,
each other^" "^'""" " "'^^' ^^^ ^^"^^ - j-ned to
3. The strokes connecting the different letters should be
sTmt :r '?h"'- ^^ ^^""^"^"^ ^'^ ^^^^-^^ P-- "^th
same letter. This is particularly necessary where several
^/ s or,^/^^^'s follow, each other.
4. Never omit the hook over^^^, which alone distin-
guishes It from ^/^/.
5- The most difficult letters to make neatly are
^^.
V ^ ^ ^^^
GERMAN GRAMMAR.
' ■ I
PART FIRST.
1.
LESSON I.
Present Indicative: of Joien, to have.
Sing, id) Babe, I have
bu :;aft thou hast
er ^ai, he has
fic ^at, she has
eg \:}CLi, it has
P!ur. hjir ^rbctt, we have
'^\c 'ifaU, ye have
fic ^abcit, they have
^at)t ic^, have I ?
Inft bu, hast thou
^at er, has he
l^at fie, has she
l^at eg, has it
^aben iuir, have we
l^abt i^r, have ye
l^aben fie, have they
2. Rule i. The verb agrees with its subject in number
^nd^person, as : x6) ^abc, I have; er ^at he has ; fie ^abcn, they
2 Words used in a pariitive sense, i. e., indicating only a
par^ not the whole, of anything, have no article before them
in German, and the English some or any remains untrans-
lated, as:
Has he {any) bread ? I have {some) gold.
. 5at er ©rot? ^c^ ^abe ©olb.
VOCABULARV
bread, JBrot o^; ' silver, ©ilber ■
meat, ^(ctfc^ " water, 3Baffer,v.
gold, ©olb- wine, SSein ^ "
flour, 3Kebrr. and, unb ^
also, aud^
what, hjag?
but, abcr
milk, imi
'iv ■•>, or, ooey
yes, |a
no, nein
not, nid^t
17
i8
LESSON ir.
[§§3
EXERCISE I.
5 2" fie sir " ^-'tl 1- ''""' "''' f'^ ^'•^^» S
7. ®t ^at ®nffct, n6et id^ i,abe aSei,,, ^ "•
brefd ''s^h! """.k""^ '''""''■ ^- ^°' "'W ^he has some
w^e hlh^' / ^' *ater. and wine? 6. He has onlv
nr^ea. """• '^ ' ""^ ™"^ ^"^ «°-. i'"' I have
ORAL EXERCISE I
(Th= „„„„. «,„ .„,,,, ,^, ,„„„ ,^ ^^^ ^__^^^.^^^ ^^_^ ^^^
4. WaThlt :;;;•' ^- was habe„ wi.? 3. Was haben sie ?
LESSON II.
USE OF CASES. - DEFINITE ARTICLE.
Gefma^T °! '^' Cases. - Every declinable word in
vjerman ha.s two nunihpr« fK^ c- 7 ,
and in earh nn.-!i '"^^''' ^^^ Smgu/ar and the /'//.r^/,
subjective and answers the question w/w? or wAatt as •
W-A^ (or «,/«/) ,s there ? The boy (the booI<).
Oblctivf S'7"T°'"'' '° "" ^"8''»'^ l'»-ssive, or
-W or,;!:^;:' '—^'o '^equesaon ./.„; ./
bool< of the boy "^-''book? The boy^s book, .he
The />a/«v corresponds to the Indirect Object in Enrfi.h
Sriorr r"™ '" """""■ '-■^^ "*^ '- "''
ooy (dat.) the book, he gives it to the boy (dat.).
DEFINITE ARTICLE.
19
^ The Accusative corresponds to the Direct Object in Eng
lish, and answers the question whom ? or what ? as : IVhon
{what) do you see? I see the man (the house).
4. Declension of the Definite Article.
MASC.
Norn, ber
Gen. be§
Dat. bem **
Ace. ben
Singular.
FEM.
/bte
bcr
ber
bte
NEUTER.
bag
beg
bem
bag
Plural.
ALL GENDERS.
bie, the
ber, of the
ben, (to, for) the
bie, the
6. Rule i. The Definite Article, like every determinative
word, agrees with its substantive in Gender, Number and
Case, as: ber D^ann, 'the man' (masc); bic ^rau,' 'the
woman (fern.) ; bO0 i^inb, ' the child ' (neuter).
2. Articles and other determinative words should be re-
peated before each substantive in the singular, as : 5Der
3«ann unb bie ^rau ; ber Server unb ber ©c^uler.
Vocabulary.*
(N. B. Always learn the definite article with each German substantive.)
dog, ber §unb
boy, ber ^mhi
teacher, ber Sebrer
teachers, bie Sebver
scholar, pupil, bcr Sd)uler
scholars, pupils, bie ®c^uler
stick, bei- Stpcf
mother, bie 9)hitter
pen, feather, bie g=eber
flower, bie Slume
horse, bn§ ^ferb
book, bag 33uc^
girl, bag 5)iab*en
girls, bic gjt'abc^en
knife, bag 9J?effer
knives, bic 9}ief[er
who, lucr?
only, nur
The
being' „:^;;:::,r ™'"'"' '" *' '*«"* >"■"-- -^ »" v„cnb,„aH..,
I
I
20
LESSON III.
[§f6
EXERCISE II.
A 1 §at fie bag 33uc^ ober bic ^eber ? 2. Bit ^abcr ba«
^uc^, aber fie ^at bie ^eber. 3. 3)er Secret ^at bie 9Jie[fer ber
©c|)uler. 4. SDem Secret ber 9J?abc^en. 5. ^ie Sc^uter ^a6en
^? A"" '«. f ^'' ^"^'" "^^^ ^"^ ^^^^^' 6- ^^ ^«&e ben
6torf, bag Su4> unb bie ^eber ; aber ber ^nabe \)ai nur bag §8uc6
unb bie ^eber. ' ^
^. 1. Have we not the book of the mother? 2 We have
the book of the mother. 3. Have the pupils the dog and the
horse, or have they only the horse ? 4. They have the horse
but they have not the dog. 5. Has the mother of the girls
the flower ? 6. She has not the flower, but she has the book
of the girls, and they have the pen. 7. To the mother and
to the teacher.
ORAL EXERCISE II.
1. Was hat der Hund.? 2. Wer hat den Hund? 3 Wer
hatSchuler? 4. Was haben die Lehrer? 5. Was hat das
Madchen? 6. Hat er den Stock?
r i
LESSON III.
2)iefcr model. -imperfect indicative of ^o6cn, to have.
6. Declension of bicfer, this, that.
MASC.
Nom. biefcr
Gen. biefcg
Dat. biefcm
Ace. biefcn
FEM. NEUTER. ^LL GENDERS.
btefc bicfcg, this biefc, these
biefcr btefcg, of this biefcr, of these
biefcr biefcm, (to, for) this biefcn, (to, for) these
bicfc biefcg, this biefc, these
In the same way decline jener, that; jeber, every;
ItJcId&et, which ? t ^ y,
7]
IMPERFECT OF f^abiW.
21
Remark. — The accusative of declinable words differs
in form from the nominative in the masculine singular only.
7. Imperfect Indicative of ^atcn, to have.
Sing. \^ j^attc, I had
bu ^attpfl, thou hadst
er ^attc, he had
fie l()atte, she had
eg \j0^ii%, it had
Plur. n)iv flatten, we had
if)r ^attct, ye had
fie \jOXXl\\, they had
\jOAiz ic^, had I ?
^atteft bu, hadst thou
^oMt er, had he
^atte fie, had she
^atte eg, had it
\l0Xi^XK h)ir, had we
^attet tf)r, had ye
fatten fie, had they
brother, bcr 33ruber
garden, ber ^^xi^Xi
gardens, bic ©iirten
bone, ber ^noc^en
bones, bie ^nod^en
reader, ber Sefer
readers, bie Sefer
man, ber 5Jiann
son, ber (2o^n
father, ber SSater
Vocabulary.
A.
EXERCISE
1. ^c^ I)atte biefe ^eitung. 2.
woman, bte %xo.\x
sister, bie 6c^tt)efter
daughter, bie ^oc^ter
daughters, bie ^od;ter
newspaper, bie 3eitung
house, bag ^OiVA
two, 510 ei
three, brei
four, t)ier
fi I.
2)iefer §unb '^o^Wt ^noc^en.
3. 3)iefer ^^\|X^x ^at bier ed;iiler, aber jener Secret Ijat mir
brei. 4. 2)er ^ruber biefer grau \,oAi^ jeneg ^au§, unb er ^atte
mid) jene ®arten. 5. ^ebeg Sitd; f)at Sefer. 6. aBelc^eg S3uc^
fatten biefe 9}labd;en ? 7. ^er ©cbit^efter unb bem 33ruber.
B. 1. Which newspaper had the father of these girls?
2. The dog had these bones, but he had not this stick. 3.
Which stick has this man? ^1, Which man has this stick.?
5. 1 his father had three daughters, but that woman had only
22
LESSON IV.
The son of that woman had this dog and horse.
7. We
two, (j.
haHn^^i 1 r, ■'" ' ""•' i'""*"ogandhorse. 7 We
nad the book of those niinllB q t^ ^u l . ^^- /. vve
mose pupils. 8. To the brother of those girls.
ORAL EXERCISE III
1. Welches Madchen hatte die Zeitung? o Welches fi„Ph
hatlen die Madchf^n ? •? w i . , v\ eicnes ±5uch
4 Welch! F.1 '^.^^^^^^^^^edasJkichdieserSchuler?
4. Uelche Feder hatte dieser Knabe ? r> Welchen RnnH
hatte jener Mann .P 6. Was hat dieser LelJ? "'
LESSON IV.
mn MODEL-INDEFINITE ARTICLE.-PRESENT AND
IMPERFECT INDICATIVE OF fchi, to be.
«• Declension of vuitt, my.
Singular.
MASC.
Norn, jiietn
Gen. mcincS
Dat. meinrm
Ace. meincii
I'EM.
iitcine
incinrr
metncr
meine
Plural.
ALL GENDERS.
Jiteinc, my
meincr, of my
meincH,
meinc, nj^^ . r^.
NEUTER.
ineincl
ineiiicitt
Uitohj ^
9 The following words are declined like mein-^T'i^'^
fern 'his US'; iB,, ^her, its, their'; unfcr, ^our. ^^ ' '
The indefinite article ein, eiue, cin is also declined in the
same way, but has no plural, thus : ^^ciined m the
MASC. • pEM.
Norn, ein eine
Gen. einc^ einer
Dat. einem einer
Ace. einett eine
Remark. -r- This model differs from theTiefer mod.l . i
m having no distinctive ending in the l^tr^^. ""^
neuter, or in the ace. neuter. Thus. whn. t „! 1 '?'*
y
NEUTER,
ein
eineg
einem
'3
PRESENT AND IMPERFECT OF fetlt.
23
mam but biefcS iHtd), we say tin (fcin, mein, etc.) mann
and also tm (fein, etc.) ^^^d^.
10. Present and Imperfect Indicative of fcm, to be.
^'''■'''''^- ImperfJt.
Stng. Id) bin, I am ;^ j,,,^ j ^^^
bu bift, thou art bu tuarft, thou wast
^'^ ^^*' h^ ^s er Juar, he was
^'^ ^^ she is lie luar, she was
„ '•'^ '^*' 't 's e^ toav, it was
Plur. tDir finb, we are i,i, ,,,,,„^ ^, ^^^^^
i^r feib, ye are if,, j^,,,,^^ ^^^^
fte fmb, they are |ie jparen, they were
bin ic^, am I } etc. " ~ n^ar icb, was I .? etc.
11. Time before Place. Rule. -In German sen-
tences, expressions of time always precede those of//^r^, as :
This man was here to-day.
®iefer '^)\m\\ umr ^cutc !;icr.
12. Place of the Negative nif^t. Rule. - The nega-
tive nirfjt precedes that member of the sentence which it
negatives. Hence :
(gr Hmr geftern nid^t E)ier, he was not here yesterday.
13. Agreement of Pronouns. Rule. - Pronouns
agree in gender, number and person with the substantive
to which they refer, as :
^cr C>ut (masc.) ift ni(f)t c^roi er ift flein,
the hat is not large, // is small ; but
bie „Beitinu3 (fem.) ift nid)t grofj, fie i[t f(ein,
the newspaper is not large, it is small.
The English pronoun // must therefore be rendered by er
" "" ^'^'"'"'' '" " '"^sc. substantive, by fie when it refers to
vhen it refers to a neuter.
when
H
LESSON IV.
lUi^
14. Observe : In the sentence ♦ the boy is good,' ^oo^ is
2i predicative adjective.
Rule. — Predicative Adjectives are not declined.
16. A substantive following the verb to be is of course
subject, not object, and must therefore be put in the nominative,
and not in the accusative, as : ©r ift cin (not einen) 2Kann, he
is a man. -
Vocabulary.
friend, ber (^reunb
gentleman, ber §erv
bird, ber 3[.?ogeI
wagon, ) °
carriages, bte '^ixfi.zx^.
city, bic ©tabt
^^^^^' \ bal i^Ieib
garment, )
weather, bag ilBetter
old, alt
pretty, j^iibfc^
cold, fait
small, little, flein
tired, miibe
beautiful, fine, fd^5n
strong, ftarf
idle, trdge
warm, ioarm
windy, h)inbig
very, very much, fe^r
yesterday, ^e'ftern
pleasant, agreeable, angenefjm to-day, fjeute
great, large, big, tall, gro^ still, yet, noc^ (referring to time)
for, benn
■' If
■I
EXERCISE IV.
A. 1. din 3?ater unb fein ^inb finb je^t hier. 2. ©ne mtttcr
unb ibr ^inb luaren geftern ^ier. 3. mtm 33ruber \i<xi fein 5Buc^,
aber er Ejat ein 9}?effer. 4. Unfer 3=reunb trav ber Sefjrer biefer
ed)uler. 5. 3)iefe grau ift meine 6c^h)efter, unb fie ift auc^ bie
9Kutter biefer gjidbc^en. 6. Sir finb ftein, aber fie finb grof;.
7. Unfer 2ef>rer ift miibe, benn feine ©center iraren fe^r trage. 8.
Unfere Stabt ift fetjr fcbbn, aber fie ift nic^t fe^r gro^. 9. OJ^einem ,
SSater unb meiner ^utt<»i-
»7J
Declension; — 3na(er model.
*^
^. 1. I am the sister of those girls. 2. Where are my
booi<s and newspaper.? U. Our brother and his dog are big
and strong, but our sister and her bird are small and pretty
4. Which gentleman was here yesterday ? 5. The friend of
our brothers was here to-day, but he was not here yesterday
6. My sister had her book, but she had not her pen 7 Our
father and mother have still their carriage, but they have
no horse. 8. The weather was cold and windy, but it is
now warm and pleasant. 9. To my brother and sister.
ORAL EXERCISE IV.
1. Wo ist unsere Mutter? 2. Wann war sie hier? 3 Wer
war gestern hier .? 4. Was ist sein Vater.? 5. Wer ist die
Mutter dieser Schuler ? 6. Wer sind diese Madchen '
LESSON V.
DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES :-a»orcr MODEL, Q C^lC
OR -I, -m, -It, -r STEMS. A-^^v^^
16. Declension of bcr WlaUv, the painter. "'^'^'^1^^
Singular.
Nom. ber gjjaler, the painter
Gen. beg ^alerg, the painter's,
of the painter
Dat. bem m<x\ix, (to, for) the
painter
Ace. ben a«aler, the painter
^ Observe : The only changes are additional -l in the een
sing., and -n in the dat. pi.
17. In the same way are declined :
3
- Plural.
bie 3J?aIer, the painters
ber 3JJaIer, the painters',
of the painters
ben gjZalern, (to, for) the
painters
bie IValcr, the painters
26
LESSON V.
f»i.iT
1. Masc. and neuter substantives ending in -t\, -em, -ftl,
-er, and diminutives in -i^cil and -\t\\\ (these last being
always neuter).
2. Neuters beginning with ®e- and ending in -e, as : ba«
(^emcilbe, the painting.
3. Two feminines : bie ^J)?utter, the mother, and bic ^oc^ter,
the daughter.
4. 3)er ^dfe, the cheese.
{a) But many masculines with «, 0, U in the root, the two
feminines Gutter and Xocbtcv, and one neuter, biv5 .Sllofter,
'the convent,' take also Umlaut (modified vowel) in the
plural, as : —
Sing. N. D. A. ^^rubcr, o. ^^rubcvg ; Plur. n. g. a. 43rubev,
D. ':lkiiberii.
{b) Substantives in -\\ do not add n in the dat. plur., as:
Sing. N. D. A. ^mbdjen, o. ^Jccibc^enS ; Plur. n. g. d. a.
5liabd;en.
{c) In feminine substantives all cases are alike in the sing.
Hence, 9Jtuttev and 2:oc^ter are thus declined :
Sing. N.G.D.A. ay?utter; /V«r. n. g. a. Mtter, d. gjjiittern.
Sing. N.G.D.A. ^oc^ter; F/ur. n.g. a. %U}itx, d. 3:ocl^terii.
Further examples :
l^cr i^Dcjel, the bird : ^Vw^. n. d. a. 33DgeI, g. g^ogelg ; /'/«/-.
N.G.A. 3[Jogel, D. ^^ogeln.
Tcr ^aa,zx\, the carriage : 6"/«^o'. n. d. a. 2Bagen, g. JBageng-
P/io: N. G. D. A. SBagen. *
1^asJ ^en[ter, the window : Sing. n. d. a. ^enfter, g. ^enfterg;
Plur. N. G. a. ^enfter, d. Jenfterit.
Xa^ ©emalbe, the painting: Sing, n.d.a. ©emalbe, g.
©emdlbel ; Plur, n, g. a. ©emalbe, d. ©emcilben.
f
%
I
I
I8J
DECLENSION : — mala model.
2;
D,,/ine with Umlaut: bcr 58atcr, the father; bet Sc^mager,
the broth.r-.n-luw; bcr W\^\, the apple; bet ©arten the
garden ; bcr ^))\<^^Md. tlie cloak. '
take UmhT^^-'^K '"7^''' '''' °^ '^"^^^=^"^i-^« of this declensioa that
take Umlaut in the plur., see App. A.
Declme nnthout Umlaut: bcr Scbrcr, the teacher; bcr
^d;ulcr the^scholar; bcr .(blor, the eagle ; ba« -JJfoffor, the
b« AL.,",,^"""","' '"' ™'"""='' ^"- ^^-'"'"•' ""-■ winter;
oer ^jniel, the uncle. .
NoTK.-The prepositicn in i« contracted with the dat. sine niasc
and neut. of the def. art., when nt.t cn.phasized. thus: ,n .r im i n
ben, @ai-tn., contr. im Csnu-tc, ; i„ bcrn n.m, contr. \^Z^ '
18. Rule of Consthuctiom. - If the verb is in a simple
tense, the predicate adjective comes at the end.
\
Vocabulary.
tree, ber SBaum
fire, ba^ goiter
spring, bcr ^ruf)Iing
autumn, bcr ,s)erb[t
stove, bcr Ofeit
diligent, industrious, flcifjig
poor, arm
hot, F)ei^
ill, !ran!
rich, reid^
ripe, reif
weak, fc^irnc^
Satisfied, ) . . ,
contented, \ ^"^"'^^"
quickly, [c^^nca
not at all, gar nic^t
not yet, nod; iucf;t
with, init (gov. dat.)
in, in (gov. dat.)
whose, mefjeu?
EXERCISE, V.
Won, benn bnU aSetter it t»«in. s, ^ij ™,.tt»r b^^'-r »=-'',
2B
LESSON VI.
II
if
( »
I !
Ill
t§§ld
bicfe« Servers toarcn franf. 8. m mM meiner Stiic^ter finb
alt. 9. 35ic ©drten in biefer @tabt finb fef>r fc(>dn.
^.1. The father of this girl was my teacher. 2. Our
father and mother are old and weak. 3. The gardens of my
brother-in-law are very beautiful, but his carriages are not at
all beautiful. 4. My uncle is not at all satisfied with his
daughters. 5. These apples are not yet ripe. (}. The
teacher of these pupils was not very rich. 7. With the wings
of this bird. 8. The weather is hot in the summer, but it is
cold in the winter. 9. The eagle is a bird.
ORAL EXERCISE V.
1. Wann ist das Wetter kalt.;* 2. Mit welchen SchUlern
smd die Lehrer zufrieden ? 3. In wessen Haus sind die
trader dieses Madchens > 4. Wo waren sic im Herbst ? 5
Sind diese Madchen trage oder fleiszig ? 6. Ist die Blume
schon ?
LESSON VI.
PRESENT AND IMPERFECT OF tncrbcit, to become. - CON.
STRUCTION OF PRINCIPAL SENTENCES.
19. Present and Imperfect of
Present Indicative,
Sing. \6) hjerbe, I become
bu hJirft, thou becomest
er tt)irb, he becomes
Plur. \o\x iDcrbcii, we become
i^r h)erbet, ye become
tticrbcn, to become.
Present Subjunctive.
ic^ tDerbe
bu ircrbcft
cr iDprbe
h)ir hjerbcn
''ix toerbet
fie irevben
Lt
••I CONSTRUCTION OF PRINCIPAL SENTENCES. 29
Imperfect Indicative. Imperfect Subjunctive,
Stng. \^ hjurbf or njorb, I became ic^ tt)iirbe
bu iuurbcf* or tuavbft, thou becamest bu iDurbeft
er hjurbf or U)arb, he became er tuurbe
Plur. h)ir tmubcn, we became tpj^ jyijrben
\¥ iourbet, ye became . \^^ tourbct
fie hJurbcn, they became |ie toiirbcti
Observe : i. the persistent e in the subjunctive endings ;
2. the Umlaut in the imperfect subjunctive ;
3. the second form (Joarb, etc.) in the singular only of the
miperfect indicative.
20. Construction of Principal Sentences. — Place
OF Verb and Subject.
v^l'^^.'Z ^" ^""."^L"' '""^^"^^« containing a statement, the
verb IS the second idea in the sentence, as •
SUBJKCT. VKRB. .KKDICATK. SUBJECT. VERB. PKEDICATE.
f 6m ^ter. gr ift franf.
A am here. He is iH.
Obsi,:rv,: x. The verb is the second idea, not necessarily
the econd W, m the sentence. Thus the subject with 'I
attributes and enlargements constitutes but one idea, as
subject and attribute. veL. adv*erb.
^er^jater biefe^ 2el;rerg mor ^ier.
2 The svhject (or subjects) with attributes and enlarge
ments may come either in the first or in the third place af
SUBJECT. VERB. ..VERB. .,VERB. VERB. sub;eCT.'
'^^ bm ^,er; or: §ier bin \^^
3. ^\i^ predicate adjective is placed last, when
a simple tense, as
the verb is in
,'Uf\
y
/
j^'i
30
LESSON VI.
[§20.
! 1
I am satisfied with my daughters.
^^ ^i» init meincu loditcrn jufricbcn.
Remarks. — i. Any other member of the sentence may
occupy the first place, but in that case the subject is thrown
a//t'r the verb, which still occupies the second place. Thus;
ADV. PUKASE. VERB. SUBJECT. PREDICATE.
,^m ^yriibling fiub bic ©ortcii fc^ijn.
2. [n English, on the contrary, the subject precedes the
\crb, which is, in such cases, in the /"////v/ place, as :
ADV. PHRASE. SUBJECT. VERB. PREDICATE.
In the spring the gardens are beautiful.
3. This fixed position of the verb as the second idea i?i every
German principal sentence should never bejorgotten.
4. The conjunctions uub,, a6er, ober, bcimdo not count as
members of the sentence.
Vocabulary.
sleigh, ber Scfilittcn
thunder-storm, biv3 ©ctuittcr
attentive, aufmerffam
green, c^riiu
new, ncu
young, jimg
inattentive, uuaufinerffam
unpleasant, )
disagreeable, \
dissatisfied, unjufrieben
after, narfi (with dat.)
therefore, on that account,
bcybalO
never, nie
so, fo
why, Juavum ?
again, iuieber
well, iuot)I
EXERCISE VI.
A. 1. ^^a* bcm Wciuittcr muvbe Dtv5 SK^etter fc^^n unb tt)arm.
2. ©eftent iuurbcn mcinc ^l^hittcv unb ifire e^^ivefter franf, a6er
W finb fie iuof;I. 3. e in ^kter f)at ein ^m^ unb'einen
©at'icn \x\ui cv \)^\i auci; M^ixi^w unb 6daitten. 4. Tag better
w]
CONSTKUCT.ON OF PRINCIPAL SENTENCES.
31
^ambuvii 10. §ie,.„„rm ,„ .^,amburg, aber fie n,aten nie in
^. 1. The brother of these pupils became our teacher 2
Teachers often become dissatisKed with their pupils 3 !„
the sprmg our garden becomes beautiful. 4. Our brothers
m-law.were m I'aris; they are now in London. r>. This tree
becomes green very quickly. 6. The pupils of this teacher
became very attentive. 7. My daughter^ are not contented
wuhthetr cloaks. H. In the autumn (the)* apples become ripe. '
9^ rhe father of these girls becomes old and weak. 10. wfth
poor It Vh " T-- ' ' ; ^'^ "^-^"-"^ "^''- ''"' "« •'--
Th! , t .I "'^ ' " ' '*^-' • " '-^ '"8« =>"d strong. 13.
The cloaks of those g.rls were new, but now they are gettinsr
(say : become) old. -^ getimg
ORAL EXERCISE VI.
liires Onktls? ,i. Wann waren seine Brlider in Hamburg?
4. Wann werden die Apfel reif ? 5. Wird der Baum L
Sommer grun ? (i. Wann wird das Wetter kalt >
* Words in ( ) are omitted
are omitt^rl in r' , '" /'"^"'^' ^"* "°^ '" ^«™a" 5 ^ords in [ ]
are omitted m (.erman, but not in English.
32
LESSON VII.
[§§ai.
LESSON VII.
DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES :-So|n MODEL-
QUESTION ORDER.
21.
Declension of j ^^^ ®"S"/ ^^^ son;
< ber 0unb, the dog.
Plural.
bie ©o^ne, the sons
ber ©of)nc, the sons', of the
sons
ben <Sof)ncit, (to, for) the sons
bie ©of)ne, the sons
id) With Umlaut in the plural
Singular.
Norn, ber ©oFjn, the son
Gen, befg 2o()n(c)g, the son's,
of the son
Dat. bem eof)n(c), (to, for)
the son
Ace. ben So^n, the son
OasKRVE : I. The -u of the gen, and -c of dat. sing.
2. The Umlaut and -e of the plur.
3. The additional -u of the dat. plur.
4. The -c may be dropped in the dat. sing., and (except
after sibilants) in the gen sing, but is usually retained in
mono-syllables.
ib) Without Umlaut :
Singular. Plural.
Norn, bcr .t)unb, the dog bie §unbe, the dogs
Gen. bc^ A>unb(r)0, the dog's, ber ^unbc, the dogs', of the
of the dog dogs
Dat. bcm|)unb(c),tothedog ben ^unbcit, (to, for) the dogs
Ace. ben .^unb, the dog bie §unbc, the dogs
22. In this way are declined :
I. Most masculine monosyllables: generally add Umlaut
(V
i.
[§§ai-
•3]
CONSTRUCTION OF DIRECT QUESTIONS.
!
2. Masculines in -a* -ii* -in i„. .•
Umlaut. ^' 8/ -IlMg: MW-^r add
3. Many feminine monosyllables with a, M, or «u in the
root: ai«,ajs add Umlaut (for list, see App. ")
4. Substantives in -„i8 and -f,l : «.e„^ add Umlaut
=dH if r^ "'"'"■ '"°"°^>'»»bles (all those in -r) • „„„,
add Umlaut, except Jloft, gfior, »„ot (SBbte or 8„ote) AprE^
6. Foreign masculines, with accent on last syll. in -„r
' laut (for exceptions, see App. D.)
Further ex.Tmples:
5Die $oiii), the hand : &W n g d a fi„»t, . m
(Observe again . Feminines have all case, of ,he sing, alike.)
Ta« Segraeni«, the burial, funeral- .%•„»■ m . m -t ■
G. »egra6niffc«, o. ^S^S^nm %uf7o\ I'^'tT'
(Observe ,Ke douMng of the fi„a, -, when a termination U added.,
Set aiionat, the month : Smjr. n a Wn„„t r- m J,
23. CONSTRUCTION OF DIRECT QUESTIONS.
J Examples :
••Has the dog meat.' a. Which man is'ou,
«at ber§„„b (J.eifc^? SBdc^e. 2«a„„ ^ alt?
34
LESiSON VII.
[§23
(■■\^
* * -12 8
3. Who is in the garden? 5. What has the teacher ?
aBer ift in bcni &avtm ? )Ba^ ijat ber Mjx^v ?
i 2 9 1 2' 8
4. ^^'here is my father ? 6. When was the pupil here ?
^ii^D ift meinmter? 4Bann ioar ber e#Ier i;ier?
Observe from these examples :
1. That the construction of Direct Interrogative Sentences
is exactly the same in German as in English, as far as the
position of Verb and Subject is concerned.
2. That in both languages the question-word always begins
the sentence.
Vocabulary.
(An Asterisk (*) after a word signifies that the plural has Umlaut.)
Tuesday, 3)icne'tag marsh, swamp, ber Bimpf*
enemy, bcv ^"^-einb day, bcv Jag
finger, ber ;>-ingev -^ carpet, ber kip\iid)
Friday, gn-ei'tag ^ curtain, ber 3^^or'6ang *
foot, ber ^-uj3* " week, bie 'Eod)^ '
general, ber &mcvaV room, ba^3 Siiinner
young man, youth, ber Siingaing thirty, bvei^ig
emperor, ber SM\cv five, fiiuf
acquirements, bie ^euntniffe long, lang
Iff
king, ber Monig Vv
Wednesday, ber 9J?itt'luocf)
Monday, ber 9J?Dn'tiig
officer (military) ber Dffi^ier'
town, city, bic ©tabt*^
Sunday, ber Sonn'tag
Saturday, j ^^-'I'^onn'abenb,
( or Sam»'tag
new, neu
magnificent, prcic^tig
red, rot
seven, fieben
white, ivet^
where, hjo?
twelve, ^toolf
[§23
acher ?
l;rei- ?
3il here ?
iiler i)kx'^
sentences
Far as the
ys begins
Imlaut.)
§83] CONSTRUCTION OF DIRECT QUESTIONS. • 35
EXERCISE VII.
A. 1. ©in ^abr Ijat stoolf monaU unb in jebem Wlomt finb
brei^ig ^ragc. 2. ®ie ^:)dnt)e biefer MaMjcn finb Kein. 3. 3)ie
©arten m bicfcn Stdbtcn tuurben tm gritf;(tno f*on. 4. ®ie
Sage [inb im ^omnicr laiig, aUv im 2Bintcr lucrbcn fie furg unb
fait. 5. ®ie d)lutUx meinc^3 Ju-eunbc^ it)ar gcftcrn in ber etabt
6. 2)ie ^enntniff e be^ 2ef)rcr^5 finb qxo^. 7. 2)te ^DrF)dnoe bicfe^i
Bimmerg fmb tt)ciJ3, abcr bic 2ep|3ic^e finb rot. 8. ®ie ©cBiydaer
biefer Dffigicre finb ©enerale.
B. 1. The horses and dogs of this young man are hand-
some. 2. We have two feet and two hands, and each hand
has five fingers. 3. The emperor and the king were enemies
but now they are friends. 4. These trees are old, but they
are still beautiful. 5. The curtains and carpets in this room
are new and magnificent. 6. Every week has seven days-
Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday
Saturday. 7. The sons are tall, but the father is not quite
so tali. 8. The funeral of the king was magnificent. 9. My
father has two apple-trees in his garden. 10. Where are the
frogs } In the spring they are in the marshes.
ORAL EXERCISE VII.
1. Wo waren die Briider seiner Mutter gestern ? 2. Sind
die Vorhange weisz oder rot? .">. Was hat sein Vater im
Ganen? 4. Wer war gestern in der Stadt.? 5. Wessen
•Schwager sind Offiziere ? 6. Welche sind die Taee der
Woche? ^
36
LESSON VIII.
i§*4
LESSON VIII.
CONJUGATION OF Wfi to have. - rlacE OF
PARTICIPLE AND INFINITIVE-
Paradigm of ^alr^ ^ have.
Principal Parts.
Pres. Infin. }^ahtn IMPF. iNDic. l^atit Past Part, ^^m
24.
Indicative.
ic^. f)aht, I have
bu ^aft thou hast
er f)ai, he has
h)ir f)ahc\\, we have
i^r i)ahi, ye have
fie l^abcn, — ey have
ic^ ^attc, I had
bu ijatk^t, thou hadst
erratic, he had
h)ir f>attcil, we had
t^r Ijattct ye had
fie fatten, they had
I have had, etc.
ic^ ^a6e
bu ^aft
er f)at
h)ir ^aben
i^r f)aht
fie baben
Presi;nt. Subjunctive.
id; f)aht, I (may) have, etc.
bu i^abcfi
er f)aht
U)ir ^bcn
i^r ^abct
fie I;abctt
Imperfect.
id) f)attc, I had (might have),
bu ^iitteft [etc.
er ^fitte
h)ir fatten
i^r i)atUt
fie {;otteiT
Perfect.
(Pres. of iiaben -f. P. part.)
^ gel^afit
I (may) have had, etc.
ic^ f)aU
bu ^abeft
er l)ahi
h)ir f)ahtn
i^r ^abet
fxe i;aben
geJoM
9a4j
Indicative.
I had had, etc.
bu i)atU^t
er f)aiU
hjir fatten
fie fatten
Pluperfect.
(Imperf. of ^oben + P. Part.)
3;
Subjunctive.
I had (might have) had, etc
^Qt^aht
bu ^atteft
cr l^dtte
Wiv fatten
fie fatten
Future.
(Pres. of tocrben + infin. of ijaben )
I shall have, etc. i shall have, etc.
ge^altt
i^ merbe
bu tDirft
er hjirb
toirhjerben
i^r toerbet
fie toerben
^a^en
' ^afien
I shall have had, etc
tc^ tperbc
bu n)irft
er h)irb
h)ir h)erben
i^r toerbet
fie toerben
Simple.
(tmpf. Subj. of hjerben -j- Infin
of ^oben.)
I should have, etc.
buh>firbeft r"^^^^
i(^ toerbe
bu hjcrbeft
er h)crbe
toirlDerben
i^r tuerbet
fie tuerben
Future Perfect.
(Future of ^abcii -f- P. Part.)
I shall have had, etc.
id) hjerbe
bu n^erbeft
er hjcrbc
h)irtt)erben r^^^M^Un
i^x hjerbet
fie hjerben
Conditional.
Compound.
(Simple Cond. of \)aben + Past
• Part.)
I should have had, etc.
Bc^aat ^aBen
ic^ ttJiirbe > *• ti «. *
buh>UrbeftP'*'»*^*«'««
3*-
LESSON VIIL
f§§ is-
^abtn
er lt)urbe
it>ir toitrben
i^r njiirbet
fie iuiirben
Imperative.
f)a6c (bu), have (thou)
l)aht (ibr), have (ye)
Conditional.
1
gc^Qbt l^o6en
er.umrbe
h)ir ipuvben
t^rjuiirbet f
fie luurben J
liifinitive.
(ju) rjnben, (to) have
8c5n6t(3u)r;aben,(to)hav6
had
Participles.
Pres. ^abenb, having p.^,, gcbabt had.
25. Use of Auxiliaries of Tense — r ftni,.^ f
the nerfpof f«.,. r i, cube. — i. .pahttl forms
Perfect of that verb ^ "' "* ''"^ '"^ '°"" '^e
P.u?ert^t:/:Hltter + "'^^^*-°^--^
^J. aB«l.cn forms the Future and Simple Conditional
Fu?ure'''"'"* °' tt^'bc + Infin. of any verb form the
JsimX^o„^,^La;:^^^'" + '"«"• °^ -^ -- ^°™
3. The Future of hnbcn 4- p Pq-.. ^r
^ J . , , . , vii'-'^ii -t" i". i^art. of any verb Tnot con.
jugated with fein) form the Future Perfect
The Simple Conditional of F,a6en + P. Part of anv
verl. (not conjugated with fein) for. the^Compound CoT
4. edn replaces ^aben in the Pe>-fect Tenses of m.n ,
Intransitive Verbs rs^^^ s . ^ r^ "^^">^
is come ' ^ ^^'^ Compare the English 'He
^ CONSTRUCTION OF COMPOUND TENSES.
39
26.
Construction of Compound Tenses. — Place
OF Participle and Infinitive.
J^u/e of Construction, - In every principal sentence the
Participle and Infinitive come at the end; but if both be
present, the Participle precedes the Infinitive, which is always
lasij as !
1
SUBJECT.
{Engl) My teacher
1
SUDJECT.
{Germ.) Warn Scf)rer
1 2
SUBJECT. VERB.
{Engl.) We shall
8 8
VERB. PART,
has had
2 8
VERB. OBJECT
8
INFIN.
have
4
OBJECT.
money.
4
PART.
gc^a6t.
4
OBJECT.
a storm.
SUBJECT.
{Germ.) 2Bir
2
VERB.
8 4
OBJECT. INFIN.
hjerben einen ®turm ^aficii.
* 2 8 4 6
SUBJECT. VERB. INFIN. PART. OBJECT.
{Engl.) The beggars would have had no shoes.
* 3 8 4 6
{Germ.) 2)te Settler h)iirben !eiue ©c^ui^e gc^olit ^aficii.
Remember : In compound tenses, the auxiliary is the
verb, and occupies the second place in a principal sen-
tence (see § 20, Rule i, above).
Vocabulary.
evening, ber Sl'benb money, ba§ ©elb
beggar, ber S3ettrer guest, ber ©aft*
holiday, ber gei'ertag harbour, ber §afen *
fish, ber ^if^ gio^,^ ^^^ ^anb'fc^u^
AJ5«Jv, tU JVIUU74 ^
, tlv y luu/t
fox, ber %\x^i
basket, ber i{or6 *
nut,
^h 5Ru^'
40
tESSON Vltl.
m^*
\
out of, au^ (gov. dat.)
to become of, au^ . . . feerben
poor, arm
bad, fc^lcc^t
to-morrow, moxQcn
the day after to-morrow, u'ber.
morgcn
much, biel
already, fc^on
when, loann j
r
V.
to be right, Jiec^t ^abni
sailing-ship, ba^ ee'gelfc^iff
chair, ber ©tu^l*
storm, ber Sturm *
stocking, ber etrum^f*
shoe, ber 6d;u^
table, ber Ziid)
animal, bag iier
to be wrong, Un'recT^t ^abcn
, pleasure, bag 3[5ergniigen
wolf, ber3Bolf*
EXERCISE VIII.
^. 1. ^c^ ^aBe M ®elb gel;abt, aber je^t bin icb arm 2
^te » t.crben im ^erbft reif. 3. 41 ber l^abe ein';
3:tf(J «nb ^tiif,Ic mfeinem3immerf,a6eu? 4. ^bre Zbf^^^^^^^^^
t^urben fd^lec^t, benn fie n>aren fc^on alt. 5. Sr^ ?£
^reunbe ju ^aben. 6. ^a^ tvnxh, a«g bem So^ne beg iZ2
T ^f -«c^ Se^- ^. Sc^ n,erbe ^einbe unb aul ^reunbe abe„
8. ®ie ©a te tn unferer ©tabt murben muoe, benn bag LtUx
mx fe^r ^a^. 9. a^erben t.ir ^ep^ic^e unb ^orr;ange in unftm
3tmmer ^aben? 10. (£r batte ^reunbe ge^t. 11. eie Trben
tn btefem Sa^ve biel 3?ergnugen ge^abt ^aben. U. ^ie Se
eg 5?omgg aben ^ferbe unb Sagen, aber bie 3:oc^ter gl3et
te baben fetne ©c^u^e unb feine etriim^fe. 13. 2Bir batten
^ec^t gebabt, aber er ^atte Un^ ^t ge^abt. 14. m meinen
^reunben ^abe ic^ biel 3]ergnugen ge^abt. 15. llnfm ^Z e
toetben ge^ern .iel ^ergnugen ge^abt ^aben, bemba 2Beft rl
Won unb Warn. ^"«i iwt
thi'^; I'J^^- ''"'"P'l'P^ "« '" *e harbour. 2. We had
thirey fishes ,„ ou. baskets. 3. He would have friends. 4
The evening was fine, but the weather became cold. 6 We
have had two storms. 6. Where are our guests ? Thevbecan,.
urea ana are now in the garden. 7. To-morrow we shall have
lat.)
. . . hjerben
•«J
f^ARADlGM OF lobCH.
rrow, u'ber«
0.
^ arm. 2.
nabe einen
panbf(f;uf;e
rtng*;ne^m,
^ Se^rerg ?
mbe ^abcn.
>a^ SBetter
in unferm
:ie toerben
Die Sol^nc
beg 33ett.:
Bir l^atten
'it meincn
e O'reimbc
Setter Wax
We had
;nds. 4.
5. We
' became
lall have
4t
a holiday, for it is Saturday. 8. We were in fh. ^
yesterday, and the trees are already green 9 Wh ,?"'r
had? He has had apples and nuts To n i ' ^'
fcxes are animals. ^^ ^''^'' ^^^^^^^ ^n^
ORAL EXERCISE VIII
1. Wer hatte Recht unci „er hatte Unrecht ? 9 W
Waru„,wurden die G..e „,«,eP «. Welehe Oeilld: "sind
LESSON IX.
PREPOSITIONS WITH ACCUSATIVE ONLY.
27. The stem of a verb is whnf ;c i..f^ i
.ion of .he Present Infi^liH : . , or- Ht'd^ T'""
f>ab-c„, stem |j„(,;l„M„, stem fW ^ '^'''''' "' =
Note.- Weak verbs are also called J,e,ou,ar or Modern.
31.
pREs. Infin. lobcn
Paradigm of Tofifn, to praise,
i^riucipal Pa.-ts.
Impf. Indic,
lobtt Past Part. gero6*
i:H A
4^
indicative.
LESSON IX.
Present.
ris»
Subjunotiv*.
tcf) lobe, I praise (am praising, id; lobe, I (may) praise
do praise)
bu Ii?b(e)ft thou praisest, etc.
er Iob(c)t he praises
tyir lobcil, we praise
ibr lob(t)t, ye praise
fie Irbcn, they praise
bu lobcft thou (mayesti praise
er lobe, he (may) praise
toir lobtn, we (may) praise
i^r lobct, ye (may) praise
fie lobctt, they (may) praise
Imperfect.
(Same form for both moods.)
id; lohit, I praised (was praising, etc.)
bu (obtcjl, thou praisedst
er lobtc, he praised
h)ir loblcn, we praised
ibr Mitt, ye praised
fie lobtrn, they praised
Perfect.
( Pres. of l)abfii -f- P. Part of loben.)
ic^ f)aU gcfolit I have praised (been ic^ ^abc acloH
praising)
bu baft gelobt, thou hast praised, etc. bu ^abeft gelobt, 2c.
Pluperfect.
(Imperf. of babcn + P. Part, foben.)
ic^ i)atU gcJoat, I had praised (been ic^ f^dtU atioht ic
praising), etc. ' ' .
Future.
(Present of tPCrftctt + Infin. of lobcn.)
id^ trerbe (okn, I shall praise (be ic^ toerbe Uhtn
praising)
bu n?irft lohn, thou wilt praise, etc. bu h?erbeft loben, k.
§31]
HAKADIGM OF loben
43
Subjunctive.
Indicative.
Future Perfect.
i Future o{ Ontn, + P. Part, of roben.)
tc^ t»crbe flcrolit babcn, I shall have irf, h,. ^ , r
praised . '^^ ^^^^^ Q^^obt f)aben
biiiuirftnclobtbabcn, thou wilt have
praised, etc.
o„,„ Conditional.
Simple
I'll iDcrbeft gelobt
^a6en, 2c.
Compound.
' Simple Cond. of (jabcii + P. part.
of lobcii.)
irf' tmirbe ncfoM haOcii, I should
have praised, etc.
Infinitive.
W lohm, (to) praise. *
i^fioht Uu) babm, (to) have
praised
(Impf. Subj. of nm-bcn -f- infin.
of (Ollfll.)
. icb iDiirbc (ofini, 1 should
praise(be praising) etc.
Imperative.
Ipbc (bu), praise (thou)
loOc cr, let him praise
lobm iDir, let us praise
fobt(if)r), praise (ye,
loben fio, let tlu in praise
zj , r ^ Participles.
^^■c's. (obcnb, praising n^,. . ,,
j^ ^ '5 y rt-j-A {jelobt praised
the foHoX Zns ' ites T?r rT'' '^ ^'^ terminations of
'• Note HRain the persistent c of the Pres. Subj
in Gef::,'::';C''""" '°™^ °' "><= -^^ •-- '° "^ avoided
praise
'praise T p^i
I do praise )
I am
praisino-
id) Tobe
?)
)
am I praising.? [- lobe ic^ ?
do I praise .?
I
44
LESSON IX.
(he praised not) ) j . . (praised he not?) ) _ ,
he was not praising [ ''j''' was he not praising? ^ ^'^^f
he did not praise ) ^''^ did he not praise ? ) "^"^t?
I have been praising, etc., ic^ babe gelobt, etc. •
Had I been praising? l^atU id) gelobt?,
4. The only true Imperative forms are those of the 2. sing,
and 2. pkir., robe, (obt. For the other persons, tlie pres. subj.
is used, as : lobe er, let him praise ; loben iuir, let us praise ;
loben fie, let them praise; — the verb preceding the pronoun!
Construction of Dependent Sentences.
32. The Verb in a Dependent Sentence comes /asf, asr
^d) olaube, ba^ er ®elb f^ai,
^ I believe that he has money.
Remember: that the auxiliary is the verb in compound
tenses.
33. In compound tenses the Participle and Infinitive
immediately precede the verb ; if both be piesent, the Parti-
ciple precedes, as in principal sentences, thus :
'^d) glaube, baj3 cr @elb ge^olit ^at,
I believe, that he has /lad money.
^rf; o^iawU, baB er 0elb ^akn toirb,
I believe that he will /ia7'e money.
^cf) Olaube, baf^ er ©elb gc^nlit fiaben irirb,
I believe that he will have //^^ money.
Note. -The place of the Subject, in a Dependent Sentence, is
usually the same as in English.
34. Prepositions governing the Accusative only.
»i^, butc^, ffif, gcgcit, ot)m, iim, hiibcr.
W8, (i) till, until (r/me), as: I shall not come until to-
morrow {U§ inorgcn).
34J PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE. 45
(2) up to as far as {place), as • He travelled with us
as far as (6i0) Montreal.
. ^"'\^'^^, '"' "^ '''' ^^"--^^^ ^^^ ^-- (^-di
fiir, for; as: That is for my friend (f«r meinen ^reunb)-
the scissors are not a toy for children Tfiir i!inber). '
gCBClt towards, against (not necessarily denoting hos-
t^l'ty), as: The enemy advanced towards (or
against) the bridge (pcgcn bie 53rucfe).
»!inc,^without ; as : We cannot travel without money (o^ne
urn, (I) around about; as: We drove around the town
(urn bie etabt).
(2) at about (/.W), as: He came at four o'clock
(m Uter m;r); it happened at (or about)
Christmas (nm aBc{f)narf;tcn). •
toibcr against (.//..///.;, ,,,smj% as : He swam against
the stre.™ (imbcr bcu Strom); the soldiers were fighting
against the enemy (tolhn h,n ^einb). ^
.ithTe"eu;e?of';h^"' '^"'/"^ '^^^ ^^^"^-"^ -"^-^ed
the Neuter of the unemphasized Definite Article, thus:
burd; ba^ = burrfjg (burrf/^)
far ba§ ^ f jirg (^^jy,^)
umbas; ^ um^ (um'g)
believe, nlaubcn
^ope, l;offcn
buy, faufen
laugh, racf;cn
live, leBen
learn, lemen
Vocabulary.
love, HeBen
make, do, madden
say, fagen
send, f^tcfen
play, fpiefen
sell, ucrfaufcn
46
LESSON IX.
[§§34-
'V
weep, cry, iDeincn
bishop, bcr 5i3rfd)of*
German, Deutfcf)
servant, bcr Wiener
industry, diliij;ence, ber J^Icifj
youn^riady, Miss,bcvJ (3-rduIein
cardinal, bcr ^tarbtnal
noise, ber Sdrm
Latin, ba^ Satetn
palace, bcr ^|Ja(n'ft*
pope, bcr ^j:^avft *
Idiom : to take a walk,
NoTic. — A past tense after mciui
place, square, ber ^(a^ "*
ring, ber Siing
walk, bere^ajier'gang*
time, bie ^ctt
good, kind, gut
merry, merrily, luftig
sad, traurig
that (conj.), ba^
because, it)ei(
if, iucnn
why, Junrum' ?
eiucn Spajicr.inng madjeit.
('if') is put in the subj. mood.
EXERCISE IX.
A. 1 . '3^tc 5larbuia(e uiib i^ifcbofe luaren geftern im ^alafie
be« %a)^\k^: )i. T}tv3 Js-raulcin luirb bicfe 9itnge faufen, benn fie
fmbjcbon. 3. I^er m<\kx luihbe bicfc^ (>5cnialbc ntcfit iicrfaufen.
4. ;V(; )inlrbc bicfcit ^){ing faufen, ioeun \(h retell uuirc. 5. ^^ai cr
c^ flcglnubt? ^r bat c^3 gcgtaubt, iyeif fctit ^iVater c^5 gefagt \^at
6. Tie ecfniler hah^n ind gdrnt goinicM. 7. SBir loBen ben
^iungling, lucil cr flcifjig ift. 8. ier .ftoiug iuirb feine Gene*
rale gcgcn ben iycinb [ttncfcn. 9. 9J?cine @c(noeftcr tuirb .f^anb=
fdf;ulie fnufcn, benn ihrc ."ganbfrfuihe fiub fcT/ei^t. 10. mx Mrben
rjciitc cincn evnstcvgang Hxdj bie ©tabt inc d;en, it?cnn ba^3©etter
fc(um luare. 11. 3io tuiirbcn aiicf) cincn 3pn^iergang gemac
ImOen, U^nn fie ^cit gcBabt Uiv^y, V2, Sie iuivb fagcn, bafj id;
))k<:\}i ()aOc. 13. ^dj I;a6e iinmc gcBofft, bafj cr rernen luiirbe.
It. 3ie licH ibrcn ^i^atcr nnb ifuc ^JDhitter, benn fie finb gut. 15.
er iuuvbc ba^=. Wcmalbe nicbt gclobt IniDcn, benn e^ hjarnicT^t fc^on.
B. ]. What were they doing yesterday.? They were playing
in the garden. 2. This gentleman will praise his servants,
for they are industrious. 3. We have taken a walk about
Ml
ENDINGS OF WEAK VERBS.
47
^e town. 4, The squares in those cities are very fine 5
Where were the daughters of the officers > They were living
m a convent. ,, Without industry we shall not'learn ™uch
7. Tl e boy was play.ng with the dog. 8. The gentleman has
sold h.s horses and carriages. 9. What are thf young ladfes
do,„g „ow.» U, Why was she crying., She 'vas'crjt.
re ::;: rr ; , 'uj'"' ^^ '^"s'™^ "^^ '^e
are merry 12. We shall have learned much in a week. 1.3
I am laughmg because the child is playing so merrily. U
Wb' ^15 W r"™f ''"■""'' '°-""'"°" - ^half learn
beggars. ^"^ ' '''"'' '"^ ''°*'"S» '- "'^
ORAL EXERCISE IX.
L Weshalbhatsiegelacht? 2. Wer machte so viel Larm ?
Was hat die Frau gekauft ? 5. ^Veshalb hat sefne Schwester
Handschuhe gekauft ? .. Was werden wir n^orgen macl n
LESSON X.
WEAK VERBS (continued). DECLENSION OF
— ^Otf MODEL, OR PLURAL IN
3?x. Endings of Weak Verbs in Simpl
Present
Imperfect.
Ind. andSuhj,
-(c)tc
-(c)tcft
-(c)tc
— (c)tcii
~(t)kt
— (e)tcn
SUBSTANTIVES :
-cr.
E Tenses.
Imperative.
•Sm^, 2. — e
/^/t/r. 2. —(t)i
Infinitive.
~m
Participles.
Pres. ^tnh
Past. 0e~(c)t
48
LESSON X.
mss^
Imperative.
J'/ur. 2. rebct (i^r)
Remarks. — i. Observe the following endings :
(a) Final -t of the 3. sing, occurs on/y in the Pres. Indie.
(/^) The 2. sing, has -ft except in the Imperative.
(c) The 2. plur. has -t throughout.
2. Verb-Stems in -b or -i (t^), or in -m or -n preceded by
another consonant, retain -c throughout a/^er the stem, as :
rciipn, to speak.
Imperfect.
Sing. 1. id) rebcte
2. bu rebcteft
etc.
Thus : arbeiten, to work : id) avbeitcte ; atmen, to breathe •
ou ntmc|t ; regnen, to rain : e§ regnct.
3. Verb-Stems in a sibilant (§, f,^, g, y, j) return -e in the
2. smg. Pres. Ind. and Subj. only, as :
tanjen, to dance : bu tangcft ; reifen/to travel : bu reifcft.
4. Verb-Stems in -cl and -tv drop e of the stem before
termmations in -c (i. e. in i. sing. Pres. Ind., i. and 3. sing.
Pres. Subj., and 2. sing. Imper.), and, excepf in the Subjunc
tive, never msert e after ( or n, as :
Pres. Ind.
Sing. 2. bu rebeft
3. er rebct
Phir. 2. ibr rebct
Pres. Ind.
id) tabic
bu tabclft
er tabcit
iuiv tabcin
\\}x tabclft
fie tabctn
tobcfn, to blame.
Pres. Subj.
tabic
tablcft
tabic
tnblcn
tablet
Imperfect.
id^ tabclte, etc.
Imperative.
tabic
tabcit
P. Part.
getabcit
tablcn ^^^
S. Foreign verbs in -{crcu (-trctt) do not take 7h7prefi<
OC- in the P. Part., as : ftub-ieren, to study : P. Part, ftubtcri
[f§35^
37]
DECLENSION : 2:)orf MODEL.
49
(not^gHubiert); bom6arbieren, to bombard: P. Pan. 6om=
6. Verbs with the prefixes 6c- cr- rmi. .„*
jer-also omit the prefix at-n\he'pL''^t'T'
P- Part. Jca^it; «„W,pe„4 berften^.t '•' "^ '"'^^""'
36.
Declension of ii0j 3)orf, the village.
Singular.
Nom. bag 2)Drf, the village
Gen. beg ®orf(e)g, of the
village
Dat. bent ®Drf(e), (to, for)
the village
Ace. bag Sorf, the village
Plural.
bie ^ijrfcr, the villages
ber 3)iirfcr, of the villages
ben 3:)i)rfcrn, (to, for) the
villages
bie ©orfcr, the villages
Dativ^'""' -er of the Piural, with the additional -„ of the
37. In this way are declined :
- Most neuter monosyllables (exceptions in App.E )
2. bubstantives ending in ~i{\))\m.
3. Pive neuters with prefix @e-, viz. :
bag ©emac^, the apartment bag rsi.f^..nff .1,
W. «t, the temper, dis. SS^t^^t
to^ O^Wrec^t, the sex ^ ° ®'f'''^'' ^^^ « '^4)
4- Two foreign neiife*-'! -J- . v.=, m ■ ,
ba^ §ofrita. (or Spitaa the h^pi^:, ^'''"""'' *^ "^™^'"'
i
II rii'
V
50
LESSON X.
f§37
5. The following nine masculines :
ber mUw\d% the villain bcv 9ianb, the edge, margin
bcr ©cift, the spirit
bcr ©ott, the God
bcr 2c\h, the body
bcr 93iann, the man,
husband (Lat. 77>)
ber ^ormunb, tiie guardian
ber Salb, the forest
bcr Ul^iirm, the worm
(also Torn, Crt ; see App.
E.)
Further examples (Sing, like 2ol;n) :
®ag Scl)Iof5, the castle, palace: /"/ur. n.g.a. ecftliiffer
D. Sdilbifcrtl. '
^a^3 $hicf>, the book : TV/^r. x. (;. a. t^Mm\ d. ^Mcfjcm.
^cr mam, the man, husband: /7//r. n.g.a. Mnncr, d
.'^JJdnncrii. i
^a§ J^inb, the child : /Vur. n.g.a. iltnbcr, d. ^inbcrn.
^ag §aug, the house : JVur. n. g. a. i^aufcr, d. <Qaufern.
to row, rubcrn
shake, fdnittctn
waste, bcrfdnucnbcn
exercise, task, bic 2lufgabe
leaf, ba^ ^latt
egg, bavj ei
possession, property, bae
(Stgcntum
earth, bic (^rbc
gardener, bcr (^Kirtner
fowl, bai? §ul;u
Vocabulary.
child, ba^ ^inb
dress, ba^5 ^fcib
clothes, pi. of <^[eib
song, bac> i^icb
courage, spirit, bcr Mnt
woman, wife, ba^ ®eib
yellow, gclb
enough, i-jcnug
well (adv.\ gut
a long while, lange
too, 5u
EXERCISE X.
A. 1. ^^m .t)crb[t lucrbcn bi^- ilMdttcr gclb, bcnn bag Setter ift
fart. 2. ^c^ table bicfe ^JMbc^en, jueil fie ifire ^itufgabe nic^t
ftubiert r;aben. 3. ^m m'mUv ftubicrten bie Siinglinge; im
§37]
DECLENSION ; Xovj MODEL.
SI
©ommer arBeiteten fie. 4. „^n ruberft nic^t fdmeK cjcnuq mein
tober. b. ®cr Scf^vcr fagtc, ban bio itiubcr gu mel 2dnu nmc^tcn.
7. 2)er <(lonu3 rcbete mtt ben C^encialcn, unb lobU ben ^ut ibver
9fegimcnter 8. ^ic i^ornuiuber biefcr ilinbcf fi.ib ^i^bfetuicfiter
benn jie (;a6en ba^3 Gioentiuii bei- .Uinber Derfcfnuenbct <) 'T^ie'
^iirmer leben in bcr Grbc, abcr bic .^i^i^e leben im ^amv ' To
^^0 ftnb bic Gier ber ionhmx ? ®ie finb in uufcvon Siovku 1 1 *
^cf) ioerbe miibe, lueil id) gcjieu ben Strom vubre. 1^! :Dev Siaikx
l)at bie G3enerale getabelt, abcr iBrc ^HcBinicntcr 6at cr Gclobt.
B. 1, The general has bombarded the town «^ The
woman was buying books and clothes for her children 'i
The gardener is shaking the apple-tree. 4. The children
were learning songs. 5. The boy is industrious ; he has
studied well. 6. The apartments of the palaces are ma-^ni-
ficeiTt. 7. It rained yesterday, but it will not rain to-day
8. We have rowed a long while against the stream. 9 These
men travelled through towns and villages, lo. The hospitals
in London are large and fine. 1 ] . The leaves of these trees
are large and beautiful. )•>. This gentleman would buy my
houses, if he had money enough.
ORAL EXERCISE X.
1. Weshalb warden die Blatter gelb.? 2. Wessen Regi-
menter hat der Konig getadelt.? 8. Was sagte der Lehrer?
4. Wo leben die WTirmer.? 5. W^as lernten die Kinder? 6
Wurde dieser Herr das Haus kaufen?
53
LESSON XI.
£§§3S'
38.
LESSON XI.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
Declension of Personal Pronouns.
First Person.
Sing. N. ic^, I
G. meiner (mein), of me
D. mir, (to, for) me
A. tnid^, me
Plur. N. tt)ir, we
G. unfer (unfrer), of us
D. un^, (to, for) us
A. ung, us
Third Person.
Singular.
MASC.
N. er, he
G. f einer (fein),
of him
D. il^m,(to,for)
him
A. i^n, him
FEM.
fie, she
i^rer (i{;r),
of her
i^r, (to, for)
her
fie, her
NEUTER.
ca, it
[einer (fein,
eg), of it
if)m,(to,for^
it
eg, it
Second Person,
bu, thou
beiner (bein), of thee
bir, (to, for) thee
bic^, thee
i^r, ye, you
euer (eurer), of you
eud;, (to, for) you
eu(^, you
REFLEXIVE
(ALL GENDERS).
fid;, (to, for) himself,
herself, itself
fic^, himself, herself,
itself
Plural.
FOR
ALL GENDERS
N. fie, they
G. i^rer (i^r), of them
D. i^nen, (to, for)
them
A. fie, them
Remarks.— i. The forms mein, bein, fein, i^r, unfrer, eurev
are poetical or archaic.
2. The form eg of the 3. sing. gen. neuter is only used in cer-
tain phrases, as : ^cb bin H miibe, I am tired of it.
fic^, (to, for) them-
selves
, themselves
10]
IDOMATIC USES OF e5.
53
3. The gen. and dat. of the 3. sing, neuter do not occur,
except when referring to persons (e. g. 9Jiabc^en, ^rauUin).
4. The Pronouns of the 3. sing, must agree in gender with
the substantive to which they refer, as :
^aft bu ben ^wi'^
Hast thou the hat >
Hast thou the flower }
2BoiftbQg«bc^en?
Where is the girl ?
Yes, I have it.
9?ein, ic^ babe fie rac^t.
No, I have it not.
^A ift im %(xxi^x\..
She is in the garden.
5- The Pronouns of the 3. person are ^^z" used after Preio^
stttons, when referring to inanimate objects, but are replaced
by the adverb bo(r), there, before the Preposition, the r being
inserted if the Preposition begins with a vowel, as :
33ift bu mit biefem ©ut^e gufrieben? ^a, irf; bin bamit
gufrieben. Art thou satisfied with this book ? Yes, I
am satisfied with it {therewith).
How much did you pay for this hat > I paid two dollars
for it, bafilr {therefor).
What have you in your purse.? I have money in it
(borin, thereixi).
^^« Idiomatic Uses of eg.
I. Before the verb, representing the real subject, which
follows the verb, and with which the verb agrees, as :
Who is it •> It is my cousin ; it is my cousins
2Ber ift eS? m \\i mein ^Better ; eg finb meine ^ettern.
@g leuc^tet bie ©onne, the sun shines, i. e., it is the sun
that shines.
m leuc^tcn bie eterne, (it is) the stars (that) shine.
54
1 1 <
LESSON xr.
[§§39-
Remark -G^? in tl construction is often rendered by
'there' in English, as: ^
There is a bird in this cage.
(?jl ift z\\\ ilUn^ct in bicfcm l\\mx.
There are three books on this table.
iH fiiib bvci m^hix auf bicfem 2:i)c^.
(See also c^ gicbt. Less. XXXVII.)
2. When the real subject represented by c§ is a personal
pronoun, uuh the verl) /.; h', ,<, follows th. verb which
agrees with the re.l subject in person and number, as;
It is I' m h'xw e^.
^u (Jift e^.
It is you, \ o^i-j^ ^eii, eg^
Sic finb e^.
It is we,
It is they,
Is it you ?
luir finb e§.
fie finb c^.
flub 8ie ea?
3. After the verb, representing a predicate or a clause
and corresponding to the English 'one' or 'so,' as;
Is your father a soldier.? Yes, he is one (c§).
We are free, end you shall be so (c0) too.
40.
Use of Pronouns in Address.
I. ^M is used only in addressing persons with whom We
are very nitunate, or towards whom we use no ceremony
also HI addressing the Supreme Being, as :
«?«> bift bu, licbcr ,n-cunb?
Where are you, dear friend ?
2Ba§ macf)ft uu, mciii .Uinb?
What are 3'ou doing, my child?
"^ -^'Hi/ '^ vi^oti! vVc praise Thee, o God!
42)
REFLEXIVE ANr RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS.
55
2. 3ftr (plur. of bu) is used in nddressing a number of ner
sons, each of whom we should address by ^ as :
2i5a^ mac6t i^r, ^inber?
What are you doing, children?
3. In all other cases we use for 'you' in German, whether
IT °'^i"'" ^^'' P'''"^"" °^^'^^ Third Plural : 8ic ^fircr
31)ncn, Sic, distinguished by a .apM letter, LfZo
^ 43.) ^ '*'*"
41. Paradigm ok Jaficn with Reflexive Pronouns.
^ Present Indicative.
Sing. 1. ic^ ro6e mij^, I praise myself
thou praisest thyself
himself
2. bu h)6[t blr^,
3. er ^
fie \ \M fi(^,
J'liir. 1. loir loben nn§,
2. if;r lobt cuf^,
3. fie loben firfj.
he ^ .
she .^praises -s^ herself
it ) ( itself
we praise ourselves
ye praise yourselves
they praise themselves
So throughout the verb, as ;
42. Reflexive and Reciprocal Pronouns - jdhfi.
1. The Pronouns of the First and Second Persons express
reA^jre action without a special form, as shown by the^Z
paradigm, but those of the Third Person have the form S
2. These pronouns are also used in the Plural to express
reciprocal action, as : cApress
We met each other ; they will see each other ...j^
^ir Dcgeaueten yxu ; fie h)erbcu firfj iuieber|e^en/ ''''"
If-
5C
LESSON XI.
C8«>
I
But when, to prevent ambiguity, it is necessary to dis-
tinguish reciprocal from reflexive action, we use ciiioilbcr as
the reciprocal pronoun for all persons, thus :
We love each other (one anotlier), mx liebpn chittnbfr. "
(2Bir lieben unS might mean ' we love ourselves:)
3. To emphasize and strengthen the reflexive pronruns,
and give them an exclusive sense, as well as further to distin'
guish them from reciprocal pronouns, the indeclinable word
fclOft (or fclbcr) is used, as:
Know yourselves, (^rfcnne. cuc^ fctDfl.
(©rfcnnct ciir^ might mean ' know one another-:)
He has injured himself, ©r \i^i fid; fe!6ft befc^abigt.
Remark. — This word fclbft is in apposition to the subject
(or object, as the case may be), as :
SDer ^onig fclbft ift nid;t immcr glucfac^.
The king himself is not always happy.
It is also used adverbially (= Eng. ' even '), as
Even the kmg is not always happy.
(SclOft ber iBnig ift nic^t iinmcv gliicflic^.
Vocabulary.
behave one's self properly (of
children), arttg felu
meet, begci-^ncn (dat.)
visit, bc[ucj)cn
pay, bc3af;J(en
have finished (with), fertig
fein mit
belong (to), gcfjoren (dat.)
be ashamed of, fic^ fc^dmen
(gen.)
seat one's self (sit down), fic^
fel;en
punish, ftrafcn
work, labour, bie Sfrbeit
parents, bie ©Itern (no sing.)
patience, bie (SJetuIb
gentleman, master, Mr., ber
hat, bonnet, ber §ut * [^err
John, :5of)amt
Charles, ^arl
[§4a
to dis-
aitbcr as
mber.
onruns,
) distin-
le word
M REFLEXIVE AND RECIPROlaI.
subject
n), fidj
sing.)
r., bcr
Kerr
PRONOUNS,
s;
away, gone, fort
here, [;icr
ever, at any time, jc, jcmar^
never, nic, ntcmal^
artist, bcr Sim\t1'..t
Mary, mzx\i
uncle, bcr D'i}('m
dollar, bcr a:r;alcr
EXERCISE XI.
4. Unfer D^ei.n I,at mi sifiic^et oefauft. 5. .©at. ©etuft T„
m,t ba. ^,ct gdauft (,abe, 8. Wovgcn «,„be„ toir nmti tt
«9r,<,ba, .mbl„,tlKrbo„u„freei,et„kfu<f;cn. 9. 3* tb .
Mircfit ^(^ mat me ban... 11. fatt unb 3ofl., bcaeaneien
mem Satet ,ft jcljt ,„o^t. 13. «;atie, (iebft b.. beine gl rnA
wu ben , „« felbit and; [o6e.,, tue..,. mit u.,|re 3t..fga6e aemad.t
fatten. 18. gv ..iitbe M fd;amen, toc.,„ et mit f netS
©.e rok„ emanbet; toeit il,tc ©cnalbe f,*o. fi.,b. "0 s™ sil
m.t n,e.„ot 2lteeit ,.ftiebe„? 3iei„, ic^ bin .lid,. bamit^Sbt:
^. I. Is the table large? No, it is small. 3. Her fatl>er
has bought her a ring. 3. Were the fishes in your batl^^
Yes, they were ,njt. 4. Who has told it [to] her > 5 John
have you my shoes .» No, I have them not. 6. We sit down
because we are tired. 7. Even the beggars of thTs c ty have
shoes and stockings. 8. Who has bought this h.^'' .1
bought It niyself in the c.ty, and paid four dollars for it. "lO.
5«
LKSSO.V XII.
t§§43
U
Charles and his teacher love each other very much. 11.
Mother, have you bought me apples or nuts? 12. Mr. A.,
here is a chair for you ; sit down. 1 8. Has the teacher blamed
him? Yes, he had not done his exercise. 14. Do you believe
that this milk is good ? Yes, it is very good. 15. 'J'he teacher
is ashamed of her, because she has not finished (with) her work.
ORAL EXERCISE XI.
1. Wiirden sie einen Spaziergang mit mir machen ? 2.
Weshalb loben Sie sich so viel } 3. Was sagten Sie mir ?
4. Sind Sie mit meiner Arbeit zufrieden ? 5. Was werden
wir morgen machen .'' H. Werden Sie morgen Ihre Eltern
besuchen?
LESSON XII.
POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. -USE OF ARTICLES.
4.'J. Possessive Adjectives.
First Person. .Second Person.
Sing, mcitl, my bcitl, thy
I'/ur. unjcr, our cMcr, your
Third Person.
MASC. FEM. NEUTER. ALL GENDERS.
Sing, fcin, his (its) t^r, her (its) fdll, its P/f/r. t§r, their
Poss. Adj. of Polite Addr ..^s : ^^r.
Remarks. — i. The Possessive Adiectives ars the Genitive
Cases of the respective Personal Pronouns, declined after the
mcin Model. (See § 8, above.)
2. Unfer and cuer may drop p of the stem wh-^n inflected •
or they may drop c of the termination, unless the terminaHon
is -c or -er, as : unfcrc or unfvc ; unfcrc^, unfrc^ cr unfcv^.
3. Observe the correlatives of the Pronoun.s n{ Address:
bu — bcin
tfir — met
44]
USE OK THE ARTICLES.
59
Thus we say :
bu ^aft bcine Hufgabe gelcrnt, )
lift ijaht eure „ ^^ C you have learnt your
<Stc ^aben ;j^rc „ " ) lesson
Note. — The last example shows the ii<5f> nf fK» d
Adj. of m., Pl„.a^ as pLoun of Address " "^"^ ^"' ^"^^•
4. Observe also the correlatives of the Third Person •
Referring to subst. .... sin,, fein (whether animate
» , •^^'''- " «5r ) or inanimate
tosubsts. plur.(all genders) i^r
Thus we say :
^er £unb [jai fcincit .^noc^en berroren (lost)
5)ic 33anne „ i^rc flatter
uiey quality the ///■<?///'• ;>^j.5.^,(.(.,/N . <.k_ .. ^^ / i x
jTPnrl,.r ^f /i 1 -^ /''•»''"-^^«; , tlie shwi (as above) on the
'n °^ ;"^-"»;-"'™ to which they refer (the^«
2)n« yjinbrf)eit Ihlit {^rc a>hitter.
Hie girl loves her mother.
For Possessive Pronouns, see Less. xxm.
**• UsF. OF THE Articles.
th^ir''"*"''*/" '"'''''••'""ves used in the full extent of
6o
LESSON Xlt.
[§44
{d) Before nouns (sing, or plur.) denoting a whole class,
as:
^cr 9}?enfc^ tft fterblid;, Man is mortal;
3Dic 255gel f»abcn defter. Birds have nests.
(b) Before names of materials, abstract nouns, etc.,
ascd in their unlimited sense, not partitively, as :
$)ttg ®Ia§ i[t burc^fic^tig,
Glass is transparent;
^00 (^3oIb i[t iucrtiioKer al§ bag Silber,
Gold is more valuable than silver ; but :
Wolb imb ©ilbcr \}oSi<i, idb nid)t
Gold and silver I have not (have none of).
^ic 9 Jot ift bie 5)iutter bcr ©rfiubung.
Necessity is the mother of invention;
^ic m\x\\l ift eiue .(iunft.
Music is an art ; but :
C5r ftubicrt 9Wufif,
He studies music (limited sense).
Note. — In Proverbs and Enumerations this article is omitted, as:
''Si^X tonnt tciu @ebot,
Necessity knows no law;
aWiiflf luib SRakret fiub |d)i3ne tiinftc,
Music and painting are fine arts.
2. IJefore names of mountains, lakes, seas, rivers,
forests, streets, seasons, months and days of the week,
as:
^cr 3Se[ut), Mount Vesuvius.
%tx ^wX<xx\^, Lake Ontario.
%\t X^emfe, the Thames.
^cr <3)3effart, the (forest of) Spessart.
%\^ (Jriebric^ftra^e, Frederick Street.
USE OF THE ARTICLES.
6i
$m ^ru^Iing, in spring.
^cr Sanuar ift tali, January is cold.
8tin 3Jiontag, on Monday.
Also before ^pimmel, @rbe, <poae, as:
^m ^imrnel, in heaven ;
3ur C^rbe, to earth ;
and before places of public resort, as :
^ur ©c^ule ge^cn, to go to school.
^^ Wax in hex ilirc^e, I was at church.
3. Before names of countries when not neuter, or when
preceded by an adjective, as:
2)ic 6d)Jrei3, Switzerland.
^ag fc^one ^ranfieic^, fair France.
4. The English Indefinite Article is replaced by the Z?^«//^
Article in German when used distributively (= each), as :
3^eimal bc£l ^aBre§, twice a year.
3}rci 3:^aler Oic ©lie, three dollars a yard.
5. The Indefinite Article is omitted before the unqualified
predicate after fein o.- luerben, as :
but- ^'^ ^^* (it)urbe) ©otbat, he is (became) a soldier;
@r ift fin tapferer 6olbat, he is a brave soldier.
6. (rt;) The Definite Article replaces the Possessive
Adjective when no ambiguity would result as to the pos-
sessor, as :
@r ftecfte btc .^anb tn btc STafc^e,
He put his hand into his pocket ;
(5r fc&uttelt hpit .^nv^f
He shakes his head.
h
62
LESSON XII.
[§44
©eben ©ic mir bie .t>anb, Give me your hand.
{d) With parts of the person, clothing, etc., the Dativa of
the Personal Pronoun -|- Definite Article replace the Pos-
sessive Adjective, as :
Gin Stein fid iljui auf ben itlopf,
A stone fell on his bead;
Gin '^Zagc( bat mxx ben I'Koc! jerriffen,
A nail has torn my coat.
Note. —If the subject is the possessor, the reflexive pronoun is
used, as :
Sr l)at fid) in ben 5i"Hcr gcid)nittcn, He has cut his finger.
Vocabulary
to cost, fojteit
hurt, wound, t)erle^en
cry, weep, lueinen
draw, jcidnten
doctor, physician, ber Slrjt *
axe, bic 2(rt*
mountain, hill, ber 53erg
lead-pencil, bet 33Ieiftift
iron, ba-3 Gifen
window, btvo j"\-enfter
wing, ber ^'^•lugel
purse, ber ©elbbentel
hope, bie .*5offnung
merchant, ber ^aufniann
master, ber 3)teifter
Mont Blanc, ber ^JJont SBlanc
music, bie ^Jhifif
coat, ber ^Kod*
Schiller-street, bie ©dbiHers
ftrafje
tailor, ber ®d;neiber
cloth, ba§ ^uc^)
exercise, practice, bie llbung
hot, bei^
light, leic^t
dear, reuer
as, when, oXi
often, oft
farewell, (ba^) ^ebetvobl
EXERCISE XII.
A. 1. tlbung macbt ben ^IKeifter. 2. ^ie llfufi! imb bie 9D?a(erei
finb 5^ilnfte. 3. i^inbev, babt ibr enre iHufgaben gemac^it? %^,
\X)\x baben fie gemarfU. 4. Der ^JJipnt ^^lanc ift ein 53eri3 in, ber
i^cljiueij. 5. ^ft biefee %yx^ teuer ? :^a, es foftet brei Xbaler
-*-
jl^v^ CA/y^^' '^ *M tvx ,
§44]
USE OF ARTICLES.
63
bie m. 6. 2)ic g^utter fc^icft i^re ^inber gur Sc^ule. 7. ^abm
eie @oIb m ^f)rem ©elbbeutel? ^5c^ i^abi kin ©olb, aber id)
^abe Silber. 8. ma^ lernt bag 2)?abc^en ? ®ie lernt tf)re 2(uf.
gabe. 9. Xer ^^Bater fd;uttelte feinem ©of)ne bie .§anb unb [agte
tN £eben)oi)I. 10. ^ie g^Iugel ber SSbgel finb fe^v leic^t unb
ftarf. 11. §at ber ©c^nciber ^bren ?fiod md) .§au[e gefc^icft?
12. dim, er ^at if)n nod; nid;t oefc^ndt, aber er tuirb ifjn inorgen
fc^iden. 13. Unfere Gltern rciften in 3^eutfd;lanb unb in ber
©cbh)ei^ 14. ^;^m Suli ift bag 3Setter oft feF)r \)d^. 15. ®ag
(Sifen h)irb rot, loenn eg fjei^ loirb. 16. manbm ©ie, ba^ id;
Siec^t f^ahi"^ 17. Karl oerle^te fid; bie ^anb, alg er mit einer
STjt arbeitete. 18. '^d) ioiirbe ®oIbat toerben, n?enn id; alt genug
JDcire. 19. iB3ir iourben ^reunbe ge^abt baben, toenn h)ir reic^
getoefen Joaren.
^. 1. Gold is yellow, but silver is white. 2. Mary is
studying music and painting. 3. Are your parents still
living in Frederick-Street.? 4. No, they are now living in
Schiller-Street. 5. Mont Blanc i a mountain in Switzerland.
6. The girl is crying; she has hurt her hand. 7. Is your
father a doctor .? No, he is a merchant. 8. Glass is trans-
parent, and we make windows of it. 9. What are you doing
with your lead-pencil .? lam drawing a flower with it. 10.
The emperor is satisfied with his generals. 11. -I blame you,*
because you are not industrious. 1;,^ What are you drawing
now.? I am drawing a bird. 13. Why are you crying, my
child.? 14. The doctor shook his head, for he had no hope.
15. Would you buy a horse, if you were rich .? 16. Miss B.
has sent her Mother a present. 17. The girl will visit her
parents.
ORAL EXERCISE XJ".
1. 1st das Gold weisz.? 2. Weshalb weint das Madchen.?
3. Werden Sie sich ein Haus kaufen ? 4. Sind Sie Soldat? 5
Wo wohnen Sie jetzt ? 6. Was machen Sie mit Ihrem Gelde ?
64
LESSON XIII.
[§§ 45-
LESSON XIII.
CONSTRUCTION OF SENTENCES: PLACE OF OBJECTS, AD-
VERBS, etc. - INDIRECT NARRATION. - PREPOSITIONS
) GOVERNING THE DATIVE ONLY,
45. Rules for Position of Objects, Adverbs, etc.
Rule i. (a) Pronouns first of all, unless governed by
a preposition, when they come after all other objects, ad-
verbs, etc.
(^) Adverbs or Adverbial Expressions of Time precede
everything except Pronouns without Prepositions, thus :
1 '2 3 4 6
(Germ.) ^^d) fdncftc i^m flcfteru (bicfc fflSor^c) einen SBrief,
12 3 4 5
{EngL) I sent him a letter yesterday (this week);
but:
12 3 4 5
{Germ.) ^cf) fd)id'te gcftcru einen 53rief an i§n,
12 3 4 6
(EngL) I sent a letter to him yesterday;
12 3 4 6 6
{Germ.) "^dj haht C0 ^cutc inciucr ©c^tuefter gefc^icft,
12 3 4 6 6
{Efig/) I have sent it to my sister to-day.
Rule 2. Of Nouns, persons (unless governed by pre-
positions) before things, as :
12 8 4 5
{Germ:") ^sd} fcf)icfte ocftern mcincm JBatcr einen ©rief,
12 3 4 5
{Engl.) I sent my father a letter yesterday;
but:
12 8 4 6
{Germ) ^d) fdndte ijcfteru einen ©rief nn tmwm ^tiUx,
12 3 4 5
{Engl.) I sent a letter to my father yesterday.
I
46]
PLACE OF OBJECTS, ETC.
<55
nofnTas": ""' '''°"°""^' J^rsonai h.ior. all other Pro-
^c^ ^ak j^m bad (Demonstr. Pron.) qeaeben
I have given him that.
ir^ Object,"!:"""^' '™"°""^' ^"•-' «^J-' ^^'»-
12 8 4 5
{Germ.) ^d} babe eg i^m gecjcbcn,
12 8 4 6
(^//^^/.j I have given it to him.
iectsTn'th; ^?'''"^' 'V''^' '^'"' ""^ ''^^^^'^^ f°"o^ Ob-
jects ni the order nanr d, as :
1 2 *i
(^«^/.) He has studied the book very diligently
at home.
Remember: .. That in compound tenses all these objects
2 That any of these members of a sentence may occupy the
• IZ the ^etb, a^: ""'''' ^"^ ^ ^°' °'^^- '^ '» "^ ">-»"
1 2 3 4 5
©eftcrit [c^idtc irf) i^m einen ^Brief.
* 2 3 4 5
^icfc mo^c fr^itftc id) einen mtf an iijrx,
46. Prepositions governing the Dative only.
5(u§, rtu^cr, feci, mit, ) ''''^^'
ttiic^, fctt, tipit, ^n [govern the Dative Case.
m, (.) out of (;««^/.«), as : He came out of the house im
Btm §aufe). ■ '
^
LESSON XIII.
[§46
(2) of {made of), as: This house is built of wood (ou8
(3) from {origin), as: He comes from England (ou§
(Snglanb) ; from the town (aue bcr Stabt).
(4) from {cause), as : I did it from fear (aud ^^^urd^t).
au^cr^ (i) outside of {rest), Si's,: The table is standing out-
side of the room (ou^cr bciit (dimmer).
(2) ex'cept, besides, but, as: I had nothing except
(besides, but) my stick (nu^cr meincilt Stocfc).
6ci, (i) (near) by, as : The chair stands (near) by the table
(ki bcm or beim 3:ifc^c).
(2) at (the house, etc., of, = Fr. c/iez), with, as : He
lives at the house of (or: with) his uncle (or:
at his uncle's), cr Juobnt bci fcincm Onfel.
(3) about (one's person), with, as : I have no money
about (with) me (Ijcimir).
mit, with, as : He is coming with (along with) his friend
(mit feinem j^-rcunbc) ; he struck the dog with a
stick (mit eincm Stocfc) .
nai^, (i) after {tijne, order), as: He arrived after his brotjher
(imrf) feinem 23ruber). ''
(2) to (with names oi places), a.s : He is going to Quebec
(uot^ Quebec); to England (not^ (Snglanb); home-
(wards) (imrf) i^i^ufe).
(3) according to (often follows its case in this sense),
as : This is wrong according to my opinion (not^
meincr llieinunoi, or meiner ^Jietnung nor^).
feit, since, as : He has not been here since the war (fcit bcm
Alriecjc) ; jcit bunbevt "^akcn, for the last hundred
years.
\
§46] PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE DATIVE ONLY. 67
foil, f .) froni, as : He has just come from dinner (»„« !,.„
■ ^' -°'' *..er';. "" ''"'"^ °' °" '"°"'^^ ("-a- "»f«'f
(3)_by (with personal agenl after the passive voice) as •
Children are loved by their oarenis <-h-.. r '
g[,i;„,) ' parents (fcjj, |(,rt„
3U, (i) to(/.^..,„),as; He went to his friend, or to hi,
friend s (ju fciurm Jrcuilbt) ; he spoke to me (51,
(2) to (//„„., if not proper names ; see „„*. above) as-
He was going to the town (,„ (,„, or ,„r Stlw)'
(J) at (witli proper names of tou.ns onlv), as : He lives
at Ottawa (5,, Dltalua); at liome '(,„ ,C-,a„fc)
Remarks , Sici, I>on and ,,u (and sometimes'm,f;cr) are
contracted with the Dative Sing. Masc. and Neuter of he
w«//.,„,j«/Definiie Article, thus : 6ci bf,n = bchn i,„„ bcm =
Boin, ju bcm = sunt ; ,u is also contracted with the Dat Sine
Fern., thus: ju bet = 3iir. *'
2. The -c of the Dat. Sing, is never used when a prenosi-
t.on (except ,„) stands i,efore a substantive wi.i,„ut an artlTe
pronoun or adjective preceding, as: a>,« m,. of wood; ^
5re>B on purpose; but „,rt, .§„„,>, home ; ju.paufc, at h;me
3. Observe the following ;
{Germ.) Xer ^Brtcf mciiicg Dnfet^,
{Engl.) The letter of my uncle ~ My uncle's letter.
{Germ.) '^,u ^lief tiou meincm €ufcl,
{Engl.) The letter from my uncle.
The English preposition jaf. with a substantive must -en
ra y be rendered in German by a Genitire case .J^S.
PreposU^n.. whenever it can be turned into the English Po t :
«ve ca.a, as above ; otherwise by s,m, as :
^^m
68
LESSON XIII.
[§46
He was speak' \c,' of his mother (tiotl feincr 3Jiuttcv).
4. Observe also the foiii>wing:
(£//j;/.) Show the book to me == Show me the book,
(Germ.) ^iu;\cn Sic mir ba^ '}^\\d) i Dat. without Preposition).
The EngHsh preposition to with a substantive 1 lust be
rendered in German by the Daiive ivitliout a prepositioi, when-
ever the subst. can be turned into the Ena^lish Indirect 01)jec-
tive, as above ; otherwise (generally) by the preposition ju, as:
He spoke to me (ju mir).
to answerf-antiuorten
honour-^cl;rcu
show^gcigeu
picture,vba'o ^ilb
letter,^bcr 'iHief
Germ any, ..^cutfrfilanb
presenty ba<o 0c[d;cnt
glass, .ba§ ©tn§
war,- bev 5lrieg
Vocabulary.
dinner, ba^ 9)iit'tag§cffen
journey, bic 9teife
Roman, bcr $)i5mer
aunt, bic ^ante
thankful, grateful, baufbar
(gov. dat.)
ready, finished, fevtig
quiet,' still, ftill
there, ba
Idiom : It Ig I, 3d) bin e«.
EXERCISE XIII.
A. 1. (^eit bem ^ricc^e finb mcine ©c^tiuiger fcf>r arm. 2.
SBir babcn iin^o giuci .s^dujer in ber 3tabt gefauft. 3. 2Bo ift beine
9tufgabc ? 5^icr ift fie. 4. Sir 11 .icbten mdj bem g}?ittag§e[fen
cincn S^agicvgang mit unt'crcn Cniftcn. 5. Wkin Skater bat mir
ein ©eicbciif gcfdncft unb id; bin tbm bafiir febr banfbar. 6. 33ift
bu mit beincr ^Hrbcit fcrtig ? 9Jein, idi bin noc^ md)t bamit fertig.
7. %^\x trcrbcn morgcn mit ^f;neu nad- ^Diontreal reifen. 8. ^axl
levnt feit bier ^O^ionateu 5)eiitfcb. 9. „(Se|t euc^ unb feib ftill," fagte
bie ^iutter 311 i^ren ^od)tern. 10. ^Biirben Sie bid fur biefe
8u4>er bejabien ? ^c^ tourbe fiinf X^aler bafiir l-cjaf^len. 11.
[§48
§46J
PREPOSITIONS WITH DATIVfi.
tcv).
position).
must be
ion when-
ct Objec-
3n ju, as:
iffen
baufbar
arm. 2.
D ift beine
ittag§e[fcn
r f)at mir
6. SBift
itit fertig.
. 8. ii?art
tilt/' fagte
fur biefe
•len. 11»
69
flnuflcn, .7. aicfcr Warn, lobt fid; ui met 18 fli V;,'
... me,„. 3*,ucf.cv finb ;. ^„.f,. J,,. »a. luii b it t
met 3' c,'uTtr.r;^'f' '"':^' '• '' •■^ ^^ '"^ °^ ^'^--t
a. wur sen '.t |j from Germam . 4. ' Buv mem
f es r"fi Th^'f r '" '™""-"- ■^- '"-^ ^-u I,; o ,
7. Iharlt. you have answered well, sit down. 8 Mv son
a ways sends me the n.-uspaper fron, Chicago. 9. MyVrie,™
.bowed me h,s pictures. ,0. Buy me thi: ring ■ iUsTa/
nificeat. 11. Who .s in the gnrde,> .' It is she ' V T?'
■eve that Carles has bought himself a hit H re i the"
letter from my uncle. ,4. I am .shamed of you. becl!,se '
are not mdustrious. 1.5. My father ould send me t" Vh
city, if I were old enough. '° ""^
ORAL EXERCISE Xlll.
sein bT^^I' f ^T '" ^'^' "^^"^^ '' 1st es Karl odor
seinBru r? 3. Seit wann lernen Sie Deutsch ? 4 Wer Im
mirdieseZeitu, -creschirki -^ '. w ^^^" • 4. wer iut
Mitta-sessen ? T- ''?f .''• ^^ '^^ "^ 'chte ich nacb dem
nma.sessen? b. Wo hai mein V ci dieses Buch gek. fi ?
• ■*
70
SUPPLKMF.NTAKY LKSSON A.
[§§47
J!!
^m
SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON A.
ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON PERSONAL PRONOUNS AND
PREPOSITIONS.
*7. Pronouns in Address.
I. The pronouns Hu .-^nd i(,r are the usual pronouns ot address in
/'or/rr .lud thu ,/nw,a, \l)\- being used for one person or more, as:
lliiD Moirii "^liMiid noil) bcffimm' id) tir,
The goblet is thine,
And this ring too I'll keep for thee.
(Schiller, ,,'Dcr Xaud)tv.")
?n|lt, llaUv, (\nu\(\ foin bac nvaiiiaiiie 2pic(.
Gf [)at citrf) brftaiibi'ii, uuk^ foiiici- lu'ftd)t,
Hub roimt i^r bpv< Sm-]n\is OHiiiftcii iuii)t ',n()incn, ii, f. ui.,
Knough, father, of this cruel sport.
He has ventured for you what none will venture,
And if you cannot subdue the desire of your heart, etc. {/M.)
2. gr and Zit (3. sing.) were formerly regularly used as pronouns of
address towards inferiors, with the verb agreeing in 3. sing., and thev
are often found so used in the classics, being spelt with a capital
Their use w.y/ imply contempt; so Faust says to his servant Wagner
who is otherwise addressed as „i()r" ; '
<Sci (fr fdii fdnKiMitniittT tljov,
Don't be a jingling fool. (Goethe, „ffaiift.")
3- Gvand 2ic, also i()V, are still used in f^w///>//^;;Az;-y address, correspon-
dmg to the polite use of 8ic (3. plur.), by people of the lower orders.
48. The forms incinc?g!cid,cn, bpiiic^^rcil^rn, etc, = 'a person, or
persons, like me, you,' etc. (vulg. ■ ;he like of me '), are used as indeclinable
substantives, either as object or as predicate, as :
Wiv lucrbcn ^-incfifilcii^cn nic uuibcr feljeu,
We ne'er shall look upon his like again.
®n bift iiid)t mcinc^Blcirfjcii;
You are not (a person) like me (my equal).
(For the use of be§fllcic{)cn, berg{eicl)cn, see §§ 97, 139.)
. xr^^'r/" addressing persons 01 rank, the proper title, as : ^bve ©miben,
Your Honour'; Sure (abbrev. (Slt>.) Ct-j-ccHeriv 'Your Excellency'; ^nve
PREPOSITIONS WITH DATIVK.
@ic a hi f comp,„„entary titles that gave rise to the u e of
no^lIoLi; "" °'^""" '''''''■ '''' ^'' ^-- 30ro, ^ero/arc
60. Prepositions with Accusative.
I. The preposition fonftcr takes the accusative, but is of rare occurrence
fleil .V>nnim(, heavenwards ; flrn yjoibcil, northwards, etc.
3- Odnc has a dative in the phrase of,.u<llcm, ' at any rate.'
dir:.^;:^ (i;:;^;:;;r:u:7rr! ■; r>'-^^'- =-•'-!.. .otion or
dat or ace it Ju Ii n M- c.), ,f this preposition is one governing
ace It vMll always take the accusative when combined with bi«,as?
Gr gmg bis ati'S 2(,or, he went as far as the gale.
61.
Prepositions with Dative.
The following additional prepositions take the Dative only
^«mnen within (of ,.,.), as : S&Uuun ,.ri Snnen, withir. two days.
Notes.-,, a.nnen sometimes governs the ^.«//,w. ^
2. Sinn.n is used of time only: ,m,crf,a(l, (see § ) of ,/«.. and time.
I nlXr \ Contrary to, as : / '^-'^'""'f*' ^^'>'nmin mmm (^ilrtJibcr),
•* ^""'^"f*^ ' ^contrary to my inclination.
4. OeoeilUfier, opposite (to), follows the case, as :
tm Xlm-e- flcnenitbcr, opposite the gate
5. ®emaft, according to. agreeably to, precedes or follows its case as-
feinmminm mm (or geiimO fcinem SBiinfrfie),
Agreeably to his desire.
6. @Icl(^, like, precedes or follows its case, as:
@te ladjelte n(cicf) einem Gngel (einem ©ngel gleicfi).
one smiled like an angel.
7- 9i6(!)f},or I
3uno(|f| i "^''^ *"" <^^ of/r<7;r//w//y (= neben), as :
^SMBBIRj;
n
LESSON XIV.
m^i
%
(Sr faf? naci)ft mir (or mir siiuac^ft),
He sat next to me.
(2) of succession, as :
9?arf)ft bem i'f'beii liebt cr bie (g()re,
Next to life he loves honour.
Note.— 3iinarf)ft usually follows its case; tiac^ft is the commoner of the two as pre-
position, especially in the senses under (2).
8. 9Ie6ft \
9. Somt i" ^"Sether with, along with,as :
®er ,^frr fam ucbft feincm ^^vnnibe,
The gentleman came along with his friend.
®er l^ater famt jeiiicri tiiibein,
The father together with his children.
Note i. Distinguish iiebft, along with, and neben (alongside of, near).
2. 3nmt is used of objects naturally belonging together, as above.
10. 06 is poetical and obsoiete for iibcr, and denotes :
(i) above {oi position), as: Ob iJcm 3((tave, above the altar.
(2) about, concerning, as : (Sntriiftct ob biejcm greoel, indignanl
about (at) this cutrage.
Note. — In the lauter sense it also takes a genitive.
LESSON XXV.
CONJUGATION OF fcilt, to be. - DECLENSION OF SUBSTAN-
TIVES. -WtAK OR -It STEMS: - ^liadc MODEL.
62. Paradigm of fcill, to be.
Principal Parts.
Pres, Infin. fcin Impf. L\dic. mar Past Part, gelttcfeit
Indicative.
id; Wx\., I am
bu Mft, thou art
er if t, he is
U)ir finb, we are
tbr fcib, ye are
fie finb, they are
Present.
Subjunctive.
id; fci, I (may) be, etc.
bu feieft
er fei
njir feic.i
i^r feict
.fie feicn
i2]
i'ARADlGU OF feirt.
Indicative.
id) toor, I was
73
bu toarft, thou wast
er tuar, he was
toir hjaicn, wt- were
il;r toaret, ye were
fie \mxcn, they were
Imperfect. ^"''i""^^*'^^-
ic^ tDiire, (if) r were (might
be), etc.
bu tuiiicft, thou wert
er tottvc, he were
Jfir uiiircn, we were
if;r iDaret, ye were
fie iDJiren, they were
I have been, etc.
id) 6in
Perfect
(Pres. of fci„ + p^ p^j.^^
bu bift
er ift
it)ir finb
i^r feib
fie finb
I had been, etc.
id; luor
bu luarft
er Wax
tt)ii luareii
ii^r iuaret
fie loaren
bu feieft
' iictticfcn ^^ ^^^
t»ir feien
i^r feiet
fie feien
PlUPERFECT.
(Imperf. of fcin + p. Part.)
I (may) have been, etc
trf;fd
^cmcfcn
I had (might have) been.
^ fichicfrn
ic^ JDiire
bu tuareft
er \vaxt
Juir luiiren
if;r hjoret
fie hJttren
[etc.
flctoefctt
Future.
(Pres. of toerteri + Infin. of feii, )
I shall be, etc. r , „, '
I shall be, etc.
ic^ tuerbe
bu
I fcin
tc^ hjerbe )
bu h)erbeft J
fcIn
74
LESSON XIV.
[§§ 5*-
!
i
i
Indicative,
cr Juirb
\mx irerben
ibr lucrbct
fie Juerben
fcin
feitt
I shall have been, etc
id) ii>crbe
bu loirft
er a'irb
U)ir iuerben
\^x iucvbct
fie iperbeti
gcmrjen )etn
gcmefen fetn
Simple
;Impf. Subj. of uievben + Infin
of jeiu.)
I should be, etc.
id; iDiirbc i
bu tourbeft
er hjiirbe . .
h)ir tuilrben ^
\{}v luuvbet
fie iDurbeu
Imperative,
fei (bu), be (thou)
feib (\^x), be (ye)
Subjunctive.
er tucrbe ~)
w'lx iuerben |
ibr ioerbet j
fie iDcrben J
Future Perfect,
(Future of fein + P. Part.)
I shall have been, etc.
id) lt>erbe
bu ioerbeft
er merbe
\mv loerben
it)r loerbet
fie Ujerben
Conditional.
Compound.
(Simple Cond. of ffin -f- Past
Part.)
I should have been, etc.
id) luurbc
bu luiirbeft
er iuiirbe
luir unirben
it;r luiirbet
fietoiirben ^
Indicative.
(ju) fein, (to) be
gcmtfcn (ju) fein, to h^ve been.
Participles.
Past. nettJCJnt, be*'»>
gcmefen fein
Pfrs. fetenb, being
Remarks. — i. Observe the absence of the Subju.40^»v«-e
in the i. and x. sing. Pres.
S3]
USE OP Icln AS AUXILIARY OI' TENSE.
75
used :ith mos X' '-""""'" ,"" '''"' "^^ ^ ^«^^" ''
ve.bs .e„r.::;:,?i ftn^ir'crr ''"'- ™^ "'^ '^^
53. Use of |>u, as Auxiuakv of Tfnsf
(<^) With those expressing a change of condition, as •
fterbeii, die . ,,
ecnefei, recover (f,o.i„„ess) rSC:.
, oicben, move, go, proceed.
f4,r";„r^' ''^''^"- •« --'"^ ^^«^«-'- - meet;
</) "The impersonal verbs • (i.'rin,-.,^,. .r-^
SeWc^e,,, to happen. ' ^ "'"' «'"*"' '° '"^'^^''d !
vert •s:,:-;iiin2^:Lrr " "^= "* -"
denote an „./„„ merely, and not .n specirtc ci^ange of place, a! •
ec 6at Bid nerrift, he .as tr,'.vel]ed a great deal
as'the':';;:,i"trt ""^rTr "-^ "^^ ^^'-"^ --'-y
babe,, th' '-efix - ''«"""- ^'"'"^ '^^n^i'ive. lakes
',TOU,, tn,. i„efix cnangmg the nature of the verb.
^•SE^.^,,,,
76
LESSON XIV
?}?(54-
54. Declension of bcr ^ttak, the boy.
Plural
bic .^uabeit, the boys
btr .^naben, the boys', of
the boys
ben .flnaben, (to, for) the
boys
bie .<ilnabett, the boys
Singular.
Nom. bev .ftnabc, the boy
Gen. bc^ Alnabcu, the boy's, of
the boy
I)at. bi ^' S^naben, (to, for) the
boy
Ace. ben .Slnabeii, the boy
Observe : i. All cases end in -n, except Nom. Sing.
2. No Umlaut added in Plural.
3. The only change is the addition of -n.
Remark. — The Plural ox-en is a remnant of the -n declen-
sion in English.
55. Substantives ending in a consonant add -en, as :
Singular. Plural.
Nom. ber ©raf, the count
Gen. be§ ©rafcM, of tlie count
Dat. bem ©rafcn, (to, for) the
count
Ace. ben ©rafcil, the count
bie ©raffit, the counts
ber C^jrafctl, of the counts
ben ©vafcit, (to, for) the
counts
bie ©rafcil, the counts
60. Feminines do not vary in the singular, as :
Singular.
Nom. bic -Blumc, the flower
Gen. ber 33lunic, of the flower
Dat. bcviMumc, (to, for) the
flower
Ace. bie ^^Muntc, the flower
57. In thi;, way are declined
Plural.
bie 33huneit, the flowers
ber ^i^huiien, of the flowers
ben ^i^liunen, (to, for) the
flowers
bie 23(uinett, the flowers.
I. All masculines ending in-c, except ber ^dfe, cheese (see
§ 17), and the doubtful ones in § 61.
57]
DECLENSION :--^naBc model.
77
2. Certain masculines which have dropped the final -c as-
ber ^elb, hero
ber §evr, gentleman, master
ber ,<oirt(e), herdsman, shep-
herd
ber 9J?cnfcfv man (human be-
ing = Lat. noma)
ber 33ar, bear
ber ^aucr, peasant
ber g^rift, christian
ber ©e[ca(e), fellow, companion,
journeyman
ber ©raf, count
A full List of these Substantives is given in App^F,
3. All femin.nes, except gjhittcr, ^orf)ter (§ 17 3) the
monosyllables under § 2? r>r.A Ii '• . '' ^^'
(22, 4). • ^ ' 2' ^"^ ^^^^^^^ ^" -ni« and -fa(
4. No Neuters (but see §§ 62, 63).
Further Examples :
Like ^mU :
'V. ber iBote, messenger g. d. a. SBoten
ber .f)a[c, hare
ber 3fiefc, giant
ber 9tu[[c, Russian
w. ber 53ar, bear
ber g^iirft, prri-.re
ber ,^elb, here
ber git'cnfcf), man
ber Stubent', student
ber eolbat', soldier
Remark 1. Ter .^i)err, gentlema
Plural.
N. G. D. A. ^Boteit
|afett §afen
^^^^^« 3itefen
^»ff^« Stuffeit
LikeCsJraf:
G.D.A. 53arpn n. g. d. a. ^arcit
l^'^f" ^iirficn
£^^^f« §elben
5J?enfcbeii gj^enfc^en
©tiibentcit ©tubentctt
©olbatcn eorbaten
In the
sm
g., uut -en ill pjm-^
n, master, lord, adds -n only
7^
LESSON XIV.
[§§ 57-
?il
Singular.
N. G. D. A. ^(umc
2Bi|fcn[dBaft
Like 53Iume :
Plural.
N. G. D. A. ^^lutnen
^irc^H'ti
(Sd;onl;eitcn
2Bi[fcnfc^aftcn
Remark 2. Feminines in -c(, -er add -n only in the Plur., as:
Si7ig. bie ^-cber, pen Plur. ^-cbcrn
bic ©abel, fork ©a6eln
bie ed;ii)eftcr, sister ednuoftern
Remark 3. Feminines in -in double the u in the plur., as:
Sing, bie (^rcifin, countess Plur. (sjrdfinncil
admire, 6ctDunbern
hasten, cilen
hunt, jagcu
dwell, reside, live, tuo^ncn
astrologer, bcv ^Iftrolog'
lady, bie ®ame
influence, ber Gin'flu^*
heathen, ber ^eibe
comet, bcv ^omef
landscape, bie 2anbfd)aft
Vocabulary.
monarch, bcv SHonarc^'
news, bic 'Jfad;rid;t
nephew, ber l)icffe
planet, ber planet'
Prussian, ber '^rcu^e
raven, ber 9Ia6e
valley, bas %^oX
happy, gliidlic^
when, al^, luenn
when ? loanu ?
58. ^A/hen = menu ahoays with Present, Perfect and
Future ; and also with Imperfect and Pluperfect, of a
habitual or repeated occurrence (= whenever), as :
I ahoays xo%<\, when (i. e. whenever, njcim) the sun rose.
When = a(^ with Imperfect and Pluperfect otily^ of a
single, definite occurrence, as :
1 rose yesterday, when (al6) the sun rose.
79
•A
59] DECLENSION : — ^lltaBc MODEL.
When ? interrogative = mnnii ? as :
When was your father liere?
i!S8amiH)or3{)r«aterljior?
NoTK. - Kemeraber ihat lllfim also = "if."
50. When a conditional or " if " sentence precede, the
pr,nc,pa sentence on which it depends, the princfpai scte ce
usually .ntroduced by the particle fo, which is not to be
ttanslated mto English, or counted as a ,nen,ber of tl^ sit
Klea ,«e , .o). as : age,,,, irt, ,«elb „a.,e, f„ ,„„,., tl, Rn';m^l ;;,;;:'"""'
EXERCISE XIV.
9«,It 3. SD.e atrme mt$ 3(icfc„ finb fe(,r ra„q ,„b ftarf 7
aiuihd, fe,n, turn,, ie ,„it ifitcr awdt fertia finl, g W fv
3tuffe„ §eibe„? 9iei„, fie finb Ghrif ,r 1 Mein 9ifff " ,
i'Muu;cn. 10. ii)ie 5{naben Batten b ef 9^t'r,i«ii-> ,« r. - ..
-««te. I;.r„n. x,. ^i«,«4)crrcn maben arm wcrbct, «,«,„ fle i^j
i
tt
80
LESSON XV.
[§§60-
©clb fo uerfc^tocuben. 18. Unfcrc 9?effen finb lange 6ei un^
i9. 1. The castles of the count are magnificent. 2 The
churches of this city are large and beautiful. ;i. When will
your brother be at home ? 4. Are these soldiers Prussians ?
No they are Russians. 5. The bears live in the forests',
b. llie boys have two ravens and three hares. 7 The
ladies^ have been in the church, but they are now at home.
a_ Who was right ? 9. For a boy of (uon) five years he is
very large. 10. I should be happy, if I were rich. 11 He
has not been at home to-day. 1 2. Wh.n she was in the city
she lived at her aunt's. 18. Would th , girl be contented, if
she were with her mother.? 1^. The students became tired
because they had studied too much.
ORAL EXERCISE XIV.
P \7.'''J'V^' ^'^' "' ^''"^•" gemacht.? 2. Hatte ich
Kecht.? 3. Wer elite mit der Nachricht nach Paris? 4
Haben Sie jemals Hasen oder Fuchse gejagt .? 5 Wann
wird mein Pruder xu Hause sein ? 6. Wiirde ich glucklich
sein, wenn ich reich ware >
LESSON XV.
MIXED DECLENSION. -DOUBLE PLURALS. - PREPOSITIONS
GOVERNING DATIVE OR ACCUSATIVE.
60. Declension of bcr mmt, the name.
Singular.
Norn, bcr :?kmc, the name
Gen. bc^5 5Zanieng, of the name
Dat. bem teamen, (to, for) the
name
Ace. ben 9iameii, the name
Plural.
bic ^amen, the names
ber 9?amen, of the names
ben 9?amett, (to, for) the
names
bie SRamen, the names
63]
DECLENSION : - ^aUK MODEL.
ber iQaufc, heap
ber ©ame, seed
ber ecf;abc, harm, injury
[pl. 3rf'abcnJ
ber iliMfrc, will
8i
O-kvk: -e in the No.. Sin,, and -c„, in Gen. Sin.
2. -en all other cases. "^
NcK »T..'^ ^«;^-'-'n except in 2dmbe (see below).
I he Non,. S,„g. sometimes has «. .
oer ^ud;ta6c Jetter (of the \l i^.wu w ,
phabet) ^ .^!' i^^'^?"^> thought, idea
ber ^riebe, peace * M
ber ^unfe, spark ^f^
ber mauU, faith, belief,
creed
., ^^^ ;:iMuc, will
Also one neuter: bn« .Jaj, the hear. (Ace. Sing. §er,)
^^^. "^ ^"-^ ^'"^'- ''■^- ^'^'' «■ °"<')i - C^r(c);
63. In this way decline also :
I. Certain masculines, as •
2. Certain neuters, as :
III iTu': "'' '5-^^' ^"rt
oa^ 33ett, bed
(A full List of these substantives will be found in App G ^
3^Foreign (Latin) masculines in unaccented -or as "^
ber ^rofef or, the professor- c. si^rof.fior* • /./ a? -"
ber 3:0!. 0,, the doctor: g. ^oftor^; I^/ur. ^oWxtn.
r?
82
T.KSSOV XV,
[8§fi4
<l
■
lU.
SnUSTANIIVKS with Doun/ K I'MrUAI,.
riu' foUowiii'; h.ivi- doiihlc forms oC tlu* IMiiral, with a
dirrorent nKMiiiii<« for each :
J'hini/.
VMnnbc
il^linbr)
Wo[id)tct
Wc[id)tc
iiiibcn
iiobcir
Viinbcr
Viinbe
bac" '.i^inb, ribbon
ba>:; iUnt>, tie, bond
(brr '^^anb, volume
bio 'l^a)\\, bank (commercial)
bic ^l\an\, bench
ba^^ ('>iciid>t, face, countenannp
ba-o (^JcjidU, vision
bcv Vabcn, shop
bcr :i?abon, shutter
ba\< X^lnb, land, country
ba-? 'i?anb, province
biV-> ^i'^>>rt i '^-'''^^f''' "^^'Ttls considenui scf^aratcly
word ' ) '^^-''^^'^^' ^^'^^rds considered ccnncctcdly
\ (as makin::: sense)
Rkmark. — I'he plural Vaubc is also used in [)oet;cal ?au-
jiuage: and in the compound bic ^)ticbcvUinbc, the Methcrhmds
(^= Lower Provinces).
«5. Prepositioxs covkrmnc. ihe Dativk or
accusa iivk.
The following nine prepositions govern the Dative when
they indicate louilify merely, or aiTswer the question
'where?' or Mn what place?'; the Accusative when
they imply motion, i/inrfio/i or tendency (figurative motion)
towards, or answer the questicin 'whither?' or 'to whp*
place or person ? ' :
«»»' «»Mf' Wxicv, in, iicbcii,
titicr, iinter, nor and jtotfc^ctto
r non-
Iiorizr>iital
65/ I'KKI-CSITIONS WITH DATIVK OK A-CUSATIVK. 83
an, I. (of />Ai,r,
(a)^•h] yy .iponfa(lj;.(:(;„tfo>,as:
'i'i^ .u lure. /ur„^rs on tl... wall (n„ s.irface
brr ^ji;a,tb). I „„^.
■) With Acc, ((., towards, 0,1, as:
1 /'^'//A'- the picture; on the wall (an
bic iiyaiib).
2. (of //W, ,/,,/„ with MAT. r,vr V, on, ,ipon/as..
I wn '.orn on the ei^r,,teenth of Au^a.st (0,,,
He will arrive on Monday (nm Wonla(V>
J"^ ^'^^ ^" ''^ "^^ ^'^^ ''^^'--^ ^^^^^'---^^
auf, (of//./rr):
(a) With :)AT., on, upon (o;/ top of), as :
The hook //;■.»• on the table (ouf
bcm CTifdu.
(<J) With Acc, to, towards, on, as :
I hiy the book on the table (ouf
bcn3:ifrfO.
Winter, behind :
{a) With DAT., as: The dog lies behind the stove
(^mtcrbcm Cfcn).
{b) With Acc as : The dog ^oes behind the stove
(fjintcr ben Cfcn).
fn, I. {oi place):
(a) With HAT., in, as : The gardener /. in the garden
(im Ciarten).
(l>) With ACC into, as: The gardener ,w. into the
garden (m bcu ©artenX
( surface
horizontal
>\?l
^
^^>^
"^X-^^
o .. \.^.^
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
/.
^
{./ f^
4^
M.<s
#
Ki
1.0
I.I
1.25
14 111.6
rtiotographic
Sciences
Corporation
4f
\
4<
23 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580
(716) 87^4503
#
&j
84
LESSON XV.
[§65
1!
2. (of time) in (with dat. only), as : God made the
world in six days (in fcc^« 3;agcn).
neden^ near, alongside of, by :
(«) With DAT, as : The chair stands near (by) the
table (ncbcn bem ^ifdjc).
{b) With Acc, as : I place the chair near the table
(nc6cn bcii ^ifd;).
iilicr, I. (of place) over, above :
id) With DAT, as : The bridge is over the river Ciifier
bcm gfuffc). ^
{b) Witb ACC, as : I ^^ over the river (iikr bcn ^lu^).
2. (of excess) over, above (with acc. only), as : He
remained over (niore than) two days Cukr 3Jt)ei
3:agc).
3. about, concerning (with acc. only), as: He spoke
v/ith me about his journey (itftcr feinc 9^eife).
Unter, i. {oi place), under, beneath, below:
(a) With DAT., as : The cat lies under the chair (untcr
bcm ©tufjic).
(^) With ACC, as : The cat creeps under the chair
(uutcr belt etii^I),
2. (of mimber) among :
{a) Witn DAT., as: The wolf is among the sheep
(utitcr bcn ©c^afcii).
{b) With ACC, as : The wolf mingles among the
sheep (uittcr bic erf^afc).
HX, I. (of place) before, in front of :
{a) With DAT., as : The chair stands before the win-
dow (tior bcm ^enfter).
[§65
the
§65]
PREPOSITIONS WITH DATIVE OR ACCUSATIVE.
85
(/^) With Acc, as : Place the chair before the window
(t»or0 ^Icnftev).
2. (of order) before Twith dat. only), as: He came
before me (tiarmii).
3. (of time) before, igo (with dat. only), as :
He came before two o'clock (tior gtuet U^r).
He came two hours ago (dor ^luei Stunben).
JttJtfd^Cn, between (of two objects) :
(«) With DAT., as : The chair stands between the
door and the window (jmifr^eil bcr ^^ure unb
Dcm ^^enftcr).
{b) With ACC, as : Put the chair between the door
and the wmdow (jnitfl^eil bic Z^xxxt unb ba0
?^enftev).
Remark. - Observe the following contractions with the
unemphasized Definite Article :
anbem==om in bem = tm
an bag = o„g ^^ ^^^ _ .^^
auf bag = uiifg
Also the following, which are of less frequent occurrence.
gutter beni = f,intcrm unter bem = unterm
.^tnterbag=^interg unter bag = nnterg
uber bem = nbevm t,or bem = uoim
uber bag = uberg t,or bag = borg
Vocabulary. /
please, lit, (I) beg, (I) pray, lay, legen
(ic^) bitte
hang (trans.), ^angen
fetch, bring, get, ^olen
hear, boren
hunt, chase, pursue, |?.gen
put, place, set (down), fe^en
put, place, set (upright).
[ieiren
seek, look for, fuc^en
kill, toten
S6
LESSON XV.
I§§65-
waii (for), \vavUn (auf -f- ace;
strawberry, bie Grbbeevc
fire, ba^ ^euev
Netherlands, bie ^aebevlaubc
philosophy, bie ^^i)iIofo))l)ic'
stove, ber Cfen*
school, bie ®c^ule
door, bie 2f»ur(e)
difference, ber Unterfc^ieb
university, bie UniDerfitat
dictionary, ba^ SBiJrterbucf;
open, offen
heavy, hard, fdbtDCr
ten, jelni
thereupon, on it, etc., barauf
first, not before, erft
if you please, gefiiKigft
no longer (lit, not more),
md)t mebr.
where, h)0
in order to, um (foil, by infin.
with gu at end of clause)
BXEBOISE XV.
^- 1. Sener 9??ann toejidj gegeu meincn mikn auf bie
^a -1 2. ®er ^fcffe beilfrofe]jor| wax lange (^fuS^t, aber er
tft je^t Xdtov bev ^bilofo^bie. 3. 2i5anim hahm meine ^ettern
uber (at) mic^ gelad)t ? 4. gjjein 33ater loirb un^ am gj?ontag
obcr (am) ^ienc^tag in bie ecbule fc^iden. 5. ®cr eot)n unb
bte a-oc^ter un[cr(c)^ 9iad;barg fur^ten ^iHumcn unb ©rbbeeren im
2BaIbe. 6. gj^ein i^atev unb mcine 9Jiutter finb [eit brei 5Koc^en
auf bem Sanbe. 7. tie il^anfen lycrben e.ft morgen um gefjn Ubr
offen fern. 8. ^..gen 2ie gefalligft biefe i^anbe neben mic^ auf
bte 33anf. 9. ^er ^onig bev ^Jieberlanbe veifte burc^ feinc
etai\kn unter bem 9]amen einca ©rafen. 10. ^er ^riebe beg
§erm fei mit end;. 11. ^er &vaf fc^idte feinen ®of,n auf bie
Uniberfitcit 12. Xa^, ^mh x\t fcJ;r fran! unb bie g^utter \)at
givei ^o!toren gebolt. 13. a^e^^alb lyarten eie fo lange bor ber
3:F)ure ? 14. 3)ie -perrcn jagten ben ^i^drcn Winter ben 3Salb, it)o
fie i^n toteten. 15. ^m SBinter fet^en Wiv um oft bor bag ^euer
unb beh)unbern bie ^unfen. 16. Unfere .^cx:,m toerben immer
traurig, jyenn toir 'Md)xid)t bom Alviege fioren. 17. 2Sag ift ber
Unterfc^ieb ^\v\\d)in ben Jiiortern 33anfen unb 53anfe? 18. 2)ie
3rugen beg etubenten finb fd^toa*, ioeil er gu biel ftubieri i}at
19. ®e^en @ie ft* auf biefen etuf)!, benn eie finb miibe. 20
66]
20.
\-^/
''^^'i
ANOMALIES OF DKCt£NSIO>t.
87
J
^ittc, fteEeu Sie mir biefcii 3tul;l bintcv ben Dfen. 21 ®ie
v^tubenten (crnm bom ^:|]rofc)|-ov bie %mmx bcv(s3ottev ber 9iomev.
_^. 1. The children were playing before the house. 2.'
What IS the name of this professor? His name is Srhmidt
3. Hang the picture of my father over the door. 4 Every
human being has two eyes and two ears. 5. Why do the
professors praise their students? (i. The professors praise the
diligence of their students. 7. The difference between my
brother and me is not great. 8. I laid the pens upon the
table, but they are no longer there. 5). Our neighbours sent
their children into the wood to search for flowers. 10 Our
cousin lived happy and in peace with iiis neighbours 11
The pupils would look for the words in a dictionary, if they
had time. 1 0. Your eyes are tired, because x ou have studied
too much. 18. These words are hard to learn, for every
u;ord has ten letters. 14. Place this chair, if you please, be-
hind the ste. for me. 15. li Charles is not ready, we shall
go (reifen) without him to Germany.
ORAL EXERCISE XV.
w^uT ^'l'^ ^^' ^"'"^ ^'^ ^"^ ^'^ Universitat schicken .^
2. Weshalb hat die Mutter die Doktoren gehoit.? 3 Was
lernten die Studenten von den Professoren .? 4. Werden Sie
ohne mich nach Chicago reisen } 5. Wo reiste der Koni^
der Niederlande .? 6. Wann werden die Kirchen offen seint
^6.
SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON B.
ANOMALIES OF DECLENSION.
Substantives without Pt^ural.
The following classes of substantives are uscl in the singular only •
like'^^Ze^^^^"' unless they denote a class (as: bie r^Vlfade, painters
^etnn(i)e, the first four Henries, i. e., kings of that name).
^ /'
/
S8
SUPPLEMENTARV LESSON B.
t§§6fr-
^-'
2. Names of materials, etc., unless they denote different kinds of the
same material (as : ©vafcv, Salsc different kinds of grass, salt), or when
they have a special meaning (as : @c(ber, . urns of money; ^^3npiere, docu-
ments).
3. Abstract Substantives, unless they have a concrete {particular)
meaning, as: Iiujeiibcn, virtues; ®d)i)nl)ritni, beauties, etc.
Note.— Many nouns of this sort, when used in a coiicrete sense, use the plurals of
other words, generally compound, as: ber Sob, death ; bi? SobeSfaHe, deaths (i. e. case*
of death).
A list of these is given in App. H.
For the plural of nouns of measure, etc., see Less. XXX.
67.
Substantives without Singular.
The following classes of substantives are used in the plural only:
1. Names of certain diseases: Die S8(attevn, the small-pox; bie Spfiolern
or ;)?otcln, the measles,
2. The following names of festivals, etc.: 2Bci{)nad)ten, Christmas,
gaftcii, Lent; Ofteni, Easter; ^in'i»flften, Pentecost (Whitsuntide).
3. Those plural by meaning, viz.: Stlpcii, Alps; Seiuf (fiber, trou-
sers; 33ricffd)aftcn, documents; (Siufiliifte, income, revenae; eitcrit,
parens; ^crien, holidays; ©Ucbmofieit, limbs; .^)cfcn, dregs, yeast;'
Soften, Uiitoftcu, expenses ; ?eute, people ; 3JZo(fcn, curds.
68. Irregular Compounds, i. Substantives having -manit as the
last component form the plural:
(a) Regularly, when denoting male individuals or occupations, as:
(Sliemiiimer, husbands; (Sf)renm6nner, men of honour; @taat«imomicr,
statesmen.
(b) By changing -mnnit into -leuU, when used collectively or in a
general sense, or to include both sexes, as: ^rbeitjilcutc, working-people;
(Sljclcute, married people; ApaubckMcutC, trades - people ; ?anblcutf!
country-people; ^ailb^lcutC, people of the same country; 9Ktet8lctttc'
lodgers (male and female). '
Notes. — i. With words of common occurrence, such as «aufmonn, merchant, fiof*
mann, courtier, the plur. with -leute only is used.
2. The form with -Icute is the plur. of the fem. compound with -frau (e. g. ©Befrau
married woman), as well as of that with -mann. '
2. Die 0[)innad)t, the fainting-fit, and bic iBoUmacI)t, the power-of-
attorney (from a)?ad)t, pi. Win'^Xt), have the pi. ntad)tcn ; bte 2tntrt)ort,
the answer (from bo^ Sort, pi. 2Bortc and ^Sorter), has pi. -en.
[§§66-
TOJ SUMMARY OP DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES. g^
abater .odd (§,6) in the s rT ur^n;:;""'^ ^""^^ ^'^^
model, § .:, ,. no Umlaut,, Lep Cam wh ch"i ' " " ' '^^""'
w^a/t in the plur. (-en). ^i^iam, which IS more commonly
2. Weak feminines are often found with th^ ^m
-en, especially when used without ar"e .f! "''^ ^'"' ""^^ ^^*- '"
erben, on earth (ln.taufb,rIbeonThLr iT ' P^'^^^'^^"' ««= «"f
In Onaben, in mercy e c '^^ ' ^" ®^^''^'"' ^" h°"°"r of;
LESSON XVI.
NAMES. - PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE
70. Summary of Declension of Substantives
I. WlaUv Model
(Contracted Form.)
^. Strong Declension.
Sing.
Nom. ■
Gen. ^
Dat.
Ace.
P/ur.
-(n)
11. @r^n Model.
(Primary Form.)
Piur.
III. ©orf Model.
(Enlarged Form.)
Sing. piur.
-(c)8
— -cr
— cr
— cm
— cr
Remarks. - 1. The term ' Strong Declension ' is applicable
to all the three forms given above. -^l^piicable
2. The eo^n Model is sometimes called the Primary
Form of the Strong Declension, and shows the -.of Gen
fti:l:: ''^ '^"^* ^''''' '''' ''' ^-^-^ ^^- ' ^^- two
90
tESSON XVI.
Hi 7^
3. By contraction dropping -c of the termination), the
^iJialcr Model, hence called also the Contracted Form of
the Strong Declension ; and
4. By enlargement (adding -r in the Plur., the Sing, remain-
ing the same), the ®orf Model, hence also called the En-
larged Form of the Strong Declension.
5. Feminines remain unchanged in the Sing.
6. The Umlaut may occur in any of these forms, viz.:
generally in masc. monosyllables, regularly in feminines and
in Enlarged Form ; never in neuter monosyllables of Primary
Form. (See Lists, App. A., B., C., E.)
B. Weak Declension.
.<i?nabe, (Sjraf, 33Iume Model.
Sing. Nom. (c) Plur. -
Gen. (e)n
Dat. (c)n
Ace. (e)n
Observe: i. The persistent -n. 2. The absence of Um-
laut. 3. Uniformity of Cases. 4. Feminines unchanged in
Sing.
C. Mixed Declension.
■(e)n
-(e)tt
-(c)n
-(c)ii
I. 9?amc Model.
^ing. N. — e Plur, — n
G. — u8 _n
D. — n — n
ir. 9?ad(>6ar, Dfjr Model.
Sing. — ^ Plur. - -(e)n
-(e)l -(e)n
-(f) -(e)tt
— — — (e)«
A. — n —It
Remarks.— i. All three follow the ^nabe Model in the Plur,
9. The gjamc Model is a Mixture of the'^Jlaler and .<{lnabe
models in the Sing., usually taking -g in the Gen., sometimes
-n in the Nom.
■tit
7»J
DECLENSION OF PROPER NAMES.
9'
^J^ The 3tai,bax Model follows the min Model in the
4. The 0{,t Model follows the Sobn Model in the Sing
s.a";e?;e .'^"^"'^' "'"' '"' '^^ °-'--n oi a Sub
The Nominative Singular,
The Genitive Singular, and
The Nominative Plural
roitdtr ihf :L:t^ — ^irr °' *^ "-- -- "«
following: ' '^ """ ''ssistance of the
Remakks.-,, All Feminines are unchanged in the Sing,
the Weak Declension (.ft„„Oe, ®r«f and «.u,e n^ocie^
.e^w?a:?;e:i;Sri::^^;:uS^"""- ^--' '»
4- The Nom., Gen. and Arr Pi,,..
cu. ana acc. Plur. are a/ways alike.
5. The Dat. Plur. a/wajys ends in -n.
(Djlinelhefollo vvjng substantives thrn.o-h^,ft .
Declension of Proper Names.
T2. Geographical Proper Names;
I. If «^zrr used without an article, etc. (see ^ aa \
•ieclmed like common nouns, as : ber^Jific m g JVi 'V^''
ending :i;TTi: "tt f' ':■ '''-'-^ ^^^^ ^^^^ -^' -
ng except -| m the Gen. Sing, (unless they end in a
9^
LESSON xvr.
74
sibilant), as : ^eutfcftf :inb, Germany, g. ^cutfc^Ianbg ; ^vanU
rcid), France, g. ?vran!rdcIiS ; 9tom, Rome, g. ^Homg.
3. If they end in a sibilant (g, \^, J, J, y), the Gen. is
replaced by the preposition tioit, as: Die Sefeftigungen Han
part's?', the fortifications of Paris.
4. %^\\ may replace the Gen. with other names also, and
is always used after titles, as : ^ie 5lbnigiu Don Gncilanb, the
Queen of England ; ber SBilrgcnneifter bott Toronto, the Mayor
of Toronto.
5. When the Name of a Place is preceded by a common
noun, they are in apposition to each other, but the proper
name is not inflected, as : %\<i, ©tabt t^ottbou (not >»^}\ Sons
bon), the City of London, g. ber StabtSonbon. Da^ ^bnigreic^
^reu^Ctt, the Kingdom of Pru'ssia, g. beg ^bnigreic6§ ^reu^en.
6. Proper Names of Places are not used in the Plural.
73. Proper Names of Persons are now inflected in the
Gen. Sing, only, as follows :
I. If preceded by an article, etc. (which shows the case)
they remain unchanged, as : The letters of Cicero, bie -Bncfe
bc0 ©iccro.
--/^ 2. If not preceded by an article showing case, etc., those
ending in a sibilant, and Feminines in -c, add -(e)n§ in the
Gen. ; all others add -§ only, as : 3)lay, G. 33ia£Cn8 ; Souifc, G.
£Dui[c;i3 ; ^arl, g. ^axU.
Remark. — Surnames and classical names in a sibilant
now commonly take an apostrophe instead of -en8, as:
Dpi^' JBcvfe, Opitz's works.
74. Family Names are used in the Plural with added -8,
as in English, but without article, as : the Schmidts, 6c^mibt^
(meaning the members of the Schmidt family).
Further Remarks on the Declension of Proper Names and of Foreign'
Substantives will be found in Supp. Less. C, below.
7S] PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE GFNITIVE, 03
75. Prepositions Governing the Genitive. ^' "^^^^^ "" ir'
1. »flei;, on account of, on behalf of, for the^'f of- t<^.
(sometimes >/^z£/j its case), as : I remained at home on ^ '
account of (for the sake of) my child, (mcgctt mcim
^mbrii).
NoTE.-533e0cn always /o//ows the Gen. of the Pers. Prons which
are then written in one word with the preposition, and have special forms
ending in -t, as: meiuclniqini, for my sake; il)n1uir{irn, for her (their)
sake; unfcvhucflcn, for our sake, etc.; also with the Relative and
Denionstr. ttr '. bm(ii)(iucgen (Sing. Fern, and Plur. = 'for the sake of
whom, which, that,' etc.).
2- ^totb, during, as: We went out walking during the
rain (ma^rcitb beg Siegeng).
3' ^MJi, or anftatt instead of, as : He will come instead
of his friend (ftntt, or oilftott |einc0 <lrcunbc0).
The other preps, with gen. will be found in Lesson
Vocabulary.
give, present, make a present Henry, .^etnric^
of (foil, by dat. of person
and ace. of thing), fc^enfcn
library, bie Jbibliot^ef
bookseller, bcr ^ud)'f)anbrer
cousin (fem.), bie goufine
Elizabeth, ©(ifabet^
Europe, Guro'^a
festivity, bie ^eftltcf;!eit
Frederick, ^riebric^
Fred, Freddy, ^rt|
poem, ba3 ©cbtc^t
George, ©eorg
Greece, (ba§) ©riec^enlanb
capital (city), bie ^au^tftabt*
Ireland, (ba^) Orlanb
Margaret, g)?argarete
speech, oration, bie S^iebe
St. Lawrence, ber ©t. (@anct)
So'renj
Sarah, Sara
Scotchman, ber Sd^ottc
street, bie Stra§e
Thames, bie 3:f)emfe
work, bav3 9Ber!
William, Wiit^elm
broad, wide, breit
high, boc^
clear, !(ar
■■
1/
94
LESSON XVI.
M*75-
turbid, muddy (of water),
triibe
soon, 6alb
everywhere, iibcrafl'
Idlomn: to be on a visit at(aiiy onp's), nuf 33rfuil) feJn bei ; a.e a birth-
day pn'HtMit, )iiiu Wrburt«tafl.
EXEROISB XVI. V*
A. 1 . ^er .^aifcr toon Xcutidilanb i[t c^l^ Monig toon ^reu|cn.
2. ^ie 33ergc Giij^lanb^ unb '^vlanb^ finb nid;t \}od), aber bie
!!t3cr(^e bcr 2cl;tuci5 finb boc^ unb pracbtii^. 3. Wxx ftiibiercu bie
SBricfe bc^ (Siccro. 4. 3ara^:( (5ou[inc wax bci if)r auf Sefud;,
7abcr jct^t ift fie fmt. 5. ^JJiuUcr^ juarcn iicftcrn bei am, ahcx
h)ir tuarcn nicbt ^u .s>au[e. i;. ^^hvj ift bcr ^Jiame bes; 93iivger=
meiftcr^:^ uon i'onbon? 7. tUicin %ier f?at mi? 2effing^ !;liserfe
unb .f)cinc0 ^icber jum (ik'burtetiig gefcbcntt. 8. 3(uf mciner
SHcifc befudUc id; bie ©tiibtc 9onbon, ^ari^, Berlin unb ^Kom.
9. Tie ?^-liiffc (SanabivJ finb giof^, aber bie ^-tiiffe Wried)cnlanb^
finb tlcin unb furj. 10. 2Bir lucrbcn bie 'i3hunen fiir So))t>ie auf
J^ 2:ifa)^ ftcacn.. 11. ?yviebvidH3 Dhittcr fdicnft ibm j^fopftod^
9BcHe^~Tenn beute ift fein (^K'burtetag. 12. T)a^ 2Baffei be^
8anct Sovenj ift f'lar, aber ba^ Ul^iffcr bcr 2i)m\i ift trub'' 13.
2|uifc, bole '3opl;ic unb ©lifabctt) unb Juir lucrbcn eincn S^^ajievs
gang iin Slsaltie madicn. 14. ^^irfer 8c^^otte rebet uiel oon
Bumps' ©ebicbten. 15. <Qcinricf)^5 g-rcunbe Juerben balb nac^
(Sncjlanb reifcn, unb fie iucrbcn and) ^-ranfrcic^i befud;en. 16. Tie
iStraf^n ^orontoS luarcn n>abrenb ber ^cftlic^fciten fc^r fcfion.
11. SBe^o^alb ftubieren 3ie bie 9ieben beC^ Tcmoftfienc^? 18.
2lm -yrcitacj ober Sonnabcn^ mcrbcn \v\x nacf) i^ingfton reifen
urn 2|uifc unb 'OJtargarcte ju befud)en. 19. ©eorg ift je^t bei
feinon !i>ctter ?>'rit^ auf Befud;. 20. 2(m Sonntag h>aren toir
megen bc<^ Sturmcs §u .s^aufc. 21. ^d; ^abe in ber ®d;iueij nic^t
biel ii?ergniigen gcbabt, lueil id; auf ber ^lieife Iran! luar.
B. 1. Chg.rle3, bring Freddy and Max, and we shall play
in the garden., 2. We have looked for Wiiiiam's book every-
where, 3. The stjeets of Paris are wide and beautiful. 4.
^
/
/
A
Tfl]
DECLENSION OF PROPER NAMES.
95
Who has bought these gloves for Emma? 5. The city of
Ottawa is the capital oi Canada. 6. We live in Canada, but
our parents live in Germany. 7. We have presented flowers
to Ehzabeth and Mary. 8. You have Goethe's woH^ThT
your library. 9. I bought Schiller's Wil/iaw Tell at (bci) a
bookselT^s in Hamilton. 10. We learn in this book the
names of the gods of the Romans. 11. Ti,e Schmidts visited
us yesterday. 12. What is the cafiit^l of Switzerland.? 13
My father sent me instead of Max, because Ma.v was too tired'
14. Ihe city of Berlin is the capital of the kingdom oi
Prussia. 15. Would you be happy, if yo. were rich ?
ORAL EXERCISE XVI.
1. Wer ist Konig vci Preussen .? 2. Wo wr.r Saras Cou-
sine.> 3. W^as hat Ihr Vater Ihnen ;:um Geburtstag ge-
schenkt } 4. SJnd die Strassen Torontos immer schon ? 5
Weshalb waren wir am Sonntag zu Hause .? 6. Was i-',t die
Hauptstadt Canadas ? ~"^
76.
SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON C.
PROPER NAMES. -FOREIGN SUBSTANTIVES.
Further Remarks on Declension of Proper Names.
1. Proper name, of towns, governed by a preposition in the genitive
do not take -%, as : iiniueit A>n,„burg, not far from Hamburg
2. N..mes of persons, even if preceded by an article, etc., take -0 in
3- Feminine names frequently take -(e)ll in the dat. and ace, especialh
If they end in -t, as : tm\% d. a. l^ouifoH. ^
4. Family names (and even Christian names) formerly added -(f)n in
the dat. and ace, and are usually so found in the classics, as:
®octl)P, n. A. @oct()ei!
®rf)iacr, " ®d)iUcrii
tar(, » ^(n.|„
?effi"0, " ?effinge«
iN OTE. - This inflection is now obsolete and not to be imitated.
yi-i.-UA
g6
SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON C
[§§76'
5. In the case of proper names in the genitive, preceded by a common
noun as title :
(a) If the governing word fol/ovjs, the proper name takes the ,'enitive
ending, the title remaining undeclined and having no article, as: itijilig
^eini'iri)d ^i)I)nr, King Henry's sons.
{li) If the governing word precedes, the title has the article and the
genitive ending, the proper name remaining undeclined, as: bie So()ne
NoTK. — Tlie title Jpcvr takes n in the genitive in both these cases, as: ^errit
©cfimibtfl .fiaiiS, or bass ^ou9 bc3 .i^errn (5cf)mibt.
6. In the case of a Christian name without article, connected with a
family name ■)receded by Hon (indicating noble rank) :
(a) Wlu-n the governing wo. d follows, the family name only is de-
clined, as : J^vicbrirf) uoii >2rf)illcvg ©cbirfjtc.
{l>) When the governing word precedes, only the Christian name is
declined, as: Xic C'')i-btd)tc j^i-icbvtri)g uon >2d)iUer.
7. The names of the Saviour, SriiiS (Il)viftii?, usually both follow the
Latin declension, thus: n. 3cfitg ei)ii|tu?, g. 3efii C£l)rifti, D. 3efu (Sdrifto,
A. 3efum (Sl)riftuiii, Voc. -si'fu e()viftc.
NoTU. — Other biblical names, if without article, also follow the Latin inflection, espe-
cially in the gen,, as : 1>m Gunii,]eltuiit St. iDiattt^cit, the Gospel of St. Matthew.
77. Declension of Foreign Substantives.
1. Most foreign substantives fol low one or other of the regular form&
of declension, all feniinines being weak.
2. Most masculines and neuters from the Latin, ending in -u8, have
the classical i)lural, but with no case-inflection in either number, as-,
bev yjfobU?, the mood: N.ci.n.A. Sing. ifJiobua, Plur. iWobi ; bei imi,
the case: n.r.. \^. k. Sing. ^<k\U, Plu, . (^afug ; baS Scm^JUg, the tense :
N.O.I). A. Sing. Icmpug, Plur. Iciiiporo.
Notes — i. Others change -uS to -en in the plur., as: @lo&U'3, Plur. @Io6en (such
forms ad ©hluiffe should be avoided as barbarous).
1, I)cr 'iWXtii, has pi. bie Jltlaiitcrt.
.1 The Hebrew words (S:i)cnib and (£erap^ have the Hebr. PI. in -lm and take -g in
the gen. sing.
3. Neuters in -0 from the Greek, and in -um from the Latin, take -%
in the gen. sing., and change - a or -um into -en in the plur., as : ba«
2)raino, the drama, g. Sing. 3)ramag, Plur. $)rauie;t; bag 3:l)emo, the
GENDER ACCORDING TO MEANING.
80] „...„,..
97
theme, Piur. Sljemen ; bag ^nbioibuum. the indiviHuni n ^- v •
Note. -5)aS Jllima, the climate, has pi. filimato or iiUmate,,
4. Neuters from Latin Sub.stantives with plur. \n~ic add «in tl.
smg., often dropping the Latin sing. ter.inLion and fol" . f Tn
-ten, as: ba.s 2Jblici-l,(ium), the adverb, g. Sin^r ^VbUc4,(iiM,l ^/ ^A
J^erh cn; ba. iHU-ticip(i„,„), the participle, o. ^/.f ^a i 'n^"^^^ '
?Jarttcip,eii; ba« goffil', the fossil, Piur. mLt ITmZaf I'
mineral, /'/«r. iDJincralicn. '>"nmcn, Oa(< iUduieial , the
Notes. - i. These words formerly followed the full form.; nf T ,f;„ a i •
matican^rr.. (e. g. «crO„m, etc.) retaining these forms ^if ^''" '"'^"^""' ^^^'«-
guageftr^'n. th' ""'"^^ °' "''"* '^^^^^'"^^•■"" ^-- --^- lan-
guages take -i m the gen. «,ng, and add -^ to form the piur as • PnrhS
Note. - Italian words are also found with their proper foreign plur., as Soli, (JontJ.
78. The Article v/ith Names of Per.sons.
Besides the cases specified in ^ 7^ i nhnv^ fK« • , •
names of person.s : ^^' ' '^'' '^' ^•'^'^'^ '^ "^''"^ ^^^h
I. Colloquially ^x,A familiarly, as: ilcr itillt btC l\niif(> '
^_^2. Jhen they denote a ./..., as: ein il^eUi„flton, a j.^^W/^,) Wel-
3- Before names of paintings, etc., named from a pers., etc as- em
W'oj^ir"^ ^<) Rafae, ,. .e.u. .u ^^, thL (^J ^^
LESSON XVII.
G€NDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. - INtT^CATIVE PRONOUNS
AND ADJECTIVES.
7a The Gender of Substantives is determined in German :
r. by Meaning; or
n. by Form (Ending, etc.).
80^ I. Gender a,s dethrmined bv Meaning.
I. Masculine are names of :
Sa) Males, as : bcr %\^m, the man ; bcr ^elb, the hero.
I
98
LESSON XVII.
[§§80
rii
Remark : But diminutives in -j^cn and -Icitt are neuter, as :
bail 9}?annlein or ^.Itdnnd^en.
,(^) Seasons, months and days, as: ber .^erbft, the autumn;
ber ^anuar, January ; bcr ^Jiittirodi, Wednesday.
(c) Poi7its of the cofnpass, as: bcr 5?Drb(en), the north.
(^) Precious stones and mountaifis, as ; bcr 2)tamant, the
diamond ; bcr 33rodfen, the Brocken.
2. Feminine are names of :
-{a) Females, as: bic %xa\x, the woman; bic ^^cd^ter, the
daughter.
Remark : But ba§ SBeib, the woman, is neuter ; also diminu-
tives in -r^cit and -fcill, as: bag ^orf)terrf)en, the h.^tle
daughter; baS 5!)idbchen, the girl; bag l^rduldn, the young
lady.
(J)) Trees, plants, fruits -^wdi flowers generally, as : bic @id)t>,
the oak ; bic 'Jfcffel, the nettle ; tic 33irne, the pear (but bct
3().>fcl, the, apple); bic 3iofe, the rose.
if) Cardinal Numerals used as substantives, as : blc (Sir.§,
the (number or figure) one ; bic Sed;^, the six (at dice, etc.).
3. Neuter are names of :
{a) Metals almost always, as : bag 33Iei, lead; bag @ifen, iron.
Note.— %tx 3ta()(, steel, is Masc.
(/;) Collectives almost always, as : bag S^^ol!, the people ; bag
.'peer, the army ; especially when beginning with @c-, as : bag
©ebircje, the mountain-chain.
{c) Countries and provinces almost always, as : (bag) ©uro^a,
Europe ; (bag) (Sanaba ; islands, cities, towns, villages, etc.,
always, as : (bag) .^pamburc^ ; (bag) ^Ttom, Rome.
Remarks. — i. Names of countries and provinces in -ci,
-au and -5 are feminine, as ; bic ^J'iirfd, Turkey ; bic Scpitjcij,
Switzerland.
82] INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 99
2. Names of countries, etc., when not neuter, always have
the definite article (see § 44, 3).
{d) Infinitives, letters of the alphabet, and other parts of
speech (except Adjectives used of persons, and Cardinal
Numerals; see 2, c, above), used as Substantives, as- bag
Sacben, the (act of) laughing; bag %, the (letter) A; \su ^c^
the I; bag i5]emi unb "^^i IVotx, (the) 'if and (the) 'but.'
Give the gender of the following Substantives, assigning the rule in
each case: %^xx[, (S^oib, Gvbbt'orr, Soditci, Giiropa, m^, I'onbdn, lura
ati.bui (mby), 2BaUad)ei (Wallachia), Uurciljt, ^iiben (South), ©efb'
81. Interrogative Pronouns and Adjectives.
The Interrogative Pronouns are :
1. loclt^cr? which?— Defjni IE.
2. mcr? who.? ;
3. ttia§r»what?i— ^^^'^™^^-
82. aOcIr^cy? is declined after the biefer Model, but, as
Profioun, lacks the Gen., thus : ' '
Singular.
FEM. NEUTER.
Joerrf;c tuelcf;cg
MASC.
Nom. iuc(rf)cr
Gen.
Dat. lueld^cm
Ace. Jucldicn
Plural.
ALL GENDERS.
ti'cld;c, which
Jt)eld)cr lycld)cm iueldicn, (;(o,for)which
iueld;c Joeld^cg ioelcf^c, which
Remarks.- I. ^V'ldier ? asks 'which of a number?' of
persons or things, and agrees in gender with the noun follow-
ing it, as :
iK>eId;cr toon bicfen SKauucrit iff f)ier gemefen ?
Which of these men has been here .?
aScIc^cg i)on biefeu ©iit^crn I^abcn Sie ge^abt ?
Which of these books have voii had.?
I
ICX)
LESSON XVII.
[§§8a-
2. The neuter sing. tuelc^CS is used before the verb 'to be,'
irrespectively of the gender or number of the subject (com-
pare the similar use of es, § 39, i), as :
Which is your sister (brother)?
illkld)cg i[t '^bxi '3d;it)eftev (^^r Sruber) ?
Which are the children of the count?
^r5}eld;c§ finb bie llinbeu bc§ G)rafen ?
83. Jfi^cr ? and lua£l ? are used in the Sing, only, and are
declined as follows :
MASC. AND FEM. NEUTER.
Nom. luev, who? iua^3, what?
Gen. lyef)o« (or iuco), whose, of iuc[feu (or n)e§), of
whom ' what
Dat. tvem, (to, for) whom — -^
Ace. luen, whom h.ia^3, what
Remarks. — i. 9Bcr is used of persons only, for all gen-
ders and both numbers, as:
S/ng. M. aiHT ift biefer 9Wonn? f. jene Jprnu? n. biefe^ ^inti?
F/ur. iBer finb bicfe 9Kliiincr? etc.
2. 9Bo^ is not used of persons.
3. 2Bo§ is never used in the Dative. In the Dat. or Ace.
with prepositions, ti)a<§ is replaced by mo (luor before vowels),
placed />e/(?/r the preposition (compare § 38, Rem. 5, for
similar use of b(l), as :
3Borauf fi|cn <Bk? On what (whereon) are you sitting?
ffijouon^jf^redjen Si"'? Of what (whereof) are you speaking?
Note. — SBoi'iun? =for what, wherefore, why? not tuOrum.
4. With prepositions governing the Gen., )t)cg is used before
the preposition, as: m^\)alb, tUCgtuegcu ? on what account,
wherefore, why ?
5. The neuter Gen. rt^effen? is rarely used, except as above.
>
[§§8a-
b'tobe,'
ect (coni-
, and are
R.
?
n)e§), of
r all gen-
;. or Ace.
5 vowels),
m. 5, for
tting ?
peaking ?
in.
ed before
account,
as above.
86j. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. lOt
6. gBttg is sometimes used (as interrog. ^rt'z'.)for tcarum, why?
(For the use of iimg for ettoa^, see under ettoa^, § 149, /.)
84. The Interrogative Adjectives are :
1. ttJcli^cr, toefr^c, mit^t^? which? what ? — Definite.
,^2. ma fiir cin, tou fur cine, ttiog fur cin ? j what kind of "
J'Jur.tOa&^UV? \ -INDEFINITE.
85. JHJcrr^cr, as Interrogative Adjective, follows the
biefer Model throughout, as :
Singular.
FEM. NEUTER.
h)e(d;er h)elcf;e^
lDeld;cr ioeld^em
hJeIrf)e tt>e(c^e^
Examples :
Which man was here ?
9!BeIi^cr gjknn tear ^ier ?
What books have you "i
JKScIi^c i^ucf;er ^a6cn (2ie ?
Remarks. — I. ^BelrfnT is also used in exclamatory sen-
tcnces (= what!), sometimes without termination, as :
Jfi>cl(^(i'6) Iscriptiiflen ! What pleasure !
2. The stem treld; is also followed by ein, and is unin-
flected, as:
2Bclr^ cin Sturtn ! What a storm !
86. In declining tt)a§ fur eiu, JtJa^ remams unchanged,
while ciu agrees with the substantive, ><; :
N. M. 9Ba6 fiir cin C^ut ? a. 2Ba^ fiir emeu .§ut? What kind
of (a) hat ? D. 2Ba§ far eiuem ^^\xi ? To what kind
of a hat ?
MASC.
Nom. ioeldjer
Gen. h)e(d;e^
Dat. h)eld)em
Ace. h)eld;en
Plural,
ALL GENDERS.
tt)eld;c, which
tt)eld)er, of which
toeldKu, (to, for which)
hjelc^e, which
102
LESSON XVII.
8^
G. F. 2Ba6 fiir eincr 33Iume ? Of what kind of (a) flower, etc.
In the Plur. ftiog fiir is used without article, as :
N. A. gSaS fur ^inber ? What kind (sort) of children ?
D. Ja>o^ fur mnbcru ? To what kind of children ?
The cin is also omitted before names of materials and
other words used partitively, as :
Bog fiir C^ol^ •?
What kind of wood ?
JK?tt§ fiir 2i? ttcr?
What sort of weather ?
87.
Indirect Statements.
Direct Statement or Quotation :
He said:' I am tired.'
Indirect Statement or Quotation :
He said (that) he was tired.
1. An Indirect Statement is always a subordinate rlause.
2. In Indirect Statements, the Verb is usually in the Sub-
junctive (especially if the verb of the principal clause be in
the Impf.), and has the same tense which it would have, if
statement were made directly, as :
©ie fagten, bafi eg luabr fcl (i.e., fie fagten: „^% ifl ira^r/-
pres:), They said that it was true.
@r anth)prtete, bafi ev geftern angefommen fei (i. e., er anth)or=
iiiz : „"scf) bin gefteru angefonimen/'/^^-), He answered,
that he had arrived yesterday.
Note. — In English, on the other hand, a past tense is always fol-
lowed by a past tense, as in the above examples.
3. The conjunction bcfj may be omitted in such clauses,
which then have the construction of a principal sentence
(i. e., verb in second place), as :
©r fagte, cr fci geftern angefomtrten.
68]
INDIRECT STATEMENTS AND QUESTIONS, lOj
88.
Indirf.ct Questions.
Direct Question :
Who is there ?
Indirect Question ;
He asked who was there ?
1. In Indirect (or Dependent) Questions the con-
struction IS that of a dependent clause (verb last).
2. If the verb of the principal sentence be in the Impf
that of the question will be in the subjunctive, and have the
same tense which it would have in the direct question, as :
Sagen Sie mir gefariigft, luo jcner .^crr iuof;nt (Dir Qu •
2Bo U)of)nt jener .t)err?/;ri-.), Tell me, if you please
where that gentleman lives ? '
er fragtc mid;, \oMm Mm biefcit .sperrcu mein 33ruber ict He
asked me which of those gentlemen was my brother '(Dir
Qu. : Seld;er, etc., ift %\jx 33ruber .? pres.)
VCCABULARY.
V The article will be supplied by the pupil, according to preceding
rules, where not given.
to use, braud^en
march, marfd^ieren
save, retten
answering, b— 2(ntit)orten
paying, b— ^e3af)Ien
jewel, precious stone, b—
©belftein
asking (of questions), b—
?^ragen
Italy, ^talten
fire-place, b— ^amin'
elm, b— Ulme
blue, Diau
light, easy, leic^t
useful, nii^Itd^
buying, b- <Raufen
life, b— Seben
learning (act of), b- ,*^ernen
lily, b-Si(ie
market, ber m<xx\i
morning, ber 9J?orgen
afternoon, ber 5Racf)mittag
plum, b-^flaume
emerald, b— ©maragb'
winter-month, ber 2Bintermo'.
valuable, precious, tDertbDfl
generally, usually, getDo^nlic^
etc., u.f.hj. (=unb fc tueitcr,
. . i. e. " and so furthei ")
164
LESSON XVII,
t§§a^
,>•
7
^adlibill''' I !" ^^^ "corning, moriieng or bc^ 9J?orgen§
force. ) ill the afternoon, nadjmittaije^ or be§ Oiarfimitiagg
The Cardina' Points of the Compass (= bie bier §immelg=
gcgenbcn): North, (bcr) ^Jiorben; Soutli, (bcr) eiiben ; East,
(ber) Often ; West, (bev) iBeften.
Names of the Months : ber S«nuar, ber ^ebruar, ber SKarj,
ber 2(prir, ber max, ber ^u'ni, ber ."su'Ii, ber 3tuguft', ber ©e^* •j
tember, ber Dttober, ber 9iobember, bcr Tejeniber.
Idiom : I saved his life, lit. I saved to or for lilm the life,
3* rcttcte < I) III ta» i'cbc ii. See § 44, 6 (A).
EXERCISE XVII,
A. 1. 2Ber ^ai ba§ iBilb t>Du meinem ^JZeffen iiber ba€ ^amin
geljcingt? 2. 3Ba^ fur eineii ^ifr^ l)at '^^oham auf bem 9Jiar!te
gcfauft ? 3. 2(uf luelc^e ^an! lucvbcn toir xuvi fe^en ? 4. 28el=
c^em 5lnaben ge^brt bicfe^S Wkf]cv ? G^5 gebi)rt iiBitbelm. 5. ^eneg
3)iabdieu auf ber ©trafse ift ba^3 T:brf;terdH'n unfere^ 9iac§bar§.
6. i\?a^ mad;en 6ie {jcinbbniid), tDenn Sie einen ^eiertag fiaben?
7. 2)e<^ gjJorgen^:^ ftubierc id>, unb be§ ^Radnnittag^ rubre ic^ auf
bem ^luffe. 8. iBUcf^e^ finb bie Xiamen ber fieben ^Tage ber
2Bod)e? 5!Kontag, u. f. iu. 9. 3Bem fdjideu ©ie biefen Srief?
10. 3d; fd;ide i(;n bem Sucbbaubler. 11. SSorilber ^aben bie
.^errcu gclad;t ? 13. Jl^ev ift bie Jrau mhcn meiner Sfante auf
bcr l^anU 13. Sfia^S fiir 5(ugen l;at ber ©tubent? ©eine STugen
finb blau. 14. 3Sorau§ mac^eu unr©d)iffe? 9Bir mac^en fie
au§ eifen unb 2ta^l 15. ^^'arl ift mit bem Semen feiner 2tuf=
gabe nidjt fertig. 16. Borauf Ijabcn bie ed;uler fic^ gefe^t?
eie ^aben fi^) auf bie Sriide gefe^t. 17. 2Bag fiir ©belfteine
l)ahm eie ba ? 18. ^d; haU einen ^iamaut(en), einen 9^ubin,
unb einen ©maragb. 19. ®a§ §eer ift bon ^ranfreic^ nac^
^talien marfc^iert. 20. 5fJa^)Dleon fd)idte bem ©rafen einen 2)ias
mant(en), lyeit ber ©raf ibm bag ^zh^n gerettet batte.
£. 1. Which of your sisters are learning German ? 2. For
whom is this diamond ? It is for the countess. 3. Which
8^
GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES.
105
are your pens ? 4. The asking of questions is verv easy, but
the answering is very difficult. ^S.^The north, the'south, the
east, and the west are the tour cardinal points of the compass.
6. Which of these students is Mr. Braun .? Z f heXoy buys
himself pears and plums in the market. 8. My uncle has
^ three children- a girl and two boys. 9. June, July, and'
.> August are very hot in Canada. 10. Buying is pleasant, but
paying is very disagreeable. 11. Iron and steel are 'very
useful. \% The rose and the Hly are flowers, but the oak
and the elm are trees. IH. I blame Mary because she wastes
her m^ney. 14. What would you do with your money, if you
were rich? 15. We always hoped that William would learn /
German.
ORAL EXERCISE XVII.
1. Wo hangt das Bild von Ihrem Neffen .? 2. Wer ist das
Mn.dchen vor unserm Hause .? 3. Weshalb schickte der
K6n:g dem Burgermeister einen Diamant(en).? 4. Was fur
Augen hat der Student.? 5, 1st das Fragen leicht.? 6. Was
wurden Sie machen, wenn Sie einen Feiertag hatten ?
LESSON XVIII.
QE-NDER OF SUBSTANTIVES (concluded).- GENERAL REMARKS.
-DOUBLE GENDER.
89. Gender of Substantives as determined by Form.
I. Masculine are :
(a) Substantives in -irj, -ig, -ing, -m, almost always,
as : ber iiranir^, the crane ; bcr ^onig, the honey ;
bcr ^yrembHng, the stranger ; bcr ^tem, the breath.
(p) Those in -c{, en (not infinitives), -er, generally
\ (names of agents in -c
8
Iways^ ,
SiJffer,
io6
LESSON XV III.
8g-
■
the spoon ; bcr (iJarteil, the garden ; ttt ©drtner,
the gardener.
(^) Monosyllables — generally (^but with many excej>
tions), as : bcr ^rieg, the war; ber %^<^, the day,
etc.
2. Feminine are :
{a) Substantives in -fi, -\t\i, ^fclt, -^aft -m% Axi,
ahuays, as : bie €)rf)meic^elci, flattery ; bie Scions
|cit, beauty; bit ^anfbarfctt, gratitude; bte
greunbfi^aft friendship ; bie .•ooffnung, hope; bie
(S^rafin, the countess ; bie ^reunbiu, the (female)
friend.
Note. The termination in is used to fomi feminine names from
masculines, usually with Umlaut, always so in monosyllables.
ib) Those in -t (especially after a consonant), -enb,
generally, as : bte Sltaft, strength ; bte 3ufunft,
the future ; bte ^ugeitb, virtue.
{c) Those in -e, generally (but with many exceptions),
as : bie .^ol;e, height ; bie (SJrb^e, size.
{d) Some in -nifil (see also under neuters), as: bie
3Silbni8, the wilderness.
ie) Foreign Substantives in -age, -ie (French); -if
(Greek); -citj, -tiit, -(t)iott, -ur (Lat.), always
as : bie Gouroge, courage ; bie ^JJelobie', the melody ;
bie gjiufif, music; bie ^lubieitg', the audience;
bte UniDerfitiit', the university ; bie SiZation', the
nation ; bie '^cXViX' , nature.
3. Neuter are :
(a) Substantives in -i^cit and -letn (diminutives), al-
ways (without regard to sex\ as : bai 5[)?annJejn,
bag %xi\x\wx, bal aJliib^en.
H
GENERAL REMAKK3 ON GENDER.
lo;
(p) Those in -turn, almost always, as : bad Gfriftcnhim,
Christendom, Christianity.
(c) Those in -nig, -fol, -fcf, generally, as : bag GrefgniS,
the event ; bal 3c^icffar, fate, destiny ; bag mu
\t\, the riddle.
(d) Those beginning with the prefix @c- unless other-
wise determined by meaning, termination, or
derivation, as: bad OJciiuilbc, the painting; bag
@cmad>, the npartment; but: bcr Gebattcr, the
godfather ; bic OjcDatteviii, the godmother; bte
©efea|(^aft the company; bcr ©edrnm^, the
usage (from bcr ^xawd), masc. monosyll.).
Give the gender of the following substantives, assigning the rule in
each case: il^ciUDcu, .^>iit, itifdjo, itilnftlcr, ^'aiiMdjaft, tiffin (vinegar),
«(innc 0)rld,enf, ^iiuiblei::, ^hmhxx% ^iird)t, .^nfcn, ©eimtter, finger,
Slpfel, ^orb, Uuiocrfitnt', SIftrolog, £eppid|, ^^^(jilofop^ie.
90.
General Remarks on Gender.
1. Gender agrees, as in English, with sex, except in bag
ai^eib, in Diminutives in -j^cn and -kin, and in certain
compounds (see below).
2. Inanimate objects, which in English are all alike neu
ter, may be of any gender in German, as determined by
Meaning or Form, as : bcr §ut, bic 33(ume, bag ^ud^.
3. Each substantive of which the gender is not determined
by the n-les should be learnt with the Definite ^^rticle as
the sign of its gender.
4. Compounds are of the gender of the last component
<hence bog ^rauenjimmcr, the woman, is neuter), except
bcr 3t6f{^cn, disgust, from bic ec^eu.
bic Siniimiri, the answer, from bog 3i^ort.
bcr SKittltJOr^, Wednesday, from bic Soc^e.
LESSON XVHI.
IH^
Also certain compounds of ^ut, which are given in Ap-
pendix L
5- The exceptions to the foregoing lists will be found in
Appendix I.
91.
Double Gender.
Tiie gender of the following substantives (with others
given in App. J.), varies with their meaning :
tai 39anb,
Singular.
bet 33anb, volume
ribbon
bond, tie
ber S3auev, peasant
bafli ^aucr, bird-cage
bcr Apeibc, heathen >
bic ipeibe, heath )
bcr ©d)ilb, shield
bag Sd;ilb, sign (of an inn, etc.) 6c^ilbcr
bcr <2ee, lake
bic ©ee, sea
bcr l^or, fool, G. be^ 3:^oren Z^oxtn
bad Z^ox, gate, G. be8 ^^orc8 zifoxt
]
Plural.
S3anbc
S3onber \ See § 64, above.
Sanbe
Sauern
SBaucr
^eibe.i
©c^ilbc
©ccen
Vocabulary.
(The pupil will supply the article in German where not given.)
to visit, study (at a univer-
sity), befucften {-\- Ace.)
collect, gather, fammeij!
peasant, country-man nv^^^^
93auer
bee, b^ 33iene
relate, tell, crjafjten
paint, tnalen
(female) neighbour, b4f9^cici^!
barin - ,A \
bedroom, b — Scblofjimtner
' '1 '-•
•/■■
:Hjb'i'
e ^
T ^
pi m
its
^o
DOUBLE GENDER.
loy
little^son, b6K,@5t).t(^en
sun, b — Sonne
city-gate, town-gate, b —
(Stabtt^or
ingratitude, b— Unbanfbarfeit
way, road, b - SBeg
wind, b— 3Kinb
rage, fury, bic ^vX
sign, ba«( 3fif^«"
terrible, terribly, furc^tcrlid^
strong (^heavily, of rain, etc.),
ftvxrf
willingly, with pleasure, gem
#
boat, bfl« 59oot
friendship, b-^C. ^rcunbfd^aft
inn, b— (SSafthau«
district, locality, b— ©e'genb
history, story, b— 0e[c{)id;te
waiter, b— .^cUner
piaro, ba^ ^laoier'
vice, ba^ Cafter
ksson, b— Settion'
people, bie I'eute (pi.)
love, b~ fiicbe
mathematics, b— !0?at^ematif
(sing.)
so, fo
8. A week ajfo to-day, ^f ute » p r a d) t lafjeii (Dat.).'
3. A week from to-day, ^eute ii b e r ad)t %a^t (Ace).
EXERCISE XVIIL
A. 1. D^ne (bie) ^rcunbfc^aft, (bie) i)offmmg unb (bie) SieBe
iDuvbe bag Scbeu fcl^r traurig fein. 2. Unfere ^l^ettcrn luareu ^eute
Dov acTit 3:agen bei ung. 3. (I)ic) erf^meid^elei i[t fcin ^eic^eu ber
^rcunbfdiaft. 4. Si(f)elm, >xm beine geftion. 5. Sag fur
33anbe ftnb auf bem 2:ifc^e in ^l;rer SBibtiotbef ? 6. (gg finb funf
S3anbe bon Sdjifferg 2Berfen. 7. Tie 2But beg ©turmeg ift
furd)terlic^, aber bag Sdnff ift [d)on im ^-^afen. 8. Sernt %hx
timber gcrn 9Jiathematif ? ??ein, aber er lernt gem 2)eutfc^
9. 2BeId;em gjidbc^^en gel^orm biefe 9iinge, ber mo^m ober ber
©ara ? 10. Tie Tantbarfcit ift etne ^Tugenb, aber bie Unbaitf6ar=
feit tfi em 2after. 11. ^avl ed>mibt befuc^^t im Sinter bie Uni*
berfitat, aber im ©oinmer JDof^nt ec bei feinen ettern auf bem
Sanbe. 12. ^eneg ^raufein \)<xi i^rer ^reunbin ein 33anb mm
(Seburtgtag gefdjenft. unb \\sx^. ^vnmSm ift v>Am;* k.u^ ...c-:.w...
la res' f ~ e^ <1 r ^ ' '"' ^' ' "■■•""" [vy* 5u[ntv?;u.
irf. 3)ic[e §anbfc^u^e ge(;oren nidU mir, fie gc^dren metnem
^
/
/f
no
<B(i)W(
LESSON XVIIL
»x-
:. 14. ^er ^alcr ^at ein ©cfitlb fiir ba§ ©aft^au« "oox
bem 3:f)or nematt. 15. 3Jiarie,, f^aft bii bic ©anber fur beinc
SJiuttcr gefauft ? 9Zein, aber ic^ loerbc [ie morgen ober am TtxtU
tt)oc^ !aufcn. 16. ^ettner, ^olen ©ie mir gefaffigft ein ?!)?effer
unb eincn Soffef. 17. dv i)at mir feine STntttJort auf meinen
33rief gcfdiicft. 18. 2Ba§ fur cine 3JJeIobie f^ielt ba§ 3:oc^terc^en
unicrer 3Sirtiu auf bem tlauier? 19. 3Senn id; ©elb ^atti, fo
tDiirbe ic^ einen X^ppid) unb ^Borbange fur mein (3cf)Iafsimmer
faufcn. 20. JBcnn maxk i^re Seftion nid^t lernt, fo h)irb fie in
bcr ©d)ule nid;t gut antttjorten.
-^. 1. This country-man lives on a heath near the lake.
2. The tempest is terrible, but the ship is already in the
harbour. 3. The stranger praises this locality on account of
the beauty of the landscape. 4. What kind of a flower is it ?
It is a violet. 5. We met a stranger on the way to the uni-
versity, f). Your aunt is my neighbour. 7. Who are these
people ? They are the parents of my cousin. 8. The mother
relates to her little son the story of the little man in the
wood. 9. Have you heard the words of the orator? 10.
During the tempest the wind shook the house. 1 1 . The girl
hangs the bird-cage before the window in the sun (ace). 12.
The bees gather honey from the flowers upon the heath, and
the peasant sells it in the town. 13. When we hastened
home yesterday, it was raining heavily. 14. I shnll not wait
for George, because I have no time. 15. When I resided at
(hd) my uncle's, I was always at home at ten o'clock in the
e/ening.
ORAL EXERCISE XVIIL
1. Wer war heute vor acht Tageu bei Ihnen ? 2. Was fiir
Biicher haben Sie auf Ihreni Tische ? 3. Lernen Sie gern
Mathematik? 4. Was macht Karl Schmidt im Winter?
5. Wer spielt jetzt auf dem Klavier.? 6. Was werden Sie
heute iiber acht Tage machen ?
94]
RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
Ill
LESSON XIX^
/
RELATIVE PRONOUNS.- IRREGULAR WEAK VERBS.
I 92. Relative Pronouns.
/ The Relative Pronouns are :
/
j I. bcr, bie, bttg, ) who (of persons), whiCh (of
I 2. tuel^er, toell^e^ toK(^Ki»/ ) things) — Definite.
V
Vi
5. ttcr^ who (= he who, whoever)
4. ttltt0, what (= that which, whatever)
}-
Indefinite. C
^■^
'. bcrdciAcn' i ^^^ ^^^^ °^ ^^°"^ ^^ which — Indeclinable.
93. ^cr, btc, bag, as Relative Pronoun, is declined as
follows :
Singular.
MASC. FEM. NEUTER.
Norn, ber bie ba§
Gen. oeffcn bercn bcffen
Dat. bem
Ace. ben
ber
bie
bem
bag
Plural.
ALL GENDERS.
bte, who, which, that
bercn whose, of which
bencit, (to, for) whom, which
bie, whom, which, that
Observe. — These forms are the same as those of the Defi-
nite Article, except the added -en of the Gen. Sing., Gen.
Plur., and Dat. Plur.
94. SBclrfjcr, as Relative Pronoun, is declined after the
biei'ei Model, but, like the Interrogative ivelc^er^ lacks the
Genitive.
r
112
LESSON XIX.
ut
9»-
95.
Remarks on bev and melt^er.
I. ^er and toell^cr refer alike to both persons and things,
and are interchangeable, except that :
(a) In the gen., bcff en, beren, beffen, //. beren (not trelc^eS,
etc.), are always used (see § 82, above).
(^) ^cr is used when the antecedent is of the First or
Second Person, the relative being, in that case, always fol-
lowed by the Personal Pronoun, as :
I, who am your friend,
^c^, bcr id) ^hx ^reunb Hn,
(or : ^c^, bic ir^ ^l)ve ^reimbin Bin).
i
O God, (thou) who art in Heaven,
D ©ott, bcr bu im ^immcl bift.
2. ^rr and miaiiCV, referring to inanimate objects, are usu-
ally replaced by tHO (iuor- before a vowel) ^<?/J7r^ a preposition
(compare § 83, 3, above, for similar use of ttJO for h)a^), as:
The table, on which {rivhereofi) the book is,
^er %:\\^, auf tt)c(cf)eni, or ; luorauf ba§ 33uc^ ift.
3. The Gen. beffen, etc., always precedes its case, as :
A tree, the leave.- of which are green,
(Sin 33aum, bcff en ^laiv'.r griin finb.
96.
Remarks on met and ttin§.
I. JBScr and nia§ are declined like the Interrogative Pro-
nouns luer? and iua§?
2. fflRpt is used of persons only, for all genders and bo
numbers; lua§ never of persons.
§es
REMARKS ON ftjer AND ftjag.
"3
3- SBcr and tool, as relatives, are .Wc^«,V^ and com/>oun^
m meaning, and include the antecedent, as :
aBcr nic^t ^oren Jt)iIT, mu^ fU^ren,
(He) 'who will not hear, must feel.
99Bag td^ ^f)nen gefc^irft ^abe, i[t nicbt biel
What (= that which) I have sent you, is not much.
4. afier never has an antecedent, since it includes the ante-
cedent itself ; therefore
never say : ^er mam, tott i)kx toar,
but: ®er mann, merrier ^ter War,
(The man who was here).
5. 99B0§ never has an antecedent, unless the antecedent be
a neuter adjective or pronoun, such as nic^t§, nothing • ctm^
somethmg; aUc^ everything , or a phrase, in which ca.es h,al
always replaces bcl, as :
Nothing (that) I say, etc., md)t§, toa§ ic^ [age, etc.
All (that) I have, etc, 2[ae^, tnol id; ^aBe, etc.
The best (that) I have, etc., Xa^ ^efte, lt,a0 id) ^abc, etc.
He does not learn his lessons, which (i. e. ' the not
tOttl fe^r [c6abe tft.
6. Ever = 0U($ or immcr after Joer or t»a§, as :
9Ser eg aur^ (immcr) gefagt ^at, Whoever has said it.
7. The Relative loag, like the Interrogative, is not used
after prepositions in the Dative or Accusative but is re
placed in the same way by ma(r); with prepositions governing
the Genitive, ltic0 is used (see § 83, 3, above).
Observe. - The re/afive must never be omitted in German
as It so frequently Is in English, hence : '
{Engl.) The man I met,
{Germ.) ^er 3Kann,
mclr^cm (bem) id^ Bcgegnete
r:
114
LESSON XIX.
[§§97-
;
sn
E! < j
97. ^edgleti^cn and hergletf^en are indeclinable words,
the former referring to a masc. or neuter noun in the sing.,
the latter to fera. or plural nouns, as :
@in 9)iann, bc§gleicf)en (dat.) id; nie begegnetc, •
A man, the like of whom I never met.
^aben i3ie jcmal^ bc§gleic^en getjbrt ?
Have you ever heard the like of that ?
Gtne^rau, bcrgleid;en, etc., A woman, the like of v.hom, etc.
^inber, bcrgleic^en, etc., Children, the like of whom, etc.
98. Construction of Relative Sentences.
I. Every relative sentence is of course a dependent sen«
tence, and as such must have the verb at the end, as :
The wine, which I have sent you, is very good.
^er 2>]ein, bcu id) J^bneu gcfr^irft ^abc, ift febr gut.
3. The Relative must immediately follow its antecedent,
when the latter (whether subject or not) precedes the verb of
a principal sentence, or when the separation from the ante-
cedent would cause any ambiguity, as :
!Dcr W\.<x\\\\ iveld)cr <},i\\^\\\ ()icr anir, ift mcin Dnfcl. The
man who was here yesterday is my uncle.
Das! 33ud^, ivcld)e»? (2ic mir fd)icftcu, l)abe id) ttid)t gcbraud)t,
I have not used the book you sent me, but : 3d) ^abe
t>a^ 33uc^ ntd)t gcbraud)t, ivel^eg u. «. t».
3. In sentences with tuer or n.>o§, the relative clause will be
counted as the first member of the principal sentence, which
will therefore begin with the verb, e. g. :
2Bcr ni4>t f)i)rcn \x>\\\, muj fii^len,
He who will not hear, must feel.
Note. — In German, every dependent sentence or clause is separated
from the sentence on which it depends by a comma. The relatives
tt)eld)er and ber must therefore always be preceded by a comma.
Ml
IRREGULAR WEAK VERBS.
The
115
®®- Irregular Weak Verbs.
r. A Few U'eak Verbs, besides adding the termination -te
to form the impf., and -t to form the P. Part., also change
the Stem Vowel m the Impf. Indicative and P. Part, but
not m the Impf. Subjunctive. They are :
Infinitive.
Brennen (intr.), to burn, be
consumed with fire
fennen, to know, be ac-
quainted with
ncnnen, to name
rennen, to run (at full speed)
fenben, to send
tucnben, to turn
Impf. Ind. Impf. Subj.
£-onnte brcnnte
P. Part.
gebrttnnt
fannte fcnnte gefannt
nonnte
rannte
( [onbte
( fenbcte
( tonnbte
( tDcnbcte
ncnntc
rennte
fenbcte
trcnbcte
gertttunt
Oevonnt
I gefonbt
1 G^fenbet
I geiDanbt
1 getDcnbet
Observe: i. The double forms of the last two verbs of
which the shorter are in more general use.
2 The three following verbs have also a consonant change
witfi Umlaut in the Impf. Subj. : ^ '
Infinitive. Impf. Ind.
bnitgen, to bring ^^ar^te
bcnfen, to think ^^^^^
biinfcn, to seem (impers.) ( ^"^"^^^
(beud;tcn, bciud^ten) ) (t'rtud)te)
I biinfte
Remarks. -I. Compare the English: bring, "brought-
think, thought. ^ '
2. The forms bauc^te, gebciuc^t, are as yet more common
than beucfUe, gcbcucf;t, but the latter are according to the now
official orthography.
Impf. Subj.
bvoi^te
biit^te
bcuii^te
(bduc^te)
bunfte
P. Part.
gebrai^t
gebor^t
gebfudjt
(gebaud)t)
gebilnft
I
Ii6
LESSON XIX.
[f99
-i
3. Besides the Inf. beuc^ten, there is also a Pres. Ind,
3. sing, beucijt.
Note. — The German Perfect often replaces the English Past or
Imperfect (see also Less. XLIII.), as :
I sent you the book yesterday,
3cl) ^atc 31)ncn flcfteru bai< iyud) gcfc^irft.
I was working yesterday the whole day,
3(f) ^obc gcftern beu flanseu Xag geartiettet
Vocabulary.
consider, bcbcnfen (trans.) acquaintance, bie33efanntfc^aft
order, bespeak, beftellen postman, ber ^oftbote
think of, bent'en an (+ ace.) title, ber %M
or bcnfen (+ gen.)
recognize, erfennen
like to hear, gem fjoren
divide, share, teilen
burn, consume with fire
(trans.), Derbrennen
wish, iuiinfdfjen
apply to, fid) irenben
an
all, everything, -JIKe^
unhappy, unfortunate, uns
gliicf(id;
improbable, unn)af)rf(i)einlid)
just now, ibcn, foeben
diligently, industriously, flei^ig
easily, readily, lei^t
really, loirflid;
(-|- ace.)
Idiom : It Is a pity, @« ifl fd)afce (adj.).
EXERCISE XIX.
A. 1. !I)er.^aii£r fattbte einen Sote.n mit ber gflac^ridit nad^
33erlin. 2. 'Bcv nidjt fur mic^ ift, ift ioiber micb. 3. ®ie 2eute,
bei bcnen id^ auf ^efud; getDefen bin, finb ®c&ottm. 4. §at bet
tettner mu^ gebvaAt, h)aa loir braud(>en? 5. Der ^oftbote t)at
mir bie 9iad)rid)t gebrad)t, loorauf id) loartete. 6. ^d) er!annte
\t)ixtl\d) beu ^errn nid)t, ber gefteru luit meinem ^Setter in ber
^ird)e Wax. 7. 2)ag ^ferb be^3 C3cneral§ raunte urn ben ^reil.
8. ^er "trembling,, beffen Sefan.ntfd^aft id) tu madden tDitnfcbe^
mirb morgen l)ier fein. 9. ®a^ ^euer brannte im Dfen unb ber*
II
§9»]
/
IRREGULAR WEAK VERBS.
h;
brannte ba§ ^ofj. 10. $©enn er imglucflic^ mar, mrxW er ft*
immer an mic^, ber ic^ fciu g^rcunb luar. 11. ^c^ barf;te Beute an
bie ©efc^ic^le bie eie mir geftern erja^Itcn, unb ic^ ^abe febr
baruber gelac^t. 12. §at ber Wiener bie Sucker nacf; §aufe
0ebrarf;t bie tc^ beim 33uc^f,anbler gcfauft \)aU? 13. 2«enf(6 baft
bu le h,M)t^ tpa^ bu bift? 14. Wxr baben bag §0(3 fc^on t)er=
brannt, bag mir bor ac()t ^agen gefauft f^aben. 15. 3)ie[eg i^inb
ergalilt immer ju .f^aufe, mag eg in ber ©c^ule ^ort. 1(5 Meg
joag er ^^, teilt or mit mir, ber ic^ fcin ^reunb bin. 17. 03(auben
Jie bie @e[c^icf)te, bie Aperr 33raun m^S ,r,ablt Ijat? 18 ^ie
^rau, beren ^od;terc^en bei ung auf 33e[uc^ ift, mirb morgen nacb
^^Z^[7J'-\J^' ^"' ^'' "^ ^^^ ®*«^* 9^^^^-* ^«&en, ift fe^
unn)a{,rfcr;einric^. 20. @g regnete geftern, mag febr fcbabe mv
ba iDir auf bem Sanbe luaren. '
^. 1. Do you hear what I say to you ? 2. My father al-
ways burnt the letters which were no longer useful 3 He
has not told me what he wishes. 4. The man, in whose /
hou, , we lived, is the brother of our neighbour. 5. Here is '.
the ueat which you have ordered. G. The honey which the
countryman brought us yesterday is not good. 7. Do you
know the artist who has painted this picture? 8. People
who are not industrious do not become rich. 9 We readily
beheve what we hope and wish for. 10. :^hat^ were you
thinkmg of when you met me yesterday ? 1]. H^ye you all
you need? 12. I believe that I know the man who is in
front of the house. 13. I always burn the newspapers I do
not need. 14. The students to whom these books belong do
not study them diligently, which is a pity. 15. I do not
know the song, the title of which you have just named. 16
What was burning .? The gardener was burning leaves.
ORAL EXERCISE XIX.
^ 1. Was machen Sie gewohnlich mit den Zeitungen, die Sie
nicht mehr brauchen ?. 2. Wer hat Ihnen diese Nachricht
us
LESSON XX.
[§§ioo
gebracht? 3. Woran denken Sie ? 4. Was machen Sie,
wenn Sie einen Feiertag haben ? ."?. Glauben Sie jede Ge-
schichte, die Sie horen ? 6. Was erzahlt das Kind ?
LESSON XX.
DECLENSION OF ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVES:- STRONG FORM.
-CONJUGATION OF STRONG VERBS.
100. Declension of Attributive Adjectives.
The boy is good — Predicative Adjective.
The good boy — Attributive "
Remember: That Adjectives used as Predicates are not
varied (see § 14).
101. Every Attributive Adjective either is or is not
preceded by a defertninatiire word (i. e., article or pronominal
adjective), which shows gender, number and case by distinc-
tive endings.
102. First Form. — If not preceded by any such deter-
minative word, the Attributive Adjective follows ihe Strong
Declension, which is the same as the biefer Model through'
out, thus :
Strong Declension of gut, good.
Singular.
Plural.
MASC.
FEM.
NEUTER.
ALL GENDERS
Nom.
gutcr
gutc
gutcS
gutc
Gen.
gutcg
gutcr
gutcs
guicr
Dat.
c3utcui
flutcr
gutcm
gutcn
Ace.
gutcn
gute
gutcg
gutc
toa]
STRONG ADJECTIVE DECLENSION.
Substantives with Adjectives.
119
Singular.
Nom,
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
MASC.
good wine
flitter ifi^ein
fluteg (cit) 2Bein(e)^
gutcm 2Bein(e)
guten 2Bein
FEM,
good soup
0Utc (Suppe
Quter Suppe
0utcr 6uppe
0utc <Suppe
NEUTER.
good glass
gutcg ©lag
0utc8(cn)@(afe»
gutcm 63raf(c)
gutcl mo<^
Plural,
ALL GENDERS.
Norn." gutc 2Beine, ©uppen, @[dfer
Gen. gutcr 2Beine, (Sup|)en, ©lafer
Dat. gutcn SSeinen, (2u))pen, ©lafern
Ace. gutc 2Beine, ©u^jpen, ©lafer
Observe: In this form, where there is no other word to
show the gender, etc., of the noun, this work must be done
by the adjective, which therefore has as full a set of end-
ings as possible.
Remarks. - i. The Gen. Sing. Masc. and Neuter generally
has -en mstead of -eg before strong substantives, as: quten
2Bemc§, gutcn 33rotcg. ^ "
2. Adjectives in -c drop the -c of the stem in declension,
as : mube, tired : miib-er, miib-e, mub-cg, etc.
3. If several Adjectives precede the same substantive,
all follow the same form, as :
gutcr, alter, rotcr 3Sein, etc.,
good, old, red wine.
I
LESSON XX.
[§§ 103-
103. Conjugation of Strong Verbs.
Verbs in German are either Strong or Weak. The Weak
Verbs, which indicate change of tense by the addition of a
termination (usually 7vithoiit change of Totael), as: lob-en,
lobtc, gelob-t have been treated in Lessons IX, X.
104. The Strong Verbs, on the otner hand, indicate the
change of tense by a change of the Root Vowel with-
out adding a termination, as : fing-en, to sing, Impf. fong;
biciben, to remain, Impf. blicb.
105. The Past Participle in Strong Verbs ends in -en
(not -et), usually also with change of Vowel, as: fing-en, P.
Part, gc-fung-tn; blciben, P. Part, ge-blicb-cii ; but gcbcn, P.
Part, ge-gcbcn.
Remark. — This change of Root-Vowel is called 'Ablaut,
and is common to English and German. Compare Eng. sing,
sang, sung ; give, gave, giv-en.
106. Paradigm of Simple Tenses of fingCtt, to sing.
Principal Parts.
Impf. fong P. Part, ge-fiing-cn
Subjunctive.
Present.
icf) jlngc, I (may) sing, etc.
bu fingcft
er fingc
In fin. fing-en
Indicative.
id; fingc, I sing
bu jing(e)ft, thou sing-est
er fing(e)t, he sing-s
h)ir fingcn, we sing
ibr fing(e)t, ye sing
fie fingcn, they sing
"0/
Icapnr
it)ir fingcn
i^r fin get
fie fingcn
Imperfect. .
(Ind. Stem withUmlaut, where posisible.)
fong(e)ft, thou sangst
bu fdngeft
I
107]
SIMPLE TENSES OF filigcil.
121
Subjunctive.
er fiinge
fie foncjen
Indicative,
er fong, he sang
hJir fnniicn, we sang
i^i- fonn(c)t ye sang
fie fongcn, they sang
Imperative.
f|nG(e) [bu], sing [thou]
fingc er, let him sing
fingcii luir, let us sing
fing(c)t [ifn-], sing [ye]
fiiujcit fie, let them sing
Ohserve : The Person endings are <he same throughout a.
m tJ,e paradigm of (o6cn, in which - ,c of the InL ila
flno'L; ' ^""^ ^"""' '^' ^' = ""^ '^ ^'•-■' "y 'h^
107. Table of Endings of Strong Verbs in
Simple Tenses.
Present.
Indic.
Sing. 1 . — c
2. -(e)ft
3. -(c)t
Plur. \ . — fn
2. -(C)t
3. —en
SUBJ.
— c
-fft
— c
— cu
— cu
Imperfect.
Indic.
-(c)ft
— Clt
-(c)t
— ni
Imperative.
Observe: i. The changed Vowel of the Imperfect, and ab-
sence of person endings in i. and 3. sing.
2. The Umlaut of the Imperfect Subjunctive.
3- The persistent -c of the Subjunctive (Imperf.
9
as well as Pres.)
if
122
M'.SSON XX.
m »o7
Remarks. — i. The -c of the termination in the 2. Sing,
of the Tres. and Impf. Ind. is only retained in Strong Verbs
after b, t, or a sibilant, as : id> rcit-c, hi vcit-cft ; id; prci|-c,
hi V>vci)-C[t; and in the 3. Sing. I'res. Ind., and 2. Plur. Pres.
and Impf. Ind. after t, i, as. cv rcit-Ct, i^r vcit-ct, '\i)X ritt-et ;
but cv vreif-t/ ^^J^ V'^cif-t. ^^)^ Vrief-t.
:>.. Tlie compound tenses of a Strong; Verb are formed pre-
cisely like those of a Weak Verb, some being conjugated
with f^abcn, others with fcin ; hence it is only necessary to
know the Inf., Impf. and P. Part., and in some cases the
2. Sing. Imper.,in order to conjugate a Strong Verb throughout.
108. Paradiom of Compound Tknses of fingClt, to
sing (with hahcn) ; foOcn, to fall (with feiu).
Indicative. ^ Subjunctive.
Perfect.
id; ^abc cjefungen, I have sung ic^ ^abi ^cfungett
bu ^aft cjcfungcn, thou hast sung, etc. bu babeft gefimgen, etc.
id) bin gefatten, I have (am) fallen, etc. id) fci gefalien, etc.
Pluperfect.
(Imperf. of { ^;.^^ ^- + P. Part, of ^ ^^^^ J ;
id» f)atte gcfungen, I had sung, etc. id^ fjattc gefungen, etc.
id) wor gcfatfen, I had (was) fallen, etc. id) ttjiiirc gefaffeu, etc.
Future.
(Pres. of luci-bcu + Infin. of | "Jjj,^ J )
tc^ tDcrbe fingen (fatten), I shall sing ic^ hjerbe fingen (fatten)
(fall)
bu H?irft finaen (faKen), thou wilt sing bu iuerbeft fmge*- ''fatten),
(fall),
etc,
etc.
1
"Ol COMPOUND TKNSKS OF fillflCtl, faaCrt. 12^
Indicative.
r* i> Subjunctive,
Future Pkrf'ect.
' 'f'" > / fallen i J
icf>^h)a-be iicfiuuien l;aben, I shall have irf. jocrbe gefungen l)ahtn
bu tuirft ticfungcn hahcn, thou wilt
have sung, etc.
tc^ tueibc gcfaricji fciil, I shall have
(be) fallen, etc.
c„.„ Conditional.
Simple.
(Impf. Subj. of tucrbcii + Infin.
of ftngen, faacii)
tc^ Jourbe fingcn (faacn), I
should sing (fall), etc.
bu tucrbeft gefungen
^fl&cn, etc.
icf; toerbe gefallcn fcin,
etc.
COMPOUNl\
(Simple Coad. .f \ ^f ^''" '- +
P. Tart, of fiitgcn, fnl(cn)
ic^ iDiirbe gefungen baben,
etc.
ic^ n)urbe gefairen fcin, etc.
Infin. Perf.
gefungen (gu) l^aben, to have sung
gefaffcn ju fein, to have (be) fallen
^ 109. Compound Verbs. — Compound Verbs are con-
jugated like the simple verbs from which they are derived-
those having one of the insepara le particles bc-, cr- mti-
ent- gc- tier-, gcr- do not take the prefix ge- in the P Part '
as : 6c-|ingen, P. Part. 6c-fungcn (compare fie-jaWen, P. Part'
IlC-3af)lt, § 35, Rem. 6), .nd in the Inf. take gu /^e/ore the
prefix; other compounds take the prefix ge- and the particle
JU ^e/weeri the prefix and the verb (Part, or Inf. respectively).
110. The Strong Verbs are divided into classes, accorHing
to the 'Ablaut, ' or Vowel-changes, of the root (see § 105 Ren
above). These classes, with the verbs belonging to eacii, ar.'
given m the following Lessons (XXII-XXXI).
124
LESSON XX.
[Silt
111. Shorter Forms of the Conditional.
The Impf. and Plupf. Subj. are frequently used in all
Verbs instead of the Simple and Compound Conaitional
respectively, thus:
id; \)aiit = id) h)urbe ^abcn ; \(h fiinge = ic^ ti)urbe fingen ;
\6) ^ttttc ^ti)aU = '\d) iDuvbc Qdjabi l;aben; ic^ ptc gcfungcn =
id} iuiivbc gcfungcn Ijahm.
Note. — These shorter forms are always to be preferred in the Passive
Voice (Less. XXI), and in the Modal Auxiliaries (Less. XXXIV).
Vocabulary.
help (serve) one's self, fid;
bebitnen
acknowledge, confess, be!en=
nen
catch cold, fid) erfcilten
nominate, appoint, ernennen
fill, fUlkn
spread out, fid) toerbveiten
bough, branch, ber 2tft*
ink, bie Xintc or 2:inte
company, bie 0)cfcllfduaft
governor, ber C'kniDerneur'
concert, ^a^ .Slonjert'
queen, bie ^^onigin
paper, ba^ ^^a^ier'
advice, counsel, ber dlai
singer, ber ©anger, bie <Sdn»
gerin
liberal, generous, freigebig
friendly, kind, freunblid^
fresh, frifc^
glad, frot)
hard, Ijaxt
hoarse, {;eifer
bad, fd}Ied;t
black, fd;marg
brave, valiant, tapfer
true, faithful, trcu
weighty, important, h)ic^tig
at last, finally, enblid^
yes (emphatic), yes indeed,
ja luobt
■' — J ~ ^ - _j,.-^,.-. ^ ,
Idlomn : To appoint (as) governor, ^uin ©ouoerneur ernennen ; cheer-
fully, fiuhen Wllltc* (genitive with ac'.vi rbial force); f;ooil morning, guten SWor*
gen (.1. e., 3d) n>Hn|d)e 3lj"e» c5"e«« 9"*en SWorgciv).
EXERCISE XX.
A, 1 . ?Ii}?dn 2)ifeffcr ift t^on ciuteni^ bartem ©table, 2, .f)Dbc
Saume Ijohtw, gehjb^nlic^ gro^e Ifte. 3. 2i3ag fiir ^ferbe ^oben
S">1 SHORTEE FORMS OF CONDITIONAL. 125
©ie gefauft? 3cf. f,aU td^iMtje imb toeifee !pfetbe defauft 4
9)ienf<^o, u^tma, i„ jccm §«ufe. 7. .Jaben Sie rtmniS
re fantcs. 8. fpiev ift gutcr Safe unb fri *«« i ob t to
Be .ene„ eie fi*. 9. 28er bu bift ,eiot beU Sefeaf* f.. " o'
12 jcf, ^nBe fluted ^Uap.er, nber meinc gebet ifl f*tec6t. 13 Jiie
fl.nbcr lu'bten me.neu DnM, .„ei( er nie miibe tourbe, itmen MSne
©efd^d, en ,« ersaMen. U. Sie ^„6en e„blic| befannt, bcftS
Unre4.t^«ben. 15. 3* (;a6e mid, evf«rtet; toenn i* jeV tow
X: 'te?*l\'"-"- "'•• 3^ ^"^' w°" » ' '«« '^
roL ^ "'^ '■"■' '° "'"■^^■" ""f"' Se^rer «„«
^. 1. Have you black ink or red ? I have black. 2 Rich
people are not always generous, and generous people a're not
always nch 3. Wh.at kind^of neighbours have you ^ We
have fr,endly neighbours. 4. Please fill my glass with pure
fresh water. 5. High mountains and beau.Ld valleys spread
out before our eyes. 6. I have something in,portant to say
. This mother buys her children something useful. 9. Have
you whtte paper or blue > I have white, but my brother has
blue. 10. I hke to hear the singer, who sang at (in) the
concert yesterday. 11 Mv si^tPr H,'^ „„► • s ^ V»V me
because she was hoarse if If h T T^ u'" '""'''''
she would have su„r- "• " ""^ ''"' "°' •=-" '— ■
^^
) -
t/Vv^O
/',
126
LESSON XXI.
[§lia
ORAL EXERCISE XX.
1. Weshalb liebten die Kinder meinen Onkel ? 2. Wer
wohnt in jeneni Hause? 3. Was hat die Mutter ihren Kin-
dern gekauft ? 4. Was fiir Papier haben Sie fiir mich
gekauft ? 5. Warum sangen Sie nicht ? 6. Womit haben Sie
mein Glas gefiillt ?
1 -'i
I
LESSON XXI.
THE PASSIVE VOICE.
112. The Passive Voice is formed by means of the various
tenses of the auxiliary verb tticrbcn, to become (see § 19) -f-
the Past Participle of the Verb to be conjugated, as in
the Paradigm below.
Principal Parts of merben :
Infin. ttJcrbcn Impf. imirbc (toarb) Past Part. geiDOrbcn
Note. — The perfect tenses of Uierbcil are formed with feilt (see
§ S3. «), Perf. 3cl) bin gciuovben; Plupf. id) tuor fletuorbcii, etc. For the
formation of the future and conditional, see fcin (§ 52).
Paradigm of the Passive Voice of loibeit^ to praise.
Indicative. Subjunctive.
Present.
(Pres. of lucrbcn + ^- Part, of loben.)
I am (being) praised, etc. I (may) be praised, etc.
icf) trerbe
bu mirft
er t»irb
\mx toevbcn
il;r iuerbct
fie iuerben
gclobt
id) yt>erbe
bu tuerbcft
er hjerbe
luir iuerben
tf)r iocrbet
fie iuerben
gc(o6t
§II2l
PASSIVE VOICE OF lobeu.
127
Subjunctive.
Indicative.
Imperfect.
(Imperf. of uierbcii -f- P. Part, of lobeii.)
r was (being) praised, etc. 1 might be (being) praised,
ic^ h)urbe (iuarb)
bu trurbeft (tyarbft)
er luurbe (toarb)
h)ir tDurben
i^r luurbet
fie luurben
gc(06t
id) toiirbe
bu tourbeft
er Juiirbe
tvix iDiirben
il)v tuiirbet
fie iuiirben
[etc.
gefulit
Perfect,
(Perfect of luerbeit -f P. Part, of lobeit.)
(Part, of uierbru omits gc-)
I have been praised, etc.
id) bin
bu bift
ertft
h)ir finb
i^r f eib
fie finb
> gefoBt iuorben
I (may) have been praised,
ic^ fei
bu feieft
er fei
l»ir feien
i^r feiet
fie feien
1 [etc.
I
I
gefoM loorben
Pluperfect.-
(Plupf. of uierbeii + p. part, of (obcn.)
I had been praised, etc. I might have been praised
.^n.arge(aatu>orben id; ^are 9erol.h.orbm [1
bu tDarft gelobt irorben, etc. bu tucireft gelobt tr)orben, etc.
Future.
(Future of njcrbeii + P. Part, of (obcn.)
I^shall^be praised, etc. i shall be praised, etc.
lu; ..cr.c griooi luerben ic^ h)erbe gcfobt t.crben
bu imrft gelDbt lucrben, etc. bu luerbeft gclobt lucrben etc
li
i
128
LESSON XXI.
iza
Indicative. Subjunctive.
Future Perfect,
(Fut. Perf. of uifiben + P- Part, of lobcn.)
I shall have been praised, etc. I shall have been praised, etc.
id; tucrbc plobi iuor^cii [ein - icf) iucrbe flcloftt tuorbcn fcin
bu \v\x\i gclobt morben fein, etc. bu iuerbcft gelobt tuorben [ein
etc.
Conditional.
(Cond. of lucrbeii + P. Part, of loben.)
Simple.
I should be praised, etc.
id} iuiirbc ^tloht lucrbcn
bu iuUrbeft gelobt iDCvben, etc.
Infinitive.
(Infin. of luerbcu + P- Part
of tolien.)
J^res, to be praised
ficloBt (^u) iucvben
Perf. to have been praised
gclobt iuorbcn (511) fein
Compound.
I should have been praised
ic^ Juiirbe gdofit iuorben fein
bu toiirbeft gelobt njorben fein
etc.
Participles.
(Part, of tucibeii + P- Part
of loden.)
jRres. being praised
gclofit lucrbenb
Pas^. been praised
gclobt iuorben
Remarks.
Subj. (see §111
longer forms wit
Imperative.
(Imper. of UH'ibcn + P. Part, of tobeu.)
be praised, etc.
iuerbe gcIoBt
toevbe cr gelobt
irerben wix gelobt
iocvbet gelobt
iuevben fie gelobt
-I. The shorter forms, i. e. Impf. and Plupf.
and Note), are commonly used for the
luiirbe in the conditional.
§iia]
PASSIVE VOICE.
129
2 Observe the omission of the 9c- in the P. Part, of iuerben
(morHcn for gc-h)orben) when used as auxiliary of the passive
3. The personal agent with the passive voice (which is
the s^^^Mtoi the active verb) is denoted by the preposition
tion (Engl, by), as ; j f i'
S)er unartige ^nabe irirb tion feinem 2eF)rer beftraft.
The naughty boy is being punished by his teacher.
4. The auxiliary participle loorben is omitted whenever the
state of the subject may be regarded as still continuing, thus:
®ag .filing ift ^zhawi,
The house has been (is) built (and is still standing).
5. The Engl. ' I am,- I was/ etc., as part of the passive
Araxihary 'to be,' must be rendered into German as follows:
{a) By the proper tense of tocrbcil when they are equivalent
*o 'I am being,' ' I was being,' etc., as :
The child is (i. e., is being) punished by its parents,
3)a^ 5!tnb hJiri) bon feincn (^rterii k'ftraft ;
The dinner was being served, when we arrived,
3)aa gjattag^effen ttiurbe fermert, aU h)ir anfamen;
o^' when the verb, being turned into the active voice, is in the
Jsresant or imperf. tense respectively, as :
f The boy is (was) always punished by the teacher.
Passive: \ ^^^"^ ^'^ ^^ (^^s) naughty,
1)er ilnabe toirb (louvbc) immer bom Secret 6e=
^ ftraft, luenn er unartig i[t (mar) ;
The teacher always punishes (pres.) or punished
Ac^he: \ _ (^"iP^-) the boy, when he is (was) naughty.
njenn er unartig ift (ipar),
tm
^
iiaucn.
I30
LESSON XXI.
[§§"a-
I
Hi
I
I
Passive.
Active :
(b) By the proper tense of fein (with or without n)orben, see
last Remark), when they are equivalent to ' I have been,
*I had been,' etc., or when the verb, being turned into the
active, would be perf. or pluperf. respectively, as :
f I am (= have been) invited to tht
1 ^c^) ilu jur 0efcUfcf)aft eingcloben OoDr.'.; : j
( They have invited (perf.) me to the party,
t '^QXi |at mic^ gur ©e[eKfc6afl cingctobcu.
( The dinner was (= had been) served, when we
Passive: •< arrived,
( ©ae ^Uiittag^efjen \mx fcrbicrt, alv^ Joir anfamen;
. . ^ , ( They had served (plupf.) the dinner, etc.,
t '?)Uxi \^^iW biv3 'ilJiittaij^efjcn fcrtiicrt, u. f. it).
The following examples will serve to show more clearly the
proper use of the various fc ..is of the passive :
" (a) Tic Sciben lucvbcu jel^t ge[d)Ioffen, The shops are
being shut now (^present).
{b) Die Scibcu finb bicfe ^l\>od;e fritter qefc&Ioffen loorbcu,
The shops have been shut earlier this week
{perfect).
(c) ®ie Sdbeu fhlb je^t gefc^Ioffen, The shops are (and
remain) shut (past state, continuing in the
present),
{a) !Der Solbat tmivbc ben ciner ^ugel ticrttiunbct. The
soldier was wounded by a ball (a ball w^ounded
him, imp/.),
(b) ®er 3olbat toor toon einer ^ugel uertuunbet morbcn.
The soldier had been wounded by a ball
(p/uper/.).
(c) !Der ©olbat Itiot fd^hjet beritjunbet. The soldier was
I.
2.
ly
«?ii\T^a»-<:illF ^afz-^li*^
i (and still suffered from his
wound : past state, continuing in Xh^past).
iiSi
LIMITATIONS OF THE PASSIVE VOICE.
I3»
' (a) 1)icfc ^^riicfe hiurbe Dor jebn ^af>ren gebaut. This
bridge was built ten years ago (they built it
then, that is the date of its being built, im/>/.)
{b) 3)ie[c iBriicfe luttr bor je^n ^atjren cjcbaut. This
bridge was built ten years ago (and is still
standing: past state, continuing in th^ present).
Exercise on the Preceding Rules.
A. Turn the following sentences into German: 1. This house was
built by my father. 2. My window is broken (flcbvOC^cn). 3. The child
is washed (gclDaid)Cii). 4. This man is esteemed by everybody (iebeniiaun).
5. The garden must be sold. 6. The enemy was beaten (gcj(f)Iagen).
B. Turn the following sentences into the passive : 1. liffiovaitS macl)en
n)ir 9«effer? 2. 9Jobert ©tetjciifon I)at bic 5Sictorin^53ractc bci 2)ioiitrcat
gcbaiit. 3. HWciii SBrnbcr l)at mir biefc Uf)r gcfrfienft. 4. 2)ie g-cinbe bom-
bavbiertcu bic '^tnbt. 5. ©cr ?ef)rer f)atte ben ^nabeu beftraft, tueit ber
tnabc fein iBud) berlorcn (lost) t)attc. 6. 2)ein ilSater Jyirb bic^ (oben.
113.
Limitations of the Passive Voice.
I. Only the direct object of a transitive verb can be-
come the subject of the passive verb ; thus we say in the
Active : Mt\\\ 3Satcr liebt mir^ ; and in the
Passive : %^ trerbe toon tneinem 58ater geliebt.
But the sentence :
* I have been promised help by him ' =
0iUfc ift mir Don i^m Derf^roc^en (promised) foorben,
since in the
Active : ©r \^oX mir ^iilfe t)erf^rorf)en (promised),
^iilfc is the direct, but mir the indirect object. Hence it fol-
lows, that
2. Intransitive verbs can only be used impersonally in the
passiv 2, thus ;
132
LESSON XXI.
!*§ "j-
I am allowed == ^g tuirb mir crloubt (Lat. mihi per-
tnittitur) ;
He has been helped = 0^8 ift i^m gel^olfcn h)orben.
This impersonal passive is also used in expressing an action
without specifying any agent, as :
(^0 tumfcc gcfteru 3lbcnb Did flcton^t,
There was a great deal of dancing yesterday evening,
NoTK. The pion. c3 in these constructions is omitted if any other
mennber of the sentence precedes the verb, as:
3Mtr toirtJ cdauM ; ®cficrn 3lbi'nb tourtie, etc.
114.
Substitutes for the Passive Voice.
I
'J'he passive voice is much less frequently used in German
than in English, particularly in the longer forms. It is often
replaced, especially with intransitive verbs :
(a) By the indefinite pronoun lUttU (Fr. i 7, see Less. XXVII),
with the verb in the active voice, as :
SOJan glailtit tf;m nid;t. He is not believed ;
9Wan !aun tf)m nic^^t troucn. He cannot be trusted.
ip) By a reflexive verb, as :
^er (2d()luffcl iuirb fid) finben. The key will be \ound;
and particularly with laffen, as :
3)a^ (ii^t fit^ Ieid)t madden. That can easily be done
Vocabulary.
to conquer, overcome, ero'bern
believe, gUiuben (intr.^ -}- dat.
of person)
wait (for), tt)arten(auf 4- ace.)
workman, bcr 9tv'beiter
visit, visitors, ber ^efuc§
mill, bie 5Rul^le
beef, ba§ ^inbfleifd^
courage, bie .^a^^fcrfeit
untruth, falsehood, bie UnV
Jt)abrt)eit
as, at^
lU]
THE I^ASSIVE VOICE.
m
/^
X
once, ein'mal carefully, forg'fciltig
this evening, IjeUiC Hbenb severely, ftreng
as soon as, fobalb' little, menig
Idioms: As a child, when (I etc. was) a child, al« ftinb; Thlg house
Is for sale (lit., to sell, to be sold), bicfe* Jpaui ift ju oerhiufer; to have
visitors, Sefud) ftabcn.
EXERCISE XXI.
A. 1. ^iefe§33iIbn)urbei)onmcinered)Jt)e[tcrgemart,unbe^ift
Diet gelobt Juorben. 2. J)ie3tabtiftliomG5encral bombarbiertunber*
Dbert iDorbcn. 3. W\v h)crbcn beftraft loerben, locnn iuir unfcre £ef=
tton nidjt forgfciltig lerncn. 4. ®ieSabcn finb gefc^Uo] jen, benn f)eute
ift (ein) ^etertag. 5. ^ft ba§ .t>a»^ nebcu ber mii^U berfauft?
6. ^ait)of)l, eg tDurbe geftern tjon ^fjrem 9teffen gefauft. 7. 33Dn
h)em ttjurbe ba^ ^inb gercttct, al§ baa <r>i^"^ brannte? 8. (gg
iDurbe Don eincm ^(rbcitcr gcrcttet, lueld)er iuegen fciucr 3:a^fer!eit
Don ben Seutcn gclobt lyurbe. 9. 2Bare ber ilnabe larf; ^aii[e
ge)4ncft toorben, loenn er nid;t unartig geirefen ioiire? 10. g^eben
bem ^aufe unfercg S^Znc^bars toivb :ine ^ird;e Q^hant 11. Gg
hjurbe geftern 2(benb Diel bei una gefungen unb gefpielt, benn h)ir
flatten 53e[ucr;. 12. ^[t ba§ ^inbfleifd) gefc^iicEt .uorben, tuelc^eg
ic^ befteirt fjabe? 13. ®er Sef)rer fagte, ba^ er mit meiner mieit
gufrieben fei. 14. X)a§ ^ilb ioare bon b;u ^iinfttern nic^t gelobt
hjorb'-n, loenn eg nic^t fe^r fc^on ge^efen iocire. 15. 3llg ^inb
h)urbe ir^ immer Don meinem SSater ftreng beftraft, tocnn irf) eine
llnioa^rF>eit [agte. 16. Sffiirb eg ung eriaubt ^,^*{inlm$tufgaben
gu Dcrbrennen, \vm\ \m bamit fertig finb? 17. ©g trirb ^eute
Diet gef))ielt, aber nientg ftubiert, jueil ioir morgen feine ©c^ulc
l)ahm. 18. @g ift mir nidjtg baDon gefagt ioorben. ly. 2Bir
tDurben nid;t gelobt, Joeil Wix nxd^t flei^ig iuaren. 20. SoOalb bie
Seltionen getcrnt finb, iverben iyir einen ©pa^iergang madjQn.
B. 1. Our parents love us. 2. We are loved by our parents
3. By whom was this letter brought? 4. It was brought bj
a messenger. 5. Our house isv.built, and we are already
living in it. 6. Is the dinner served ? No, it is being served
i i
134
LKSSON XXII.
K"5
now. 7. Was the soldier in the hospital wounded, or was he
ill ? H. He had been wounded by a bullet. 0. The carriages
of the count will be sold to-day. H). His horses are already
sold. 11. Why is this boy not believed? 1:2. He is not
believed because he once told an untruth. 13. It is agreeable
to be praised. 11. My sister is learning the song, which was
sung at (in) the concert yesterday.
ORAL EXERCISE XXI.
1. Wer hat dieses Rindtleisch gebracht? 2. Wann wird
uns erlaubt werden, im Garten zu spielen ? 3. 1st das Haus
neben der Kirche verkauft ? 4. Wird heute Abend viel stu«
diert werden? 5. Von wem wurde der Knabe nach Hausa
geschickt? 6. 1st dieses Bild zu verkaufen?
LESSON XXII.
STRONG
DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES: WEAK AND MIXED.
VERBS: Bcijcn MODEL.
116. Declension of Adjectives: Second Form.
If preceded by the Definite Article or by any deter-
minative word of the bicfcr Model, the Attributive Adjective
follows the Weak Declension, and takes -c in the Nomi-
native Sing, of all Genders, and in the Accusative
Sing. Feminine and Neuter; otherwise -••n throughout
t^us-
Weak Declension of gut, good.
Singular. Plural.
MASC. FEM. NEUTER. ALL GENDERS.
Nom. gute
Gen. gutCtt
Dat. gutcn
Ace. gutm
gutc
Qutcn
gutcn
gute
9utc
gutcn
gutcn
6ute
gutcn
gutcn
gutcn
guteu
§ »I5J WEAK DFXJLKNSION OF ADJIXTI VES.
135
Subs IAN iivKs with Adjectivks.
NKUTKR.
the good child
ba^ Qiitt ^linb
bc« gutcit itinbcv3
bcm (\i\tm .sjiiibc
bn^ gute fiinb
Singular.
MASC. KKM.
the good man the good woman
Norn bcr gutc 5!)iann bie gutc ^-vmi
(/en. bc-^ gutcn ^JJ?anne«5 ber gutcn Jyrau
Dat. beni giitcn 'DJJanne bcr gutcn ^x<x\\
Ace. ben gutcn anann bie gute ^rau
ALL C.ENnKRS.
Norn, bie gutctl ^Uianncv, ;yvauen, 5l1nber
Gen. ber gutcn ^JJiiinner, Jrauen, Alinber
Dat. ben gutcn ^33Mnncrn, ^^rauen, Alinbern
Ace. bie gutcn 9JKinner, ^rauen, .<(linber
Observk : Words of the bicfcr Model having (as far as pos-
sible) a full set of endings showing gender, etc., the adjective
has as few of such distinctive endings as possible.
P'urther examples :
bicfcr gutc 50Jauu, this good man
biefe^ gutcn 3)iaune^, of this good man, etc.
jenc gutc g'rau, that good woman
jener gutcn ^rau, of that good woman, etc.
toc(l^C§ gutc iliub, which good child
ioelcfieg gutcn itiubce, of which good child, etc.
Remark. — Two or more adjectives qualifying the same
substantive follow the same form (compare § 102, Remark x
above), as :
bcr gutc, altc, rote 3Sein,
gutcr, alter, roter SSein.
Decline througl.out in German : the sick child; that high tree • which
long lesson; this beautiful, broad stream ; that youn- wonan • thi= lazv
^orse; which tired boy. ' ^ "' "' ^
13^
LESSON XXIt.
(§?ix6:
] 16. Third Form. — If preceded by the Indefinite Ar-
ticle or by any determinative word of the iircitl Model, the
Attributive Adjective follows the bicfcr Model in the Nom-
inative and Accusative Sing, of all Genders ; otherwise,
it takes -cil (i. e., follows the Weak Declension) through-
out, thus :
Mixed Declension of pt good.
^ingu/ar.
Plural.
MASC.
FEM.
NEUTER.
ALL GENDERS
Nom.
gutcr
gutc
gutcS
guten
Gen.
guten
guten
guten
guten
Dat.
gut en
guten
guten
guten
Ace.
gutcu
gutc
gutcg
guten
■;i.
■Si
Substantives with Adjectives.
MASC.
Singular.
FEM.
a good man
Nom. ein gutcr Hccinn
NEUTER.
a good child
ein gutcg 5linb
a good woman
eine gutc '^-vau
Gen. eine^j guten 9Jianne^3 einer guten ^rau einel guten 5linbe^
Dat. eineni guten 9Jianue einer guten ^-rau eineni guten ^inbe
Ace. einen guten 9J('ann eine gutc %xQi\x ein gutc8 ^inb
Observe : This form differs from the weak form only in the
Nom. Sing. Masc, and Nom. and Ace. Sing. Neut.,
where words of the niein Model have no distinctive endings.
The adjective must consequently have the missing sign of
gender and case.
The Plural of this form is the same as that of the Weak
Declension, but, as ein has no Plur., the full declension of
Substantives with mein is given here :
117] COMPOUND VEKbS WITH SEPARABLE PREFIX. 1 3;
Singular,
MASC* xrirvr
'*-**• ftKUTER.
my good brother my good sister my good child
N. mem gutcr 3irubcr nieinc onto ed;Jueftcr mcin gutcg iliub
O. memc^ gutcn meiucr guten meine^ guten •
53rubcr^ Sd^tucftcr ^linbc^
D. ttKmem flutcn meincr gutcn meincm Qutcn
©ruber • e^Mucfter .^^inb"
A. memen guten ©rubcnneine gute 3d)it)efter meiu gutc0 ^inb
ALL GENDERS.
Norn, meine guteu SBriiber, Srf;Jucftern, .^inber .
Gen. meincr niitcu ©riibcr, ®c()lueftciu, .Hinber
Dat. mcinen gutcu 43viibcvn, 3d>u)citcrn, ilinbern
Ace. meinc o^xxi^n ^rUber, erfnueftcrn, Alinbcr
117. Compound Verbs with Separable Prefix.
I. The prefixes fie-, er-, < ic. (see § 35, Rem. 6), hence
called Inseparable Prefixes, are never separated from the
verb; other prefixes (chiefly the Prepositions) are Separable
but only in Principal Sentences with Simple Tense'
as : r ,
^er ^bnig fr^irftc ^loei iBoten ou8.
The king sent out two messengers.
9}?ein ^^niber reift nun-gcu od,
■ My brother sets out (== departs) to-morrow.
Note.- These Prefixes contain an idea distinct from that of the verb
and hence ,f retained before the Verb in the cases above, would thro^
the verb out of its place as Second Idea of the Principal Sentence.
2. The j|c- of the P. Part, and 511 in the Infin. follow the
prefix, makmg together but one word, as :
SDie 33otcn beg .^onigg finb aBflcreift,
The
messengers of the king have departed.
10
/-^
yr,.. -
1^1
138
LESSON XXII.
[§§"7
^Jiein i^ater ttjun|cf;t morgcn abjurcifen.
My father wishes to depart to-morrow.
3. The principal accent is on the Verb when the Prefix is
Inscpardblc ; on the Prefix when Separable, as: bcfu'rf)en, t)er=
tau'fen ; but aue'frfncfen, ab'veifen.
4. The principal parts of Separable Compound Verbs
should therefore be given as in the following examples :
Infin. Impf. p. Part.
fln'greifcn, to attack cjttff ... an auc^egrtffen
ab'fc^neiben, to cut off fcfjnitt . . . ab abcjcfc^nitten
118. Strong Vei^bs: lict^cn Model.
Infin. Imff. P. Part.
Germ. Model : bci^en
Epigl. Analogy : bite
Ablaut : ti
bit
gebiffen
bitten
t
I
LIST.
Notes. — i. Compounds are only given in the Lists when the slmpU
Verb is not found in the strong form.
2. R. = Reflexive; N. = Neuter, i. e., conjugated with jeill only^
N. A. --- Neuter and Active, i. e., with feill or l)abeu; W. indicates thai
the Weak for- is also used without difference of meaning.
_bei^en, bite
(er)bicid;en (W. N.). turn pale
(bc)fleifH'n ( R.), apply one's self
jjleicficn, resemble, be equal to
gldten (N.), glide
flycifm, grasp, seize
fneifen, pinch
H
gebiffen
erblic^
erblid>en
beflt^
befliffen
Olid^
getjlirf^eti
m
geglitten
Qtiff
gegriffen
!ntff
ae!ntffcn
^. (cib^iL suffer
m
gelitten
Ii8]
STRONG VERBS : Ocif^CH MODEL.
139
^feifen, whistle
^cifec n. tear
fcr)Iei(f>en (N.), sneak
fd)Ieifen, grind
fd)mei|?tMt, fling
Jiteiilen, cut
frf;vciten (N.), stride
ftrcicfien, stroke
ftreiten, contend
toeic^en, yield
tin
fdimifj
fdinitt
fd;ritt
ftrid;.
ftritt
)oid;
fiepfiffcn
Seviffen
gerittm
gefd)Iid)en
gefdiliffen
Ge[d)mi|fen
cjefdmiticn
Oefc(n-itten
QcftridH'n
geftritten
cjeJoidien
REMARKS.-I. The root vowel being Shortened in the Impf '
the following consonant, if single, is doubled; and stems'
in -D (Idntciben, [cibcn) change b into ti.
2 Those whose stem ends in -f^ change J into ff in the
3. The following Verbs are weak when they have a different
meaning, as below :
bleicBen (trans.), bleach (,(eic6te
f4)Ieifen, drag ; raze (to the ground) fd,(cifte
lt)eid;en, soften, soak juetdUe
Oe6feid)t
Ge[d)Ieift
gcmeidit
4. ^egleiten, to accompany,' is no compound of qkiten 'o
glide, but of loiton, td lead (weak, = 6c-BC-lcitcn) ; i>crrciben
to make disagreeable, spoil (not from Icibcn, but £eib) is
weak. ^
Vocabulary.
to set out, depart, ab'reifen
cut otf, aO^fdmcibcn
pai.)t (not pictures), an'^
ftreic^en
slip, slide, nue'gleitcrt
comprehend, understand, 6e=
Oveifcn
seize, ergvcifen
4;
140
LESSON XXTI.
[§118
fear, ficb furc{)ten (Dor-f-dat.)
tear (to pieces), jerrei^cn
pass (time, etc.), ju'bringen
Cinderella, 3tf4>enputtel
barber, ber 33arbier'
idea, notion, bcr 33cgrtff
steamer, steam-boat, baio
^am^ffrf)iff
thief, ber ^kb
grass, bag ©rag
hair, bag ^aar
hay, bag -t^eu
huntsman, hunter, bcr ^dger
illness, bie .f^ranfi;eit
fever, bag i^-iebcr
slipper, bev ^sautoffet
rain, bcr 3{cgcn
rheumatism, bcr S^tbcumatigmug
piece, bag ©turf
little piece, bag BtM6)tn
traveller, bcr 2Banberer
tooth, ber 3^^^'^*
toothache, bag 3«^"^C^
evil, angry, cross, bofc
joyous, merry, frofjltd^
smooth, slippery, cjlatt
golden, of gold, golben
violent, heavy (of rain), ^eftig
naughty, ill-behaved (of
children), un'artig
true, iuaf;r
furious, toii'tcnb
on that account, bcgtDcgen
of it, babon
the day before yesterday, i)Dr'=
geftcrn
Idioms : To be on the point of (be aboutto), im aScflviffe fciii. You are
tired, are you not? (Sic finfc miifcc, nid)t loahr'? So are we, aBiv finb ei
aud). George has torn my coat, &eovs hat miv ben 9lorf jcrrfffen.
EXERCISE XXII.
A. 1. ®cr ©cnerat 9JL ritt auf eincni fc^lt)arsert ^ferbe burc^
bie ©trajicn ^orontog (i^on Toronto) . 2. 2Bie 'i)ahm ©te bie ^i\t
auf bcm Sanbe 5iu3cbrad;t ? 3. 3(n tDag fiir cincr ^ranfbeit ^at
^br 3Satcr fo tange ndittcn? 4. 6ie fiub miibe, nicf)t tua^r?
2Bir finb eg auc^>. 5. %U mcin 33rubev jung i»ar, mtte er fcf)Iecf)te
,3a{)ne uub litt fcl;r an S(^[)n\vd). 6. ^er fctiiuarje §unb un=
fev(e)g ^JJadibarg ift bijfc ; er f^at borgeftcvn ein !lcineg ^inb gcs
bifjcn. 7. Unf(c)re altcn 3iarf)barn bcgleitcten img nacf; bcm
§afm, alg tDir abvciftcu. 8. 3So l»of)nt ber Sarbter, ber 3f)ncn
bag §aar gefcfmittcu hat'
^Mm\ alteg ^e[|cr f^ncibct [H^t
gut, benn ber Wiener l?at eg gt.ytern gefd;Iiffen. 10. Stig ic^ tor
§ii8]
STRONG verbs: bei^cu model.
141
ber ©d;ule iiber bie glatte ©tra^e fc^ritt, glitt ic^ aug imb jerrife
mir ben neuen SfJorf. 11. 2(l§ ber 3)teb im 33egriffe Wax, ing
§aug §u fc(ileicf)en, ergriff ifin ber 2)iener. 12. Unfer alter 9iac^s
bar Htt (ange an (am) ^ftfjeumati^mu^, unb Wax be^tvegen immer ju
^aufe. 13. ^er ©eneral ritt mit feinen Offijieren iiber bie SBriid'e.
14. ^er bofe ^nabe auf bem Slpfelbaum ri^ bie reifen 2(^fel
/ bom Saume unb frf)mi^ fie auf bie Grbe. 15. 5!Jiein junger g^Jeffe,
T- ber auf ber Uniijerfitdt Wax, \)at am ^ieber gelitten, aber er ift
je^t n?ieber Wo\)l 16. 3(frf)en^uttelg ©cfjtuefter fdjnitt fid) (dat)
ein ©titd t>om ^u^e ah, tueil er 5U gro^ fiir ben golbenen ^antoffel
Wax. 17. ^c^ bin fd)nett nac^ §aufe geritten, iueil icf) mid; t)or
bem hJiitenben Sturme furd)tete. 18. ®er 9Sanberer fc^ritt froben
'^iJlwm burd; ben griinen 2Salb unb ^fiff ein frbfjlic^e^ 2ieb.
19. ^iefe^ 9)ieffer ift nidt fd)arf; tuann tinivbe e§ gefc^Iiffen?
20. ilarig fd>oncr, neuer diod tintrbe V»om .*ounbe gerviffen.
' B. ]. Where is the old knife that you ground? 2. When
Mary was young she reseml^led her mother. 3. The bears
sneaked (pert.) into the wood, but the hunters followed (perf.)
them. 4. Where does the painter live who painted (perf.)
our house } 5. The industrious countryman cut (perf.) the
grass yesterday, and is making hay to-day. (>. Why are you
crying, Charles ? I am crying because George pinched (perf.)
me. 7. The rain spoiled my (dat. -|- def. art.) journey to the
country. 8. The steamer has whistled already. Now I shall say
farewell. 9. Little Charles is a naughty child ; he has torn
his (dat. of refl. pron. -f- art.) new dress. 10. Old people
often suffer from rheumatism. 11. Have you understood
what he said ? 1"2. The gardener was burning the boughs,
which he had cut from the trees. 13, I have quarrelled with
my old friend, because he was wrong. 14. This blue ribbon
is too long, please cut a little of it off for me. 15. Why is
Charles crying ? He has been bitten by a dog.
lit!
142
LESSON XXTII.
[§"9
ORAL EXERCISE XXII.
]. Was fiir einen Hund hat Ihr Nachbar? 2. Wie wurden
Sie die Zeit zubringen, wenn Sie reich waren ? 8. Was
machte der Wanderer, als er durch den Wald schritt? 4. Wo
wohnen Sie jetzt ? 5. Wann werden Sie Heu machen?
6. Weshalb sind Sie so schnell nach Haiise geritten?
LESSON XXIII.
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. -STRONG VERBS: Blct6ett MODEL.
HO. Possessive Pronouns.
1. The Possessive Pronouns are used when no substantive
is expressed, as :
The hat is mine {Pronoun) ; but :
It is my hat {Adjective).
2. They are formed from the stems of the corresponding
Possessive Adjectives by adding certain endings, as follows :
{a) Endings of biefcr Model (without article), as :
Sifisrular.
MASC.
Norn, meincr
Gen. meinCiS
Dat. meincm
Ace. lueincn
Plural.
ALL GENDERS.
meinc, mine
meincr, of mine
meincil, (to, for) mine
tiieinc, mine
FEM. NEUTER.
meiuc mein(c)8
meincr meineS
meincr meincm
meinc mein(c)8
Observe : In the Nom. and Ace. Neuter, -? of the ending
may be omitted.
Go for the other persons :
MASC. FEM. NEUTER.
Sing, beincr beinc beincd, thine
feiucr
i^rcr
f)t»i%
fcin
t^rc
jeinc^, his, its
il^rc0, hers (its)
§"9]
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
143
MASC.
N. bermeine
G. be^ meiiicn
D. bem meincn
FEM.
bie meinc
ber meincn
bev meincn
A. ben meincn I bie meinc
Plural.
ALL GENDKRS.
bie meincn, mine
bcr meincn, of mine
ben meincn, (to, for)mine
bie meincn, mine
MASC. FEM. NEUTER.
Plur. un[(e)rcr un[(e)re unf(e)rc8, ours
eu(e)rcr eu(e)rc eu(e)rci, yours
*^'^f'' '^¥^ if>rc§, theirs
iXs¥n ^brc ^{,rc«, yours)
{b) Preceded by the Definite Article, and hence with end-
mgs of Weak Adjective, thus:
Singular.
NEUTER.
ba§ meinc
beg meincn
bem meincn
bne meinc
So : ber, bie, ba§ beinc, thine ber, bie, bag eu(e)rc, yours
ber, bie, bag feinc, his, its ber, bie, bag if,rc, theirs
ber, bie, bag i^rc, hers, (its) (ber, bie, bag ^brc, yours)
ber, bie, bag unf(e)rc, ours
ic) Preceded by Definite Article, with ending -fa 4- Weak
terminations, thus : »8 T" vveaK
Singular.
^''^'^' FEM. NEUTER.
Nom. ber meinige bie meinige bag meinioe
Gen. beg memigen, etc. ber meinigen, etc. beg meinigen, etc.
Plural.
ALL GENDERS.
Nom. bie meinigen, mine
Gen. ber meinigen, of mine, etc.
So : ber, bie, bag beinige, thine
bcr, bie, bag feintge, his, its
and so on for the other persons.
Ml
NOTI
In
unfrige and eurigc the -e of the stem is always omitted.
144
LESSON XXIII.
[§§ "9-
I ^■
Remark, — i. These forms are interchangeable, without
difference in meaning, as :
I have my book, but I have not yours,
^c^ f)abc mein 53u*, aber id; t}aU md)t < bag ^^re
( bag 3^rigc.
His letter is here, but ours is not here,
( un|(c)rcr \
©ein 33rief ift ^kv, aUx < bcr uiif(c)rc >■ ift nicl;t ^ier.
( bcr unfrigc )
2. When a Possessive Pronoun is used as predicate, it may
be replaced by the Possessive Adjective without ending, as :
This book is mine, ®ivfe§ 33urf) ift mctlt.
3. Observe the following idiomatic uses of the Poss, Prons. :
{a) ^cf) ioerbe b. 8 9WcinigC (neuter sing.) tJ)UU,
Is shall do my part, my utmost.
(^) ^ic ^Jieinigen, bie Seinigen (Plur.),
My, his friends, family.
(r) A friend of mine --- filter tiott meinen ^reunben.
This friend of mine = ^icjcr mein ^^reunb.
120.
Strong Verbs: bl«6cn Model.
Germ. Model :
Eng. Analogy.
Ablaut :
Infin.
blcibeu
wanting
Ct
LIST.
bleibeu (N.), stay, remain
(ge)beibcn (N.), thrive
leibcn, lend, borrow
Impf.
blicb
ie
blieb
gebieb
P. Part.
geblicben
ie
gebtiebcn
gebi^ben
geliefjen
T20]
STRONG VERBS : bUlUtl MODEL.
meiben, avoid ■ ^
*)reifen, praise .
reiben, rub . ,
fc^eiben (N. A.), part (intr. and trans.) f^'ieb
itvljei^i, shine ; seem, appear
fc^reib en^ write
fc^reien, scream, shout
fc^hjeigen, be silent
fjjeien, spit
L leiflm (N.), mount, ascend
treiben, drive
/Deifen, show, point out
; ijei^cn, accuse
Vocabulary
to copy, ab^^reiben
hangup, auf'^angen
ascend, befteigen (trans.)
prove, dernohstrate, be*
ft)eifen
appear, erfd;einen
shine, glitter, glangen
descend, f»erab'ftei0en
guard, keep, ^iiten
rule, reign, govern, regicren
write (to), frf;retben (dat. or
an-)- ace.)
climb, ftetgen (auf -f- ace.)
pardon, excuse, berjeitjeti
remain behind, jurud'bleiben
cold, bie (grfdltung
family, bie ^amilk
herd, flock, bie <0erbe
fc^ien
fc^rieb
fc^rie
fc^toieg
ftteg
trieb
h)ie^
145
gcmieben
geprtefen
gerieben
0efd;icben
gefc^ienen
ge[rf;rieben
gefc^rteen
gefc^biegen
gef^ieen
Seftiegen
getrieben
geit)ie[en
Sejie^en
heat, bie §i^e
last, ber Seiften
pepper, ber ^feffer
shepherd, ber S chafer
shoemaker, cobbler, ber
©c^ufter
silence (act of keeping s.),
ba^ ©c^lDeigen
speaking (act of), bag ©^rec^en
throne, ber 2hxon
pasture, pasturage, bie 3Beibe
fifty, funfgig, funfgig
bright, brightly, ^elT
loud, loudly, laut
correct, rtc^tig
round, runb
fftft
It mm
^•h
strong, severe, ftar!
Xdiom: Up to the present time, still, npcf, immer.
1 1
II
146
LESSON XXIII.
[§§120
EXERCISE XXIII.
A. 1. (S^ {ft mrf)t mU^i (violb, \\)ik^ c,VmX. 2. ©predKii ift
©tiber, ec^tuciv3en ift Wolb. :i. Scbufter, bleib' bei beincm Sciften.
4. eeit arf)t ^ai^en bin i* iucgen ciner ftarteu (Irfciltung 311 .•paufe
gcbliebcn. 5. einc bon mcincn (Soufinen ift jclit bei ung auf 33efucJ),
abcr fie bleibt uirf^t lauge. <>. ^1^0^:^ fiir ^Tiere finb in jenem
^Balbe'c' (S« finb ^iiven. 7. ^ie mwiin unb ibrc %o6:)Ux
iueintcn fjeftio;, a^5 fie Don einanbev fd;ieben. H, ^})iein Df)eim
blieb iueflcn be: gvof^en ,f>il)e mit feinev )^amilie auf bem ^anbe.
0. .Slarl (;at aw feinen 3.Uiter iiefd>vieben, unb id) bin im ^^ecjriffe
<in ben meinitgen gu fd^reibcn. lo. ®er It'onig fd)Uneg unb fd;ien
traurig ju fein, al^^ cv bie fd^limme ^Jiad^ridit imU. \ 1 . ^^itte,
Der5ei(;en Sie mir, ba^ id) ^bnen noc^ nic^t gefdirieben {;abe'
12. %}>o IjaUw ©ie ^bren .Sput aufge(;angt? I^d; \}aU i^n neben
ben :5f;ngett gefjcingt. 1 ;i. 31U luir auf ben ikvg ftiegen, fc^ien
bie ©onne fc^on ^ell. 14. ^[BeldK Don biefen ^^Biic^evn ioiinfdien
©ie ? ^;3cl) umnfdK bie nieinen. 15. mx luiirben auf bem Sanbe
geblieben fein, loenn unfere ^-reunbe aud; geblieben iuaren. 1 H. ®ie
^erben tuurben auf bie 2Beibe getrieben, aU \m Dom SBerg
f)erabftiegen. 17. g^ ift ung beimefen ioovben, ba^ bie (Srbe
runb ift. 18. ^^or funf^ig ^jjafjven beftieg bie ^onigin ^^ictoria
ben^bron, unb fie regiert nod) inuuer. 19. 2Burben ©ie nac^
(Surojja reifen, ioenn ic^ ^umrfbliebe, urn '^^jx <oau6 ju fjiiten?
20. ®ie ibtaben pfiffen unb fd^rieen, aU fie auf ben ^erg ftiegen.
B. I. George has black ink, but mine is red. 2. Mary's
sister and mine are learning German. 3. We have looked
for William's books and ours everywhere. 4. Your exercise
'is not correct, copy it. 5. Whose gloves have you ? I have
mine and yours. <}. Why did the boy shout so loud? 7. To
whom were you writing the long letter yesterday > 8. I have
black eyes, but yours are blue. 9. In what yeai did Goethe's
'Faust' appear? 10. Waiter, please bring me the vinegar
and the pepper, 11. This lead-pencil is mine, where is
■"1 TABLE OF AL-JF.CTIVE ENDINGS. ,47
your.,? 1--'. Your aunt .iml mine arc nei^.hbours. ];) The
pro essor s.e.ned not ,0 h. at home, for l.i.s window.; and
shutters were not open. I I. I should write to him if he
wrme to „,e. I... , .,„ „.riti,,, to ,nj tuother and c'harles
was wntmg to h,s when the post.nan bronglu us the letters'
ORAL EXERCISE XXIII.
1. Seit wann sincl 8ie schon .u Hause Meblieben ? 2 Was
-chtendie Schafer, als wir vom Ilerge herabstiegei^? 1
^^ ann bes leg d,e Konigin Victoria den Thron ? 1 Wa
ur Iinte haben Sie? 5. Fur wen ist dieser lange BrieP
b. Welches sind die Namen der Alonate ?
LESSON XXIV.
DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES (concluded): TABLE, GENERAL
REMARKS.-STRONG VERBS: Wi^tU AND fcr^tcit MODELS.
121.
Table of Adjective Endings.
I. Strong.
Smgular.
MASC.
N. — cr
G. —eg (en)
D. —em
A. —en
NKUT.
—eg
-eg (en)
—em
PEM.
— e
— er
~er
— e
Observe: -en for -C;^ in Gen. Sing.
Masc. and Neuter before strong substs.
Plural.
M. F. N.
— e
— er
—en
—eg — e
MASC.
— e
— ?n
—en
—en
II. Weak.
Singular,
FKM. NKUT.
— e — e
—en —en
Plur.
M. F. N.
—en
-en
-en
—en —en
— e — e
OiiSERVK: Persistent -:i,
except Norn. Sing, of all
genders, and Ace. Sing.
Fern, and Neuter.
f
148
LESSON
XXIV.
TIT. M
IXED.
Sifiji^u/ar.
Plural.
MASC.
FEM.
NEUTER.
M. F. N.
Nom. — er
— e
— e8
—en
Gen. —en
—en
—en
-en
Dat. —en
—en
—en
-en
Ace. — en
— e
— e«
—en
[§§ lai-
Objkrvk: Same as Weak (II), except Nom. Sing. Masc. anc} Non».
Ace. Sing. Neuter.
122.
General Remarks on Adjectives.
1. Participles used attributively are employed and declined
as Adjectives, as : (^eliebter !!8atcr, beloved father ; ba^ tueinenbe
Alinb, the weeping child ; mcine geeijrte 9Jiutter, my honoured
mother.
2. Adjectives and Participles used as Substantives vary
their declension according to the rules for Adjective Declen-
sion, but are spelt with capital letters, as : tier ilranfe, the
sick man, patient ; Fern, bie Slranfe, the sick woman; Plur. bie
.%anfen; cin 5^ranfer, a sick man, patient; pi. ^ranfe, sick
people, patients.
Remarks. — i. Many words, the English equivalents of which
are Substantives only, are Adjectives in German, as : bet
^"^rembe, the stranger, foreigner, PI. bJc A'vemben, but eui ^rem=
ber, PI. i^rembe ; ber I^Kcifcnbe, the traveller, eiii I'Keifcnbcr, etc.
These Adjective-Substantives, when Mnsc. and preceded by
the Definite Article, have the same inflection as the Weak
Declension.
2. Names of languages from Adjectives are not declined
when used without the article, as :
^<x% i[t bie^ auf ^entft^ ? What is this in German ?
I"] GKNEKAL REMARKS ON ADJECTIVES. I49
3. Adjectives of colour used substantively are indeclinable
or add 6 m the Gen. Sing, as: bae ©run, bc^ (s3riin(^). '
4. If the Substantive is not expressed, the Adjective
shows by Its ending the gender, number and case, as :
(5in tieincv mam unb ein ^ro^er,
A little man and a tall one.
-JgI'^J'''' '"^"^' '"^'^' '^ '"' '''- ^-- -^ *° ^^ translated
5. if a Substantive is preceded by a succession of Adiec
tives, they all follow the same form, as: fitter, alter, roter
2Beiu : ber flutc, dtt, rote 2lknn ; cimi outeit, rotcn 2Beine^.
6 Adjectives whose stem ends in -c(, -cil, -cr, as : ebel
noble; flolben, golden; (jciK hoarse, drop -c of the stem
when nifiected; those in -cl, -cr may drop -c of the Urmma-
tion .nstead, unless the termination is -c -cr or -c§ as =
M golbiic 33auer; bcr cblni or ebcln ;s-rau; bent ^eifrcn or
V 7- The Adjective 60*, high, drops c when inflected, as-
oer fjo^c ^aum, the high tree.
8 Adjectives can generally be used without change as ad-
verbs, as : luftio, nierry, merrily ; angeneN, agreeable, agree-
ably ; gut, good, well. ^
^ 9. Adjectives (so-called) in -cr from names of places are
mdeclmable, as : bie ^ouboncr Seitung, the London newspaper-
^pambuvgcr Sdnffe, Han.burg ships; cin ^^arifcr ^anbfcf;ub'
a Pans glove. / //
Note. -These adjectives correspond to the English use of the
Koper nan.es without inflection. They are really substantives in the
Oen.Plur,thus:bie?oiiboiifr8citllimisstrictlvbirJ^eitn.i,.».-.o ..-;.
the^newspaper of ,^e Londoners. Hence they are^pelV wiVh^Tpi;!;
150
I.KSSON NX IV.
132
I
I;
II
10. After personal pronouns, the Adjective follows the strong
declension except in the Dat. Sinj;. and Noin. (and some-
times Arc) IMur., as .
(for) me, poor man ; you good people ; us little children,
tniv armcn ^Viannc ; \i)x gutcn I'outc ; nm t'lcinci n) Minber.
11. The Indelinite I'ronouns (sec Less. XXVII) ctlua^,
uidU'J, Did, are Substantives, and therefor'' not determinative
words, and the following adjective has the strong declension,
as : cttuae (^hitC6, something good ; nicl>tv> 'Jlni^onchmcs, nothing
pleasant.
Ohskrvk : The Adjective is here used as substantive, and
therefore spelt with a capital.
12. After the Indefinite Numerals in the Plural (see
Less. XXIX) allc, all ; ciiuj]c (ctUcbo), some; mand)C, many;
niclu-cio, several ; folcK\ such; Hide, many; iucuii'^c, few, the
Adjective may have either the weak or the strong ending.
13. After the interrogative iucUtc in the plural, the strong
declension is also found in the adjective ; and the exclama-
tory iucUt is generally uninflected before an adjective, which
then always has the strong form, as :
m^cld) iivofiCS ^lHn\^niii)cn ! W hat (a) grert pleasure !
123. Strong Verbs: }tl)ic^cn Model.
Germ. Model :
Efig/. Analogy.
Ablaut :
(ijer)bric^cn, vex
flie^en (N.), flow
gic^en, pour
Infin.
fducfjcn
(shoot)
te
LIST.
Impf.
shot
Derbro^
P. Part.
fen
shot
l>eibvoffen
geffoffen
gecjoffen
"ij
sTK()N(i VKKiJs: fd;icf}cn modkl.
^5
ntimmeu, glow
flimiiicn (VV.N.A.), dimh
fvie(f)cii (N.), creep
flCnicfuMi, enjoy
ricduMi, s.nell (tr. and intr.^
(cr)[dmUcn ( W. N.\ sound, resoun 1
faufcn, drink (of beasts)
[rfucjicn, shoot
fd^Ue^cn, lock, shut
fiebcn (VV.), boil (intr.)
fpriefK'n (N.), sprout
triefcn (N.), drip
Remarks _ i. Observe, as under the bci^en ModeI(.< i,8
Keni. 12) the doubling of consonants and the interchan-.J
2. ^Kiic^en/to avenge,' is weak but has also P. Part, c^.vodjm
3. Saufcn has also foufft, fiiuft in the Pres. Indie. 2 "3 Sing"
S- Jn fiebm the weak P. Part, (geficbct' is rare.
tlotnm
trod;
rtcnoH
crfdnUt
foff
fott
fprof?
tioff
iicfloiiinicii
ilchodHMi
iioi'.offcn
floiodu'n
cr|"du>Hcu
in')dH>f|cu
gcfottcn
gctroffcn
124.
Strong Verbs : fcrf)tcn Model.
2.3-S. pR. Tnd.
Infin.
2. S. I.MPER.
Germ, Model: fcdUen fidUft fid)t fid^t
Engl. Analogy .- wanting
Ablaut .' c i
Impf. p. Part.
focf;t oefiid)ten
LIST.
fcd)tcn f!""ht
flcdUon, weave, twine fliditft, flic^t, fli*t fIod>t cjer'IodUcn
i
152
LESSON XXIV.
[§X24
(er)HJfcI)cn (N.), be- (erlifd;e[t) erlifc^t erlofc^ erlofrfjen
come extinguished (eviifd;)
melfen (W.), milk (milfft, mil!t, mil!) mol! gemolfen
(iiui(lft,quillt, quelle) quoH gequolten
(fd^mil^eft) frfimiljt fdimolj gefcfjmoljen
(fc^milj)
(fc^it)iaft) fd)lt)iat fcfihJoK gefdjhJoHen
(fd)t»ill)
Rf:marks. — I. Rare forms are enclosed in ( ).
quellen, gush forth
fd;meljen (N.), melt
(intr.)
|d)JueUen (N.), swell
2. The simple verb lofd^en, 'to extinguish ' (ti.), is weak
(lofd;te, geli3[d>t), as are also its separable compounds, e. g.,
aus^'Iijfdjen.
3. '^dimeljen (intr.) has also the forms (fdjineljeft), fd)mel5t
(fdimelje).
4. (Sd)mcl5en, 'to smelt' and fd)tt)ellen, 'to cause to swell'
(trans.), are weak.
Vocabulary.
extinguish, put out, aue'IbfdK'u snow, ber ^i^'^zt
water (flowers, etc.), begie^eu eight, ^6::ji
prescribe, Derfd)reibeu
flow past, Dorii'bevflie^en
close, shut, ju'fd)lief?en
exhibition, bie Sdie'ftelhmg
health, bie (*iiefuubf)eit
drink, beverage, ba^ ©etrdn!
cow, bie ilut^-'''
maid, maid-servant,bie S^Jagb * thereon, baran
raid-day, noon, ber 9JJittag past, by, boriiber
pain, ber Sdnnevj
Idioms : 1. To go past the house, am "^aufe eof ubefgel)tu.
%, In German, <\y\i iT^eutfd) or im !X)eutfd)en.
celebrated, famous, benit^mt
blind, blinb
healthy, healthful, gefiirtb
dear, lieb
Limburg (adj.), Siiuburger
dead, tot
Toronto (adj.), 3::orDntoer
;-<
6 124]
stkong: vekhs fcditcn model.
EXERCISE XXIV.
'53
2. ^* (.abe ,„c„un Uricf g^fc^toffcn u„b ,„erbc i(,„ "7" t
5^ tO™<,e,, X Sc8 3Jio.flc„. ftcigc, Me Heine. Sogcl jum ©m
P«u e .ovuber. 6. Xn Jug be. S,a„tc„ it cfl^ ( , b "
« vWneben. ». Sie ^eitunaen ajaMen .id .on er lo J "
3n.,teaung 10. Jer Sba^MuoK .„„ §i„^e[ unb (ofcfrba,
8t.mmenbc S^er an«. ! I . Unfere Solbafen fcKoffon bi Stabt!
b,e iiu^c fl n,o((e„ unb ,eiit beaiefjcn fie bie 4««n,en. 13. mt"
f*ue.flt, ,^t gntcn Se.,tc, benn bie .ftvnnfcn (eiben jeM Zt
ecf;majen. 14. SMrbe bev Scorer 66fe luciben, menn ber^S!
feme Stufgabe ,«„ fe? ,5. ®er e*nfer ^nt ben Sieifenkn bm
» 8 member g obt ge.mefen. 16. SSiirbe e« 3?,„e„ bie 3!eKe
U^KMben, tocnn rd, suriicfbliebe ? 17. ,§a6en Sk bie t-ra^n
arunien ge e^en, b,e luir ben. .fi.anfcn f<(ncfeny 18. ®et Scf, ,e"
fi;...orM.„b ba« SBaffo.- troff i,„n ben .^nfern, ali bie Sol
Seaeii 9Ji.ttag toavin fdnen. 16. a)er SJlinbe, ber ne6en ml
too^,.t flocit jioei iJovbe f(ir .neine Wuttet. 20. ®et iiinge .mb '
« alte Su-mbe. bie in. a^albe jagto,., ^aben biele Tg "
S'r";. ~\^'" '"'■'" f"'^ ^'^ *'"'"^» "^fl^ff^" toorben^
Sic fmb Bon. Giartnet bcgoffen loorben.
-B. h The golden slipper ,va.s too smallfor Cinderella's
sisters. ■>. Paris gloves and Li,nl,urg cheese are tamons every-
where. ■). The huntsinan shot a hare and brought it ho,ne.
4. Our neighbours are not at home, for their doors and
windows aij closed. .5. I do not believe every story I hear
(.. Please, dear mother, tell us little children something, new
and pretty. 7. If Charles tears his new book, his ..rother
/ / ■ > I
U It ' ' .■ , . ■ ■ . .
Ii
54
I.ESSOX XXV.
[§§ 124-
Hi' »-■
I
will be very angry. S. He seemed not to hear what I said
to him. 9. These flowers are for the patients in the hospitals.
10. (The) green is agreeable for those who have weak eyes.
11. The horse is drinking the water which we have brought
him. [:L Pure fresh water is a healthful beverage. 13. A
week ago I was at (in) a concert, where this singer (/.) sang.
14. When the weather becomes cold, the dogs like to creep
behind the stove. 1 5. The travellers enjoyed the beauty of
the landscape, when they were ascending the high mountain.
It). Please tell lue how this word is written in German.
ORAL EXERCISE XXIV.
1. Haben Sie Ihren J3rief s ;hon geschlossen? 2. Wie
lange ist Ihr geehrter Professor schon tot ? 3. Was hat der
Doktor der Kranken verschrieben ? 4. Weshalb wurde der
Lehrer bose .'' i^. Wer hat diese Vogel geschossen ? o. Was
hat der Jager mit dem Hasen gemacht, welchen er im Walde
geschossen hat ?
m <
1:1 i(
:
LESSON XXV.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. - STRONG VERBS:
fricrctt model.
125. Comparison of Adjectives.
In German, as in English, the degrees of comparison are
formed by adding to the Positive :
-Ct to form the Comparative, and
-(e)ft " " " Superlative, as :
mu, new neucr, newer neu(c)ft, newest
reic^, rich vcidicr, richer reid^ft, richest
angenehtit, .agreeable annc'-^chmcr, mor
angvjue^mft, most agreeable
^_- 1 1 CL r \. V ci
bk
X36]
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
155
Remarks. — I. Monosyllabic adjectives with a, 0, u (not
ttu) generally take Umlaut (but with many exceptions, given
in App. K.), as :
lang linger langft
!ut;j furjer furjcft
2. The syllables -cr, (e)|i are added to every adjective,
without regard to its length, as in the case of angeneijni (given
above, but see § 16 1, note).
3. Adjectives used attributively in the Comparative or
Superlative degree are declined, and add the usual endings
^/hr the syllables -er, -eft respectively, as :
ber rcic^erc Wlam ein reic^ercr mam
mein alteftcS ^leib liebfter ^reunb
4. Participles are compared like adjectives, as :
gcliebt, beloved geliebter geliebteft
5. -c of the Superlative ending is retained only after b, t
or a sibilant (f, f 1^, 3, J, y), as : alt, Superl. altcfi ; but grofe
always has Superl. grij^t.
5. Adjectives in -c, -cl, -en, -er drop e of the stem in the
Comparative, as : trage, trdger, trdgft ; ebel, ebler, ebelft.
12«.
The Comparative.
1. ' Than ' =» aU after the Comparative.
2. The compound form with mef>r (Engl. ' more ') is never
(except with ^he adjectives given in § 161) used in German
(as it is in Engl, with polysyllabic adjectives), unless when two
adjectives (i. e., two qualities of the same object) are being
compared, as :
(Sr ift me|r fc^h)acl^ al^ franf.
He is more (i. e., rather) weak than ill.
156
LESSON XXV.
[§§126
3. Comparison of equality :
I am (just) as rich as he,
I^d) bin (eben) io reicf) mt er.
4. ' The . . . the ' before comparatives = |e, htfio or um
fo — JC (bcfto or um fo), as :
The longer the nights, the shorter the days,
^c (bcfto) Idnger bie 9idrf)te, jc (bcfto) fiirjcv bie Xage.
5. When the comparative is declined, the omission of c of
the stem takes place just as in Adjectives in — cr, as:
ben reid)er(c)n 'DJiann, etc.
Note. — The syllable -cr may occur three times successively at the
end of the same adjective, viz. : i ° as part of the stem, e. g., l)t'ifcr, hoarse;
2 ° as inflection of comparison, e. g., I^eif(e)rci', hoarser; 3° as ending of
strong adjective declension, e. g., eiil ^eif(e)i-erer ^Sanger, a hoarser
singer.
127.
The Superlative.
I. The Superlative is not used, even as Predicate^ in the
undeclined form, but :
{a) If the substantive is expressed, or if the substantive of
the preceding clause can be supplied, the (weak) adjective
form with definite article is used, as :
This river is the broadest in America (i. e., the broad-
est river), 2)tcier ?^lu^ ift bcr drcttcftc in ^itmerifa (bev
breitefte ^lu^).
The days in June are the longest (days) in the whole
year, ^ie ^rage im ^uni ftnb bie liingftcn (^age, under-
stood) im ganjcn 3«t,'i'c«
This earthquake was the most severe that we have
had. Tiii'foiS (Srbhehcn ift bn* ftrf^tnfl-r Vr»j4dfii>a vnti'
[§§126
127]
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
jcfto or urn
days,
fCv bie Xage.
)Sion of c of
as :
ssively at the
[)eifcr, hoarse;
° as ending of
'X, a hoarser
'caU, in the
Dstantive of
k) adjective
, the broad-
Imerifa (bev
1 the whole
L^age, under-
lat we have
157
r^) If no substantive can be supplied, the advert form
pi"' ^eded by am is used, as :
The lake is broader than the river, but the sea is the
broadest (observe nof ^ the broadest /a^e, river or
sea) per ®ee ift breiter a(# ber ^lu^, aber bie See ift am
The days are longest (i. e., ^ at the longest,' not 'the
ongest days') in June, :;^m ^uni finb bie STage an
The earthquake was most severe on Monday »(m
aVontag tuar bag Grbbcbcn am ^cftiaftcn (not' 'the
severest earthquake ').
./sT\7 T^-!-?^'""''''"' '"^^ ^" strengthened by prefixing aUct-
2 In the preceding examples, the superlative ascribes a
quality to the object in the highest degree /;. comparison
(expressed or implied) with, or relatively to, a number of
other objects, and is hence called the Relative Superlative
but the English superlative with most often merely ascribes
the quality in an eminently high degree, without instituting
any comparison. When so used, it is called the Absolute
Superlative, as:
Your father was most kind (i. e. = 'exceedingly kind '
not = 'kind^.-/') ^^ '
The Absolute Superlative is rendered in German by an ad-
verb of eminence, such as fcftr, very; U^, auBcrft, exceed-
ingly, prehxed to the adjective in the positive as •
%^x 'Mitx juar fcfjr (fjijj^ft, (iu^crft;
Vour father
kind.
Gwtig,
was luost (very, exceedingly, extremely)
158
LESSON XXV.
[§§ «7-
3. The superlative is commonly used in German of two ob-
jects (which is not admissible in Engl.), as :
2)er (gri)^ere or) griijtc Don biefen jtvei ^nabcn.
The taller of these two boys.
128.
Comparison of Adverbs.
lUi
Adverbs are compared like adjectives, the superlative form
being that with am, as :
angene^m, agreeably angenefimer, more agreeably
am angene^mftcn, most agreeably
129.
gut, good
^od), high
na^(e), near
Irregular Comparison.
Bcfjer ht\t (different root)
tjij^jer i?oct)ft (drops c in Compar.)
naf)er nci^ft (nearest, next; in-
serts t in Stiperl?)
t)iel, much mc^r mcift (different root)
n^enig, little (of quantity) mtltber minbeft (different root)
Notes. — i . 9J?cl)r is used as adverb of quantity only. For the Subst.
ttiel)rctc8, PI. mcl)rfte 'some, several,' see §§ 152, 175.
2. SBentg also has the regular forms tueniflev, rociiigft.
130.
Defective Comparison.
The following Comparatives and Superlatives are formed
from adverbs, etc. (some of which are obsolete) :
(au^en, without, adv^ au^er, outer ciufeevft, outermost
utmost, extreme
/ r 1. r -x / t. V ^ ( «^eft, soonest
(c^e, before, conj:) (etjer, sooner, adv:) | ' ' ^^^^
(binten, behind, rtrt'z;.) l^'tUer, hinder (jinterft, hindmost
(inncn, within, adv,) inner, inner innerft, innermost
I3i]
COMPARISON OF ADVERBS.
159
{la^, late, obsolete)
(mittel, middle)
(nib, below, obsolete)
{iihiw., above, adv.)
(unten, below, adv.)
te^t, latest, last
mittler, middle mil.aft, middle
nieber, lower nieberft, lowest
ober, upper
unter, lower
(born, before, adv.) Berber, fore
oberft, uppermost
unterft, lowest,
undermost
Dorbeift, foremost
131.
Strong Verbs: fricrcil Model.
Infin. Impf. p. Part.
Germ. Model: frfer.n fror j^efroven
Engl. Analogy: freeze froze frozen
Ablaut: ic, etc. q j
Modd7§^ )^' '°"^ ^ '' "*"''' ''^^^'"g"'«hes this Model from the ld)ie6eu
LIST.
A. (Infin. ic, ji.)
biegen, bend fjog
bieten, bid, offer t>ot
fliegen (N.), fly (on wings) flocj
flie^en (N.), flee (escape) f(ol;
frieren (N. A.), freeze, be cold fror
Ije^en, lift, raise ^ob, ^ub
(er)!iefen, (er)fiiren, choose erfov
liigen, lie (tell a falsehood) log
(i)er)Iicren, lose berlor
frf)ieben, shove, push [c^ob
fd^iDoren, swear
(be)triigen, deceive, cheat
n)iegen, weigh, have weight (intr.)
jie^en (N. A.), pull (tr.) ; move (intr.) §og
Remarks. — i. ^ieaen, bteten. fnecren
gebogen
geboten
geflogen
gcflo^en
gefroren
gef;oben
erforen
gelogen
t)erloren
gefc^oben
fd;)UDr, fcbtDuv ge[d)tt)oren
betrog betrogen
iuog geti'ogeu
gesoflen
fliebcu, lichen, have
also the forms (now used only in poetry) with cu for ic in th<
i6o
LESSON XXV.
[§131
2. and 3. Sinjjj. Pres. Ind. and 2. Sing. Imper., as: bcucjft,
bcuv\t, bcug ; flcud^ft, flcucl) ; jeudjft, jcuc^.
2. 2lsicneu, to rock, is weak (tmegte, geimegt).
3. Observe the change of ^ into g in jie^en, jog, gejogen.
i??. (Infin. c, 0.)
fc^^eren, shear fc^or ge[rf)oren
lueben (W.), weave toob geiuoben
iudgcn, weigh (trans.) h)og geiuogen
(be)U'cgcn, induce, persuade betuog bctuogen
Remark. — 'iHluegcn, 'to move (set in motion)' is weak
(benjcgtc, beiuegt). '
Vocabulary.
metal, ba^3 ^Jletafl'
to offer, an'bictcn
abolish, annul, cancel, aufs
f)cben
put off, delay, postpone, au^':
fcbicbcn
remove (neut.), auc/giebeiv
prefer, lu^i'^icbcu (dat. of pers.)
fly away, iueg'flicgcn
roof, biTg Tad)
colour, bie '^•axbi
hunger, ber ^linger
cook, ber ^od) *
red ' subst.), bag 9?^t
sparrow, bev Sperling
part, portion, bev ^eil
shore, bank, bag Ufev
on that account, therefore,
bcebalb
yet, still (in spite of all), borf)
straight, gerabe (adj.)
exactly, just, gerab*: (^adv.)
as soon as, fobalb
Idioms : 1. I prefer gol«l to silver, 3d» ^jclu' tai Wolb bcin (Stlbcr oor.
2. I like the winter in Canada, 3d) Ifabt ten Winter in
@anaba gci'ii.
EXERCISE XXV.
A. 1. Sin ©perling in ber §anb ift beffer olg ^mi auf bem
^arf)e. 2. gjiarie ift jitngev aU l^ouife, aber jie i|t bod; grijf;er.
§i3il
STRONG verbs: frictcn model.
i6i
3. |>unger ift bcr 6efte ^od). 4. ^er jungc (^jeneral SB ift ein
ta^frcver .^clb ala fein 58ater. 5. Tie Sieifcnben [cftoben ba«
Soot Doni lifer unb ruberten iibcv ben m% H. ^Hufflejc^oben ift
mc^t aufgefyofcen. 7. ilBeld>e^ Den biefen 3}Jabc^en ift ba^ gro^te ?
8. ^e ^Df)er ein ^^^oget fliegt, je flciner f*eint er gu lucrbcn. 9. ^er
^rembe l)at mir mel;r fiir mein ^:>au^ angebotcn aU ©ie, aber ic^
glaube uirf)t, bafe er fo gut hqai}Un iriirbe. 10. ^e flei^igcr tuir
finb, befto mebv lernen W\x. 11. ^m ©ommer ^ahe ic^ ba^ Sanb
ganj gem, aber im SBinter jie^c id; bie Stabt Dor. 12. ^TJir lln=
glucfad)en ift ber ^-u^ erfrorcn, alg id; nad; .§aufc ritt. 13. 6os
balb h)ir unfer *oau^ Devfauft l;atten, ^ogen Juir au^. 14. 211^ ic^
auf bcm Jiianbe ioar, luog id) mc^r aU id; je^t iuiege. 15. @g ift
tDaf>r, ba^ bie reic^ften ^cnU nicbt tmmer bie glucflid;ften finb.
16. ®er 9{egen, loeld^er un^ bie ?Reife Derleibet hat, Wat me^r
nu^Iic^ al^ angene^m. 17. ^ie iWutter ^cb bie BiMi Don bem
©lag auf, \vM)^§ ilir unartigeg Jlinb auf bie @rbe gefc^miffen
l)atU. 18. liefer ^nabe Ijat feine GItern betrogen, unb be^ljalb
ift er ungliidlicb. 19. ^rieren ©ie, §err ^>rofeffor? ^e^t
nic^t, aber ic^ fror, alg ic^ auf ber ©tra^e ivar. 20. ®er ^ciger
^at ben 35ogel gef^^offen, gerabe al§ er auf ben ^aum flog
21. 2^on juem tourbe ^^r §aug gefauft? 22. $8on einem
J^remben, ber feit Dierjeljn STagcn bei meinem ^Setter auf «e=
fuc^ ift.
B, 1. Lead is a heavy metal, but gold is the heaviest.
2. This painter is not so famous as his father, but his pictures
are just as fine. 3. George lost his parents when he was
still very young. 4. Those students have lost a great deal of
time, but now they are studying more industriously. ^5. l%e
bird flew away, just as the huntsman was on the point of
shooting it. • 6. When is the weather coldest in Canada ? In
the month of January it is coldest. 7. Which bird flies
fastest ? 8. The useiui is better than the beautiful. 9. What
kind^of a dog has the huntsman lost.? 10. Iron is heavy, lead
l62
L'^SSON XXVI.
[§§ 13a-
is heavier, but gold it, heaviest of all 11. Green is a more
agreeable colour for the eyes than ret! 12. If the stick is
too long, cut a piece of it off. 13. The upper part of the
city of Quebec is much finer than the lower. 14. The
weather seems to be warmer to-day, but it froze ^perf.) yester-
day. 15. When I was younger, I weighed more than my
brother, but now he weiglis more than I. i{y. The upper
part of the city of Quebec was built earlier than the lower
part
ORAL EXERCISE XXV.
1. 1st der junge General ein tapferer Mann? 2. Ziehen
Sie das Land der Stadt vor ? H. Weshalb ist der Kn^be so
traurig? 4. Wann hat der Jager den Vogel geschossen?
5. Welche Studenten lernen am meisten - b. Welches ist
besser, reich und ungliicklich oder ?rm und gliicklich (zu)
sein ?
Vki
LESSON XXVI.
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. - STRONG VERBS:
fingcn model.
132. Demonstrative Pronouns.
The Demonstrative Pronouns are :
1. bet, bic, bo0, that
2. biejcr, bicfe. bicjcs, this, that
3. jcnet, jcnc, jcnci, that, yonder
4 berjenige, bicjcnigc, baSjcnigc, that
5 bcr namUr^c, bie namlir^c, bog niimHr^c, the same
6. bcr|e(b(ig)c, biefelb(ig)c, bttg|clb(tge), the same
194]
DE^40NSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
163
7. ffll(^(er), foli^Ce), foIr^(e8), such, such a
8. bcgglei^en, bcr ^Icic^eu, of t it Kind (of tijose kinds)
Remark. — rhese may all be used either as Substantive
or Adjective 1 'onouns, except beetle' i;cn see § 139, i,
below).
133. I. J)ii, bic, ilttg, used adjecvively (i. e., before a
substantive), s declined lik^- the Definite Article (which is
merely the demonstrative adjective weakened and un-
emphasized), as :
^er' manv that man. '^tx mann', the man'.
2. When used substantiv ly it is declined thus :
MASC.
Nom. ber
Gen. beffen
Dat. bem
Ace. beu
FEM.
bie
bcrcn
bev
bie
Plural.
ALL GENDERS.
bic
bercr (bereit)
bencn
bie
Sin^ alar.
NEUTER.
bag
bcffen
bem
Note. — The turm biren (Gen. PI.) is only used as = 'of them,' as :
How many children have yo ? I have oven of them.
93? ie t)ielc ^inber ()nlieit ate ? 3cf) {)abc tJrreit beu.
134. :^tc|er and jcncr both follow the bt« ♦"er Model (see
§ 6), but bic§ is used for biefc^ in the Neuter Nom. and Ace.
Sing, when used substantively, as :
^ic3 ift 1, .n 33ud», . (Sr batte bies nt*t ge^ort.
This is my book. He h d not heard this.
btefcr = this (the nearer of two obje^^ ^s, hence also =)
the latter, as:
jencr = that, yo^ 1er (the more remote of two objects,
Hence also =) the former;
._.-,.- _ .- ^. — ... .~,-,\- - jj-vp^.*,
This treo is large, but that (oi ) is larger.
i64
LESSON XXVI.
[§§ 134-
3ntcr 93aum, yonder tree (pointed out as remoiS).
^arl unb ^Bilbclm finb "sHriibcv; bicfcr ift fleif^ii^ jcncr ift
tvage, Charles and William are brothers ; the latter
is diligent, the former is idle.
1JI5. 1. ^Cl'jClliflC is declined in both parts, like the Defi-
nite Article followed by the adjective form jenig with we-^k
endings, thus :
\ Singular. Plural.
MASC.
FEM.
NEUTER.
ALL GENDERS.
I
Nom. bcrjenigc bicjcnicjc tJoSjcmgc bicjcnigcn
Gen. bcgjcnigcn bcrjcmgctt bcSjcnigen berjenigcn
etc. etc. etc. etc.
2. %tx or bcrjcni(tc is used :
{a) before a genitive case, as :
^d; \)^\it 31}rcn .v)ut unb bciti jcnigen) v5§vcg 'SruberU,
I have your hai and that of your brother (your
brother's);
Note. — The demonstrative may also be omitted in this construction,
as in English ; or the simple bcr may be used.
(^) before a relative clause, as :
^cr(jcmfic), wcJr^cv gufrieben ift, ift glucfUc^,
He who is contented, is happy.
^tcCjcnigc) ?^rau ift am fd)Dnften, tucli^c gut ift,
That woman is most beautiful, who is good.
'^x §au§ unb ba0(|cnigc), movin unr iuofjnen,
Your house and that in which we live.
Note. — In sentences like the first, where bei(ient(io) is used substantively,
the demonstrative and relative together may be replaced by the compound
relative Wer, thus : .
Ser jufrieben ift, ift qludltrf).
130]
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. •
16$
tiU\. ^crfdbe (bcrfclbiflc") =» ' the same,' as : the same
hat, bcrjclbc !o\\t ; and is declined like bcrjenige, \n two parts,
written as one word, thus :
Singular. Plural.
MASC. FEM. NEUTER. ALL GENDERS.
Nom. bcrfclbc bicfclbc bogfclbc biciclbeit
Gen. bcgfclbcn bcrfelbcu bcSfelbcn berfelben
etc. etc. etc. etc.
(For examples of its use see § 143, 2-4, below).
Note. — (^elbig is sometimes used without article, with strong end-
ings: felbigcr, -e, -e8.
137. ^cr ttamltf^t sometimes replaces bcrfelbc.
l.*J8. I. <Solr^, when used alone, follows thebicfcr Model,
as : folc^cr Jijcin, such wine; foI*C& ^^rot, such bread.
2. After cin, it follows the mixed declension ot adjectives,
as :
Nom. cin folc^cr 2Bein, such a wine
Gen. eineg foId)cn 2Boine^3, cf such a wine, etc.
3. Before ein, folt^ is always, and before an adjective, gen-
erally, uninflected, as :
Sol(^ cin ai>ein ; foli^ gutcr 2Bein, or folc^cr gutc 2Bein.
Note. —The adjective has the J/rt;//^ endings when fold) is uninflected,
otherwise it has the weak endings, except in the plur., where it some-
times has the strong.
2. @old^ with fin is often replaced by fo, as:
(So ein ©cin ; cin fo guter Scin.
139. I. ^c^gleic^en is used as an indeclinable neuter sub-
stantive 1 never as adjective), thus :
%i) batte bcggleic^en nie gebijrt,
i had never heard that sort of thing (anything of
that kind).
i66
LESSON XXVI.
[§§ 139-
Note. — ©e^ll^ctt^en is also used adverbially, =« 'in the same way,
also.'
2. ^crgleic^en is used both substantively (referring to a
fern, or plur. noun) and adjectively. In the latter case it is
invariable, standing before substantives of any gender and
number, as :
^crgleic^en ^ein, $)crgletc^cn SOBeinc,
Wine of that sort. Wines of that sort.
Note.- The phrase : iinb berflteid)en mc^v (abbrev. u. bgl. m.) is used
forunb jo )uciter (11. f. ra.) = etccetera.
General Remarks on Demonstrative Pronouns.
140. The English ' that ' is rendered in German :
x. As Demonstrative Pronoun :
{a) Most generally by iJCr or bicfcr, when there is no
contrast with any other object, thus :
That man, bcr' 5!)ianu or btcfcr 9Jlann.
(Jb) By bcr or bcrjcitige before a genitive case or a
relative clause (see § 135, 2, above).
{c) By fcilcr, when the object is distinctly pointed out
as remote (== yor, yonder), or as m.ore remote
than another, thus :
^cncr ©ttum, That tree (over yonder).
^iefc§ ^m^ unb jcncg. This house and that one.
2. As Relative by bcr or tuclt^cr (see § 95), thus :
The book that I have, :Da^ 33u4 bttg (luclc^eg) id} \:i(xU.
3. As Conjunction by bttj, thus :
I shall tell your father that you are diligent,
^d^ hjcrbe beinem %aUx fagen, ba^ bu flei^ig bift.
141. The neuter pronouns bo8, bicf(c8), jCttCS are used
iKC cs^ sec 8 39, i> ii"*^ uitiu;t»/ i> «-> xvem. -/ i^^-tv/iv tnv, wii--
»43l
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
167
'to be/ representing ^he real subject, which follows the verb,
and with which the verb agrees, as :
^06 i[t mein SBruber, That is my brother.
2)icf(f&) ift ^^re ©d;Jve[ter, This is your sister.
^encg finb feine 33ttrf)cr, Those are his books.
142. Xcr and jencr, when referring to inanimate objects,
are often rephced by the adverb ba(r), 'there,' before pre-
positions i^compare § 38, Rem. 5) and biefer by ^ier, as :
^(ft l)aW \M^ bomit ^n ibun,
I have nothing to do with that (f/ier^hh),
^tcrmit mu^ ic^ fc^Uefeen,
With this {/lerewith) I must close.
Note. — This substitution is not made before a relative, as :
3ii) bad)te an ta& [not bavaii), toag ®ic fasten,
I was thinking of that which (what) you were saying.
143. Use of Demonstratives to replace
Personal Pronouns.
1. The neuter gen. bcffcn replaces that of the neuter pers.
pron. (feiner) referring to things, as :
^c^ erinnre mic^ bcffcn nicfit,
T do not recollect it (yeiucr = him, of him).
2. The genitive of bfr and that of bfrjclde are frequently
used to replace the possessive adjective of the 3. person, in
order to avoid i mbiguity, as :
2)er ©raf tt)ar mit feuicm (beg ©rafen) ^ager unb bcffen
•(be-g pagers) ^uubcii (or mit ben .t)unben begfeldcn) auf
ber ^agb. The Count was at the hunt with his (the
Count's) huntsman and his (the huntsman's) dogs.
Note. — a«it fcittcn .s)itiibeit would mean 'with the Count's dogs.'
3- ^crfdbe is used in other cases also to prevent ambiguity
(al
so uiCfCj: in the same way;, as
[68
LESSON XXVI.
t§§ 143
fDJein 33ruber ift bci mcinem ^rcuubc, unb berfelBe (or bicfcr)
acfitet i^n febr ; or: ci-(intnn 'iirubev) ad)tet bcnfcit'en \ii)i',
My brother is at my frier -'i, and he (the latter, the
friend) esteems him ( iny brother) very much ; or : he
(my brother) esteeniS him (my friend) very much.
4. ^crfclbc also replaces the personal pronouns, to p/event
repetitions like ibn — v>biien, 3ie — fie, etc as :
Diefcr ^iln'tn ift c^xif, \d^ tarn ^sbncn iJenfclden (for i^n
^^UCn) em^feblen, This wii e is good, / can recommend
it to you.
144. Strong Verbs : jtn(|cn Model.
Germ. Model:
Engl. Analogy:
Ablaut:
Infin.
fingen
sing
t
LIST.
binben, bind
briugcn (N.), press
finben, find
fliiujen, ring, sound
(0e)(ingett (N.), succeed (impers.,
with dat. of pers.)
ringen, wring (the hands, etc.)
fd^Uingen, twine ; swallow
fclnoinbeu (N.), vanish
frf^mugen, swing
fingen, sing
finfen, sink
fpringcn (N. A.), spring, leap
ttinlfcn, drink (of human beings)
ttjiitben, wind
'tfiiTgcn^ force
Impf.
f«ng
sang
a
banb
brang
fanb
!Iang
gclang
rang
fcblang
frf)tt)anb
fd)iuang
fang
fan!
f))rang
Iran!
U)anb
P. Part.
gefiingen
siin^j
i
gebunben
gebrungen
gefuttben
gcflungen
gelungen
gerungen
gefrf)lungm
gefcbiuunbcn
gefc^hjungen
gefungen
gefunfen
gefpvungen
getrunfen
geiuunben
flCilDunacn
143
M4J
STRONG verbs: fiitgcii model.
169
to press in, penetrate, ein'=
escape, entflie^en [tringen
invent, evfinben
remember, [idi erinnern (-}-gen.
of thing)
drown, be drowned, ertrinfen
spring upon, Ioi^'|>ringen (auf
-f- ace.)
mean, suppose, meinen
oblige, t)cri)mben
vanisli, Uci-)d;i»ini)en
Vocabulary.
on board, am ^.^orb
grammar, bte Wramma'tif
dealer, ber .SMnblev
lion, ber ^bWi
diver, ber ^auc^ier
telephone, ba^ ^elep^on'
clever, gcfdiidt
prudent, cautious, lHn'[id)tig
unfortunately, Icibev
below, untcrbalb {-\- gen.)
never yet, nod; nie
EXERCISE XXVI.
^. 1. a)ieg ift mein ^^ettev au^ ^JJiontrcal ; feuuen ©ie if^n?
'-i. 3alt)Df)I, biefcn fenne id; Qan^ c3ut, aber nid)t Wax, Wx mir (3c]tcvn
ben ^i>rtef gebrad;t hat 3. din bijfcr ^inabe fdituancj fid) auf )>cn
^p^dbaum UP, (Garten feiiuH5 ^l^ad^bare iinb fd^miji bte ^jt^fel auf
bie @rbe. 4. ^u biefem ^elbe l;aben bic 33auevn fd^ou ba^ (sjrae
Gefd;mtte«, «^x in jenem tucrDen fie e^ crft morgcn fc^neibeii
5. ,^iebet t^., M€ md) baffon." 6. ^enee finb meine Munbe abev
bie^ fmb biejenigen, MdK bev ^ager Dor acbt 4 agen Dcrloren bat
unb bie t* gefunben I;abe. 7. evinncrn 2ic fid! beffcn, m<^ id;
^bnen bout alien 2d)(of5 ain Ufcr be^ 2ee^ crgdhlt babe ? 8. ^ e m
tDiirbe id) feinen ifjaler leiben; ber luiirbe nie be^ablcn. 9 I^ie
©d)afer trieben i(;re .^erbcn iiber benfelben ^crg auf )oeld)en lt)ir
ftiegen. 10. Tev lieifenbe ftieg Dom ^^ifcrbc unb banb ba^felbe an
emeu fleuien i^auni 11. ^a^ ©duff ftief^ an einen ^-elfen, ba^
Saffer brang ein, unb ba^ Sd^ff fanf. U, .sd. babe tnid; be.
fltffen, 2atcm ju lernen, aber e^ ift mix v'rd^t gelungen. 13.. ^Iier
^M
170
LESSON XXVI.
[§§ 144-
F)at. IT). ®a^ ift au^ meincr beutfd)en ©rammatif gettorben?
®ie fc^cint ganj i)erf(f;n)unben 311 feiu. 17. ®ag finb fc^onc
(grbbeeren ; \vo ijaUn ®ie biefelben yetiuft ? 18. (Sie finb fd;on,
nic^t iua()r? oold) ^rad;tige 33eeren finben Sie nicf»t bei jebem
.t>dnblcr. 19. 3d fjeij^e^ 3Setter fjaben t»ir noc^ iv4t ge^abt.
i2(). SSiaS iDurbc bir geantlx)Drtet, al^ bu nad) bem .tranfen frag*
tcft? 91. Man fagte .lir, er fei ein mn\Q beffer.
^. 1 , The patient is just as weak to-day as he was yester-
day. 2, Such happy days I have never yet passed ! 3. Where
do you generally pass the winter? 4. Where is my pen?
Have you found it ? 5. This is my neighbour of whom you
have already heard so much. (>. The ship has sunk, and
the people who were on board have been drowned. 7. I
was looking for my coat, but found my father's. H. I should
be very much obliged to you, if you sang me a beautiful song.
9. Which is poorer, he who has no money, or he who has no
friends? 10. How should we escape if the boat sank?
1 1. Charles has already finished (the) learning (of) his lesson ;
he is cleverer than I thought. 1;2. The diver that jumped
from the bridge has unfortunately been drowned. 13. It
will have been a good lesson for us, if it makes us more
prudent in future. 14. Is that a new song? No, it is the
same that I sang a week ago at your house. 15. The St.
Lawrence River is the broadest in Canada ; below the city of
Quebec it is broadest. Ki. The patient is better to-day; he
will be allowed to go out to-morrow.
ORAL EXERCISE XXVI.
I . Was ist aus dem Taucher geworden ? 2. 1st Karl ge-
schickter als Johann ? 3. Was hat der bose Knabe gemacht ?
4. Ist der Reisende dem Lowen entflohen ? 5. Ist es Ihnen
gelungen, Latein zu lernen ? 6. Wessen Hunde sind das?
«45J
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
i;i
LESSON XXVII.
JNOEFINITE PRONOUNS. -STRONG VERBS: jpimtn AND
§Clfcn MODELS.
■'*^* Indefinite Pronouns.
The Indefinite Pronouns are :
(d) Substantive-.
1. jnan(indecl.),o.ie, they, people (Fr.^/i-) |
2. jebcrmomi, everybody, everyone I
3. jcmonb, j somebody, anybody | oi persons
( some one, any one C only
4. ntcmanb, | "o^^dy, no one, no person
( not anybody, etc.
5. dtuag, something, anything
6. ni(^U, nothing, not anything
7. ciltcr, one, some one
8. fciner, no one, none
J
) of things
S only
(fciefer Mod-
el) persons
and things
if) Adjective {2\%o used substantively):
1. Cinigc, ctltl^c (plur.), some, a few,
several
2. ieb(llicb)cr iXt^Xx^tx), each (one), every
one
3. mani^rr^ manv (a one)
4. me^rcrc (pi.;, se -ral
5. tiicf, much, pi. tiiere, many
«. mettiH, little, pi. menigc, few
7. ttJclt^cr, some
u JwTt:.-P.\!"^^^-^^. ^~'-' Adjectives are also
i~^^ «. .*.«.u«uc i.umerai Adjectives (see Less. XXIX).
(biefer Mod-
el) persons
and things
172
LESSON XXVII.
146-
SI-
t
1
146. 9Won f spelt with small letter and one it, to distinguish
it from ber ^Diann, the man, from which it is derived) is the
Indefinite Personal Pronoun, and is used to make a state-
ment without specifying any particular person. It is equivalent
to Engl ' one, they, we, you (indef. ), people,' etc., (French on),
or to the impersonal use of the passive voice, as :
9Wan fagt. One says; they, people say; or it is said.
^Jian fann CI unb Safjer nidit jiifammcn uti,fd;en.
One (we> you) cannot uhx oil and water.
Remarks. — I. Ones self (refl.) = fi(^ ; one's = fcin
(poss. adj.), as •
SWttit fcfiamt fi(^ fcincr ^et)lcr,
One is ashamed of one's faults.
2. 3Jian cannot be replaced by any other pronoun, as :
9)?an toivb miibe, tucnu man (not er) ^u lange arbeitet,
A man (one) gets tired, when he works too long.
147. 3clDCtm«nn is used in the Sing, only; it takes -g in
Gen., but is otherwise uninflected, as :
^cbcrmonn^ Sacfie ift nicmanbe^ ®acf)c.
Everybody's business is nobody's business.
®ic ^ibel ift eiu ^i3ud) fiiv icbcvmanu (ace).
The Bible is a book for everybody.
148. 3cmanb and its negative nicmantl are used in the
Sing, only, and are declined thus :
Nom. jemanb niemanb
Gen. jemanbcS niemanbe§
( jemanbcm < niemanbem
I iemanb(ctt) ( niemanb(cn)
Ace. temanb(cn') niemanb(cn)
^5^1
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
173
I,
2.
Note, - The uninflected forms are preferable for the Dat. and Ace, as :
2Bir I)obeii nicmonU (ace.) gctabclt, We have blamed nobody.
SBerbeu etc e.^ icmanD (dat.) fagcu ? Shall you tell it to anybody?
149. I. (^itoai is sometimes abbreviated to hiag, as :
^c^ Will bit ItJOg fagen, I will tell you something.
2. After ctniO0 and itld^tg, an adjective has the strong
neuter ending -c0 (see § 122, Rem. 1 1, above).
3. ©ttHOS and ni(i)i& are also used as Indefinite Numerals
(see Less. XXIX, § 168).
160. (^incr (biefer Model)/ one, someone, anyone,' is used :
In the Nom. Sing. Masc. = man.
To supply the missing cases of man, as :
@§ tf)ut cincm (dat.) leib, bon [einen ^-reunben gi^ fcfjeiben.
One is sorry to part from one's friends.
3. Before a substantive, as :
filter mciner ^reunbe (tion meinen ^-reimben),
One of my friends.
@in(c)g i)on biefen ^ucBern, One of these books.
4. To represent a preceding substantive, as :
^aUn ©ie ein ^ucb ? ^a, ia^ hahc cin(c)0.
Have you a book > Yes, I have one.
Note. - The c maybe dropped in the ending of the Nom. and Ace. Neut.
161. Mmv (biefer Model) is the negative of einer, and
is used :
1. As equivalent to niemanb.
2. Before a substantive, as:
«. Reiner t)on meinen ^reunbcn.
None (not one) of my friends.
3. To represent a preceding substantive, as :
^ahm Bk cin '^ndj ? y^ein, ic^ habi fcm(c)«.
-.OTE. — Like emcr, it may drop t in the Nom. and Ace. Neuter.
174
LESSON XXVII.
15a-
152. ©Inige (tili^t), mc^rerc, = * some, a few, several,' as :
^iniftC bon meinen ^reunbcn. Some (a few) of my friends.
iSRc^rcre biefer 33u^er, Several of these books.
153. ^ebcr, jebhjeber, iegU(i)er (b:efer Model) or etn jeber,
etc. (def. art. -|- adj. with mixed declension) are used,
especially in the Masc, for jebermann, as :
^ie 33ibel tft ein SBurf) fur jcbcn.
(^in) jcbcr tft fcine^ «Iu(fe§ 3c^mteb;
Every man (one) is the architect ilit. smith) of his own
fortune.
154. SKmt^cr, * many a one, many a peison ' (bi; ;:i: Model),
is used to express indefinite plurality, as :
9JlotJ^cr bent't. Many a one (person) thinks.
155. iBt\d)tX (biefer Model) is used for ' some,' referring
to a preceding substantive, as :
^ahw eie ^^rot ? ^a, id) f^abe mt^fi,
156. For tJtcl and ttJCttig see Less. XXIX, § 176.
157. When the Engl, 'anybody, anyone, anything,' =
'anybody, etc., af alV (indefinite and general), they are
rendered by irgcnb jemanb, irftciib einer, irgcnb ctiDa^, as :
Anybody (at all) will tell you, where I live,
^ygcnb jemanb (or einer) iuirb ^sl;nen fagcu, too ic^ troijnc.
^rf> bin mit irftCttb cttwa§ sufrieben,
I am contented with anything (at all).
158. Strong Verbs: fpiniicn Model.
Infin, Impf. p. Part. ,
Germ. Model: f^innett fpann gef^onncn
Engl. Analogy: spin span (spun)
(incomplete)
Ablaut: i Q
(59]
S"*RONG verbs: fi^innen model.
175
LIST.
(Note -The Impf. Subj. is also given, on account of variations
occurring.)
(bc)flim.m, begin Uaam beQamt Begonnei.
rtnnen (N.), flow rann ranne gctonnm
f*uimme„ (N. A.), swim f4,n,am„, 1 1 J"™' Befd;Wommcn
fmnen,tliink {ann ffiune gefonnen
(fle)mi„„en, win, gain gewann .) 9;;^*-; fl„„„,„,„
Note. — Observe the subjunctive forms with vowel of P. Part + Urn
laut, instead of vowel of Impf. Ind.
«
159. Strong Verbs: ^clfctt Model.
T Pr. Ind. 2. 1. Sine, i
RT.
^«^/. Analogy : wanting.
Ablaut: c i - .. ..
a 0, Uoru
LIST.
(Note. -The 2. 3. sing. Pres. Ind., 2. sing. Imper.,and Impf. Subj. are
also given.)
Bergen, hide birgft, birgt, birg barg bavge geborgen
''tlt'"'^' (birftef^,birft,6irfi) bavfl j^^Jj geborftcn
(i)er)berben(N.), berbirbft, etc. uerbarb Derbur6e ijerborben
spoil (intr.)
( btafcf) brafc^e
\ brofrf) brofc^e
worth giltft, gilt, gilt gait gafte gegolten
brefc^;n, thrash brifdjeft, etc.
> gebrofc^en
^*.*^ ■ -.*.
176
LESSOxV XXVII.
{>eIK help ^ilfft, etc. ^alf
fd(>elten, scold \d}\{t\t, fdnlt, fd)ilt fdmlt
fterbcn, (N.), die ftivbft, etc. ftarb
iDcrben, woo luirbft, etc. limvb
Jucrbeu (N.), be-
it)ivft, toivb, toeibc
luarb
t§i59
^tfc gcfjolfcn
fdniltc ge)d;olteu
ftiirbe gcftorben
iuiirbc gciuorben
luiirbc
iuiirfc
geiuorben
ijciDorfen
come - - ^^ unube
luerfcn, throw Unrfft, etc. iDuvf
Remarks. — i. Most of these verbs have i) or ii in the
Impf. Siibj. instead of ii, which cannot be distinguished in
sound from the c of the Pres. Ind. ; thus ftcrbc and ftdrbe
would sound alike.
2. 'iscrbcrbcn, when trans., is both strong and weak (uers
berbtC/Dcrbcvbt).
3. 5Berbcu has umvb or iourbe in the sing. ; luurbcu only in
the plur. (see § 19).
4. 'J'he imperative never has the final -c in these verbs,
except iDcrbe.
5. Observe the omission of (c)t of 3. sing. J' res. Ind. in
the verbs with stem in -t, -&.
Vocabulary.
to be or do (of health), fid)
befinbcn
reflect, deliberate, fid; be=
ftnncu
accomplish, leiften
remain over, be left, ii'brig
bUibcu
hide, conceal, bevbergen
requite, reward, Dcrgelten
complete, finish, uoKcn'bcn
throw away, lucg'lucifcn
run away, vanish, ;;crrtnnen
the conduct, "oa^i ^etragen
poet, bcv ^id^tcr
barley, bic ©crfte
oals, bcv .s)-ifcv
sailor, bcr ')Jiatvofe
musician, bev 'jJiufifcr
need, necessity, bie 9?ot*
dove, pigeon, bic laube
phte, bcr iTcKcr
loss, bcr 3Scrlult' *
§l59l
STRONG verbs: ^etfeii model.
^77
emb tassment, perplexity, thereto, baju'
bi. Jcno'iicnbdt longer, ni*t me^r
heat, bev ^I^^eijen as, luie
evil, t>i)[c
Jcii«,rt; I e the country. ;j(f, bht fin Srranb toom 8ttnJ>e.
EXERCISE XXVII.
A. 1. 3Ser 311 i)icl vcbet, Iciftct Jucnig. 2. ^erjcnige, tvelcBer
311 Did rcbct, Iciftct Jycniii. 3. -Die^ finb nieine 3d)ur)e, nber jenc^
finb (bie) %\)x<{\\). 4. ^^sjer i-manius ^rcunb ift, ift uienianbc^
Jreunb. 5. Gin ptcr (Shrift ijcvgilt m\i^ iiiit ©utcm. (J. ©^
ift fo ebcn jeinanb hicv i3CJuc|en. 7. !©c' beg Don bicfen 58an.-
bernjicben 3ie Dor, bag rote obcr bag blaue? H. 3Ben fu*ft
fcu? ll^c^ fuc^^e bie arme Jamilie, bercn ^Intter geftorben ift.
0. .t)abeu 3ic fc^^on :3bren ill^cijen gebrofd^en ? ^Wan brifd;t I;eute
ben <r)afer unb bie Werfte, aber vckk\\\ iuirb erft morcjen ben Seijen
brefd;en. 10. Gg ift ein ^l^erluft fiir bag ganje Sanb, trenn ein
Oro^ev unb tjuter m<\.m ftirbt. 11. 3rer grof?e ^Inabc fd;amt fid;
fetneg 33etrai3eng unb begbalb Derbirgt er fein ©efid;t. 12. „W\t
gemonnen, fo jerronnen," bag ift, man berliert leid^t, lyag man
Ieid)t geioinnt. 18. ®ie Grbbeeren, loelc^^e id> geftern faufte, finb
Derborben. 14. ^:))tan bilft gem einem, ber fid> felbft bilft. ' 15.
CMermit fc^ide id; %Ui\\ bag (sjelb, mcUbeg eie fo freunblid;
gelvefen finb, mir ju Iei{;en. IG. einb 3ie ein ^reunb Doni
@d)lt)immen? ^eM nid)t inebr, aber id) fd)lt)ainm gern, alg id)
junger n>ar. 17. ®er Unglitdliclie befann fief) Xo^wo^t, fc! att
aber enblicl) ^x^ ben 3?anb beg 3!^ooteg unb fprang ing ':K?affer.
18. 3ft er ertrunfen? 9Jein, er iDurbe oon ben ^:)J?atrofen gerettet!
B. 1. Good morning, Mr. Bell, how are you to-day? 2.
Have you any money .? Yes, to be sure, I have some, but not
enough for my journey. 3. Where is the tree to which the
traveller tied his horse.? 4. People take cold easily when they
are tired. 5, Schiller and Beethoven were Germans the
<^.
v«^,
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
-^^
:/
1.0
I.I
L25
lif I4£ 12.0
2.5
22
il 1116
23 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580
(716) 872-4503
rnoiograpiiic
Sciences
Corporation
- ^^ "^1%
%
'^
^ />
178
SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON D.
[§§ I60^
latter was a great musician, the former a great poet. 6. Mr.
A. is a lazy ma'n ; he would not work at all, if necessity
did not force him to it. 7. We found the money we lost a
week ago. 8. Many a one begins what he will never finish.
9. Mary, my child, throw that apple away; it is spoilt. 10.
Have you shot many pigeons ? We have shot only a few.
1 1. Except my brother and me nobody is at home. 1:>. The
mother is scolding, because her naughty child h:>.s thrown a
plate upon the ground. 1,3. Where is the River St. Lawrence
broadest? 14. When the children had drunk, the cat drank
the milk which remained over (was left). 15. The women
OR (an) the shore screamed and wrung their hands, when the
boat sank in which their husbands were. 16. Has the money
which was lost been found ?
ORAL EXERCISE XXVII.
1 . Wann w^rd man den Hafer dreschen ? 2. Warum ver-
birgt der bose Knabe sein Gesicht ? 8. Wem hilft man gern ?
4. Sind Sie ein Freund vom Jngen ? 5. Was fiir ein Mann
ist Herr Bell? (j. Weshalb schilt die Frau.?
SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON D.
ON CERTAIN ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS.
160. Adjectives used as Attributes only.
The following classes of adjectives are not used as predicates :
1. Derivatives In -til, -Crtt (denoting material), as ; no(bcn, of gold,
golden ; fillicm, of silver. These are replaced in the predicate by the
substantive vi'ith coil, as:
2)iefe Ul)r ift tion >iSilbei-, This watch is of silver.
2. Many in -if^ and -U(^; as: biebifd), thievish; tierifd), bestial; l)cucl)=
Icvifrf), hypocritical ; tiiglid), daily ; jaljrlirf), annual; Wivfltd), actual, real.
3. Those in -jjj from adverbs of time and place, as: f)initip, of to-day;
^tefig, of this place.
i6a] ADJECTIVES USED AS PREDICATES ONLY.
179
161. Adjectives used as Predicates only.
The following classes of adjectives are not used as attributes:
1. Those that are really nouns (though spelt with a small letter) such
as: nngit, afraid; feinb, hostile; freiinb, friendly ; leib, sorry; not, needful-
nu<5e, useful ; fdjulb, guilty.
2. The following among others:
bereit, ready getroft, confident
eiuciebeuf, mindful ^^^^Ij^, aware
gor, cooked, done (of food) grom, averse
gong unb gcibe, current (of money.etc.) irrc astray, wrong
toilOaft, partaking
Note - Both these classes of adjectives are incapable of comparison in the ordinary
tTvel"''at ""^ "'"^^^^"'^^"'^'"^""'^''^^^^ '"■"^"'"^ ""^' ^"'•""» '"' Jften respec-
er njurbc tneincm »ruber imnter titt(,r flrnm, He grew more and ,„ore averse to mv
brother.
S5aS tf)at mtr am tneiptcil Ulb, I was most sorry for that (re/aUve superl.).
162. Remarks on certain Pronouns.
1. The pronouns \vn; h)a8 are frequently followed by the demonstrative
kv m the qffer clause, and always so when the latter (the seeming ante-
cedent) is in a diJerent case from that of the relative, as:
9Bcr l)at, Urn mirb gcgebcn, To him that hath shall be (is) given.
2. The neuter pronouns c.^ btU^ lun.% jcbrg, atleS are often used in the
Norn, and Ace. Sing, in reference to a mwtier of persons or things, espe-
cially if of different gender, as:
a^aiiiier, 2Bcibcr, f inbcr, ailcs fifirie uin ^ilfe, fo laiit t» fonn^c
Men, women, children, all cried for help as loud as they could;
^viil) iibt fid), luo^ ciii iWciftcu uifi-bcii jdiK,
Those practice early, who would become masters.
Note. — Observe that the verb is singular.
3. 35?a« is sometimes used for Uianim? ('why.?'), as:
aBttStDeiiiftbu? Why dost thou weep .>
4. The relative adverb lute ('as ') after fold) cill or fo elll ('such a') is
usually followed by a personal pronoun, agreeing in gender and number
with the antecedent, as :
®old) 00) eiu mam, (or ein mmn) »t)ie mir tOn nie qefanut ()atten,
auch a man as we had never known. '
NoTE.-The demonstrative fold; or f is often omitted, as indicated in the above example.
i8o
LESSON XXVIII.
l§§ 163-
LESSON XXVIII.
NUMERALS: CARDINALS AND ORDINALS. - STRONG VERBS:
f|jrC(^Cn MODEL.
NUMl
iRALS.
1 63. Cardinals.
104.
Ordinals.
1. ein^; cin
(cr), -c, -(00)
1st.
ber crftc
2. jtuei
2nd.
„ iWiiit
3. brei
3rd.
„ brhie
4. mer
4th.
„ i)ierte
5. funf
Ath.
„ fiinfte
6. fedjg
(ith.
„ fecb^te
7. fieben
\
7th.
„ fiebcnte
8. ac^t
8th.
„ arf)tc
9. neun
Otli.
„ neunte
10. jef^n
10th.
„ jebnte
11. elf
nth.
„ elfte
12. §tt)otf
l:.'th.
„ giDblfte'
13. bveijc^n
1 3th.
„ breijcbnte
14. mevjet^n
14th.
„ Dicrjcbnte
15. fiinfjel;!!
or fimfjcbn
15th.
„ fiinf= or fi'mfjel^nte
16. fcf^jcf^n
llJth.
„ fed)5el}nte
n. flc65el)n
17th.
„ fiebsc^nte
18. adUjc^n
18th.
„ ad)t5el)nte
19. nninjctjn
U)th.
„ neungcfjntc
20. jtnatt'tg
20th.
„ giuan^igftc
21. c'ti nnb ju^anjig
21st.
, eiu unb 3tt)an3ig)te
22. 3H)ci unb
Siuanjig
22nd.
„ gtuei imb ghjanjigfte
30. 'brci^ig
30th.
„ brcif5igfte
40. Dienij^
40th.
. t)ier3ig[te
50. funfjigoi
• funfjig
50th.
„ funfjigfte or funf=
l§§ 163-
165J REMARKS ON THE CARDINAL NUMERALS. 181
VERBS:
nfjel^nte
mnjigfte
>r fiinf:
60. ferftjig
70. fieb(en)5te
80. ac^tjig
90. neunjig
100. ^unbert
101. f^uubert (unb) eing
123. l)unbert (unb) brei unb
jirangig
60th.
70th.
80th.
90th.
100th.
101st.
123rd.
ber fedigigfte
„ fieb(en)5igfte
., ad;t^igfte
„ neunjigfte
„ ^unbertfte
„ ^unbert unb crfte
„ ^unbert (unb) brri
unb amanjigftc
Cardinals.
200.
300.
1000.
1001.
1036..
1887.
•10,000.
100,000.
1,000,000.
2,567,849.
jiuei ^unbert
brei I;unbert
taufenb
taufcnb unb eing
taufenb (unb) fed;^ unb brei§if
j taufenb (unb) ac^t t)unbert (unb) fieben unb ac^tjig
( or ad)tjef)nf)unberi fieben unb ac^tgig
5ef)n taufenb
f^unbert taufenb
eine ^Jtillion'
5iuei gjJiaionen, funf ^unbert (unb) fieben unb
fedigig taufenb, a6:}t ^unbert (unb) neun unb
mer^ig.
Interrogative Ordinal : ber toicHiclftc ? which (in order) .?
what day of the month ? (See § 166, 3, Note 2).
165. Remarks on the Cardinal Numerals.
■ I. @tn only is declined throughout, thus :
{a) Before a substantive after the mein Model (§ 8), like
the Indefinite Article, which is the same word un-
emphasized, as :
(k\W mam, one man ; ein ^Kann', a man.
1 82
LESSON XXVIII.
tSi«S
Note. — The numeral eiii is sometimes printed with a capital, or spaced
out (= Engl, italics) to distinguish it from the Article, as :
SBtr Ijaben (fin' (e i n) 33iirf), We have one book.
SBir {)abcu ctn 53ucf)', We ha^^e a book.
(l) Used sul)stantively (see also § 150, above) without
article, after bicfer Model (§ 6), as :
®iner bon meincn ^reunben. One of my friends.
Unfer eincr. One of us {of our sort).
{c) After an article or other determinative word, like an
adjective, as :
2)er eine ^rubev. The one brother.
3}iein eincr ©a)u(), (The) one of my shoes.
Note. — With the definite article it may be used substantively
also, as :
Jier eine iiiib ber nnbcre, (The) one and the other
and even in the plural (= some, one party), as*
^tc cincn iaiiteii bieei, bic anbcrn jcncg,
Some (the one party) said this, others (the othei party) that.
(d) (Sing is the form used in counting.
2. 3h>ci and brci may have -er in the Gen, and -t\\ in the
Dat. when not accompanied by any article, etc., as •
2lu0 glceicr ober breicr 3^ws^" 9Jfunb fommt bie 2Ba^r{>t:t,
Out of the mouth of two or three witnesses cometh
the truth.
9)ian faun nicf>t ^toeicn ^erren bienen.
One cannot serve two masters.
Note. — The CJen. -tX is necessary to show the case, but may be re.
placed by t)on; but the Dat. -Clt before a substantive is rare, the -n of
the substantive sufficiently showing the case.
3. ©cibc = 'both,' refers to two objects taken together,
and is declined like an adjective in the Plur. ; N. beibc,
G. beiber, etc. ; bic beibcn ; meine beibcn ^riiber. It often
§i6sl
REMARKS ON THE NUMERALS.
183
replaces jiuei after determinative words, as in the last example.
The neuter sing, form beibcl is also found, as :
33eibf0 tft \va ;t, Both (things) are true.
Notes. - i. Both / us = wir bcibe(n) (we two).
2. • Both * as conjunction = foluo!)t, etc. (See Less. XL.)
4. Other cardinals are not declined unless used substan-
tively (see next section).
5. The numben 'rom 13 to zg are formed by adding -je^n
(Engl, -teen) to t.ie units (but fecbje^n drops -8).
6. The multiples of ten (20—90) add -jij^ to the units,
itoongifl, brcigig being irregular, and fedijic^ dropping -g.
7. The um'fs always i>f ecede the fens in compound numbers
from 21 upwards, both being joined by the conjunction unb
'and ' ; hence 25 = fiinf uilb Jiuangig (Engl. ' five and twenty ');
156 == ^unbert fec^^ unb funfjtg, etc.
8. '^unbert and 2au|ritb are generally used without ein be-
fore them, and the conjunction unb may be omitted after
them.
9. 'One by one, two by two,' etc. = jc ciner, jc jtoei (or
jc 5h)ei unb jmei) , etc.
10. The Cardinals may be used as substantives :
(a) With a substantive understood (as «w//,? numbers
only), with -c in Nom. Ace, -en in Dat., as :
Sltte mere. All fours.
9)tit fecf)fen. With [a coach and] six [horses].
(d) As feminine substantives, of the spots on dice, etc.,
or of the figures i, 2, 3, etc., see § 80, 2, (0, with
plur. in -en, as :
2)ic ®in8, the one-spot, figure one, plur. ©nfen.
1 84
LESJON XXVITl.
Ii^§ 165-
(c) .'punbert and ^aufenb are used as collective sub'
stantives, declined after the .'ounb Model, § 21, (<^),
as:
'^m erften .j^ttltbcrt, In the first hundred.
^aufcnbc toon l^ccnfdien, Thousands of men.
(^) gjiiniou is a fem. subst. of the weak declension.
1«6. Remarks on Ordinal Numerals.
1. The Ordinals are formed from the Cardinals by adding:
(a) Up to 19, -U, except bcr crftc, britte, ad}tc.
(l>) From 20 upwards, -ftc, which in compound numbers
is added to the /asf cotnponent only.
NoTK. — Xicr Qilterc is .the older ordinal for 'second '
2. The ordinals after proper names (of sovereigns, etc.) are
spelt with a capital letter, and must i with the article) be de-
clined throughout, the proper name being undeclined, as :
5larl bcr (SvftC, Charles the First.
©corg bed 3>tevtcn, Of George the Fourth, etc.
Note. --The Roman Numerals I., II., etc., after names of sovereigns
must always be read as def. art. + ord. num. in the proper case. Thus:
.'ociuviii) iV. = .S>oiiuid) Dcr JKiCvtc (Norn.) ; or ^eiurid) Dm ©icrtClt
(Ace. ) ; but. : bcv '3:f)rou C'^ciurid) IV^ --= bcr %\)xm >S)ciiirid) ilcS SicvtCtt
(Gen.); Hitter .s;-)dnvid) IV. = iintcr ^einrid) Jjcm ©icrten.
3. The ordinals are used adjectively before the names of
the months, as :
3^er a^tjei^ttte 3tuguft', The i8th [of] August.
2tm 5n)ci iinb jitjansioftcn ^uni, On the 22d [of] June.
Notes. — i. The figures i, 2, etc., before the months are to be read
as ordinals, thus :
9lm 1. 3auuar = am crftcii Souiiav.
Xorouto, (b.) 25.(^011) ^^3vit = Toronto, Ben (ace. of time, see
§ 184, i) fiinf uiib 5n:)au3igflcn 'itpfU.
I?^§ 165
ve sub'
21, {b),
167I
STRONG VEKBS: fVlcdiCll MODEL.
185
len.
on.
adding :
numbers
etc.) are
) be de-
, as :
etc.
sovereigns
e. Thus:
n ©icrtcn
iS Stcrten
lames of
June,
o be read
time, see
2. ' What day of the month is it i *
Xcr hiicj:cr c ift l)oute ? or: ten mieoiflftcii \)ahtn mir beutc ?
• It is the tifth,'
G8 ift ()nue Jer fiinfte, or: mv l)alicn f)futc Hen fiinftcn.
i67. Strong Verbs: f|ivc.';cit Model.
T Pr. Ind. 2. 2. Sin<' ]
l|t:l)Icn ftirhlft, ftu-blt, fticl^l imi o^ftiibrcn
i^«^/. ^//^/c^r;^. .peak wanting • spake sp5ken
LIST yl. (i, a, 0.)
brcrfK'n (N. A.;, break bri^ft, etc. brac^ . gebvoAen
ncl;mcn take „i,„„p-t, etc. naf,m genomn:en
(er)|d.rcrfcu (N.), be cv[d;nrfft, etc. erfc^raf cr)d;i-orfm
frightened
fpredHm, speak ipvid^ft, etc. f),rac^ gef^^vod^eu
tc^HMi, stmg (trans.) ftichft, etc. ^tad) geftodu^n
Mcujm triflft, trifft, tiiff tvaf getroffcn
Remarks. - i. Grfdu-cdcn, to frighten , trans.), is weak (cr=
2. Observe the dropping o( and doubling of in nd)\mn
and the single consonant in the imperfect of crfducdcu
and tveffen.
LIST^ (ic, rt, 0.)
(Tlie Imperf. Subj. is also given.)
(0e)6arcn, bear, gebievft, etc. ^.hav gebare geboren
bnng fortli
(be)fei>kn, com- befie^lft, etc. befall befol;Ie befoblen
mand
13
I
1 86
t,ESSON XXVTII.
tSl«7
■'
<:\ \
(nn^)fcl)lcn, re- . cmpfic^lft, etc. cmvfal;! cm^fot^lc em^foblcn
commend
ftct)lcn, steal ftiel)lft, etc.
Also:
t'ommcn(N.),
come
ftabl -j
ftofjle
geftol^len
|!^"""[|'?^"""; tommfam fame fletomuKu
Remarks. i. The simple verb fe(;leu, to be wanting, to
make a mistake, is weak (fchltc, c^cf»^l)lt)«
2. .Slommcn drops one m in Impf.
3. All verbs of this Model (^A. and h.) drop the final -c of
the 2. sing. Imper.
"VoCAr.ULARV.
to add, abbievcn
luiniing, ba'o v^ac^en
irrive (at), an'fommen (in 4" James, '^s^\h>b
dai.)
obtain, get, bctoiiunen
divide, biuibiercu
celebrate, fciern
multiply, multi^licieven
subtract, fubtrabicvon
happen upon, meet with,
treffen
care, attention, bic 3ld)t
r;iilway-station, ber ^al;nt;Df
holidays, bie ^^erten (pi.)
fishing, ba§ ?^ifc^en
f *
mile (German), league, bic
minute, bie llJJimitc
government, reign, bie 5les
gicrung
Reformation, bie ^iefornuition'
second (of time), bic 6efunbe
voyage, bie Seereifc
far, iueit
about, imgefat)r
twice, gtueimal
as far as, bi^ 511 (dat.)
prison, batS (^icfdngm^
Idioms: 1. He was born twenty-five years ago, (Sv if* oor fiinf unb
{wan^iij 3ain'e*i n^t'i't'C"*
a. Please take another apple (I.e., yet one more), Sittt, nc|^<
men Zie nod) ciiieii ^pfel.
3. Take care, 9lc^nien Zit ftd) in %A)U
§T67]
STRONG VLKBi.: fprccfjcn modi:l.
EXERCISE XXVIII.
1 8;
A. \. sBic alt jmb 3ie '^ ^rf) bin in mcitiom neun unb Jioan.
ai0 ten ^a() -e. :>. T^iefeg 3af,r bctamcn tuir am ad)t unb uoan.
J'Gften ^;^uni ^erien. 3. ^eber gji-^nat auBcv bcm'.yekuar Ux
cntn^ebcr breifjig obcr cin unb bveif^in ^aqe. 4. ^en mcr unb
jlranjigftcn 9Jfai tuar id) bci incincni ^^atcr auf ^^kfud;, bpun an
biefem ^age fcicvn tuir ben (>5cbuitvtag bcr Monigin. i Marl ber
erftc I'on (Snglanb luar bcr ^^?ater Marl 11. unb ^atob 11 (5 :rao
n)ar cmc [cf)lcd;te 5ffad>rid)t, nidU uui^r ? Unfcre 93hittcr crfdn-ae
al. 3ic b.cfclbc (Hhtc. 7. ^cn fiinf unb :,)i>an3ig|tcn trafciMuir
§errn lS<\k auf bem 33abnlun'c, gorabc ale cr iiu Sogriffc Juar ab=
jurcfen. H. ^x^ ber Stabt bonbon finb nicbr al^ brci liDiiaionen
Gnuuobner. <t. ^ie cincn cmpfablcii ibiii ^u bicibon, bic anbcrn
ab5urcifen. 1 ( .. Sic lucit ift e^j bon bier bi^s juin ndd^ften CTorfe ^i
Uncjcfabr fiinf unb 5U>an3ii3 cn(3lifd)c 5J>cilcn. II. (f-v nabm bie
^yifcfic jc jiuei au^ bem .^orbc unb Icgtc biefclbcn auf ben'^rifd)
12. Ta^ ei.5 bri*t, nobmcn 3ic fiit> in 5Xdit. ]H. .VSunberte bon
^aiJenfdjcn \)<xU\\ Unibrcnb bee Grbbebcnc* bae^ £ebcn bcrloren 14
Untcr ber ^Jiegicrung .s>cihrid) VIII. bcgann bic ^Reformation in
Gnc3{anb. 15. gji'einc beiben ^Hilber reiften am fiinf unb gJuan^
5U3lten ^uni bon IHoerpool ^{^ unb famen crft am adU^el^nten \\x\\
in Quebec an. Ki. Sann fonunt ,^br (^ieburtotaa'^ ^m'ein
unb stuanjigftcn ^)Jooember. 17. ^ic ^Kegicruncj .v>e'inrid> VIII
loar cmc ber bcriibmteften in ber Ojefdudite Gnglanb^. 18 5(1^
loir einen epa^iergang nmd)tcn, l)aben ioir mebrcre unfcrer .^yreunbe
angctroffen. 1!>. l\,n \vm ift ^^^bnen geraten uunbcn, cine 3ee=
retfc 3u macfn^ny (5e ift mir bon mebrercn ^^'irsten gerdtcn loorben.
B. 1. One general commands thousands (d:;t.) of soldiers
•i. Mary has broken her pen, but she has taken Louisa's, li
The ice is breaking ; take care, Fred. 4. This is my lead-
pencil, not William's. 5. You have taken only one apple, please
take another. H. When do we celebrate the Queen's Birthday ?
On the 24th of May. 7. What day of the month is it to-day >
I
If
1 88
LKSSON XXVIII.
1§S 167-
IM '
IP
I
<
Today is the Hist of March, s. The thief was thrown Into
(liie) prison, because he had stolen five hundred dollars.
9. Which do you prefer, (the) hunting or (the) lishing?
I like both. 10. A bee stings, but a dog or a cat bites.
11. The d.iys are longest in the month of June, and shortest
towards ( hristmas. 1 i. When our neighbours were at church,
a thief went ( tonuncu) into the house and stole several hundreil
dollars. 13. In the year eighteen hundred and eighty-seven
Queen Victoria celebrated the fiftieth year of her reign. 14.
The eldest son of the Queen of England was born the ninth of
November one thousand eight hundred and forty-one. 15. Tell
me how much thirty-two and eighty-eight make. IH. There
are sixty seconds in a nunute, sixty minutes in an iiour.
twenty-four hours in a day, seven days in a week, four weeks
in a month, and twelve months in a year. 1 7. Would you make
a voyage to FAirope if you were advised to do so? IH. Yes,
I should like very much to make a voyage to Europe.
Read in German: 2 nml 11 i|t 22, l) llhil 12 ift :5ti, 1 Uial H ift 32, 5 Uial
9 ift 4.^ (5 nml 7 ift 42, TX 10 ift 7<», sX U ift ss, '1X12 ift 10^, lOX 10 ift
100,-UXll ift 121, 12X12 ift 114. ^>U>bia-t 2,342, 2o,8yl mib 0Si>,34f..
@ubtral)icit 27,703 oou 3l,r.,-^l. lUhiltiplicicvt rm mit 478. Diuibicvt
2,581,640 mit ()1.
ORAL EXERCISE XXVIII.
1. Wie weit ist es von Hamilton nach Toronto ? 2. Wann
sind die Tage am kiirzesten ? 3 Wie viel macht das, wenn
man :^37 mit ^> multipliciert ? 4. W le viele Tage sind in einem
Jahre ? 5. Wann bekommt ihr Yenen ? 6. Wessen Bleistift
haben Sie ?
,i» \ ;
1(59]
INDE' .XITE NUMERALS.
1 89
LESSON XXIX.
INDEFINITE NUMERALS. - STRONG VERBS: ffffit MODEL.
1 ««. I N I) K F I N I I |.; N U M K R A L ii.
The Indefinite Numerals are :
I. an, all
■-• flnil}, whole, all
'i. jcbrr, J
i- jcbttJCbir, 1^ each (bicfcr Model)
■>. jcfldrtjcr, )
'». fcill, none, not one
7. ciniflc, / ,
fe. Ctlid)C, i '"'^"' '^ ^"^
^>. mondjC, many
H). mc^rcrc, several
M. t»icl, much (pi. many)
1^. hJCnifl, little (pi. few)
13. ctttia0, som3 \
14. gcmi0, enough Windeclinable)
15. inc(|r, more ^)
Remark. — All these, except aii and gang, are used as In-
definite Pronouns (see Less. XXVII).
169. I. M expresses number as well as quantity, and
^'enotes that c'7'e/y individual part of a whole is present.'
2. When declined, it follows the biefer Model, whether
used with or without a substantive, as :
affcr .^iife ; allc ^Hrbcit iuar bcrnebli* ; aUrg ^ruot ;
all [the] cheese ; all labour was useless ; all [the] bread.
3. Unless used substantivelv, it always precedes the deter-
minative word, and then generally remains uniiiflected in the
•smg., and often in the plur., as :
li
m '
190
LESSON XXIX.
[§§ 169-
mein t3klb, All my money.
mat) iiiciuc ^n-cimbc, All my friends.
4. When used substantively and preceded by a .leterniin
ative word, it still follows the sfro?i^ declension, as :
4:icf^5 (ba.^) aikB, All this (that).
33ei bcm aUcm, With all that.
5. It is not (as in English) followed by the definite article,
but may be followed l>y the dc7notistrative bev; bic, ba^, as :
911(00 Gklb, All [the] money.
f«ia(c8) b tt 6 Wclb, All that money.
9iac ^)}icnfclicn, A.l [the] men.
3tfk bic ^Tl^ienfcbcn, All those men.
170. I. (Mnil^ expresses quantity, not number, and repre-
sents an object as complete and undivided, without reference
to its parts. W'hen therefore the Engl. ' all' = ' whole ' it
must be rendered by gau^, not by all, as :
I have been working all (the whole) day long,
%6> babe ben piqcu ^a^ gcarbcitet.
2. rv^ttli^ is declined like an adjectwe, and always follows
the determinative word, as :
l^cr oanjc ^<^<^, The whole day.
m^\\\ ganjCS eiccntum, [The] whole [of] my propeily.
3. Before names of countries and places it may remain uu-
intiected, if unaccompaniv_d by an article, etc., as:
All (the whole of) America does not belong to the
United States, l^^'au^ (or bo8 <^<^\\f) XH'mcrila gebbrt
mcl)t 511 ben ^^scrciniittou 3taatcu. — But:
%\t ganje adnucis, All Switzerland.
171. I. C^f^f^ ^^^^^^"^ Model) is used to denote each indi-
vidual beloiiging to a wh*
)lc, aj
.^cDcr iHUim bat ^(jtc. Every tiee has branches.
'751
INDEFINITE NUMERALS.
191
2. It is sometimes preceded by eiii, and then follows the
»//av^ adjective declension, ^cbiucbev and jeglicfcer are less
common forms, used in the same way.
172. Sitin is the negative of eiu.
173. I. (Sinige (plur., bicfcr Model) = 'some, a few/
denotes a sma// number taken collectively, and is used with-
out article, as :
©iniflC %'ii<^,d fonncn nid;t fiiu^cu. Some birds cannot
sing.
SSor ciniflCll ^aken, A few years a<,^r.
2. It is used in the sin<j. only before name . of ma.erials to
denote a limited quantity, as:
^cf) f;a6e cinigcs ©elb, I have some money 'but not
much).
3. (^tlidjc is a less usual word with the same meanini,' and
use.
Note, —(fin ^Jaur-'a pair, couple ' (with small ^) is also used in the
sense of 'a few,' the fin being then indeclinable, as:
^yjit ciil poor 3:()a(eni, With a few dollars.
17 J-. Wm^tX (biefcr Model\ ' many(a),' denotes indejimtc
plurality, as :
9)iniit^cr 'iUn^cI famt nirfit fiui^cn,
Many a bird cannot sing.
:^d> babe monrfjce Uiu^lud' jicbabt,
I have had many a misfortune.
9Jtonr^C locate cjlaubcn, Many people believe.
It may remain uninHected, especially before an adj., as :
lVand)cr gutr, or maud; i^utcr l)iann.
175. 9Wcbrcre='se. oral a few,' taken !„di7'idua//y, as:
9Wf^rcre Ignite u>uvbcii franf, Sf.veral people became ill.
«r^
mf
192
LESSON XXIX.
[§§ X76-
'i
ii ^
I -^
' \
!
17«. i^icl and ttJcnij^, in the sing., are inflected (^Diefer
Model) when they denote number, and uninfiected when they
denote quantity, as :
2erne nid^t melce, fonbern tiic(, Do not learn many
(a ^ycat number of; things, but much fa large
qjtantity^.
They are usually, though not always, declined in the plural.
TsjoTK. — The Engl. ' little ' = ' small ' is rendered by f Icill.
177. ('^tlOtt? is used before names of material, etc., ir
the sing., like einic^c^o (see ^ 173, 2, above), of a small quart
tity, as:
(ftttJttS 23rot, Some bread (but not much).
178. Wcuug may precede or follow its substantive, as :
C^klb gcnug, or gcnuj (^klb, money enough.
Note. — As adverb, it always /^//^(yj- its adjective, as:
3)08 9?anb tft nid)t \<x\\^ 8CnU;% The ribbon is not long enoug\..
170. 9WfT|r is the comparative of biel, and is inde
clinable, as :
^di babe mcTjr ^rcunbc aU5 er,
I have more friends than he.
180. The I'lngl. 'some, any' are generally omitted be
fore substantives, \xw\Qi^-s,-d. small quantity {smnc, but not muc/i]
is denoted (see § 157, above). In answer to a question, without
a substantive, they are rendered by einigcvS (sing.), cini^ic
(plur.) or UKicb (sing, or plur.), not by ettx^ae (which = ' soiiie-
thing '), as:
C-^aben Sie ©elb? '^d) ^i\U cimflcg (toeld^e^).
^}aben ©ie ^-i^eunbc'^ :^d; {jaht txwi^t (U)elrf)e).
181.
STRONG verbs: effeu model.
Strong Verbs: cffeu Model.
Germ. Model:
Efij^I. Analogy:
(incomplete)
Ablaut:
Infin.
cffen
eat
w
Pres. Ind. 2. 3. Sing. )
Imper.2.Sinff. ^ ''"''■•
tffeft, tfet, if3
wanting
ate
193
P. Part.
eaten
1/ ic
LIST.
bitten, beg, ask bitteft, bittet, bitte ^qX
cffcn, eat (of man) iffcft, if^t, ifj ^6
frcffcn, eat(of beasts) fviffcft, fri^t, frt^ fra^
flcbeii, give gi(c)bft, cii(c)bt, gi(e)b ,^^,^\,
(bcr) 9cf|cn, forget iHTj^iffeft, bergtf,t, ber= berga^
lc| en, gather; read Itefeft, Heft, lie^ ta§
liciien, lie down liec^ft, liegt, licgn lag
nieffen, measure niiffoft, niifit, mifj mafj
(i^')ne[eu (N.), re- oencfeft, gcncft, (^enefe genag
cover (from illness)
(ne))cbcbou (N.), gefcbiebt —
happen (impers.)
febcn, see. fiehft, fiebt, ficb
W^\'^^^ fincft, fil3t,fil3(c)
gebeten
gegefi'en
gefreffen
gegcben
bergeffen
gelefen
getegen
gemeffen
genefen
Oefcfmb gefc^eben
fab
trat
toar
trctcn (N. A.), tread trittft, tritt, tritt'
(mefen,N., obsolete), — — _
to be
Observe.-- I. The changes from ff to § ; also
the Impf. IS retained tiirough that whole tense the
ing long, as : jyir agon, irf) a^e.
gefeben
gefcffen
getretcn
getvefen
that ft of
vowel be-
I
2. That genefen does not ch.
inge e mto ip.
T
194
LESSON \XIX.
r§l8l
3. The change in fi^cn of t^ into ^ and ff.
4. That the long c of the root is changed into ic, the short
C into short i.
5. The inserted ^ in tlie P. Part, of effen (gej^effen).
6. The doubling of i in 2. sing., etc., of treten, and omission
of final -t in 3. sing, (tritt).
Vocabulary.
to experience, feel, empfiuben
intend, contemplate, t)or'=
hahcn
absence, bic 3(bmefen(;eit
Francis, ^^ranj
century, ba^ ^/^t;i*^"»'fc*^vt
cherry, bic .^ivfdK
province, bie ':]LUol>in;^'
romance, novel, ber ^Koman'
swallow, bic 3dBtualbc
telegraph, bev ^elegra^f)'
misfortune, bag Ungliicf
world, bie ^lUlt
pardon, bie 39er^eiF)unii
thin, bunn
almost, nearly, bcina^e, faft
immediately, (fo)i3leid)
lately, not long ago, umlid;
late, fpdt
while, tinibrenb
Idionm: 1. There Is, there wa», etc. (general statement), e* qiebt, t» flflb,
etc. (obj. in ace. see Less. XXXVII).
a. To «'iit one's hand, fid) in tit foant |■c^»nfi^cn Git., to rut
one's si'l to the hand),
:i. To bej; pardon, um iBcnicilnniii bitten.
4. To speak to (with), (prcilun + ace. of jK-rson.
EXERCISE XXIX.
A. 1 . ®a§ ganje ^anb cmpfinbet ben 'Iserdift cineg pteu unb
nrofuMi 'Dfanncg. 2. G^ gicbt fd^bnc 'isijgel, Juclc^ie i^av nid)t fingcn.
;<. '^^ittc, gebcn Sic mir nod^ ciucu 2:i;alcr ; ic^ ijahi iud)t ©e(b
i^cnuiv 4. '3J3t ©corc^ ben ^Jtt^fet, ben er i^cfauft Kit, obcr bcn=
jenii^cn, lueldKn id) ifim cjei^ebcn I)abc? 5, 1;ev ?yrcmbc tvat m'n
iiuf ben /^-nf?, aber (\U\d) bat er micb urn 'i^er^^eibuna, 6. ^Xsiabrenb
^brer 5Ibwefenbeit finb mebrere i'eutc ^^efommen, urn 6ic ;u
§i8ij
STRONG VEKUS ; cffcil MODEL.
f^re^en. 7. (S3eorg fa.te nnv neulicJ, ban er ^-n^ uor einiqen
ilsod, „ oeleben babe. 8. ^intm bicb in ^fcbt, ba^' Gi., morauf
bu rtttft, Mt tcr|r bunu. M. -,cb bittc u.n ^^crjci^ung, baf, id, fo
|J)at Gebnnncu bin. 10. sjt^enn bu lucincn Onfcl [iefjft, fo fane
t^m, bittc, ba^ icb Dorbabc, ibn ,^u bcfuc^HMi. 11. g^ Heat ein
^cnan t>on Sir ^Vilter Scott auf bem ^tifdu' ; tcfcn Sic ben-
febenV 12. ^Ba^ ift (^cfcbc^en? ^)^f cine Heine 3 cbmcftci- ift auf
@Ia. getreten unb hai \xd) in b.n ."yuft BCidniitten. 18. ^iefel
llinilitcf ge|d>a , m ben .>>rien, unb fie <s^r^a^ febr langiam, n>eil
ba^2BeterfoI;eiBtDar. 14. (fine Sci^unilbe mad)t feinen Som^
tnnft. If,. Tuvd) ben ^ctegravben bort faft bic gan^e ®H>rt in
bier unb jluansig etunbcn luMi bcm, lua^ in irgcnb'einem ganbe
flc)dnebt. 17. 3(1. ein ^KcidHn- aue. feinc.n .s^aufe fan, bat ihn
em 9lvnier uni em iuenig (sielb, aber er gab" bc.n Jlrnien feine
IH. Da^o^^ferb beg ^Tfeifenben frafj ein Jocnig .v>eu unb ^afev"
iMbrenb tern ^err bae mtageeffcn im (Maftbaufe a^ 19' 2)ai
M.nb bat fd,on afle. ^^rob unb ^-{eifd; gegeffen, ee hat aud> alle
^Mi> getrunfen, bie int Wlaie tuar. 20. Ginon. ^itgner'unrb
ntdit g.\]laubt, fclbft ioenn er bie :il5ar)rbeit f^ridit.
^. I. The wholej)f England is not so large as the Pro-
vince of Manitoba. •>. Henry VI 11. of Enoland, Francis 1
of Prance, and C'harles V. of Germany were the o-reatest
monarchs of the i6th century. 3. WhcTC did von find the
'iioney.? It lay in the grass. }. Kverv summer the birds
eat the cherries in our garden. .^. 'I'he sick man lav seven
weeks in the hospital, but he has now recovered "<i The
rich (man) gave the poor(man),who sat before the house some
money. 7. This youth has read all the books in the librarv
of his father, but unfortunately h forgets just as fast a's
lie reads. H. Nnr-'--- r ,- , . . . r" '^"^
53 years old. tl. Have vou forooi
oleon I. died on the 5th May 182 r ; h
month
•s ago.^ |(». Durin-- th
ten what I told
le was
you twi
'^ liie nun we sat under a tree and
ig6
LESSON XXX.
n82
I i
I I
told stories. 1 1 . One forgets easily what one reads too quickly
12. If you have more paper than you need, please give me
some. i;j. Nineteen hundred years ago the Romans pos-
sessed almost the whole world. 14. Many young people
read hundreds of novels, and forget after some time almost
all they have read. 1 5. Twenty-five years ago our neighbour
possessed only a few hundred dollars, but now he is one oi
the richest men in the city. Ui. Speak the truth, whether you
are believed or not.
ORAL EXERCISE XXIX.
1. Giebt es in Amerika Vogel, die nicht singen? *}. Tst
jemand wahrend meiner Abwesenheit gekommen ? H. Was
haben Sie meinem Onkel gesagt, als er hicr war? 4. Was
sagen Sie vom Lesen d r Romnne ? 5. \\elcher Aifel iszt
Georg? 6. 1st das Telephon cine neue Ertindung?
LESSON XXX.
DERIVATIVE NUMERALS. - TIME, MEASURE, DATE. -STRONG
VERBS: jrfjlnflCn MODEL.
182.
Derivative Numerals.
I'rom the Cardinal and Indefinite Numerals are formed the
tollowinir Derivative Numerals:
(a) By a( ding -mo^ adverbs denoting 'so many times,'
as : ciurml, once ; Dier^ml, four times ; einunt--
gtwansii^unl, twenty-one times ; luandjiiml, many a
time.
Notes. i. Dial is neuter, hence iot)C0mai, each time; and wi^
Indef. Numerals sometimes adds -£i, as: UiiimalW, mcljnitaU^.
li
183]
DEKIVATIM. XL.MEKALS.
197
2. (iiii'iiial = ' oil out (single) uccasion,' as :
3rf) l)abe il)n nuv cinma( ocfcfieu, I have seen him only once.
(Siiimor (etiiemal^, einft) = 'once upon a time,' as :
G« mv einmaV dn SloniQ, etc. (Grimm.)
3. 9?irf)t ei;rma(, 'not once,' as:
er ift nirf)t cin'maf f,iev neniefcit, He has not been here once.
9?tcf)t cintnor (or nicf)t mnl'), 'not even,' as:
er ift nirf,t (cin)mnl' fjicr grraefni, He has not even been here.
(^) By adding -forf, or fiilt:^, a^/jec^/zrs denoting 'so
many fold,' as: eiufn^ simple; gj.eifot^ Ouucfacf^
vv-ofold, double; incr|e!(^ (.faaig), quadruple; bieN
ffldl, mannirfjfadv manifold.
Note. Ciinfaltii] = "foolish, silly.'
(d By adding -M to the gen. fem. sing, or plur., /«,/.,//
nai^/c adjccfr.es denoting 'of so man)- kinds,' as •
cuicHci, of one kind; breicrrd, of three kinds'
t)ielcr(ei, mnncfierlc^ of many kinds, etc.
NOTK.-G.. ift mil- cinrrlci ^. 'It is (all; the same to me.'
J 83. From the Ordinals are formed :
(«)-By adding -\, the fractional Numerals, as : ein ^rit--
tel = h\ ba^. ^icitel, the quarter; brci 3liHin,vgfte(
= ■^/2(), etc.
Notes. - r. These are substantives formed from the ordinal + Tei(
( part), and are therefore neuter, thus:
Tox^ TriUo( = biKS britto ^fi(, «the third part,' etc.
2. 'Half 'as substantive = Uic .^cilftc ; as adjective or adverb = (,«(',
which is declined like gan^ (see § 170, 2), as :
3cf) t)abe Uic ^'i\\{t mcinei^ eigciitnmo Derloveii,
I have lost half (of) my property.
Xer jinabe unii- ^ol6 tot, a(§ man \\)\\ fanb,
The boy was half dead when he was found.
198
LESSON XXX.
l^i ih
C'olb ^^ailjiiifiton, or linS fjolbe Snfoinnton,
(The) half (of) Washington.
•OnlO 01 bad \)aibt Jvvaiitifhl), half France; but
XiC l)atlH' SdllUCiv half Switzerland.
(/;) I3y adding -f)alll. Mixed Numbers with the Fraction
'half.' as: biittc^olb =;il ; bicvtcf)olb '3Jicilcii, three
miles and a half; fiiiiftctjfllb iSdtn, four and a halt
yards.
Remarks. — i. Observe that the ordinal is one higher than
the cardinal of the Engl, idiom; thus ' two and-a half ' is a
number consisting of three parts, of which the first and second
parts are wholes, but the third is only a half, hence drittc*
f)alb. \
2. 1.] = nnbcrtbalb (not jItJcitcbalb ; see § 166, i. Note), as:
^Ittiicdball) ^-lafcfKMi (pi.), A bottle and a half.
3. These are invariable adjectives.
{c) By adding cu^:, ordinal adverbs denoting in what
place or order, as :
crftens, firstly; jmeilcnS, secondly; britteu«, thirdly,
etc.
1 5
184.
Expressions of Time.
1. Both point and duration of time are expressed by the
Accusative without a preposition, as :
^cn erften :^anuar, (On) the first of January.
©r fam leljtcn ^Dtontag an. He arrived last Monday.
^d^ toar le^te 3©DC^>e fvan!, I was ill last week.
:^c^ \Qc\x einc ganje 2Bocf)e fran!, 1 was ill (for) a whole
week,
2. Point of time is also expressed :
184]
EXPRESSIONS OF TIME.
ujg
{<V % tlie preposition nit with the Dat. (always contracted
with the article), of ^afe, as :
%m eiftcn ."^anuar. On the first of January.
^Im 3onntag, On Sunday.
«m gjJorgen biefe^ ^ageg. On the morninL^ of this
day.
(d) By the Gem/we case, with Infl, davs of the week or
divisions of the day, when denoting indefinite time
or habitual action, as :
^C0 ^agcg. In the day time, by day.
Sonntagg, On Sundays,
(teg) 5((HMib0, In the evening.
2 The Time of Day is thus expressed:
(«) The quarters of the hour, with reference to the
following hour (not the pas/ hour, as partly in
English), thus:
It is a quarter past twelve = Qi ift (ei„) ^Biertef auf
Ctltg (1. e., o^if quarter towards, or on the ivay to
one). '
It is half past twelve = (gg iff ^alfi dn§ (i. e., half
one).
It is a quarter to one = G^ ift brci 58ierter auf eing (i. e.,
three quarters toioards one).
<P) The minutes past by „of^, as : ©g {ft ^ttjanjig 9}?iniiten
nor!| 5it)ei, It is twenty minutes past two.
The minutes to by bar, as : ^e^n 9Januten bar brei ten
minutes to three. '
<.
7 Sc
\\m
o'clock == U^t, as
Urn ein U§r, At one o'clock.
i'
i !
I
M,
11
200
LESSON XXX.
[§§ 184-
tlm nn.3?iertcl auf fiinf \\\)x. At a quarter past four
o'clock.
e« ift brci 33iertcl auf fiinf (Uf)r), It is a quarter to five
(o'clock).
Qi> fjttt f^t^g (lU;r) gcft^Iogcn, It has struck six Co'clock).
Note. — The impersonal Verb 'to be,' in expressing the time of the
'lay, is always singular, as in English. j
185. Expressions of Quantity.
1. A substantive expressing Quantity (Measure, Weight
or Number), if Masculine or Neuter^ retains the form of
the singular, as :
SSier unb gioanjii^ ^ott madden ^rtjei guft, 24 inches make
two feet.
3tt)ci ^jlUlb, Two pounds.
2:aufenb 9Wttun, A thousand men. — But:
3tuei ^'lafcl^cn (fern.). Two bottles.
3tyblf ©ttcil (fern.), Twelve yards.
2. The substantive, the quantity of which is expressed, is
generally put in apposition with that expressing the quan-
tity, as :
3U)ei 53ucf) ^n|jicr. Two quires of paper.
S)reitaufcnb W.m\\ ^nfoutcric. Three thousand infantry
soldiers,
^iinf ©la^ JBicr, Five glasses of beer.
9Jiit jiuet ^aar ®4mf)Ctt (dat.), With two pairs of shoes.
3. But if a determinative word precedes the substantive
measured, etc., use the Gen. case, or tion with Dat., as:
^c^ ^abe fec^§ ^funb biefcS guten 3uc!er8 (or : tioit biefem
guten ^)xdix) gefauft.
i96]
STRO.XG VERBS I fc^Iagen MODEt.
^Icfcr «rciftift ift nur eincn M lanc^^
This lead-pencil is only an inch long.
^d) habc cine gan^c 9J?ei(e (ace.) marrcf)iert,
I have been marching a whole mile,
^^iefc^ ^afct' luie^^t ein bnlbca ^funb (ace).
- This parcel weighs half-a-pound.
186. Strong Verbs: |,^Iai)cii Model.
INFIN. PR.lND.2.3.sing. Jmpf.
Bng/.Ana/ogy:s\B^y wanting ^^^
(incomplete)
Ablaut : » ..
H
LIST.
20I
put in the
slew
P. Part.
0»?fc^logen
slain
luirfcn(W.N.A). bake bacfft, bacft
raOren (N.A.), ride (in fdbriX fa^rt
a conveyance), drive '
orubcn, dig ^„....-, „.,
frfjaffen, create
Uijftlc^en, strike
tra(]cn, carry
unut)fen(N.), grow
rtJafdien, wash
Also the irregular ;
fte^en, stand
and the usually weak :
fragen^ ask
tJ^OBft, trdgt
h)arf)fcft, bac^ft
l»afcf;eft, Judfd^t
6uf
grub
lub
Wn
trug
f(ftunb))
Iftonb i
Sebacfcn
fiefa^ren
gegraben
gelaben
Gcfc^affen
gefc^Iagen
getragen
getoac^fen
getoafd^en
geftanben
1
franft, fraat fn.
14 Uragftjragt fragte/ 3^^^<^9*
I'
f
202
LESSON XXX.
t§l86
RFMARKS.--.I. i&adcw is usually weak in the Impf. (badU),
but str >ng in the P. Part, (gebarfen). Observe also the single
f in Impf.
2. ^abrett is conjugated with fein when intr., with fjabcn
when trans.
3. Sd^affen 'to work' and (t)ei)|d)atfen 'to procure' are
weak. Observe the single f in the Impf.
Vocabulary.
to set out, depart, leave, ab'^ minute-hand, ber ^inutcn*
fabrcn
rise, auf ftetjen
invite, ein'laben
understand, toerftet^en '
dine, ^u 'Hiittag cffcn
go for a drive, fpajicicn fabren
absence, bic "ittb'tuefcnbeit
little tree, ba^ ^duircf)en
dozen, bas^ ^u^'cnb
yard, tic Cillc
multiplication-table, ba© (Sin^
ma I cine
thread, ber 'i^ahtn *
driving, ba^ ^^nlifcn
driver, coachman, ber .^utf Aer
hole, bay I'od)
jeigev
pound, ba^ ^|^funb
post-office, bie S^o\{
riding, bae ^teiten
sentence, ber >2a^ *
hour-hand, ber 3tunbenjeigcr
cup, bie Sta[fe
tea, ber Iljec
clock, watch, bie \\\)X
train, ber ^^ug *
two weeks, a fortnight, oievs
jc^n ^age
then, bami
early, fviib
slow, slowly, langfam
at least, UH'nigften^
tirst, first of all, juerft
night, bie '^^ladjt*
Idioms: 1. The BuHton train, X^or ,3uf) | ^^(^f^y Soflon.
2. What time (o'clo«lt) is It ? W&ie oUl Ubr if* ei •
EXERCTSEXXX.
A. 1. Gin bretfaa,!''* ^a^^" ^^-i^t nid^t kxd)t 2. ^^r^utfrfjei
fa^rt fo langfam, V^v'; sm nxd^t lun* bvet SSiertel auf j^molf an*
fommen ioerben. B. '^u bev eiuen ^al\ii bev ^eU \\i &v 2a^
ixMJ
bTKoNci viiKiii: \d)U\^m model.
203
todhrcnb e« in ber anbern ^dlfte g?acht ift. 4. 2Ba« gicbt e8 f^eute
9feue«y 5. ^iUwhalb babcn 3ic mid; cjcftcrn nic()t befud;t?
er[ten« treil ee regnete, unb jiueiten^ lueil id; fclbft 33efud> fjaitc.
6. SDu baft Gut gelcfen, lieo nod> eincn ea^j. 7. 2yie biel triegcn
eiey ^^cfMuicge ungcfabr bunbert unb fiinf^ig ^ifunb. 8 ^er
3ug fommt urn brei ^^ie^-tcl aiif minx m unb fiibrt urn fiebcn
mmuUn jiacb 3ef)n ab. \k .<onbcn 3ie ^sfjrc llbv bci fid;V ^a
akr bie ^^-cbcr ift (icbuHbcn. 10. ;^d; (;abe jmci Tu^cnb ©Idfer
bejteKt, nber fie finb nod; nid^t angcfommen. 11. mx baben
unfue 58.:ttorn cingclabcn, ludbrcnb bcr ,^crien bicqefju 2aai bci
un^ jujubriitncn. 12. mit cffon im 3cmincr uni I;alb jiuei ju
^itttag. 18. ^d) Jmiibc gcvn ntit ^>bnen fpajicrcn fabren, Juenn
etc mid, euUiibcn. 14. ^er .s^imb bcrbarg ben ^nod)cn in ein
Vodv n?cldic^? er ^intcr bem xHpfelbaum grub. 15. ®ie 5J^igb
ftcf)t friib (Dce) ^iJJorgcn^j auf, imifc^it bie .HIcibcr unb bcidt 5l^rot
16. ^obann ift cin fetjr cinfaltigcr Anabe ; cr bat nod; ni*t ba^
Gmmalctiu? golcrnt. 17. ^sjie bid m;r mx e^j, aU bcr ^JJiinuten-
aeigcv auf ^cd)^ unb bcr Stunbcn.^cigcr j^uifcbcn brci unb Dicr
ftanb? IK. Xcr ^^lucr frun bcu ^Hcifcnbcn, tine Did Ubr e^ fei
(tuavc), unb bicfer jog fcinc Ubr an^ bcr 3:afd>c unb fagtc ibm c^
fei {;alb ciuc^. 19. iH^bicrc brci ^l^icrtcl, bier Sicbcntcl,' neun
Xreijcbntcl unb elf -^tuan^igftcl; line mcl ift (mac^t) bae? 2u Xer
^;>unb luiirbe ben iinahcn glci. ; beifjen, UHMin bcrfelbe i{;n fringe
21. ©cf^en eie §ur OJefcIIfdunt bcr ,yrau IK ? 22. ^d) bin nid;t
cmgelaben ; mem Srubcr nnirbe eingclaben, abcr icb nid^t.
B. 1. In six days (Jod created Heaven and earth. 2. The
patient drank two glasses of wine and three cups of tea yester-
day.^ 3. This silly boy has not even understood what I said
to h-m. 4. Here is good, strong cloth ; it costs two and a
half dollars a (the) yard. 5. This tree grows quickly; it is
at least four times as high as it was three years ago. 6.' This
exercise is very easy; we shall have finished (with) it in half '
an hour. 7. The dealer showed
us many kinds of ribbon,
204
LESSON XXXI.
[$187
red blue, yellow, etc. 8. Which do you prefer, (the) riding
or (the) driving? It is all the same to me. 9. Please tell
me what time it is ? It is exactly tliirteen minutes after eleven.
1 It is nine o'clock, for the hour-hand is (stands) at (auf) nine
and the minute-hand at twelve. 11. These three school-boys
bought themselves a melon, which weighed almost five
pounds. 12. The coachman drove first to the post-office
and then to the bank. 13. Between April and September
the little tree grew a foot and a half. 14. Precisely at five
o'clock the Boston train left.lin^ at 9.45 we arrived. 15
Was this house built before you came here? 16. Add ^V
%i and ''/09.
ORAL EXERCISE XXX.
1. Wie viel macht drittehalb, fiinftehalb und neuntehalb?
2. Urn wie viel Uhr kommt der Zug von Boston an ? B. Was
sagte der Reisende. als der Bauer ihn fragte, wie viel Uhr es
set? 4. Wie viel Uhr ist es nach IhrerUhr? 5. Wie viele
Satze hast du schon gelesen? 6. Ist jemand wahrend meiner
Abwesenheit gekommen ?
40>
LESSON XXXI.
ADVERBS. - STRONG VERBS : fattcU MODEL.
■|j^7^ Adverbs.
Adverbs may be arranged according to their meaning as
follows, with examples of the simpler and more commonly oc-
curing ones under each class :
I. Time.
(a) rast: neiiltd^ the other day, lately
bamaUS, at that time ijDv'neltorn, the 4av betor^
ebon, jusl, just now yesterd.ay
Qc'jtcvu, yesterday toovl;cr', before
I riding
ise tell
eleven.
if) nine
ol-boys
ist five
it- office
tember
' at five
d. 15.
.dd ^740,
tehalb ?
8. Was
Uhr es
'ie viele
meiner
amng as
lonly oc-
, lately
belort?
« 187]
{b) Present:
^iwU, to-day
^ ' ^ now
nun. )
{c) Future:
6a(b, soon
l^ernad/, afterwards
morgen, to-morrow
narfiber', afterwards
ninrmcr, nevermore
u'bermornen, the day after to-
morrow
{d) Interrogative :
Irann? when?
ADVERBS.
205
{a) Demonstrative
bafelbft, i ^'^' '"^ ^^^^ P'-'^ce
(ba)^in, thither, to that place
bort, there, in that place
(ba)ber, thence, from that
place
^iev, here, in this place
^ie(r)^er, hither, to this place
(<?) General :
bann, then (past or fut.)
cinft, once upon a time fpast) ;
some day (fut.)
enblicfi, at last
crft, only (not sooner than)
(fo)gleidi, at once, directly
inbeffcn, ) . ,
unterbefKr"'^""^"''^"^^'^^'^
immer, always, at all times
ic(mal^:?), ever, at any time
nie(ma(e), never, at no time
nod;, still, yet
oft(ma(^o), often
frf;on, already
felten, seldom, rarely
II. Place and Direction.
{b) N'egntive:
nirc3enbcv nowhere
{c) Interrogative and
Relative :
tt)0, where, in tvhat place
tooMii, whitiier, to what place
iDpfnn-, whence, from what
place
audfi, also, ever
{d) General :
ir'i]cubu>0, anywhere
iiberair, everywhere
III. Measure and Degree.
^i'^Q., about, nearly
f'cinaf)e,
faft.
I
nearly, almost
s
! f
V.i
II i*
:!)
I. J ■!»'
1 i
i? ■
1
3o6
LESSON XXXI.
187
[ wholly, altogether ^^^^^ ^^^^
gar, at all, very
genug, enough
gerabe, just, exactly
!aum, hardly, scarcely, no
sooner
nodi, still, more
fo, so
ungcfd(;x, about
uberbauVt', generally
tuie? how?
ju, too
^^icmlid), tolerably
IV. Affirmation.
ja, yes ; to be sure
jaVoot^l, certainly
frcilidv to be sure, indeed
furtual;r, truly, really
gcU>if5, certainly
nattir'licb, of course
^nirfUdv to be sure, indeed
p)ax, it is true, certainly
nein, no
'*^'^. \ perhaps
V. Negation.
uic^t, not
VI. Possibility.
iuabrfdHnulid^ probably
Woijl, perhaps
VII. Necessity,
atterbingg, certainly buvduaue, absolutely, entirely
baber, '^
VIII. Cause.
tiHiniiu, ■) wherefore, why
tueebalb, )
(interrog. or rel.j
baium, r therefore
bec>I}alb, )
Note. — These last, as well as many of the- others, are also used as
Conjunctions. See Less. XL.
)0 used as
t38]
188.
STRONG verbs: fallen model.
207
Strong Verbs: foacii Model.
INFIN. PR.lND.2.3.Sing. IMPK. p. p.^R-r.
Gernt Mociei: fallen faafUdttt fid ^~2n
EngLAnaogyji^W wanting fell \ZT
(incomplete)
Ablaut: n s
(Note. -This is only a ^^^/«,V Ablaut; see § 192, Rem. 4.)
LIST.
blafen, blow biafeft, blaft
bratcn, roast.tr. and intr.j briitft, bviit
fflUcn (N.), fall
fangen, catch
fatten, hold
(jangen, hang
f)ttuen, hew
^Ci^cn, bid ; be called
laffen, let
Ioufen(N. A.), run
raten, advise (gov. dat.) vdtft^ rdt
rufen, call ^ufft, ruft
fcblafen, sleep Wm, fdiliift
ftancn, push |to{,eft, ftofu
Also the irregular :
fdUft, fdllt
fonflft, fcingt
f)dl;!t, \-)'^\\
^angft, (ningt
f;aucft, l)out
f>eif}cft, bci^t
Idffcft, Id^t
Idufft, Iduft
blie^
bviet
fier
fi(c)ng
bicit
geblafcn
gc bra ten
gefaKen
gcfangen
gel;alten
^i(<^)»n gebangen
f;ieli
t)ie^
He^
lief
riet
vief
fd;lief
fticB
gc(;ttuen
gebcijjen
gelaffen
gclttufen
gcratcn
gcrufen
gef4)Iafen
gcftoBcn
fli(c)nn n^'floitflen
ge^en (N.), go .^^hcft, gebt
Remarks.- I. observe in braten, balten, ratcn thi con-
tracted forms of the 3. sing. Pres. Ind.
2- fangen is the strong verb (bicng, gebangen) and is proper-
ly intr. (= 'to be suspended'); biinge,- i. weak . h-na*c
gebcingt) and trans., but the distinction is not strictly ob-
served. ^
208
LESSON XXXI.
[§i88
3. Observe that ^ei^eu and fto^cn, having the root vowel
long, retain ^ throughout ; whereas laffeu varies according to
rule, thus : id; lajje, oclafjen, but er Id^t, licj, h)ir Ue^en.
Vocabulary.
nian-of-all-work, (farm-) ser-
vant, bcr kncdjt
beef, bivS gflinbfloijd)
skate, bcr Sc^Utt'i'dnib
skating, bvi$ 2dUitt'fdmt>laufen
bacon, bcr Sped
language, bic opvadje
study, biVo Stubium
last, preceding, toortg
to begin, commence, an'fangen
receive, get, crl;alten
please, gefaUen
leave, leave behind, laffen
skate, 8d}Utt'fdnib lau'feu
kick, strike, bump, ftojjen
cut down, uin'(;aucn
butter, bie 33utter f
play-mate, bcr ©efpicle
mouse, bie ^kuy *
Idioms: 1. What is th« name of? aSie beift*?
3. What l« your name? 3aJic I)ci^cn <Sic?
.3. My name is Henry, 3d) bcific ^leinrid).
4. Ithinl( lilghly of him (i e., esteem, value him highly).
Slit lirtltc oicl t)ou ihm.
5. How do you <lo? (How are you?) 2Bi« gcftt e« SlHicii?
6. He has ..ot been here for a long time, (Vr iff lanflc nidit
I)ier flcwcfcn (C*r ift iiidjt laiiije hier derocfen = He has not
been here loug).
EXERCISE XXXI.
A. 1. Wit e^cd fcingt man lV{au[c. 2. ^er 51nabe ftel, al^
er SAUttfclnib lief, uub^ fticf^ fid) ben .«lo^f aufe (X\^. 3. (Bin
fd)lafenber ^nicfH^ fiingt fcin §ubn. 4. :;:sin ,*oerbft blaft bcr ®inb
fait, unb pfeift burd) ben ilnilb. 5. gffcn, lvin!cn unb fcl^lafen,
beif^t (ift) bao lebcn ! (3. ^ni Sinter fc^laft man geluobnti* lan^s^x
ale im Sommer. 7. man lajit jei^t bie ^enfter offcn, benn ba^
Setter ift luarm geiuovben. 8. ^d) lanfe nid)t gem 3d)littfd>u^,
abix meine ©efpielen finb grofee greimbe bavcn. 9. '^k liiagb
ping jum Sabeu unb faufte brei ''^funb ^l;ee, jnjei ^funb Gutter,
§188]
STRONG verbs: faHcU MODEL,
209
jefju ^^fimb 3ucfer unb gtoei ^lafc^en 33ier. 10. 3:)ort ftanb ber
Saurn, ben ber Jlnec^it neulid; umgef)auen l^at 11. ©agen Sie
miv, Wo{)in Sie bovgefteru gingen, al^ id; Sie in ber ^bniggftrajje
traf. 12. ®er ©dmler liefj feme mdKx gu .<r)au[e, aber er ift
gleid; md) Ir^an^i gelaufeu iinD bat bieielbcu gcbolt. 13. 33orige
aKod)e erbielt mcine Sc^iuefter eiiieu ^rief mx ibrer ^-reunbin •
faft jcbe SS^oc^e erbalt fie einen. 14. Piefelbe fc^meb, ba^ fie ben
ganjen Sinter in 'i^ofton jubringen luiirbe, luenn e§ ibr bafelbft
gefiele. 15. !Der 3Sinb blie^ b e n Jag fo beftig, baf, 0eorg^3 ^i^ater
i^m rict, ni4)t auf^ Saffer gu ge^en. l(i. ^d; bitte lim ^T^er=
5eibung, baf? id) Sie fo lange adcin gelaffcn balK. 17. Xa^i
franfe ^inbtpiivbe beffer gefd^lafen hahcn, iiKMuibie anbern Jlinber
meniger I'drm gemad^t I;dtten. 18, ^I^or -^luanjig :^ai)xtn bing bag
53ilb meineg 33aterg an ber iBanb iiber bem .^{amin, unb ee bdngt
nod; tmmer ba. 19. Senn er nid^t fo fru(; gegangen lodre; fo
t)an^ id) i^n gum 9Jiittag^oeffen eingelaben. 20. (sjuten 9;)Jorgen,
?yrau l^(U ; loie gebt e^ ^bnen ? 21. m gebt mir gang gut ; toie
get)t e§ :3brer ^amilie? 22. ^riebric^ II. Don ^^reu^en tourbe
^riebrid; ber OiJrofK genannt.
B. 1. My fatli.er speaks German almost as .well as English.
2. Good evening, my little friend ; how do you do .? H. I have
not seen you for a long time. 4. A cold, cutting wind blew
through the open window. 5. When I was young, I liked
to skate. (). Do you like (to eat) beef? 7. It was a quarter
past eight when the concert began. 8. That horse kicks:
take care. 0. At what o'clock will you be at home .? I shall
not be at home before half past ten. 10. When we were
going home, we met our friends, who were coming out of
church. 1 J. What is^thejiame of the long street, which runs
from King Street to\\^rds"(nadvrthe north ? 1 2. My friend, of
whom I thought so highly, died in his nineteenth year. 13. In
September we began to learn German, and the study of that
language pleases us ver^much. 14. A lost child was crying
t »•
2IO
LESSON XXXII.
[§189
»
11 ^
' !!
upon the street, 'and calling after its mother. 16. Somejjne
asked it what its name was. 16. The poor child answered
that its name v»ras William, and that it lived in Frederick-
Street. 17. I wrote to my cousin a month ago, but I think
he is angry, for the letter has not yet been answered.
ORAL EXERCISE XXXI.
1. Was ist geschehen, wahrend die Knaben Schlittschuh
liefen ? 2. Weshalb sind diese Fenster offen gelassen worden?
3. Was kaufte die Magd auf dem Markte? 4. Weshalb ist
der Schtiler so schnell nach Hause gelaufen ? 5. Wann haben
Sie Nachricht von Ihrem Bruder erhalten ? ti. Sprechen
Sie Deutsch?
LESSON XXXIL
ADVERBS (continued):- FORMATION AND COMPARISON. -
TABLE OF STRONG VERBS AND GENERAL REMARKS
ON THE SAME.
189. Formation of Adverbs.
1. From At/jectives {induu'mg most adverbs of manner):
{a) Most adjectives may be used without change as
adverbs, as :
@r lauft fc^nett. He runs quickly.
(£) By adding -lirj (Engl, -ly), sometimes with Vm
laut, as :
frdlid), of course, to be sure neulit^, lately, the other day
flOnsUf^, entirely fc^toerlil^, hardly, scarcely
fiirjlir^, recently
Also to participles, as :
^Offemlii^, it is to be hoped wiffentli^, knowingly
§i89l
FORMATION OF ADVERBS.
211
(r) By adding -fing8, as :
blinbUngg, blindly
(d) By adding -§, -cttS, as :
anber0, otherwise Hnfe, to (on) the left
bereitg, already remits, to (on) the right
6efonbcr§, especially ubrigcne, moreover
Also to participles, as :
eilenbS, hastily
a. From Substantives, by the use of the genitive case
(sometimes with article), to express :
{a) TimCy as ;
abenbg (or bc0 Stbenbg), in the xK<x6:ji% (or bcl 9kc^tg), by
evenmg
moic-jeng (or beg ^orgeng), in
iJie morning
(^) Manner, as :
flugg, in haste
night (anomalous, l)tad;t
being fern.)
anfangS, in the beginning
Icilg, in part
3. From /'/r/tfi'///<7/z^, by adding -en, sometimes with b(a)r-
pretixed, as:
au^en, >
outside, out of
doors
bovu(e), before
obcu, above
untcn, below
braufeen,
inncn, ) .^, . . ,
. . V withm, m-doors , ,
orinnen, ) brixben, over there
^inten, behind
Note. — Prepositions in composition with verbs are really adverbs
(also the particles ab, fin, eiupor, inetj, 3uvucf).
4. By combination. For these see Part III.
' *
212
LESSON XXXII.
[§§I9
190. Comparison of Adverbs.
I . Some adverbs are compared, as :
balb,
It), I
oft, often
gem, willingly
gut
soon c^er am ef)eften
hi)
oftcr am iiftei'teu
lieber am licbftcn {different root)
well fieffer am Iieflcn (
«(
)
2. Adjectives are used as adverbs in the comparative^ as
in the positive, without change, as :
©r lauft jf^nctlci* al^ fein Srubcr,
He runs more quickly than his brother.
3. In the superlative degree, the form with nitl is used f(Jt
the relative superlative (see §§ 127, 2, and 128), as:
©r Idiift nm frfjiicllfteii you alien,
He runs most quickly of all.
4. The absolute superlative (see § 127, 2) is usually formed
by prefixing an adverb of eminence (such as fe^r, f)i?cf)ft,
du^erft, etc.), as:
©r fcf)rei6t iiufjcrft fchon.
He writes most (i. e., very) beautifully.
5. Adverbs from adjectives in -ig, -lid), -jam use the un-
inflected form for the superlative absolute, as :
@r IcifU fvcunblid)ft flviiBen,
He desires to be most kindly remembered.
Also a few monosyllables, as : Iduijft, long ago ; ()0(^fl,
most highly.
6. The superlative absolute may also be expressed by auf
iia0 (aufc) prefixed to the superlative adjective, to express
the highest possible degree^ as :
»9aJ
TABLi: OF .STRONG VERBS.
213
er 6eforc^t [cine Gcfcfmftc ouf bad (aufg) ©eiciffcndaftcfle
He attends to his business in the most conscientious
manner (possible).
7. A few superlative adverbs end in -end, with special
meanmgs, as:
()i)*ftcil§, at most
mei[tcil0, for the most part
iJX'niiiftcre, at least
nnd>ftcn?, shortly
Also the ordinal adverbs, crften^, etc., see § 183, (r).
191. Position of Adverbs.
Adverbs generally precede the word they modifv (except
gemig, see § 178, Note).
For further particulars as to their position in the sentence
see § 45, Rule 5.
192. Table of Classification of Strong Verbs.
1
German
English
Ablaut.
—
— — :
Class.
Div.
1
Model.
Analogy.
In FIN.
I.MPF.
P.Pakt.
2., 5. sing.
Pk.Ind.
2.S l.M!'.
Lesson.
I.]
1
l)CiHLMl
bite
ci
I
I
XXII.
(
b
blcilu-ii
(wanting)
ci
ic
U
XX la.
„.j
a
[rfiu'fjrn
shoot
to, etc.
u
XXIV.
b
fricveii
freeze
icetc.
u
XXV.
TTT i
a
fiiuioii
sing
I
a
it
,
XXVI.
III. J
b
fpiinieii
spin
n
1
(
c
()dfcii
(wanting)
u
1
jxxvii.
IV.
—
fpiccf)cu
speak
C, etc.
a
XXVIII.
V.
" —
cffen
eat
C, etc.
a
c
" — 1
XXIX.
VI.
—
fdjlnc^cu
slay
a
u
a
Umlaut
XXX.
VII.
._.
fallfii
fall
various
ic
same as
Umlaut
XXXI
Infin.
<
214
tESSON XXXII.
§X9»-
Remarks. — 'I. The Umlaut of classes VI., VII. does not
occur in the Imperative.
2. The varying vowels of the Imperf. Subj. are given in
the lists, where necessary.
3. The English Analogies printed in Italics are Incomplete.
4. The vowel-change of class VII. is not an Ablaut,
but the result of reduplication.
5. The lists of the various classes contain only the verbs of
common occurrence ; all others will be found in App. L.
VJii. Distinguish between the verbs of the following
groups :
/ Httcn, beg, ask
{a) } bctcn, pray ( intr.)
( biftcn, bid, offer
bat
betctc
bot
( liCi-^CH, lie (be recumbent, intr.) lag
(d) -5 Icgcn, lay (trans.) U(\k
I liigcn, lie, tell a falsehood log
/ jicbcn, pull (trans. ), move (jntr.; jog
(r) ■) jcibcn, accuse jic^
( 5cigcn, show geigtc
gebetcu
gcbctct
geboten
gck\^crt
gclcgt
gelogcn
gcjogcn
0c,^icbcn
gejcigt
194. Remember the irregularities of :
effcn (r. Part, gcfleffcu) ftc^en, ftanb (or ftunb), gc=
l^aucnilmpf. l)icb) ftauticn
geJicn, giitfl, gogaitnen i\^\)in, m' m^%^^
Also the double forms in the Impf. of:
^eben (imb, hob^ f*u>b>:en (fi-bmnr, fcbtDor)
Note. — There are a few strong P. Parts, from verbs now otherwise
weak, as: i(nnat)lCII, i'-om iual)lcu, to grind (Impf. mal)ltcr, fin'al,cn,
from filf^cn, to salt (Impf. faUtc): iioipaitcil, from fpattnt, to split (Irnpf.
jpattcte) ; also some strong participles nsed only as adjectives, viz.:
>04J
GENERAL REMARKS ON STRONG VERBS.
215
Pii)Olifn (from fr()cbrin, exaltr d, sublime
bcjcl)etbcn ( " befd)nbcii,), modest
Ocrroorren ( '* DenPimu), confused
Vocabulary.
examination, ba^ Gramen
kitchen, bic S\ud}t
place, spot, Mc 2Ulk
employed, busy, be)c(>afti0t
then fconj.), bcnn
huii;;ry, lumgrig
left, lint
right, rcdit
snit (adj.), iicfaljcn
in spite of, tiol^ (+geii.)
improbable, iinjuabr|d;cinlidi
like, uiie
to wind up (a clock, etc.),
auf'jicbcn
pass (an examination), be=
ftcbcii
greet, salute, grii^cn
go (or bej too slow (of a
clock, etc.), nad/gcbcn
run after, nac(/laufcn (-]- dat.)
cry, nifcn
go (or be) too fast (of a
clock, etc.), borVt)tm
command, bcv ^^cfobl
visit, visitors, bcr 33c|udi
Idiomn: 1. I saw your friend to-day ; lu, wlnhes to be remembered
to you, 3di (tnbe heiitf 3lircu Stunts flcfchcn ; er la^t <^it
i)riif|fii.
2. How do yon like Boston ? SBje fjefdlU ed 3l)nf n in JBofton ?
EXERCISE XXXII.
A. i. ©e^t ^f)re Uf)r Dor, ober gebt fie nad;? ^. 6ie get)t
^mi ricbtig. 3. ^abcn Sic ^brc Ul;r aufgqocjen? 4. gin
fleiuce 5!}idbcben fragte, iuic bid Ut;r e§ fei. 5. Gin .-rierr joii
fcine Uf;r aus ber ^afd'.e unb ^eigte fie bem flinbe mit ben
2©Drten: ,,(2age bu mir fclbft, loie Diel Ubr e^ ift." 6. %s:-o finb
beinc e^iJyeftcrn '? gD^arie iff obcn in ber ^i^ibliotbef unb Sopbie
iff unten in ber Aiicbe. 7. 3lnfang^ luobnten iuir nic^it gem in
biefer ©tra^e, aber je^t gefaflt une bicfelbe gang gut 8. ^6:,
einen bciftcn 3oinm«
6ie? 9. ^
)m
L'men
ie meiften Seute effen lieber frifcbe^ ^-Ieifd> aU ge.
2l6
LESION XXXII.
194-
fatjenca. 10. 'Xxol^ bc^ ^cfc(>(« bcS Abnig^ bctctc Daniel jcben
aafl brcimal. 11. "Slmc ^antc, bic in ^ikuliu U)ot;nt unb bcren
^^kuber 3ie tenncu, ift fcbr franf. 1l>, WriifKU <3ie frcimblid^ft
^^()vc Gltcrn fiir )md\ ivenn 3ic nad) .'oaufc fommcu. IH. .s>L>ffcnt=
lid} Juiib Avil) fcin (Syamon i^it beftchcn, bcnn cv bat aufv^ n'-'^^'))'*''"'
bafteftc ftuticrt. 14. Ci'v tuirb ec fdnuerlid> bcftcbcn, ba cr crft
fcit 5n)ei 15a(}rcn in bcr 3cl)ulc ift. 15. ^cr \uc\U wddjfv
unffcntlid^ einc Umua(n(;cit fagt. 16. ^dj efjc (^crn nebratencS
^){inbflcifdv bcfiMibcv^J iucuu id> rcdU buni^rii^ bin. 17. ^)(cd>ti?
Don bcr ednilo ftcbt cine SWxdK, {\\\U ftcl;t bcv mavU. 18. ilUr
l^abcn licbcr abcnbc^ 'iU'[ud;> al^? nun-qcne, bcnn nun\^cn<^ finb n>ir
getrbbnlid) bci'cbaftigt. i9. ^ie[c^ .Slinb tuivb nadiften-s^ fvaii!
ttjcrbtn, bcnn e^ bat fcit bvci ^agcn faft gar nicbt^ nci^cffcn. -M.
G\^ [tanb fviibcv einc .Vlivcbc auf bcv StcUe uh> luiv jcl^t finb, abcr
fie ift fd;on lani^jt lun-idmninbcn. 21. 5?on \vm murbe bie
5livc^ie flcbaut, luoDDn eic fprccf)en? 2'>. ^sd) tocif^ c^S nicf^t, ee ift
miv nie gcfacjt luorbcn.
j9, 1. Please show me the way to the post-office. 'I. If
George is up-stairs, tell him that I am down-stairs. 3. I do not
like London ; I prefer to live in a smaller city. 4. The pen
still lies on the book upon which I laid it. 5. Please tell me
who lives over the way. (iT Tiiis boy has been stung by a
bee. 7. Of ;dl animals the horse runs quickest. H. Give
me what you have in your (tliei left hand. II. Lessing died
on the fifteenth of February 1781. 10. The soldiers ran
blindly into the battle and fought like lions. 11. The train
for (nacb) Montreal leaves (ab'fabvcn) at twelve o'clock at
night, and arrives in Montreal at ten o'clock in the morning.
}2. A little beggar ran after a gentleman, and asked him for
some money. 13. * My father is dead,' cried he, 'my mother
is dead, and all her children are dead!' 14. 'Who are you
then?' asked the gentleman. 15. What answpr was given to
the beggar by the gentleman, when he was asked for money?
tosl
IDIOMATIC USES or ADVERBS.
^17
ORAL EXERCISE XXXII.
1. Was warden Sie sagen, wenn ich Sie fragte, wie viel
CJhi es sei? •>. Gefallt Ihnen die Str.tsze, worin Sie jetzt
vv'ohnen ? 8. Hat Fritz sein Exa.nen gut bestanden ? 4 VVo
1st meine Feder? 5. Was fiir Sprachen haben Sie studiert ;>
0. Olauben Sie, dasz der Herr dein Pettier etvvas ee-
geben hat ? ^
LESSON XXXIII.
(\DVERBS (continued): IDIOMS. - IRREGULAR STRONG VERBS.
105, iDKJMATic Uses of Certain Adverbs.
1. Mini, well.
9J1111, ic^ ift mil- cincrlci,
Well iyvhy), it is all the same to me.
Note. 9JllH i. litre really an interjection, and hence does not throw
Ihe subject after the verb.
2 c6cii, just, exactly.
^a^ ift ebcn bcvfelOc :\)iann,
That is the very (exactly the) same man.
2Civ finb (fo)cDcu aiu^«fomnicn. We have just arrived.
^a^5 faim man c&cu nid^t f -jcn. One cannot exactly sav
that. "^ '
3. ficrn, riebct, am licbftctt.
^cf» e[[c flcrii A-ifcfi r am fond of (eating) fish.
Sc^ effe lifbcr .^M't-^) aU ^id), I prefer (eating) tish to
meat.
Qx }t)urbe 0^5 pern t^un. He would be glad to do it.
would do it with pleasure.
SBefdie ^pvadK fptcf^cn Sie om (icbftcn ?
Which language do you prefer (^speaking)?
2lS
LESSON XXXIII.
[8195
iti
4. cvft, fii*st» only, not before, etc.
'^^lan mur, crft bcntcii; tann ]>ved;eu,
One must think first and then speak.
^Ijiein '^•^vubev tuirb cvft mDrcjeu tomnicn.
My brother will not come before to-morrow.
ilsiv batten cvft ,vuci ^3J(cilen maridncrt,
We had only marched two miles.
Dicin ^^U-ubcr ift crft jtuci Csnln-c alt.
My brother is only (not more than) two years old.
f). jucrft, tirst of all ; for the first time.
^icfco Sdnff ijt ^ucrft {pox alien anbcrn) ini .s>afcn anc\t:
fomnien, This ship arrived in the harbour first
(i. e., before any other).
^sd> iucvbc jucrft (or crft' sum ed)nciber, bann .^umSucb^
hdnbler aclH'ii, 1 shall go first (of all) to the tailor's,
then to the bookseller's.
3di babe ibn v-\citcvn \\mf f^uni cvftcn ^Alial) v^cfebcn, I
saw liim for the first time yesterday.
■>[oTK. — >Juerft refers to /////;• only, as above; crftfllC = 'firstly, in th-i
first place,' refers to on/rr only, as in enumerations, thus:
Mi) toiintc iud)t foiinucn, crflcn?, un-il i\^ veflurte, j^toeitcn^, luoil
id) httllt Umr, I loukl not come, first (in the first place) be-
cause it raineil. secondly, because I was ill,
(i. fd)Oit, ahH'ady, as early as, etc.
^inb Sic jjlum ba '< Are you there already ?
3ft "sbr ^^U-nbcr jri)UU in A-vanhcid^ y^cu^cfcn'^
Has vour brother ever hecn in France?
7sd^ bin jri)OU bvoi ^aiv' in bcv Stabt,
I have been in the city for the last three days.
T)ai-> Sdiiff ift \&}0n »V"ft>.'vu anv^^Cicnuiicn,
The ship arrived (as early as) yesterday.
§195]
IDIOMATIC USES OF ADVERBS.
219
Gr Unrb frfjon frmmen, He uill be sure to come (h-^
will come, no doubt).
Note. ®cf)on is often, as in the fourth of the above sentences to h
left untranslated in English. sentences, to be
7. nod), yet, still, more.
(a) Of Ttme:
Sinb ©ie not^ {?ier ? Are you still here ?
Scb bin iiof^ nie in O^eutfcl^Ianb ociucfen,
I have never yet been in Germany.
©V \v>ax m^ i)or eincr 3tunbe bier.
He was here only an hour a^i;o.'
md) bcutc. Even to-day (while it is yet to-day not
later ihan to-day). ^'
Note. -- Observe that no d^ precedes the negatives nie, nirfjt, etc.
{/^) Of Number:
tWorij ciite 3:affe !3:kc. Another cup of tea.
9?orfj 5iuei, Two more.
^^tsd) (ein)mar fo Did, As much again.
8. bocf), yet, after all.
{a) Adversative :
©r triib borf,' fommcn. He will come after all (em-
phasis on boc^).
ev n)irb bod, foin.ncH', He will come, I hope - emphasis
on tommeit).
^abe id) <% -^bnen burfj gefagt ! I told you so (did I not
tell you so .?).
r/^) With Imperatives :
i^ommen Sie borfi herein Pr^w come in {urgentX
Pray
Kiiajtzixaf--.i
220
LESSON XXXIII.
[§§ 195-
;| m
p
I! '
):
(c) In answer to a negative question or statement:
§aben ©ic ibn tiirfjt c^efe^en? (^a), boj^.
Have you not seen him? Yes, I have.
^c^ f)abe e^ nic^t get^an. ©te t^aben e§ bo^ getf^an.
I did not do it. Yes, you did.
(For bod) and nocf) as Conjunctions, see Less. XL.)
Note. — 2)od) gives an affirmative answer, where a negative one is
expected.
9. tturf), also, even, etc.
5(UI^ fcin 3sater njar gegen \\)\\, Even his father was
against him.
gUlein 33vubcr ioar ni*t miibe, unb id; trav oui^ nid)t miibe.
My brother was not tired, and 1 was not tired either,
§aben Sic nurf) bcba*t', Uh\^ Sie fatten. Are you sure
you have considered, what you say ? (emphasis on
bebad;t).
10. twoI)(, indeed, etc.
@r leunnet e§ \m\)\. <x^^-^ e^3 ift bod) iDafjr, He denies it
indeed (to be sure) but yet it is true.
©ie finb tuofjl cin gvcniber ? I suppose (presume) you
are a stranger (no doubt you are, etc.).
NoTK. — fthit, not niol)t, is tiie adv. of the adj. fliit, good, when modi-
fying a transitive verb.
11. irtr yes, to be sure, etc.
2:^un Sic e§ jn'. Be sure to do it, do it by all means
(emphasis on ja).
Gr ift jo incin %<xi<ix\ He is my father, you know (em-
phasis on ;i>atcr).
12. nut.
(With the Imperative.)
^ommcn Sie nut l;cvcin, Just come in (reassuringly).
196]
196.
IRREGULAR STRONG VERBS.
Irregular Strong Verbs.
221
I. 2:6un, to do, Impf. that, P. Part, getftan.
Zf^tti, like Engl, 'did,' is a relic of the old Impf by re-
duplication, the old form being it-ia, i. e., the stem tn- with
reduplicating syll. fc- prefixed, then U-tt, tct, t\)ai. 2km
rejects c of the termination throughout, except in i. Sini;
Pres. hid., and in the Pres. Subj.
Infin.
^Dtjfen, know
biirfen, d..re
fiinnen, can
nibcjen, may
niiiffen, must
foden, shall
P. Part.
tl. Imperfect- Present Verbs.
Pres. Ind. Prrs. Imperfect
I. Sing. i.Plur. Sunj. Ind. Suhj.
ivci^ U)iffeu tuifie mi\]k miifite getuu^i
barf biirfen biirfe burftc biirfte c3eburft
fann fonnen !unne foinitc fiinntc gefonnt
mag tnogeu miige moffjtc nmbU getnoc^t
mu§ miiffen ttiufje inu^tc iiiii^te gemu^t
fott foUcn folle foatc foUte gefoat
III. Sorfeti, will, Pres. Ind. i. Sing, loia, i. Plur. Wolku
Pres. Subj, VDoUe, i^pf. ind. v^oatc, Subj. it)oa(c, P. Part!
getDoHt.
Remarks. — i. Observe the following peculiarities in the
verbs un^er II. and 111.;
i^) All have the same vowel (mostly with Umlaut) in
the Inf. and the mtr. of the Pres. Ind. ; but (except
follen) a different vowel in the Sing, of the same
tense.
{b) The Impf, Jfid. and P. Part, have the weak endings
-<C, -t, but the vowel is without Umlaut; h)i|fcn
changes i to u; mijgen changes g into ^.
{c
} liic ^OT^. o«^y. has Umlaut, except in [ott'en and
toollen.
il 'I
lis
'
222
LESSON XXXIII.
[§i9fl
{d) The Sing, of the Pres. Ind. of these Verbs is as
follows, the Plural being regular :
ic^ fttnn
bu fonnft
er fttnn
( icf) fott
-] bu foUji
( er fott
( ic^ n)ci^ ( icf) bnrf
iuifjen ] bu njcifet burfen -j bu borf[t fonncn
( er tov.i ( er barf
/ id^ mag r ic^ mufe
mbfleu •] bu magft mu[)eu -j ba tim^t foaen
( er mag ' er mu^
n?oIIen^ bu ioiUft
( er tinlt
Observe here the different vowel of the Inf. and Indic. ("except
joU); also the want of \\\^ person-ending m the i. and 3. Sing,
(irf^, er Unnfj, barf, faun, etc., not lucifH, barf-t, fann-t ; com-
pare Engl, can, may, etc., not can-s, may-s, etc.).
2. The forms of the Present in the verbs under II. were
originally Strong hnperfeets (hence their want of person-end-
ings), which came to be used witli a Present meaning; the
new (^weak) Imperfects were' formed from these, with vowel-
change.
3. The Present of \ue(fcu was originally a Pres. Subj., used
as Indic, and therefore also without full person-endings.
4. The Imperative is wanting in all under II., except
Unfjcn, Imper. Unfjc.
NoTKS. I. ii>inint (= Fr. savoir) is dsetl of knowledge, and of thinirs
onlv; fcimctl (~-= Vx.roiinattrcA oi artj!i'iiiit,nir:,\o' pcrsf);-w///r/ things, thus:
a^tffCli ^ii" ^^t 2i?cn? l'>o you know the road? (i. e., do you
know which is the right road ?)
^enitCU (5io t^on ^liV-flV Are you acquainted ^familiar) with the
road ?
ttl'iniClt eie ineiueu 5Bvu^el•? Do you know my brother?
SBlffen 3io, luaij er gtiaflt ()ttt? Do you
knr)\\ what he said ?
§I9«1
IRREGULAR STRONG VERBS.
223
3rf) bnrf flf^f », I am permitted to go.
VOCADULARV.
to put on (a hat), miffe^cn
expression, ber Sdi^'bruc! *
French (language \ g^rango'fifcf^
building, ba§ ©ebdiibe
commandment, ba^ Ciebot'
watch-key, ber UBrfcftliiffer
dwelling-house, bag ^Xl>ohn.
clearflyj, distinct! ly), beutlid;
although, obgleirf^' '
ia'o,n. .. 1. ,v.ll you be «o kind an to le„<, „.e your p.n ? aB.„e„ 3,>
3. What Is that in ii.rumn ? m, bcfftt ^a« nuf J^cutfrf, ?
3. He knows French, i^v fatm ^raiMofifd).
EXERCISE XXXIII.
ol' ^-,^1^:'"" ^^^' "i^^^ ucrftcbcu; [prid; bocf; beutlicfter.
^. ^lommen @ie nur Borcin, Jucnu eie miUn. H. ^,n e^ ^bnen
[(^on gehuujen, Sransofiid) ju IciT.cnV i. ^d, iucrbe ,u>d. kute
bieje ^ettion Icrnon nuiffcn, luib e. ift Hm M'oi i^icrtcl anf ;ebn
0. ^)a^d) xmmx^.djn ^agca licfcu unv 5d,Utt)dnd), unb l;ciiie 'ifi
^as, (vta ocfdniiolsen. H. ©a^^ cvitc (sjcbot bci^t (is): „^u loll t
feme anbcrn ©otter neben mir (nibeii." 7. e^ tfnit mir feib baft
trir erft morcjen a&reifen ; id) Jodre lienor k-ute aboereift' H
^l)iiit^ ':simn nicbt and) Icib, bafj Sie bie inorc^en blcibeit nulffenv
^'. aiMe beiBt ber engli[dK> 3ritgbriid ' Do you know my friend ?'•
auf ®eut[d; V Mmncn eie incinen Aicunb V" lu. ^IJfein Cnfel unb
meute 3:ante finb idwn oefterit angcfommcn, aber meine ^i^^ttern imb
Goufmen tuevben erft iibermorgcu fonimen fonncn. ]) ^rs^^iftt
b», bafe beine gjhitter annefommen ift? 12. ^^rf> mil biofe7^u*
nicbt miffe^en, loeil er mir 511 tiein ift. 13. ^'eute barf i* (anger
■BH
I? ■ ■ 1
224
LESSON XXXIIL
[§§i9«-
l^ier biciben ; ii'f* braurf^e nidjt oor je^n Uf^r gu §aufe 511 [ciu,
14. 2KoUcM Bk i\(b nirfjt fel^m? 15. '^6) luerbc mel;r (5elb
^abcn muffcu ; id> hah'i mdjt gcmu] §ur 9lcifc. Kn l^^st' inefjv man
^at, befto melir iuiU man. 17. 'Dicje^^ unavtige Hinb luci^ mrf>t,
tt)a§ e§ hJiH. 18. ^cf) hahz dtn gebbrt, baf^ meine 9J?utter fran!
ift, aber id) tuerbe fie md;t Dor morgen bcfudjcn ' 1 9. Soden
Sie gefaUigft mciuen Svtef gur ''^poft briugt ,0. ^I^ilbelm
iuirb ben gangeu ^ag 511 §aufe bleiben miiffen, tyeil cr fid; eddltet
'i^at 21. 5iJ?ein 33rubcr fpric^t gut ^cutfc^, obgleid) er erft in
in feinem ficbjebnten !^abre i}a^ Stubium biefer (^ipvac^e angc=
fangen l;at. 2:1. Solten Sie fo gut fcin unb mir fagen (mir ju
fagen), loie mel U^ir e« ift '<'.
B. 1. A stranger wants to speak to (f^rccben + ncc.) you.
2. That building was first a bank, then a shop, but it is now
a dwelling-house. ',\. How do you know that ? 1 know it be-
cause I have heard it fr -ii my father, 4. What shall I do?
1 have lost all my money, o. Do you know who has torn
this book? 6. No, I do not know who has torn it. 7. Can
you write the name of that stranger? 8. Do you know
German? No, but T know French. 9. Do you know the
difference between the words ' fcnnen ' and Muiffcn'? 10. I
had already put on my hat, and was just on the point of going
out, when the rain began. 11. These two ships set sail (ab=
fafjren) at the same time, but the smaller arrived first. 12. I
could not wind up my watch yesterday evening ; I had no
watch-key about me. 11). I cannot remain now any longer;
I must be at home at ten o'clock. 14. I know this street, but
I do not know the name of it (say : how it is called). 15. A
brave man is esteemed by everybody. 16. Of what is bread
made?
ORAL EXERCISE XXXIIL
1. Wie heiszt 'I am sorry' auf Deutsch ? 2. Weshalb
bleiben Sie heute niciit langer? W. Konnen bie Deutsch?
'98]
THE MODAL AUXILIARIES.
225
4 Sollte man gegen jedermann freundlich sein ? 5. Wie ^e
lallt Ihnen Pans> (i WiV v;«i tti, -. vviege-
LESSON XXXIV.
THE MODAL AUXILIARIES.
us go, IS really eqmvalent to an /„,/.eraf/z-e Mood\ Pi of
Oc^m ; ,cf; fann Be^en, ■! can go,' to a Potential Moo,, etc
198. These Modal Auxiliaries differ from ,l,e' En<.lish
Auxd.ar,es a.,, ,nay, ,„u,t, sM,, nnlt, in having an InfinU t
and a Past Participie, and in the consequent ability ofo™
he f,nghsh Verbs, and must therefore be supplied in \Z
lang^,ge by equivalent phrases, as shown in 'the fo loJ ng
partia. paradigms (see also Less. XXXV).
"id" '^ "^^ I '"Z; '° "^ ^-^'^ I -r ' " "^^- "^
^^^^f I allowed (may)
Present Indicative.
td^ barf, I am per-
niitied, may
tc^ burfc, I (may)
be permitted,
tc^ fann, I can, am
able
icfi mag, I like,
may
Present Subjunctive.
ic^ fonne, I (may) 1 ic^ mogc, I (may)
be able
I
like
226
LESSON XXXIV.
' Imperfect Indicative.
[g»98
\d) burftc, I was per-
mitted
id) fonnte, I could,
was able
icf> morf>te, T liked,
might
Imperfect Subjunctive.
ic^ biirfte, I might
be permitted
icf) fbnntc, I could,
might be able
icb mbcfctc, I might
' like
xd) \:}aU flcburft,
I have been per-
mitted
Perfect Indicative.
icf) IjaU gefonnt,
I have been able
id) f)a6e c^emocbt,
I have liked
tc^ t)a6e geburft,
I (may) have been
permitted
Perfect Subjunctive.
id; l;abe get'onnt,
I (may) have been
able
id) \)ahi geniodit,
I (may) have liked
Pluperfeci' Indicative.
id) fjatte gebuvft,
I had been per-
mitted
id) batte i-\cfonnt,
1 had been able
id^ battc c^emD(f>t,
I h;ul liked
Pluperfect Subjunctive.
id» biittc gebuvft,
1 miirht have been
permitted
id> bdtte gefonnt,
I might have been
able
id> bcittc gcmodbt,
[ might have liked
Future Indicative and Subjunctive.
tc^ tuerbc buvfcn,
T shall be permitted
id> tiievbe fbmten,
I shall be able
id> tDCvbe mbgen,
I shall like '
§198]
ic^hjerbecjtburft (>a»
Ben, 1 shall have
been permitted
THE MODAJ- AUXILIARIES.
Future Perfect.
ic^ mcrbo oefoniit i ic^ h,erbe gemocf)t
f'atH'n, I shall BaBcn, I shall
have been able
have liked
tc^ toiirbe biirfen, I
should be per-
mitted
Simple Conditional.
icB lyilvbe fonncn, I
should be able
ic(> iuurbe mojien, 1
should like
Compound Condition.*
AL.
i(B triirbe c^eburft ba*
ben, I should have
been permitted
tcf; luiirbe gcfonnt id; loiirbe
brtben, T should
have been able
gemorftt
('^ibcn, r should
<ave liked
miiffcii, to be com- I faacil,tobeoblio-ed ii,nfrr« toK mi-
pelled(must) | ^shalH «H)«cn to be wilhng
Present Indicative.
irf> foir, bu fofnx , ic^ i^id^ J ^ii,^ j,^_
lam rohliged) to, I tend to, am about
thou Shalt I to
ic^ mti^, I am com
pelled, must
Present Suhjunctive.
i* miiffe, I (may ) be ^ UU, \ < mav) be
compelled oblioed
icO mu^tc, I was
conipelled
Imperfect Indicative.
icfi foUte, J was
(obljo-ed) to.
ought
t* irofle, I (may
be willing
icb luoate, I was
wil lint:
^
»
11
1
1
!
i
1
i
1
1 11
H
\v
C!
228
LESSON XXXIV.
[§§ 198
\d} iim^tc, I might
be compelled
iMrERFECT Subjunctive.
\d} folltc, I might i* \vo\Uc, I might
be obliged bewilling,vvould
id) babe flemiijst,
I have been com-
pelled
Perfect Indicative.
id} babe gefollt,
I have been
obliged
id) \}aht gettJoUt,
I have been wil
ling
Perfect Subjunctive.
\d} ^ahz cjetDoKt,
I (may) have hern
willing
icb babe flemu^t, 1 id) ^abi c^iollt,
I (may) have been I (may) have been
compelled I obliged
Pluperfect Indicative.
id; l)attc i-^cjoKt, I id> batte getuollt,
I had been obliged 1 had been willing
id) \)atii gemu^t,
I had been com-
pelled
Pluperfect Subjunctive.
id) batte gemu^t,
I might have been
compelled
id) bcittc gcfottt,
I niijiht have been
obliged, ought
to have
id) (;dtte getPoUt,
I might have been
willing
Future Indicative and Subjunctive.
id) ttjerbe miifjcn,
I shall be com-
pelled
ic^ njerbc gemu^t
^aben, I shall
have been com-
pelled
id) ioerbe foKcn,
I shall be obliged
Future Perfect.
id) iuerbe gefollt Ija--
ben, I shall have
been obliged
id) U^erbe njoHen,
I shall be willing
\d) hjerbc ge^oUt
Ifiaben, I shall
have been wil
ling
h
^9dJ
THE MODAL AUXILIARIES
220
i* ttJiirbe miiffen,
I should be com-
pelled
Simple Conditional.
id) luiirbe foUcn,
I should be
obliged
ic^ h)urbe woilm,
I should be wil-
ling
Compound Conditional.
i^ tDiirbe cj^inuf^t
^abcn, I should
have been com-
pelled
ben, I should have ijahn, I should
been obliged
have been wil-
ling
109. Further Peculiarities of Modal Auxiliaries.
I. They govern an Infinitive without 311, as:
Gr mu^ ac^cii, He must po.
.i,'''^Vn^ compound tenses, when a governed Infin. occurs
the weak P Part, is replaced by the Infinitive ^really the old
irfh r rV'''^'""' P''^' 9'-'^^'^^'^^ ^^^"^ides inform
witn the Infin.), as :
^d) ^a&c flcmu^t I have been obliged ; — but
^d) ^aU C0 i^iin miiffen, I have been obliged to do it.
3. in subordinate sentences, their auxiliary of tense does
not come last, but precedes both the governed infinitive and
the participle of the Modal Auxiliary, as :
@r fagte, ha^ er eg ^afie t^un muffen. He said, that he
had been obliged to do it.
Mf^r- ~" ^^'V'^'^Somg peculiarities are all shared by the verbs f)ei,u-n
^e fen, joren, Um^ „,ad,civ leljeu ; for other verbs governing an nl
Without gu, see Ler,s. XLV. vcrumg an mun.
4. The ..>i^//.r (and older) forms of the Conditional (viz •
impf. and Plupf. Subj.. see S tti^ nr^ ^r«ferr-^^ .„ .u_ ,_ '
^nes (^nh tourbe), thus : ^
I
:p
i
i i
■1? !
Hi
230
LESSON XXXIV.
Simple Conditional.
ic^ biirltc =- I should be permitted
i* tbuntc - I " " ^^^^e
ic^ moJ^tc = I " >il^^
id; muOtc = I " be compelled
id; joflte - I " " obliged
id; mi\it -= I " " willing
CoMiouND Conditional.
I§i99
id; ^iittc
I should have
((
' geburft, biirfcn
Qeh)unt, tlMmcu
(^cmod;t, uibflcn
gemuj3t, luiifjcu
(^cfottt, foKcn
^ ge\uoUt, \uoUcn
Remarks.- I. The Engl, auxiliaries also use by prefer-
ence shorter forms of the Comp. Condit., but differently
constructed thus :
'been permitted
'* able
liked
been compv;lled
obliged
willing
id)()nttce§tiun
founcn
mjf,cn
mi'ificu
foUcn
lunlicn
= I
J
could
might
must
should
would
> have dene it
Observe that the Engl. Verbs have the Mo.M Auxihary
C could," might,' etc.) in the 5m//. Tense (Impf.), and the
governed verb ('have done') in the Compoimd Tense (Perf.
Inf)- whereas the Germ. Verbs have the Modal Aux,hary
(batte . . .fbmten, etc.) in the Compound "Y^x^s^ (Plupf. Subj.)
and the governed verb (tf;uu) in the ^m/A' Tense (Pres. Inf.).
2. Distinguish carefully between 'could,' Indir. {=^ ^^^
_ui. *..»,fA qnd 'roiild.' Conditional (= would be able,
fonttte) ; and so with the other verbs, thus :
§>99l
Tlir. MODAL AUXILIARIES.
i^l
^'t^T^/ft ?'" ^ ^'^ ""''' "-^ ^^^-^ '>-t able
to) do It i/nilic.).
er liinnte e« tt,.,.,, h.mn « lo.aic - He could (would
be able to) do it, it he were willing (a,J.).
Vocabulary',
to remain up,sit up, «uf'6Icibc» fellow creature, neighbour,
go out, lui^'gcfjcn
thank, banfen ( j- dat.)
bowj(., greet, Qrii^en (trans.)
depend, rely (upon), [id; ucr.
Iflf[en(auf-fncc.)
moment, ber 2(ii'gcnb(icf
railway, bie Gi'fcn⁡n
ber i)idc^ftc
disaster, bag Un^gfucf
untruth, falsehood, bi*? \\\\',
lual;r^cit
over again, noc^ (ein)inar
whether, if, ob
else, otherwise, [onft
S. In Sub weather, S(| fd,5i,cm SBrttcr.
8. I have heard (it) gaid eit «iA h^i.- /
EXERCISE XXXIV.
w^ f;e, gc agt at. I J. 5BiS,^tcn ©i. „id,t feci bicfen, fctonen
Better frcjjtercn f„(,ren? 12. .§aft bu ben 3ug l>o„ SuffJlo at
fcmmm fcben? 1.3. ;>a innM i,-r, (,.,1,5 ;<.» ,..- ,- - "
e8 war „,e,„anb barauf, ben icf, fannte. 14. @t ^at oeburft, a6cv
$
I.
If 1'
!'
p
"r
V ^
;
■
li
232
LESSON XXXIV.
[§§ 199-
er ^at nid^t gemollt. 15. ^^rf> tjabe in ber Stabt fagen ^bven, ba ]
ein gvofjce Uncjliicf auf ber C^ifcuba^n gefcbe^en \\t 16. 0;r foU
bon bicfem 33aiim gci^rimc-jen fcin, aber id; faun eg faum glaubem
17 ^d} barf nid;t jo f^at aufbleibcn al^ meiu alterer 33rubcr ; td?
mu^ iebcu 3(bcnb urn jebu Ubr ju 5Bette gcl;en. 18. :5rf^ i^il^ *
tbun m^ id> faun; barauf fonnen 2ie fid} toevlaffcn. 19. ^>on
iuem'nnirbc bag 33ud) gejdniebcn, bag ©ie focben lafcn? 20. @g
that niiv Icib, bafi Sie fo lange auf mid) f;aben mvtm mulfen ;
id; tonntc mciuo .s^anbfdnik uid;t finben.
B. 1. By whom was this picture painted? 2. I should
like to know what time it is. H. May you go out, if you
want to? No, we are obliged to stay at home the whole day.
4. I do not like (1 like no) tea ; I prefer (the) coffee. 5. Could
you help me with my lesson ? (i. I should certainly help you
with it, if I could. 7. He may say, what he will ; it is
all the same to me. H. My father could have sold his house
la^t year, but irow it is impossible, for nobody wants to buy it.
«). Charles has beaten his dog with a stick ; he should not
have done that. 10. May I offer you a piece of meat ? No,
thank you. 11. Have (let) the messenger wait, till I write
an answer. 1:2. I should like to read this I'rench book, but
I do not know anv French. IH. 1 am sorry that I have not
been able to come sooner. 14. He will be obliged to study
another year, if he does not pass his examination. 15. Sophia
should not have gone for^ajvalk, since the weather is so
cold. Ki. The horse I warned to buy was already sold. -
ORAL EXERCISE XXXIV.
1 Wie heisx-t das erste Gebot ? :>. \\issen Sie, ob wii
morgen zur Schule gehen miissen ? 3. Harf ich Ihnen eina
Tass^e Thee anbioten? 1. Weshalb haben Sie mir mit meiner
Auf-abe nicht helfen woUen ? 5. Wie lange werden vMr aut
Fritz warten mussen ? (). Sollte man seinen Nachsten .leben?
m-
2oo]
THE MODAL AUXILIARIES.
^^^
LESSON XXXV.
MODAL AUXILIARIES (continued) :-|DIOMS.
"OO. The followiiijj are the moaf imt.r^vf.>v,^. r ^i
» ^ '•"'- "'ost important of the various
meanings of the Modal Auxiliaries :
I Surfeit denotes permission, as :
Tax\ k% frajicrt 'c- Ma/ I ask.
eie hurfcn m nac^ .f^aufe geOen, You may go home
now.
(£r i)at mm fa^qen burfcn, He has not been permitted
* allowed) to say anything.
2. ^iinttcn denotes:
{a) abiiity {(^i pa-sous), as :
Gv fonntc fd)on frt^reibcn, He could (was able to
knew how to; wnte beautifully.
%i) Wit nic^t fomiiuMi fbnnen, I could not have (would
not have been able to) come.
{^>) pOSSibilit/ {o(eve;ifs), as :
G^ Urn fcin, It may b. so), it is possible.
3. W^m denotes :
('0 preference, likmg {oi persons), as :
^i:!) mog ticfc^ (sH'Wctt uiAt, I do not like (care for)
this poem. '
(5r mO(^tc uid)t arhntcrt, He did not like to work.
3c^ b;ute 3l)rc« 33ruter fe(,en magcn, I should have
liked to sea your brother.
—^1. ^Miaic. and CtJiuiUj ihrou'^liout.
(/^) concession, possibility (in 2. and 3. person only),
'»
+-
.i*i-.
IG
-*"
11
it
',
f
ifi-
i! i'
liii
234
LESSON XXXV.
t§2oc
(^r mofl ge'^em He may go (as far as T am concerned),
or : Let him go.
^a^ moft fciu, That may be (for all I know).
NoTE.-The Kngl. ' muy ' denoting permissi.)n must be rendered by
Dftrfcn in the first person, as :
May I accompany you? ^arf id) 5ie beflleiteu?
(c) Observe this idiom :
^(^ tucrbc movi^cn au^et^en, mog e^ x^c^xwi obcr nid)t, I
shall go out to-morrow, whether it rains or not.
4. 9)lujfcn denotes necessity, as :
mk ^0)ienfd>eu muijcu ftcrbeu, All men must die.
Ge mu^ c^cftcrn flcfc&eben fcin, It must have happened
yesterday.
2Qir \vcrbcu am^m miiflcn, We shall be compelled
,or ' obliged; or ' shall have ') to go.
Note. -'To be obliged, compelled' after a negative is rendered by
briuidicn, as :
I am not obliged to go, 3d) btoud)c uid)t ^u iiel)eu.
5. SoUcn denotes duty or obligation, imposed on the
subject ^y the will of another.
(a) Imposed by the speaker, as:
®u joUft lud^t ftcblcn, Thou shalt not steal.
(/i) Imposed by some person other than, but recognised
by, the speaker, as :
'"scl> joU i^cbcu, I am to go.
er batte .^'bcn joacil, He ought tc ^ave gone.
^ii}a^? joU v-\cfd>eben '^ What is to be done?
4i>vv:^ jolltc id' tbun'^ What was I to do ?
(() It also denotes a statement on the part of another
as to the sul)ject, as :
(Sr foa fel;r rcid) jein, He is said to be very rich.
:li
St
200
:cl),
J by
^200]
THE MODAL AUXILIARIES.
It, I
t.
ned
lied
;d by
1 the
lised
other
25i
6. fBoUtn denotes
ia) the exertion of the will on the part of the subject as •
(^t miO ntd)t cichordH'tL He will not (refuses to) obey.
i^) intention or impending action, as :
Qv m morgcn abrci|cn, He intends (means) to depart
^a^&^ m [n-ccfH«n, The ice is about to break
(threatens to break).
er rtioatc eben geben (= mv cben tm ^^cnriff ^u qebcn),
He was just on the point of going.
(0 a statement or claim on the part of the sul^jecr, as :
(Sv \m in ^nbicn oeipcfcu fein, He asserts that he has
been (pretends to have been) in India.
7. Caffcu is used
(a) as auxiHary of the Imperative Mood, as :
Soffcu eie urn bkv blcibcii, Let us remain here.
{^) to express permission, etc., as :
man i)at bcii ^icb cntfpvinacn loffcil, The thief has been
allowed to escape.
(d to express the agency of another, as :
3^er Cffi^icr Uc^ bcu edbatcn kftrafcn. The officer
ordered the soldier to be punished.
mm^niUU %,Uv tkfi ben ^^^anni umf)OUCll, Cinderella's
father had the tree cut down.
Note.- The infin.in tl,e former of these examples is rendered by
.he/..... .nfin.t.ve ,n LnKlish, the object of the verb hUIOU hein, under
stood. Supply the ellipsis as follows : ^
^or CfR^icr Oat imant (obj. of lam), ben 3olb(Ucn (obi. of
hntvmn), bcftrafcii (offcn, The officer has ordered so,M to
punish the soldier. "^
.! 1
Qf) reflexively,
as
,M<
I
m
i
236
LKSSON XXXV.
l§§ 260-
(5v licfj fifi) Iciibt bctviii^'n, Mc suffered himself to he
deceived easily.
'^^d} lie)) cs> mir i^cfallcn, T submitted to it.
(5-^^ liijjt fid) nidit Iciuvicn, It cannot be denied.
201 . How to render shall and will.-
1. I he Kn"l. ' shall ' and ' will ' must /><)/// be rendered by
tUCrtlCU when they express ;?i<'rr futurity, as :
I shall be drowned and nobody will save me,
;"scb mvht cvtvintcu imt nicmaub luivti micl> rcttcu.
2. -Ikit if they express more than mere futurity (e. g.,
oblii^ation or ,lrtrmination\ they must be rendered by foflcu
and nioflcu respectively, as :
1 will be drowned and nobody shall save me,
ls6> Itiill crtrint'cn unb nicmanb joll mid^ vcttcn.
202. (H)serve the followinj; parallel idioms:
(iv f|nt cv uid^t tl)un fiiuucu, He has not been able
, . to do it.
^' '^ tiv fnnil c^> nid^t pt\)m fiodcit, He cannot ipossibly)
have done it.
(5v f)nt c^^ nidit t(}Un mogcn, He did not like to
do it.
Gv mo;', c^> {^ctfjon fiabcu, He may (possibly) have
done it.
I Civ ^nt c^^ tljuu miiffcn. He has been obliged to
{(■) I do it.
I Civ muji c^> gcttion ^nbcn. He must have done it.
r Civ \)ai Cv5 t^Utt jotfcn, He should i;ought to) have
j done it.
" j Civ \o{i Co flctljan ^oku. He is said to have
done it.
(^')
i
202]
THE MODAL AUXILIARIES.
^17
^) ;
(Sr ^nt cc^ tf)un luoMctL He intended to have
done ii.
Gr ni (I c<? flrt^it rjnlicu. Ho pretends (claims)
to have done it.
VocAHUr^ARY.
to put on, draw on (coat, etc.) Kn-iishman, bcv en^ldnbcr
naught, cipher; zero, bic ^}\\\{\.
shoemaker, bcr 3dnihiimdici-
proverb, bivo '3prtc(Moort
studying, biv? '3tubicrcn
lesson, bic 3tuhbc
bunch of grapes, bic QTraube
thermometer, bcr or bas 3;l;crs
moiiic'tcr
overcoat, bcr llDcrsicfjcr
as far as, \i\^ nad)
dangerousriy), ^cfahrlirf)
sour, faucr
nil X'sax citictt %x\i holen
an^icbcn
expect, ciumrtcu
chat, talk, plaiibcvn
reap, [dMicibcn
disturb, interrupt, ftorcu
try, t)crf udi en
last, continue, tDiibrcn
American, bcr i^lntcrifancr
physician, doctor, bcr i)li;^t*
beggar-woman, bic '^^cttlcrin
steam-engine, bic ^ainpf=
mafd)inc
Idioms: 1. A doctor has been sent for,
la^Tcn.
8. Ev,rv other day (every alternate day), iSimn CTaq um
cell iinbcrn.
3. Kvery week, %{{( nd)t ^a<^s.
4. I should think so! I<c,« yoXUt idj inciiicn!
5. In the riffht «ay, "Jl.lf tit riditifle aScifc (ace).
EXERCISE XXXV.
A. 1 . !3:cr Xclc(]ra|)b foU Don cincni iHincrifancr crfimben iuorben
Kin. 2. ,/Bcr iin 3ommcv nid^t mag fd)ucibejL ntiif? tin ^Jsjintcr
.•ounocr Icibcn/' hcif?t cin bcutfdH'e 3pridniunt. ;}. ^Xiodc nur,
iua^ bii tannft, fo luirft bu toiniciL luae bu Hnaft. 4. ^Jiiid^ftc ^^^Jod^c
lollcn Juiv eincu Acicvtacj habcn, lucnn Die 3oinia[KMib flciniq [tubicrt
iiMvb. 5. mam luoUtc ibrc i!cftion in cincr bafbcn 3tunbc fn-nnt
rtbcr jie bat cs nidit ncfonnt. G. ^Uir Jinivbcn allc cjliidlidicr Icbcn
nienn U)ii- immcr tl;dten, m^ miv tbun [oUtcn. 7. ^di tr>crbe bie
,!#
MM
u
238
LESSON XXXV.
m 202-
2ettion nie Icmcu fbnnen. K. ^u \mx\t fie lernen fbnnen, \mm
bu e^ nuv auf bie vicbtiv^c ^Ahmk Dcvfucbft. 9. '•)J{an barf mrf)t m bcv
Sdnile vlaubcvn ; bcv5 ftovt ben <?c(n-cv unb bic Srfuilcr. 1 0. iBee=
balb hat 3(fchcn^uttcle l^atcr ben 33aum iimbaucn laffenV 11.
SoUte .'oeiT ^:B. ^uabvcnb lucincr ^IbtucfouKnt fommcn, fo laffcn
Sic ibu auf uticf) UHivtcn. I'-i. :scl; inbdUe mir Unifcn, mxiun
e«eDrflauffid> luartcu UiBt! IH. ^^^d; mod^tc 3ic nid^t ftbrcn,
ahix fac^en Sic miv qcfdUii^ft, Unc bicfcr 2al} auf ^mm l^eiBt.
14 (s5cDVc3^ ^:isatcr foil a*^faln-licl} !vanf fciu ; man Imt jioei Slv^tc
ftoicn lafien. 15. ^cv ^hv-^cI \w\iU cbcn Dom i^aumc flicgen, alo
ber Sciger ibn fd^of^ 1<^. Wutcn ^Tamyn, A^crr ^Maun, mem
iOatcr la^t >ncn fagen, baf^ cr 2ic Innitc ^tbcub crtuartet. 17.
r^ak id) 8ie fagcn tun-on, bafj 3ic jcbcn lag cmc bcutfdK (Stunbc
nebmen'? 18. ^3tcin, id) nctnnc cincn 2ag um ben anbern erne
gtunbc H) ai^ac? mid) betvifft, h mbcbte icf) lieber afle brei ^age
meine Stunben n:-Smcn. 20. ^a^i folltc id) meinen, benn 2te
Unirbcn mebr ,Beit jum etubieven baben. 21. Gbrli* tvabvt am
Idngften, unb Unved)t fdUdgt feinen eigenen .S>n-rn.
B 1. Let us take a walk ; T cannot work any longer. ;i.
The be<"-ar-woman, who has just asked us for nioi)ey, says
that shHs (claims to be) a hundred years old. 8. She is not
quite so old, but she is said to be at least above (iiber-l-acc.)
ninety years old. 1. The fox said : ' The grapes are sour ; I
do not like them.' 5. The fox said the grapes were sour,
and that he did not like them. (i. Might 1 ask you how far
vou are going ? As far as Montreal 7 . Should I put on my
overcoat""^ H. I should tidnk so ! The thermometer is (stands)
below zero !•. Is it true that this traveller knows three
languages? U mav l)e [so], but I do not believe it. K). If
you should see little Freddy up-stairs. let him come to me.
1 1 Bv which shoemaker do you have your shoes made ? 12.
The steam-engine is sau
I to have been invenied by an Eng-
lishman, bi. L^i^'^y
boys le
irn on
Iv because they are obliged
ao5]
COMPOUND VERBS.
^39
to learn. 14. He must have been very ill, as (ba) he is still
so weak. 15. This house is said to have cost four thousand
dollars, but I should not like to <,rive two thousand for it. lij.
He has not l)cen able to come on account of tiie storm,
otherwise he would be here alrcadv.
ORAL EXERCISE XXXV.
1. Mochten Sie nichl cine Rcise nach Kuropa inachen .?
± Gehen Sie allc 'I'age nach der Stadt, odcr nur alle zwei
Tage.? .*{. Was machen Sie, wenn Sie niclit niehr studieren
konnen .? 4. Wer soil das Telephon erfunden haben .? .-,. Hat
man einen Arzt holen lassen ? (i. Haben Sie das (ieid be-
zahlen miissen ?
li
LESSON XXXVI.
COMPOUND VERBS.
20.*?. 'i'he Prefixes of Compound Verbs may be either
Inseparable or Separable.
204. A. Inskparablk Prefixks.
Remember: The omission of gc- in the P. Part.
The prefixes (jc-, cr-, cm|i-, citt-, flc , ucr-, ^cv-, mifj-,
UUDcr- are always inseparable and unaccented, the principal
accent falling on the verb.
Remarks.— i. '{'he particle mi^- varies in usage, as shown
in the Supplementary Lesson E.. iJ 209, i, below.
2. Remarks on the force and meaning of these particles
are given in Part III.
205. J3. Separahi^e Prefixes.
Remember: i. The Prefix is separated from tlie Verb
onlv in Simnl»i» T^rio,
Inte
es and Principal (including Direct
r
1.1
i- il
T
rrogative and Imperative) Sentences.
LESSON XXXVI.
[§§ 205-
II
2. The j^c- of the ?. Part, and ]H of the Infin. come between
prefix and verb. <
3. The principal accent is on the prefix.
2<K5. The Separable Prefixes are :
1. The simple prepositional and other adverbs, 06-,
an-, ouf-, am-, etc. ; bo(r)-, fort-, cmpor-, ^cr-, ^in-, etc.
2. The compound adverbs, such as: bfltiOU-, bn^ll, etc. ;
tiorott , t)orou«-, etc. ; cntgcgcu-, cntjttjci-, ^uriirf-, etc.
Ncni-.s. I. Observe that these compound adverbs are all accented
on the xiroiti/ syllable.
2. The use of the compound prefixes with Jjct and ^in - is defined
in the Supplementary Lesson E., § 210, below.
Examples of Verbs with Prefixes.
{(i) Simple
Verbs.
{Ii) Inseparable
Compounds.
((■) Separable
Compoui\ds.
\ ou«(^ebcn, go out
, ^ r \ oueaeneii, go out
9d,n., go t.Ctacl,e«, pass away | ^^^^^^^^^l ^^ ^ack
rci^cn, tear ^crrci^cn, tear to pieces
fommcii, bcfomnicn, obtain cntj^Cflcnfontmcu, con.e
come to meet
fittbni, find crfinbcu, invent nusfinbcii, find out
Other Separable Prefixes are :
3. Substantives, forming one idea with the verb,
(a) as objects of the verb, as :
nrfltocbcn, pay attention (^attend); Boutfac^cn, return
thanks (thank); ftttttfinbcn, take place (occur);
tcifncbmeu, take part (interest one's self).
Note. The substantives in these combinations are usually spelt
with a small letter, and written in one word with the verb when they pre-
cede it.
(/;) with prepositions (= adverbial phrases), as
207]
DOUiiLE J'REFJXES.
241
)l* III «d|t nchmcii (reii), take care (be careful)-
3U Untie tbm, injure, hurt ; ^u 3toil&c btuu^n]
complete; ^U Stniibc fo.nmcn, be completed ;" im
©tniibc fetn, be able ; j«m Jliorfrfjcin fonuncn, make
one s appearance ^appear . ; ^,1 f^hltc fcin, feel
Remark.- These substantives occupy the same position
in the sentence as separable prefixes, thus :
'M f)abe auf [cin iUtuv^n ndjtgegcbcu,
I have observed his conduct.
'M) ^cicsi^ ihni fiir fcine /rrcunblicf^fcit bnnf,
I thanked him for his kindness.
Note. -Observe that in the above sentences the simple obiects with
out prepos.t.on (ad,t, ba„f) >/,.. the prepositional phras'es .. .^ ^
l«flen rav icmc ^rnn,Mid,tVit,, contrary to rule. In acco „u f Le r
character as separalile prefixes.
4. Adjectives as prefixes are usually separable, as :
frcilaficn, set free (liberate); feftfmltcn, hold fast (de-
tain) ; fic^ Io0fagcn (refl.), renounce.
But many are inseparable, of which fuller particulars are
given m ihe Supplementary Lesson E., § 212.
For Uoa- as prefix see § 208, below. '
^^^' C. Double Prefixes.
1. Separable + Separable prefix; these are compound
adverbs, and both separable fsee § 206, 2, above).
2. Separable + Inseparable; the former alone is se-
parated, as : '
Oll'crfeimcn, acknowledge, id; crfenne ait yhm see Suppl
Less. E., §213). ^^ ■
3. Inseparable + Separable ; both in.separable, as :
koilf traocn, authorize, ic^ licoiif tragtc Hjn, I authoriz--^
"im; uernnftaltcn, arram
ranged this.
ige, id) iseronftaltete bics., I ar-
HM
242
LESSON XXXVI.
[§§ 207-
NoTE -These are really not c Mound h^x\ derivative verbs, from
compound nouns cnilf'tran, ^^lu'l'talt; , hc.u r also the verb (as in the
former example) is always weak, not strong - l.oauftvai]tf, bfOlUtlrtflt.
208. -^. riU'.i'iXKS Separable and Inseparahik.
The prefixes tjurri)-, fitter , iibct-, utitcr-, \m-, OoU- are
sometimes separable, sometimes inseparable. They are :
^a) Separable as long as both prefix and verb retain
more or less of their literal or cone '.e meaning;
{!>) Inseparable when both have lost this meaning, and
form together one new idea. A compoimd of the
same verb and prefix may therefore be both sepa-
rable and inseparable according to its meaning,
as in the following examples :
{a) Separable and LiteraL ! (/' Inseparable and Figurative.
(Accent on I'retix, Trans, and Intr.) ; (Accent on Verb, always Trans.)
tmrdl'vctfcn, pass (travel)
through, as :
(vr ift flcftcvn bicv i)urd)S-\cvcift,
He passed through here
yesterday.
^itt'tcrgcbcu, go behind
iVbcrf cl3cn t tr. or intr. i, cross ;
jump over, ferry across, as:
(Sr je^tc mit ciucin BpniUi^'
iibcr, He jumped over at
a bound.
^•dbrmanu, bittc, jc^ctt2i. mich
iioct, Ferryman,please ferry
me across.
bmdn'ci'jcit, traverse, travel
over, as :
(TV bat biv? i^in^c £anb biird^;
vcift', He has traversed
(^travelled over) the whole
country.
btntcvi^c'()cii, deceive, as:
©r l;intciijiufl' fcincn ^reunt.
He deceived his friend.
iibcrjc^'cn, translate, as :
^stb iiberjc^'e cin bcutidje^l^udj,
I am translating a Cer^
man book.
ao8] PREFIXES .SEPARAliLK AND INSEPAKAHLE.
U3
un'tctjdncibcn, write under,
subscribe, as :
<Sd)rcilicn 3ie ,Mucn ^Kamcn
bier iintcr. Subscribe your
name here.
um'gelHMi, go round, as :
Siemiiffcnum'tiebcn, Vou must
go round.
tinfl'ciicj^cn, pour full, as :
(Sr {^of; bivN WUv? toU, He
poured the «;lass full.
my work.
Notes. r. These separable prepositional prefixes are only rarely-
used with the verbs given above, except :,^ prepositions proper, governinL.
a case, as : °
Ci-i- flinn Winter ^n\ Cfcit (um bao s>mi),
He went behind the stove (around the housei.
2 The adverb ttJtcDcr is separable, except in tUicHcrho'loil, repeat (but
lliie'ftcrl)o(en, fetch again). v \ <
3. Many compounds with these prefixes are used as inseparable com-
pounds only; others ar, separable only.
uiitcridirri'ljcn, sign, as :
;'scb \^K\U ben ^i^vief nodi nid>t
untcrfrtiric'Dcil, I have not
yet signed tlie letter.
iimnc'f|Cll, evade, as :
')Jian imij^iufl' bav (^)e|el3. The)
evaded the hiw.
DoUcn'dfii, complete, as :
v3d) \)K\h'i nieine ^Jdboit i)ol(=
cn'bct, 1 have completed
VOCAHULAKY
to meet with, an'treffen
give up, aufi^cbcn
cease, stop, aufbi)rcn
open, anf maduMi
leave out, omit, au^yiaffen
pronounce, aiho'ipiwbeu
assist, aid, bei'fte(;eu
go away, forfgebeu
come out, bcraue'foiumeu
come in, bevein'fomnieu
set (of the sun, etc. i, un'ter^
ijeben
read to, voi'Icfeu (+ dat. of
leave, l>ci'Ia))en [pers.)
promise, lHnl>redien
present; introduce, iHn'fteUou
(+ ace. and dat.)
go past, pass by, Dovbei'gebeu
close, shut, ;,u'iHadHMi
come back, uiriid'toinnien
244
LESSON XXXVI.
[§«o8
i
\i
H
collide, ;;aifam'mcnftofu'n
send to, jn'fdnctcn (+ dat.)
coffee, bcr Maf'fcc
Nortiiern Railway, btc OcOib':
eiicnbabn
slave, bcr 3tla»c
marria<];e (-ceremony), bic
!irauuni^
pale, blcicf)
by heart, aU'>ytucnbi(^
since, fcitbcm' (adv. and conj.)
closed, shut (predicate), ju
even if, mwv . . . aucb
Jdioms: I. What U tlu' iiialtor with him' Uai t)Ot tr?
a. H« feels 111, Jbm ift jrtitrrtit ]\i SJiitf; or: (»o ift ihm (Alrdit \xi
'auiit.
;{. To traiisluto into (Jeriiiaii, ;\ii0 tcui|it)( ilbrrirlKii.
4. !ii fine weather, iHei jdioitrut SOcttrr.
5. If you please, SOtiiii iit) liittrit barf (lit., If I may ask).
EXERCISE XXXVI.
A. 1. 5.^crgif5 nid^t, bao ^^-cnftcr ^u.^imiadHMi, mmi bu ba'-S
3immcr Dcvliif^t. i. '^iivJ man auffdncbt, tommt fcltcn 311 3tanbc.
ij. .Vlbnncn 3ic mir fa{\cn, U>ic bicfcy 3."i3ort auf Dcutfd; aiiv<ac--
f^rod>cn u>irb? 4. ^3Jicinc 3dni>c[tern fanicn mir cuti^ci\cn, abcv
kibcr babcn fie mid; nid^t ani^ctroffcn. 5. ^lUclc babcn licrfvrodH'n,
im§ bcijuftcbcn, abcr mir iocniiic babcn nne mirtlid^ bcigcftanbcn.
6. Sir finb jcM mit bcm erftcn 2:ci(c bc^S 5^ndH^> bcinabc fcrtig ;
nacbftc Sod>e fani^'n unr an, ben ^mcitcn 2i\l jn nb^r[cl3cn. 7.
3tiH'i Jugc finb auf bev ^iovbafcnbabn sutannncni^cftoficn. «. ^d^
bbrte auf ju fin^cn, mcil id> bcifcr unirbc. *J. llicin ^l^atcr madUc
ben ^i^ricf auf unb Uv$ benfclbcn bcr 3'iii»ili^ ^^^^' 1<^- "^''^^ ^i"-
mal \iu}t, bem i-\laubt man nid>t, unb n>cnn cr aud; bic ^Jinibrbcit
fViidU. 1 1 . .s^abcn 3ic bie i^cituuv^ botiMumcn, bic id> v»bncn au^i
bcr 3tabt jut^icbidt babe? 12. (rffen 3ie geuu^bnlid) in ber 3tabt
3U 'lliittaiV? 13. :;>a n>ob(, id> i-\ebc jcben ^acT um neun llbr fort
unb t'omme erft um fed>^ llbr juriid. 11 ^Uiancbcr bat anc\efanoen,
tiHV5 er niclit uollenbet bat. 15. llnfere ^cacbbam mufjcn UH>bl
fort fein, benn alle ^aben finb bei ibnen ju. U). ^lommen 3ie
bod) berein; icl^ ioill 3ie i^evvn :-^>vaun uinftclicn. 17. '^sd)
banfe melmal^, aber icb bin ibm fd^on lun-geftellt iT)orbcn. 18. il\'i
j^208j
coMPocxn vi:ki!s.
245
i^bcv ubcrmorgcn ftattv 'Ml ^JsJoHcn .3ic cine :ra)ic 2M mm
^le nur lictnn- cine 4 af[c .Uaffcc.
^. 1. The Reformation took place in the sixteenth cenfury.
•-. Have you closed all the doors and windows ? l] \Vh,t is
the matter with you ? Vou look so pale. 4. I do not know'-
since I have come back, I do not feel at all well, o In the
year ,865 all slaves in the United States were set free (5
Have you opened the letters which have just arrived > 7 The
sun sets earlier now, and the -..eather bepns to .row colder.
K Mary ,s learnmg a poem by heart ; she has alreadv repeated
It ten t.n.es. ii. Have you found out at what o'clock the
".eenn^. takes place .^ 10. Do you know the ^^-ntleman who
has just gone past .Ml. When we were goin^,. past the church,
the people were just coming out. I >. Pay attention to your
work; you always leave otu words, when you are co^ Wn^.
hi VVhy have you closed the window } I was beginnincr To
catch cold. 14. I have tried to learn this poem, but it is
too hard for me, and I have given it up at last. 15. (Joethe's
l;aust has been translated into English by Bayard Tavlor.
1>. The marriage of my brother takes place to-morrow at
eleven o clock,
ORAL EXERCISE XXXVI.
1. In welchem Jahre wurden die Sklaven in den Ver-
emtgten Staaten freigelassen .^ :>. Lernst du gern Gedichte
auswendig ? ;}. (Jlauben Sie, dass unsere Nachbarn fort sind >
4. Kennen Sie den Mann, deram Hause vorbeigeht ? r, Wer
hat d,esen l]rief aufgemacht > (i. Wie sprechen Sie das Wort
u-o-e-t-h-e aus ?
R
246
SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON E.
[§§209-
SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON E.
ON CERTAIN PREFIXES.
aOl). 'rilK iNSEFARAHLK PRKKIX lUiS-
The particle mi^- is inseparal)le, hut :
(,,) With cclain vcrhs it takes the JJC- of the P. Part, and JU of the
Iniin. aftc.il, as:
miri)rt"^^"l"' act amiss niiiVflctianbelt mitAul)a^^.•(u
Wuh other verbs llltft- either :
{/>) Has {JC- ^h'/on- it, as:
mifnion'bclu, ill-treat !'. Part. flcmilYllan^dt — or:
(c) Drops flC^ altogether, as:
mimaricn, displease P. Part, mimal'leu
Note. — 01)serve that tliu principal accent:
under («) is on the /re/ix throughout ;
" (/,) is on the /'r<:/i.v in the 1'. Part, only, otherwise on the vfr/'',
" (c) is on the vrr/' throughout.
210. Use of the Prefixes ^cr- and J)i«-
1. The particles Ijcv (' hither ') and |)in (' hence') are prefixed' • verhs,
1,0th simple and compound, to indicate the directio:. towards or from
the speaker respectively, as :
Wommcn 2\C Ijcr, ("ome here (hither, to me).
(Hcl^cn 2:K Ijilt, ('O (there) thither (hence, from meV
Hence, a person standing L',^-s/<i/rs would say to one Mo7c> :
Mommcn 2\( llCiailf, Come up h-^re (up-stairs) ;
hu'i to ont^ u/stairs :
(SSf()cu Z\( IlinuHtcv, Go down there ido\vii->tairs).
2. The .simple prepositional adverbs ab , nil-, ttUf-, ilUi--, fin- 'l-'fter-,
itbcr-, untcv ,Hm
tint are only used with verbs of motion, whf'n the
;6m
pound verb denotes motion in a general way, without spe
cifie A
direction, or when it has lost the idea of motion altogether
ii
iii]
USE OF THL PREFIXES.
24;
J- i'r) V he,, w,th aui and bOl-, also with ah- in the sense of ' down '
ed In ; ' . u '° "•■ ''■°'" ^'" •^'^^^'^- •« ^"^^her indic-
ated In prefixing (,cr- and (jir,- respectively.
(/') When with the remaining prefixes („„-, „„f-, etc.), the place to
wh.ch the motion is directed is implied, ,u\ not secifi d ^
or Ijin- IS smularly prefixed.
4. The following examples will serve to show more clearlv th. ,Uff
ence between verhs with the simple prefixes and tho::^:;!^^- or t" :!;
{a} With Simple Prefix.-
UU8nel)0ii, go out (for a walk, on
business, etc.)
»or^icf)cii, prefer
obfteii^eii, dismount
onfiMnnii'tt, arrive
U5ciiicf)fu, desert [perish
UntcrflclKil, set (of the sun) ; sink ;
{''') With (jcr- or (jilt- :
IjmniicnclKn, go out (from the
house)
Oftuoi-5ir()i'ii, draw forth
ftrrahftcii^cn, descend
OfMllfoimiicil, come up to, ap-
proach
l)iniibornc()cii, go over, across
l)ininitcrnol)cii,godown(stairs,etc.)
.re^usl Us TSX '"" "''° "'"' --^P-tivdy is specified, these words
a.e used as /.r/.../,.,,. y,,,^,,^ governing a substantive. !mt may be re-
peated as adverbial prefixes with (jCr or ^tll, as : ^
^v niiui ou^ brm Himmrr djinoug).
Notes. - ,. .Jlb-, .neaning ' off, away,' ,l„es no, r.quh-e these prefixes, as •
abre.ten, abfle[;c„, to depart, go off; _ but : UiuaHcljcu, to go down
acc^a^^';:: ^'^^'^"^''^^"^^" ^^^ -''-^ ^° -•"^>' - ^P-i.ied, „, t.... preposHio,, i„ .it,, „.
Gf litt in bie atnbt hineiii.
j^c^ t«erbc ,u,d. Gm-opa hii.ubcivid,OM, I shall go over to I-urone
err ,ft oom ^ncf,e h.rab.efadcn, Ho h,.s fallen down from the Lf.
Othkr Prefixes.
suiiJ^Ver^t:''""' """ ""^°""' substantives are treated as
^aSpviUrm, the breakfast, fnil)'ftu(fcn, to breakfast; irf, friifi'
fti'cftc, gcfriifi'ftiicft. ' ^
I 1
)*■-
lit
;aB
Ksem
Kf
■!■
2aS
--f
SUIM'LEMKNTAKV I.liSSON K
|§§2lt
!Die ,^-^anb'l)alie, the handle, l)anb'()nbrn, to handle; l)onl)'liabtc,
fli!l)anb'l)abt.
T)cr 3{at'jrf)lafl, the counsel, nit'idilacien, to take counsel; rol'=
Wa^k, flcvat'fclilnflt.
Note -Observe that all such verbs are weak, as in the case <.f the last two of th.'
aboCe verbs, which arc not compounds of haben or fdilaflcn respectively.
212. Adjective Prefixes ;ue frequently inseparable, but retain the
principal accent and require flf h/ore them in the P. Part., as :
ttJci^'uicion, to prophesy, ttJfi&'iantc, rcuuMfn'iint ; icdjt'fiTtiticn,
to justity, vc(l)l'fcrtinte, 0cvori)t'fci-tint ; lict/loicn, to caress, Uth'
to[ti\ jjclieb'ioft ;
also the substantive compound :
luft'ivanbdn, to walk for pleasure, fleluft'iuailbc'it.
2i;j. Some verbs with Separable -f- Inseparable Prefi.K are used
only m ('onstructions which do not require the separation of the former
particle from the verb ; thus we may say :
(£[)ViftUv^ ift OttCi'ftanbcn, Christ is risenjromjhejead,— or:
"■m (Sl)l-iftUO ttUicn'taub, — but instead , of :
(Si- cvftaub nuf, we say. (5v ftanb ucii tJcu tottn oiif.
Similarly with OU^CrlolOU, ilOrcnUinltcn, and a few others.
EXERCISE E.
1 Have vou answered all the letters ? I have answered all except this
one. ■>. I have asked my sister, if (whether) she is ready, but she has
not answered. :5. She has gone up-stairs ; perhaps she h' ^ not heard.
4 I et her come down, for I cannot wait for her any longer. .^ I should
like to speak to vour father ; is he at home ? ♦'.. Yes, he is up-stairs in his
studv: i>leasc oo up. 7. Some one is shouting in the street ; go <Hit and
see what is the matter, s. Are you going oat to-day ? I am going out, as
soon as ! have breakfasted. '.». George, go out of the room; you have
been behaving badlv. 10. Many people say that Mr. 15. has acted amiss
in this affair,^)ut he has justified himself. 11. We started so early yes-
terday ntorning that we had no time to breakfast. 1 2. Several people were
standing on (ailf ) the street before a burning house, and were looking up.
13 A poor woman with her child was on the point of jumping down. U. At
last a fireman vent up and saved b.th [of them], l.".. The boy has abused
his dog, and therefore he was punished by his father. I(i. The dog was
howliiig in the street, but some one went out and brought him in.
ai5]
REFLEXIVE VERBS.
249
LESSON XXXVII.
REFLEXIVE AND IMPERSONAL VERBS.
Reflexive Verbs.
214. I. All Reflexive Verbs are conjugated with fiabcn
For an example of their conjugation see § 41, and observe
the use of ft(^ as special reflexive of the third person for all
genders and both numbers.
2. The reflexive pronoun is introduced as near to the
beginnmg of the sentence as possible, sometimes even before
the subject, when the latter follows the verb and is not a
pronoun, and especially if the subject has adjuncts, as :
(^5eftcm hat firf, mcin lieber, aha SCsakx 6efrf)abiflt
My dear old father injured himself yesterday. '
215. I. Any transitive verb may be used reflexively when
the action of the verb is on the subject ; but Reflexive Verbs
proper are :
(a) Those which are used o;i/j reflexively, especially such
as indicate a sMe of mind ox feeling, as :
[id; Bvaincn (gen., or iiOcr +
ace), grieve
ficft bef(ei^eu(gen.),| apply
» bcfleijjitjcu, ) one's self
„ begniigeu (init), be con-
tented
„ bcfinncn (gen.;, recollect
» erbarmcn (gen.), take pity,
have mercy
t, erfcilten, catch cold
ib) Those which, though used also as transitive verbs,
have a special meaning as reflexives, as :
,— -^_ij,.^, rejoicx. KU.), Fimfician(^gen.,oru6er+acc.^,
^ ^"^^^ rejoice (intr.), be glad
17
f4>amcn (gen., or ilber +
acc), be ashamed
[cbncu {\\a6>), long (for),
yearn
luunbcrn (iibcr -f ace), be
astonished
freii
it*,'
€'
SBS.
?'
1: .
t
250
furt()tc«, fear
LESSON XXXVII.
[§§«■)-
l^iitfn, protect
ftcflcn, place
ticrinfini, leave
juttagcn, carry (to)
fid) fiivcMcn (lun- + dat.), be
afraid
„ butcn(lHn- + (Int. ), beware
„ [tcUcn, pretend
„ iH'i-lafjcu (auf + ace),
rely (upon)
„ gutvai-jcn (impers.) hap-
pen, occur
2. Transitive verbs are often used in English with the direct
(personal) object unexpressed, e. g., 'change, turn, open,
spread; etc.: such verbs have the object expressed in German
as the reflexive pronoun, e. g. :
The weather has changed, ^^ae Setter batfit^ geanbert.
The wind is turning to the east, ^Dcv ®inb brebt fil^
nad> Cftcn.
The door opened, Tic Ibiix offnctc ftrf).
The disease was spreading over the whole towrn, Die
.SU-aufbcit iH'rbvcitctc fl(^ iibcr bic (\a\^c Stabt.
3. For the use of ReHexive Verbs for the Passive Voice,
see § 1 1 4, {/>).
4. From what has been said above, it will be evident that
Reflexive Verbs are used to a much greater extent in German
than in English, which indeed has no Reflexive Verbs in the
strict sense defined above.
210. (ioVERNMENT OK REFLEXIVE VeRHS.
I. All /r/zd- reflexives take the reflexive {personal) object
in the accusative ; the remote object (the thing) is in the
genitive, or is governed by a preposition, as shown in the
examples given in § 215, i, above, thus :
217]
IMPKRSONAI. VKRns.
251
^c6 fd;amc tiiirf, mcincg mvac^m, l am ashamed of
my behaviour.
(S-rinncrft bu birfj bcffcn nid>ty 1 )<, you not remember it?
2Bir febntcn un^ tmt^ unfcrcr Dhittcr, We lon-ed for
our mother.
^c^ erbarmtc iiiirf) fcincr, I had pitv upon him.
2. Some spurious reHexives have the' reflexive (/.r.W)
object m the dative, and the thing in the accusative, as •
^5^ tann mix bao bciifcn, I can imagine that.
M) bilbetc mir bic^o nur cin, I only imagined this
as ^:^-obiS'^i:!:;''"" "^^^ '- ^^^^^^ °^ ^^^ ^-- -^^^ ^ '--
3clnd,n.eid,cltc mir, j,o§ ic^ e.^ tf,uu fbimtr, I flattered myself
that I could do it. '
^^'^' Impersonal Verbs.
Impersonal Verbs Proper are those used only in the
third person sing., with the neuter pre .oun eg as subject.
I. Those expressing Natural phenomena, as •
C0 frf^neit, it snows eg blil3t, it lightens
C0 regnet, it rains CS bonncrt, it thunders, etc.
also with the verbs [cin or iuerbcn, as :
0^« ift (iDirb) fort, luarm, bunfcl, etc., It is , grows) cold
warm, dark, etc. '
^^ ift (]d}ldc^t) funf. It is (strikes) five.
2 Those expressing bodily or mental affections
(a) with accusath^e of person.
(Sg friert mif^, I am (feel) cold.
©^ Dei-rangt mid) {\m\6>), I am (feel) desir jus.
m freut midft, I am glad (it rejoices me).
e^? toimbert mirfv I wonder (it makes me wonder).
m
2C2
LESSON XXXVII.
[§§ 217-
It
(B^ jainmert mid) (gen.), I pily (it moves me to pity).
e^ vent mid) (gen.), I repent (it rues me), etc.
(d) with Dative of person.
e^ biinft (bcudit) mir, Methinks.
(g§ gelingt mir, I succeed, etc.
{/) with fein or iuerbcn {^Dative of person), as:
(5g ift (tinvb) mir iibcl, luoM (511 9liutc), T feel ill, well
(it is ill, well to or with me in spirit).
e§ ift mir lieu, (eib, I am glad, sorry (it is dear, sad
io me).
Note. In this class of verhs the subject C8 is omitted when the per-
sonal object precedes the verb, i^s- mid) uniubcit, etc.
3. Verbs used impersonally with a special sense, as :
2Bie ftc^t'g mit l^l^nen? How fares it with you.?
@§ 9C§t il^m gut; He is prospering.
2Ba^ flicbt'g? What is the matter.?
2Ba§ fc^lt %^\\i\\'^ What ails you?
Also fein and toerben, as under i and 2, (/•), above.
4. For the impersonal use of the passive voice, see § 113.
Note. ~ Of the above classes, those alone are strictly impersonal
which admit only of ti as subject ; others, which are used with other sub-
jects, but only in the third person (sometimes plur. as well as sing.) are
properly called unipersonal.
218. Conjugation of Impersonai, Verbs.
1. Impersonal Verbs form their various tenses, moods, etc.,
in precisely the same way as other verbs, but are used only
in the third person singular.
2. Some are weak, others strong, as :
frieven, to freeze, Impf. e^o fror, gefrorctt ; fifnteicn, to
snow, Impf. ce ict)neitc, P. Part, gefdmeit.
a«9] GOVERNMENT OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. 253
3. Most of them are conjugated with f)abm, as :
@^ ^ai gefc^neit, gefrorcn, etc. ;
but some take fein, e. g., geliiujen, gluctcn, to succeed ; gefc^e^en,
to happen (compare § 53), as ;
©^ ift gefdjcijen. It has happened.
219. Cover: . VI ENT of Impersonal Verbs.
1. Impersonal V^ rbs expressing bodily or mental affections,
etc., take the immediate (personal) object (= Engl, subj.) in
the I?afi7'e or Aca^ five (see § 217, 2, 3, above).
2. Those under § 217, 2, {a\ denoting a mental affection
may be used
{a) impersonally, with the thing {cause of emotion)
in the genitive, as :
@l jammert mii^ fciitcr, I pity him (it moves me to
pity of him).
©^ reuet mid| meinet Sunben, I repent (it makes me
repent) of my sins.
ip) personally, with the thing (cause of emotion) as
subject, as:
%x iammertmin^, I pity him (he moves me to pity).
3«einc ©iinben reucn (pi.) mif^, I repent of my sins
(my sins move me to repentance).
Remark. — Observe that the English subject is object
in German, the verb remaining always in the third person,
as:
%i freut mic^, I am glad.
®$ freut bil^. Thou art glad.
%% freut t^n. He is glad.
.1^
11
%% freut vm, We are glad, etc.
<m
254
220.
LESSON XXXVII.
There is, there a: ", etc.
[S 220
1. The English there is, there are {7£'as, iverc, has been,
will be, etc.) must be rendered in ('.erman by C£( gicbt {<s^^,
(mt . . . gegeben, Unrb . . . qebcn, etc), when an indefinite ex-
istence is expressed, or in general assertions, as :
\H (^oB fviikr mcle Scute, iuelcl;c cjtrtu&te"/ etc.. There
were formerly many people who believed, etc.
C«0 luirb biefe^^ ^"sabv Dicle ^-^stlaumcn flcbcn, There will
be a great many plums this year.
Remarks,— i. The English subject is object of giebt in
German, and is in the accusatiie, as :
^^% giebt einctt ^Itoman (ace.) i^ou Ticfeii^, S'^^XA'^tx ,,9ii!ola^
^Jiicflebtj" bci|V, There is a novel fnom.) by Dickens,
called ' Nicholas Nickleby.'
7.. The verb (gebcn) is always in the singular in German,
being a true impersonal ; and cci is never omitted, as :
^iefe§ %<x^x gicbt c^, etc.
2. There is, etc., must be rendered into German by c8 fft,
C6 finb (eC> iuav, etc), when definite existence is expressed, or
m particular assertions, as :
^8 ift ein 9.^Dgel in biefcm ^^auev. There is a bird in
this cage.
a^.^ fiiib jioei ^i^i3gel auf biefcin 33aumc, There are two
birds on this tree.
Remarks. — i. The English subject is also subject {nomt-
fiative) in German, as :
(S§ ift ciu 9lomttn (nom.) bou Tiden? auf bem 2:ifcb,
There is a novel (nom.) by Dickens on the table.
2. The verb ''feiu) agrees in number with the /-tv?/ subject,
and c^ is omitted, unless it begins the sentence, as :
§ 220]
THERE IS, THERE ARE.
255
thirst, bcr ^iirft
lemonade, bic l^imonabc
caterpillar, bic %m).K
slei^rhing, bie 3d^Iittcii6ahu
way, mode, bic ::li;citc
siiccessful(ly), i^lactUcf)
now-a-days, bcut.^iitacic
loii<r (adv.), Icingft
past, uorbci
in all ages, ,m aUcii ;^eitcn
ein ^Bogel ift in biefem «aucv. There is a bird, etc.
Note _ This shows that e.^ is the /«^.:/?«//. c.S replacing the real sub-
ject (see § 39, I ), and »o^ the impersonal Cv\
Vocabulary.
to dress (trans.), an'fleiben lightning, bcr m^
dress (intr.), fic^ anflciben
resolve, decide, ficft entfcbliefuMi
explain, crflaren
he mistaken, j'irf) irrcn
turn around (intr.), fief) um'=
brchcit
get married, marry (intr.), fid;
l>ei'f)ci'raten
marry (trans.), ^ei'vatcn
hurt (wound), berle^en
Idioms: 1. I feel well, mh ift lopiii ,« m»tc.
2. He has married the daughter of the doctor, (*r bat ftdi
nut icv Zodyter ^c« ^ottovi ocrhciintct.
.3. In this way, ?luf ticfe mdie (ace).
4. I was hungry (thirsty), 3d) Ijattc *u„j,n' (tutfi).
EXERCISE XXXVII.
-'^. 1. Q^ bonnert, iinb id; fih-cf^tc, c^^ iuirb haVo regiicn ■> Um
U>ie DielU^r h)irb bet ^hmn ^u TOtag gcoeffcn? 8. e^ ijat
H)at)i-enb bcv md)t Q^fximn unb ^cutc iuerbcn luiv Bd^litmmij
laufcn fonnen. 4. m^Ujalh bomtcrt e^, iuenn e^ bli^t'^ ®a^
lajit fid; md;t Icid;t erflaren. 5. ^d) habt mcincn bcftcn .^unb
Un-Ioren ; fo em .v^unb finbct fid; nid^t IcidU Uncber. (i. (i.% freut
un^ fct)r, ba^ .t^einric^) feiii eEmncn o{iidIid> bcftanbcu hat. 7 M)
furcate, c§ Juirb biefee .^abr nur tDentose xHpfct qebcu ; bic ^Kaupen
l;aben faft aUe inattcr mx bcu ^i^aumcn gcfreffcn. 8. (sjutcn
^^^'-rgcn, i>rv 33raun; giebt'^ bcute i^tm^-, ^};cucv? <t. ^JJein
.)iuucr t
tfti
fid) Dci-[;eiiatct. JO. mt lucni bat er ficb t)cr=
r;ciratct? 11. ^Wit bcv ^todjtcv bcc^ ^l^oftor i)^
11
mi
S*j
**•■
&
cnnnern 3ic
fid)
256
LESSON XXXVII.
L§§ aao-
i'lii
nid>t i(^rcr ? 1 J. <3d>mcid)eln '^ie fifft, ba& e^ i^hneu auf bicj'e
2SJcife gelingcn tt)irbV ^ie l>ab*;n iiid;t (^5elb gcnug. 13. ^d)
l)ab<i Did i;:e^v Welb al'^ id) biaud^e ; id) ttJiirbe mid} mit bci .s^alftc
begniiflt ijabcn. 14. G^ iwuibc mid) gar nidU luunbcrn, tucnn linr
nod^ I;eutc ^Kcgcn bcfiimen. 15. 3(1'^ id; an bcm ,s)aufc Doriibcrs
ging, offnctc fid) bie 2hur, imb cin alter .<^t'vr fain f;erau^.
IH. 'I'id) friert; bu foKtcft bcincu Ubevjicbcr an5icl)cn. 17. Q^i
Juarcn nod) Uielc l\Hitc auf bcr '3tva^o, ah id) nad> .s>aufc !am.
18. C^'c. iuivb bid) balb bcinci^ :©etragen'5 'Cucn, Jycim id; mid) uidu
irrc; bu foUteft bid) fd)amcn. 19. @v giebt bcutgutage *3:l)oren,
imb Icibev ^at <6 ju aiUn ^^citcn!Xl)in-cn gcgcbcn. ;.^o. (Siefonnen
fid) bcnfcn, baf^ cc> mid) tuunbcrtc, ah id) mid) r.mbrcbtc unb
mciiicu Idngft Derlovucu ^reunb Dcv mir fab.
J?. 1. Are you afraid when it lightens .' )L Yes, I am always
afraid of tlie lightnin<;, :\. What is the matter with you ?
You do not look at all well. 4. I do not know what ails me ;
1 do not feel well, perhaps 1 have caught cold. 5. It has been
snowing the whole night, and to-day we Iiave tine sleighing.
H. Have you hurt yourself ? Yes, I have cut my finger.
7. 4'here are two gentlemen at the door ; do you know them ?
8. I know one of them, but I cannot remember his name.
9. I must dress immediately, or else I shall not be ready at
seven o'clock. 10. If you do, not dress more warmly, you will
catch cold. 11.1 am thirsty ; please give me a glass of
lemonade. l:i. I am glad that the thunder-storm is past; the
lightning is dangerous. \',\. Do you remember whether he
was here on the 15th or on the i6th of January ? 14. Have you
decided to leave (the) town, and to pass the summer in the
country? 15. I hear somebody shouting in the street ; what
is the matter?
ORAL EXERCISE XXXVII.
1. Sollte man sich vor dem Donner fiirchten ? 2. Wie
laniie wohnen Sle schon in dieser Strasze? 3. Stehen iSie
aaj]
PREP0..1T10N.S WITH TUK C.ENITIVE.
257
gewohnhch fruh des Morgens auf > 4. Wcshalb hast du die
Fenster zugeinacht ? 5. Wie ge- Ht es Ihnen in diesem
Hause ? (i. Wird es dieses Jahr vi. !e i'flaunien geben ?
LESSON XXXVUI.
PREF OSITIONS.
221. The Prepositions with Uie Dative only have been
given in §§46, 51; those with the Accusative only in
555* 31, 50; those with Dative or Accusative in § 65.
PrePOm ' roNs WITH THE GeNITIVK,
222 The Prepositions governing the Genitive are chieHy
nouns used adverbially. The following lines contain tiie
principal ones, and will aid the memory :
Ihmcii, mittclft fro|t unb ma^rcnb,
iimi, ticrmiific, unncor^tct,
CDrr^aift unb unter^olb,
Snncr^fl 6 unb oufrr^olft,
^icsfcit jcnfcit ^alficn, incgcn,
Stott, aud) liiiigg, jufolflc, tro^
<BU\)cn mit bcm ©rnititi ;
X)od) ift bier nxdjt gu Dergc||en,
3)af bei biefen le^ten brei
Sluci; bei J^ntiti ri*tig fei,
223. The meanings of these prepositions are as follows :
^. ttlCgen, \ ' °" »ccoun( of
Remarks.— I. <5albfen). (mlbcv, always >/^7.v,v the case •
Juegcn may follow or precede
a personal pronoun,
a no' 1. but al
ways follows
^
'.imiiumm
258
LESSON XX.W III.
[^aa3
2. .j^alb is used only in ilcebalb and mcdbalb ; halben after
the prrsonal pronouns or substantives with a determinative
or attributive word; l^albcr after a substantive used alone, as:
'Xc6 Ai'icboU'ei balbfll. For the sake of peace.
''I^cifpicl^ balbcr, For the sake of example.
3. The personal pronouns have a special form endinjj; in -i
before balbcu and UK'ocn, thus :
mcinetbalbcn, for my sake
unfcrhuci'^cn, on our account, etc,
W. au^crl|0lb, (on the) outside a. obcrl}alD, above
of , (1. uutcr^olb, below
•I . tUltri'^alb, (on the ) inside of
Examples :
Unfcv Ojaitcu ift ou^cvljalb (^iuncr^nlb) bcr Stabt,
Our garden is outside (inside) of tlie town.
'Woutrcal lici^t iintcrljalb bc8 0ntario=3ece,
Montreal lies below Lake Ontario.
Remark. — ^suncrbalb in expressions of time may be fol-
lowed by the dative of a substantive without article, as :
OtUncrbalb §U)ei ^ai^cn. Within two days.
9. (bcr)mtttclfi, ) by means
10. Dmniigc, \ of
11. JufolflC, in consequence of
Rlmark.. — (-^ufoU^C governs the genitive when it precedes
its case, but the dative when it follows, as :
C5r tbat bie'o jiifotflc mcincs '^V'febls, or meincm '-IVfcblc
jufoIc\c, He did this in consequence of my order.
12. bte^fcit oi"! this side • 18. jcufcit, on that ('the olhcri
side
7. frttft, by virtue of
8. Iiiut, in accordance with
faaa]
!il
I-REPOSITIONS Will, IIIK GENITIVi;.
259
Rkmakk - :Dice[cit and jcnteit are prepositions (governintr a
r^oun,,; biceicu* and jcnfcit^ ../;../.. (without a case) as
^scft^ n)of)nc birefcit cr jciifcit be. ^yluffe., I liv. on this
he on that (the other) side of the river, - but • '
Sii iuo(;ncu bcibc nabc am ^•(uffc ; icb bie.fcite, or jcn.
Cit«, \Ve both live near the river; [ on this, he on
the other side.
1-4. (Jotr, ailftatt, instead of
REy-ARK.-i)(„ftatt.is sometimes divided, thus:
9(nftatt mcine^S ^i^rubcrc.. Instead of ,ny brother, - or-
«n ineinc. ^^vubcro Stott, < In n.y hrother\s stead ).
15. Ullflcariltct notwithstand- ].;. Jroj^ in spile of
Remarks.- i. Uiu^cadUct may precede or follow its case
of thn^ ''^^ g°^!^7« the ././/.. in the phrase trot^bcm, ' in spite
of that, and with the meaning of ' as well as.' as :
Tiefer .Unabe vcitct tio^ eincm mmnc. This boy rides
as well as a man.
ir. ma^rcnb, during jg. jj^,, ^ ^
Remarks.- r. i^cing. also governs the ././.;., and always
precedes its case, as : ^
Scingvj bc6 llfci-0, or bcm Ufer, Along the shore.
2.^ Gntlan.3 ooverns the genitive when it precedes its case •
but It more commonly follows its case, and governs ,ho ..;..:
iciiivCj as ;
Gr iling ben m)^ cilt(nnj|. He went along the river.
To these may be added :
■-<». Onacfidlts, in presence of ■>■) iim »r-"— ^ ■ 1
.,, . ■ .i , . , "" ""«••• wiui-ii, ior ine sake
-M. mmittcn, in the midst of of
14.^
26o
LESSON XXXVIII. [§§223-
I. Um . . . U)tl(en takes the case between um and
K EM ARKS.
toiUen, as :
Um mctnei 95atcr8 iriffcn, For my father's sake.
2. ^\iQ personal pronouns have the same forms with um . . .
hjlHen as with f;albeu and iuegen, thus :
um feinettuiHen, for his sake
um ^brettuiUcn, for your sake, etc.
23. unfcrit, ) ^^^ f^^^ f^^„^
24. UUtHCtt, )
224. General Remarks on Prepositfons.
1. An Adverb of direction is frequently placed after an
accusative, like a preposition after its case, as :
^cn 'i^erg ^inauf. Up the mountain.
2. {ii) Some prepositions may govern a substantive clause
v^^ith bttj), as :
e^rc ^i^atci- unb ^Otutter, auf bo^ e^ bir \m\}\ gebe.
Honour father and mother, that it may go well with thee.
Notes. — I. Such are auf, aullcr (also used with tocnn), bi\<, o(}nf,
(oii)fttttt, uuncad}tet, maljmib.
2. 331'?, ungead[)tet, Umljrcnb are also used as conjunctions without baf?.
ijy) Um, ot)ue, and (an)ftatt may govern an infinitive
v^ith ju, as :
CSr \(\\\\ flcftcrn, um bidi ju ftefurf)cn.
He came yesterday (in order) to visit you.
^c^ fanu nic baran benfcn, o^nc 511 Itti^cn,
I can never think of that without laughing,
Diefcv ^)Jiann foUtc arbeitcn, nuftatt 511 bdtcin,
This man ought to work, instead of begging.
Remark. — Hut if the subject of the infinitive clause is
different from that of the sentence on which it depends, ba^
must be used, as :
«24]
GENERAL REMARKS ON PREPOSITIONS. 26 1
^d)UmxU md)t Doibeigef;cn, o^ne bof cr mtd) fafi (not
oBne iiuc^ 311 fcf)cu), I could not pass by without his
seeing me.
3. Preposnions may govern adverbs, as : md) ohn up-
ward ; na* mntcn, to the rear; auf immer, forever; t,on fern
from afar; and the compounds with ba(r)- and h)o(r)- (see
§ 38, Rem. 5 ; 8^, 3 ; 96, 7). ^
4. A substantive governed by a preposition may be followed
by an adverb, for nearer definition, as:
9la(i^ eincr ^Cid^tung ^in. In one direction.
95oit aaen Seiten ^cr. From all sides.
©r ritt Winter bem ^einbe !)cr. He rode in pursuit of
the foe.
Urn ha^, Ir^aihi ^cnim. Round (about) the house.
fSm nun on. From henceforth.
aJait ^ugenb oiif. From youth up.
Vocabulary.
to observe, remark, bemerfen (the) little Red (Riding)
elect, erluaf;Ien (+ ju)
permit, allow, erlauben
inq^uire (about), fief) erfunbicjen
(+ md))
go about, around, fjerum'gcfien
ring (a small beli; flingeln
go for a walk, fpajieren gefjen
divide, teilcn
let (of houses, etc.), bermictcn
go away, loeggeb^'n
the opposite, ba^ ©e'genteil
custom, habit, bie ©ctt)obnf)cit
microscope, ba^ liafroffo^'
Hood, ba^ ^}i!Dtfd|)pd)en
umbrella, ber 9tegeuf4)irm
drop, bcr 2:ro|)fen
drunkard, bcr ^Trunfcnbolb
will, testament, bas Xeftamcnt'
stairs, staircase, bie 3:reppe
deceased, ber (bie) ^erftorbene
warning, bie SBamung
living, (eben'big
loose, slack, lo^
in^time, punctually, rec^f*
St'itig
except that, au^er ba|
! I
263
Lr.SSON XXX VI II.
[§824
Idioms: 1. Feu- all I care, WrhiriUirQrn.
'1. ThiN lioiiHd Ik f(»r Nal(«, 1>iiird ^iau0 tfi jtr Herfjufett ;Ht., to bn
NOld).
:t. He MiiN <>l«>rt<>(l mayor, (ft- tuiirtir ]tim ^tirfltrtntifirr nrtuiiiilt (lit-,
to or f«tr a, »'fc., - {iim - \\\ riiicm).
4. I liav«> lu>(Mi Ix'r*' for a week, ^^ill tiiit jcit nif)t XaQCit ^irr.
5. To laugh (at), make sport (of), «it(i luftifl mnrtirtt (jibfr + acc.).
fi. What is tho matter? SUno ift kl.?'?
7. There is a ring (at the iloor, etc.), {^i fliitflrlt.
EXERCISE XXXVIII.
A. 1. ^a^5 .s?au$, luclcbcy ju Dcrfaufcn ift, ftcbt auf;cdialb bcr
3tat>t, nidU lucit l^om 3cc. 2. 'An'nn ce nur inncrbalb bcr 3tabt
ftitnbc, fo unirbe irfi flcvn taiifcnb I baler meEjr bafiir t^eben. 3.
WcfaUt e« .Mmcn bcffcr biov^fcit fccc^ Abfie-j j^u iuobnen, ober jenfcit^?
4. Iro^ bcc^ 3turmce. fain bay Sdnff rednjcititj in 'Jtotu ^J)orf an.
5. liefer 2run!cnbolb bat uin feincr ^-amilie unUen ba-^ Xrinfcn
aufi'\Ci-\cbcn. (>. (rr fiirdUctc, baf^ fcine 3obne bic fdilcd>tc ©eiuohiis
bcit lerncn mod>tcn. 7. Tcr buni-\rii-\c 'iln'^If I'^iui^ mctinnal'^ uin bae
.s>au''? unb fud>tc :-KottdppdH'n. H. 'l>crmittclft fcince flro^cn Ci'infhiffce
bci ben ^KciduMi {}<\\ \\6> .v)crr %. :iUin ^Mri^crmciftcr eruniblen laffcn.
9. (Scit luann iDobnen 3ic in bicfcr Straf^c? 2cit brci ^abrcn.
](). Urn mcinetipitlcn luiU er ni*t mit mir j^ebcn ; uicUcid^t imirbc
er urn ^^sbrctunKcn i^obcn. 1 1. ;^[t O^con^ obcn? ,^a, cr ift focbcn
bie 2:revVH' binaufiv^Vi"i"it-'n- l"-- l^^ffcn Sic un^3 licbcr nacl^ pbcn
tjcbcn ; ce iinrb um^ bcffcr i^cf alien cbcn ju fit^en al^5 untcn. 13. G^
bat lun- ciniijcn. lliinutcn cjcHini^clt; ivcr tpar ba? 14. (1^$ njar
jcinanb, bcr fid^ crfunbic|cn lyoKtc, ob bicfce .s^amo ;u Dermicten
fci. 15. Tern 2'cftamcntc jufoU^c imirbe ba§ (iii^'utum unter bic
bcibcn 3bbnc bee ^U'rftorbencn i-\cteilt. IH. Hceinettuegen tnag
er gebcn, fobalb e^5 ibm gcfdllt. 17. %\\\\<x baf^ Wcorg ein li^enic;
grojjcr ift, bcmertt man cjar fcinen Unterfdneb ^^linfdien ben beiben
^^riibern. 18. .*p err 2). ift cincr mcincr bcften (Vreunbe; er gebt
faft nie am .'oaufc uoriiber iihnt l^ercinjufpmmen 19. Umoeit ber
Stabt '-B. ftebt ba^S ^c(\\^, Uun-in id) gcboren bin.
£),3e;;;^aati*HMii
^224]
I'Ri:i'()S||io\T8.
2^,5
nion, ,he shore V in po7 ,?;:'; 'T™ T"'^'^ ""^
r " , , ' ^•^' '•! •^pilc ot the bad road. '{. Not fir
OU, In, I hall ,„q„„.e. ,;, vVce yo„ nll.v.vcl pcf. .„ s,.v >
^X :^TT "T """"'■>• '"^'" '-''>■ '«•■''" -■•-"-
altly. ,. W e have l,ee„ here since yesterday. a„cl we „u,stwait
ree cays ,no,e for .he ship. «. ,>„,. ,J„ ,„„ ,,^. ,. \
nol th,nk ,„uch of , his Ke„tle,na„ : he u„„ld ,lo a„y,hi„.. f,"
see,, ,n .idrop of water, n. in^consecp.ence of this had
.-of „ her people? I:,. No, that is a bad habit
1. Vonder ,s the ,iver. on this side stands „,v honse „„
ha, .s,de h,s. 1 5. Notwithstanding the warning of his fa her
the youth ,^,en went on the water in bad weather. 1 ) "
stead of t.k,„g the large boat he always ,00k the s.nall one.
ORAL EXERCISE XXXVIII.
K Weshalb hat der Trunkenbold das Trinken at.fgegeben >
'■ '^ ' "f '<= ^^''^'»« l"t -^ich Herr li. „„„ BUrgenneister
rwablen lassen ? :, Haben Sie .lingeln horen ^ u::'::
Tl- .. °/""^ •'^"= S'^''"'-^"- ""'• i" vvelehen, Jah,e'
2 J'urchcen S,e, es konnte regnen > ,;. Kannst du ,„ir sagen
was aiif der Straszt los war i * '
264
LESSON' XXXIX.
[§§ 225-
LESSON XXXIX.
PREPOSITIONS (continued):- IDIOMS.
225. Prepositions vary more, perhaps, as to idiomatic usage
m different languages than any other part of speech. Their
yiroper use must be acquired chiefly by practice and memory,
out below ar given the German equivalents, in various
idioms, of the most commonly occurring English Prepositions,
■nore particularly in cases where the usage of the two lan-
guages differs.
220. About.
(a) In the sense of ' around ' = um, as :
©ie ncrfamineltcn \\d) urn ibn. They assembled about
him.
(/?) Of time = UUgefii^r urn (um alone = ' at ' ; see § 227,
(If) I, below), as :
Unjicfii^r um ^'bn Ubr, About ten o'clock.
Uugcfii^r um 'Il^nbnacfitcn, About Christmas.
, (c) In the sense of ' nearly ' (of number) ■-= cllUO, UUgCs
fii^t (adverbs), as :
(5r l)at ctmo (uttflcfii^r) taufcnb )thaUx iibrig. He has
about a thousand dollars left.
(,/) In the sense of ' with,' ' about' (the />i'rso/i) = hti, as:
'^(b babe tcin (^c\^ hti mir, I have no money with
me, about me.
227. At.
(a) Of locality :
I. = iu, when the action, etc., is within a building, etc.,
as :
^u ber Scbiile, \\\ ber ii^ircbe, im ^beater, Im ^lon^ert.
At school, at church, at the theatre, at the concert.
^2B]
PREPOSITIONS.
26s
t>|]»
2. = an, when the nclion, etc., is ad^^a to the object
ot the preposition, as :
81m rt-ei>ft«v „„ Kt Zlm. nm Jifc(,e, At the window, at
the door, at r/„ table (but be Iifrt,c, at table).
3- - out wlien the action is on tl,e surface, or on an
elevation^ as :
Um.cr[ttd:. nuf bcm ScMoffc, At market at the Lll
at tne post-office, at the university, at the ensile. '
4^ - IXX or m with proper .ames of towns (also with
^aii6, 'home'), etc, as:
,^U (ill) ^^ari^^. At Paris.
^U ioaufe. At home.
C^) Of iime:
I- = urn (most usually), as:
llm f)aI6 uicr llfn-, At half past 3 o'clock
Uitt Dftcrn, At Easter.
2. = 311, with 3cit and Stuiibe, as :
,^uv rccf)tcn 3cit, At the right time.
^W biefei- eiiinbc, At this hour.
Note. -U,„ with the ace. is also admissible witia these words.
3- == ki, as :
83ci ^ageSan&ruc^, At day-break:
(c) Of price = 511, as :
^icfcv 3urfo. n^irb 311 siuei ^fmrern bae, ^fi.nb t^evfauft
This sug.r H .old at two dollars a pound.
— '*• By.
(«) Expressing the /.r..«.^/^.,„/ after the passive voice ^-
It. as '.
", ~ n-.K^j5}, .,jj-(^,j^ tltern 0eiui)t, The
loved by its parents.
18
child
IS
266
I.F.SSON XXXTX.
[$^ 226-
(p) Of a part of the body, etc. = bci, as :
(Sr nat;m "i^ci^ ^inb bci ber ipanb, He took the child by
the hand.
(c) Unclassified :
©Ci iiid^t. By candle-light.
5Bci ^)iad^t. By night.
aWit WcUHilt, By force,
Mi ber Gifenbai?n, By the railway.
3u 2anb, ,511 ^Kaffer, By land, by water.
229. For.
Rendered usually by \\IX, but :
(a) Of purpose = ^U {n^ver fur), as :
T)ic^i ift fduMUH^ 'isiottcr \\x\\\ S^ajicreniieben, This is fine
weather for taking a walk.
©r reift ^um i^crc^niu^cn, He travels for pleasure.
(/; ) Of time :
1. Past = jcit, as:
.Beit cinem ')3ionatc. For a month (past).
2. Future = nuf -j- ace, as :
"sd> ircrbc nuf ciniv-^c 'Tat^c i^erreifen, I shall go away for
a few days.
3. Duration = ace. without preposition, as :
(rr UHir eincn iV^n-iCU 9}^onat bier. He was here for a
whole month.
(r) Of cause = nu^, as :
(in- tbat cv OU^ ^urd^t. He did it for fear.
id) Unclassified :
^Ifiit'g (2r[te, For the presept.
gum crftcn (jtDciten, etc.) 9J?al, For the first (second,
etc.) time.
230
PROPOSITIONS.
2Ci';
3«»t ©ebuit^taoc 511 Seifmad^tcn, For (as) a birth-
day-present, for a Christmas-present.
280. i„.
Rendered usually by in, but :
(«) = OUf, as :
In the street, *i(uf bcr StrafK'.
In the country, ^i(uf bcni 2anbc.
In this manner, %\x\ bicfe ^ii^eife lacc).
In German, %\x\ Tcutfc^. •
(^) = untcr, as :
Ulltcr Glifabetb^ ^icgieruno, In Elizabeth's reign.
( '•) = gU, as :
^M ^ilHii-jcn, In a carriage.
231. Of.
(a) By the genitive without preposition, to express the
relat;on of the possessive case, as :
:Dcr %^\{h m\\m ^'MUxi, The will of our father (i. e
our father's will). '
H') = Hoii :
1. After 7'crhs^ etc., as :
"s* f).nccl)c tjoil ihm, 1 .speak of him.
2. Between ///A'j- and names of phncs^ as :
Tic .'i^bnioin tioii (iiinlanb, 11ie Queen of England.
3. After numerals and other partitives, as :
Giner Hon meiiicn ^rcunbcn. One of mv friends.
2)ev adcftc tion mcincu ^Hnibcni, The eldest of my
brothers.
4. Replacing a genitive plural without article, as ;
(St iff bcr 33ater Hon Dicr itnabcn. He is the father nf
four bovs.
Vi^-
tft
268
LESSON XXXlX.
a3X
5 the Alma.
5. To avoid a succr^srion of several genitives, as :
^ie ^-rau worn ^Setter mdne^ lOnUU, The wife of my
uncle's cousin.
(c) Of cause, when the caure is a disease == on, as :
Gr ftarb on ber Gbolera, He died of the cholera.
(a) Oi place, with names of battles:
1. = (jci, if named after a town, village, etc., as :
^ic 6cMadit bci SeiV^in, The battle of Leipzig.
2. == on, if named after a rii^er, as :
ODic (3d4acf)t on ber Stlma, The battle
(e) Unclassified :
^JJJangel on ©clb. Want of money.
Sicbc jnm ©elbc. Love of money.
2Baa foil oug miv h?erbeu ? What is to become of me ?
232. On.
Rendered usually by ouf, but :
{a) Of fi?ne or date = Ace. without preposition, or = on
4- Dat., as :
2:cn (or om) jtuiJtftcn ^aniiar, On the twelfth of January.
{b) Of modes of progression = ]n, as :
^^tt "ipfcrbc. On horseback.
3u Me, On foot.
(c) Of situation, on a river, sea, etc. :
1 . When it means on the untter = ouf, as :
iUcle ecf)iffe fa()rcn nuf bcm §ubfon. Many ships ply on
the Hudson; — but:
2. When it means on the s/iore = on, as :
Hamilton liegt om OutariosSec, Hamilton lies on Lake
Ontario.
^-33]
PREPOSITIONS.
269
{d) Unclassified:
"^^^ Jleife, On purpose.
®ci biefer Gele^en^ett, On this occasion.
Untcr (or mit) bicfcv 33cbinouno, On this condition.
^m ^egriffe, On the point of.
233. rp^
JSJ^^T^' ''- ''''''-' ^^^-^ = ^--e without
Sc^ ^abc melner ecfnt)eftcr cin Su* nencbcn, I have given
a book to my sister (i. e., my sister a book).
C^) Of motion or direction to persons = 31,, as :
^^ m in nicineni ^l^ater oc^eit, I will go 'to my father.
U) Of motion to places :
I. With proper names of countries, towns, etc. = „„,^ as •
1 aris, to Germany.
«.th the .A<;„sar,rr, in various icii„,„s, „.|,ere ,i,es'e
prepositions witli the Dative = 'af (see §227
(a), above), as: ''
3n hie ^c(,„te, fiirdf,., i„« sweater, fionsert «. f. lo. q^fien
To go to school, church, the theatre, concert, etc
an» (^cnftn-, an bit I^iir gt.l;en.
To go to the window, door.
Wuf Oci. ^m,tt, SSaU, a„f bic m, UniuerfitSt ^ebcn
To go to n,arket, to the ..all, post-office, university:
(ii) Frequently = ju, which may usually replace the
prepositions in the above idioms also as ■
er ift aur etflbt, ^ur .Sirctje u. f. .„. gcflangen.
He has gone to town, church, etc.
I
if, '
270
LESSON XXXIX.
[§234
234. ' With.
Observe the following Idioms:
ICon ijanjcm .s^a^cn, With all my heart.
Gr jittcrt Hur Mciltc, He trembles with cold {cause).
!3^a^ ift 6ci uiuj nirfit 3itt»./rhai is not the custom with
(= amoNg) us.
,^tt bicfcr IHbfidU, With this intention.
Remark. For the proper use of prepositions after partic-
ular adjectives and verbs, see Less. XLIX.
VOCAI'.ULARV.
account, bill, bie ^){ccfmiinii
to intend, c\cbcnfcn
be^enough, suffice, binvciclHMi
bring with (one\ mit'bviu(^cn
sign, uutcr^cicfi'ncn
bring back, ,^iiritcfbviniicn
excursion, pleasure-trip, bcr
harvesting, ba^o Grutcn
favour, bcr Wcfaflcn
Louis, Lewis, ViibUng
measles, bic ?]cafcrn (f. pi.)
dressing-gown, ber 3cblafrocf *
evil, biv5 ilbcl
relative, bcr ^iscvumubtc
treaty, bcr '^iU'rtrai}*
root, bic :^i>urscl
this evening, bcutc 5(benb
thorough(-ly), griinbUrf)
fortunately, i-^liicflidH'rlucife
possible, iiiLSilirf)
absent (on a journey), Dcrreift
Idioms: 1. To be aofustinned, 2ie Wctuohiilifit lloDrit (4-iiifin. with ^u).
2. Ill the ini(i<llc of suiiiiiier, WiUtn im 3ommrr.
3. To take a pltasuie-trii) (excursion), (?inru 9lui*flim mniftcn.
4. It looks like rain, (*i? fitlit norf) Wcflcu ana.
6, Two or three. ,'{luci biiJ Drci.
6. He isprang out of the window, (vr fprniin nim ^til^itt Ijinnu^
(point of ingress or exit denoted by }U -f dnt.).
Note : It is customary, in referring to the relatives of the person addressed, to prefix
.'ocrr, T^xan or Ai'iiiitein, as the case may be. but this is not done ii; speaking of one's own
relatives, thus:
^ilUc c\el)t O'S ,^lircm innn inmn ? — lUit : Wciit i^iuer ift (\m^ u'ohl.
? a.34^
PRKI'OSITIONS.
271
EXERCISE XXXIX.
. n^. laiuu blc.bt ;^bv .^cn' t^ator nod, forty L^r Lnmt aft
"^nnov^n 4 ^aufo. 4. ^i^a. ,cbcnt[t bu bcute ^(benb 1!
tbiu ? ;^dMuc,n^o mdU; fiiV. (i-rftc mnn id, mc.nc iHuf.^UuM,
niacbcn. .•>. J, baft bu ben biibfdH'., 3d,lafrod bcfonnncny ^,d!
^abc ibn 3unt (sKburt.ta.,0 bcfonuuon, unb ^icbe ibn bcutc sun. crj^'n
bev bai ^errn [prod^en iK, abcr cr ift bci 2^ unb Lnt fidi
nia> ftorcu. .. ^u |,ijcft am ^.-nftcr , ficb bod, cinnial Jun
,>n)tcr bmaue, unb bu u>irft ibn uicU dU fcbcu tonncn s ^ -in
rocld^cr 8cit Icbtc ^olierc V Cr. Icbtc untcv bcr .Hc,icrun, v,,,^
XIV. ^oP ,vrantro.d>. 9. ,^ft c. mo^ilid,, ^.u borfclbcn ;V>it .on
erne r ^ad,e 3U fpredHMi unb an cine anbcrcau bcnfcn^ lo ^^ic
Stcb. sum (sjclbc ift bic ^^ur^er aUe. llOcl.. 1 1 . Unfcr y>m,.
f^ebt arn^J. Voren^M-Iun, unb Don bon ^cnftcrn ficbt niaii bic
I)umpndnrrc Uorbci^Kbci. 1>. ^s^Hift bu ,nir bcinc Wranunatif
I^'fHM,.^ ,,a loohl, u.it bcr ^)3cbin.iuuo, baf; bu bicfclbc 001
inin-iKii surudbrincift. i;;. ^sft .s^crr ^^^. ^n .s^aufc -y ^Vci„ ,, .ft
m m .^ocbcn .crraft. 14. .^i ^a.c.anbvud, "fin.at b'c
^^o^cf ant Kbo.Mtcn. l.>. ,){l(o ;s-cnftcr unb Ihlircn mcrbcn be.
JJacbt^^auo ,vurd,t i>or ^icbcn bci une siuicfd^foffcn. 16. 2^\'§balb
imb bic Mmbcr nid)t ^ur 3d)ulc mwwn? 17. ^c^ finb nicbvere
^inbcv m bcr Sdnilc, bic an ben ^Jiafcrn ^dittcn babcn, unb bic
^Wutter fitrtttct fid, Dor bicfor .SUantbcit. 18. ^)icifcn 3 . licbcr
m Sanb obcr ^u Gaffer V ^m 3onuncr ^icbc i* ce Dor ]n ^v«affcr
ju rcifen. H». Diciu ^^ater battc bic C^JclDobnbcit, un/.Stinbcr uut
ficb su Dcrfaniuicln unb un^3 (N^cfd,id,tcn ju cr^ablcn. -^o. Witkn
im Sonuncr, unb banu toicbcr um Ul>eibnad,tcn, ;>1,c id, auf^$
^anh, um mcinc i^crioanbtcn ju bcfud,cn. •>!. ^LUnijcn 3ommcr
Kicb id, mcbr al. Dicvjcbn ^vxnc bci bcnfclbcn.
I
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
V
/,
{/
V C^,
y^:^
t-r 4
r ^
%"m^
/
&
^
=^
1.0
LI
1.25
1^
M 112,5
2.2
IIIM
III 1.8
i4_ mil 1.6
Ptiotographic
Sciences
Corporation
1
Ci^
\
iV
:\
\
^f-.
^<b
v
Cv
6^
•0''-''.A ^■«'-
<^
23 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, N.Y. M580
(716) S72-4S03
■i
273
LESSON XXXIX.
[§§234-
I
B. 1. Good morning ; you have come just at the right time ;
I was on the point of going to your house (say : going to
you). 2. There is a ring at the door ; go to the door and see
who is there. 3. When you go to the market, do not forget
to go to the post also. 4. Do you intend to take a pleasure-
trip this summer ? Yes, I intend to leave the town for three
or four weeks. 5. Last summer we stayed away only a week.
6. Does it not look like rain t 7. Yes, I am afraid it might
rain, but fortunately I have brought my umbrella with [me].
8. Have you any money about you ? I should like to pay
this bill, and have left my purse at home. 9. I have about
seven dollars and a half with me ; would that be enough (suf-
fice) ? 10. Would you do me the favour to lend^'me the half
of it (babon) for two or three days? 11. What magnificent
weather for harvesting; it has not rained for two weeks
[past]. 12. Is the servant going to (the) market?- No, she
was at (the) market (already) two hours ago, 1*3. The battle
of Waterloo took place on the i8th of June in the year 1815.
14. Some months afterwards the treaty of Paris was signed.
15. When (at what time) and in what war did the battle of
the Alma take place ? 16. It took place in the year 1855,
during the war between England and Russia.
ORAL EXEKCISE XXXIX.
1. Wann gedenken Sie die Stadt zu verlassen ? 2. Wo
steht das Haus Ihres Herrn Valers ? 3. Auf welche Weise
gedenken Sie diesen Sommer zuzubringen ? 4. Wollen Sie
einmal' zu mir kommen und den Nachmittag bei mir
zubringen? 5. Es hat geklmgelt; wer ist da? 6. Was fur
Wetter bekommen wir heute Abend ?
•»6]
CONJUNCTIONS.
^71
LESSON XL.
CONJUNCTIONS.
235. Conjunctions are either •
A. COORFMNATING CONJUNCTIONS.
236. I. Conjunctions Prooer — 'I h« n- a-
Conjuncions ,,.,.. .ere,, ^^.^senten rw^^t'^rf
mg their structure. They are • wirnrut attect-
UllD, and i^genera! connective) ^(jp|J, '
Obcr. or (^-^//^r^/ disjunctive) „.,rf, ' ) but (Wz;<?r.f«//e,,A
^m\,iox (^causative) ,' I
^ [on rem, j
.nd^imL''''" '• ®'""'"'" '' "''" "/'""'gtUve sentences o^\y
me„t^co,na,„ed .„ the preceding sen.ence, in w^ole or it
3* bin nii^t IxmX, jimbtril nan; gefunb
I am not ill but (on the contrary) q'nite well
But if there is no inconsistency or contradiction between
the two statements, aicr is used, as : ■
et ^at a nidit gctfwn, abcr cr loivb c« tbun
He has not yet done it, but he will do it '
coif !Lf rrvLr "r '^ 'r" ""= ^^-^^^ ^-^ °f-
tier ine verb. When all(r does not beein the spn
tence, ,t has rather the sense of 'however,' as :
274
LESSON XL
[§§ 236
T)a« bbfe 2Beib o6er ging toor ben Spiegel,
The wicked woman, however, went to the mirror.
Note. — When there is any other conjunction present, a'oer seldom
begins the sentence.
237. II. Adverbial Conjunctions. - Many adverbs and
adverbial phrases have the function of conjunctions, when
thev are used to express the relation between sentences,
rather than to modify any particular member of the sentence
in which they occur.
The principal coordinating adverbial conjunctions are :
and), also, too ]
ttU^crbcm, besides [ connective (related to uitb)
bttlllt, then
jOflOr, even
u
bcnnod),
bo(^, ^ still
iJCUn, unless
bcfjcnunBead)tct,
tti^t^bcftowjcnigcr, \
inbcffcn, however
fOttft, else, otherwise
ttJ'^^i, indeed
^ttjflt, it is true, to be sure
. advefsati'T
V nevertheless | (related »o
ttbcr)
therefore
bttjcr,
btttum,
bcsljalb,
bcdmcj^cn,
fo(glill), [- accordingly
causatirc ( related to bcittt)
*37]
CONJUNCTIONS.
275
fa, SO
alfd, so, thus
eficnfo, just as
it r'^
Infofcrn,
' compa*-ative
tnfofcrii, ) .
infoiueit I '"^^'^"^^ as, as far ^s -^ restrictive
Mntcrbcffcn, ) -,
Inbcffcit, ; "meanwhile I
borouf, afterwards
feltbcm, since then
time
Remarks.- I. Unlike the conjunctions proper ".eseadver
b.al conjunctions, if they ..W.. a se^UeLe^ hrov the
subject after the verb; but they n.ay also foll.v the ve^
^'yjTt' ^^^i"»»"9C0t^tct tuirb er fommcn (or- cr
h)irb bcffnmn.qcnr^kt fommen), He is ill; neverthe-
less he will come.
@^3 regnete, biirum (ba^cr, be^^lucgcn) fonnte irf, Tor: irf,
fonnte boru.11, etc.) nic^t au^gcben. ^
2. 9(U.^ and faflnr, when they refer speciallv to the subject
or any other member of the clause precedi;g the verb do
not throw the subject after the verb, as : '
^M^ fein i^ater mor gugegen. His father, too, was
present. . '
eoflor [einen ^einben i^ai er i)ergeben, He has pardoned
even his enemies.
3. The verb often comes first in a sentence with bor6 to
express a strong affirmation, as :
C^nlic ic^> cv b0(^ gc)ac3t, Did I not sav sc. >
276
LESSON XL.
[§§a3»'
238. III. Correlative Coniunctions. These are :
entttjcbcr . . . ober, either ... or | ^.^j^^^^^i^,^
tticbcr . . . nO(^, neither ... nor )
Itil^t nur . . . fonbcru m^, V not only . . . ) connective
fomo^l ... 0(8 m^. S but also S
llij^t jonJO^l . . . aU, not so much ... as
Balb . . . Bfllb, now . . . now (again), at one time . . .
at another
tcilS . . . ieilg, partly . . . partly
eincrfcitS . . ^- onbcrjcitg, on the one hand ... on the
other.
Remark. — The last three are adverbial conjunctions, and
either follow the verb, or throw the subject after it, unless
they modify a particular member of the sentence (compare
§ 237, Remarks i, 2, above).
239. S. Subordinating Conjunctions.
1. Sentences introduced by subordinating conjunctioiis
are'always^C^^/^^/^/^A and therefore havt the verb last (see
§ 32).
2. Some of these also are adverbial, but, as this distinction,
does not affect the construction, they are not separately
arranged.
3. The principal subordinating conjunctions are as follows
{a) Introducing substantive clause :
bttj, that
oB, if, whether
{b) Introducing adverbial clause :
al«, ^ ) Bl8 (bo^), until \
btt, [ when [• time C^C (bafe), | before \ *''^'
toennj ) betior, ) J
[§§438-
ire :
nnectivf
ime . . .
. on the
ons, and
t, unless
compare
junctioiis
last (see
istinctio'i
eparately
s follows
time
«39j
CONJUNCTIONS.
while, whilst
wntcrbcffen,
toflfjrciib (bo§),
fcit(bcm), since
fo6u(b'^ as soon as
fo fangc, as long as
(fo)ioie, as soon as
toic, how — manner
benil, than
tile, I ^^^"' ^s
inmiefcril', inasmuch as
\t nar^bcnr, according as
bo, since
bo§, that
toci(, because
ba§, that
fluf ba§, ) .
urn bo§, J '" ^'^^^ that
bamit', in order that
tticmi, if
or§ ttjcim, j
toofcrn, J
ofiglelr^, hjcnn gleli^,
obfdjiin, mcim fj^on,
06 m^, tucim ou(^,
obiuo^r,
unnear^tet (bo§),
WCnn . . . vx^i, if not, Unless
V7
as if
in case
*■ time
degree
cause
purpose
condition
although I
° > concessive
278
LESSON XL.
[§§ 235
!
■
I
Remarks. — I. aScun and oh take the subju7ictivc when
the verb of the principal clause is in the impf., plupf., or
conditional, as :
%^ miirbc tommen, tuenn icb \m^\ ^enug Wore, I should
come, if 1 were well enough.
:^c^ tt!iifjtc iiivM, ob cv i^ctommcu ludrc (fci), I did not
know, whether he had come.
2. SBcim may be omitted in conditional sentences ; the
verb then /^f'A'-''>/-^ the clause, as in the question order icompare
§ 59 j. This construction is nuich more common than in
English, and is generally used when the dependent clause,
containing the coUiUtion, precedes the principal clause, con-
taining the consequence, as :
.^iitte ii^ (^5c(b, jo anivte icf) ^-rciinbe l;aben, If I had
(had I) money, 1 should have friends.
Note. The particle fo should not be omitted in the latter clause
when the former is without UHMUl.
3. In the compound conjunctions oDgid(^, o6frf)On, otJttJO^f,
etc., the two parts may be separated, and the latter part
placed after the subject, as :
Oftfllcifl) (otlfj^OW/ etc.) cr trant wwx, etc. ; or :
OB cr 9(ci(^ !ranf Univ, Although he was il'.
Note. — With menu the partic'.es i^lcid), etc , always follow the subject.
4. The ob or njemi may also be omitted in these conjunc-
tions and in nl8 oB, o(g mm C as if ') ; the verb then degms
the sentence, or immediately follows aU, as :
^ft er glcit^ ixanl Although he is ill.
@§ frficint mir, ol^ ob {}vmn) i* Sic ivgcnbluo gefef)Crt
ffaiit ; or : a(§ f)atte id), etc., It seems to me, as if
I had seen you somewhere.
mTERjECTlONS.
ho] „^^_._
^^' Interjections.
^ers or:^n:r -- 2:^ 77 t'-- —
either: ' °' *°"n<ls expressing
W Independent outbursts of natural feeling .s • „ .S
(<^) Intimations of will as- hft f* /. ux
("'4 h-rah ; Brat,, bravo • fcb '' aT ,' f'/'"' ^'"'^''^
(-verbs); «„.„„, ,,,,„,,-,:2:'^;;;^^^;or,..^^^^
Illumes, splash. ^^^' ^"^' ^"^' "'^°'' ^0"3. fall;
4- (a) The Interjections n nift ui„i
lowed by a genitive as ■^' ^^ ' "" '"'"^""'^^ '"'■
^^dilgfacef'^'"®'*'"'*"' O'-UahlfieOwhat
or by u6et + accusative, as :
JPM! Ubn bid; geiacn ! Fie on thee for a coward -
W The substantives used interjectionally ,, „„.,'
4T/j\-";:reT"'°-^'^--^--" '
^eirbrmtomflci Hail to the king i
Vocabulary.
to call for, ahholen
■- • prv-pare, t)orueteiten
n\
f r
m
II
280
LESSOi^ XL.
I§a4d
lay up, lay by, juriicfUvisn
old age, ba^ Sllter
joy, delight, bic ^reube
Lord, bcr .V)crr
price, bcr X^xm
tortoise, bie Scfjilbfrijtc
guilt, debt, bie ©duilD
to be to blame (for;, fd;ulb
(adj.) fein (an + dat.)
cheap, billig
certainly, in any case, jebcn*
in vain, Dcrgcben^
even if, although, hjenn ami)
IiUhuim : 1. I am Htutlylng (preparing) for an examination, ^i^ brrtitr inii^
nuf till If I'.i .icii (ace ) ujr.
2. Do you ronsider tiiat good! ^aitrn «it baS fiir pt?
8. To nialie calls, *f t|itd)r tniii()rn.
4. In the world, 9luf tin SBtlt.
EXERCISE XL.
A. 1. 2Bir [ottten alk ^)JJen[cf)en lieben, U)enn fie m^ uuc^
Ijaffen. 2. 6ie berfpvad;en, mid; a63u(;olen; allein id> UHirtcte
bergeben^, benn ©ie iamen uid)t. 3. 3Bcnn id; aw ^Ijxcm ^aufe
t)oruberget}e, fo gel;e id? gelubbnlic^ f;inein. 4. 21 Iw id; aber geftern
5lbenb boriiberging, fa(; id) fein 2id;t unb baher bin id) nic^t
f^incingegangen. 5. ^e mel;r \mx lernen, befto mef^r finb iuir im
©tanbe gu lernen. 6. Xie ©d;ulev befommen morgen ^evien,
barv'.tn f^jringen unb fingen fie bor ?yreube. 7. 2Bie fefir id) mid; auc^
bemiil;c, e§ gelingt mir leiber bocb md;t, affe 3a^c biefer 3(ufgabe
rid)tig ju fd)reiben. 8. ®u tabelft micf), aU ob id) fc^ulb baran
h?are. 9. ©in borficf)tiger 5Jtann legt in feiner ^ugptb ©elb
juviid, auf bafj cr in fcinem Sllter m(i)t Mangel Icibe. 10. Sfujjer
^ucnn icf) fran! obev fe(;r befd)aftigt bin, gebe tcf) jeben 2:ag fpajic^
rcn. 11. eriftnid)t nur reid;, fonbern nuc^ freigebig, unb bee*
balb f)at ev fo biele ^reunbe geluonnen. 12. fatten w'xx geixm^t,
bafe ©ie {)eute ^efud; f)aben, fo irdren n)ir erft morgen gefommen.
13. SBoIIen ©ie fic^ erfunbigen, ob %xan ©. noc^ in bemfelben
§aufe tr>Df)nt'? 14. ©^ giebt nod; biele Seute auf ber ^Selt, bie
h)eber lefen noc^ fc^reiben fonnen. 15. ©ie fatten mir ^elfen
fbnnen, h)cnn ©ie e« aenjuEt batten, aHein ©ie toollten e§ nid»t.
rr
Lt.)
;, jcben*
m aud^
brrrite iniit
^a4oJ
INTERJECTIONS.
281
UHirtcte
:m ^aufe
;r geftern
icf) nic^t
b iuir im
I ^erien,
mid; and)
3(ufga0e
lib barau
>nb ©elb
0. 2(uj3er
[g fpajics
unb be^s
i: geixm^t,
efommen.
Demfelben
JBelt, bie
lir ^elfen
e§ nirf)t.
[".". n- .etc. fl,u loicn no^'i'Vu^^'Ifl^.^ M't
men. 19. .cat.; r* '.M> rl^ I" '"'* «""i' ''"8'f'>-=
-ff. 1. We .sh.ill come, even if it nin, n <•
the town, I must m.ke some c Is 'i%, „ °'' ' ''^^'^^
him, or shall we w.-i, ,11 he comes b., ok >;";::r7 """°"'
away, a ,hief came and stole the n,„„ev' t "''"'' "'^"■"«
lale when you are sturtvin.' n ZU' ? ^"" '" "^
When I . ,,.., .. m;,as;';.!:inT.;::i'-jnn-
"P l.Ue. ,. ]Jo you consider this cloih de^r J -ru
no. high ,0 be sure, but it wil, n wet , ,1 / k'" "
cloth, which is dear, but I believe th-,t it ll /' "^ "
not, on the contrarv, consider it le " i ' t , ^°°''- • "^ ' ''°
good cloth. 10. since I havl I een M i'''' ""'' '' '^
to read much nor to urite „, d n U " ""'' ""*^^
colder to-day than yesterda • P. ' i a ""'he'" '"' '"'" ' '^
whether I travel by ,he steamer or n Vh '"'"' '°-""''
I had thought ouha,, I r . ; Lei:: 7- ''■ t"j
14. The hare slept, and in^the me^ ,1,^ h toTt " '°"-
nved. 15. If the hare had .Tot sfept he would h "'
first. ^ ' ould have arrived
ORAL EXERCISE XL.
1. Die Fenster sind alle auf, wer ist daran schuld > 9 T
ate™ .^t ^Lt: I r- -en - .nic^^r
vo,t hier der ^^Z^'^n^T Zr:::ZsT"''
bestanden? 6. Halten Sie diesen Hut fi" teuer?
19
supri-r.>n.Nr\KV r.F.ssov F.
(§«4t
SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON F.
ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON CERTAIN CONJUNCTIONS.
241. 1. *MUcin follows and lim'.ls, or corrects, aprmativc statements,
;is fouboni uocs lURative, thus:
Gr 1ft n-irfi, nllrilt I'V ift niri)t flliirfliil), He is rich, but he is not
hai)py.
1. XcflO f>i" Uni fo (hut not JC) may be used with a single coniparn-
live, as :
Gilcii eio, ^amit 2 to t)cfio mm io) jviil)iv aiifomnien, Make hastr,
so that you may arrive all the sooner.
3- Taft is the most gineral in meaning of all the conjunctions. It may
be oi"ilted when it introduces a sithstanlirc clause, as in indirect state-
ments. The sentence then has the construction of a principal clause
(verb second; see §S7, 3). Hut \^<\\\ cannot be omitted when it expresses
purpose or consequ<the.
4. 'i'he l-'.ngl. if must be rendered by oi 'not Un'nu) when it ^
whether, as :
1 asked him // he could come, 3iil t'vafltf il)li, d6 ov f-'UlliCll tiJimc.
5. For the distinction between a(t\ UUMlll (as conjunctions of time) and
U'anii, see § 5S.
6. 'Than' should be rendered by ^\<i after an adjective in the com-
parative degree, not by »Uir.
-. XCJm - ' than ' is obsolete, except when used to prevent ihe re-
l)etition of al{<, as :
(5v in iifotVv al« Tirfitrr, Hcnn att^ aiirnicl), He is greater as a poet.
than as a man.
S. In comparisons of equality, as ... as = (CUfn)|o . . ttlie, or al«, toic
being more common, as:
He is as tall as I, CSr ift (c6cn)fo flvog ftiie i(t).
After a negative, cbi'll is omitted, as :
(5r ift iud)t fo ^ix^\s tvii^ irf).
9. 80 ... fo are used with correlative clauses, containing adjectives
compared together in the positive degree (compare the use of je or befto
with the ccmpar. degree, § 1 26, 4), as :
[§»4»
)NS.
itemeiitit,
he is iiol
r:ompani-
ike hiistr,
I. It may
ect stdte-
lal clause-
expresses
len it -
iicii tbii'.ic.
time) and
the com-
nt the re-
as a poet,
or al«, tnie
adjectives
je or befto
»Ht] ADDITIONAL KEMAKKS ON CONJUNCTIONS. ,H3
lor me (or : Cla.l as ( should be. etc.).
,.;^*'' """" "=""''"« ""'« '= •--«•) ™-, be rendered by
11. As, in the sen.se of •vvnile'= (nbcffcn, as:
12. Distinguish carefully between the following uses of Engl, since :
{a) Since ^. />n'/>os/i^u ^ ^^^ (.^^ frtt.v,,,), as:
Since iast Tuesday, 3cir (cl3tciu Xiciifhig
He was here the day before vestrrdnv K,,f t i
(.) Sin« ^as «W/„.,/„^ conjunction of ,/„, = ,„„„„ „,
(</) Since as conjunction of cause = tia as •
13- After e^,, fieuor a„a todfivcn^, Ijflg may be omitted.
M- SBctJOr expresses time only, ehe mav ais,. »
'rather'), as: ^' ^ ^ ^'^" ^''I'^^ss preference (=
e$e tc^ baS t^ue, miU ic^ fterbcn, Rather than do that. I will die.
284
SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON F.
[§341
I
ill Ll
11
Tj. Observe that the adverbial conjunctions intieffen, UntettJCJfcn are
c-dordi7tating when they = 'meanwhile' (the pronoun t»cil>r. being
demonst rathe), hwi subordmating- Vih^n they =' whilst, while ' (tue pron.
being relative), as :
®ie fprad)cu niit eiuaiibev; inbeffcn (nnterbeffen) g'ltfi i(f) aitf unh
Qb, They were speaking to each otlier; (in the) meanwhile I
was walking up and down ; but:
(gte 1pra.-<)eu intt einnnber, iiibeffen (imterbeffen) i(f) onf imb ab
pinr,, They were speaking to each other, while I was walking
up and down.
In the s. nse of 'however,' inbeffen is coor dip ating oVi\y.
16. ^nu^m is subordinating only, and denotes cause as well as cime, as:
'M) bvand)c md)v C^V>lb, i Hem ict) uicle 2cl)u(ben ^u be^aljhni babe,
1 need more money, since I have many debts to pay (having
many debts to pay).
^iiH Mil rv ntir Mc >>anb anb, (iid)o(te er, As he gave me his hand
(giving nie his hand), he smiled.
17. SSeil must be used (not Xiix) in answer to the question why? or
wherefore 'i as :
Sienriim famm eie iiirfit? 93cil id) XxmX mat:,
Why did you not come ? Because I was ill.
18. ' Unless' is rendered by tueiHt • • • nid)t W - • • «<'^)» O"" ^y ^^^^
[coordinating Vid.\. conj.), as:
Sir uicvOcii uidn aii^^nelic" fbiinen, hjcnn fid) ba§ :©etter nii^t
(iUDint, We shall not be able to go out, unless the weathei
changes.
3d) (affc bid) nid)f, bit fegiieft mid) tJCun- I will not let thee go,
except (unless ; thou bless me.
Note. — Xcim in Ihis sense always follows the verb.
19. * But ' after a negative = k\U, as :
M) battc iud)tv^ 0'? llniiliid: aiif meiufv 3teife, I had nothing but
misfortune on my journey.
Note. - yJtd)t§ roeiiificr do = ' anything but ' (not ' nothing less than '), as:
Gr ift nirflfd tticuifitr al3 reicl), He is anything bui nch.
20. Distinguish between;
[a] Ta = ' there ' ; adverb of place, as:
3d) mav Do, I was there.
§841] ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON CONJUNCTIONS. 285
(d) ta — ' then ' : adverb of h-fne. as ;
®[ntfttf '* ^'"s- ""? ' ^" ''''"'^^ ^* ^^"' 'T^^ ^hief sneaked
into the house j then I seized him.
(c) ^tt = 'since," as': subordinating conmncnon. as :
cnnn ^';'^"S"ish between HcffcimnriPnff)tet, < «^...;5./,,, - Uoor^ ,^^,
conj.) and ungead,tet, • .//^.«,.,.. «../«.//^.,.«^/„^ „.. ' (.«W conj.)
EXERCISE P.
tortoise crept ,„„!vly ,owa e ^oa ' RaXrif '=''''''=■ "•""" '"^
week, and r liave i,o( seen l,im since ■.% u ' """ '"*'
I .must ei.„er ,o a„a see i.,,,';: l^ . ' H rorTri e^I! mJ; T", f -
stder I,,,,, an ig„o,-a,u n,a„; he is anything b« la™ ,rHa„/
been at the ru-l way-station? Yes I wa, ,!,.„ , '■."»'=>"'"'
PART SECOND.
SYNTAX.
LESSON XLI.
SYMTAX OF THE CASES : - NOMINATIVE AND GENITIVE.
242. Nominative.
1. The Nominative is the case of the subject, or of a
word in apposition to the subject, or of a predicate noun quali-
fying it. The nominative is also used in address, there being
no special form for the vocative.
2. Neuter verbs indicating a state or transition, such as
Y\\\, to be ; tuerbcu, to become ; bicibeu, to remain ; fcfocincn,
to seem, appear ; beifjcn, to be called, take a predicate nomi-
native, as :
(Sr ift SolUnt octporbcn (c^cbliebeu). He has become (re-
mained) a soldier.
3. Verbs of caUin;>^ take a predicate nominative, verbs of
considering ?i nominative with ato, in \\\& passive, as:
M\\<x. ^>cinri6 I. tuuibc ticv %^\:^\tx ^cnannt. Emperor
Henry was called the Fowler.
■^Dlein %<xy<x luurbe hunter won inir ale mcin bejtcr ^reunb
betvadnct, My father was always regarded by me (as)
my best friend.
Note. — Verbs of ckocsing generally take the preposition )u instead
of the English nominative.
200
le
be
he
§8441
GENITIVE.
287'
243. GexMtive.
The Genitive is used chieHy as the complement of sub-
stantives, its usf, -'n this respect being much the same as the
Enghsh objective with 'of,' and also covering that of the
possessive. Thus we have :
1. The Genitive of Origin, as:
^ie ^riicbte iJcd :.Haui!icfi(, I'he fruits of the tree.
2. The Subjective Genitive, indicating the ciKent or
cause, as :
I^er (sjlaubc cincs (Sbriftou, The faith of a Christian.
3. The Objective Genitive, indicating the thing affected, as :
2)ie entbectuuij Sriiievifag, The discovery of America.
• 4. The Possessive Genitive, as :
3)er ©arten beg .SUniigg, The garden of the king (the
king's garden ).
5- The Genitive of Quality, as :
Sivci ilinber cinc0 ^llter^. Two children of one age.
NoTi.. This genitive is frequently replaced by Uoit, as :
CSiii a«aim tion I)o()Cin 3((tor, A man of great age.
6. The Partitive Genitive, as :
@iner mcinpr ?yrcunbe, One of my friends.
Der jiingftc meincr iBviibcv, The youngest of my brothers.
Note. - This genitive is commonly replaced by oon after numerals
and other partitives.
244. Genitive after Adjectives.
Adjectives denoting posssession and interest, plenty, knoiv-
ledge, desire,gnilt, or \.\\^\x opposites, govern the genitive, as;
beburftig, needing, in need beluufu, conscious
begierin (also + nad^, de- cingcbcnf, mindful
•'^''^''^'^ fcibu-r ralso-j-,^u), capable
288
LESSON XLI.
[§1*44'
frol^, glad
0ett)i^, certain
gctDoI^nt (also 4- an with ace),
accustomed
leer, empty
lo^ (also + ace.;, rid
mube (also + ace), tired
fait (also + ace), satisfied
fd;ulbig, guilty
fid()er, certain
u'berbruffig, weary
i)erbac(itig, suspected
boll (also 4- ace, or -H toon),
full
hjert (also4- ace), worth
triirbig, worthy
Remarks. — i. The neuter pronoun 'ii ' after most of these
adjectives may have the form CS, which is the old genitive,
and is the origin of the later use of the accusative, first with
the pronouns ba^, U)a^, and then, by analogy, with substan-
tives, as :
;3d; bin C«l (tia6) mitbc, I am tired of it (that).
2. With W:>, miibe, lucrt the Accusative is more usual than
the genitive.
245. Genitive after Verbs.
I. Verbs of meanings similar to those of the adjectives under
the previous section take a genitive of the nearer object, as:
ac^^tcn (also 4- ciuf with nr^.), benfcn (generally + <\\\ with
>
(also +
ace)
pay attention
beburfcn, need
bcgcl;rcn, desire
brauc(K'n, want
entbclnen, miss,
do without
ertiHihncn, mention
Also the following :
I^arren (also -\- auf with ace)
wait
toatten (also + ace), tend,
nurse
ace, think
gebenfcn, mention
genicfjcn (generally + ace),
enjoy
Hergcffcn (generally + ace),
forget
Iarf)en, laugh at
fpotten, mock
frf^onen (also -|- ace >, spare
•47]
ADVERBIAL GENITIVE.
28g
2. Transitive Verbs of accus/n,. condemning, acquittaL
deprtvatwn, emotion, take a genitive of the remoter ob^
ject, as:
anflagen, accuse
berauben, rob
Befd^ulbigen, accuse
cntbinben (also + bon), re
lieve
entf(ct^en (also + Mm), dis-
robe
logf^rec^en, acquit
u6erfuf)'ren, convict
uber^eu'tjen (also + bon), con-
vince
berfic^ern, assure
JDurbigen, deem worthy
Sei^en, accuse
3- Also many reflexive and impersonal verbs (see §§ 21c
216, 219). ^'
^*^» Adverbial Genitive.
For the use of the genitive in forming adverbs from sub-
stantives, see § 189, 2. The adverbial genitive may express
place, time or maimer, as :
2in!cr ^anb, On the left hand.
Seiner 2Bege ge^en. To go one's way.
3)iefcr 3:age, During these (last) days.
5il6enb8, In the evenins;.
^orgeug. In the morning, etc.
Meg ©rnftcg. In all seriousness.
STvocfncn g-ufecg. Dry-shod.
^ And particularly with ^^etfe, 'manner,' after an adiec-
tive, as . •'
@IMIi^Cr3BetK,-or:po:<.nately(lit^
©IucfIirf)erU)ei[e, j mannerj
247. For Interjections followed by a genitive, see
§ 240, 4, (a).
For the genitive after prepositions, see §§ 222, 223.
7
290
LESSON XLI.
[§§247-
EXERCISE XLI.
A. 1. Guten Morgen, Karl; was hast du fiir Eile, mein
Junge ? 2. Guten Morgen, Herr B. ; es ist bald neun Uhr
und ich gehe jetzt in die Schule. 3. So, liast du noch wait
zu gehen ? 4. Bis nach der Friedrichstrasze ; Herr G.,
unser Lelirer, besteht sehr auf Piinktlichkeit. 5. Steige nur
ein, du knnnst mit mir fahren, da mein Weg durch die
Friedrichstrasze fiihrt. H. Ich bin Ihnen sehr dankbar; das ist
sehr freundlicli von Ihnen. 7. Sitzt du da bequem ? <S. Ja,
aber sind nieine Biicher Ihnen nicht iinWege ? !>. Nicht im
ireriniisten, aber was fiir eine Menge Hiicher hast du da ! ])u
hast gewiss viel /u studieren. 10. Ich arbeite jet/l sehr
rieissiir, da das Examen nachstens stalthndet. 11. Auf
welches Examen bereitest du dich vor ^ I -L Auf das Ein-
trittsexamen der Universitat. l.'i. Was fiir Sprachen stu-
■ dierst du ? 14. Ich studiere Knglisch, Latein, Deutsch und
Franzosisch. 15. Natiirlich studierst du audi die Mathe-
matik? IH. Wir miissen Rechnen, Algebra und Geometric
lernen. 17. Bist du ein Freund von der Mathematik, oder
ziehst du die Sprachen vor? 18. Ich lerne sehr gern Ma-
thematik, besonders Algebra ; mein Lehrer glaubt, ich
habe nicht viel Sprachtalent. l!». Deshalb solltest du desto
fleissiger die Sprachen studieren, l^auf) dass deine Bildung
nicht einseitig werde. 'iO. Mein Valer ist auch derselben
Meinung. "21. Hoffentlich wirst du deiii Examen gliicklich
bestehen ; da sind wir aber schon bei der Schule. 'iL Ich
danke Ihnen vielmals fiir den freundlichen Wunsch, vvie auch
fiir die Fahrt.
B. 1. "An honest man is the noblest work of God." 2. A
pound of iron is about as large as two pounds of silver.
H. Mr. Cleveland was elected president of the United States
in the vear 1884. 4. I was to have taken (made^ a journev
to Europe this summer, but my father needs me in his busi-
248]
DATIVE.
291
ave
ness and I shall be obliged to remain at home. 5. ]
been offered five thousand dollars for my house, and [ shau ^c-u
It, for I am glad of the opportunity of getting (to gfet) rid of it.
<i. The Duke of Wellington, a great English general (';vclb=
berr), was called the - Iron Duke," as Prince JJismarck, the
great German statesman, is called the "Iron Chancellor."
7. He (the former) has deserved that title not only as a soldier
but as a man. 8. My neighbour, the merchant, has been
accused of forgery, but 1 do not believe that he is capable
of such a crime. 9. He was induced of money, and is
said to have done it on that account. Ki. I hope that he
will be acquitted of this accusation, for I am convinced of
his innocence. II. The discovery of America by (burc^)
Columbus was perhaps the greatest undertaking of any man
or of any age (3eitaltcr). ]■>. Columbus was a man of great
bodily, as well as mental power. i;{. His whole /leet con-
sisted of three small ships, of which two were very old. 1 J.
Have you seen your brother the lawyer ? ]n. Excuse [me] ;
my brother is not a lawyer, but a doctor. I have not seen
him since Christmas. Ki. As a student he always used (pflcqcn )
to say he meant^to be (luevbcn) a lawyer. J 7. We are tired
of studying; let us go out. 18. Shall I send for (nad]) a
carriage.? 19. No, it is not worth while (bcr ^IJaibciucrt) I
would rather walk. :>0. Unfortunately it has rained and the
roads are bad. 21, We can try (the) walking, and if we get
tired of it, we can take the street-cars (^].Jfcrbe6a(;n, sing.). "
LESSON XLII.
SYNTAX OF THE CASES (continued).- DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE.
248. Dativk.
The Dative is the case of the Indirect Object.
The Dative is used to denote the person for whose advan-
tage or disadvantage a thing is or is done, as;
292
LESSON XLU.
[§§a4»-
@r f)at mix etn Suc^ gefauft. He has bought me a
book.
249. The Dative is very freely used in German to denote
the person who has some interest in an action or tiling. This
is called the ethical dative or dative of interest, and must
usually be left untranslated in English, in which language its
use is obsolete, thus :
Scf) \j<xU mir bie Sac^c annefefien, I have considered the
thing (for my own satisfaction;.
X^u mir ba^ nid;t toieber. Don't do that again (I tell
you).
For the possessive dative replacing, with the -definite ar-
ticle, a genitive case or (with pronouns) a possessive adjective,
see § 44, 6.
260. Dative after Verbs.
1. The Dative stands as the Indirect Object of trafisitivc
verbs, as :
(gr giebt mir ba§ Surf), He gives me the book (the book
to me).
2. It stands as the sole object after verbs which expre«* a
personal x&\?ii\on only, such as verbs of:
{a) Approach or removal, etc., as : "
begegnen, meet glcicficu, resemble
entgefjen, escape nacftgebcn, follow
enlfprec^en, correspond to nacf)ftei)en, be inferior
fefjien, be wanting nat)en, approach
folgen, follow sufe^en, watch
ip) Pleasure or displeasure, as :
Bebagen, please broben, threaten
banten, thank fTu^en, curse
aso]
DATIVE AFTER VERBS.
293
gefaflen, please mi^fal'Ien, displease
fleniigcn, suffice fc^meirf)c(n, flatter
QroUen, be an-ry ^te^en, suit, become
{c) Advantage or disadvantage, as :
beiftc^en, assist mangern, be wanting
bienen, serve n%n, be useful
^elfen, help \^o.\i^\\, harm
{d) Cofumand, resistance and their opposites, as :
befeblen, command tro^en, defy
Sebictcn, order h)eicl)en, yield
0ebord;en, obey lDiberfte'(;en, oppose
Derbieteu, forbid t»ibcr[tre'6en, resist
{e) After verbs expressing possession, trust, and various
other personal relations, as :
antiDorten, answer glaubcn, believe
beiftimmcu, ngree with frf;einen, seem
erit)ibevn, reply trauen, tmst
ge^oren, belong jm-eben, encourage
Also with fcin and tucrben, expressing a state of feelin^r
(with gu gjtute expressed or understood), as : "^
2Bie ift ^fjncn ? How do you feel ?
Loserve also the idiom: JGenn bcill fo ift, * If that is the
case,' in which bciu is dat. neut.
(/) After many verbs expressing similar relations, com-
pounded with the inseparable prefixes cr-, cut-,
^er- luibcr ; with the separable prefixes on-' m\~
BcK enfgcflcn-, ita(^- tior- ju-, etc., and with
adjectives, nouns or adverbial phrases, such as :
(eib t^im, be^sorry gu c^^il it)erben, fall to one's
h)Oi?Iii)oIlen, be vvcll-disposed share
%^^ ©fatten fommen, be of use bag 2Bv.. reben, defend
11
,!. ik
204
LESSON XLII.
m^y>-
Rkmarks. — I. The great majority (jf tliese verbs have
Engli
of the loss of di
become transitive
tinction between the (hitive and accusative ; their construc-
tion in (lerman swoulfl bo carefully observed.
2. Many of the verbs under u/ ), (, ) above take a ^//m7
object, particularly in the shape of a clause or of a neuter
pronoun, as :
(Jr i)at mir licrbotcn 311 flcfjClt, He has forbidden me
to go.
^d) crlinbcvtc, bttfj id) fommcu loaflc, I replied that I
would come.
Wdn )BaUx bat C0 mir bcfofjien, My father has ordered
me (to do) it.
For the Dative with RcfexiTe Y^rhs, see §§ 215, 216; with
Impersonal Vi^rh'iy see §§ 217, 219.
251. Dative after Adjectives.
The Dative stands after adjectives similar in meaning to
the Verbs given in the foregoing section, such as :
(a) ApproacJty etc. :
aijniicb, similar
fremb, strange
gleicl;, equal, like
{b^ Pleasure^ etc. :
angencbni, pleasant
gndbicj, gracious
(<r) Advantage, etc.
fjeilfant, wholesome
jc^ulbig, indebted
(^) Command, etc.
' " ' \ obedient
gcborfam, )
ungreicf\ unequal, unlike
nal;e (also -f- bci), near
bevtuanbt, related
licB, dear
luiUfomnten, welcome
treu, faithful
ungeBorfam, disobedient
toibrig, repulsive
253)
A(JCL'.SAT!\i;.
2g5
(e) J'osscssion, etc. : •
dijcn, belonging iicnicin(fain), coninum
N(»Ti;. Almost any adjective modified by ^ll or iiciiiiii may take a
dative, as :
Ticfc >>onC'iri)ul)f fiiib mir ^u fliof? (S[XO\\ gcnilfl), These gloves are
too large (large enough) tor ine.
For the Dative after Prepositions, see §§ 46, 51.
252. ACCUSATIVF.
The Accusative is the case of the Direct Object. Time
and Measure.
AU transitive 7>erh take the direct (;bjecl in the accusative.
Rkmark. — Many verbs that are transitive in English are in-
transitive in German (see § 250, Rem. i, above), and vice versa.
258. DOURI K ACCUSA'IIVK.
The verb Iclncn, 'to teach,' governs two accusatives, one of
the person and the other of the thing; the verb fiajion, 'to
ask,' takes the latter accusative only when it is a neuter pro-
noun, as :
Sd; n^erbc bir^ bic bfut)i^c 3^rad)c Icbrcn, I shall teach
you the German language.
i^cb ivodte bid) c^cntc ctluos fragcn, I should like to ask
you something.
Verbs of calling, etc., have a second accusative as facti-
tive predicate, as :
%6> nannte t^n cincn '^^utch, I called him a fool.
Of Verbs of considering, etc., some, such as : betrarfitcn, ' to
regard ' ; nnfebcn, ' to look upon ' ; barftcUcn, ' to represent,'
take ?i factitive accusative with al§, as :
%6 febe ben :>)iC9cn oi& eine SSobhbat an, I regard the
rain as a benefit.
2(jC
LESSON XLII.
[§§853-
li •«
li
) !,
Other verbs of con.s^(le^in^^ with those of choosing, etc.,
which take a scjoiicl accusative of this sort in F.n^^lish, are
followed by a preposition (Kir, ju) in Cerman (see Less. XLIX).
254. Accusative aftkr Intkanshive Verhs.
1. Intransitive Verbs may somctinies be followed by an
accusative of a meaning akin to their own, called the cognate
accusative, as :
"sch babe eincn frf^bnctt Uroum getroumt T have dreamt
a beautiful dream.
2. Intransitive Verbs may take an accusative of that which
is effected or produced by the action they express, as :
^V^ctru'^ mcintc bittcrc !tf|ri[ttci!, Peter wept bitter tears
3. Intransitive Verbs may take an accusative followed by
an adjective, etc., di"^ factitive predicate, as:
^scf; l;abc mirf) fntt 9Ci]e)"fcii, I have eaten enough (lit.,
have eaten myself satisfied).
^i>$ .Uinb iueintc firfj in bcu 3t^hif, The child has cried
itself to sleep.
Remark. The Accusative in all these constructions, ex-
cept the last, which is not used in the passive, becomes a nom-
inative in the passive construction ; that of the thing after
lebren remains accusative ; with fraiicu and bitten, the ace. of
the thing is not used in the passive.
For the accusative after y?^/?<?.m'^ Verbs, see § 216; after
Impersonal Verbs, see § 219 ; after Prepositions, see §§ 34, 50 ;
after some Adjectives, it replaces the Genitive (see § 245,
and Remarks).
255. Ai' .^, .AT Accusative.
I. The Accusative is used adverbially to express f^me (see
§ 184, i) and measure (see § 185, 4) ; also distance and way after
verbs of motion, as :
\^»5Z-
455]
lii
ACCUSA riVK.
297
M) bin ferfje f,ntt aWciU'ii rtcfalncn, I have driven six
full miles.
iiyclcf»cn m^ lucrbcn eie flebcn ? Which way will vou
go? ^
Tho Accusative is used also in absolute constructions,
•especially with participles, as : '
ev fam su mir, brn .^ut in bcr §anb. He came to me
hat in hand.
Grftanbba, bic m.nen in bic .soi>^c flcrit^tct. He stood
there [with] eyes uplifted.
EXERCISE XLII.
^. 1. Also, Sie haben sich entschlossen, uns morgen fruh zu
verlassen? :>. Ich nuiss wohl, da meine (ierchaft.angelegen-
he.ten mir keinen langeren Aufenthalt erlauben. A Sie reisen
naturhch mit dem zweiten Zug al^? 4. Wlssen Sie, urn wie viel
Uhr dcrselbe in B. ankommt.? 5. Ic h kann es Ihnen nicht ^anz
genau sagen, abcr er konmit gegen vier Uhr Cdes) Nachmit'tags
an 6. Das 1st mir vicl /u spat. Man erwartet mich schon um
halb zwolf auf meinem Burean. 7. In ./m Falle mus.en Sie
wohl den Schnellxug nehmen, der schon um drei Viertel auf
sieben abfahrt. H. Es lasst sich nicht iindern. 9. Gut ich
werde Sie Punkt sechs Uhr wecken lassen. 10. Ich d'anke
Thnen ; das wird durchM.,s nicht notig sein, da ich meine Weck-
uhr bei mir habe. 11. v;.e viel Zeit brauchen Sie, sich anzu-
kleiden? U. Zwanzig bis fiinfundzwanzig Minuten ; aber ich
werde noch mehreies ein/.upacken haben. l;}. Dann ware es
jedenfalls besser, die Weckuhr auf halb sechs zu stellen 14
Bitte, sagen Sie mir genau, wie viel Uhr es jetzt ist ; ich furchte'
meine Uhr geht nach. 1.5. Es ist gerade neun Minuten vor elf
16. 1st es moglich ! Dann geht meine Uhr ja vor. anstatt nach.
Sind Sie gewiss, dass Thre Uhr richtig geht? 17. Jawohl; ich
Habe sie heute nach der Stadtuhr gestellt. 18. Es wird spat •
29^
I.KSSON XI. II.
IS§ 255-
ich muss mich schlafcn Icgen. iiin morgcn friih auistchcii /u
k()nncn. 1!». Also maclien wires auf dicse W'eise : Sie stchen
uin hall) seclis auf, uni fiiuf Minuten nacli sechs friihstiicken Sie,
uiTi fiinfundzwanzJL;- Minutcu nach serlis win! der Wagen vor-
fahren und in zehn Minuten siiid Sie auf dem IJahnhofe. Dann
liaben Sie noch zehn Minuten iibrig, uni Ihr Billet' zu losen.
und Ihr (lepiick einschreiben zu lassen. Jetzt, gute Nacht !
'20. (xute Nacht, schlafcn Sie wohl !
/>'. I. Do not trust those who flatter you, •>. Do not be-
lieve them, for flatterers are liars. ."). I always considered my
father as my truest friend. I. The general c^ommands the sol-
diers : the soldiers obey the general. .">, What is_the_name
of the gentleman whom we have just met? His name has
escaped me. »i. You should never forget to thank those who
help you. 7. How does this hat, which I bought myself yester-
day, please you? S. It docs not become you very well ; it is
too large for you. H, When 1 was going to the railway-station,
a boy met me and gave me a telegram. In. May 1 ask you if
Mr. H. is related to you? 11. He resembles me very much,
but he is not related to me. I'i. Mr. 15. has been ordered, on
account of iil-he.ilth. to go to a warmer climate. He has been
forbidden to pass the winter in the Nordi. ]'.\. How long does
he remain absent ? I 1, He is to remain absent at least four
months. 15. Last week I ordered (myself ) an overcoat at the
tailor's, wliich he was to bring me to-day. \ (i. The Niagara 1^'alls
are considered ( one considers, etc. ) as one of the greatest
wonders^of^thc^ world. 17'. People say of one who sleeps
very soundly that he sleeps the sleep of the righteous. 18.
May I ask you to assist me, or at least to advise me? 19. I
should be very glad to be able to help you. •>() I am in need
of money, and should not like to ask any one else for it.
2571
THE PRESENT.
>99
LESSON XLIII.
THE 'NDICATIVE MOOD:-SYNTAX OF ITS TENSES.
25($. 'J^he Indicative is the mood of reality and direct
statement. As the tenses are used with reference to time
in the Indicative only, their proper use is given here.
367. I'piE Present.
The Present Tense answers to all tlie Engli:-h forms of
that tense (e. g., icf> lobe = 1 praise, am praising, do praise),
and is used :
1. To denote action now going on, as :
Tavj Minb fj^laft. The child "is sleeping (now).
2. To state a general fact or custom, as :
3)er 3d;ncc ift Unnf?, The snow is white,
3)er Dd^fe frigt (^ka<^, Tiie ox eats grass,
3. For the imperfect in /lisforical narrative, to give greater
vividness, as :
®e[diiuinb ^cdt cv ciiicn Stein auf unb mirft beufclbcn bcin
.srMinbe, ber \^\\ bcifu^n mia, an bcu Mopf, Quickly he
picks up a stone, and throws it at the dog, who is
about to attack him.
4. For the English perfect (as in French ), when the action
or state continues in the present, the past being inferred and
the present alone expressed, as :
Sic Uingc ift cr fdion franf? How long has lie been
ill .? (N. B. — He is sdll ill.)
S* flC^C [cit acbt %<\,yi\\ luicbcr ^uv cdnilc, 1 have been
going to school agai.i lor the last week (and am still
going).
Note. This construction is very common with ffit.
11
ir
300
LESSON XMII.
[§§257-
1 1
5. For the future very commonly, where no ambiguity
would arise, particularly to replace the English form 'am
going to,' as :
^c^ fdircik morgen einen i&x'\q nn meinen SL^ater, I am
going to write a letter to my father to-morrow.
258. The Imperfect.
The Imperfect is used :
1. As the historical (narrative) preterite, when an event
is told in connection with others, as :
^m 3(nfaug j(^uf (^ott ^immcl iinb Cfrbe, unb 3tae§ ttJor
hjitfte utib Iccr u. f. Id., And in the beginning God cre-
ated heaven and earth, and all was waste and
void, etc.
2. To denote customary, continued or contempo-
raneous action, replacing the English forms 'was doing,'
'used to do,' as:
@r fling jeben STag urn mer Ut^r au§. He used to go out
every day at four o'clock.
2Bir (u(jvcn an ber Slircbe toorbet, aU bie Ut?r elf f(^(ufl,
We were driving past the church, as the clock
struck eleven.
259. The Perfect.
1. The Perfect indicates a past event as complete and
no longer continuing, thus :
^d) ()obc flctcbt unb flcUcbct, I have lived and loved
(and both my life and my love are ended).
2. The Perfect is used of an event as a separate and
independent fact, simply asserted as true without reference
to any other, as :
©ott ^ttt bie SBelt crjl^offcn, God created the world ;
260
THE PERFECT.
301
but in the sentence :
©ott jdjuf bie 2Be(t in fed^^ ^agen unb ru^tc am
fiebenten, God created the world in six days, and
rested on the seventh,
the imperfect is used, because the two events are connected.
3. The Perfect is used (apart from historical narrative), in
preference to the Imperfect, of an event which has not been
witnessed or participated in by the speaker, as :
©eftern ift ein Sltnb crtrunfcn iPerf), A child was
drowned yesterday ; — but :
©eftern crti auf \Impf.) ein ^inb, al^ ic^ am Ufer ftatib,
A child was drowned yesterday, when I was stand-
ing on the shore.
Remark. — This distinction between the use of the Perfect
and Imperfect is not accurately observed, but it is always
better to render the English forms ' was doing,' ' used to do,'
by the Imperfect.
4. The Perfect replaces the Future-Perfect, as the Present
does the Future, as :
%^ toerbe fommen, fobalb id; meine ©efitdftc abgcmac^t
\^t, I shall come, as soon as I have (i. e., shall
have) finished my business.
260. The Pluperfect.
The Pluperfect is used, as in English, of a past action
•mpleted before another was begun, thus :
er \\\iit icine 3Iufgabe UoUcnbct, c()C 6ie famen. He had
finished his exercise, before you came.
261. The Future.
The Future v; used:
X. Of an action about to take place, as :
Unfcr 3Satev mirb ung lokn. Our father will praise us.
3o:
LESSON XLIII.
[§§261-
i
2. To denote probability or supposition, as :
(2^ njirb mcin ^i^rut>cr fciii, bcv aihu'ti-^'iiincu i[t, It is
probably my brother who has arrived.
262. The Future-Perfect.
The Future-Perfect is the Perfect in the Future, and
expresses probahility even more frequently than the simple
Future, as :
3)cv ^^vief itJirh fc^ion i^eftcrn flcfommcn jcin. The letter
probably arrived yesterday.
EXERCISE XLIII.
A. 1. Diese Hitze ist unertriiglich ; ich glaube, nie einen so
heissen Sommer erlebt zu haben. ;2. Und wie schwiil es ist!
Sieht es nicht sehr nach Regeu aus ? .*;. Richtig, da sind
schon die ersten Regentropfen, und ich meine, vor einigen •
Minuten Donner in der Feme gehort zu haben. 4. Das macht
mir einen Strich dnrch die Rechnung. l>ei diesem Wetter
kann ich unmoglich zur Stadt gehen. 5. Fiir's Erste allerdings
nicht, aber das Gevvitter wird nicht lange anhalten. (;. Das ist
ein wahrer Platzregen ; so ein Regen ist dem Lande sei;r notig.
7. Ja, wir haben diesen Sommer uberliaiii>t sehr v.enig Regen
gehabt, aber vorigen Winter desto niehr Schnee. (S. Horen
Sie, das war ein Knall ! <». Ja, und wie schnell der Donner
auf den Phtz folgte ! Fiirchten Sie sich vor dem HHtze? 10.
Seitdem es vorigcs Jahr in unserer Nahe eingeschlagen hat, bin
ich ein wenig angstlich. 1 1. Das glaube ich schon, aber sehen
Sie doch, jetzt hagelt es noch sogar ! l->. Das braucht das
Land gewiss nicht, aber die Hagelkorner sind nicht grosz
genug, urn viel Schaden anzurichten. l.i. Es fangt schon an,
sich aufzuhellen ; {las schlimniste ist vorbci. 1 1. Wie sich die
I.uft abgekiihlt hat! b"). Und '.vie srhnell ! Das ist oft der
Fall hier zu Lande. I'.. Jawohl; orianern Sic sich nicht des
262)
SYNTAX OF THE TENSES.
303
wechselhaften Wetters, das wit* vorigen Friihling gehabt haben ?
17. Besonders im Marz und Anfang April. IS. Einen Tag
thaute es, den iiachsten fror es, und am dritten Tage regnete
oder schneite es gar. 19. Dann gab es wiedtr eine Hitze
wie mitten im Sommer; schon im April batten wir fast
achtzig Grad Fahrenheit. 20. Da scheint die Sonne wieder ;
ich sagte Ihnen ja, dass das Gewitter nicht lange anhalten
wUrde. 2\. Da haben Sie Recht ; jetzt muss ich mich auf den
Weg machen.
B. 1 . A misfortune seldom comes alone. '2. Schlegel trans-
lated Shakespeare's works into German. ?u Is your father at
home ? No, he has been away for three weeks, but he is (prob-
ably) coming back to-morrow morning. 4. As soon as [ have
news of his arrival, I shall come again. '>. During my illness
I used to go for a drive two hours every day. (i. Are you
going (to go) to the concert this evening ? I do not think I
shall go. 7. Have you an engagement elsewhere ? No, but I
am going to bed immediately, as I start for Boston to-morrow
morning at seven o'clock. H. People (man) are often con-
scious of bad habits, which they cannot get rid of. 9. Have
you been long in America? I have been here since my fifteenth
year. 10. This is probably a letter from my mother, for that is
her hand- writing. 1 1 . We had hardly been at home half an
hour, when it began to rain. \:i. Shakespeare is considered
the greatest poei of the English nation. 18. He was born at
Stratford-on-Avon, and passed his youth in that place. 14. As
a young man he went to London, became celebrated there, and
died in the year 1616 in his native^town. 15. The sun was
setting, and the long [and] desperate combat was not yet
decided. Uj. For the third time our brave soldiers throw
themselves upon the batteries of the enemy. 17. Nothing
could resist this attack ; the enemy wavers, and the victory is
ours. IH. But what a dearly-bought victory! 111. He, who
i
304
lESSON XLIV.
[§§263
led the soldiers into the combat, comes not back with them.
20. Yonder he lies cold and silent, and our triumph becomes
bitter mourning.
263.
LESSON XLIV.
THE CONDITIONAL AND SUBJUNCTIVE.
The Conditwnal.
1. The Conditional tenses are, in form, subjunctive p\A
tenses, answering to the Future as a present.
2. They indicate possible futurity^ and coincide with the
Impf. and Plupf. Subj. in their use in conditional clauses, and
will therefore be treated conjointly with them (see § 267,
below).
Note. — The Tenses of the Conditional are a new formation; the
Tmpf. arid Plupf. Subj. having, in the older stages of the language, per-
formed the function of the Conditional.
2CJ4. The Subjunctive Mood is used much more fre-
quently in German than i'^ English, the distinction between
Indicative and Subjunctive being almost entirely obliterated
in the latter language.
265. The Subjunctive in Indirect Statements.
The Subjunctive is used in Indirect Statements or
Quotations (see also § 87), i, e., when the words used are
quoted in substatice only, and not as they were spoken, espe-
cially after a verb in the principal clause signifying :
' {a) Imparting of information (statement, report, con-'
fession, reminding, etc.), as:
antlDDvten, answer
yci/uupitJi, aSacrc
berid^tcn, report
er5af)(en, relate
0eftcl;cn, confess
H
en, say
266]
SUBJUNCTIVE IN INDIRECT STATEMENTS.
305
con-f
(b) Apprehension, as :
benfen, think
crinnern (refl.j> remember
ful^Ien, feel
^orcn, hear
mctnen, be of opinion
mer!en, observe
fd^lie^en, conchide
tuiffen, know
(c) Contemplation with various emotions, as :
fiird^ten, fear h)unbern (refi.), wonder
freuen (refl.), rejoice h)untcf)en, wish
glauben, believe jnjeifeln, doubt
tjoffen, hope
(d) Request, command ^ advice, etc., as :
befel^ten, command raten, advise
bitten, ask Derlangen, demand
erma^nen, admonish
2^6. The Tense in Indirect Statements.
T' verb of the Indirect Statement is, as a rule, in the
same tense as it would have, if the statement were made
directly (see § 87, 2), i. e., the tense of the Indirect Statement
is the same as that of the Direct.
Remarks. — i. An Indirect Statement is always a subordi-
nate clause.
2. The conjunction ba^ may be omitted in such clauses,
which will then have the construction of a principal sentence
(i. e., verb second \ see § 87, 3).
3. The Indicative may replace the Subjunctive in Indirect
Statements, when the speaker wishes to represent his own
belief in the correctness of the statement, as :
^d) \io.ht gebbrt, baj5 mein ^Bruber fran! ift, I have
heard that my brother is ill {and he is ill).
6te niu^tc, ba^ bcr ©piegel feine tlntDa^rtjdt j^rat^, unb
mxlU, ba^ ber ^ciger fie betrogen Jottc, etc. (Grimm,
I
irr
306
LESSON XMV.
t§§ 266.
Sne.e7vittchen, p. 52, 1. i), wShe knew that the
mirror did not tell a lie, and saw that the huntsman
had deceived her {and he had deceived her).
But the Subjunctive is used, when the truth of the state-
ment is not vouched fo*-, or when any doubt is cast upon
it, as :
^<x^ bo^baftc Sctb <x\\ fte auf unb metntc, fie ^iittc
Sneciuittdien'o i'ungc unb i^cber ii*^O^ff*-'" {jidd., p. 49,
1. 8), The malicious woman devoured them, and
thought she had eaten Sneewittchen's lung and
liver (whereas she had not eaten them).
4. The tense of the Indirect Statement does not depend on
that of the principal clause, and the sequence of tenses ■w\\\z\i is
observed in English is not found in German, as :
(Engl.) He said he was not ill.
{Germ.) (5r fttgtc, er fci nic^t franf.
Notes. — i. The Subjunctive is unusual after the verbs under (b) and
(c) in the previous section (except Ijcireil), if the principal clause has a
present tense.
2. The rule as to tense is not always strictly observed, the tense used
being sometimes determined by the want of distinctive subjunctive forms.
Thus in the following sentence two different tenses are used :
9tuc^ frf)lofj er, es muffe bie eage oom @(a^mdttntelii nicf)t fef)r
be!annt feiii, unb bcii (Sprud) miifetcit nitr luenige tuiffcn (Hauff,
Das kaltc Herz, p. 8, 1. 7), Further, he concluded that the
legend of the Glass-manikin could not be very well known, and
only a few people could know the verse.
3. After an Impf. in the principal clause, the Subjunctive is usual in
the Indirect vStatement, except as in the second example under Remark 3,
above.
4. The verb of the principal sentence sometimes remains unexpressed,
or is replaced by a noun of kindred meaning, as :
Si" X\z% mid) abturifcn, lucil cr fvnnf fel, He refused to see me,
because {as he asserted) he was ill.
266^
26;]
IIYrOTHETICAL PERIODS.
307
^iittc
3cl) (icf fo fdjiicU »uic mlHiliri), aiio Jurdjt, id) mo(t)te jU jpiit rom=
men, I ran as quickly as possible, fiom fear that I might come
too late.
2)0v< fjotte icf) nffaqt? (Do you mean to say that) I said that?
This last construction is very frequent in German, to express empha-
tically a doubt as to the ti nth of a statement.
207. The Subjunctive and Conditional in
Hypothltical Periods.
Example of a Hypothetical Period:
If I had followed your advice, I should have been
happy.
1. The above sentence consists of two parts. Of these the
one expresses a condition, conceived, in this instance, as unreal
or impossible, viz. :
If I had followed your advice {ivhich I did not);
the other expresses a result, also unreal or unrealized, which
2vould have io\\o\^Q.di, had the condition been realized, viz. :
I should have been happy {which I am not).
2. In both parts of the above period (in the condition and
^n the result), the verb is in a past tense (Impf. or Plupf.)
of the Subjunctive Mood, as :
Senn id; ^l;i-cn '^U\i ficfolflt ^iittc (Plupf. Subj.), [y niiitc
id; gliidlic(i flcttic|cn (Plupf. Subj.).
Remarks.— i. Either of the two clauses may stand first;
thus, the sentence given above may have the form :
%i) lucirc oludlidi c^eiucfcn, iucnu it. f. iu.
2. The conjunction Juenu may be omitted, especially when
the condition precedes the result, in which case the verb v/ill
begin the sentence, :ih:
^iittc id) ^bi-ca ^Kat bcfol^t, fo luarc id» cjlildlid;.
^i
308
LESSON XLIV.
[§§a67
3. If the result clause follows the conditional clause, it is
usually introduced by the particle fo, and ahvays when ttienn
is omitted in the preceding conditional clause (see § 59, and
Note).
4. The conditional tenses may replace the Impf. and Plupf.
Subj. in the apodosis, result or conclusion only, as :
2Benn ic^ ^^ren 5lat bcfolgt ^cittc, fo miirbc ic^ <ySU\\^
gemefcn fetn.
5. If the condition is stated without its unreality being
implied, the verb is in the Pres., Perf., or Fut. Indicative, as :
SSenn er fommt, fo hjerbe id) fortge^en, If he comes, I
shall go away.
6. A condition may be introduced by a(g ttJClttt or alg ofi,
* as if,' thus :
@r fic^t auS, atS tncnn (ob) er franf hjiirc. He looks as
if he were ill.
Note. — In clauses of this kind, lucnn or ob may be omitted, and the
construction is then inverted accordingly (see § 239, 4), as :
(Sr fiel)t au«, al8 hjorc er fronf.
268. Other Uses of the Subjunctive.
1. The Pres. Subjunctive replaces the missing persons
(i. and 3.) of the Imperative Mood, the subject being then
put after the verb, except in the 3. person, where it may also
precede, unless the pron. 3ie is used for the 2. person, as :
%t%t er (or er gebe) nncft .^aufe, Let him go home.
2. The Impf. and Plupf. Subjunctive are uiod to express
a wish, as :
2Bare td^ 6et ^fjnen ! Would that I were with you !
Note. — This is really an elliptical conditional clause, with the result
unexpresscdj the fi'Il form may be supplied thus:
Sore Id) bet 3^nen, (fo toare id) gmcftic^).
2681
rSE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE.
309
3. The Subjunctive is used in clauses expressing purpose^
with the conjunctions bafj, auf ba^, bamit, as:
@r eiltc, ba$ (auf bnj^, bamit) or iwx recbten 3«it onfamt.
He hastened, (in order) that he might arrive in
good time.
4. It is also used after a negative or an indefinite relative^ as :
§ier ift ttiemanb,- bev tnic^ nicf>t fenntc, There is nobody
here, who does not know me.
^cf> luerbe eg t^un, ttio0 au(^ babon !ommcn mbflf, I shall
do it, no matter what may come of it.
Note. — The Indicative is also admissible in these constructions.
5. The Impf. Subjunctive is sometimes used to express
possibility , as :
3)ag gingc \QXi\j\, That might (possibly) do.
^c^ bail)tc, bag ttjiirc gut, I should think that might
be good ;
and especially with the Modal Auxiliaries, as :
^ag mor^te (fBimtc, biirftc) mat^r fein. That may (pos-
sibly) be true.
6. Observe the following idiom :
iiCic bcm aurf) fei, However that may be.
EXERCISE XLIV.
A. 1. Ich habe gehort, dass Sie Ihr Haus verkauft haben ;
ist das wahr ? 2. Ja, meine alte Wohnung gefiel mir nicht
niehr. 3. Wie kommt das ? Ihr Haus schien mir immer eine
sehr elegante und bequeme Wohnung zu sein. 4. Ein besse-
res lasst sich nicht leicht finden; allein, seit(dem) die vielen
Fabriken in der Nahe gebaut worden sind, gefallt mir die
Umge'bung nicht mehr. 5. Das kann ich mir schon denken.
Der Rauch von den Fabriken muss sehr unangenehm sein.
G. Das ist nicht das Schlimmste ; das fortwahrende Gerausch
310
T.ESSOX XI. IV.
[§§a68-
'18
--#-
brinfj^t ciiuni oft zum Verzwfifcln. 7. Habon Sie ein andtTcs'
Haus nekaufi ? h. Nein, vorlaiili^ liabe ich mir ein Haus in
der Schillerstras/c ^aMiiietet, sohald ich aln-r einen passcnden
Bauplatz rinden kann. wcrdc ich hauen. 'J. Haben Sic sich
schon nacli cinem Hanphit/. iim^'eselien ? |o. Ich habe die
gan/e Stadt durchsucht, abcr ohnc Krfolj;. II. Sie miissen
sehr schvvcr /ii befriedigen scin. I >. Das gerade nicht, nur
beslehc ich auf drei ]k'dingun<;eii : I'Vische Luft, cine ruhige
Straszc und einc schone Aiissiclit. I;;. Warum baucn
Sic nicht auf dcr Anhiihe in dcr Vorstadt. jenseit des
Flusses? II. Daran habe ich schon gedacht, nur siud mir
die Preise ein wcnig /u lioch. l,"). Das wiirde mich nicht
abhalten, so iange ich nur bekanie, was ich wiinschte. lO. Es
wird mir wohl niciits iibrig bleiben, als mich dort an/ukaufen.
17. Beabsichtigen Sie, mil Backstein oder mit Quaderstein zu
bauen? bs. Ich muss das erst mit meinem Architekten
besprechen. l!». VVelc'ien Architekten haben Sie gewahlt .?
^(». Merrn Kalk, der den TLan meines alten Hauses ent-
worfen hat. 21. Dann bekommen Sie jedenfalls ein gutes
Haus. Ich wiinsche llinen (iliick zu Ihrem Unternehmen.
2"i. Danke vielmals.
B. 1. An old beggar-man said: "When I was young, I
could have worked if 1 had wished (uioUon), and now I should
be glad to work, if I could, but I cannot. Alas ! had I only
been more industrious." ;>. A certain French king is said to
have died of hunger, for fear that he might be poisoned. 8. I
wish my house were not so far from yours. 4. 1 too ; if the
way were not so long, we could visit eafch other oftener.
5. We were astonished to see Mr. V>. on the street this •
morning, as we thought he was still in England. G. They
say he intended to remain three months longer i. England,
but that he was obliged i-j come home on account of business
matters. 7. What did the gentleman whom we just met ask
2691
TIIK IMI'KKATIVK MOOD.
3n
you ? He asked me how far it was to the town-hall. H, The
mcssen^'cr asserted that he could not wait lon<;er because
he had no time, hut I believe it was for (auvj -f- d^it.j
another reason. !». A certain gtMitleman wanted to set his
watch, and asked his servant what o'clock it was. jo. Tiie
servant answered that he had no watch, but that he had
seen a sun-dial in the neij^hbour's {garden. II. To^this
the gentleman replied absent-mindedly: "(Jo immediately
and ask him for permission to bring- it up here." 12.
Do you believe that the derman language is as difficult
as the French? i:{. When I began to study (Jerman, I
thought it was not so difficult as h'rench, but now 1 believe
otherwise. It. I should be very sorry, if the news were true
which 1 heard this morning. I."). The boys must not skate
to-day ; the ice is too thin, and they might break through
and be drowned. U;. Please tell me who translated Shake-
speare's works into German. 17. Would it be worth while to
take a carriage to drive to the bank ? No, I do not think so.
IH. He said that of us ! I should never have believed it.
H). I asked the bookseller: "Have you Schiller's works.?"
He answered : " I have not^a single copy of them left.
20. I asked the bookseller if he had Schiller's works, and he
answered that ht; had not^a single copy of them left.
LESSON XLV.
THE IMPERATIVE AND INFINITIVE MOODS.
209. THE IMPERATIVE MOOD.
The Imperative expresses a commattd and correspciids
precisely to the English Imperative. The Imperative proper
occurs only in the 2. person, the other persons being supplied
by the Pres. Subjunctive (see § 268, i, above).
312
LESSON XLV.
[§§269-
Remarks. — I. The pronoun of the 2. Ters. is only ex-
pressed for the sake of emphasis or contrast, as :
Singe bu. Do yoit sing.
@ef)t i^r, irir Juerben blciben. You go, we shall remain.
Note. — The pronoun, if expressed, always follo7vs the verb, as above.
2. Where no definite person is addressed (e. g., when an
author is address'ng his readers), mail should be used with
the Pres. Subj., as :
9Wan benfe fic^ meinen 8d;recfen, Imagine my fright.
3. The Modal Auxiliaries foffcn, miiffen, laffeii are used with
imperative force, as :
SDu fottft nicf)t toten. Thou shalt not k
@r mvS^ [c^ircibcn. He must write.
fitt§ (la^t, (affen 3ic) un^ gc^cn. Let us go.
4. The Present and Future Indicative are sometimes used
with emphatic imperative force, as :
2)u bJcf.lift bier ! You are to stay here !
Sic tticrbcn bie (sjiite ^olscn, inorgen fruf;cr gu fommen.
You will have the goodness to come earlier to-morrow.
5. The Past Participle and Infinitive are also used in ex-
clamatory clauses with the force of an Imperative, as :
^ugeWtcn, Mut|d;ci- ! Drive on, coachman!
etill ftc^cn ! Stand still !
^tltftciflCn ! All aboard !
6. In elliptical and exclamatory clauses a command is fre-
quently expressed by an adverbial prefix or prepositional
phrase, without a verb, as :
l^n\^ auf ! ^amerabcn, m\<i '^fcrb ' aufl ^fcrb !
Up ! comrades, to horse ! to horse ! (Schiller.)
S)rauf unb bran ! Up and at them !
^cr iw mil* ! (Come) hither to me ! (Goethe, Fmist)
^71]
THE INFINITIVE WITHOUT jU.
31^
THE INFINITIVE MOOD.
270. The Infinitive AS Substaniive.
The Infinitive is a verbal substantive, and any infinitive
may be used as a substantive of the neuter gender, declined
after the :l);'aler Model (§ i6).
Remarks.— I. The Inlln. as Subst. indicates ^ah/i,ar>
^a$i\M*CH, '(theact of; reading,' — but: gute £ecture, 'good
reading, good literature.'
2. Some Infinitives have become substantives entirely, as :
ba^ Sebcn, life ; ba^J (vntfd^en, horror.
3. The Infinitive, either with or without 511, is often used as
subject of a veio, and as such may have an object by virtue
of its verbal character, as :
&uU ^-reunbe (ju) ^o6ctt ift befjer aU reic^ (gu) fein.
271. The Infinitive without m.
The Infinitive without 311 follows :
{a) The Modal Auxiliaries (see Lesson XXXIV); also
toerbcn in the formation of the future tense.
{U) The following verbs :
blcibcn, remain laffen, let, allow, permit
finben, find lelncn, teach
f;eiBen, order, bid lerncn, learn
l^elfon, help mac^^en, make
t)i>ren, hear fef)en, see
and, in certain phrases, ^(x\)Zx^, as :
^d; \)<xU \\\&ii biel Wclb auf ber 33an! Hcgcn, I have not
much money lying in the bank.
(c) After get)cn and other verbs of motion in su^i phrases
as fpagieren geben, reiten, fa^reu, ' to go for a walk, ride, drive ';
21
3t4
LESSON XLV.
f§§ *n-
m
frf^lafcn gef^en, ' to go to bed ' (not = ' go to sleep,' which is
einfcfilafeit), etc.
{d) As predicative subject, with ^ei^en, and as object with
uennen, f^ei^en, as :
®ag fjei^t fcf)neK fasten, That is quick driving.
2)ag nennc (f)eifee) icb f(t)Ied)t anfongcn, I call that be-
ginning badly.
Note. The Past Participle is also admissible in this construction;
see § 281, 6, below.
Remarks. — I. After baben, bkiben, finben, l^oren, fe^en,
i-jebcn, in the constructions given above, the German Infin.
corresponds to a Present Participle in English, as :
(Sr blicb ftcl)cn, He remained standing, etc.
2. The verbs under (/^), except blciben and bei^en, also
admit of a llfl^ clause after them, as :
• Xs^) ^^^^ getjort (gefeben), btt^ er angefommen fei, I have
heard that he is come.
3. The verbs t^elfen, le^ren, lemen also take an Infin. with
jU after them, as :
3rf? \i(x\it gelernt, \\x gcf^orrfjcn, I have learnt to obey.
4. For the use of the Infin. for the P. Part, with these
verbs, see § 199.
Xj-jtj, _ 7iie verbs l)o(fcit, lef)iTn, (crnen do not substitute the Infin. for
the P. Part, when followed by an Infin. with jit (see Rem. 3, above, and
example).
5. For the Infin. with passive sense after laffcn, see § 200,
7 (<-), Note.
272. The Infinitive with i^Vi.
The Infinitive with ju is used after other verbs, such as :
(a) These implying something to be attained^ done or left
undone^ as :
\
a7aj
anfangen,
nen.
THE INFINITIVE WITH JU.
S^S
begin
[• begin
fuc^en.
i
tiy
t)er[uc6en,
unternel/irten, undertake
tJerbtetcn, forbid
U)a(]en, venture
irarnen, warn
h)un)d)en, wish
befe^Ien, command
Bitten, beg
eriauben, allow
fiirc^ten, fear
l(>offen, hope
taten, advise
(^) Those implying a suspension of judgment, as :
befdjulbigen, accuse frf^einen, seem
einbilben, (refl.), imagine fc^meirf)eln (refl.), flatter one's
giauben, believe self.
Icugnen, deny
{c) Those indicating various states of mind, as :
bereueu, repent Xxih [ein, be acceptable (be
frcuen (impers.), | ^^ gU^d)
freuen (refl.), I Jeib )cin (tF)un), be unaccept-
able (be sorry)
Remarks.— I. With most of these verbs the Infinitive may
be replaced by a baf) clause, and ;;///./ be so replaced unless
the subject of the action in the dependent clause is either
subject or direct object of the principal clause, as :
(Sr glaubt, [cbr gcfc-(nc!t 311 fcin, He believes himself to
be very clever ; — or :
Gr glaubt, tin^ er [e^r gofrfncft ift.
®»^ ^offte, 3U fomincn. He hoped to come ; -- but ;
(Sr F»Dfftc, bn^ fein 3?ater fommen it^erbe, (see § 265, c\
He hoped that his father would come.
@a t^at mir Icib, (5ic nirf^t gefeben nt finfim
was
not to have seen
vou
sorry
or
n t^at mir teib, bag ic^ Sie nic^t gefe^en \)<x\iz ; — but;
3i<3
LESSON XLV.
t§27a
U i
llii
i. I
(S§ ift mir l\d\ baf} 2ie gefommcn fmb, I am glad that
you have come.
2. The Infinitive clause as direct object is often represented
in the principal clause by the neut. pron. eg (with prepositions
by bn, see § 277, below), as :
^c() ioac^e C0 nic{)t, attein ju fommen, I do not venture to
come alone.
Observe the idiomatic use of the Infinitive with 511 after
\j0S)^x\., fdn, ftct;cu, in the following examples :
%A) Dak ibm eincn 93ricf gu iibergeben, I have a letter
to deliver to him.
(!.g ift (ftcbt) 311 criDarten, It is to he expected.
Note. — In the latter example, tlie infin. has a passive signification.
EXERCISE XLV.
A. 1. Guten Morgen, alter Freund ; nichts konnte mir gele-
gener sein, als dich anzutreffen. 2. Ich freue mich herzlich,
dich zu sehen ; ich habe schon lange einen Besuch von dir
erwartet. 3. Du soUtest doch wissen, dass man wenig Zeit
hat, Besuche zu machen, wenn man sich auf ein Examen vor-
bereitet. 4. Das ist wahr, aber lass dir gratulieren ; du hast ja
ein glanzendes Examen bestanden. 5. Es ist mir freilich viel
besscr gelungen, als ich erwartete. (i. Was gedenkst du jetzt
zu thun, da du promoviert hast ? 7. Gerade das wollte ich mit
dir besprechen ; du kannst mir vielleicht mit gutem Rate bei-
stehen. 8. Ich habe mich entschlossen, auf ein Jahr nach
Europa zu gehen ; ware es nicht auch flir dich sehr vorteilhaft,
ein Jahr dort zuzubringen ? 0. Sehr vorteilhaft, besonders
wegen meines Sprachstudiums, aber ich furchte meine Verhalt-
nisse erlauben es mir nicht. 10. Das sehe ich nicht ein, es
wird nur wenig mehr kosten dort zu leben als hier. 11. Bist
du deiner Sache gewiss ? 12. Ja vvohl, weisst du, ein Vetter von
mir ist kiirzlich von Europa zurlickgekommen, ui.d ich habe
§a7a]
THE INFINITIVE WITH Jit
1^7
mich bei ihm genau nach Allem erkundigt. 13. \^'o liat er die
Zeit zugebracht? 14. Teils in England, teils in Frankreich
(unci) tells in Deutschland, und er behanptet, dass man in Eu-
ropa wenigstens ebenso billig lebcn kann wie in Amerika. 15.
Aber du hast die Reisekosten nicht mit eingerechnet. IG. Na-
turlich nicht, aber man reist jetzt viel billiger als man fruher
reiste. 17. Hast du dein Billet schon gelost? 18. Noch nicht,
aber ich habe mich darnach erkundigt und finde, dass man fiir
hundert Thaler oder weniger liber New York nach Liverpool
reisen kann. 19. Zweite Klasse natiirlich. 20. O nein, erste
Klasse, und mit einer sehr guten Dampferlinie. 21. 1st es' mog-
lich ? Du hast mich fast iiberredet, die Reise zu unternehmen.
22. Komm nur heute Abend zu mir und wir werden die Sache
weiter besprechen. 23. Gut ; also bis Abend.
B. 1. Have the goodness to read this letter for me ; I have
left my spectacles up-stairs, and cannot see very well. 2. Please
read pretty loud, for my hearing is bad. :>,. Help me to do my
work, and I will help you to learn your lessons. 4. When you
(man) do not know what to say (what you shall say), say nothing.
5. You will now close your books ; we have read enough for
the present. 6. "To err is human; to forgive, divine," is a
verse from a poem by the English poefPope. 7. I have so
much work to do that I do not know where to begin. 8. Show
the child how it is to learn its lesson. 9. 1 am tired of read-
ing, and must now retire to rest. 10. " Eat, little^bird, eat,"
said a child to her bird. 11. " Thou shalt not stear is (called)
the eighth commandment. 12. The habit of rising early is oJ
great importance when one has a_greaf_deal_of work to do.
13. If one wants to rise early, one should go to bed early.
14. An old, well-known proverb says : " Man does not live to
eat, but eats to live." 15. Another proverb says : " Speaking
is silver; silence is gold.' 16. When I arrived at the railway'^
station I found that I had no money with me ; imagine my
r
318
LESSON XLVI.
[§§ 273-
ii
embarrassment. 17. The art of making glass was already
known to the ancients. 18. Are there any houses to sell or to
rent in your neighbourhood? l!i. 1 wish to speak to Mr.
Bell, 20. Have ((affcn) John black my shoes, for I am in a
hurry. '21. I have heard say that the celebrat 'lOp of G.
is coming ; would you not like to hear him pre.' • 22. Yes.
I should like very much to hear him ])reach ; when is (loflen)
he to come here? 2'.). We have h.ul the good^fortune to
shoot three hares. 24. Some peoj>le would rather die than beg.
LESSON XLVI.
THE INFINITIVE MOOD (continued).
273. Infinit e of Purpose.
The Infinitive with ^u is used to express purpose., as:
SOiein 3'vcunb {'am, inid^ ^u tuanint. My friend came to
warn me.
Remarks. — i. The Infin. expressing purpose is generally
governed by the preposition U1U (see § 276, i, below), which
begins the clause, as :
^d) f'oinmc, iim Ste nad^i A^aufe 5U 6rini3cn, 1 come to fetch
you home.
2. An Infin. clause with }u is always preceded by a comma
in German.
3. This Infin. is also used, with or without ju, after adjec-
tives preceded by \\\, ' too,' or {|Cnug, ' enough,' as :
%6> iimr \\\ miibc, [liWiC) au^get^eu ju fiinttcu, 1 was too
tired to be able to go out.
(Ev ift vcicf) flcnuci, (urn) uicic Xieuer Ijalteu ju fiiuucn,
lie is rich enough to keep many servants.
275]
INFINITIVE OF PURPOSE.
319
introduced
Note.— -After -an adjective with ju, a cla
may be used, as :
m nuir sn iniibc, ah Dog id) au&flrl)ni foimtf, I was too tired to
be able to go out.
274. The Infinitive after Substantives.
The Infinitive with 511 is used after substantives, nouns and
adjectives, akin to the verbs in § 272, to express purpose,
cic, as *
v'^c^) ^abe CufJ, einen 3pa5icrciang ju moreen, I have a
mind to take a walk.
:3c^ battc fcinc ^cit, mid^ nad> ibm umjujc^cu, I had no
time to look after him.
er ift ftet^ bcrcit, ben i)amcn ju ^clfcil. He is always
ready to help the poor.
275. The Accusative with the Infinitive.
The Accusative with the Infinitive is inadmissible in
modern German; hence verbs denotin- statement, know-
ledge, perception, etc., must be followed by a bo^ clause, as:
(^^'i"/-) I know him to be a good man, •
{Germ.) ^c^ \m\\\, bo^ fx ein filter ma\m if}.
(E;igL) I perceived her to be inattentive,
(Germ.) ^^cf) mcvttc, ba§ fic unaufnicrffam loar.
Remarks. — i. In such sentences as those in the examples
given in the above section, the passive construction with the
Infin. is also inadmissible in German except impersonally, as :
{EngL) He is known to be a good man,
{Germ.) Mm tticife, bttj ?r ein i3utcr m'nf* ift; — or :
QeA ift 6e!annt, bn^ cr u. f. \\\
Observe the different relations of the accusatives in the
fol
0*^1 ng sentences
320
LESSON XLVI.
[§§275-
{EngL) I begged him (obj.- of ' begged ') to come,
{Germ.) I^rf) bat i^it 311 fommcu.
(Engl.) I wish tc see him {obj. of ' see'),
{Germ.) ^d) trunfd)c, t^u 311 |e(;en.
{Engl.) I wish him {subj. of 'come') to come,
{Germ.) ^cf) iuunfd)e, bn^ cr tomnie.
3. After glauben, the Infin. is admissible in German, but
not in English, when the subject of the action is the same in
both clauses, as :
{Germ.) ^Jrf) g(auBte, vec^t gef)ort ju fjaben,
{Engl.) I believed that I had heard aright.
When, on the contrary, the subjects are different, the Infin.
(with accus.) is admissible in English, but not in German, as:
{Engl.) I believe him to be an honest man,
{Germ.) ^d; glaubc, bo^ cr ein ebr'id;cr ^Dienfd) ift.
4. The English Infin, in objective indirect questions is
unusual in German, and should be replaced by a finite
clause, as :
{Engl.) He did not know where to go,
{Germ.) gr tt)u^te ntd;t, iuofjin cr gct)en fottic.
{Engl.) He told me what to do,
{Germ.) @r fagte mir, tua§ ic^^ tliun fattte,
276. The Infinitive governed by Prepositions.
I, Only three prepositions can govern an infinitive (with gu)
directly, viz. : um, ' in order,' o^uc, * without,' and (^au)ftott.
* instead of,* as :
©i* fam, U!H mid) toon biefem Unfad \[\ bcttttr^rij^ttflcn.
He came, in order to inform me of this accident.
^c^ founte ibn nid)t cin[eben, oftiic ber,3licb ^u lacben,
I could not look at him, without laugh//z^ heartily.
277] THE INFINITIVE GOVERNED BY PREPOSITIONS, 32 1
^itftott mic^ gebulbig nn^u^eren, untcrBrac^ er mid)
beftanbig, Instead of listen//^^ to me patiently, he
kept constantly interrupting me.
Remarks.— i. Observe that in each of these examples the
preposition stands at the beginning of the clause, the Infini-
tive at the end, with the words dependent on the Infinitive
between.
?. The Infinitive after Df)nc and (an)ftatt may be replaced
by a baf; clause. This is always the case when the subject of
the action is different in the two clauses (compare § 224,
2, b, Rem.). Thus we may say :
Sd; furf)te Dorbcisufomnien, oFine gefeben 311 tticrbcn (or :
obne ba^ id; ge[ef;en hjurbe), I tried to go past without
being seen ;
but we must say :
^c^ fud)te bovbei^ubmrnen, o^ne bn^ man mid) fn§, I tried
to go past without any one's seeing me,
because the subjects of the two clauses are different.
277. With other prepositions, the Infinitive or bo^ clause
is represented in the principal clause by the adverb "i^^ pre-
Lxed to the preposition, as :
^c^ bei3nugtc mid; bamft, ibn meine Unsufriebenfjeit morfen
311 loffcil, I was contented with showing him my
dissatisfaction.
2Bir bertaffen un^ baraiif, bn§ Sie fommen. We rely on
your coming.
%&i fonnte ibn md)t boron Derbinbern, oug^Uflc^cit, I could
not prevent him from going out (or : his going
out).
tparen, He was jealous of our having been invited.
i
322
LESSON XLVI.
[§§ a77-
2Bir fe^nen urn tam^, ®ie toieiJcr^uje^en, We long to
see you again.
@r finbet ^i^er^piuflcn boron, tinber jtt neefcn. He finds
pleasure in teasing children.
©ie dvc\txU fid> 'Ooriiljer, bo^ unr [0 fpat famen, She was
angry at our coming so late.
Remarks. — i. The preposition 'of is often omitted, as:
^ie '3Zad>vicf)t, baf| ber Aviebc unterjeicbnct tuorbcn Wat,
The news of the peace being (having been) signed.
2. The Infin. clause is only admissible when the subject of
the action is the same as in the principal clause (compare
§ 276, Rem. 2, above).
3. The English Infinitive in -ing, or Gei /nd, must be
carefully distinguished from the Present Participle, with
which it has no connection.
4. The genitive or possessive adjective in English before
this Gerund will become the subject of the bo^ clause in
(jerman, as :
She was angry at our coming late, ©ie tt)ar bofc
bariibcV, baf5 luir 511 f^iit famen.
He insisted on his sister's '.earning Latin, (Sr beftanb
barauf, bafe fcinc St^lucftcr 2atcin Icrntc (levnen foUtc).
5. In an indirect question^ ob takes the place of ba^, as :
(g§ gcbt mic6 md;t§ ^x^, ob er lonnnt ober nic^t, It does
not concern me, whether he comes or not.
6. When the Gerund expresses an adverbial _ relation (time,
cause, etc.), it must oe expanded into an adverbial clause, as :
Before concluding, I shall make one more obser-
vation, r^lie t^ \Mvt^t. toerbc idb nod) einc 33emerfuna
478] THE INFINITIVE GOVERNED BY PREPOSITIONS. 323
On seeing me, he held out his hand to me, ^U er
midj |of|, hicit er mir bie §anb ^in.
In persuading others we persuade ourselves, ^iibrm
itJir anbere iilicrrcbcn, iibcrrcbcn n?iv un^ felbft.
278. The Infinitive in Elliptical Constructions.
1. The Infinitive is used, as in English, in various elliptical
constructions, without being dependent on any other word, as :
3Barum mid) tuccfcii? Why waken nie ?
9^a(i) [eincm 3lu^fci;on 511 uvtcllen. To judge from his
appearance.
2. For the Infinitive with the force of an Imperative, see
§ 269, Rem. 5, above.
EXERCISE XLVI.
A. h Nicht wa.ir, Fraulein B., Sie waren gestern Abend iiu
Konzert.? ;2. Ja, waren Sie auch dort ? Ich habe Sie nicht
gesehen. a. Das ist gem inoglich ; unter so vielen Mensciien
findet man sich nicht leicht. 4. Der Saal war gedrangt voll,
wahrscheinlich well das Konzert zum Besten des neuen Waisen-
hauses gegeben wurde. 5. Nicht allein das, sondern auch weil
die neue Sangerin, Fraulein M., zum ersten Male auftrat.
6. Das Publikum schien von ihr ganz entziickt zu sein, und die
Zeitungen sind heute Morgen voll ihres Ruhmes. 7. Ich habe
nie eine so klare und starke Stimme gehort. S. In der Arie
aus Lohengrin hat sie sich besonders ausgezeichnct. 9. Das
Lied von Schubert mit Harfen-Begleitung gefiel mir am besten.
10. Frau S. sang auch sehr gut, aber Sie schien ein wenig
heiser zu sein. 1 1 . Trotz dem, was die Kritiker sagen, gefiel
mir ihr Gesang besser a'ls der von Frl. M. 12. Ich finde auch,
dass sie mii mehr Clefiihl singt und dass ihre Sdmme geschulter
ist. 1:1. \^'as liaiten Sie vom Geigenspiel dcs Ilcrrn K. ? 14, Es
muss sehr gut sem, dem Beifall nach zu uiteilen, aber ich ver-
324
LESSON XLVI.
b§a7»
stehe mich nicht auf die Geige. 15. Ich ziehe die Geige jedem
andern In^trumentevor. Ki. Spielt Ihr altester Bruder nicht
die Geige? 17. Nein, aber er spielt die Flote unci begleitet
mich oft, wenn ich auf deni Klavier spiele. 18. Ihre Familie
ist iiberhaupt sehr musilialisch. 1{». Ja wohl, wir spielen fast
alle mehr oder weniger. :>(). St-lbst Ihre kleinen Geschwister?
2\. Ja, Marie spielt die Guitarre, Anna die Geige und Frie-
drich nimmt seit einigen Monnten Stunden auf dem Violoncell.
20. Wissen Sie, ob vicl fur das Waisenhaus iibrig blcibt, nach-
dem alle Kosten bestritten sind? L>3. Etwa funf hundert
Thaler, doch beabsichtigt man, ein zwcites Konzert im Laufe
des Winters fUr denselben Zweck zu geben.
/?. 1. Let us (indef.) not return evil for evil. 2. Do what
is right, let it cost what it may. 3. The eighth command-
ment says that we are not to steal. 4. He was punished for
having neglected his duty. 5 The teacher told us we should
close our books, we had read enough for the present.
6. Freddy, do you stand, and give your little brother your
chair. 7. In German they say of one who buys anything
without seeing it that he buys a cat in a bag. S. Do you
care to go for a drive with us ? 9. No. thank you. Do you ride
(tahen); I prefer to walk. 10. Who has left these books lying
on the table .Ml. John ; and he says he forgot to take them up.
12. Bid him carry them up immediately into the study, and
then let him come down here. 1 3. Every one thought Mi.
N. to be a rich mm 1 ut he failed fperf.) lately. 14. I have not
a single pen fit to write with, and I have a dozen letters to
write. 15. Do not allow yourself to be disturbed by my com-
ing ; do not stop writing. 16. The beggar, of whom we were
speaking in another exercise, passed his youth in idling
instead of workiiig. 17. Little Frederick had the misfortune
to break an arm while skating, and he was obliged to remain
lying in bed a week. 18. Alfred the Great divided the dav
»6o]
THE PARTICIPLES.
3-JS
into three part3 : one part was devoted to business, the
second to reading, praying and studying, and the third to
eating, sleeping and pleasure. 19. We wished our friends to
come in, but they had no time. 20. I am glad to have made
your acquaintance. ;.'! . If you go hunting without your father
knowing it, he will be very much displeased. 22. Our teacher
useu to insist on our writing a German exercise every day,
and it was impossible for us to neglect this duty without his
knowing it. 23. Before going home we must go to visit your
old friend L. If you went away without his seeing you, he
would be very sorry. 24. We heard some one coming behind
us on the street, aid we remained standing at the corner to
see who it was. 25. Our old neighbour has three sons, but
instead of their supporting him, he is obliged to support them.
Is he not very much to be pitied >
LESSON XLVIL
THE PARTICIPLES.
279. The Participles are properly Verbal Adjectives, and
their uses and constructions are those of Adjectives. There
are three Participles, the Present, the Past and the Future-
Passive or Gerundive. The English compound Perfect Par-
ticiple (e.g., 'having praised',) has no corresponding form
in German, and must be rendered by a clause (see § 284,
below).
280.
The Present Participle.
The Present Participle has active force, and, like the
Present Indie, marks a present or continuing state or action,
the substantive which it qualifies being the subject of the
action, as:
326
Lesson xi.vii.
L§§a8o
Ta^ [(^Infcnbc ilinb. The sleeping child (= 'the child
that sleeps ').
Sine ^anrfirtinOcnbe ©efc^ic^te, A story that makes
one's hair stand on end.
The Present Participle is for the most part used only
atinhutively, as in the above examples. It is used predica-
tively only:
{a) When it is a true adjective in function, without any idea
of time, as :
Seine 5lrann;eit ift nirfit kbputnib. His illness is not
serious.
2)ie Sd^onbeit biefev Sanbfc^aft ift cntjiitfcwb. The beauty
of this landscape is enchanting (i. e., delightful).
ib) In apposition with the subject (sometimes also with
the direct object) of the sentence in which it occurs, when
the action of the Participle is simultaneous with thai of the
principal verb, as :
©icb frfntcir nac^i mir ummcnbeub, \oX) er niir in^ ©eftc^t.
Turning quickly around, he looked into my face. '
^Prriitcub [rf)Iuc3 fie bie ^ilugen nieber. Blushing she
dropped her eyes.
gJrcifcnb mit bid \Cmm\ 3?eben
S^rer Sdnbev SlJevt unb 3a^r,
6af,jt uicle bcutfd^e ^uirften
einft 5u Sorm§ im .<Raiferfaar. (Kerner.)
Praising with many fine speeches the worth and num-
ber of their territories, many German princes v^ere
sitting one day in the Imperial Hall at Worms.
Remarks.— I. This construction is more usual in puetic
or exalted diction than in ordinary language, where it is gen-
erally replaced by an adverbial clause (see § 284, below).
£8lj
THE PRESENT PARTICIPtfe.
327
2. The Present Participle is not used in German, as it is
in English, with the auxiliary * to be ' (see § 31, Rem. 3).
281. The Past Participle.
The Past Participle of a transitive verb has passive
force, not necessarily with any distinct reference to past
time, as :
^aei gelicMe ^inb, The beloved child (i. e., the child
that is or was beloved).
But when the participle indicates a single action, it has
perfect force, as :
^a^ flcfio^rcttc ^ferb, The horse which has been
stolen.
The Past Participle of an ^ntransitii^e verb has active
force, as :
^ie g)Jufif \i(xi oufgc^ort. The music has ceased.
Remarks. ~ i. The Past Participle of transitive verbs may
be used attributively as well as predicatively, as in the first
two examples above.
2. The Past Participle of intransitive verbs conjugated
with fein is sometimes used attributi\ely and denotes a state
produced by the action of the verb, as :
Ta§ lucgficlnnfcttC ^sferb, The horse which had run
away; but not: ^a§ Bclaiifenc %\<:x\>,
3. The Past Participle, like the Present (compare § 280/;,
above), may be used predicatively in apposition to the sub-
ject (or sometimes to the direct object) of the sentence in
which it occurs, as :
2)a^ 2?Dlf, Dom ?^-urften unferbriirft, emporte fic^ gegen
t{)n. The people. ODpressed bv fhp nrinri> rAtri^if^rj
against him.
m
i2B
LESSON XLVn.
t§§a8i>
4. For the Past Participle with Imperative force, see §269, 5.
5. The Past Participle replaces the English J^nse;?/ Parti-
ciple after fommcn to specify the manner of the motion, as :
@r tarn i Cflongcn, gcfoufcn u. f. w., He came walking,
running, etc.
6. After verbs of ca///ng, it is used for the Infinitive, as :
Ta$, f)eint (ncnnc i(b) fiir bie ^iifunft gcforgt, That is (I
call that) caring for the future.
7. It also replaces an Infinitive in such phrases as the
following :
^cf; mn^ fort! £ieber I^ier 211(^3 im etid^e rcloffcn ! I
must go ! Rather (would I) leave everything in the
lurch here. (Lessing.)
8. It is used in a few (7/?so/u/e constructions, with or with-
out a substantive, which is usually in the accusative when
present, as :
^UflCgckn, ba^ bieg Waijx ift. Granted that this is true.
3}icincn 53ritber ouggcncmmcu, Waxm aik jugegen, Ex-
cept my brother, all were present.
282. The Future Passive Participle.
This Participle, also called the Gerundive, has the form
of the Present Part, preceded by gu. It is formed from tramt^
tive verbs only, and is only used attributively, being replaced
•n the predicate by an infinitive with ju, as :
(^ine 3u (oOcnbe .Oanblung, An act to be praised ; but
eine ^anbhutfl, Jt)eld;e 311 UUw {ft.
283. General Remarks on the Participles.
I. Many words with the form of Participles have the value of
adjectives. Some occur as adjectives only (see also § 194^
Note), others with a special menning, as: fjclef^vt, learned i
mmwx, acquainted; uerju-ieben, different; beja^rt, aged, etc.
has read. ^°'^'^"'^'' '""= ^l'^"™^" ; *«« ©elefenc, what one
inr;;:'; !^" ^' ^^-^>"- -^^^ ~::r:
its subLntit r . sSt? 'it' T ";-""''""'^ p^^-^-^^-
poetry, precedes the^ s e S .sL . ?\'''"'°^"^ '"
and more correctly folLls as '' "^' '"' ^-^'^Hy
» bcr due,, §«„b mmmtni, „,it bet anbern bn3
fob „6cr ben, iVaffcv cn.^or(,„It„,b u.f.u, Swim
m,ng vv,.l. one Itand, with ,he other holdinrZ"
child above water, etc. "'"ing tne
2)as ms, lu-m ,^.iir,-tc„ untcrbriirft u. f. lo.. The neoole
oppressed by the prince, etc. '^ "^ '
284. English Participial Construct,ok,s.
I. The Present Participle is never used in (v.,„
frequently is in Kn.lish, t^ express ad^rbil^ r'S :; •,:
22
33<^
I,E?^SON XLVtI.
[§264
iced, where so used, by
a reg
ular
or cause, and must be replaced, where so
adverbial clause, introduced by the proper adverb or con-
junction, as follows :
(a) To express time, the conjunctions bo, aU, * when,'
ittbcm, nja()rcni5. 'while,' must be used, as :
Seeing him turn pale, I hastened to his assistance,
^tt (aU) i* \bn erblci^en ia% eilte i* i^m jur .t^ilfe ^evbei.
Recovering himself, the orator continued, ^W^^m
er fid; fammelte, fubr ber ^Tiebuev fort.
Remarks.— I. The English Perfect Participle is replaced
by a clause with noff)llcm (or oJS', with the Pluperfect, as :
Having examined his papers, they let him go, 9la(^=
bcm man feine "^a^ierc unterfucf)t l^attc, Uefe man \hn
ge^en.
2. The clause with inbcm, indicating simultaneous action,
may be replaced by a participial clause in the case specified in
§ 280, /-, above.
(p) To express cause, the conjunctions btt, illbcm, * as,'
'since,' or lucil, 'because,' must be used, as:
Being an honest man, he may be trusted, 99Beit er ein
etjrlidicr "OJiann ift, fo tarn man i{)m trauen.
Hoping to see you soon, I remain ever yours, ^nbcm
i* boffc, 3ic balb ju fcbcn, mhUxU tcf» \UU ber ^i^rige.
Not having found him at home, I went away, 2)tt
tcf> i(m ni*t 511 .soaufe flcfuubcn ^itc, ging icB fort.
2. The Present Participle qualifying a preceding sub-
stantive or pronoun is changed:
{a) Into a regular relative clause with finite verb, as :
A loaf was found at Herculaneum, still retaining
its form, Gin 3?rut Vourbe 511 ^
welches uocli bie ^orm bcibcjtclt.
U64] ENGLISIT PARTICIPIAL CONSTRUCTIONS. 33 1
The sliip, having come straight towards us, sliowed
the black flag, Ta^ ecf)iff, mclf^cg geral^c auf mi
^ugcfommcn toar, scigte bie \d)mr^c ^taggc.
with ?hT; "f Ju" ''"'' 1 '^'^'^ '" ''^' ^^""''^'"^ ^'^"^^ ^"1 correspond
wuh that of the pr,nc,pal verb, as shown above, the Pluperfect, however
generally replacing the English Perfect Participles.
(/') Into an attributive participial clause, in which the
Participle will immediately precede the substantive
(see § 283, 4, above), as :
A man passing on the street, Gin auf ber Strafee tior«
Dcigc^cnbcr 9)?ann.
3. A Participle preceded by an adverbial conjunction is
replaced by a finite clause with the corresponding conjunc-
tion, as : - o J
While travelling in Europe, we met a great many
Americans, %\^ jmr in Guropa reiften, trafcn tt)ir mit
t^ielen Imerifanern gufammen.
For the Infinitive in -ing, or Gerund, and its German equi-
valents, see § 276, above.
EXERCISE XLVII.
A. 1. Haben Sie Ihr Billet schon gelost.? -2. Nein noch
nicht. ;}. Dann miissen wir uns beeilen ; wir sollten erst etwas
geniessen, ehe wir abreisen. 4. Hier ist der Schalter : soil ich
auch ein Billet fur Sie nehmen ? 5. Danke, ich habe meins
schon gelost. (i. Jetzt bin ich fertig, aber wir haben kaum drei
Viertelstunden Zeit, bis der Zug abfahrt. 7. Dann miissen wir
nach der ersten besten Restauration gehen. H. Dort druben ist
eine. 9. Das trifft sich gutj gehen wir gleich hinein. ]().
Kellner, wir haben es sehr eilig. 1 1 . Nehmen Sie Platz, meine
Herren ; ich werde Sie sofort bedienen ; hier ist die Speise-
karte 1:>. Geben Sie mir gefalligst einen Teller Suppe.
13. Und Sie, mein Herr? 14. Brin-en Sif^ m,v -,„«,.. ..v,^
Semette. lo. Entschuldigen Sie, hier ist sie. 16. Ich nehme
53^
LESSON XLVU.
II 284
|;
eine Forelle. 17. Bedaure, es ist keine mehr da. 18. Nun,
dann bringen Sie mir ein StUck Lachs. 19. Hier ist die Wein-
karte; trinken die Herren V/ein? 20. Bringen Sie eine
Flasche Rotvvein und Glaser. 21. Wie schmeckt Ihnen der
Fisch? 22. Ausgezeichnet. 23. Diese Suppe schmeckt mir
gar nicht. 24. Lassen Sie sich doch Fisch kommen. 25. Ich
mache mir nichts aus Fisch ; - KeUner ! 2(). Zu Befehl. 27.
Eine Portion Entenbraten mit grunen Erbsen. 28. Wunschen
Sie keine Kartoffeln? 21). Jawohl, gebratene Kartoffeln. Brin-
gen Sie audi Brot. aO. Noch etwas ? 81. Nein. Was wunschen
Sie, Herr B. ? 32. Bitte, reichen Sie mir die Speisekarte. Ich
bes'telle mir Kalbskoteletten mit Kartoffeln und gelben Riiben.
33. SonstnochGemiise? 34. Etwas Blumenkohl. 35. Erinnern
Sie sich schon fruher hier gespeist zu haben, Herr B. ? 36. Nicht
dass ich wiisste ; die Restauration scheint neu zu sein. 37. Des-
halb wird man vielleicht so gut bedient. 38. Ist den Herren etwas
gefaUig ? 39. Bringen Sie mir eine Portion Eis und eine Tasse
Kaffee. 40. Und mir eine Tasse Chocolade und eine Portion
Erdbeeren mit Sahne, und schreiben Sie alles auf meine Rech-
nung. 41. Hier ist die Rechnung, mein Herr. 42. Wie viel
betragt sie? 43. Sieben Mark funfzig Pfennig. 44. Hier
sind acht Mark; das Ubrige ist Ihr Trinkgeld. 45. Jetzt
mussen wir fort ; es hat soeben auf dem Bahnhofe zum ersten
Male gelautet.
^. 1. A sleeping fox catches no chicken. 2. Sleeping
dogs* do* not bite. 3. The past cannot be helped (changed) ;
let us rather think of what is to come. 4. It is much better
to think without speaking than to speak without thinking.
5. Man is a speaking animal, a fire-using animal a laughing
animal : these are some of the definitions which have been
proposed by philosophers. (>. We learn to speak German in
speaking German. 7. Well hit (treffcu) ! I call that well
played ! 8. I wanted to show you an article in yesterday's
§284] ENGLISH PARTICIPIAL CONSTRUCTIONS. 333
paper, but it is nowhere to be found. 9. Let me know when
you think of coming to town. 10. The skill of ants in the
buildmg of their nests is astonishing. U. Smiling, he began
to read the letter, but before having read the half of it, he
threw it furiously on the floor. 12. A hussar came galloping
down the street and said the battle was beginning. 13. The
Paradise Lost of Milton is one of the most important works
of English literature ; it was written in the seventeenth cen-
tury, but this does not prevent its being still much read.
14. After having been so well received by us, I wonder that
he is not ashamed to speak evil of us. 15. The morning was
cool and charming, but towards noon the heat became
oppressive, and we saw great clouds rising in the west
iO. He says the matter is perfectly clear, but his saying so
does not make any difference. 1 7. He went away complain-
mg that there was no use talking to people who did not want
to understand. 18. That was because he was angry, and
because he had not succeeded in making himself understood
(berftdnblid)). 19. Make no mistakes in copying your exercise,
or else a second copying will be your punishment. 20. Besides
making mistakes the last time, you wrote very badly. 21. " The
danger to be avoided," said he, "is not yet past." 22.'Going
(^ingefjen) to visit our friends in Schiller-street this afternoon,
we met them coming to visit us. 23. His being rich is no excuse
for his being lazy j we do not need to be idle merely because
we are not forced to earn our bread. 24. A certain man, just
before dying, called his sons to him, and told them there was
a treasure lying hidden somewhere in his field. 25. Believing
they would find it, they began digging everywhere, bu^t
without finding the wished-for (orh)iln[rf^t) treasure. 26. One
of them, wiser than the others, finally guessed what his father
had meant by ha-.-ing told them this. 27. This son said that
smce digging the ground the crop had been nmch better, and
that this was the treasure the father meant.
334
LESSON XLVIII. I§a85
LESSON XLVIII.
*
CONCORD AND APPOSITION.
285. Concord of Subject and Verb.
1. The predicate verb (the finite part, or that containing
the copula) agrees with its subject in number and person.
2. Two or more subjects require the verb in the plural, as :
^Jiciu i^atcv unb inciuc ^Jhitter fiitb ^ier gen)efen. My
father and mother have been here.
'remarks. — I. If the subject nearest to the verb be singu-
lar, the verb is sometimes in the singular, especially if the
subjects follow the verb, as :
©eine §abfurf)t, feiue iippige Seben^art, feiu ^odn^i^n'*-'"^'^^
3Befen fcrotitc bie Grbitterung gegen i^n auf? J^brfifte,
His avarice, his luxurious mode of living, his arro-
gant behaviour, excited the animosity against him
to the highest point. (Schiller, Egmonfs Leben
und Tod.)
Dbcn bei bem ^bronc log i?er S^bnig unb bie Monigin,
Above near the throne lay the King and Queen.
(Grimm, Dornroschen.)
Note. — This is especially the case when the subjects, indicating
things or abstract ideas, are regarded as forming together one idea, or
are more less synonymous, e. g. :
^Ott« unD ^Of ift Dcrtnitft, House and home are sold.
©Clb una ©Ut lltttJ^t uicl)t gtudlid), Money and property (= wealth)
do not make [one] happy;
or when particular attention is called to the last (as forming a
climax), e. g.:
:Uicin ilkmibgen, iiiciu :1hif, mcitt l^eben ft€{}t nicl}t anf bem @piele,
My property, my reputation, my life (the most important of allj,
are not at stake.
Sa85]
CONCORD OF SUBJECT A.SD VERB.
535
2. If the subjects be of different persons, the verb agrees
in person with the first rather than the second or third, and
with the second rather than the third, the plural pronoun of
the proper person being usually (always with the second per-
son) expressed before the verb, as :
2)u \\\M> \6> (mcin ^i^rubcv unb idO, luir gingen au^, You
and I (my brother and I) went out.
®u unb bcine ed)me[tcr, ijr jcid au^gcgangen. You and
your sister went out.
3. With titles of rank and compliment the verb is usually
in the plural (see also § 49), as :
Seine 5Jiaieftat ^okn geru^t u. f. lu.. His Majesty has
been pleased, etc.
4. CoUectives, if singular, take a verb in the singular, unless
followed by a plural substantive in apposition or in the geni-
tive, as :
@ine gro^e a}ien[d;enmenge toor jugegen ; — but :
Gine grofje 3Jiengc 9}ien(clHMi marctt gugegen, A great
number of people were present.
^ Notes.— I. The singular may also be used in such cases as that
given in the second example above, unless the collective is considered
with reference tu its component parts individually.
2. With nouns of Number in the sing, (see § 185, i) the verb is used
in the plur. only 'vhen an indefinite quantity is meant, as :
©in |inar (= cinifle) i£agc tnnrcn Devflaugcn, A few days had
passed ; — but :
etn ^aar ©ticfel foflct ftebeu 2;t)a(cr, A pair of shoes costs seven
dollars.
5. When the real (logical) subject is represented by c6, or
some other neut. sing, pron., before the verb (see §§ 39 ; 82,
Rem. 2 ; 141), the verb agrees with the logical, not with the
grammatical subject, as :
d^ pub meine ^vubef, It is mv brothers.
i
I
336
Lcaso:, XI. nil.
[§§285-
Note. With z/^rsonal pronoun as , 'act, tkl. t5 follows the verb
(see § 39, 2).
6. If the subjects be separ:ited by a disjunctive conjunc-
tion or conjunctions, the verb regulnrly agrees with the last
only, but this rule is by no means so strictly observed as in
English, even by the best writers, e. g. :
SBcbcr bie Union noi^ bie Si^ue mifrfjrrn fic^ in biefen
©trcit. Neither the Union nor the leag took part
in this dispute.
©otco^l bie gage a({l bie 53efeftiguni3 biefer Stabt fd|iejicn
jebem Slngriffe ^Troij ju bietcn. The situation, as well
as the fortification, of this city seemed to defy
every attack. (Schiller, lojahriger Krieg.)
Notes. — i. Construdtions like the following :
Gnttucbcr bu obcr icf) bin taiib, Either you or I am deaf,
are in German, as in English, telt to be awkward, and are therefore
avoided by substituting some other construction, e. g. :
Giitmebcr irf)btntaub,obcrbu bift e8, Either I am deaf, or you are.
2. The sing, is used after expressions of the time of day, and in the
multiplication-table, as :
®« iP yi\)\\ 111)1", It is ten o'clock.
3fl}U mat elf ift (mod)t) Ijunbcrt Uiib yi\)w, Ten times eleven is one
hundred and ten.
286. Repetition of Sui3ject.
When several connected sentences have a common subject,
the subject must be repeated (as pronoun) when the order of
the words is changed, as :
3Der 3ug fommt urn neun U^r an, unb faBrt urn ftalb 5eJ)r.
tuieber ab. The train arrives at nine o'clock, and
leaves again at half-past niue ; — but :
2)er 3ug fommt um neun Uyr an, unb urn bal6 gefin fdbrt
cr h)ieber ab. The train arrives at , ne o'clock, and
*;*; haif-pasl nine it leaves again.
289]
THE APPOSITIVE SUBSTANTIVE.
337
287. Omission of Predicative Verb.
.t>aben and fein, as auxiliaries of tense, may be omitted in a
subordinate sentence, as :
9Md>bcui fie ben ilkief rtdefcii, loeinte fie. After she had
read the letter, she wept.
288. Other Concords.
1. TheAttributive (or Determinative) Adjective agrees
with the substantives il qualifies in gender, number and case
(for inflections see Less. XX, XXII, XXlVj; the Predica-
tive Adjective has no inflection (see § 14).
2. For the concord of Pronouns and Pronominal Adjectives
with their antecedent (in gender, number and person) see
§§ z'i, Rem. 4; 39 ; 43, Rem. 3, 4; 82, Rem. i, 2; 83, Rem.
I ; 86; 95, I (//); 1C2, 2.
NcTE. A Relative Pronoun referring to an antecedent of the first
or second person takes the verb in the third person, unless the relative is
followed by the personal pronoun, as stated in § 95, i [h], e. g. :
53ift bu e«, bcr fo ^,ittertV — or: J^ift bit ct% bcr bu fo 3itterfi?
Is it you that tremble ?
289. The Appositive Substantive.
1. A substantive or pronoun may have another substantive
attached to it attributively, giving a further description or
definition of the person or thing spoken of. This latter sub-
stantive is said to be in apposition to the former, as :
yjiein A-reunb, bcr 8c§rcr, trug feine ein^iJie 2Baffe, cinen
birfcn Storf, in ber .'pnnb, My friend, the teacher,
carried his only weapon, ? thick stick, in his hand.
2. A substantive or pronoun may also be placed in appo-
sition to a sentence or clause, as :
©r fagte, ba^ er iuiebcr gang gefunb fei, cine ©e^ouiihing,
n)eld)eid) be,;;iDcifeltc^. or; ttiQ? jcfi be^iueifelte, He said he
was quite well again, a statement which I doubted.
■ f
338
LESSON XLVIII.
[§§a8g
ij
3. The appositive substantive is in the same case as the
substantive which it defines, thus :
5iarl (Nona.), muw jiingftcr ^^ruber, ift franf, Charles,
my youngest brother, is ill.
2)ie Mrari!(;eit Marls (Gen. \ >neine» iiingften iBniberg, The
illness of Charles, my youn^^est brother.
(iinc gefdt;rUcI;c Mrant(;eit brobtc (n.tr. Marl (Dat.), meis
nem jungftcn 50vubcr ; or : bctvohtc ( trans. ) Marl (Ace),
meincn iiingften IHubcr, A dangerous illness threat-
ened Charles, my youngest brother.
Notes. — i. A substantive in apposition to a sentence is put in the
Nominative, as in the example under 2, above.
2. An appositive genitive without a determinative word before it,
especially v.hen governing another genitive, is uninflected, as :
Die iliautt)eit be* ifvonpviii^cn, «ol)n bej? bciitfd)iMi .l{aifcr«, The
illness of the Crown-Prince, son of the German Emperor ; but :
2)ie ftranfl)eit be<j .^ironpvin^cn, ticS iilteftcu <^ol)iie8 n. i. m., The
illness of the Crown-Prince, the eldest son, etc.
4. The appositive substantive generally agrees also in
number with the word it defines, except in the case of abstract
substantives and collectives, as :
gornelien^ Minber, i^r Stolj unb iljre j^rcubc, Cornelia's
children, her pride and joy.
2)a lebteu bie ^irtcn, eiu Ijarmlo^ 0^c|d|lciht, There lived
the shepherds, a harmless race. (Schiller. >
5. The appositive substantive agrees in gender when there
is a special form for the feminine, as :
^ie ©raijitatiou ift bie Scntcriu bcr '-Baljnen allev ^im=
rnelsfbrper, Gravitation is the director of the courses
of all heavenly bodies.
6. These rules are also applicable to an apposition intro-
duced by al5, ' as,' e. g. :
§a89]
THE APPOSITIVE SUBSTANTIVE.
339
^6) fanntc ihn a(« §(r\oh ;Nom.), I knew him as (when)
a boy (i. e., when / was a boy) ; — but :
^d) fannte il;n alg ^naben, I knew him when {/if was) a
boy.
EXERCISE XLVIII.
A. 1. Konnen Sie mir eine gute T^uchhandlung empfehlen ?
2. Was fiir Bticher wollen Sie kaufen ? ii. Ich miichte mir die
Werke einiger von den besten deutschen Schriftstellern an-
schaffen. 4. Sie soUten zu Herrn Br?nn gehen ; er hat einen
sehr groszen Vorrat, besonders von den deutschen Klassikern.
5. Wo ist das Gescliaft? (>. Nur einige Schritt(e) von hier,
Nummer fUnf, urn die Ecke ; ich werde Sie begleiten. 7. Das
ware mir sehr angenehm. S. Sie scheinen ein groszer Biicher-
freund zu sein. i). J a, das ist eine Schwache, die mich viel Geld
kostet, aber mir auch viel Vergnugen macht. 10. Hier ist der
Laden ; ich erwarte Sie auf meinem Bureau, wenn Sie fertig
sind. 11. Ich danke vielmals fiir Ihre Aufmerksamkeit. Also,
auf Wiedersehen. 1;2. Zeigen Sie mir gefalligst einige Exem-
plare von Schillers Werken. 13. Gebunden oder ungebunden ?
14. Zeigen Sie mir beides. 15. Aus wie vielen Banden besteht
dieses Exemplar? IB. Aus zwolf, und ich mochte Sie auf den
ausgezeichneten Druck aufmerksam machen. 17. Der Druck
ist sehr klar ; haben Sie noch sonstige (andere) Ausgaben ? 1 H.
Wir haben Ausgaben in groszerem Format', aber nur gebunden.
Hier sind sie. 19. Das Format gefallt mir besser, aber ich
mag den Einband nicht. 20. Dem ist leicht abzuhelfen. Ich
bestelle Ihnen ein Exemplar und lasse es nach Ihrem Ge-
schmack einbinden. :>]. Gut, ich mochte es in braunem Leder
mit Titel gebunden haben ; aber wie viel soil ich Ihnen dafur
bezahlen? 22. Die Ausgabe kostet zehn Thaler, der Ein-
band fiinf, 2H. Bekomme ich Rabatt' ? 24. Ja, zehn Prozent
gegen bare Bezahlung. 25. Ich bezahle bar ; das macht zwei
und vierziir Mark. 2<). Wiinschcn Sie noch etwas? 27. Ich
340
LESSON XLVIII.
[§§ 289-
I
mochte auch Goethes sammtliche Werke in demselben Format
und Einband haben. ;i8. Es thut mir leid, dass wir keine mehr
haben, aber ich kann sie bestellen und gleich iiiit der anderen
Ausgabe einbinden labsen, 29. Zum selben Preise? 30.
Nein, es wird mit Einband achtzehn Thaler netto betragen.
31. Dann besorgen Sie es gefiilligst, und schicken Sie mir die
Werke nebst Rechnung an diese Adresse ; hier ist meine Karte.
32. Ich besorge aMes aufs Sorgfaltigste ; binnen acht Tagen
sollen Sie die Biicher haben.
B. 1. "Books," said Alfonso the Wise of Spain, "are
my most honest councillors : neither fear nor hope prevents
them telling me what my duty is." 2. "It is not my courtiers,"
said this king, " who tell me most honestly what my duty is ,
it is my books." 3. "No courtier dares to say to a king:
'Your Majesty is wrong,' but my books tell me so every day."
4. I asked a gentleman standing near me, if he knew what
time it was, and he answered me that it was exactly twelve
o'clock. 5. More than two hours have passed since then, so
it must now be between two and three o'clock. (>. Was it
you that came to see me yesterday, when I was awa)' from
home .'' 7. Yes, my brother and I wanted to visit you, and
we were sorry not to find you at home. 8. Margaret, the
eldest daughter of Henry VII. of England, married James
IV. of S-^otland. 9. These were the grand-parents of Mary
Stuart, Queen of Scotland. 10. To do what^is^right, and
to be happy, is one and the same, for virtue is its own reward.
11. Dear father and mother, do you remain sitting here until
I go for a carriage to drive you home, for I know you are too
tired to walk. 12. Twelve and twelve make twenty-four, and
twelve times twelve is one hundred and forty-four. 13.
After having seen London and Paris, we had not much desire
to see other cities. 14. I wrote to K.. invitinij him to pnss
his holidays with us, and by return of post received a letter.
2Q0\
THE APPOSITIVK ADJECTIVE.
34t
saying we might expect him in a fortnight. 15. I asked you
first as my oldest friend to assist me in this embarrassment.
l(j. I know we should avoid asking our friends for help until
we have done our utmost to help ourselves. 17. The hunts-
man whistled, and his dogs came running from the wood.
18. Our teacher was^in^the Jiabit^of telling us we should
do what was right, let it cost what it would. IJ). Is your
teacher still living? Yes, he is still living, but he is getting
very old now. 20. Goethe and Schiller are the two greatest
poets of Germany : it is dithcult to say which of the two is
most beloved by the German, people. ;>1. If ^ ou think we
are right, give us some sign of approval : a word, a smile, a
glance will suffice. :>•>. All the rest of our party arrived at
the top of the mountain before sunset, but my friend and I
arrived only at nine in the evening. :>:\. Expect us on Thurs-
day next, health and weather permitting. 24. The gentleman
coming out of that shop is Dr. B., and the lady accompanying
him is his niece. Miss L. 25. Did you ever see the Emperor
William .'* I have never seen him as Emperor of Germany,
but I saw him many years ago as King of Prussia.
LESSON XLIX.
APPOSITION (continued): -APPOSITIVE ADJECTIVES. -
SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION.
290. The Appositive Adjeciive.
I. Attributive Adjectives and participles are said to be
lised appositively when they are separated from their substai>
Uve, as :
3)er ^age, jung, ^iifift^ imb gciftrdr^, Wax ber :^iebling
be^ .|)aiifi>!v The page, young, handsome and
clever, was the favourite of the house.
iJ
M
■
U^
J.KSSON XLIX.
(§2$0
^311 bcv 3cl;IadU fcurig unb |urd)tlo0, iuar ^lionmoutb
fonft iiberaff UH'idUid} unb unfAIiiffig, Ardent and
intrepid in battle, Monmouth was everywhere else
effeminate and irresohite.
2. This appositive adjective or participle is, like the pre-
dicate adjective, uninflected, and is placed at the end of its
clause. It is used much more sparingly in German than in
English, and is almost wholly confined to apposition with the
subject of the sentence (sometimes also with the direct object).
In English the attributive adjective or participle is generally
used appositively when it has more than one modifier, and
always when it has a complement (as in the second example
above). In German on the contrary the attributive adjective
is freely used in all such cases before a substantive. All such
appositive adjectives or participles, unless referring to the
subject (or direct object) of the sentence, must be rendered
in German either by an attributive or by a relative clause. The
following examples will serve to illustrate to what extent the
appositive adjective can be used in German, and to show how
it is to be replaced in German in various connections.
{a) English Appositive = German Appositive (see also the
examples under i, above) :
(Engl.) Beleaguered with present distresses and
the most horrible forebodings on every side,
roused to the highest pitch of indignation, yet
forced to keep silence and wear the face of
patience, Schiller could endure this constraint no
longer. (Carlyle, Life of Schiller.)
{Germ.) 9Sou gegcuiudvtiijni 9JiJten unb ben f(l^rec!Iid;ften
Sl^nungeu i)on alien 3citcu Jcimgcjur^t, bi§ auf ben
l;oc^[ten ©rab ctttriiftct, gcjttungctt jebod), ftilljus
fc^ttjeigcn unb bie 5!Jlaefe bev ©cbulb gu tragen, fonnte
Sd^iKer biefcu 3^tt"S "^^ Idnger erbulben.
Sago]
THE APPOSITIVE ADJECTIVE.
343
raint no
NoTr..--In this example, as in those under i. above, the adjectives
(participles) beleaguered, f tc, are in apposition to the subject ' Schiller.'
{J>) English AppositiTe Adjective == German Attributive
Adjective or Relative Clause :
{Engl.) To judge from the quantity of light emitted
from Jie brightest stars, there is (one has) reason
to suppose that some of them are much greater
than the sun. ^
(i) \ (Germ.) "^adj bet toon beit bctlften Sternen ouggeftra^I^
ten 2irf)tmafje 511 urteilen, f)at \\\axi ©runb anjunefjmen,
ba^ einige bation biel grb^ev finb aU bie Sonne ; or :
narf) ber Sicbtmaffc ju iirteilen, ttjcl^e u. ]. lu. augge=
fiiro^U luirb u. \. \o.
{E?igl.) In the Isle of Man vast trees are found
standing firm on their roots,
(ii) -' {Germ.) 2luf ber ^\x\d 9Jian finbet man ntad)tige §8aumc,
metric auf ben 3Bur§eIn fcftftc^cn ; or : mdcf)tige, auf
. ben SBurjeln fcfifie^cnbc '-Sdumc.
Notes. — i. The participles in these examples are in apposition to the
objects 'quantity (of light)' and 'tree' respectively.
2. Observe the position of the Germ, attributive adj. immediately before
the substantive.
(c) English Appositive Adjective = German Attributive
Adjective :
{Engl.) Bruce caused his men to lie down to take
some sleep at a place about half a mile distant
from the river.
( Germ.) 'ikuce lie^ fcine Seute fid) nn einer ungefdbr
cine l)albe 9JZeile bom ^^hiffc cntfcrittcn ©telle nieber=
Icgen, nm ein n»emg %\x fdUafen.
NoTK. — An attributive clause is preferable here, since a relative
clause would separate the clause of purpose (iUll, etc.) from the infin.
(Uieberiegcn) on which it depends.
(i)
i
344
LESSON xLrx.
[§§ 290-
(ii)-^
Note.
{Bngi:) During the eruption of the volcano, the dark-
ness occasioned by the ashes was so profound,
that nothing hke it was ever experienced
^"■'x's.^'5""*' ^''^ *"«6™*'^« K'6 %mmi toav bie
burd b.e a(i4.e ttcrurforfite Tvinftcrnis f„ tief, toie man
me ctlt)a« aiinlidieS toahrgcnommen battc
bi,l, ,J ""'-"'''•^' y' 'he position of the subject ,,fUr the verb for
^^:zi^ ''''-''- --'-'- ^" ^--- - ais:tt
("V I ^,f"^^'\ j! ^^' ^'^ P^^^'^ advantageous for defence.
(^«.<) This plant has changed into two distinct
vegetables, as unlike each other as is each of
them to the parent-plant.
(Gen;^.) Dtcfe ^^flan^c hat fic(, in jtyei berfc^iebene @e=
mufeavtcn uerimanbelt, mclt^c einanber fo unafintiA
fmb, line jebe bcrfelben ber SJhitteri^franje ift
of ":^;;^:::^:;:rtt::Tr'"" '^ ^— — „„t
3»1. Syntax of the Prepositions.
The cases governed by the various Prepositions are fully
t eated of m Lessons IX, XIII, A, and XXXVIII, and tlreir
icl.omm.c use is furtlier defined in Less. XXXIX
ad iecdvefr °^ ™™^' r^"' •■''"'" "' "'^" "' substantives and
," ess d ll '■"''° "" ""' ""'" ■■" -^'g-fication, is ex-
.^ er,^' P-PO-t.o„s. The proper use of prepositions
aftu ,erbs, etc., must be learnt fron, practice and rom the
dictionary ; but below is given, for convenient reference he
regimen of particular classes of verbs, etc., which differ most
widely from their English equivalents.
[§§ aso^
291]
SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITIONS.
345
I. at, of = iificr -f- Ace, of sorrow, Joy, wonder etc.,
as:
Verbs.
, fid) drgern, be vexed
erroten, blush
erftauneu, be astonished
fic^ frcuen, rejoice
fid^ gram en, grieve
flagen, complain
Iad)en, laugh
fic^ frf)amen, be ashamed
[potten, mock
fic^ (ber)h)itnbern, wonder
Substantives.
Strger, vexation
Grvotimg, blush
©rftauncn, astonishment
?^'rcube, joy (also an -}- Dat.)
©ram, grief
^lage, complaint
©eldditcr, laughter
©diam, 'i-^cid)dnumg, shame
(5)30tt, mockery
33crnnniberiing, surprise
Also the Adjectives argerlid), vexed ; bofc, angry (at things);
empfinblid), sensitive ; froh, luftig, merry.
Note.— m\t takes nilf + Ace. when referring to persons.
2. for = nuf + Ace, of expectation, etc., as : gefa^t, pre-
pared ; ^offcn, ^^offnung, hope ; marten, wait.
3. for = nni^, of longing, inquiring, etc., as :
*^^^bs. Substantives.
biirften, thirst 2}urft, thirst
forfd)en, inquire j^orfdnuig, inquiry
fjungern, hunger hunger, hunger
iagen, hunt c^agb, chase .
fudien, search 2uft, )
fid; fcf)nen, long
berlangen, desire
33erlangen, )
desire
_ Also the Adjectives burftig, thirsty ; elirgeijig, ambitious ; gie.
rig, greedy ; ^ungrig, hungry.
4. for = urn, of entreaty, etc., as : Htten, ask ; Bubten, court •
[le^en, beg ; fic^ {ummern, concern one's self.
23
34^
LESSON XLIX.
[§a9«
5. from == bar -{- Dat., of protection, etc., as : ^en)a{;ren^
preserve ; {;uton, protect ; rctten, save.
6. in = au + Dat., of plenty, want, etc., as: arm, poor-,
frucfctbar, fruitful; reid), rich ; f^luadv weak ; ftarf, strong.
7. in or on = auf + Ace, of ionfidcnce, etc., as :
Verbs, Substa?i.tives.
fief) triiften, boast Stol^, pride
[id; Herlaffen, rely 93cr(ai reliance
ucrtrauen, trust 33ertrauon, confidence
8. of = an 4- Dat., of plenty, want, doubt, etc., as :
Verbs.
ig
Substantives.
'OJJangel, want
9teid)tum, wealth
tlberflufj, superfluity
3iT??ifel, doubt
fe^lcu (iinpers.), > ,
, ,, ' - be wantinj
mauijdn " )
•^njcifcfn, doubt
bcrjtoeifcln, despair
Also the Adjectives franf, sick ; leer, empty.
q. of = an + Ace, of remembrance, etc., as :
Verbs. Substantives.
beiifen, think ©ebanfe, thought
erinncvn, remind (Srinnerung, recollection
fid^ crinncvn, recollect
Note. These verbs also govern the Genitive. See § 245.
io. of = auf + Acc. of suspicion, envy, pride, etc., as,
S ubstanti7>cs. Adjectives.
XHdU (gelicn), (pay) attention ad;tfam, |
iHrgmobn, suspicion aufmei!fam, j "'^^^'^^^^^
(i'ifovfud)t, jealousy avglDobnifd), suspicious
3^eib, envy eifevfiid;tig, jealous
eit J, vain
neibiyd^, envious
ftolg, proud
agi]
SYNTAX or THE PREPOSITIONS.
347
1 1, of = Dor -f Dat, of fear, etc., as :
Verbs. Substantives.
\\^ furc^ten, be afraid c^urdU, Icar
„ erfc^recfen, be terrified ©cfirerf, terror
„ grauen, dread ©rauen, dread
Also the adjectives bange, afraid; fid;er, certain, sure.
12. to = nn + Ace, ot add,..ss, etc., as: nbreffiercn, ad-
dress ; fc^veibcn, write ; fic^ vidUoi, turn ; fid; Joenben, apply.
13. to = gegcit, after Adjectives signifying an affection of
the mind, as : barmfjergig, merciful ; feinblid.^ hostile ; freunb.
hc^, friendly; gerec^t, just; rtleicfigiftig, indilTerent; gncibig
gracious ; graufani, cruel ; nac^ficbtig, indulgent.
EXERCISE XLIX.
1. My sister is vexed at not receiving an invitation to
the party. 2. lam tired of waiting for Charles; let us go
without him. 3. Oh no, do not let us go yet ; he will be angry
at us. If we do not wait for him. 4. Charles has many good
qualities, but you cannot rely upon him. 5. The boy is proud
of the watch given to him by his father. 6. If you lose your
way in a city, it is always safest to apply to a policeman. 7
I have no doubt that this is good advice. 8. Mary is angry
at Sarah, because Sarah has made sport of her. 9. Our
neighbour has been ill for some days ; he complains of rheuma-
tism, and says he has caught cold. 10. I am less vexed at
his not coming than at his not sending us word. 11. The war
had already lasted more than four years, and people were long-
ing for peace. ll>. Diogenes is said to have gone once in dav-
hght through the streets of the city, carrying at the same tim'e
a lantern. 13. People began to laugh at him and mock him,
asking him what he was looking for. 14. He replied that h^-
a iii^ .„f an ^ioneoi man. lo. iIxk:. general postponed
attacking the enemy, because his army was weak in artillery.
Iff!'
348
LESSON L.
U§ afta-
16. Mr. Kalk, the architect, promised that my house should be
finished before the 1st July, but I doubt it. 17. The Province
of Ontario is rich in iron, but is wanting in coal to smelt it.
18. We have been thinking for some time of selling our house,
but we cannot find anyone who is willing to buy it. 19. Be
good enough to remind me to buy some postage-stamps, when
we go past the post-ofiice. 20. We may learn as much by pay-
ing: attention to what we see and hear as we can learn from
books. 21. The horses, frightened by a passing train, shied,
and were on the point of running away. 2i. The first settlers
in this country had much to endure : they lived for the most
part in houses built of [the] trunks^of^trees and covered in
many cases with bark. 23. (Just) as many people lost their
lives (the life) by the famine occasioned by the earth-
quake, as by the earthquake itself. 24. The bad news re-
ceived yesterday has prevented our going to town to-day.
25. There are men who grow richer by giving than others
[do] by receiving.
LESSON L.
WORD-ORDER.
292. The Essential Parts of a Sentence.
I. Every sentence contains three essential ,: arts, viz : the
Subject, or that of which something is asserted, the Predi-
cate, or that which is said of the Subject, and, thirdly, the
Verb or Copula, the word which makes the assertion, and
which may include the Predicate (as in the simple tenses of
a verb), but does not necessarily do so. Thus, in the sen-
tence : ' He sings,' ' he ' is the Subject, while 'sings ' contains
both the Verb or Copula and the Predicate, i. t., it not only
asserts som.ething of the Subject, but al ) says what that
something is, being equivalent to ' is singing.' In the sen-
«93]
POSITION OF THE VERB.
349
tence : ' He has sung,' on the other hand, ' has ' is the V,rb
(or Copula), ' sung ' is what is asserted, or the Predicate.
2. The Verb (or Copula) is in German the member of the
sentence, the position of which is most absokitely fixed- it is
the cardinal point or hinge on which the sentence turns. '
293. Normal Position of the Verb.
In German, there are three normal positions for the Verb
accordmg to the nature of the sentence. '
(a) The Verb stands first :
I. In Interrogative Sentences expecting the answer 'yes '
or ' no ' (i. e., when the verb is the question-word, see
§ 23, 2), as :
Sft SI;r Sruber njofjl ? Is your brother well >
2Birb er fommcn? Will he come.?
^Ci^en <Sie ^arl? Is your name Charles ?
2. In sentences expressing a command or 7vish, as :
©cMcn eie mic^ morgen, Come^and^see me to-
morrow.
mmt id) gu §aufe ! Were I (would that I were) at
home !
Note -The verb may either follow or precede the subject in the
3- vbing. bubj. used as Imperative (see § 268, i), as:
®Ott bef)ilte bid^ ! or: ^cl)ute bid) (Siott! God preserve thee I
3. In Conditional clauses, when the conjunction mm is
omitted (compare § 59), as .
JBBarc ba^ SBetter fd;i3ii, fo iviirbe i4> au^gefjen, If the
weather were fine, I should go out.
(b) The Verb comes second (is the second idea) in all
principal assertive sentences (compare § 20), as :
^er 5Kenfc^ ifi ftevblicf), Man is mortal, '
,i
350
LLSSON L.
[§393
i ii
•1 .1 i
^er iiinflcre 'il^rubcr meinco ootcv^^ ^ooldbfr \o Iranf irar,
ift tci. My father's younger brotbei', who was so ill,
is dead.
©eftcrn !iHbcnb ftnrb bcr '^H'uber meiue^^isaiev-^, Yesterday
evening my fatlier's brother died.
(SolDobl (nid;t luiv) mciu ^^aUx, ioie (jonbcrn audi) mcin
5^.nibcr ttJCr jiUiiei^cn, Both (not only) my father, and
(but also) my brother were (was) present.
Remarks. — i. As in the last three examples above, the
first member of the sentence may be complex, with several
attributes, complcmenis, etc.; the verb is still the second
idea.
2. The coordinating conjunctions pro'\r (§ 236; do not
count as members of the sentence (see the last example above),
but adverbial conjunctions throw the subject after the verb.
NoTK. Certain adverbial phrases, of a more or less interjectional
nature, such as: fvdlid), true; jil, yes; ja lUOl)l, to be sure; \m\\, no;
fur;;, in short; lUit cilinn 5i?0Vt, in a word; ^wi, well, are not regarded as
part of the sentence, and do not tlirow the subject after the verb, thus:
grcilid). irt) link e^ nid)t fcUift 0cfcl)cii, Tiae, I did not see it
myself.
iiurj (mit eincm aSorO; id) glaubc c« uid)t, In short (in a word),
I do not believe it.
®Ut, id) tucrtic tommcn, Well, I shall come.
3. In assertive sentences of an emphatic or exclamatory
character, the verb sometimes comes first, especially when
the particle bodi is present, as :
^ft ba^5 eiu ^ilsctter! (= J^a^ fur ein ffietter ift ba^!)
What weather !
^cbc idi'^"> biv bO{^ n^f«f\^ ! I told you so !
4. If a dependent clause or a quotation precede the prin-
cipal sentence (compare § 294, l\ Rem. 2, below), such clause
or quota.tion is regarded as a single member of the sentence,
and requires the verb immediately after it, as ;
^93]
POSITION OF THE VERH.
351
SDa ic^ fclbft mrf;t fommen fonntc, f ' icftc id; mciiun So^
As I could not come myself, I sent my son.
%h id) antam, tuor c^> fduMi iiad) lo lU;r, When i arrived,
it was after 10 o'clock.
3Bcnn cr {innmcn [of fc, jttfr&c id; jjj .'oaufe in. If he
should come, I .hall be at home.
,.m UMlI iiioinc I'dify.aK- nd^t (crncn," jrfjric ber unartige
Miuibo, "1 will not learn my lesion," cried the naughty
boy.
Notes -i. After de,Kndent ^u.ulitional and adverbial clauses (except
those of Lvu) the particle fo usi.allv introduces the principal sentence, as :
^a idi nid)t felbit foiiuiini l\ iti', fo fdiirftc id) inciucn ^of)u. '
Seuii cr tuiimicn foUtc, fo luerbr id) ^u >^auic fr
2. This pa. ucle fo should always be inserted after a cu..ditional clause
wita tt .tin omitted ; in c..lloquiaI usage, however, the principal sentence
sometimes has the subject d./on- the verb, fo being omitted, as:
5K>nri' a fril()or flcfoiinitrii, fo fiattc cr mid) gofd)en ;
or (colloquially) :
SBfire er friih r ncfo.imeu, cr t^diU mid) !icfoI)eii.
This latter construction, Lnvever, should not be Mnitated.
_ 3- In /r^/^r//^«.;/ clauses introduced by j,., Qcfio, or ur io, the depen-
o.nt clause comes first, and the verb is preceded by tl,. w, : ' expres-
sing the comparison, as well as by the particle j.', etc., as
'Micium- bie md)tc finb, b.fio (ur^r frtft bio ^a.^e, The longer
the nights are, the shorter are tiie days.
(^) The Verb last in dependent sentences and ques-
tions (compare §§ ^,2 ; 88), as .
3c^ t»eif„ bag bcr Hfcnid^ [terblid) ^ 1 ow that mnn
is mortal.
mn mann, ttJcIt^n leftern bicr mnr, A mnn, who was
here yesterday.
Scf) gebe, mil es fc^on fpat ift, 1 go because it is late.
m JiH'ifj ni*t mv i)kv GciDcfcn ift, X) not know who
has been here {t/c'/>. question).
rt"
*( 1
352
LESSON L.
[§§ 293
Remarks. — i. Indirect statements with baf^ omitted
have the construction of principal sentences (verb second;
see §§ 20; 87, 3), as:
(?v fagte, ev fjobr ce; Deroeffen, He said he had forgotten it.
2. Conditional chiuses with UKini omitted follow the
question-order {\Q:xh first ; compare § 59), as:
aOiirc ba^i *^i> otter [duMt, fo univbe \6) nu^geh' i. If the
weather were fine, I should go out.
3. The Verb precedes two infinitives (or infinitive and
part.; see § 199,3), as in the compound tenses of Modal
Auxiliaries, thus :
Gr [ante, bafj er nicM ()alic fommcu nioflcn. He said that
he had not intended to come.
4. Clauses with iJcmt (='unless,' § 241, \^),\\^V\\\g negative
force, follow the construction of a principal sentence (verb
second), as :
^c^) laffe 2)idj nic^it, Tu fcgncft inic^) bcnn, I will not let
Thee go, unless Thou bless me.
^c^ luerbc nid^t toiumcn, C0 fci bcnn, bof; ba^ ^Better fcbbn
iDCvbc, I shall not come, unless (it be tha'^) the
weather should become fine.
5. ^(^hiw and fcin, as auxiliaries of tense, arc frequently
omitted at the end of a dependent clause, as ;
©r loiujnctc, baf^ cr ba-S ^-enftcv ^,e-/tvod;oi (^olsc under.
stood), He denied that he had broken the window,
^c^ fvaojte ifui, ob er juv vedUen ^eit ani^efoininen (fcj
understood), I asked him if he had arrived in good
time.
294, Position of the Subject.
The Subject is placed :
(a) In Direct Questions, if it be the question-word, at
the beginning ; otherwise immediately after the Verb, as:
P
d
294]
POSITION OF THE SUBJECT.
353
aSJer ift ^ier gelDcfcn ? Who has been here ?
3ft cr i)KX gctucfcnV Has he been here ?
2Bann fommt ^^re Si^tticfter ? When does your sister
come ?
(d) In Principal Assertive Sentences, the norma/ po-
sition of the Subject h Jirsi ; but if any other word precede
the Verb, the Subject immediately follows the Verb, as:
^(f) )Merbc inovi^cn nidit auoiic(;en ; or :
^Jorflen iuerbe ir^ nid)t au^fle{^cn, I shall not go out to-
morrow.
Remarks.— i. Tn point of fact it may be said that, in a
principal sentence, the Subject follows the Verb quite as often
as it precedes it.
2. A preceding dependent clause, or a quotation, always
throws the subject after the verb, except when, after a con-
ditional clause with ucnil omitted, the principal sentence is
not introduced by the particle fo (compare § 293, 4, Note 2,
above).
3. When the real {logical) subject is represented by eg
before the verb as grammatical subject, the logical subject
immediately follows the verb, as :
(5^ ift mcinc (Sr^mcftcr gcmefen. It was my sister.
i,c) In Dependent Sentences, the Subject, if a relative
pronoun, h-gins the sentence, otherwise the Subject imme-
diately follows the connecting word, as :
^er gjJaun, lucli^cr geftern bier mar. The man who was
here yesterday.
^er mam, ben i(^ geftent fai). The man, whom I saw
yesterday.
%i} fav3te ifn-, ba^ ir§ fommcn toerbe, I told her that I
should come.
I
i
i I
354
LESSON L.
[§§ 294-
Note. — F-rsonal Pronouns, and especially the reflective f|^, some-
times prece('e the Subject, both in principal sentences with the Subject
after the Verb, and in dependent clauses, as :
a)foi'gcu roiU fid) meiu 5Brubcr toerl)eiraten, My brother is going to
get married to-morrow.
Gr fugt?, bafj i^it bicfer SJicnfc^ beleioigt ^obt, Ke said that this
fellow had insulted him.
296.
Position of the Predicate.
1. The Predicate, if not included in the Verb (see § 292,
I, above), may consist of a participle or infinitive (as in the
compound tenses of the verb); or it may be a substantive, an
adjective, or the separable prefix of a compound verb.
2. The Predicate is placed last in Principal Sentences
and in Direct Questions; in Dependent Sentences it
immediately precedes the Verb.
3. If the Predicate is compound, consisting of two or more
of the elements under i, above, they will occur in the follow-
ing order: I. Predicative adjective (or substantive) ; 2. Sep-
arable prefix ; 3. Participle ; 4. Infinitive ; thus :
I'RED. Adj.
@r foil fteto gegen fei len armen 53ruber fe^r frcigctiifl
Part. Inf.
gctoefcit fcitt. He is said to have always been very
liberal to his poor brother.
Pref. Part. Inf.
©ie imivbc fd>on cjeftcrn ah - gcrcift jcin. She would have
departed yesterday.
Remark. — Any one of these elements of the Predicate
may, for emphasis, occupy the normal position of the subject
in \}ci& first place {before the Verb), as :
Srf)lin ift baa 3i^cttcr hcutc nid;t. The weather is not (at
all) fine to-dav (i. e., it \^ far from fine).
291
pis
tra
(ol
sul
296]
POSITION OF THE PREDICATE. 355
6i)(bat ift mein §8mber, nic^t ^Jiatrofc, My brother is a
soldier, not a sailor.
^iiiQCn tt)itt id) WoU, aber ntc^t fpielen, I will sing, but
not play.
Note. - The Separable Prefix and the Participle are, however, rarely
placed in this position, except in elevated or poetic diction, or for con-
trast, as:
IWiebcr ftetg' id) jum @efecf)tc, I descend (down I go) to the light.
(Schiller.)
3urUlTe blcibi ber .f na^jpeu '^xo% The retinue of squires remains
behind {ibid.).
Sntfdjloffcn ift cr nlfobatb, He is resolved at once (i/>iJ.).
©cgebcn Ijnbe id) il)m baS i8urf) nid)t, fonbern nnr geliel)eii, I did
not give him the book, I only lent it to him.
296. Position of Objects and Cases.
1. Objects (not governed by a preposition) precede adjects
(objects governed by a preposition), as :
^c^) f)a6e einen Srief an i^n {an meinen 33ater) gefc^rieben,
I have written a letter to him (to my father).
2. Pronouns (unless governed by prepositions 1 precede
substantives, as :
^cf) \:}ah^ i^m einert SBrief gefc&rteben, I have written him
a letter.
3. Of Pronouns, Personal before "other Pronouns, as:
^c^ {jaht ijm bag (etUjag) gegeben, I have given him
that (something)o
4. Of the cases o^ Personal Pronouns, the Accusative precedes
the Dative, and both precede the Genitive ; but the reflexive
[id^ usually precedes all others, as :
Gr l^at fi(^ (Dat.) c^ gemerft. He has taken.^^note.^of
it (for hinuelf).
IT
mwimHt ^tl^M
I
356
LESSON L.
m»9^
5. Of Substantives, the Person (unless governed by a pre-
position) precedes the thing; the Indirect precedes the Direct
Object, and the Remoter Object (in the Genitive) follows
both, as :
3c^ Jjabe S^rcr Si^tocficr bas SSuc^ gelief^en, I have lent
your sister the book.
©r hai bicfcn 9Konn be^ 2)ie6[ta^Ig befc^ulbigt, He has
accused this man of theft.
6. Yhe personal {or subjective) Genitive (compare § 243, 2)
may either precede or follow the substa ilive which governs it,
as:
Witxnti a5oter§ ^au%, My father's house ; or :
Xa^^Qxx^ mcincS ISBotcrs.
7. The limiting Genitive (see §243,3) follows, exc?pt in
elevated or poetic diction, as :
I'a^ Gnbe bcfl ^ticgcg, The end of the war.
8. Cases governed by adjectives precede the adjective, l.ut
a substantive with a preposition may follow the //-j'/^//Vd;//V^ a, 1
jective, as :
3cf) bin i^m ban!6ar fiir fciiic ©cmiifjuiii^cn, T am grate
ful to him for his exertion.
297. Position of Adverbs and Adverbial Expressions.
1. In general, adverbs precede the word they modify, as:
3c^ bin \t\^x miibe gelDorben, I have become very tired.
@r ^ai bag ^^urf) wx^i gelefen, He has not read the book.
2. Adverbs of Time precede objects (except pronouns) and
all other Adverbs or Adverbial expressions, as :
Time. Object. Place. Manner.
^r ^at {)cftcrn bag SOuc^ ju S:>a\\\^ febv flcif^ii^ ftubievt,
He studied the book very diligently at home yesterday.
agsi
POSITION OF ADVERBS, ETC.
357
3. Adverbs of place precede those of manner, and both
follow objects, as in the above example.
4. Of several Adverbs of like kind, the more general precede
the special, as :
SWorgcii urn ge^n U^r, At ten o'clock to-morrow.
Remarks. — I. Any object, adject, adverb or adverbial
phrase may occupy the normal position of the subject at the
head of a principal sentence (before the verb, compare § 295,
Rem., above), as :
aWcittcn J8otcr ^a6eic§ md;t gefe^en, I did not see my
father.
©cftcril lam id) ju fpat, I came too late yesterday.
2. The re/ati7'e position of objects, abverbs, etc., is the same
in principal and subordinate sentences.
298. Position of other Members of the Sentence.
1. Attributive Adjectives and Participles immediately
precede the sut/st««tive they modify, as :
@in §«r 13?evteiaigung fef)r fliinftigcr Ort, A place very
favourable for defence.
^ag auf bem ^uget ftc^cnbe .^au^. The house standini;
on the hill.
2. -Prepositions precede their case, with the exceptions
given in the lists (see §^r" 4^) ; 51 ; 223).
3. Conjunctions ccme between the words or clauses they
connect, as :
5Jlein 33ruber unb feine ^amilie nnb bter. My brother
and his familv are here.
3c^ tt)ei|3, ba^ 3ie nicfct fommen tvivhta, I Know that
you will not come.
ir II
{EJ
m\i I
iM
.i^i^l
!■
pirj^^^m
^^^^1
. :
35^
Lesson t.
t§§298-
Vote. — In dependent clauses that precede the sentence on which
th. y depend the conjunction is first, as:
aScil id) frnnf mar, tonnte itJ) nic^t fommen, Because I was ill, I
could not come.
^.^99. Construction of Incomplete Clauses.
^^he Word-order of Incomplete or Elliptical Clauses is the
sai.ie ss that of Con. jlete Clauses, there being no Verb in the
fo>-ner. Jn Infinitive Clauses the Infinitive comes last; and in
Aj jositive Clauses, the Adjective or Participle comes last, thus :
©ute ^reunbe (311) f)abtn ift ein grofee^ ©liicf. To have
good friends is a great blessing.
5Dic ^uuftin CI 311 maUw, The art of painting in oil.
Sc^ iuerbe mic^ fveuen, '3ie morgen ju fe^en, I shall be
glad to see you to-morrow.
2)ie§ afu^ be. mir benfcnb, fd)lief id) ein. Thinking all
this to myself, I fell asleep.
SSon bem 2arm oufgefi^rcdt, f^rang er ai:^ bent Sette,
Aroused by the noise, he jumped out of bed.
300.
Interrogative Sentences.
1. Direct Questions always i^egm with the question-word, the
other members of the sentence occupying the same relative
position as in principal sentences. For the position of the
Verb and Subject, see §§ 293, 294, above.
2. Questions in German very frequently have the form of a
principal assertive sentence, the question being marked only
by the rising inflexion of the voice, as :
3)u ^ofl bcine 2e!tion nic^t gelevnt? You have not
learnt your lesson t
Notes.— I. This construction often occurs with a Dof^ in the sen-
tence, as :
30t]
rNTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.
.^59
^n ttJirfl tto^ fommen? You will be
not?).
sure to come (will you
Grift ioiftnicfitfranf? He is not ill (i, he .? I hope not).
2. Exclamatory sentences frequently have the construction of depen-
dent questions, but may also have that of direct questions, as :
2Bci- mitfle()en Wrfte ! (Happy he) who might go with you I
aBie tft bog Sisetter f(})i)ii ! How beautiful is the weather 1
301.
RECAPITULATION.
General Remarks on German Construction.
The following are the principal points in which German
differs from English Construction :
1. The Verb (containing the Copula) is the hinge on
which the sentence turns, and has its position most absolutely
fixed.
2. The Subject does not, as in English, necessarily precede
the Verb in Principal Sentences; but if any other member of
the sentence precede the Verb, an inversion of the subject
takes place, and it is thrown after the verb.
Notes. -I. The terms inversion, inverted sentence, often used by
grammarians, refer to the Subject only, not to the Verb.
2. This inversion of the Subject is also found in Interrogative and
Imperative Sentences (see §§ 293 ; J94 ; 300, above).
.. ^;7^J '"^^^^T "^'"^ "^ sentences is marked by the varying position of
the Verb, which is last in Dependent Sentences.
4. All the other parts of the sentence, except what precedes the Verb
are included or bracketed between the Verb and the Predicate.
5. Dependent Sentences (incl-uinj. Infinitive and Appositive Clauses-
see § 299, above) are marked off fioru the sentences on which they depend
by commas. j v ^
I'll
I
li
360 SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON Q. t§§S02-
SUPPLEMENTARy LESSON G.
COMPLEX SENTENCES. -CLAUSE-ORDER.
302. Compound and Complex Sentences.
1. A sentence is compound when it contains more than one coordinate
clause ; complex when it contains a iubcf-dinate clause, thus :
Compound: 3d) cjliiq nn il)m t)or[iei, taniitc i(]n alier nid)t,
I went past him, but did not know him.
Complex : Gr f n^te inir, bnfj n fomntnt lucvbe,
He told me that he would come.
2. Any subordinate clause may itself be complex, having another clause
dependent upon it, as:
3d) emnrtete it)u geftevn, tacil cr mir nt1rf)viclieu Ijtittc, tjnft fcine
©efrijiifte ba(b becnbifit \v\\ Unutni, I expected him yesterday,
because he had written me, that his business would soon be
finished.
Note. — In the above example, the clause loeil er, etc., depends on the principal
clause preceding it; whereas the clause bag feine ©efc^aftc, etc., depends on the clause
weil er, etc., which is itself subordinate.
Remark. — In the following observations as to the relative position
or order of clauses, the term "principal sentence " includes all sentences,
though themselves subordinate, which occupy the relation of a principal
or governing sentence to the clauses dependent upon them.
303. I. "in Complex Sentences, the position of the various depen-
dent clauses is regulated by the following general principle :
Finish the principal sentence before introducing the sub-
ordinate clause.
2. Thus, in the example in § 302, 2, above, it would be wrong to insert
the last clause (bilfj . . . ttJiirbeu) within the preceding clause on which
it depends, thus :
Scit ev miiv bajj feine @efd)nfte bceubigt \n\\ tiuirben, ge|ci)vieben
I)attc.
3. Similarly the following construction would make the complex sen-
tence quite unintelligible:
3)ie ®ch)o()ul)ctt mug tie j^ettigteit eine ^c^^z ol)ne iibev bie 9?egel
ju benteii ju t^un tjctlci^cn.
The observance of the above rule will require the clauses of ibis sen-
tence to be arranged .is follows :
305J COMPOUND AND COMPLEX SENTENCES. 361
2)ie ©emo^nMt muB bic J^ertinfeit ftcrld^cn, eine ®arf,e m thun
tt re" d- ^^^;'V^-"''*^"'^"^"' "^^^^ ^P-^^^-) --tit";
the ead.ness of do.ng a thing without reflecting upon the rule.
is :.^Z^r'''''''" '''''-' ''' ^-'-^- °^ t^e separable prefix
|eiter ging bie @onne an jenem 2«orgen, an bem n)ir abreiften our
The sun rose cheerfully on that morning on which we set o^t ^'
The prefix ouf should be inserted after mirgcn.
the1>?rtultTf 'rr.""''"'"' ""'^' '^"^"^^' ^*^^"d immediately afte.
the particular part of the sentence to which they refer as •
S)ie ^rlcftcrin toot, iftrct mttin felftfi getudfil^t' unb flefietftaf
lod I '". '""',7'' ^"'^^'"^' '^^"^^ -d consecraterby tie
goddess herself, speaks to thee ^
f iben'sZ:: r" ^^' ^ '''-' ^^-^^^ °^ ^-^--^ t^«^ ^^^^-t
Oft Doigcmo MI, I have often reproached him with this mis-
take of misuuerpreting every action.
Scf) fomue biejvrngc, cb tmt fiimcn, ntd,t fieantmorten, I could
not answer the question, whether we were coming.
305. Relative Clauses must immediately follow the antecedent : '
pitllsIntetVrr ^-^^^^---^i— o, precedes the verb of a
1 he man who was here yesterday came again to-dav
not know the man, who was here yesterday.
Note. -If the antecedent does not precede the v^rh t), 1 .- ' • •
S»teiflb,r5)l„„„„,rt.r(,.!o,n,n™,,„,M«„.f „
3« I)06c ben *«„„ „i,i„ ,,,„„„^ „,,j,„ ^ ^ J- '
guify. T" *"' "'"""°" ''^ *= ="'"="- ™W cause ambi-
fnand, whom I had „„t seen foojcng^.i™.. ""^
^62
SUPPLEMFN'TARY LESSON G.
t§30«
:M'
I A
306. A Snhordinatc or Dependent Clause (with the exceptions
specified in Remarks 3, 4, below) may also, whether subjective, objective
or adverbial, procde the principal clause, in which case it throws the
Subject after the Verb, as:
CD ifl) fomiiicn (onn (sui>jective clause), ift juicifelljaft, It is
doubtful whether I can come.
aScr flcr ,511 rid fccljuiit (subjective clause], iinrb iveiilg (eiften, He
who considers too much, will accomplish little.
^nft cr mil' nidjt fictdjriclien ^subjective clause), miid)t iiiir gorgcn,
[The fact] that he has not written to me, causes me anxiety.
Cb id) trcrtJc fomn-en fbnnea {objccti^'c clause), lucifi icf) iiidit,
I do not know, whether I shall be able to conK
^nft cr fronf ift {objective clause), {)abe id) geftern , qort, I heard
yesterday, that he was ill.
Ta id) frnnf hjor (adverbial clause], foiiiite id) nid)t tommeii, As
I was sick, I could not come.
Remarks. — I. Such a clause takes the place of a subject, object or
predicate, as the case may be, ' before the verb i compare §§293, b.
Rem. 4; 294, Rem. 2; 295, Rem ).
2. Adverbial clauses in this way bring expressions of time, place, etc.,
but more especially those of can^c, nearer to the verb, which is the part
of the sentence they modify.
3. (.M\\y subject i^■c relative clauses with the f^w/^//;/*/ relative mcr, mnvS,
can stand at the head of a sentence, as in the second example above.
NoTF.-Tlie relative bcr is sometimes used instead of luer as compound relative
(includmg both relative and antecedent), especially in the plural, as:
'^M fid) s\\ t)avt ocvnnnnen batteit, f(or)oii ini§ bom Sonbc. (Schiller) ; i. e.,
5»irifiu<^cn, wetdic ii. f. u.. • or : -iBa- fid) jii Ijart iiersinii,]en hattc (sln?.)|
flod 11. y TO., Those who had committed too great offences, fled from tha
country.
4. Clauses which modify not the whole sentence but a particular
member, cannot stand at the head of the sentence, but stand either
immediately after the word to which they refer, or after the conclusion
of the sentence (compare § 297, above). This remark applies especially
to relative clauses (but see Rem. 3, above, and Note), and to comparative
clauses with oI§, as:
>Sein llnniiirf loar grbucr, old er crtroflf n fonntc (or : ^u grofi,
%\i Oa^ ei- est u. f. \x\), His misfortune was greater than he
could bear.
f
?306] COMPOUND AND COMPLEX SENTENCES.
3^3
Note. -Comparative clauses with n>ie may precede, as:
ffite im Mawb ocr tio(\d rinjit,
Wan ft* jcbcr jiiitficfi tliun,
As the bird sings amid the boughs, let every one enjoy himself. (Schiller).
EXERCISE G.
J;,VT "77«''^'^' «^*>-^ - great botanist, to give, in the present
tate of our knowledge, a co.nplete definition of what (^ that which) is to
as ">la,u "' 'tT ""T';- " -"^■■-'-^'""ion to what one must regard
as a plant. 2 The good king Robert Bruce, who was always watchful
and prudent, had received inforn.ation(.^tlinbc) of (Don) the intention of
hese .nen to attack him suddenly. ,. Bruce caused his men to lie c.own
o take some sleep at a place about half a n)ile distant fro.n the river
see § 290, ., ,), while he himself, with two attendants, went down to watch
the ford through which the enemy must pass, before they came to the
lace where kmg Rol,ert's n.en were lying. 4. " If I go back," though!
he lung "to call ,ny ,nen to (the) arms, these men tvill get (foium;,
hrough the ford unhindered; and that would be [a] pity,'sinc is a
lace so advantageous for defence." o. I„ the confusion, five or six of
the enemy were slain, or, having been borne down bv the stream, [were
lrow,u.d. .;. Vyuh the natural feeling of a young author (3ri,r.f , cdai
he had ventured at) to go (fid, anf.nari,c„,, secretly and witness ('bcH "eli
+ dat.) the first representation of his tragedv at Mannheim. 7. He
resolved to be free, at whatever risk (anj jebo ^c^- Din); to abandon
-g.ve up) advantages wluch he could not buy (cvfanfo,,) at such a price •
o qm his stepdame (inrT.niittcrlid,, adj.) home, andgo forth (fortmauborn)'
hough friendless and alone, to seek his fortune in the great market
(Qiuat 11 -f- da .) hun, to make an attack upon the fort from that side
where he hade imbed up, offering (fid, rrluctcu) to lead. =.. how) the way
0. He ordered his men to advance against the wail with their shields held
ogether m the manner which the Romans named ' testudo ' or tortoise
^rf,t bhotc) iO Mis n.other was present on (Inn) this joyous occasion
and si e produced (== showed) a paper of (== with) poison, which, as she
hln' t'!T"l to have given her son in his liquor (C^Vlrauf, ace.) rather
than that he should submit (himself) to personal disgrace.
M
PART THIRD.
WORD-FORMATION. HISTORICAL SKETCH.
y
LESSON LI.
DERIVATION AND COMPOSITION.
307. I. New words are formed in a language by two more or less
distinct processes : Derivation and Composition.
2. Derivation is of four kinds, viz.: i. without change; 2. by inter-
nal change ; 3. by Suffixes; 4. by Prefixes.
Note. — All tr.immatical teToiinations (inflexions) are really suffixes, but these are
not considered under the jiresent head.
308. A. WITHOUT CHANGE.
Verbs are derived from substantives, adjectives, adverbs, etc., by the
simple addition of the endings of conjugation, as: '.'Ivbcit, labour; nr=
lieitH'li, to labour (sH'n^*, grass ; iivai=on, to graze tvorfcu, dry ; tvorflt-en,
to dry — lui()CV, near (compar. 1 ; niil)Cni, to approach — geilCtl, against;
brgefln=eu, to meet.
Note. — In many of these derivatives, and in most of those from adjectives, the vowel
has Umlaut, as: 'I'fluiv. iifliiii,=en, plough — .CMimmfv ; l)nmmor:it, hammer — ftarf, strong;
ftiirtscii, strengthen — tot, dead; totscn, kill — offen, open; offn=ou, open — empor, up;
empjrjcit, excite.
309. B. BY INTERNAL CHANGE.
Derivative Verbs. — Verbs are derived from other Verbs :
{a) ]5y change (generally Umlaut) of the root or Stem Vowel, forming
causative verbs, which are always transitive and weak, as : foticu, fall ;
fatlon, fell {cause to fall) — tvillfcu, drhik; tviinfcn, make to drink
(drench) -- jil^eu, sit; \t\^m, set — Uegcn, lie; legen, lay — fot)ren, fare,
proceed ; fiU)ren, lead, cause to proceed.
364
\
c
d
c
f(
h
Saxa]
DERIVATION BV SUFFIXES.
365
{d) By umge of consonant, with 1 without vowel-change, as : ftc^cit
stand ; ft II, .ause to stan, set pL.r ight ~ bicgnt, bend ; tmiVit'
bow ^ ucijcil, iroline; nirft:i, n. //,- /,e„J) - u,arf,e„, a^akc ;
hJerfi I, n' )use {cause to awal< ).
Note. -Many weak verbs and nearly all ./r^«^ verbs are /W«,/^V^; but ^r/W/,.,
verbs are generally ^ ^vj/l.
810. Deri\jtive ubstantives. — These are derived from Ve-bs
by internal vowel-change without suffix, and are mostly masculine, as •
bmboh, bind; Syuiib, bond, volume; 5l^uiib, union - 'iilu'll, sit; Z,\\i
stake (thing set or laid down), etc. - jidjcn, draw; Sup, Irait etc —
trcten, tread; Zx'xW, step.
Note. -Observe that in both the Vu. nd Substantives above occasional conso.
nant changes also occur.
C. BY SUFFIXES.
311. Verb Suffixes.
1. =Clll forms derivatives from other verbs, as well as from subsfan-
tives and adjectives, usuallywUh Umiaut, implying diminuti..n or con-
tempt, as: liid) oil, laugh; Idd) cln, smile — itlillft, art; fuilft clll, affect
(artfully) — froiiiin, pious; |roiiunc(u, affect piety.
2. =rrn from verbs, substantives and adjectives (sometimes with Um-
laut), as: folnon, follow; folii = crn, infer — id)laf, sleep; fd)lafH'rn, feel
sleepy — arg, bad ; ovivcrii, vex.
_ 3- =icrci1, mostly from foreign stems, without Umlaut, as : mnrfd)=
icrcn, march - rcflicren, reign - imO=.frcn, study. Also from ( ierman
root.s, by analogy, as: bllri)ftali=icicn, spell.
312. Substantive Suffixes.
»• 't (--ft, ft), -b, =tlC (usually feminine) from verbs, usually with vowel-
change, as : l)C;incit, bendjilViri, J bay (bight) - falH' CU, drive ; rval)r t
drive - tni(] nt, wear; Xx<xk\)\, lostume Uwwwnx, come; .«uii.-f
commg (-)lutimft, arrival; i^iifiintt, future) - rbmirn, can; ,iMtn f f art
- bitniirn, bum; «ran=5, conflagration - rcmieH, know; iiun=Dc' in-
formation.
2., 3. =d)cn ar.d =lcilt form diminutives, usually with Umlaut, as: ^:)<x\\^
house; .SpauS.djCll, little house, cot - DJfann, man; iWanii^Icili, manikin!
Notes -I. =rf,e„ (Engl, -kin^, originally Lo-.v (North) German only, is now more
common th.n =le.!l, which however is pr.L-rr.d aft. r gutturals, as: 3Jing = !Dht, a3ui,.lti„
Hi
will
..ni
%\-
I!
.0 "«
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
i^
/
/
O
M
1.0 :? iM i^
I.I
11.25
^'-^ pit
!^ 1^ 12.0
US
M
2.2
1.4
i.8
1.6
Photographic
Sciences
Corporation
33 WEST MAIN STREET
W£BSTER,N.Y. 14580
(716) 87i2-4S03
^
iV
qv
\\
^9)
V
^■^
6^
"t/f"
366
LESSON LI.
[§§.V2-
4. «e forms a very large number of feminine derivatives from verbs,
often with vowel-change ; also, usually with Umlaut, from adjectives, as:
flicflen, fly; jyticg=c, fly (insect)— gcben, give; C^/abf, gift — fprecf)en,
speak; ®prorf)-C, speech, language — gut, good; ©iitC, goodness— trcu,
faithful ; 2reu=c, fidelity.
5. «ct (from Fr. -ie) forms feminine derivatives, with accent on the
suffix :
{a) From verbs in i=cln, =crn, as : fff)llU'td)ein, flatter ; 5rf)mel(i^ct=cl,
flattery — ^jaillicni, enchant ; 3rt»tifV=ci.
[b) From substantives, indicating state, occupation, etc., most fre-
quently from those in =:i'r, as : %\^n, hunter; ,ui(iev=cf, hunting
— 2)riicfcr, printer; S^ntrfCM'i, printing (-trade or -office).
Notes. — i. It sometimes implies contempt, as: fiinbcv=f«, childish nonsense.
2. By analogy with the formations from stems in jfr, there has arisen the double suffix
sfref, added to other stems, as : 3tlau=erci, slavery (from 3flauc).
6. =cl, from verbs {sometimes with vowel-change), generally indicating
the instrument, as: bcffen, cover; Diufcl, lid — flicfim, fly; g^liig-Cl,
wing — fd)licfieii, lock ; ef!)luff=cl, key — 5icl)-en, pull ; Biigcl, rein,
bridle.
7. =etl, from verbs, including all infinitives, as well as others, e. g. :
grabcn, dig; (^H-ab=cii (masc), ditch — fri)aben, hurt; >>rf}ab=en (masc),
injury.
8. tX, often with Umlaut, indicating the actor, chiefly from verbs, but
also from substantives, as: luicfeil, bake ; ii3acf Ci, bak-er iiuiu'ii. paint;
!J}ia(=cr, paint-er — tiUMCil, dance; Jiiuj^CV, danc-er -- (Mavtcii, garden;
@artll=cr, garden-er - @d)af, sheep; ®d[)ttf=cr, shepherd.
Note. — Some derivatives from substantives insert 11, as: ^yilbsitscv, sculptor (from
93tlb) — 01bcf=lt=cr, bell-ringer (from (yiocfc) — ;1tcb«ii<or, oravor (from ;)febc).
9- =l;cit (Engl, -head, -hood) forms feminine abstracts from substan-
tives and adjectives, as : C^ott^lj.tt, God-bead — ilinb-^cit, childhood —
ilMillb l^cit, blindness — (yrci^()c;t, f'eedom.
10. =fcit replaces licit after adjectives in =el, Cr, tfl, =lid), bor, =fam,
as: (Si<:fl-fcit, vanity -- i^ittei'4cit, bitterness ^■i^tlUg fctl, cheapness — ^
— ^cimUri)^fcit, secrecy - iBvaud)(iar4clt usefulness *Spaiiam-cit,
ecoiiomy.
Note. —Some derivativos from adjeciives insert sifls before »£eit, especially from thosq
in «ha?t and =lo>3, as: eii6=i(jsfeit, sweetness — 3tanbt)aft»t(js(eit, steadfastness — $reu#
lofsig>teit, unfaithfulness.
313]
DERIVATION BY SUFFIXES.
367
II. .in (compare §89, 2, Note) forms feminine appellatives from mas-
culine substantives, usually with Umlaut (always so from monosylla-
bles), as: ®raf, count; ©riifin, countess — ^iciiitb, friend; ^reiinb-in,
(female) friend — @iivtncr, gardener ; @drtner=iti, gardener's wife.
»2. ^liltfl forms masculine diminutives (sometimes with Umlaut) from
verbs, substantives an^l adjectives, as: Iel)reh, teach; l'c()r=lin0, appren-
tice — gtud}t, flight; ^;ud)t=|lnfl, fugitive — fvcmb, strange; (^rembaiiig,
stranger — jiinfl, young; 3ui>g=Iin0, youth.
13. »ni6 (Engl, -ness) forms ab' tracts from verbs; also from a few
adjectives, usually with Umlaut, as: licgiabcn, bury; 33egvoli=ni'^, funeral
— ^inbern, hinder; Apinber=nig, obstacle — riefanficn, captive; @efong»
nig, prison — ftufter, dark; |5i"ftei"=nig, darkness.
14. 'fill, »fri form abstracts, (generally neuter) from verbs, and also from
a few substantives and adjective, as: fcl)iffen, send; @d)icf=fjil, fate -
raten, guess ; 9iot=fcI, riddle — S}Ml)(, trouble ; 2)?u()=fttl, fatigue — triilie,
sad ; $!riib ftti, tribulation.
15. =fd)Oft (Engl. -ship, -scape) forms femi^^ine abstracts from verbs
and adjectives, as: 2Bailber=fd)aft, wandering — {sit'iii'-b=fd)Oft, friend-
ship — ?anb=f(l)aft, land-scape - ©cincin f(^nft, community (Stgcn=
fj^oft, peculiarity ; also some collectives, as: ^I'ieftcr frfjoft, priesthood;
@efeU=fd)att society.
16. 4um (Engl, dom) forms (generally neuter) abstracts from verbs,
substantives and adjectives, as : 2Bad)>?tlint, growth - (Stgen-lum, pro-
perty — 9JeicI)-tum (masc), wealth — itiiutg tum, royalty (king-dom).
17. -Ung (= Engl, -ing in verbal nouns) forms a large number of
feminine abstracts, chiefly from verbs, as : ^cU'{)r=uii9, instruction — 3Scr»
geb^'Ung, forgiveness.
18. The suffijces =^enlJ, i\], 4d)t, ^ing are only found after stems which
no longer have an independent existence, as : 2lb=cnft, S)lt^=cnl), (Sff=|g,
m-'i%, iQaUm (hawk).
313.
Adjective Suffixes.
1. =bflt (connected with bdl'Clt, 'bear') from verbs (= Engl. -able) and
substantives, also (rarely) from adjectives, as : rtVllflt.', eat-able — fnicf)t«
bar, fruitful — furd)t=6av, frightful — 0ffeu=bar, evident.
2. 'tn, 'ftn form adjectives denoting material or kind from substantives,
as : golb=en, golden — b(ci cm, leaden — ftlbev=n, silver — I)i)lg^ern, wooden.
Note. -^(Sifern, 'iron,' from Sifen, is anomalous,
368
LESSON LI.
313-
3. 'I^aft (connected with f}abcu, 'have') forms adjectives, denoting the
quality of the primitive, chiefly from substantives (also from a few verbs
and adjectives), as: fiinb ()oft, sinful — tiigenbjjoft, virtuo"s — nJO^n=
l^oft resident — bOy? Ijnft, malicious — lual)r l^aft, true.
NjTE. — The sufRx sljjis often added to adjectives in sljoft, as: njQ^v^aftsig (compare
also § 312, 10, Note, above).
4- -tl^t sometiriics replaces i^ (see below) after names of materials, as
born i(f)t thorny — ftcin id)!, stony; also m tor-t^t, foolish.
5. 4^ (— Engl, -y, as in might-y, etc.) forms a very numerous class of
adjectives, usually with Umlaut, from verbs, substantives and particles,
and from other adjectives (including the possessive pronouns, sec
§119, 6-), as: na(l)flic[i=in, yielding — niinft=i(^, favourable -— ni6d)t=r,
might-y - fd)n(b-ij|, guilt-y — fliit ig, kind — Doll ifl, complete — i)eut=ifl,
of to-day — Dor=|0, former.
Note.— For sifl before =ffit, see § 312, 10, Note ; for ;«() after sl)Hft, see 3, above.
6. =ifd) (= Engl. -ish) forms adjectives:
{a) From proper names, denoting or/gin, as: lutljerMfl^, Lutlieran
— piruH if(^, Prussian.
(^) From substantives, as: bieb=jfd), thiev-ish — t)ini.Tll=if(^, heav-
enly; sometimes also with depreciatory sense, as in English,
e. g. : fiiib ifrf), child-ish — Juoib iid), woman-ish (compare finb>
Ii(^, child-like — unib lirf), woman-ly\
(f) From foreign words (=: Lat. - icus ; Engl, -ic, -ical), as : l)iftov«
tfd), histor-ical - log^jfdj, log-ical.
7. Aci forms variative numerals; see § 182, (>).
8. lid) (Engl, -like, lyi forms numerous adjectives from verbs (with
active or passive sense), substantives (usually with Umlaut) and other
adjectives (generally with diminutive meaning, like Eng. -ish), as: crfreu-
liaSi, delightful — jdliib lid), injurious — bciirdf Ud), intelligible — glaitb
11^, credible — t)evad)t'l!^, contemptible — jd()r lid), year ly — in!*tin4id),
man-ly - liatiir !i1), natural — rijt lid), redd-ish -- ((ing-Iid), long-ish.
9- 'fam (Engl, -some) from verbs and substantives (also from a few
adjectives), as: aiifnicif fnm, attentive - beil^om, whole-some --^ furd)t»
jam, timid — ein=fom, lone-some.
/). BY PREFIXES.
314. Verb Prefixes.
The Verb Prefixes coming under the head of derivation are those
which are always inseparable, viz: 6?-, C!lt= or cm^-, cr , 0C^ mift', tier ,
jeT=. Their various meanings are given below.
314]
DERIVATION BY PREFIXES.
369
1. ic» (connected with the prep, bet) is intensive, and
(a) forms transitive verbs from intransitive (its most frequent use),
as : fnlteu, fall ; Oc-faltcn, be-fall — (|c()cn, go ; br=3ci)cu, commit
(a crime, etc.) — {(ngcil, mourn; De^flaflCU, mourn for;
{b) it forms verbs from substantives and adjectives, with the mean-
ing 'provide with,' ' make,' as : bc=freuut)Cll, be-friend — 6c=ftdr=
fcii, make strong, strengthen.
2. ent'- (cmji" before an f, akin to o?lt-, as in nnttnortm) corresponds
frequently to the (Latin) prefixes dis-, de- in English words and denotes
(a) 'in return,' as: cm|l=fangcn, receive; cm|I-fcl)[cn, recommend;^
{b) 'contrary,' 'against,' 'away from,' having privative force, from
verbs, substantives and adjectives, as: cn^btubcil, relieve —
cnt-bccfcii, dis-cover cilt Gcl)Cit, cilt (aufcu, get away, escape;
{c) transition, origin, as: cnt4d)tafcil, fall asleep — ent=ftel)CU, arise,
originate.
3. er* (Engl, a-, as in a-rouse, a-rise, etc.) denotes :
(a) 'out from,' 'upwards,' as: er4)cbcn, raise— cr=mecfcn, awaken;
(<J) transition (compare V.\\ , above), as : cr=l'el)CU, begin to tremble
— er=btiU)Cll, come out in blo.ssom — erfaltcil, grow cold ;
[c) acquisition or attainment by the action of the verb (a very common
use), as : cr=I)Cttc(u. get by begging — cr=(iftcn, get by cunning;
{d) accomplishment, as: txAd)\t^\n\, shoot (kill by shooting) —
cr=ti-infcn, be drowned.
4. 0C- often has no perceptible force, as in : f^c neicil, recover (from ill-
ness) — gc niollen, enjoy; but commonly it is frequentative and intensive,
as : gc=bioten, command — j]C=bcnfcn, remember, mention - 0t'=lobcn, vow.
5. mift= (Engl, mis-) has negative force, sometimes with the notion of
falsehood or failure, as: mjft ad)tcn, despise nuft=frtUcn, displease —
mi^ gliidfcn, fail — mt^ ucrftcbni, mis-mderstand.
6. bet' (Engl, for- in for-get, for-give) has the general meaning of
•away' and often, like-fitt^, answers- to a dis- or de- in English.
(a) It is intensive, and expresses excess, etc., as : bcr=bUil)cn, fade
away Ucr^onimcii, go to ruin — tjcr=i5agcii, despair.
[b) It denotes a mistake, etc., as : llfr=fii()fcil, lead astray — bcr»
laufen (refl.), lose one's way UCl'4cf}CU, mis-lay.
{c) It \% privative (its most frequent use), and denotes loss, parting,
waste, dissolution, as: t)Cl = 0Cl)ni, pass away tier=triufeil,
waste in drink — Uerfpielcu, gamble away.
11
370
LESSON LI.
[§§314-
{d) It forms verbs from substantives and adjectives denoting a
change or transition into the state of the primitive, as : tlfT-
armcn, grow poor — tjcr^golbrit, gild.
7. jft' denotes separation, destruction, 'to pieces,' as: jer«brecf)en,
break to pieces — jer^gtiebern, dis-member. .
316. Substantive Prefixes.
,. qxi (= Engl, arch-), as: (frj=bifd)of, arch-bishop — Srj'fcinb,
arch-enemy.
@e» forms usually neuter derivatives:
(a) Collectives, from substantives, as: (^C=lnvge, mountain-range
— ©cfieber, feathers — @C=ftrand), bushes.
{b) Associatives (of persons), from verbs and substantives, as:
(SJc=ipiele, playmate — ®c-'irf)iuiftcr, bi others and sisters (')f a
family) - ^efcllc, fellow.
{c) Frequentative or intensive abstracts, also from verbs, as :
@ef^3Vad), conversation — @c=fliiftev, (continued) whispering —
®C'tofe, uproar.
Note. — The substantives @slud, @slau6e contain this prefix.
3- 3Rife'/ with the same force as in verbs, e.g.: 3Miffc=tl)at, misdeed —
aRi|=gunft, envy.
4. till' is negative prefix, as in English, e. g. : Ult^gtiirf, bad luck —
Un-rcd)t, wrong — Un-finu, nonsense. It also expresses something
monstrous or unnatural, as : Un=tl)at, unnatural or moi.strc . deed —
Ull^tncnjd), inhuman monst'^r.
5. Ur» (akin to tX', see above) denotes
(a) origin, as hi Ut'tetl (er4ei(rn), sentence, judgment — Ur4aub
(er=lciuben), furlough, leave of absence ;
{b) primitiveness, as: ttr=fari)r (original thing), cause — Ur-menfcl),
primitive man — Ut-tl5fltb» primeval forest.
Remark. — Substantives with Verb Prefixes (see § 3T4, above) are
derived from verb-stems having these prefixes (e. g. : 2lb=Jltg, S3e=,Viflr
from abjieticn, bcjiet)en), except those with gc- (see 2, above).
316. Adjective Prefixes.
The Prefixes of Adjectives are the same as those of substantives, ai.d
with the same force, except gCv which forms :
I§3I4-
Si8]
COMPOSITION.
371
(a) Past Participles, some without corresponding verbs, as : geftttet,
well-behaved - gc-fticfelt, booted ;
(d) adjectives from verb-stems, as : flCMief)m, agreeable, acceptable
— 0C=n)if5 (from luiffcn, ' know '), certain ;
{c) from other Adjectives, as: 0C=recf)t, just — gf.treit, faithful.
NoTH. — flsIetc^ also contains this prefix.
317. Other Parts of Speech.
Pronouns, Numerals, Prepositions, Conjunctions an.'. Interjections are
for the most part either primitive or compound; for Derivative Num-
erals and Numeral Adverbs, see §§ 182, 183; for the derivation of other
Adverbs, § 189.
II. COMPOSITION.
318. I. A compound word is one made up of two or more words,
each of which maintains its separate form and meaning.
2. In genuine compounds, the last component only is inflected; but
there are also spurious compounds, in which op- or more of the pre-
ceding components takes an inflectional ending (see § 319, i, Notes 2,
3, below), without liability to further variation.
Note.— I» a few words arbitrarily written as compounds, both elements are inflected ;
see § 319, 2, Note, below.
3. Compounds are made with much greater freedom in German than
in English. Words that in English are written separately, are often
written as one word in German, forming compounds of a length and com-
plexity unknown in the English language, as : ^eucnioifid)erillU3«gcjcUlcf)aft,
fire insurance company — l'llftvo{)reujd)luinbiud)t, bronchial consump-
tion.
Note. — These long compounds are generally broken up by one or more hyphens
as: ?feuerua-fid)eniitaS«©c}ellfd;Qft, a capital letter usually following the hyphen.
4. When the last component is common to several successive com-
pounds, it is expressed with tlie last component word only, the omission
being indicated in the other cases by a hyphen, as: 3lpfe{=, .<iirid)= unb
53irnbditnie, apjjle, cherry and pear-trees — eiiic freuben= unb nublofe
'Jlufciabe, a joyless and profitless task.
5. The Composition of Verbs is fully treated of in Less. XXXVI,
and Supp. Less. E. ; that of Numerals in Less. XXVIII, and also
in §§ 1S2, 183. The compound Prepositions will be found in Less.
XXXVIII, and Conjunctions in Less. XL, and require no special ex-
planation.
372
LESSON LI.
Composition of Substantives.
1319
310.
The last element is (with exceptions noted under 5, below) a SuV;stan-
tive, which determines the gender, and is alone inflected; the first ele-
ment generally having the principal accent. The varieties of Compound
Substantives are:
1. Substantive + Substantive, the first element being in apposition or
in some case or other relation (usually genitive) to the other, as below, as :
.^imniel vcid), kingdom oi \\&2i\en- {apposition) — ^tiifj^npfct, eye-ball —
?onbe«i=l)err, sovereign — greuben-fcft, joyous festival — ^inbcv-ftubc,
nursery {genitive elation) — Xiuteu-fafi, inkstand (stand/^r ink) — Xailj^
ftimbe, dancinglesson {dative relation) — flatten fiiiuicr, rat-catcher -
iEBcg^Uieiier, guide, finger-post {accusative relation) Cft'tDJnb, East wind
— §VCUben«tl)rnilf, tear of joy {origin) — j^ufi'tritt, kick {instrument)
— !l)aci)»fenftev, window in the roof {place) — j£afle«n)erf, day's work.
Notes. i. /'W»«a»j>' Compounds are those composed of stem + substantives, either
with the stem-suffix «e, as: Sogeroerf ; or without suffix, .is: ^lanbsrocit, trade — ^aflbs
l^orn, hunting-horn.
2. Secondary Compounds are made up with a Genitive case, Singular or Plural ; if sin-
gular, the first component takes sS after sfrotig masculines and neuters, and -AW after weak
substantives, whether sing, or plur, ; thus: ©oniuaflsSsfleib, Sunday- dress — 'j^rcub 5 eit*
gefc^rei, cry of joy — - ffiortevsbud}, dictionary.
3. The suffix s8 is also added Xo feminines in A, «^elt, sfett, »|lf)nff, »llitp, and the
foreign endings 4on, tot, as: ®eburt=e=tag, birthday — ;Vrnl)cii=8-Hel)e, love of liberty
— aJia^igfeitsgstJereiit, temperance society — SHeUfliuiis8s!vieg, religious war — Unioer*
fitOtsSsgebciube, University building.
2. Qualifying Adjective -f- Substantive, as : (5be(=ftrin, precious stone,
jewel — 3uugfrau, virgin — J^od)ieit, wedding (high time) - SBoU=monb,
full-moon.
Note. — In a few spurious compounds of this kind, the adjective is declined, as:
ein ^oficr^pricfter, high priest; ber §ol)eprieftcr — *^ie £aiige»»)eilc, tedium, ennui; Gen.
bet gangeutDeile.
3. Adverb or Preposition •\- Substantive, usually from compound
verbs, but not always, as: Aporflinft, origin— Sol)l tl)at, benefit — S(n»
gal)l, number — iBei=jpic{, example — §iiiter4ift, cunning — Uber=mad)t,
superiority.
4. Verb-stem + Substantive, sometimes with connecting suffix »t,
as: Sej=c^bnd), (Scf)reib=feber, ®iiig nocjel.
5. Other Compound Substantives. There is a special class of
substantive compounds of a character different from those enumerated
above, and of various composition, consisting of:
I3'9^
Sai]
COM POSH lUN OF SUbSTANTIVES.
373
Substan-
first ele-
ompound
'osition or
elow, as :
'e-ball —
ibcr-ftube,
— Xaiii-
itcher -
last wind
Urument)
?ork.
lives, either
le — JSOflbs
ural ; if sin-
it after weak
- 'j^rcubsen*
Itp, and the
e of liberty
■ — Unioer»
5US stone,
5otl=monb,
jclined, as;
;nnui; Gen.
:ompound
fit — S(n»
faer=mad)t,
suffix -'t,
\ class of
lumeratetf
(a) A limiting word (not asubst.) -f Substantive, as j ©(Inbe^Iu^,
blind man's-buff — tal)l=fopf, bald-head — ©rog.maul, boaster
— i'ang^beiii, long-legged person — ®d)rei.f|al«, bawler — JBIcr.
erf, square.
(b) Limiting word -f Adjective, as : bcr SSlmmtx\ai\, the glutton
— bnS 3mmcv gviiii, the evergreen.
NoTB. — These compounds are masculine when referring to persons, otherwise neuter.
The same rule holds good for the compounds under {c), below.
(c) Verb -f- Object, limiting word or phrase, as: ftcr S^auge*
nirf)t^, the good-for-nothing — ftcr ®priug4u8=felb, the romp —
ter ©toreiufrieb, the kill-joy - bal ®teU=bid)=ein, the rendez-
vous.
320. Composition of Adjectives.
Compound Adjectives consist of an Adjective preceded by a limiting
word, viz. :
1. Adjective -f- Adjective, as : taiib=jltumm, deaf-mute — buutel^blau,
dark-blue — lot bad:ig, red-cheeked.
2. Substantive -j- Adjective :
(fl) with connecting inflexional suffix (compare § 319, i, Note 2,
above), as: (icbcK-fianf, love-sick — gebaufcn=t)oU, pensive--
l)offnung8=(o?, hopeless;
{b) without suffix, as : Ucbe=t)cU, affectionate— ^ulb-reirf), gracious
— frtMibo=(cer, j-oyless.
Notes. — I. The Adjectives Ui, reirlft, ttoK are of such constant occurrence as to have
almost acquired the character of suffixes.
2. In soniu of these compounds, the substantive expresses comparison, or has intensive
force, as : frcibemeig, white as chalk — f eberleidjt, light as a feather — felfenfeft, firm as
^ rock.
3. Verb -f Adjective, as : n)i§=bcgierig, eager for knowledge — merf-
Univbig, remarkable (noteworthy).
Note. — In Compound Adjectives like bnnfc»l8*H)ert, 'welcome ' (' thankworthy'), the
first element is the infinitive used as a Substantive.
4. Adverb or Preposition -\- Adjective, as : l)orf)=geboren, high-born
— tDDf)l=fei(, cheap — initei-=tl)nn, subject — uber*!lug, overwise.
321. Composition of Adverbs.
Adverbs are compounded of various parts of speech :
I. With Nouns {mostly in the Genitive) affixed to other parts of
speech, as: gall; glcic^-faUg, likewise; icben=fon?, in any case —
374
LESSON LII.
t5§3ai-
9)?nft(r) : cinlflpr^mnften, in some degree — '3fitc : rtnerfeitJ . . . anbtcr^
Uiiif^ on the one hand ... on the other hand — Xeil : mcil'tcii^tfilfi/ chiefly;
mcineS.tcilP, on my part — i^rfl : gcrabe^^ttJCfl^, straightway; ffliieS.
tOe9d,bynomeans — Scilc: cinft-toeilcn, niitt(cr=ttjcile,meariwhile, mean-
time — Sotje: girufli(f)cr.mcifc, fortunately; fi-euii=ttJfiif, crosswise;
t!)Ovid)ter»HJCtfc, foolishly.
Note. — The wasc. and «f«/?r genitive-inflection »8, from Us frequent nse in adverTjial
genitives, has become an advjrbial suffix, and is sometimes attacl.ed to ^;«. substs., as:
bte »Jiad)t, aiiv. nadfti, by night. So also has the suffix >ttiartd, as; t)immeI«Uijrt8,
heavenward — norb«lDartd, northward.
2. With Prepositions (or original Adverbs) prefixed or suffixed to
other parts of speech, as: ju n(cirf), at the same time — flcrabc.^U, straight
on - ouf'luartS, upward; bov.vnttf, uphill - HlttC^meg^?, on the way;
beig'Unter, downhill — ^cutjU^tanc, nowadays - ia()rc=lon0, for years.
3. With Pronouns (or Stems originally Pronominal) compounded
with each other, as: njo()iu? whither? ba^in, bortljiii, thither — iuo^er?
whence? ba()er, bort^iu, thencp, etc.
For Numeral Adverbs, see § 182.
LESSON LII.
HISTORICAL SKETCH. - GRIMM'S LAW. - UMLAU"^, etc.
822. Relation between German and English.
1. A comparison of German words and forms with their English equi-
valents will serve to show that a very large number of both words and
grammatical forms are common to both languages. Though rarely ab-
solutely identical in form, the resemblances are both so close and so
numerous that they cannot be the result of mere borrowing on the part of
either language from the other, but must imply relationship, or, in other
words, a descent /ro7n a common source, a common origin.
English and German are therefore Modern dialects of one
and the same original language.
2. This original language is no longer extant, either a: a spoken or as
a written language. There are, however, ether languages — some still
spoken, some known to vs only as written — which were once al»7
LSSaai-
323! RELATION BETWEEN ENGLISH AND GERMAN. '♦7$
. . aiibtcr-
J, chiefly;
f; ?flitc8«
ile, mean-
rosswise;
ill adverbial
substs., as:
imeUUijrtd,
uffixed to
I, straight
the way;
■ years.
npounded
, etc.
I.
;]ish equi-
ords and
arely ab-
>e and so
le part of
in other
5 of one
ken or as
some still
)nce al*^
modern
Hindustani, etc.
Persian, etc.
modern: the Romance Ian-
(ii.iljdsu' this common anrcutor, or @ntnMprarf)f, a^ German philolo.
pists c'.ll it. This group or sith-famiiy of languages is called the Ger-
MANIC ur Teutonic, the common source or (iJrl^l^i^)lad)e of which was
itself a dialect of a larger family, all of whose members were dialects of,
and derived from, one common primitive source (UnpVQd)O). This family
is called the Indo-Ger.manic, Indo-European or Aryan family, and
includes most European and several Asiatic languages.
3. The divisions oi this great family, with the chief representatives,
ancient (written) and modern (spoken), of each, are as follows, beginning
from the East :
{a) Indic — ancient: .Sanskrit, etc.
{b) Persic— •' Zend, etc.;
{c) Greek — ancient a.nd modern.
(d) Italic ~ ancient : Latin, etc.
guages (Italian, French, Spanish, etc.).
(e) LrrHUANic.
(/) Slavonic — Russian, Polish, Bohemian, etc.
(g) Germanic — see below.
(/i) Ckltic— Irish, (Jaelic, Welsh," etc.
323. The Germanic Languages.
The Germanic or Teutonic group 'of languages may be classified as
follows :
1. Gothic or East Germanic, once spoken by the Goths of Mcesia,
on the Danube, represented only by a translation of portions of the
Bible, made by Ulfilas, Bishop of the Goths, in the 4th century, a. d.
2. Scandinavian or North Gilrmanic— ancient: Old Norse;
modern: Icelandic, Danish (Xorwegian), Swedish.
3. Low German or West Germanic — ancient: Frisian, Low Saxon,
Low Frankish; Old English (Anglo-Saxon), Middle English; modern:
Dutch, English.
Note. — The modern representatives of the other Low Gennan languages are mere
dialects - known as Plattdeutsch (i. e., Flat German), the present (High) German literary
language having displaced them.
4. High German or South Germanic, including the (no longer
spoken) Old and Midd'e High German, and the GERMAN, as spoken
and written at the present day.
The following diagram will serve further to illustrate the relationships
of the German language :
j;5
LESSON LII.
[§§323^
H
i.
•a
h
u
O
•a
c
Ml
c
S
X
e
c
s
w S
O
h _
h
0<
c
u ■
8
-I
•^ *« S
w --2
u
I
P
w -
Q
o
c
X
. 5
<
o
- M
o
Z
X
<
Q
o
w 3
-O O
3 u
C *■
^ o
J3
W
2 ^
-s
c
s
c to
E c.
O c
[§§323-
I
I
•8
3^4]
1
f
1
M
u
£
♦«»
§
'S
fl
V
i5
•a
Ji
T3
§
1
■2
J?
•s
•3
.1-
u
u
4-*
N
«irf
c
en
<u
w
u
T3
a
a
u
u
ti
x:
C
S
4-»
o
1?
1
3
t5
1
HM
_4J
C
rt
J
(/I
■3
CQ
t
Ji
1)
a
u
T3
o
S
^
<M
u
>*-•
.5
Q
c
c
"i
(fi
g
bo
c
r3
3
,■11
^
M)
O
B
c
OJ
nj
X
■l-i
M
»<
V
Ji
W
s
K
IS
•a
s
E
e
V
.124.
HISTORY OF HIGH GER^'^N.
History of High German.
377
The High German (including the Middle German) branch of the
Germanic subfamily has passed thi^ough three stages as follows:
I. Old High German, to the 12th century. Its literature is chiefly
ecclesiastical — its principal authors being monks, such as Otfrid, the
Frank, author of a rhyming harmony of the G()s|)els, and Notker, of St.
Gallen in Switzerland. Each author wrote in his own dialect.
NoTK.-The chief characteristic of this Old Hi^vh German, which ciistinRnishes it from
the subst-quent '.tage.s, is the compa.ativc fuliu-ss and distinctivc-n.-ss of its Kranimatica)
forms. Thus '^o,irit, 3blii,rii, Otntfii (d.-t. pi) =^ O. H. G. t.-^-um, sun-uir, gtb-6m re-
sprctivfly : ai'd the pres. indie, of nt- an (iii'li!>!.ii) is as foll.ws : nim-u, nim-is, iiim-it,
neman)-(es), nem-at, nein-ant. It also has a fifin case (the I intrumental).
2. Middle High German a. n. ih)o-isoo'. Literature during this
period passed from the hands of the clergy into *ho^toi {he nobles; hence its
courtly character. The branches of poetic composition therein re|)resented
were F.p.c and Lyric I'oetry, tlie former conjprising not only the great
National Epics of the ' Nihclnngcnlicd' and Gudrun,' but also the
Courtly or Art Epics of Chivalry, such as Wolfram von Eschenbach's
'Parcival' and Gnttfried von Straszburg's ' Tri.stan und Isolde'; the
latter comprising the i)r eductions of the ' Minnesanger,' of whoin the
greatest wns Walther von dcr Vogelweide. The Dia/cct of Snahia
(which included Maden, Wiirtemberg and parts of Bavaria) became the
leading literary language.
Note. - Middle is distingui.shed from Old High German chiefly oy the loss of the
full vowels of ii.fi, ctional syllables, vvhidi were for the most part changed into f. Thus
the (). H. G. datives pi. laj,-um, seb-om are in Mid. H. G. t.ig-en/ geb-en ; and the
pres. indie, of nemen is: nii.i-e, nim-esl, nim-et, ncm-en, nem-et, nem-ent It is
further distinguished from O. H. G. by the sj.read of the Umlaut (see § 326, below), which
m the former is confined to th- vowel a, to the vowels o and u also ; and from both
0. H.G. and Modern German by the large number of its diphthongal sounds (.li, ei, o.-,
01, an, ou, on, eu, ia, ie, io, i„ ; ua. iie, iie, no), the greater number of which are unknowti
in both the preceding and the hter stage of the language.
3. Newer Modern High German, from 1500 to the present day,
forming, since before the beginnmg of the i6th century, the standard
/.' ary lan^^nagc of all German-speaking people. Its basis is Doctor
Martin Luther's translation of the Bible (1J22— 34), in which he
adopted the „.fan>,(eiiprad)r" or official court language particularly of
the Duchy of Saxony, as being, in his own words, „Dic gcmcine Dcutfl^e
2|iro^e, tt)cld)er nadifolgcu nUe Jviirften unb ^bnigc in gain ©euttdj.
lanb." '
378
LESSON LI I.
t§§3«4-
Note. —The chief characteristic which disfinpuishes Modern (New) High German
from Middle Higli German is the lengthening <if ;dl stem-vowels before a single consonant.
Thus fni]cn, jpiud), lobeii, all l.ave the stem-\(>v.Ll long in ^Tidern G.rnian, but short in
Middle High German. To tliis may be add;d .'ii'i use of the letter () lo mark a preced-
ing long vowel, as in neftmen, M. H. G. nemen (wirh short e); thi.- rliarge of f into frf) be-
fore 1, n, as : 2it)(ai, Srfincc, M. H. G. slSf, sne; and that of the long vowels i, fi, into the
diphthonj.';s fi, tit respectively, .- : jncin, brill, bvri, ®cib, TOailS, .&0U8, ^OUt, lotlt,
M, H. G. min, din, drl, wib, mfls. hfis, hut, hit.
;{25. (tkimm's Law oi l*autt>cr'd)icbunfl.
I The law of the progression or shifting of mutes, Genu. \iauU
DCr(d).cbuilfl, also called Grimm's Law after its chief ciiscoverei, Jakob
Grimm, the illustrious grammarian, is one of the most striking features
of the Germanic. languages.
2. The Mutes are divided into three classes, according to the organ
with which tlicy are: uttered, viz. : LiN(;i;.\i.s (or Dkntai.s; : t, th, d;
l.AniAi.srp, ph (f), b; and Palatals (or Gutturai.si: k (c), ch [h),
g. Kach of these classes contains a ft'niiis ^ov sitrd), an aspirate or
spirant, and a tucdia (or sonant), thus :
Tenuf.s.
A SIM KATES
or Spirants.
th
ph, f
kh. ch 'h)
Mkdiak.
d
b
g
LiNGUALS: t
Labials: p
P'lI.ATAI.S: k, c
3. In the majority ol the Germanic languages — (iothic, Scandinavian,
Low German (including therefore I'.NGLlSHj - as compared with the other
members of the Indo-Gennanic family (Greek, Latin, etc. ; see § 322, 3,
above), each of these mutes has undergone one "shifting, '' or been
pushed forward one stage in its own class, the tenues having been changed
hito aspirates (or more strictiv sf iraiifs), the asjnrates into mediae, and
the media! into tenues. In Higli German alone they have undergone a
second "shifting" in the same direction.
Note. — The accompanying diagr.im will serve further to illustrate J^vi)
this 1 rocess, showing how the mutes observe the following rotation >/^^
from primitive Indii-Gormanic through general Germanic (including /
English) to High (Wrman. vi/.. : 'I'tnuis, Aspiratf, Mtdi.i ; Aspirate,^
Media, Tennis; Media, Tunuis. Aspirate. v^f,
3. Taking Latin or Greek as representing the first or
primitive Indo-Ciermanic stage, and English as repre-
senting the second, or general (Jcrmanic stage (the first shifting), the
following scheme will show the theordical working of this law ;
325]
grimm's law of iiautbcrfcf;iebuiuj.
379
!?fQ
Latin, Greek, etc. :
= English, etc. :
:= (High) German
LiNGUALS.
t, th, d
th, d, t
d, t, th
Labials.
P, ph, b
P
ph
ph, b,
b, p,
Palatals.
k, kh, g
kh, g, k
g. k, kh
5- The operation of the law is, however, subject to the following
general exceptions : ^
(a) p and k were changed in the second shifting, noc into aspirates
proper, but into the s/mnt/s f and h (= j^i respectively, and
these s])irants were n(jt. subjected to any further change.
(d) The lingual aspirate is represented in High German by j, |l, ff, or §.
{c) The second shifting of media to tenuis took place in High Ger-
man in the /in_s;-ua/ scries only, except in one dialect (the Ale-
mannian).
{(i) The aspirate lor spirant) rf) is never found in Modern German at
the beginning of a word.
6. Hence the modified scheme below will represent approximately the
actual working of the law :
LiNGUALS. Labials. Palatals.
Latin, Greek, etc. : t, th, d p, ph (f), b k, kh (h), g
= English, etc.: th, d, t f, b, p h, g, k
= (High) German : d, t, z, s, ss, sz f, b, f h(d)) g, k (rf))
Note. - Latin has c, f, and h for k, ph and kh respectively ; and the (1) at the bottom
of the last column does not occur at the beginning of words ; see 5, {fi), above.
EXAMPLES OF t'lUilocrfiOicbuiig.
(Note. — Examples from Lat. unless otherwise specified.)
1. LlNciAi.s: (r/) t th <l ; as : tectum — tllatch — i;ad); tenuis —
thin- ftiiiui; tu- thou — 1 11; trcs three -tlTi; f rater -brother
— ii3niUer; [b) th — d- t, as: thygatOr (Gr.) —daughter todjtoi-
thyra(Gr.)— door — 3:urc;ther((;r.) deer 2icr;'o) d- t z, si
ss, sz, as: domus — timber ,^'Jimim'r; dakr-y (Gr.) tear — ^'Jdl/rc-
sedere - sit - [hiCii; edere- eat- rffcii.
2. Larials: {a) p f— f, as: pugno — fight — fcriitcii; pedem —
foot- ^^11 ll; piscis - fish j'^.ifd); {h) ph (Lat. f)--p--b, as: f rater
— hrother - iih-iibor; fagus — heech — 58ud)i'; [c] b -- p — f, as : can-
nahis — hemp — .S^nui,
3. Palatals: {a\ k (Lnt. c) -h - dj (h if initial), as: canis- hound
— ^lm^; octo -eight - ad)t; noc-tem - night — iUad)t; {!>) kh (Lat.h)
— g-g, as: Ilostis — guest — Okft; hortus — garden — ©ar ten; (r)
38o
LESSON Lll.
L§33«
g__lj(c)_(f) (k if initial) as; gelidus — Cold — fatt; genu — knee
iinic; jugum — yoke — 3od); frangro - break — brcd)en.
Note. — A further class of exceptions is caused by the fact that the mutes are some-
times protected from change by an adjacent consonant, as: wander — roanPcrii; s.tone —
eicin ; haste — A>nft ; night — 9Inftt ; craft — Rvaft. There are also other deviations
from the strict rule too numerous to be mentioned here.
326. Umlaut.
1. Umlaut is the modification of an accented a^ 0, U, OU into it (e),
b, iir iiu respectively, and is caused by the influence of an i or j| in the
following syllable.
Remarks.— i. The vowels a, 0, ir, with the diphthong nil, are guttural
or "back" vowels, and approach the sound of the following i, which is
a palatal or " front" vowel.
2. This i or j appears in Old High German, but has disappeared —
with some exception's, as under (</j, (/), (/j, below — in Modern Ger-
man, and even in Middle High German. The following are a few exam-
ples of the origin and working of this law:
(a) 111 the plur. of Substantives of the iSo()n Model (§ 2i), the ter-
mination t is in O. H.G. -i, as: @oftiV O. H. G. gasti; ilv'ijtf,
O. H. G. krafti.
Note. — Not all substantives with Umlaut in the plural have thi= origin ; a number of
them (e.g., So()i;), which originally belonged to declension-forms without an -i, having
followed the analogy of the others.
(d) In the plur. of the 2)ovf Model (§ 36), the ending =rr is in
O. H. G. -ir, as: ."ilttlba-, O H. G. kalbir.
(c) In dinn'nutives in cl):n (orig. -kin) and =lc!tt (orig. -lin), as:
iliiobd)cn, rtiubdnn, from .^luobc
((/) In fem. appellatives in Av, as GHdliu, from @raf.
(if) In sub ts. in =nix% as ^.^cgriibuiv^, from grnbcn.
(/) In adjs. in -^ijj, as fliitifl, tljiitifl, from (jilt, %\)at.
{g) In the impf. subj. of strong verbs, the final =e is in O. H. G. -i,
as: Q':ibt, O. II. G. gabi.
3. Sometimes the Umlaut of a is represented by c instead of li, as in
gngcl (angel), from angil, Gr. angelos ; ^Itcni, parents, from oU.
4. Instances of Umlaut occur in English also, as in mouse,, mice;
goose, geese; old, elder; but they are comparatively rare, ind the in-
fluence of Umlauc ceased in Knglish at a very early period. In German
on the contrary it is still an active principle.
APPENDICES.
A. Substantives of aHalcr Model with Umlaut in Plural.
as 111
Masculine.
ader, field
Sir uber^ brother
-^ai!l!]l£il/ hammer
Sc^roager, brother-in-law
SSater, father
(Lesson V, § 17.)
^afen, harbour
Saben, shop
OiejU. stove
Sc^abeit, damage
S8oben, bottom, loft
(^nbeii, thread
Ciiartail, garden
OraDcn, ditch
' ilPicI^ apple
^am:nc(, wether
^aiibcl, affair, quarrel
OTantel, cloak
''Sio.hti, navel
DJagel, nail
-Sattel, saddle
Sdmabcl, beak
Sogsl, bird
Femhii7te.
ailuttcr, mother
Soxljljei, daughter
Neuter.
filofter, cloister
B. Masculine Monosyllables of .^unD Model (without Umlaut;,
aial, eel
Slar, eagle
2trm, arm
Sorb, board, shelf
Sovn, well
2)od)t, wick
SJolcf), dagger
S)om, dome, cathedral
S)ru(f, pressure, print
©vab, degree
@urt, girth
^ag, hedge
J&ad, sound
^alm, blade (of grass), etc.
$auci), breath
^orft, eyry
Sort, refuge
$iif, hoof
^uub, dog
(Less. VII, § 22, I,
ilalt, lime
^orf, cork
.Rrafjii, crane
£ad)0, salmon
Sacf, lac
Siiiit, sound
Suct)<j, lynx
SDIpW), salamander
aJlonb, moon
aHorb, murder
Dvt, place
*^3art, park
*^fab, path
^fau, peacock
^ol, pole
$ul3, pulse
SPu'ift, point
5Puitfc^, punch
Cluarj, quartz
Duaft, tassel
©d)uft, mean fellow
Sc()ii(), shoe
Spat, spar (mineral)
Staar, starling
Stalil, steel
Stoff, material
Sunb, strait, sound
Xo.\X, taffeta
2:ag, day
Salt, tact, bar(m music)
Sol', talc
2;f)ran, train-oil
2:J)ii.'ii, thione
2;orf, peat
Sujd), flourish of trumpeu
Sou, inch
33t
r,,'r^»
382
APPENDICES.
C. Feminines of Sol^ii Model.
(All with Umlaut; Less. VII, § 22, 3.)
Slngft, anguish
2(u§f(urt)t, evasion
STjt, axe
93anf, bench
S3rnut, bride
SBnift, breast
Sauft, fist
>vnu()t, fruit
G5ttii§, goose
©ruft, grave
^anb, hand
$aut, skin
filuft, cleft
lli'nft, strength
ilu(), cow
fltiitft, art
£ou§, louse
fiuft, air
£uft, desire
3)Jarf)t, power
Wacjb, maid-servant
i!)Jau§, mouse
Also those ending in -iiio and -in(
SKadjt, night
9lal)t, seam
9lot, need
aiufi, nut
Snu, sow
Sd)nur, string
Stabt, town
ffianb, wall
2Burft, sausage
3iinft, guild
^ufainmeiifunft, meeting
D. Irregular Foreign Substantives.
(Less. VII, §22, 6.)
1. 2)er Kaplan, chaplain, pi. Ataplaiic.
2. The following foreign substs, with accent on last syll. follow the 5i«nb Model : ber
iWonoloci', soliloquy; bcv 3)inloii', dialogue; also those in -or accented, as: ber
^umov', humour; ber I'Jaior', major.
3. The following are mixed (Or)r Model); Oer 3l(Itiia'tor, alligator; ber 2)Smon,
demon; ber ,Slon'|uI, consul ; bao ctercoffop', stereoscope; ba§ 2:cleifop', telescope; also
those from the Lat. in -OX unaccented, as: ber Jottor, ber ^i'rofeffor.
4. The following are weak or mixed (Olir Model): bcv 9lbamaitt', adamant; ber T)ias
tnant' (or 2)emant), diamond; ber SDlaiinet'', magnet.
E. Neuter Monosylla
i?LKs OF ^uiil) Model.
(Less. VIL§22, 5.)
SBeet, flower-bed
53cil, hatchet
SBcin, leg
SBier, beer
S8(ed), tin-plate
SBIei, lead
93oot,' boat
SBvot, bread
2)infl,2 thing
6rj, ore
geU, hide
^eft, festival
ijett, fat
^tofi.i i-aft
Wift, poison
OUcio, rut
.yeft, handle
.'Oorn,2 horn
Jod). yoke
flnie, knee
ilreu^, cross
8atib,2 land
Sid)t,= light
8oo9, lot
aOiia(a)l, mole, mark;
time
3)lo6, measure
Wo or. moor
a)loO'5, moss
Vwli, net
ti, oil
^^Jferb, horse
*>PfuiiD, pound
^Ult, desk
Slec^t, right
SHef), roc-deer
9tcic(), enii ire
9iiff, reef
9I06, horse
Salj, salt
Sdiaf, -heop
©d'iff ship
Scfjilf, nish
Sd^ot, shot
Sditpciii, pig
3c i(, rope
Sieb, sieve
Spiel, {,ame
Stiicf, piece
2:au, cable
Teil, share
3i>eliv, web-
21'eif, work
fflort,2 word
3elt, tent
3eug, stuff
^iel, goal
APPENDICES.
383
Also eight in -r :
■'Qaat, hair
$eer, army
3a^r, year
iWeer, sea
* Also with Umlaut.
^aar, pair tier, animal
9101)1-, reed J^or, gate
" Sdi; also A])|>. (j.*
/'. Weak Masculines not knding in -c.
(Less. XIV, § 57, 2.)
eat bear Oecf, fop .Unffa, Caffir
Sate.-, Bavarian ©efeU, fellow .jj,ci.ic(,, man
«urnar' Bulgarian Wraf, count Woln; Moor
«ui-[ct), lad i^a.ieftolj, old bachelor -JJarv, fool
J^vtft, Christian ^elb, hero ^Jicvv, nerve
gtnf, finch ^ei-r, master Qdyi, ox
(Jiil-ft, prince $irt, herdsman
i>ommei-, Pomeranian
^ritia, prince
Spn^, sparrow
-2teiiimc(,i, stono-
lOov, fool [mason
Hiuiar, Hungarian
A'oifatji-, ancestor
6'. Substantives of Mixed Declension.
(Less. XV, §§ 61 6,?.)
(a) 9Jomc Model (Muse).
©aHe(n), beam (sUnnri.- fniti, -^ .. . •
„, . , , . wumi, bLeei aji i", will
©ebante, thought
Also one neut. : ftn.; wv\, ( ;. bco .Oericiio.
.. Masculines: ^'^ *^^"*^ '^ ^°^^^-
^nuer peasa,,t i>oi(.cer, laurel nHUitoffd, slipper *3tiefel boot
2. Neuters: 9htflc, .ye Unbe, end
• Also after ailaler Model.
I. Masculines!
9tt)ti, ancestor
>VOVft, forest
0au,' district
»ufar,2 hussar
/■ Neuters:
(c) Cljr Model.
ma^t, mast
ijifau,' p.iar'. I;
Sd)nterj, pau;
See, lake
S3ett, bed
«pi.rn, spur
(also Sporeii)
otaat, state
Strati, beam'
i^t'Mh, shirt .
@trau6,3 ostrich
Uittertimii,-'snl)JLct
3ii.'vat, ornament
3* "9, interest
Of)r, ear
' Also after Cvimb Mudci. » Al,,o alter Slnabe Model.
To these may be added the foreign substantives in App. D. . See .,!..., App. G
m
■
m
1
384
APPENDICES.
baSSBanb:
bie syanf :
ba3 Dina :
ber !Corn :
ba« «eftc(;t :
ba<5 ^oni :
ber Sabett:
ba^ Snnb:
bas i;id)t :
bcr "Mann :
bcr Dfonb :
ber Crt :
bie Sail :
bev etrnug :
iaa Suc^ :
boo sajort :
ber3oa:
* For instance ■
dered); but bie j
the Netherlands.
- For instance
but an alien Crten
Double Plurals with dikferent meanings.
(Less. XV, § 64.)
'^onber, ribbons
iflnnfe, benches
3)insie, things
Dome or Jbnirr, thorns
_ (MefiiOter, faces
Corner, horns
lidben, shops
Snnbfi', sejiarate countries ^
fiirfne, candles
Wdniier, men
Woute, satellites
Ovter, (single) places*
Sour, sows
Stioiific or Straugeii, os.
triches
2;iii%r, cloths
aBdrter, single words
3olle, inches
SDonbt, ties
5<ontrii, commercial banks
3)ini]er, creatures
Dovnoi, thorns (collectively)
0e)icl)tc, visions
.'poiiie, kinds of horn
iinbcn, shutters
finnbf, provinces or districts
i!iri)ter, lights
aWaniiCII, vassals
IJfonbfn, months (poetic)
Crtf, places (collective'. )
Sancn, wild boars
Strniifif, nosegays
ZudH, kind,-, of cloth
il'Ol'tf, coherent words
:)Oiu-. tolls
-bte X'ttJibei- Ciiiiopao, the countries of Europe (individually consi-
■ ciui\iien iianftc, the German distriti ,.r iiroviuces; bie 9Jieberlanbe,
Poets use the latter form also in the sense of the former.
\n nUcu Crtcni ber 'VUouiiij, in all (inhabited) places of th" province;
, in all places generally, everywhere.
//. Nouns {/,ios^/jy abstract) WHICH FORM THEIR Plural hv means ov
A DERIVATIVE OR OF A COMPOUND FORM WHICH IT-^ICLF
IS USED BOTH IN THE SINGULAR AND PLURAL.
(Supp? Less. B., § 66, i, Note. 1
ba
Singular.
ber 93au, building
(ber syail, burrow, etc.
bac) 'iH'ftvebeii, effort
ber 33etnt.i, deceit, fraud
ber SBunb, alliance
ber I'ant, thanjts
baS (irbe, inheritance
ber ;yriebe, treaty of peace
bie OJewalt, force, violence
bie (?Jiinft, favour
ber .Uiiinmer, affliction, trouble
brt'5 \!.q\>, praise
Dei 111 01 b, murder
ber ;)!i-,t, counsel, advice
Plural.
btc Saiiten
bie iiauc)
bie '-Ikflrelningcn
btc "-lU'triiiiereien
bie i^iinbnifje
bie 3;air{)ac]nn(ien
bie (Srbfdinften
bie (vricbcKouertrcSiie
bie ©eamlttljcitinteiteir
bie ftitp.ftbejcugiingen
bie .Hiiinnicrnifje
bie Vobivriiifte
bie SDJorbtl&uten
bie Siatfc^lagc
APPENDICES.
38s
Singular.
(ber 5Rat, cou.icillor
ber SWoui), robbery
I'd- 3ci]Cll, blessing
ber Stl'Cit, quarrel, dispute
ber J'ob, death, decease
bag UnjUict, misfortune
ber S8erbru6, vexation
ber3an'/ quarrel
Plural.
bfe SJiate)
bic aiidubcrcien
bie 3ci]ituniien
bie Strcitiijteiten
bic JobcSfciUe
bie UiiiililcfcfaUe
bic 33crbric6lic[}fciten
bic 3cinfcrcien
/. Exceptions to the Rules on Gender.
(Less. XVII, XVIII, §§ So, 89, 90.)
80. I. {a) Fern.: Cic SDIannSpcrfoit, male-person. Ncut : all diminutives in -(^eit
and -Icill.
2. (fi) Neut.: bao aSeib, woman; ba3 *i)ieii)ct), wench; 'a^x'i ';'fraueiijimmer, woman;
and all diminutives in -djni and -(fill.
{b) Trees, etc. ;
ber 2(f)oni, maple
ber 9(pfel, apple
baS ©pl)cii, ivy
baS ©eratiiiiiii, geranium
ber §afer, oats
ber §nnf, hem j
ber illee, clover
ber iloljl, cabbage
ber J^ol)lrabi, Brussels-spouts
baj JJoiii, grain
ber ilciud), L'ck
ber SorOecr, laurel
ber a)(aiS, maize
bO'j 'JJiood, moss
ber Stoggcn, rye
ber Spnrijet, asparagus
ber Spiiiat, spinach
ber 3:abat, tobacco
ber iffieijen, wheat
Also Compounds, as: ber Sc^uiarjOont, blackthorn; baO Weifeblatt. honey-suckle;
ba3 *-8ergif;nuMniiicf)t, forget-me-not; baci Jaufenbfcljbn, daisy; and diminutives, as: basi
93ei(c()en, violet.
3. (a) Metals — i^/zjc. ; ber MoOalt, cobalt; ber Stahf, steel; ber Sombacf,' pinch-
beck; ber -iiJiSmut, bismuth; ber 3iiif, zinc. /^^;«..- bie iUatiito, platina.
ip) Countries, etc. — Musl. : ber ^eloponneS, Peloponnesus; ber .'onai], the Hague;
Fern. : bic .Uvim, Crimea; bie Senante, the
and those in -ei, -ou, -].
also those in -^an, as: Ddu'gau.
Levant; bie Ufraiiie, the Ukraine
89. I. (a) Neut. : ba§ ^effing, brass.
(fi) Feminines in -el :
Slc^fet, shoulder
Stmpct, lamp
Slmjel, black-bird
aingel, fish-hook
SJibel, bible
93ucfel, boss (of a
shield)
6l)inbei, cymbal
Ssattel, date
5)eid)fel, carriage-
pole
Itiftel, thistle (Surge!, throat
2)rof)0(, thrush .giummel, humble-
(Sirf)e(, acorn bee
j^abcl, fable ^jnfel, island
^actei, torch ilaitjci, pulpit
(■5:cffc(, fetter ^artoffol, potato
^t&cl, spelling-book iloppoi, leash ; brace i'appei, poplar
(VOrinel, formula (of dogs) iparaOcl, parable
Qabcl, fork .Hugel, bail ']}riiiU'l, primrose
©ciftel, scourge ^uppel, cupola SRafpef, rasp
(Sonbcl, gondola a^Ianbel, ,- Imond SU'gcI, rule
aJiaiigel, mangle
aJHftct, mistletoe
i)hi)d}el, sh 11
'JJobel, needle
■Sleffcl, nettle
Drgel, organ
iS6
APPENDICES.
«unjel, wrinkla Semmel, roll of bread Safel, table
3il)aiS)tel, band-box Slc^el, itckle Srobbel, tassel
H
oc^aufel, shovel
Sc^autel, swing
©d^tnbel, shingle
©d^ilffcl, dish
In -n :
Slber, vein
9(fter, aster
Sliiflcr, oyster
93lattev, blister
Gutter, butter
(Jeber, cedar
3)auer, duration
(Sifter, magpie
5afer, fibre
J?eber, feather, pen
(?eier, celebration
6ptnbel, spindle
©toffcl, step of a
ladder
Stopvel. stubble
ijolter, rack
^alfter, halter
ilammer, chamber
belter, wine-press
Irommel, drum
SrUffel, truffle
Wad)Ul, quail
Smarter, torture
Wauer, wall
ajiutter, mother
5Jattcr, adder
9Jummev, number
99affel, wafHe
fflinbel, swaddling
cloth
'Burjel, root
Srotebel, onion
Steuer, tax
Xo(i)tet, daughter
2;rauer, mourning
SeSper, even- tide,
vespers
ffiimpcr, eyelash
3tffer, cipher
'^itljn, guitar
fliefer, pine
illammer, cramp-iron Dper, opera
fltnppcv, rattle Otter, otter
fcauer, lurking-place 3Jiifter, elm
iJelier, liver Scijcuer, barn
aeier, lyre Sd^Icuber, sling
Setter, ladder 3rf)ulter, shoulder
Note. — The names of rivers ending in -er or -f I are also feminine, e. g. : bie Dber hie
Sffiefer, bie TOofel.
Neuters in -fl :
«ilitbel, bundle
35iinfel, darkness
(gjempel, example
In -cii:
atlmofeii, alms
33eclen, basin
(Eifen, iron
In -er :
2l6enteiier, adven-
ture
9llter, age
Saner, bird-cage
®iter, pus
©uter, udder
^fcuftcr, window
i^euer, fire
Steber, fever
J^tiber, load
Jutter, fodder
fiapitel, chapter
SKittel, means
Drafel, oracle
SHubel, hei-d, flock Stegel, seal
Sd^armii^et, skirmish U&el, evil
Segel, sail
SUIIen, colt fiafen, sheet (bed-
Jliffen, cushion clothes)
2cf)Cii, fief
And all infinitives when used as substantives.
©Otter, grate, rail-
ing
©itter, trellis
Jlloftcr, cloister
iJupfev, copper
fiager, couch
Softer, vice
Seber, leather
fiilber, carrion
IDJeffer, knife
atUeber, bodice
aJhifter, pattern
Dpfcr, sacrifice
^•Pfiafter, plastL-r
'IJolftcr, cu;hioii
^I'lilner, powder
^tsiifter, register,
index
SEBiefel, weasel
aBappen, coat-of-
arms
3ei«^eii, token
Scepter or ^^Pter,
sceptre
Silbcr, silver
Steuer, helm
2^{)eater, theatre
llfcv, shore
•SJoffer, water
iiJetter, weather
'IBiiiiber, wonder
Simmer, apartment
Wolter, a grain mea- Siiiber, oar
sure Sifiauer, shower
Note. — 3)iiinftev, 'minster,' occurs both as masculine — itom its present form — and
as neuter — Irom its derivation from the Latin monasterium.
(c) Feminines :
Stc^t, proscription SBont, bench itirunft, conflagration Surg, castle
Strt, manner, kind Soi, bay Slut, brood ^aijrt, expedition
'Bofin, path ©rout, bride ^Piicht, bay i?fucf)t, flight
APPENDICES.
1^7
Slur, field
%\xi, flood
j^orm, form
iJracf)!, freight
(5raii, woman
iJrift, time
gurc{)t, fear
j^urt, ford
@ei6, goat
©ic^t, gout
®ier, cagernc*?
Glut, glow
©unft, favour
^oft, custod)
J^aft, haste
$iilb, grace
^x\t, guard
3ai]b, chase
iloft, food
Neuter \ :
9la§, carrion
lUint, office
iOnb, bath
iOniib, ribbon
Sett, bed
93ilb, picture
SSlatt, leaf
Slut, blood
93ucl), book
S3imb, bundle
S^rtd), roof
35itt0- tiling
3)orf, village
Si, egg
Si5, ice
iJacf), compartment
So{j, cask
gelb, fiL-ld
§leifcf), flesh
®arn, yam
©clb, money
(3Uv1>, gl.iss
©leicv groove, rut
©lieb, limb
(3) 2ier 9(t)enb, ev
draft, strength
flufi, cow
JTur, (obsolete), elec-
tion
Caft, load
Cift, cunning
Tlatt, boundary
iDJorfd), mars! , fen
aWautf), excise
a)JiW}, milk
'}lal)t, seam
9JuII, zero
^;in, torment
iPflicbt, duty
iJJoft, post
!}JrncOt, sjilendour
Oiial, torment
Shift, rest
©oat, seed
Also those in
Bdfam, shame
3d)av, host, troop
Sc^au, show
Srfieii, dread
®c()td)t, layer, stratum
Scf)[ad^t, battle
ScOIucfjt, ravine
Sd)mad), disgrace
Sd}fift, writing
Sc^idb, guilt, dtbt
Sd^iuulft, swelUng
See, sea
Sidjt, ^ight
Sprcii, chaff
Spuv, trace
3tntt, stead, place
Stirii, brow
Streit, litter [sion
®ud)t, longing, pas-
App. C.
0lUcf, luck
GJolb, gold
0)ra&, grave
CJfao, i^rass
PJut, projierty, estate
^CiV>t, resin
,yaii;-t, Iiend
4lClu6, house
^ei(, prosjierity
,'ijemb, shirt
§erj, heart
$cii, hay
$irit, brain
JOOtj, wood
Aiif)n, fowl
Jtalb, calf
JliiiD, clii'i.l
Jtiiui, c!ii:i
.Uloi^, ganuent
Alovii, corn
Ali-aut, herb
iJamiit, lamb
iianb, land
2anb, foliage
Also those in
February ; DtttJ $'.'tfd;a
■ening ; bad ^u^enb
2eib, suffering
iiieb, song
fioO, praise
£od;, hole
fiofiii, wages
Sot, plumb-line
'^ial)l, meal, repast
aJhilj, malt
iUlnvt, marrow
iUJaiil, mouth i^of
beasts)
TOe(;(, flour
iDieitjc^, wench
iDhiO, pap, jam
•Jleft, nest
Dbft, fruit
Df)r, car
^ec^, pitch
'IJfaiib, pledge
3iab, wheel
9iei5, twig
;){teB, ream
atinb, head of cattle
5d;cit, log of wood
App. E.
\t, seal.
'.en.
^f)Oit, deed
'ZtiHv, door
J:rad)t, load, cos-
tume
I^rtft, pasturage
U^r, watch
a3ad)t, guard
aBaljI, choice
2Be£)r, defence
aSelt, world
SBuc^t, bulk, heavy
weight
SBulft, pad
aSJut, rage
3o^l, number
.yeit, time
,Sier, ornament
3uc^t, disciphne
Bunft, guild
3d) lib, sign-board
wc^loB, lock; cas-
tle ,
Scf)tna[j, grease,
lard
Sd)toevt, sword
Stift, foundation
Strol), straw
Zl)C[l, valley
tiid;, cloth
'Ski), cattle
5?olt, nation
iffiadjS, wax
iBantm'3, jacket,
vest
ffiel), woe
iiSciO, woman
aBerg, tow
iBtlb, game
iffiol)!, wcUbeing
Sffiort, word
SBrad, wreck
3elt, tent
3inii, tin
If!
$S8
APPENDICES,
i
(c) Matatlifitt:
Suc^ftabe, letter of
the alphabet
jifrlebe, peace
f^unfe, spark
i^ebaate, thought
@(aube, faitb
^aufe, heap
9lame, name
Same, seed
Sc^iabe, injury
SBtOe, will
Slffe, monkey
2)rncl;e, dragon
I^atte, falcon
$nfe, hare
fibroe, lion
iWabc, raven
Aiife, cheeM
And names of males, as: ber 33otf, messenger; ber Jdnabe, boy, etc.
Neuters: Mmie, eye; Gnbe, end; (Srbc, inheritance.
(«•) Itr flat^oIiJ', Catholic.
3. {b) Masculines: 3rrtum, error; Weic^tum, wealth.
(c) Feminities in -nJd :
(5rlau6nt3, permission
erfparni3, savings
3aiiliii5, putrefaction
*53rbcrn;3, furtherance
'5«nftcrni3, darkness
.Rcnntnid, knowledge
*3cl)icrfni^, terror
SrocfntS, drought
* Also neuter.
Fcminines\n-\9.\: J) rangf a (, tribulation; mm;fal, trouble ; SrUbfal, affliction.
Masculine \\\ -|el : Stopfel, stopper, etc.
90. 4- >^>;«/«/«^ compounds of D!ut : 2Inmut, grace ; ^cmut, humility; ©voijntHt
generosity; Sanjmut, long-suffering; Sanftmut, meekness; 2c()H)cnnut, melar.choj,
aSe^mut, sorrowfulness.
/. Nouns which have a double Gender.
•SebrargniS, distress
*!8efugni§, authority
SOelilnimerniS, sorrow
S3eforgni9, arprehunsion
a3etrilbni<3, affliction
JBeroanbtniC), conjuncture
ffimpfangnio, conception
©rfenntnisl, cognition
*93erbammnt9, damnation
aSerbcrbni^, corruption (is
also used as neuter)
33crfiiii!iniiy. neglect,
omission
liiJilbnid, wilderness
( Less,
ber Sanb (pi. SBdnbe), volumes
ber SBunb (pi. '-Miinbe), confederacy
ber Saner (pi. Sauern), peasant
ber GI)Oi- (pi. Gbore), chorus
ber Grbe (pi. Grben), heir
bie Grfcnittnio, intuition
ber ®eiicl, hostage
bie ©ift (^litgift), dowry
ber ^arj, Hartz mountains
ber ^cibe (pi. .^eibcn), heathen
ber §ut (pi. .£>iite), hat
ber Jliefer, jaw
ber ^unbe, customer
ber Setter, guide
ber 9JJangel, want
bao ^Rart, marrow
ber Wejfcv, measurer, surveyor
ber JReiiJ, ricu
XVIII, §g,.)
bacs 33anb (pi. Sanber), ribbon
baa SBimb (pi. SOiiiibe), bundle
ba? 93aucv, cage
baS GOor (pi. GOorc), choir •
ba§ Grbe, inheritance
baS GrfenntniS, verdict
bie ©eigel, .scourge
baS ©ift, poison
'iiO.^ iMirs, resin
bie $cibe, heath
bie S^wi, heed, guard
bie jltefer (pi. iliefern), pine-tree
btc flunbc, knowledge, tidings
bie Sieitcv, ladder
bie DJtaiiael, mangle
bie ffiarf (pi. itiarten), border-land
baS Weffcr, knife
baS iReiS (pi. 3ieifer), twig
APPENDICES.
389
bet Sc^trb (pi. Sc^ilbe), thield
ber See (pi. Seen), lake
ber Spiofje, offspring
ble Steucr, tax, duty
ber Stift, pencil, tack
ber Xe\i, p.nrt
ber I^or (pi. l:boren), fool
ber Berbienft, gain
ba9 S(5irb (pi Sd^ilber), »l(?n.botrd
bie See, sea, ocean
bie Sproffe, step (In a ladder)
ba« Steuer, helir.
bad Stiff, pious foundation
bad 2,ei[, share, portion
baa Iljor (pi. Ifjore), gate
bad Oirbicnft, merit
K. Monosyllabic Adjectives without Umlaut.
(Less. XXV, § .25.)
barfcf), harsh
(rati, good
Bunt, variegated
bumpf, dull (said
of sound)
falD, fallow
falfd), false
fladj, flat
frol), joyful
glatt, smooth
^o^t, hollow
^olb, favourable
laf)l, bald
fari], stingy
fnapp, tight
la()m, lame
lag-, tired
matt, wearied
ir.orfcf), rotten
nacft, naked
The practice varies with bang or bange, afraid ; blafi, pale;
sound; flov, clear; nnfe, wet; javt, tender.
platt, flat
plump, clumsy
rafrf), quick
toi), raw
runb, round
facfit, gentle, low
fan ft, soft
fatt, satiated
fc^laff, slack
fdjlauf, slender
fc^roff, rugged
ftarr, stiff
ftolj, proud
ftraff, tight, stretched
ftumpf, blunt
toU, mad
ooU, full
maf^r, true
ja^m, tame
fromm, pious; gefunb,
L. Stronc; Vkrhs not given in the Lists.
(Less. XXX 1 1, § 192. — Rare forms in [ J.)
1. bingen (W.), hire
2. ga(;j)ren (W.), ferment
3. gebarcn,' bear, bring forth
4. feifen (W.), chide, scold
5. lUeben (W.), split, cleave
6. Ineipcn2(W.), pinch
7. pffcgsii,''' practise
8. jaugen*(VV.), suck
9. frf)inbeit (W.), flay
10. fd)(ei6eit (W.), fray
11. fdjnaubcit (W.), snort
12. ft^rauben (W.), screw
13. fd^roaren," fester
14. f plcigen (W.), split
16. ftedeno (W. N.), stick, be stuck
16. ftic!3en(\V.N.), scatter
17. ftiiifen, stink
1 gebierft, etc. '■' Rarely strong, s
fougft, faugt. " fc^iptert. " ftidft, etc. ;
gcbungen
gor
gcgoren
gebar
gcDoren
«ff
gefiffen
Hob
gefloben
tttipp
gefnippen
'.Pflog ;
hpflig]';
gepflogen
fog
flefogen
( [fcr;anb] J
( IfcOimbJ <
gefdjunben
wa
Oefc^liffen
f^nob
gcfcfinof'cn
fc^rob
8
;,fc»)n)or ,»
( [fcOiuur] ';
flt,'.. . r:
fpU6
gefplitfen
fiat
[geftccfenj
ftob
geftoben
ftanf '
geftunfcn
Weak in other meanings.
« fSugft, fSugt, or
generally weak.
EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION.
-•o»-
■
Explanations.— i. References are to the §.
a. Words in Italia are not to be translated.
J. Words connected by ^, if followed by a note, are included in that note; otherwise
such connected words are tc be rendered by a single word in German.
4- The gendar is not given, where it is according to rule.
I. One may' say of the metaphysicians' what Scaliger
said of the natives" of the Basciue ' Provinces': " 1 am told"
that they understand each^other, but I do not believe it."
« • can.' * a)ietapl)t)fifcr. ^ ^^^ tSingcbovciie. < bnijf ijd). * t^vo^Jin^, /.
'113,2. 1
II. "A friend of mine,'" says Lord Erskine, "suffered
from' continual' sleeples.,ness.* Various' means'' were tried"
to^send^him^o^sleep^— but in^vain." At^last his physicians
resorted'" to an experiment" which succeeded perfectly.'*
They dressed" him in a watchmnn's^coat," put " a lantern
into his '" hand, placed " him in a sentry-box," and — he was
asleep '^ in ten minutes."
»ii9,3(^). 'nii-fdat. MortUia()vcnb. '♦(Sililaflotuifeit. « ucrfcf'ieben.
'9)fitti(, «. 'iipvfitdicn. "11)11 cin,^,iiui)l{ifcrn. ' iu'nKbnic<. '° nrrroUeii auf
+ acc. " ^jH'Vliid), w. "uoUftdiibhi. '^niMiol)cu -f dat. of pers. and
ace. of thing. '* ")Jad)tiuaif)tevfittc(, »;. " fteden. •''44, 6 (^). '^fteUen.
" iE3ad)t()niti<d)en. ''>ciiincfd)(afen.
III. The great Goethe was not particularly ' fond ■' of music.
When a pianist' once, at a Courtlconcert in Weimar, was
in«_the^ middle' <7/"a very long sonata," the poet suddenly ' rose'
up and, la the horror " of the assembled '" ladies and gentle-
men, exc! jjr.'.ed ' : " If it lasts " three minutes longer, I shall
confess ■' everything."
* bcfoiiber, adj. ^ greunb. 3 iflnDicriptclcr. ■• .S>f, m, ; use compound
word. Smitten in. « donate, /. 'plbt3lid). «ftet)en. ' Sd)i-e(feu, m,
"oerfammeln. "riifen. '^baueru. "gefte^cru
39*
L.-^
EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION'.
391
IV. In the first piece ' Theodore Hook wrote for the stage.'
a traveller' comes up^io ' the door of an inn/ and sa>s:
"Excuse me, my friend, are you the master of this house?"
— " Yes, sir," is" the reply ; " my wife ha^^been ' dead these "
three weeks."
' etUcf, n. ' S8ill)nf. » bcv Dh'iieiibc. * aiif . . ^u, 224, 4.
* lautft. ' 257, 4, Note. • ' for the last three weeks ' ; 46.
' ©aftl)QU».
V. "Ven you're a married man, Samivel," said old' Wei-
ler, "you'll understand a_good_many_things' as' you don't
understand now ; but vether it's worth-while ' goinjr.through*
so much to learn so little, as the charity^boy " said ven he
got^to^the^end^of the alphabet, is a matter^o'^taste." 1
rayther think it isn't."" ^
' a i)roper name preceded by an adj. takes the art. " '^JielfO. 3' ihat,'
96,5. '•^ol• a)fiil)c juert. * bunVmo.d)cu. « -.HniuMmljiUfr. 'fertig fein
iitit. « ®ciff)inncf«farf)e. 9 • i scarcely think (flloubcn) it.'
VI. George Selwyn's morbid ' passion 'for public executions'
and similar* horro's' was notorious.* He paid_a_vi.sit_to
Lord Holland while the latter lay on his' deathbed' When
hisjordship" wa9|old '» that Mr. Selwyn had called," he said :
"Should he come pgain, please bring him up.'' If I am still
alive " I shall be^appy " to see him. If I am dead he will
be happy to see nie."
' fmufljaft. n'nbeii)rf)aft. 3,e)inricf)tuitfl. *<x\)\\\\^. ^®xmt\, m.
*atUiemein befannt. ^44.6 0.). 8@tcrbebftt. »®e. @noben. '°benn.1)-
rid)tiflen. " ' been there. ' '^ 210, 3, {b). » am ?ebcn. »< fid) fveueii.
VII. .At* the time when Napoleon the Third lived as an
exile" in London, he was always a welcome guest at' Lady
Blessington's, at' Gore House. Very soon after his return*
392
EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION.
to Paris, while his poh'tical" prospects' were still rather*
doubtful/ herjadyship'" paid^a^visit^to" that capital, and
met '' the Prince driving " in the Bois de Boulogne. It was an
embarrassing '* encounter," for the future '" Emperor of the
French had shown " himself anything^but '' grateful for her
ladyship's'" courtesy.''' He saluted-" her, however,'' with
forced politeness," and asked; "Countess," shall you stay
long in Paris?" — "I really -' cannot say," answered Lady
Blessington, with a bewitching"* smile ; " and you } "
'227, (/>), 2. »bcr ii^cvbauiitc. ^ijei. 4i„, s ^ihlcf fe()i-,/. ^poUtifd).
'2lii«ftd)t,/ 'jiemlid). ^mcifcUjaft. "'the lady.' " bciiiri)eii. 'Mrcf'
feu (/;-rt«j.). '3d„f etitev ^p;r,ici1al)vt. '<ucrh-(icit. "^I'f^niimciitnffeu.
'^^utiuiftin. "cmunfni. "iucf)t8H)cuintn-a(<<. '« AiTimbru1)foit. =°(]i-ii6cii.
"inbeffeit. ^ §oflui)feit. =3g„aj,i(je ©vafin. ^'Muii-flic^. ^^ beiaubernb.
VIII. Talleyrand was bored' for' his' autograph* by a
dull ' English nobleman." Atjast " he sent him the following
invitation": "Dear Lord, — ^F/Z/jwHionour" me with your
company'" next Wednesday evening, at eight o'clock. I
have invited a number'^ of exceedingly clever'' people, and
I do not like " to be the only fool" among them."
' Uim UkvbntO beftiivnicn. ^itm. 3<an,' < ^Jlntonrapt), «. 'ei'ifaltig.
'(Sbflmomi. ^Mibliri). ^(Stnlabunfl. 9i,fcl)vrn, wi/er. '°®c(\cmvaxt
(presence). "%\Vf,al)\,/. " geiftreicf). "j^criic mbgeii. '-• Dumnifopf.
XI. At a dinner_party' in Paris, a dull' and ugly' ba-
ron* sat between Madame de Stael and Madame Recamier
(the acknowleged belle' of the day), and whispered" to the
former : " Am I not fortunate to be ' si'Uwg between beauty
and genius » ? " — " Not so very fortunate," replied the of-
fended authoress," "for you possess'" neither the one nor
the other ! "
» Diner (Fr.), w. ''bnmm. M)af3licl). '•33aroii'. ' Scf)ont)eit. *in8
Of)r fluftmi. ''fid) befinbcn. ^^enie, «. « Sdiriftfteaerhu "bep.ben.
EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION.
393
X. When the dramatist Gilbert was one day descending^
m the greatest hurry ^ the steps => fronting^ the Savage Club*
ft stranger, in a state « of excitement ' which defied « regular"
construction/" addressed him thus: "Excuse ^/^, have you
seen a gentleman with one eye of^the^name^of " X. — ?"
Gilbert answered '^ this question with anotheT: "Stop'' a
moment. What's the name of his other eye ? "
MKrmumtciiCM. ^CiM(r,/ ^Zvcm\s\ug. *wv. ^use the Engl
words. 'HiiUrtiib, w. ^^it'iimimui. 8,-p,ttni4--en. ' i-cneh'erf)t '°>iiJovt^
fol^ir. ">JJamni«. '-beniitunn-tcii. '^crimibni.
XI. When Charles Lamb was still a clerk' in the India-
House/ lie was one day rebuked ^as.follows ' bv a superior^-
"I have remarked, Mr. Lamb, that you alwavs'conie'to « the
office' very late.' - "Thats true, to^e^sure.^" answered
Ella; "but you must not forget that f always go aw;iy very
early." Of^course" such an explanation'" was more than
enough."
'5d)roilnn-;44, 5. ^ use the Engl words. M'lr 9irDe ftrdrii -tfof-
fleiibmmitVu. ^ Dci- i^oni ■ rtu^ -.iiir. ^ >)3iireatt, «. -mol)! (after the
verb ' is '). 9 luuiidtd). '° Giflannui. " ()iiuTid)cnt)
XII. r never in my life committed' more thnn one art 0/
folly."" said Rulhiere one d;iy in the presence of Talleyrand.
" But when will it end = .? " inquired the latter.
'begelieii, trans. ^loilicit. ^t\\\in\.
XIII. While Sheridan was staying' at the country-house "" of
a friend, he was one morning a«ked ' by a lady to'a^ccompany
her on a walk. The lady was neither witty nor beautiful,
and the author of the ' School for Scandal '" was at^a loss'
for an excuse, until he luckily" discovered and ann^uncid '
to her that it was raining. His disappointed •"■ persecutress »
2(j
ill
B<: r
m
:i
'> A
fii
\\\
394
EXERCISES I\ COMPOSITION.
retired," but shortly'' came back to^announce" that the
weather had cleared^up." "Sojt^as,'* m?dam,"" said
Sheridan, driven'' to despair"; "but it has only" cleared up
enough for one — not yet for two."
« anf S8cfuc^ fein. n'aubf)aii^. Miitten. n'dfteiicl)iile. «t)crlegen urn.
'fliacflidiectDcife. 'mittpilrii -t dat. ^m ifiven Gvwnrtimgen (expecta-
tions) flrtaiiid)t ; 283, 4. ' ^ycifolciciiii. '^ fid) ,^urucf;;iel)en. "ba(b.
"iiiit bci- 9;nd)rid)t. "fid) aufflarcn. 'MUevbingS. "gimbigc ^uau.
'*299. "3Jeri;iueif(ung; usedef. art. "f)od)ftcn8.
XIV. Foote, being annoyed' one day by an irinerant'
fiddler,'' who produced ' harsh " discords " under his window,
threw him down a coin' and bade him be^gone,' as one
scraper " at '" a door was quite sufficient."
*belaftigeu; 284, I, (</). M)mtiir,iel)cnb. ^(Seigenfpiefcv. *f)cn)or=
Imngeit. Md)nll. 6 5[Ti'if.ton, »/. '©clbftiicf, «. «fi"d) aud bem @taube
modjen. 'ifra^er. "an. " gcniig.
XV. A certain nobleman was detected' trying- to cheat'
at* cards," and turned" out of the house with the threat^
that he should be thrown out_pf the window if he came again.
He related his misfortune" to Talleyrand, protested' his inno-
cence,'" and asked "him at the same time" for" advice.'*
" Well, my dear friend, I advise you to play in^future " only
bn^the^ground^floor."' "
'cutbcitcii. ="'111 the attempt." Hietvilgcn. -•im. « ^artcufpiel, n.
'meifen. '3)rol)U!ig. » go^eiilgefi-fiicf, «. 'bcteuenu "Unfd)u(b,/. "bit»
tiMt. "vtgtcid). "urn. '♦^Jfat, w. "fiinfttg. '^ ju ebcner (Srbe.
XVI. h barrister ^ entered ' the court ' one morning with his
wig* stuck quite on one side. Not being^aware ' how ridic-
ulous Mie looked,' he was^surprised' at« the observation?
made" uponjt," and at Jength " he asked Curran: "Dp
10
EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION.
395
you see anything ridiculous '* in this wig, Mr. Curran ? " -
" Nothing except the head," was the consolatory "^ answer.
*9tbtiofat'. " treteii in + ace. '®encl)tsfaa(, »?. '•tH'rriicff,/ Moiffen.
284,1 {6). Mdcfterlicf). 'auofeljeu. «fid) luunbeni. ^i\bev-hacc. '^SBe^
merfung. "290, 2 (^). "bariiber. '^eublUi). '*i2a, u. " troftlic^.
XVII. After a duel ' with young O'Connell, Lord Alvanley
gave a guinea' to the coachman' who had diiven him to and
from the scene of the encounter.' Surprised at ' the largeness
of the sum,' the man said: " My lord,' I_only_/^^/&_you_to«
" Alvanley interrupted him with the words: "My
friend, the guinea is for bringing' me back, not for tak-
ing '"me."
'Xiier, «. ''©ninec', / ^f utidjer ; 45, Rule 2. ^ '^ to i\,^ scene oj
the encounter (Stellbi-^/cin, n) and from there back." « bnvd). «" "large
J^um (Summe)." ' (iiidbuirr §err. » id) t)abc ®ie yx mir l)iu~. 9377.
'° ()iniiei)mcn, use the perf.
XVIII. A gentleman, who had been^worsted ' in a dispute '
with Person, lost his^temper.' " Professor,' " said he, " my
opinion^ of you is most" contemptible.'" - "Sir," returned
the great Grecian," "I never yet met'' with any'" of your
opinions that was " not contemptible."
' ben .^iiv^mt ^ie()cn. ^ ©i^^pntation. ^ ^ie ©ebnlb. * .^crr ^]3rofe[for.
'2«einnmi. ^127,2. ^ jjcvndjtltd). « @ned)c. ' oorfommen (impers. -f
dat. of pers.). '° ein (nom.). " plupf. subj. ; 268, 4.
XIX. The English,' says Sydney Smith, are a calm,*
reflecting' people; they are ready to give time and money
as soon as they are convinced' of a thing; but they love
dates,' names, and certificates." In^the^midst of the' most
heartrending' narratives," John Bull requires'' the day'" of
t,i€ msntny the year of our Lord, the name of the parish,"
I
11 a
11 t
39^
EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION.
and the countersign" of three or four respectable^* house-
holders.'^ As soon as these affecting" circumstauces "
have been stated/" he can no longer hold^out/' but^' gives
way" to his natural kindness — puffs,^'' blubbers," and sub-
scribes.
J Gnalaiiber. » ru{)lg. 3 lUrrle'flcnb. - ilbcr^cu'flen. « ^ahU f.
JBLM(a.t[Hguun.s,-d)ein, m. r r,er,55cn-eif]cnb. « (5-r,?n()luno. 9 i,cr(anacn.
J^.atnm. " 3al,vc->,a(,l. - ^ird,ipicO «. '^ n.ucridjnit, / "^ angcfc^en.
236, I, Rem. I. =' fveicii l»anf laficii. =^ fri)nauben. • " fd)(ud)scn.
XX. A young poet once came to Piron to read ' him a
couple of new sonnets^ written ^ by him, and ask him which
he preferred.* The^momentMie had finished the first, Piron
said hastily": " I prefer the other," and positively' refused'
to listen even" to a line'" of it.
Dovlrfen. » (Soniiett', «. 3 yerfafiou ; 290,
{l>)- * Dovijle^en. « ®o«
balb...mu-. MjafUg. ' burd)au8. « fid) lucigcr-i. ' and) nur. '° ^eile.
XXI. Wewitzer, the well-known actor ^ and wag,=' was
joking^ and laughing at* rehearsaP one day, instead of
mmdmg" his part.' Raymond, the stage-manager,^ took"
him to^task,'" saying: "Mr. Wewitzer, I wish" you would
pay" a little attention.'-' — "Well,'' sir,'-^'" answered
Wewitzer, "so I am '^ I'm paying as little attention as
possible."
^ ' ©dianfpieler. ^mmh.m. 3jd)er^,en. *aul ^ ^uobc, use def. art.
mm + aiif, with ace. ; 224, 2, (6). 7 gjoQ^.^ s s)}fj^{,-fem. 9 ^teUen
|°3Hv9febe. "luoUte. '^ gebeu. '^Mn. ^^^Umx. '^ §err 9tegiffeur!
"ba8tt)iie id) jaaud). • >Aegi„eur.
XXII. The younger Dumas once perpetrated » a cruel*
joke'' at^the^expense * of the Manzanares,' the riviil*»t« th.f
EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 39^
runs^through' Madrid and is called a river by the grandilo-
quent inhabitants of this city. When the famous dramatist"
was one day present- at a bullfight," either the heat/ or
some revolting" incident - in the show,- overcame - him
to^such^an^extent^' that he fainted.- J3n - somebody brin-
ing him a glass of water, as he was recovering,- Dumas
: Tl ';/'^"^" ^"" ' ^'^^"^" -^-= "Go^'and pTr
It into he Manzanares; the river needs- it much more
tnan 11
mnc^en. -bitter, mit}, - auf Soften. » masc. ^ ^ad) ' bur*-
n)alt.ge.. -brvmaOcn. - oI,nmacI,tin lueibe.i. - 77 Rem 6 ''m
erMen. «ab(el,ie.i. «.84. i («). ^3^it. ^Md)mac^. 4tig ;ben' -f ace'
XXIII Frank Talfourd, who rejoiced Jn ' a stature ' of six
feet and several inches, was playfully^ challenged^ at the
Savage Club one evening to raise his foot asjii..h as ^ the
chandelier" that hung in the middle of the room! Lifting'
his foot with^rather^too^much^vigour,^ he knocked down
one of the glass^globes," which fell to the ground and
was^smashed- to atoms." Frank rang ,Ae bell instantly
and asked the responding- waiter, for- the amount- of
nis bill. " Pray, sir, what have you had .? " — " Oh i " said
TalW, pointing-;./ to -the chandelier, - only a glass of
J ft* evfreuen + gen. ^ Sp^t. ^ im ^^tn^. ^ n„ffotbcni 5 ^is ,„
^vonlcndner. ^iu bie .^o(,e mcrfc, 284. i (/.). « ct.mis u a tin «@, 1
uppel,/ -^erfrfieaen. .eut. " ''into .thousand pieces ' '3 H,.®"^
XXIV. Douglas Jerrold once said to a young gentleman
who burned with • an ardent.desire ^ to see himself in^print^
'HI!*
«
ul
398
EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION.
"Be advised* by me, young man; don't take down* the
shutters until you have something in ihe window worth Jook-
ing^at." " ^
« uor + dat. « 33egierbe. » gebrncft. * use laffcn, with refl. form,
"4. ('^)- *ob. ^fetiensttjcrt, 122. II.
XXV. Alexandre Dumas had a we 11- won ' reputation in
Pari? =" society as a teiler^oOmecdotes. At a large even-
ing-party, he was " rather' annoyed ' at the persistent ' efforts
of his hostess tojnducejiim « to exhibit ' his power* in this
accomplishment.^ At last, tired of refusing,'" he said : " Every
one has his trade,^ madam.'- The gentleman who entered"
the room just before me is a distinguished" artillery^officer.
Let him bring a cannon here and fire" it; then I will tell
one of my little stories."
Muof)(tofrbient. "^ ^nrifcr, 122, 9. 3 ^jrf, nrgcrn -f iibrr with ace. -« nirfit
ninitg. « uimblaffin. ' tin: babiii ,vi bviiirifii. ' ^eigcn. « ^ertiiifcit
» ^(lA), n. " subst. inf. " .s^auMucrf. '^ giidbioe graii. '^ eintuctcn in"
" QU8fle,^cirf)uet. " nbfcucrn.
XXVI. Some brainless* acquaintance' of Rivarol's was
boasting ■• of * his having " mastered " four languages. " I con-
gratulate ' you," said Rivarol ; "you'll have in^future' four
words for one idea,* "
» gebaufeuonu. * ber ^I^efaimte, 122, i, 2. 3pr„(,(f„ *277,R^m.i.
» bag clause. * ^^^ ^jg^g anpig.jd 7 gratuUeren + dat. « j^^c^j
'©ebmifc. "*
XXVII. On the day after the first representation » of
'L'Ami des Femmes,^' a comedy" by Alexandre Dumas
(the second), the author's father sent him a letter, congratu-
lating' him on' the success" of his piece," and volunteering"
his own collaboration ■•* on '» some future " one." The letter
EXERCISES IN COMPOSIT/ON.
399
closed with a somewhat grandiloquent phrase"- "If a gua-
rantee '• is desired - for my ability,- I beg to refer" you to"
Monie Christo ' and ' The Three Musketeers.' - " The son
-replied: "Even if I did not hnoM- the great Nvorks you "•
mention,- I should gladly- accept your offer," on^account
of the high opinion ^^ my father evidently ^^ entertains «
of you."
JJi??»T' "^/,^:5ro.tcnfreunb. ^mm, u. -'in which he con-
gratulaed" 5,,, ^^,^,^^,„,, ^Zm,n. "ftd) crbicten. ."to colla-
borate (mittubeiten)." -an. "fpatci-. -122. 4. Note. '3.;,,,,,,-, u^.
I^oi; y^'T'-..'''^^^^' 'M)imucifennnf + acc. » arfuJetier.
** augenfrfieinlid). ^^"has." -yiunmig.
XXVIII. Curran happened^o^teir Sir^ Thomas Turton
that he could never speak in.public^a quarter^of^an hour
without moistening^ his lips/ Sir Thomas declared thlt he
had spoken >r five hours in the House^of^Commons « on^
the Nabob of Oude without feeling « the least » thirst " That
IS very remarkable indeed,-" observed" Curran, -for every-
body agrees- that it- was the driest - speech of the
session
16 »
(immediately after the verb). " bcmeifcn. -Me(nl.). '3 ba i„ ,i(,er
XXIX. A gentleman praising' the personal ^ charms ' of a
very^plam * lady in Foote's presence, the latter « said • " Why
don't you lay« claim' to « such a beauty ?"_- What rijrht
have I to« do soV^ was'" the counter-question.'^ ''Every
right," replied Foote, " by - the universal '=' iaw^of^nations -
— as the first discoverer.'^ "
' 284, , (.). ^ pevfonlid,. 3 9fei3, m, < "anything but (241. ly, Note)
I
Ji .1!
HI'
il
I
400
EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION.
tetc. " ©egenfi-age. 'Muid). '^ aUgcnicin. '* i^bltcrrec^t. » gntbeder.
XXX. One day the poet and banker' Rogers took'
Thomas Moc-e and Sydney Smitli home in his carriage from
a breakfast, and insisted^' on showing them by^the way'
Dryden's house in some obscure^ street. It was ve7y wet
weather; the house looked « z^^/j ^^^^^cVi Hke" other okl houses
and, having ' thin shoes on, they both strongly ' remonstrated'^'
but in^vain. Rogers got^out '" himself," expectin- '^ them "'
to do likewise-; but Sydney Smith leaned "> laughing out of
the wmdow, and exclaimed : "Oh,"' now you see why Ro-ers
doesn't mind '^ getting >« out : he has goloshes "■' on. But^my
dear Rogers, lend each of us a golosh ; we will then each
stand upon one leg and admire the house as long as vou
please.''"" ^ ^
» 33aii.iuicr (pron. as in French). » brinnen. ' bcftcfjen aiif -f-acc 277
untcmca.^. 5,i,|e„v. ^ aucfdKU nnc. ^284.1,/.). « nuTqikI,. nuo:
^ticieu. -aiKSftcinon. " 42, 3, Rem. - "and expected." '3275. .45,^
©IciclK. 'MoOnte. '^ o,,,. - fid) f.l) ■urn uou -f- dat. " 277. Rem .
»9 ®alofd)c, /. - gcf„u,, i^ ^^.^ ^ ^ 77^ Kem. 3.
XXXI. '' When I was going from my house at Enfield to
the India House one morning," says Charles Lamb, " I met
Coleridge on his way to pay me a visit. He was brimfuP
of some ^ new idea, and - in^spite^of ^ my telling him that
my tune was precious' — he drew me into the door of an
unoccupied' garden by tiie roadside," and' there - shel-
tered^ by" an evergreen" hedge" from observation'^ — /^^
took'-' me by" the button^of^my.^coat,'« closed'" his"
eyes, and commenced an enthusiastic"* discourse, '« waving^"
at^the^same^time ^' his right hand gently,-'^ as ^=' the musical =='
words flowed in an unbroken " stream ^« from his" lips I lis-
tened^" entranced '' ; but the striking- of a church^clock re-
20
si
»
13
.20
EXERCISES IN COMrOSITION.
401
called " me to a sense cf my duty." I saw It was of no use to
attempt to break away''; soM took^advantage^of ' his ab-
sorption"'' in his subject/' quietly =' cut off the button from my
coat with my pen-knife " and decamped.'" As I was passing "
the same garden five hours afterwards on my way^home," I
heard Coleridge's voice, looked Jn,'' and — there he stood,
with closed eyes, the button " in his fingers, gracefully waving
his right hand, just as when I had left'' him. He had never'*
missed" me."
» iiberoor non. » irgenb cin. ^ tvo^bem bn§. -♦ foftbnr. ' unbcnii^t.
*i!anbfti-nf5C. 'Insert verb and object here. «jrf)iit3cn, 291, 5; 299.
9burd). '° immcraviiii. " .V^crfY. '^ 33:obar()tiuii]. 'Maflcii. '*228{<ij.
" J)iorffiiopf. '6 fi1)ltcficii,
123.
17
44. 6 (a).
13
begciftirt. '« ;Wcbe.
^°l)in nnb l)ei- bmici^cn, 131,/,'., Rem. -' lyobm. ^^ aumutifl ('gracefully').
""^ iua()vcnb. ^'' U)o()(tlinciib. ''^ iniaiif(;ortt'jain. ^^ gtvom. " 44, 6 {b),
'^ iiil)Ln-cn. =9 cnt.^iirft. ^o 3ci)lacieii, inf. subst. " edniioni an -f- ace!
^' W^^)^f /• ^^ " I saw (ovfi'iuu'ii) the uselessness (OJiitMofigfat) of an
attempt to break^away ( "t [) lo5iTiBc:i) ." ^* ^ccl)alb. ^^ bcmil3CU {trans.).
3* "it that he was absorbed (uoUiii ticvjiiut'cu in +acc.)," " @c(]cnftanb,
m.
38
nit)ig. 39 •^ebeniicii.v, «. •♦° 9iciHiiii5 iir[)mcii. -•' norbeifommen nii
-fdat. '♦^ i^eiimueg. *M)tiicingiicfcu. ^■^^^,2. "^ ucrkffcn. *«• gar iiic^t.
*" oermiffeti.
Sir Thomas More.
XXXII. Erasmus describes' this great man ihus':
"More seems to be made' and born for Friendbhip' ; of this
virtue he is a sincere* follower'' and very strict observer.'
He is not afraid 'to be accused" of" having many friends,
which," according^to Hesiod, is said " to be no great
praise." Every^one may'' become More's friend ; he is not
slow'' in choosing," he is kind'' in cherishing,'' and con-
stant'" in keeping =" them."' Jf by^accident ^'^^ he becomes
the friend of one =^' whose vices" he cannot correct,"' he
slackens'" the reins'' of friendship towards'* him, divert-
ing'" it rather =>** byjittle^and^little,^" than entirely^ dissol-
li
' ! I
t t'
402
EXF.RCISKS IN COMPOSITION.
ving" it. Those" persons whom he finds" to be sincere'*
and consonant " to his own '' virtuous^" disposition/" he is so
charmed^' with,- tiiat he appears to place' his chief-
worldly" pleasure in their conversation'" and company
And although More is negligent^' in'- his own temporal '"
concerns/" yet'* no^one is more assiduous" in assisting''
the suits " of his friends than he. What shall I say more .? If
any. person is^desirous •'" to have a perfect »" model^of friend-
ship, no one can afford"^" him a better than More, ^hi his
conversation »•' he shows so much affability"' and sweet-
nes.s^of^manner,"' thatno^mancanbeof^so^austere a dis-
position,"^ but^that" More's conversation must*'' mrke"
him cheerful «•'• ; and no matter"" so unpleasing,"' but that
with his wit"« he can take^away"" from it alLdisgust.^""
'befdjrciben. =» folfleiibcrmufien. Mci)afftMi, 186; 299. '•44, i (/;) 5 ,t„f
rlrfltig {adv.). 6 « to be a follower of = iiad)tohicn 4- dat. ^ '< and very
stnctly observes (bcobad)tni) it." ^277; 291,1.. '" of the reproach
(^Isornnirf) of having." '° 277, Rem, i. "96,5. "•2oo,5(.). "gf,,!,,,,
j^. '^"can." 'Maiuifnin. ^^ m\)\nx, 270; use dct. art. 'MmmMid/
Pffrgcii. '9 n„crfd)uttcrlid). ^° fcft()altcn. =='"of his friends" "211-
frillig, 239, Rem. 2. " " a man (yJMd))." ^H'tiftn, «. ^^ m-bcffrrn
=Modmi. ^^%^m\^'^ 64. *8,nit. ^9 nblenfen ; 284, i ya). 3° ,{,(,,,'
'' allmalig. '^ gniij. 33113^^,,. 34 fold). « erfinbcii. ^^ aiifrid)tifl 3'ent'
fpvcd)eub-f dat. 38cige„. 39 t„gnit.l)aft. -»" eiunei^art. -*' bc^,aubrni. *-Use
as prep, before "those persons." ^^ \\m\\ in + ace. -""greatest"
**Jue(tad). '«MIntcr()n(timc?. *' qteidigiltig. "^gcgcii. "9 tmMtltd). ^^%\\-
ge(cgenf)eit. " bod). -'^ ftrcbfnm. " ..j^ ^^e support (Untcrftiiljmig) of "
^*3(ngdfncnl)ctt. « luunfd)cn. ^^DoUfomnicn. " 3beat', «.; use compound
word ^^Xxtimx. » Umgang, .;/. ^^cutfclintnt. « ?icbeiK^miirbigfeit.
"fo licrbe nefiiiiit. ^^ bafi iiid)t. '^^joKtc. ^5 „„jf,eitcrn. ^^ (^^cj,p„|-ij,„j,
m. MtJibrig. *^m.\k,m, ^ entfemention. '" Me8 2Bibernjartifle
>•
ABBREVIATIONS.
I
see below.
I. German :
8lnnii= 3tiimeifuno, note.
a. Z. = ailtco Icliami'iit, Old Testament.
a. a. D. = am niigtfut)itcii Crte, in the
place referred to.
bfll , bcrfll.= bciiilcidjeit, the hke.
b. — . any case of the definite article,
b. ^.= baS()ei6t, ; , .
b. i. = baa ift, ! "»''• "••
b. 3. = bicfcS C'inljvccs, of this year.
b. TO. = bii'jt'3 ajioiinto, of this month.
Ir. = I)ottor, Doctor.
Gto., Giur. = Gucv, (Sure, ©iirer (in titles).
fl.=: ©iilbiii, florin,
^r. = 1\vaii, Mrs.
J?vl)r.= ;^reil)en- Baron,
^■rl. = J^rriultiii. Miss.
flCb.= (jctoreii, born,
geft. = (leftoilH".!, died.
®r.= Oivofthcn (a coin).
f).. })tH. = Iji'ilisv holy, saint.
$r., iivn. = iM'rv iu-nii, Mr.
i. 3. = it" 3nl}i'f in the year.
S\a\>. = flapitcf, chapter.
Six: = iliciijci (a coin).
I.= lies, read.
m.. m. M. = 93!arf (money).
9Jfffr.= a)lnmitfript, manuscript.
aWaj. = 9JJaitfftat, Majesty.
II. Latin (in addition to others which are used in English also):
A. C = Afttw Chrtsti, in the year of Onr Lord (Christ).
a. c. = anni cjirrcniis, of the current year.
S. T. = Salvo Ti>'u'.o, without prejud'ce to the title (used ir .addresses where the proper
title of tlie person addressed is uncertain).
404
m., 91. iJl. = 3fJame, name.
n. C^i. = IKUO Gl)»ifto, after Christ.
!JI. S. = 51()i!)f(()iift. i)oftscript.
J{. X. =■. 9Jeiie« leftameiit, New Testa-
ment.
W., *|'fb. tr: «pfuiib pound.
ipf. = 'IMcmiiii, penny. ^
pp. = uiiD io uu'iter, and so forth.
®e. cr. — Seine, geiner, his (in titles).
3. = Scitc, p.ige.
St., £tt.= Sonft, Saint.
f. = fie!|i', s:e.
f. 0. = fitl)C i,i>en, aee above.
i. 11. = ficljc tinteii,
f. ID. n. = ficl}c meitei- unteit,
Z.. Jt)., 2I)l.= 3:eil, 3:l)cil, part.
2;()li-. = II)i-,(er (money).
u. a. jii. = iinb nubeie mefir
II. bill, m.— iiiib bcriileicf)en me^r,
u. f. f. = inib fo fort,
It. f. JO. = imb io iDciter,
25. = 5icr§, verse.
0. Cljr. = por GOriflo, before Christ.
Dcnil., t)fll.= ueviileiihc, compare.
t). 0.= con otu-ii, from the top.
». u. = Don imteii, from the bottom.
J. S8. = jum ibeifpiel, for example.
It.
'esta-
titles).
VOCABULARY.
GERMAN — ENGLISH.
Explanations. — i. '■ e numerals refer to the §.
2. All verbs nrc weak and regular, unless referred to a $; the conjugation of others will
1)6 found under the § iiulicnted.
3. A — indicates that the word in question is to be supplied ; under masc. and neuter
substantives, tlie ttriniiuitioiis of the gen. sing, and nom. plur. are gi en ; thus: !^atien
(-3 ; — ) means that the gen. sing, of nffianeii is *iUaiU'ii*, and the nom. plur. the same
as the nom. sing. The sign " indicates Umlaut in the pi., e. g. : Oiarten, (-(3; ") means
that the gen. Mug. of this word is OKntiMi*, and the nom. pi. Wdrfcit ; £ol)H (-ed ; "e)
means; gen. sing. 2ol)iic#, nom. pi. 3bl)iie ', under fem. substs. the pi. only is given.
4. With adjectives, "cr indicates Umlaut in the compar. and superl.
5. Proper names are not given when they are the same in German as in English.
; •
e belt:
et
ce-
tera.
proper
91.
<ab, off.
ai'bcnb, til. (-e9 ; -e), even-
ing ; Ijeiitc — , thisevoning.
abenbcs, in the evening.
iibcr, but; however.
abfat)rcn (186; |ein), to set
off, depart, go ; set sail.
nbbaltCll (188), to hinder,
deter.
abljelfcit (159), to help, re-
medy; bctii ift Ieid)t abs
juljelfcn, that is easily re-
medied.
ab^oleii, to call for.
ObfilI}Icn (fid)), to (get) cool.
abrcifcn (feiu), to set ot t,
start, depart.
abfdjncibeu (118), to cut oti.
nd)t, eight; — Xagc, aweck.
ad)t, / , attention, care ; fid)
in — ncbmen, to ba care-
ful, take care.
ibbicrcn, to add.
311'aebva,/, algebra.
alU'iii', adj., alone, only;
coHj'., but, only.
nll(cr, e, co), all, (the) whole :
allc 'Za^|i, every day ;
^UlecJ, «. sing., all, every-
thing.
nlleibiiirtO', adv., certainly,
of course.
al'j, than, as ; as a ; when ;
al5 ob, &„ if.
nlfo, thus, so; so then, ac-
cordingly.
alt (-I'v), old, ancient.
3Utcv, ti (-0), age, old age.
aimcvifaucr, tn. (-5, — ),
American.
an (dat. or ace, 65), on,
at (227), to, towards, in,
by, near, of; cr ftavb am
fjicbcv, he died of fever
(23 «, c).
anbictcn (131), to offer.
onber, other ; bie 2Inber>t,
the others.
Anbern, to alter, change ; e9
laftt fid) nid;t — , it cannot
be helped.
anbert^alb, one and a half.
SJlnfang, m. (-e3 ; "c), com-
mencement, beginning.
niifnniicn (188), to begin,
commence.
onfaiigS, in the beginning, at
first.
angcncbm (dat.), pleasant,
agreeable.
angftlid), frightened, timid,
anxious.
atibalten (188), to continue.
9(ul)i3[)0,/. (-n), hill.
anfaufcn (fid)), to settle, buy
up property.
aiiflcibcii (fid)), to dress.
aiifommen (167; fctn), to ar-
rive; in 9-'. (</«/.) — , to
arrive at B.
anvic^tcn, to cause.
anfc^affcn, to provide, pro-
cure.
405
4o6
VOCAliULARV.
ontrcffen (I'S;), to rn^ot
with, find.
Wntiuort, / (-en), answer,
reply,
antroortcn (dat.), to answer,
reply.
anjicOen (131), to draw on;
put on (clothes).
3(pfcl, „i. (-3 ; ''), api.le.
2lpfcl('n:im, /«. (-0 ; ^c),
api-l ;-trse.
9(piil', ;«. (-6), April.
ar'Licit,/ (-en), work; la-
bour; task,
ar&eitcn, to work.
3(r&eitcr, m. (-§; — ), work-
man.
9IvcI)iteft', m. (-en ; -on).
architect.
Sliie (irisy/n, / (-n), air,
song
arm ("er), poor
3lrm, ;«. (-cS ; -e), arm.
ortig, well behaved; — fcin,
to behave one's self pro-
perly (or children),
airjt, ;«.(-c3;^e), physician,
doctor. [rella.
2lfc^enputter, «. (-?,), Cinde-
2lft, m. (-C5; ''c), bough,
branch.
Stftrolofl', tn. (-en; -en),
astrologer,
auc^, also, too, even ; roer— ,
whoever; tptr finb e§ — ,
so are we.
OUf, {dai. or ace.) on, upon
(65); for, in (230); at (227,
3); to; open; — bret 2!}o»
c^en, for three weeks (/«/.,
229, (J, 2) ; — bafi, in order
that ; — bem fianbe, in the
country,
nufbleiben (120). to stay up,
sit up, remain up.
SKufeittfjnlt, m. (-es ; -e), so-
journ, stay; delay.
Slufnp.fi?; /! ^-n). task lessor. !
exercise. I
aufgebcn (181), to givo up
aufftangen, to hang ap.
aufl)ebcn (131), to raise up,
lift up, pick up; abolish,
annul, nncel.
nufpren, to cease, step,
cnifmadjen, to open,
aufinei-ffam, attentive ; einen
aiif etiuaS — mnc()en, to
call the attention of any-
I one to anj-thing.
Srufmcrtfnmfcit,/. (-en), nt-
tention ; kindness.
niifid;teDen(i3i), to put off,
postpone, delay,
auffe^eii, to put up; put on
(of a hat),
alifftclicn (186; join), to rise,
get up.
aufft.ii]cu (120 ; fcin), to
rise, ascend, mount.
auftveten(iSi; fein), to ap-
pear,
nufjie^en (131), to wind up
(of a time-piece).
2lu3e, «. (-S ; -n), eye.
3Iniienblicf, m. (-e8 ; -e), mo-
ment, instant,
filiS {dat., 46), out of; from,
of; out.
Jhiobutcf, m. (-e3; "e), ex-
pression.
Sfueflucj, m. (-e§ ; "e), excur-
sion, pleasure-trip; einen
— niacf;en, to take a plea-
sure-trip.
STuSijabe, / (-n), edition,
aueficjeidinet, excellent.
au§nlcitcn (118; fein), to
slide, slip.
auSIftffen (188), to omit,
leave out.
onSlbfc^Cii, io put out, ex-
tinguish, [iiarfi).
ouSfel^en (181), ;o look (like,
2rn§r«^^t, /. (-en), view, pro-
•• lect.
auSfnrecfieri (167), to pro-
nounce.
3ru5fteCunn, / (-en), exhl-
bition.
auger (46), outside of ; conj.
except, besides.
aufeert^alb {gen.), outside of.
auSrocnbin, by heart.
au'3jeid)ne)i, to distinguish.
auSjie^en (131; fein), to re-
move (intr.).
9lrt, / ("e) axe.
33.
baclen (186), to bake,
i^acfftein, w. (-e§ ; -e), brick.
SUatjnOof, m. (-eg ; "e), rail-
way-station,
balb (ef;er, am eljeften), soon,
shortly,
^^anb, «. (-eS; "er), ribbon;
m. (-eg; "e), volume,
^anf, / (-en), bank; (-V),
bench.
Dav, (paid in) cash, ready (of
money),
^'iiv, m. (-en; -en), bear.
iUai-bier, m. (-e6; -e), bar-
ber,
baiien, to build,
33aucr, m. (-n or -S; -n),
peasant, countryman.
53aum, ?«. (-e§ ; -e), tree.
23aupla^, m. (-eS; ^e), situ,
bebaucrn, to pity; regret;
(icf)) bebaure, I am sorry,
bebcnfen (99, 2), to consider,
bebienen, to serve, wait up-
on; ftc:^ — , to help one's
self.
SSebingung, /. (-en), condi-
tion.
becilcrt (fid^), to hasten,hurry.
S8eere,/(-cii), berry.
93efe^t, m. (-eS ; -e), com-
mand, order; }u — , al
(your) service, what is
(your) pleasure ?
bef?i;[en (167), to command,
fee^eifeen (fli§, uS), to apply
one's self
Vocabulary.
407
^ffriebiflfii, to satisfy, coti-
tent.
begegnen, (dat. ; feiii), to
meet,
begie^en (123), to water
(flowers, etc.).
feeginncn (158), to begin.
beg[eiten, to accompany,
^egleituiig,/ (-en), accom-
paniment.
Segniigen (fic^ — mit), to
be satisfied, be contented
(with).
Begriff, tn. (-e§; -e), idea,
notion ; im — fein, to be
upon the point of, be about
(to),
botinupten, to assert, affirm ;
to maintain,
bei (46), by, at, about ; with ;
— Sifctie, at taule ; — met*
nettt Dnfel, at my uncle's;
— mil", with me, at my
house, about me; — fcl)Os
nem 9Better, in fine wea-
ther.
beibe, both, two.
beibeS, «. sing., both.
SBeifaU, m. (-e§), applause.
bcinalje, almost, nearly.
bet6ei!(ii8), tobite.
beiftef)cn (186; dat.), to as-
sist, aid.
9^efaiintfd)nft, / (-eii), ac-
quaintance.
befennen (99), to aclcnow-
ledge ; confess.
befommen (167), to obtain,
get, receive, have.
bemcrtcii, to perceive, ob-
serve.
bemUOen(ftd)), to take pains,
try.
bequetn', convenient, com-
fortable, commodious.
SBerg, m. (-eS ; -e), mout»-
tain, hill.
bergen(i59), tohide.
berften(is9), to burst.
beriJ^mt, famous, celebrated.
befojuTttgen, to occupy, em-
ploy ; befc^dftigt, busy, em-
ployed.
befiiinen (fid^; 158), to deli-
berate, reflect.
bcloitberS, particularly, es-
pecially.
be|orgen, to attend to.
befprcc^en (167), to discuss.
beffer {see gut), better.
beft, {superl. of gut, ivhkh
see), best; jum Sefteii, for
the benefit of; am beften,
best (of all).
beftebcn (186), to undergo,
pass (an examination); —
(lUiCi), to consist (of); —
(iiitf -j- ace), to insist
(upon).
beftcigcn (120), to ascend.
bcftcUcn, to order.
beftvafen, to punish.
beftreiten (118), to defray.
53efud), m. (-e3 ; -c), visit,
visitors ; — i)a'ben, to have
visitors; — e macben, make
calls; bei ^cmniib auf —
feiii, to be on a visit at any
one's.
befucfien, to visit; bie Unis
oerfitat — , to study at the
university.
beten, to pray, say prayers.
betragon (1%), to amount to.
SBetragen, >i. (-§), behaviour,
conduct.
betreffi'u (167), to concern;
trao mid) bctrifft, as for
me.
betrilgen (131), to cheat, de-
ceive.
SBettlev, m. (-§ ; — ), beggar.
beroegcn (131), to induce;
to move.
benjeifen (120), to prove, de-
monstrate.
berounbern, to admire.
beja^Ien, to pay (ace. 0/
thing ; dat. of person and
ace. of thing when both
are present, otherwise aec.
of person).
S8ejaf)Innn,/.(-en), payment.
33totiot^er, / (-eti), library.
biegen (131), to bend.
aSier, «. (-eS ; -e), beer, ale.
bieten (131), to offer.
33i(b, «. (-e§ ; -er), picture,
portrait.
SSilbung, / (-en), education.
Sillet' ipron. bill-yett), n
(-te« ; -te), ticket.
billig, cheap.
binbcn (144), to bind, tie,
fasten.
binnen (dat.), within.
bi^ (34), till, until, up to, as
far as; .^roei — bvei, two
or three ; — ju {dat.), —
nac^ {dat.), as far as.
>Uiicl)of, m. (-e§, -^c), bishop.
bitten (i8i ; for, urn), to ask,
beg; (id)) bittc, if you
please, please {lit., I beg,
pray) ; rocnn id) — barf, if
you please {lit., if I may
ask).
blafen (188), to blow.
331att, «. (-e§ ; ^cr), leaf.
bian, blue.
bleiben (120; fein), to re-
main.
Slciftift, «. (-e§ ; -e), lead-
pencil.
blinb, blind.
m\^, m. (-eS; -e), light-
ning.
bitten, {impers.), to lighten.
^fllurne,/ (-en), flower.
SBIumenfofjt, m. (-§), cauli-
flower.
bombarbieren, to bombard. '
«oot, «. (-e8; Sttte, or-i),
boat.
bBfe, bad, evil: cross, angry:
Soferoic^t, wi. (-e9; -er),
villain.
Ml
Si
4o8
VOCABULARy.
Sote, m. (-n; -n), mes-
senger.
6rotcii (i88), to roast.
5raud)cii (g^ot. or ace), to
require, want, need, use,
make use of.
braim, brown.
bici(^ii (167), to break,
breit, broad, wide.
Orciiiicii (99), to burn, be
burning.
S3ricf, m. (-e§; -c), letter,
epistle,
briiti^^cit (99, 2), to bring,
take.
93rot, « (-f6; -c), bread;
loaf.
93i-ucfe, /. (-11), bridge.
aU'ubcr, ;;/. (-s ; '-), brother.
93ticl), «. (-C5; 'oi), book.
93iid)evfiTuiib, m. (-e5; -c),
lover of books.
93iid)l)iiub(cv, m. (-§; — ),
book-seller.
93iict)[)niibhiit3, /(-en), book-
shop.
SUvcfiii {proH. bii-ro'), n.
(-?'; -^'). (business) office.
SBiir.icvmciftev, ;«. (-9 ; — ),
mayor.
aSuttev, /, butter.
GOofoIabc, /, chocolate.
Gl[)vil't, in. (-C11 ; -oil), Chris-
tian.
Confine,/ (-n), cousin.
®.
ba, there, in that place;
here; conj., as, when, be-
cause, since.
Ib^xi), H. (-•.■'3; -er), roof.
bafUr, fcr that, for it, for
them (0/ things),
ba[)Ci', thence, hence, there-
fore.
baiuit, therewith, with it,
with that. i
Sompferrintc,/. (-n), steam-
ship-line.
Sampfirf;iff, «. (-:§; -e),
steam-boat, steamer,
banfbnr, thankful, grateful.
3)nnf[iavteit, /, thankful-
ness,
bnnfcii {(int.), to thank; id)
banfc C^iincM), (no) thank
you.
bnnn, then.
Parnn, thereon,
brtriliit, thereon, on it, on
them {ofth'ngs), etc.
bnviH, theruii, in that, in it.
bnriil'Cr, over that, over it;
about it, r.t it.
bnvum, therefore.
bn?i, n. of bcr, ivhick see.
biifcU'i't, there, in that place,
bnf!, that ; (anf) — , in order
that,
bnuon, thereof, of it.
bciii, bcine, bcin, thy.
bcntcii ( ) ) ; gen. or geturnl-
/v Cin -f- ace), to think;
fiit) ~, to imai.;ine.
bcnn, for, cot! .
bcr, bio, bn<3, def. art., the
(4 ; 44); rcl. pr., who,
which, thr.t (92, 93, 95);
dam. pr.. the one, ho, she,
it, that (133 ; J40-143).
berjcnijc, bicjcniH', bnqcs
'lia'-'('35; Mci), that, this,
the one ; he, she, it.
bcricIOc, bicfcUic, baofelDe
(136; 143). ndj. and pr.,
the same ; he, she, it. etc.
bco'ljal'i, for this or that rea-
son, therefore, on that ac-
count,
befto, (all) the, so much the;
— licfjcv, £o nuich tlie bet-
tor; jc mctir — Ocffcr, the
more, the bettor.
bc«rjc jcn, on that account,
btutliixi, char, distinct;
clearly, distinctly.
bci!tfd;,German; auf Seutfc^
ir: :i!cntfd)cn, in German.
^ciitfd)'lanb, «. (-s), Ger-
many.
i^inmant', m. (-5 or -en;
-en), diamond.
bie, / of bcv, which see.
t'Kb,m. (-e§; -c), thief.
Ticncr, m. (-^; -), ser-
vant.
Jicnetng, w. (-c5;-c),Tues.
day.
bii'icr, biefc, bicfcS (bico),
(6; 134, 140, 1,(3), tills,
that; the latt.r.
bie'^fcito, W?'.. on this side,
binu'ii (App. L.), to hire.
binib' ven, to divide.
^Oct), yet, however, but, after
all, pray, well, just.
Sol'tor, ;«. (-0; Sotto'icn),
doctor.
Donncv, vt. (-§ ; — ), thun-
der.
bonnern, to thunder.
^onucretoii, '«• (-c3 ; -c),
Tluirsday.
i)orf, (-co ; "cr), village,
boi't, there, yonder, in that
place,
bvci, three.
bvcifad), three-fold, triple,
treble,
brcimal, three times, thrice.
brci'^'ig, thirty,
bvcfdjcn (159), to thresh,
thrash.
briiiGcn (144), to press.
bvittctiaU), two and a half,
briilu'ii, over there, over the
way.
Snicf, m. (-e§), printing,
print,
bu, thou, you.
biinn, thin.
buvd) (34), through ; by.
biird;auo', absolutely, entire-
ly; — nidjt, by no means,
not at all.
.
burd^fucS'cn, to search
thtougli,
bllr'eil (196-202 ; permis-
sion), to dare; be permit-
tod, ahowed ; barf id; 'i may
I?
!Diirft, m. (-e§), thirst; —
()nbcn, to l)e tliirsty.
Su^'cnb, «. (-c§;-c), dozen.
ebftt, adv., even, just; ex-
pctly; fo— , just now.
Gcfe, / (-11), corner.
S'bclftcip,, VI. (-ro ; -e), pre-
cious stone, jewel.
e^C, adv. and conj., ere, be-
fore.
ilx i\, to honour, esteem.
el/vUd), honest ; — luofjrt nm
laitgftcii, honesty is the
best policy.
H, n. (-C'3 ; -er), egg.
frii]ciitum, (-c5 ; ^er), pro-
perty, possession, estate.
•Sife, /. haste, hurry; iuq5
f;nft bu fiiv — ? what is
your hurry ?
ittcn, to hasten, hurry.
^ili.], har.ty, speedy; c3 —
(jnbcn, to be in a hurry, be
in haste.
<in, cine, ciii (9), a, an;
one; bic Ciiicii, some.
Ciiiaiibcr, one another, each
other.
GinOiinb, m. (-cS ; ^'c), bind-
ing.
Ciiibiitbcit (144), to bind (a
book).
etnbrinneit (144 ; feiii), to
enter by force ; rush in ;
press in, penetrate,
eiiier, eiiio, cii!(o)3 (150),
Pron., one {equivalent of
man),
etnfditij, simple, silly.
CinfhiiJ, ;«. (-c§, -c), influ-
ence.
27
Vocabulary.
eini^e, some, several, a few.
einIabci!(TS6), to invite,
eiiimal, once.
GiiimalciiiS' n. (/W^rc/.), mul-
tiplication-table,
eiiipactcii, to pack up.
eiiue.ritcn, to reckon in;
comprise in account.
eiiiid;(a.u-:i (1S6), to strike
(of lightning).
cinic()ici[>cii (120), to book,
inscribe, check (lugrage).
ciufc()Cii (iSi), to perceive,
comprehend,
eiiifcitij, one-sided.
ciiiftci^icn (120; fcin), to
mount iiito, get into (car-
riage, etc.).
Gii/tiittocj;a'mpn, «.(-«;—),
entrance-examination, ma-
triculation-examination.
Ginit)Ol;i!Cr, m. (-S ; — ), in-
habitant.
Gi§, «. (-C>o), ice; ice-cream.
Giicn, «. (-0), iron.
Gifcnbal;it,/. (en), railway,
elegant', elegant.
G((e,/. (-ii),yard.
GItcni {no sing.), parents.
cinpfcf)[eu ( i6/; dat.ofpers.),
to recommend,
cmpfiiiben (144), to feel, ex-
perience,
cnblid), at last, finally, at
length.
Ciiiiliid), rt^'., Enplish; niif
Gnali(u), in English.
Gntc, /. (-n), duck; Gnteii=
bratcii, ;;/. (-5 ; — ), roast
duck,
entne'iieniierjcn (188; fcin;
dai.), to ro to meet.
cnt.]c'jeii[ommeii (167; fcin ;
dat.), to come to meet.
cntfd)Iicf!Cii (fid); 123), to
resolve, decide,
c'.tfdmlbijcii, to excuse,
cntiucbcr, cithrr; ciitun'bcv
. . . ober, either ... or.
fntrocrfen (159), to draw (a
plan, etc ); design,
entjiicft, delighted, charmed.
cr, he.
Gvbfe, / (-n), pea.
Gibbebcii, «. (-s ; -), earth-
quake.
Gi-bbccrc,/ (-•.;), strawberry.
Grbc,/, earth, rround.
Cifi: bcii (144), to invent.
Gifinbiinfl, / (-en), inven-
tion.
Gifoln, M. (-c6; -c), success,
crfricieii (131; fcin), to
freeze, be frozen.
CViU-eifcii (118), to seize.
ciOnlteii (i88), to receive,
get.
cviitncvn (fid); gen. of thing
remembered), to remem-
ber,
crfiiltcn (fid'), to catch cold.
Gifaaiiitg,/(-eit), cold,
crfcnitcn (99), to recognize,
cvflaicn, to cxilain.
ci-titiibigeii (fid)), to inquire ;
fid) bet jemnitb nod) ctiua3
— , to inquire of anyone
about anything,
cvlaut'cii {dat. of pers.), to
permit, allow.
Cilebcii, to experience,
cnieiiiicit (99), to nominate,
. appoir.t; jiim Woitucnieuv
— , to appoint (as) governor,
crobcni, to conquer, over-
come.
evfd)iccfcii (167 ; fcin), to be
frightened.
cvft, first ; fiiiS crftc, for the
present ; bev cvftc bcftc,
the first which comes to
hand; ad7'., first, only, not
before, i:ot till.
crftcnd, first, in the firstplace.
citviiifcn (144), to drown, be
drowned.
aroa()Icit (ui), to elect (as),
eriuartcn, to expect, wait for.
■IM
4^0
vocabularv.
eriurtiif(^cit, to wish for, de-
sire.
ti]iii)ltn, to relate, narrate,
tell.
«^(38. 39), it; tliey; there;
er ift — , it is he ; e<3 finb
5IHanner, t. y are men.
eifen(i8i),toeat; ju5DJittag
— , to dine.
etiua, nearly, about.
GtiunS, sonietliing, any-
thing.
titer, euve, euer, your.
(Europa, «. (-3), Europe.
G ja'men, »«. (-S ; — ), exami-
nation.
exemplar', «. (-?> ; -e), copy
(of a work, etc.).
gfabrif', / (-en), factory.
ffaben, m. (-cS ; -), thread.
fol^ren (iS6; fein), to go,
drive, ride (in a convey-
ance); tr.ivel; sail.
f>fal)vt,_/! (-eit), journey, voy-
age ; ride, drive.
%all, m. (-e^; -e), fall ; case,
event; in bent '^ailt, in
that case.
f aUen (188; feiii), to fall.
falls, in case.
tVami''lie, /. (-n), family.
fongen(i88), to catch.
faft, almost, nearly; — itie,
hardly ever.
^cOinuU', V!. (-'3), February.
fediteii (124), to fight, fence.
jfeber, /. (-11) , feather ; pen ;
spring.
feievn, to celebrate.
^eicrtag, >«. (-e^; -e), holi-
day.
getnb, m. (-eS; -e), enemy.
gelb, «. (-e3 ; -er), field.
^clf(cn), ;;:.(-cno; -cn), rock.
^enftev, «. (-S ; — ), window.
Jfevien, //. {no sing;.), vaca-
tion, holidays. |
{?crne, / (-tt), distance ; in
bev — , at a distance.
fertifl, ready, done; — fein
(mit), to hav© finished
(with).
Seftli(t)teit,/ (-en), festivity.
■J^euev, «. (-0 ; — ), fire.
i^ielier, n. (-0 ; — ), fever.
fiubcit (144), to find ; meet
with ; think, be of opinion ;
jiiaii finbt't fid) nid)t leicfit,
people do not find each
other easily.
^ifcfi, m. (-e3; -e), fish.
(■^•lafdje, /. (-11), bottle.
flcd^ten (124), to weave.
^Icifdl, n. (-co), meat.
flei^iil, diligent ; industrious;
, diligently, etc.
^ieiicn (131 ; fein), to fly.
flieljen (131). tlee.
fliejjcn (123), flow.
(Vlbte,/. (-n), flute.
';^-liis1cI, VI. (-§ ; — ), wing.
i^-luf!, »«. (-eS; ' e), river.
foIncn(fein ; dat.), to follow.
■Jvovelle, / (-11), trout.
jvormat', «. (-e§; -c), size (of
a book).
fort, forth; away, gone; loir
miiffen — , we must be off.
fortgel)en (18S ; fein), to go
away.
forttuiiljx-enb, perpetual, con-
tinual, incessant.
fritgeii (186), to ask ques-
tions ; ^raijeti, «. (-S),
questioning, asking ques-
tions (action of).
^■raitfvcid), «. (-§), France.
friin,\ofi)rf), French.
^vau,_/! (-en), woman, wife,
lady, madam, mistress,
Mrs.
Aiciidein, u. {-iS; — ), young
lady, Miss ; iiieiit — , Miss.
freiget'ig, liberal, generous.
freilaffcn (188), to set free,
liberate.
' freilic^, to be sure, indeed, of
course,
^yrejtog, m. (-e6;-e), Friday,
fremb, strange , foreign,
■^^•retttbe, {adj. subst.) m. or
/., stranger, foreigner,
^^rembling, nt. (-eS; -e),
stranger,
fieffcn (181), to eat (said of
beasts).
■Avciibe, /. (-n), joy, delight.
freuen (fid) ; at, \\b(x-\-acc.),
to rejoice, be glad ; eS freut
mid), I am glad.
(^•rcuiib, fit. (-co; -e), friend;
id) ('in ein — uon, I like.
Arcuiibin, f. (-nen), friend
(female).
fveunbUd), friendly, kind.
Sreunbfc^aft,/ (-en), friend-
ship.
■5viebe(n), m. (-n§), peace.
(Vriebrid), «/.(-§), Frederick;
^•riebridiftva^e, Frederick-
street,
fiieieii (131), to freeze; feel
cold; e3 fviert mid), I feel
cold ; mid) friert, I am
cold,
fnfd), fresh.
iVVit}, 7H. (-en§), Fred, Fred-
dy,
frol), joyful, glad ; froljeij
IVhtteS, cheerfully.
friJljlid), joyous, merry.
J5-nid)t, /. ("e), fruit,
fviil), early; fviihcr, earlier;
formerly.
^rul)ling, vt. (-eS ; -e),
spring.
frill)'ftiidcn, to breakfast.
>^iid)'j, in. (-e<S; -e), fox.
filljren, to le.id; go, lie.
fiillcii, to fill,
fiiiif, five.
fiinftef)QU>, four and a half.
fitufug, funfsig, fifty,
i5untc(n), >«. (-ns; -n),
f* ark.
VOCABULARY.
4ff
f«r (34), for.
f^urc^t (DOi),/ fear (of).
fiirAten, to fear; ficC) — nor
(+ dat.'), to fear, be afraid
of.
8=U6, m. (-eS ; «e), foot.
ga(l))ren (App. L.'), ferment.
gaiij, a^'., whole, entire;
the whole of; adv., quite,
wholly, altogether, entirely.
gnr, even; — nirfjt, not at
all; — rttdf)t^, nothing at
all.
©arten, m. (-3 ; "■), garden,
Wiirtiier, m. (-§; — ), garde-
ner.
©aft, m. (-c§; ''e), guest.
©aft^nii?!, «. (-e'S; Hx), inn,
hotel.
gebavcn (167), to bear, bring
forth.
(lebeit (181), to give; v. im-
pers., e§ giebt, there is,
there are.
®eDot', «. (-e5 ; -e), com-
mandment.
©ebiirte'tag, vi. (-e§; -e),
birthday ; jum — , as a
birthday-present.
©ebanfe, ;«. (-n§; -n),
thought.
gebei()eii (120), to thrive.
gebenfcn (99), to intend.
Webid}t, n. (-c§; -c), poem.
gebrcingt, packed, com-
pressed, crowded.
Webulb, /., patience.
gefal^rlic^, dangerous; dan-
gerously.
icfallen (188), to please,
suit; joic gefillU es 3l)iicn
ill SoftPrt? how do you
like Boston ?
/efdUig, pleasing, complai-
sant, kind; ift b?!n ftpvin \
etroaS — ? v.'ill the gentle-
rfian be helped to anything ?
gcfftaiilft, if yon please.
«efUf)[, «. (-66; -e), feeling;
emotion.
flCgeit (34), towards, against,
about ; for.
rtfdcit (1S8; fein), to go;
walk; niie getjt eS^^neii?
how do you do? how are
you ?
(jel)inen (a'a/'.),toi)elong(to).
©eige, /. (-11), violin; ©oi=
genfpiel, «. (-«), violin-
playing,
gclb, yellow,
©elb, «, (-eS ; -ev), money,
©clbbeutel, »«. (-5; — ),
purse,
gefegen, convenient; oppor-
tune ; nicfito tbunte miv gc;
[ogenei- fein, nothing could
suit me better,
geliitgeii (144; fein), to suc-
ceed; c§ gelingt tnir, I
succeed,
gcltcn (159), to be worth,
©emaibe, «, (-«$ ; — ), paint-
ing, picture, j
©einiifc, «. (-5; — ), vege-
tables,
genan, precise, exact ; pre-
cisely, exactly, carefully,
minutely. :
©eneral', >«. (-c« ; -e), gene- ;
ral.
genefeit (iSi; fein), to get j
well, recover (from an ill-
ness), I
genicfeen (125; fein), to en-
joy ; eat or drink, '
gcnng, enough,
©conictric', /, geometry,
©cpiict, ;/. (-eo), luggage,
baggage,
gevnbc, adj., straight; adv.,
exactly, ju.st.
©erdufri), «. (-eS ; -c), noise.
gent (liebcr, ant lietftcnV
with pleasure, willingly,
gladly ; etuinS — Ijaben,
to like a thing ; — K'rnen,
to like to learn, study ; ba9
ift — mpglirf), that is very
I probable,
' ©evfte, / barley.
' gcfal)\en, fali^en, salt.
©cfang, m. (-00), singing.
G3efd)af t, «. (- co ; -c), busi-
ness ; mercantile establish-
j ment ; shop, store.
j ©cfd)aft§angcIegentH'it, /.
(-en), business matter, bu-
siness engagement.
gefc^efKn (181; fein), to hap-
pen.
0efc()enl, «. (-e^s ; -e), gift,
present.
Oicfd)id)te, /, (-n), history,
story.
©efd)macf, vt. (-e§), taste.
geh()ult,/./.,fcf)n[en, trained,
cultivated.
©efrfinjifter, //. , brothers and
sisters.
fflcfeUfd;aft, /. (-en), com-
pany, party.
©efidit, n. (-cS; -ci and-i),
face, cour.tenance ; ©efid)s
ter, faces ; ©cftd)te, vi-
sions.
©efpiele, >«. (-n; -n), play-
mate.
geftern, yesterday,
©efnnb[)Cit, / health.
geiuinncn (isS), to win, gain.
geiuifi isiett.), certain (of);
certainly, surely.
geiuiffenlinft, conscientious,
©eu'ittev, «. (-0; — ), thun-
der-storm, storm.
Wciuofjndeit, / (-en), cus-
tom, habit; bte — ^abtn,
to be accustomed to.
gerina, fim.n!!, tridi-.ig, n-.ran; ' gfn--p(}n(ic{i, usual, eustom-
nid^t ini — ften, not in the : ary ; generally, usually,
least. i flte^en (123), topour
11
1,1
iff
ii
412
VOCABULARY.
jttlnj'n, to shine, glitter.
flliinjcnb, brilliant.
0IaS, «. (-co; -"cv), glass.
(jiatt, smooth, slippery.
flinudcil {^dni. of pers.), to
believe ; think.
fllcici), at once, at the snme
time, immedintel)-, directly;
fo — , immediately, etc.
flleid)cii (ii8), to be like, re-
semblc.
flleitcii (iiS;, to glide, slip.
fliimiiien (123), to glimmer.
©liicf, n. (-CC), (rood) for-
tune, good luck ; success ;
— n)ihifd)cii, to congratu-
late, wish success to.
(jliict(irf), happy, fortunate;
successfully.
©olb, n. (-C'5), gold.
flOtbcit, of gold, golden.
©oiiucvneui', ;«. (-e§; -e).
governor.
flraben (186), to dig.
©tab, in. (-co; -c), degree.
©vaf, >«. (-ni ; -en), count,
earl.
©lafiit, / (-ncn), countess,
©ramma'tif, / (-en), gram-
mar.
©raS, «. (-c§ ; '^cv), grass.
flrntulicicn {dat.), to con-
gratulate.
(jreifeit (nS), togmsp.
©ried^eiilaiib, «. (--0),
Greece.
flro6("ev, j«/. grbBt), great,
large, big, tall.
(jriln, green.
flritnblid), thoroughly.
Criifjcii, to greet, salute, bow
to; %{)x ^vcunb Idftt Sic
— , your friend wishes to
be remembered to you.
©uitarre, /. (-11), guitar.
gut, rtfi^".,good; kind; adv.,
well ; fo — fein iinb, to be
so kind as to.
Outefl, «., good (thing).
0.
|iaar, «. (-c? ; -e), hair.
f)n6cn (24), to have; i)lerf;t
— , to be (in the) right ; lln-
rec^t — , to be (in the)
wrong; ron5 — Sic? what
is the matter v.hh •;
oor — , to intend, prop^.
purpose.
^afcn, m. (-3 ; "), port, har-
bour, haven.
iiafcr, m. (-«j), oats.
|iaiicIforii, n. (-e3 ; "cr),
hail-stone.
f)n;U'ln, to hail.
Oalti, half; — brct, half past
two.
Siilftc,/ (-n), half.
Ijialtcu (188), to hold, think ;
— fiiv, consider; id) (jalte
nicl nou il)Hi, I think high-
ly of him (esteem, value
him highly).
iianb,/. ("c), hand.
^idnblev, w. (-3; — ), dealer,
shop-keeper.
.c^anbfdmt), m. (-e§; -e),
glove.
finncicn (188), to hang, be
suspended; ba^ 'Bilb £)a!igt,
the picture is hanging.
I^aiii^cii, to hani:, su.'jpend.
$arfc, /. (-11), harp; .f>avs
fens53cijleitunij, accompa-
niment on the harp.
I^art C'ev), hard.
.^af e, m. (-n ; -n), hare.
{)affcn, to hate.
fjciiicn (1S8), to hew.
^auptftatt, /. ( "c), caphal.
^lOit?-, n. (-co; "cr), house;
511 .fiauic, at home; imd)
^ciufc, home.
l)ebcn (131), to raise, lift.
^ecr, 7t. (-cS; -c), army.
r^eftifl, violent, heavy; hea-
vily (of rain).
Jgeibc, ;«. (-n; -ti), heathen.
^einric^, m. (-S), Henry.
fielfer, hoarse.
^ci6, hot.
Ocijjcn (188), to be called, bo
named; mean, signify ; U'ie
\)Z\%i bn§ aiif 3)ciit|d)?
how do vcj say that In
"■■-.rman? mie fieijjt? what
the name of? id; ^cifie
Vf., my name i-- A.
$c[b, VI. (-eit; -en), hero.
l)e(feu (159 ; dal), to help.
Ocll, bright; brightly.
(jeraOftcigen (120; fein), to
descend.
hcvnuotommen (167 ; fein), to
come out.
$cibft, m. (-C'j ; -e), autumn.
.ficvbc,/; (-11), flock, herd.
Oevcintoutmen (167 ; fein), to
come in.
^tcvr, tn. (-n; -en), master;
gentleman ; Lord ; Mr. ;
3f)r — SSater, your fa-
ther.
§erj, n. (-enS ; -en), heart.
i)evj(id), heartily, exceed-
ingly.
§eu, «. (-e§), hay.
t)eiitc, to-day ; — 2(bcnb, this
evening; — SJlornen, this
morning; — iitcr rierje^u
S^afjj, this day fortnight ;
r;eut((iitanc, now-a-days.
()ier, here; — 'u Sanbe, in
this country.
[)ievmit, herewith, with this.
$iimmel, r,t. {-i ; — ), heaven,
sky.
f)inaufoe^en (188; fein), to
go up.
f)inau§fe()cn (181), to look
out (at the window, juiii
f^eiiftcr).
fiineinfleljen (188 ; fein), to
go in.
f)ingc{)eu (188; fein), to go
(hence) ; go anywheie.
Ijinter (65), behind.
^i^e, /, heat.
VOCABULARY.
413
Joel) ^oses c tn inflection;
compar. t?t)^er, sup. ^od)ft),
high,
tjofien, to hoye.
_ j^offcntlid), adv., (it is) to be
hoped, I hope,
^offumij], /. (. tn), hope,
^b^er, compa\ . <j/" ^oc^,
which see,
l^olcn, (to go and) bring,
fetch; get; -..■ laffen, to
send for.
$0la, n. (-eg), wood.
^Breii, to hear; listen; fagen
— , to hear say, hear.
^U6frf), pretty,
^u^ii, «. (-j.j; "er), fowl;
chicken,
^unb, m. (-e3; -e), dog.
^Ultbert, hundred.
^Hubert, n. (-3 ; -e), hun-
dred,
hunger, w.(-§), huns;er; ic6
l^abe — , I am hungry,
tmngrig, hungry.
$Ut, in. (-63; ^C), hat.
^iiten, to guard, keep.
3.
il^r, pers.pron,, to her, her
{dat. sing.); you {nom.
PL).
\^X, \\)XZ, '\\)X, pass, adj., \i^x\
its; their.
S^r, St)ve, 5Sf)r, /><?w. rt^-.,
your,
i^rer, il)re, '
ifireS,
t^re (ber,
bie, ba§),
i^rige (ber,
bie, bn3),
S^rer, gijve,
ai&re (ber, bie,
ba3),
S^i-tge(ber,bte,
baS),
pass, pron.,
hers ; its ;
theirs.
pass.
yours.
g^retioiffeit, for your sake.
iiit, contr.for in bcm,
immcr, always; at all times;
nod) — , still,
ill (65 ; dat. or ace), in, at;
into, to.
inbem', while, whilst.
innerfjaU) {gen), on the in-
side, witliin.
^nftnimciit', «. (-e3; -e),
(musical) instrument,
interefiant', interesting,
irgcnb einer, — iema'ib, any
one.
5Si-(anb, «. (-9), Ireland.
Stalien, «. (-i), Italy.
3.
30, yes, indeed, certainiy,you
know; did 1 (etc.) not; iiu
iuot}(, yes indeed, yes to be
sure, yes certainly.
jcigeii, to hunt, chase, pursue.
l^ageii, «. (-0), hunting (act
of).
Sagcr, m. (-3; — ), hunter,
huntsman.
3iaf;r, n. (-eS; -e), year.
3Sa'to[), ;«. (-5), James.
iaiuo()I, see\\\.
je, ever (at any time) ; the (be-
fore comparative degree,
126, 4); — giuei, two at a
time.
jcbcufall'j, certainly, at all i
events.
jeber, jebe, jebeS, every,
each, every one, any.
jebermaiiii, everyone, every-
body. :
jemnlS, ever, at any time.
jeinaiib, somebody, some one,
any body, any one. j
iener, jciie, jeiic3, that, that i
one, that person; yonder; ■
till? former.
jenfcit3, on the other side, j
beyond.
jegt/ now, at present. I
So^ann', m. (-8), Joha
3u'gciib,/, youth.
3u'Ii, m. (-s); July.
iun3(^cr), young,
^nitge, m. (-n; -n), boy,
lad.
Siiiigliitg, m. (-cS; -e),
young man, youth.
Su'nt, m. (-3), June.
■Rrtffee, m. (-3), coffee,
.ftaifer, vt. (-3 ; — ), emperor,
^albofotelette, / (-.1), veal-
cutlet,
fait C^cr), cold.
M\\\\\\', n. (-e«; -e), fire-
place,
^arbinat', m. (-6; -e), can
dinal.
fiai-r, m. (-5), Charles.
Jlavte,/ (-11), card.
fliu-toffcl./ (-n), potato.
Jtafe, m. (-0; — ), cheese,
faufeii, to buy.
tniim, hardly, scarcely,
feifeit (App. L.), to chide,
teiii, feiiie, teiii, no, not a,
not any.
fciiicr, fcine, feiii(c)3, pron.,
nobody, not anybody, no
one, none.
.Reltitcr, ;«. (-5; — ), waiter,
fcitncii (99), to know, be ac
quainted with,
.fteimtnio, /. (-c), know,
ledge ; //. acquirements,
attainments,
.(tiltb, 71. (-cc>; -er), child,
ilivdjc,/ (-11), church,
flar, clear,
illnffc, / (-11), class,
.niaffifcr, in. (-0 ; — ), classic
wtitcr, classic.
JKcUiicv', n (S; -e), piano,
.ffleib, ;;, (-c§; -cr), dress;
pi. clothes,
flein, .small, little.
Kiebeit (App. L.), to cieav«.
\\
414
VOCAnLTLAKV.
fUmmen (123), todimb.
flinncdi, to ring (said of
small bells); eo flitiflelt,
there is a ring (at the door,
etc.).
fliiiflcii (144), to sound.
Jlltubc, ;//. (-11; -ti), boy.
Jtitall, ,11. (-06; -c), loud
quick soinifl ; cLiji, tliun-
der-tlap.
flncdjt, ;;/. (-e'3; -c), (farm)
servant, man-of-all-work.
fltcifcii riiS), to ])inch.
fiieipcii (App. I,.), to i>inch.
.ftiuid)cn, w. (-'5; — ), bone.,
^od), ///. (-co; "c"), cook,
hornet', iu. (-I'li; -cii),
comet,
fommcii (167; fciii), to
come; arrive; — laffcn,
to send for ; juie fomtut
baS ? how is that ?
flbiiiil, m. ( (i')o; -c), king.
.Hijniiiiii,/ (-iicn), queen.
^Olliaftnifti', / King-street.
f5niicn (i</)-202; ability,
etc.), to be able, can;
know, be versed in, know
liow.
Jtotijevt', n. (-e§; -c), con-
cert
JTopf, m. (-e« ; "e), head,
ilovb, ;;/. (-C'5; ^c), basket.
itoftcn, //., expenses,
fofteit {ace. of />ers. and of
thing), to cost.
franf ("er), ill ; sick ; .ftraitte,
{adj. suhstX sick person,
patient,
ilvantdcit, f. (-en), disease,
illness.
XtrtCsi, m. (-e§ ; -e), war.
fncd)cii (123), to creep,
^ri'tif er, vt. (-?, ; — ), critic.
Mrf)C,/.(-n), kitchen.
.«uf),/("e),cow.
ihmft, f ("c), art.
^iinftlcr, til. (-'5 ; -), artist, j
lurj ( 'er), short- I
Wrjlict), not long ago, lately,
recently.
,«utf rf)or, in. (-0 ; _), coach-
man, driver.
«.
\(X*ti\\{sen. or iilHT 4- ,„<■.),
to laugh (at).
^'ad)0, m. (-C.;. ; -0), salmon
fahcii (iSr,), to load; invite.'
i'abcn, ;//. (-c; — ami ■■■),
window-snutter (//. — );
sho]), .store (//, -").
Vailb, «. (.-co; «ci- and -<),
land, country ; country (op-
posed to town); aiif bent
— C, in the country ; aiifo
— flcOcf, to go into the
, country; 511 — e, by land;
flier ,^11 — e, in this country.
Vanbfc()nft, / (-en), land-
scape.
Initn ("ev), long.
laitrtC, ad7i. long, ,. long time
or while, for a long time ;
fo — , so long as; er ift —
itirf)t [)ier ni'iuefcn, he has
not been here for a long
time; er ift iiirfit — l;icr
fleiuefeit, he has not been
here long,
raitflfant, slow; slowly,
uiiicift, long ago, long since,
i-'cirm, m. (-co), noise.
laffcn (188; 200, 7), to let,
allow; leave; have (a thing
done); fane it — , to send
word; fotnnten — , to send
for; id) Inffe bno gjnrf;
einbiiibeii, I am having
the book bound; e^ laftt
fid) nid)t (eiigncn, it can-
not be denied.
Saftev, «. (-S; — ), vice.
Snteiit, n. (-0), Latin.
2ailf, ;;;. (-f§; "c), course,
laitfeii (iSS: jetii), to run.
laiitcii, to ring (of large belJs).
toll.
fi'ben, to live ; be alive.
^'eben, «. (-0; -), life.
2c&crool)(, «. (-0), farewdl,
adieu,
8eber, «.(-«; — ), k-ather. .
Uvicn, to l.iy, put, ])lace, set.
iJeOrer, m. (-5; — ), teacher,
master.
leid)t, light, e.isy ; easily,
readily,
[fib (.only used as />red. with
feiil and tl)im), sorry,
grieved ; CS ift, ii tftiit mir
— , I am sorry,
[eibcn (118), to suffer; an
Ctiua^ — , to suffer from
anything.
U'ibcr, alas! unfortimately!
(eiOeit (120), to lend,
eeiften, m. (-0; -), (shoe-
maker's) last,
leifteii, to ai;com])lish.
ycttion', / (-en), lesson
(ernen, to Larn, study.
tefen(i8i\ to read,
t'efcn, n. (-§), (net of) read.
ing.
letjt, last, final.
J:^eilte, //. {no sint: ), p("r>i)le,
persons.
?trf)t, ;/. (-e§ ; -er and -c),
light.
Heb, dear.
i'\ihi,f. love, affection; —
511. love of.
liebc'i, to love,
licber {ravi/>. of^exn); conj.,
rather ; iaj gef)C — , I prefer
to walk.
Sieb, V. (-e§; -er), song.
nei-,eit (i3i ; fein, l^abcn), to
lie ; be ; be situated,
tint, left.
linfe-, to (or on) the left,
loben, to praise.
«odft, «. (-eo; ^-'er), hole.
Sbffel, .-.■.•. (-§; =-), spoon.
Sp^eniuiii, HI. (-§), Pame of
an op«ra by W*»jnar
VOCAnULARY.
4IS
loo, loose, slack; juad ift — ?
what is the m.itter ?
ItJfcii, 1(1 free, redeem ; ciii
-IMHn —, buy a ticket.
Iooipriii,ii'ii (144 ; foiii; niif
+ (i(i.), to spring uiiori,
leap upon.
iJouile,/ (-ii'j), I.oiiisa.
iibiue, tn. (-11; -11), li,.n.
XlitCiiDii), VI. (-0), Louis.
Vlift,/ (^'e), air, .ntmosi.horo.
liifliMl (i,<i), to li..-, utter .v
falsehood.
i.'iiflltci-, /;/. (-S ; — ), liar,
luftirt, merry; merrily; f ,1)
iibcr eiiioii — macl)i;ii, to
make sport of one.
Wt.
mad)i'li, to make ; arrange ;
cau.se, give; be (in antiini.
calculations) ; id) iiincfie mil
liidito bavnu'j, J care no-
thing for it; i'me Seercifc
— , to take a voy.ige ; Ciiien
ttpajievgniiii — , to take a
walk.
DliiOdicii, ;/. (-0 ; — ), girl.
Dianb, y^ C'e), maid, maid-
■er^fant.
a>!ai, 111. (-C'j or -en), May.
Wal, M. (-eo; -e), time (oc-
casion); jiim let^toi: — , for
the last time.
ntaleii, to paint.
Hialer, ;;/. (-0; — ), painter.
aJin(ci-ci',_,/;(art of) painting.
man, /iron., one, we, you,
they, people ; — fiiflt, they
say, people say it is said.
mand}ev, maiutc, mand)e§,
adj. and pron. , many a.
aUaitgcl, in. (-5), want.
Wami, m. (-C5; '•'pr), man.
IViaiitef, in. (-i; ^), cloak,
m.-iHtle.
SJhirflareto, / (- •|'^), M,n.ri;a-
ret.
SJfarie.y; '-n'\. Alary.
llliivt, / (-), mark (a coin
^ io(j Pfennig or about 25
cents).
I'iintt, ;//. (-fo ; "c), market.
ni'H}d)icrcn (fcin or hat'en),
to march.
Wnr5, ;;/. (-c:.), March.
yjhifcvil, //., measles.
DJatl;;'iiinti{,/, mathematics.
^Intvofc, I//, (-n; -n), sailor.
ailaiic-,/. ("c), mouse.
*0!cl)l, n. (-00), flour.
mcl)V, more; nidit — , no
longer, not now.
inchrerc, several ; nu'lu'dor.,
several things, a good deal.
meljrtnal'j, several times.
iiieibCH (120), to avoid.
iticilo, / (-11), mile (der-
ma n), league.
inoin, uu'tno, inoiit, my.
ineiiie (hor, Pio, bno), i ne.
incineil, to think, be of opi-
nion, suppose, niean ; ba§
foUtc id) — , I should think
so [emphatic) .
iiicinetiiu'iicii, (lun) incim't-
loillcii, for my sake; for all
I care.
meiiiiiU'(bi'i', bii\ bao), mine.
iUicinuiiii,,/ (-C11), opinion.
lltcift {suf>erl. of uii'l), most ;
nm — en, most, most of all.
'JJicifter, ;;/. (-0 ; — ), master.
melfeii (124), to n)ilk.
Weiubie', /. (-n), melody,
tune ; air.
a'ieiU]e,_/; (-n), great quantity
or number.
iUlenfd), ;;/. (-C11 ; -oil), a
human being, man ; per-
son ; //. , mankind, people.
mcfien (181), to measure.
aifcfftr, n. (-0 ; — ), knife.
DJietilll', n. (-eo; -c), metal.
luieten, to rent.
Wild!./ milk.
Itlillioit', A (en), million.
SDiinutc, y: ( n), minute.
I liiiituteiijeiflcr, ///. (-<5; — ),
I minute-hand.
j mil {fiat. 0/ ill)), (to) me.
ntit (46), with ; by (in niulti-
))lication).
''.liittan, ;;/. (-eo; -e), mid-
day, noon ; ^11 — fffen, to
dine.
Dtittrtii'C'efieii, n. (-0 ; — ),
• dinner.
lltitti'ii, in the n)iddle or
midst of; — im 'iLUiitei', in
the middle ot winter.
I'fittmod), .n. (-eo), Wed-
nesday.
nii3ilCll (i(/i-2o2; preference,
liking), to be able ; may ;
likt ; id) man ba'5 iiid)t,
1 do not like that; ic^
m5d)tc, 1 .should like.
minilid), possible ; bao ift
iici'ii — . that is very pro-
bable.
IKoiiavd)', in. (-en ; -en),
monarch.
5UJo'nat, /;/. (-eo; -e), month.
I'(0nt0ii, m. (-5; -e), Mon-
day.
lUof(]eii, ;;/. (-0; — ), mor-
ning; sititen — /good mor-
ning; he's — >3 {or moi';
lieno), in the morning.
niovneii, to-morrow; — friU),
to-morrow morning.
lltiibe, tired, weary.
■Blithe, y. trouble; iiidtt bcr
— lucrt, not worth while.
aiiiit)le, /. (-It), mill.
multipliuereit, to multiply.
iUitfit', f. music.
titiififalilcf), musical.
miiffen (196-202; necessity),
to be obliged or forced,
must.
iUlut, VI. (-eo), mood, cou-
rage, spirit ; miv ift fc^Iedtt
su — e, I fee! ill : frohejt
— eo, cheerfully.
a'iiittev, f. ("), mother.
I
%
m
11 ■*
4i6
VOCABULARY.
9t.
nac^ (^6), after; according
to J by (of time-piece) ; past
(of hour of day) ; to (before
proper names of places);
— ^aufc, home.
3la(i)ba\; m. (-i and -n; -i\),
neighbour,
ttac^bcin', cpnj., after.
nacf»aii)i'ii (i88; fein), to go
after ; go or be too slow (of
a time-piece).
SnacOmittiisi, >«. (-eS ; -c), af-
ternoon ; bed — S, in the af-
ternoon.
?lac()iiclr,/ (-en), news,
nflcfift (super/, o/ml)), next,
Kadifte, w. (ad/, subst.), fel-
low-creature, neighbour.
nac^fteiiS, shortly, soon, very
soon.
9lac^t, / (-^e), night,
not), (udt)er, \\M)\\), neav
S^ii'K, / , nearnesd ; neigh-
bourhood ; ill mciiiev — ,
near me ; in my neighbour-
hood.
Stame, /«. (-ii3 ; -n), name,
title.
notiiv'Iirf), naturally, of
course, I suppose,
nebcit (65), beside, besides;
near, alongside of, by.
Itebft (51), together with, in-
cluding.
9Jef(e, m. (-it ; -n), nephew.
nef)mcii (167), to take; fid) in
Sldjt — , to take care, be-
ware,
neiii, no.
jteiuuMi (99), to call, name.
^<:ttO,net(com>nercia/Urm).
JiCii, new.
neulid), lately, the other day,
not long ago.
tieuiUoOalb, eight and a half.
nidjt, not; — iiicljv, no lon-
ger: -TO(i!}r? is (it, etc.)
not (so)?
nlcf)t9 (indec/.), nothing.
ntc, never.
iJiteberlnnbc (bic), //., The
Netherlands,
nie'nirtiib, nobody, no one, no
person, not anybody, etc.
nod;, still, yet, even ; — cin,
one more, another; — ct =
luild, something (anything)
more ; — einmol, over
again ; — [)eiite, before the
end of the day, before the
day is over; — immcv, up
to the present time, still;
— uor uicvj^crjii stagcii,
only a fortnight ago.
iHorb'eiieii&nfjn, / (-en),
Northern-Railway,
lilitiii, necessary.
^noDcmber, ;«. (-S), Novem-
ber.
9Ili'niero, «. (-§), number,
mir, only. just.
3ilifi,/C'c), nut.
iiil^Hc^, useful.
o.
oD, whether, if.
obcii, above, up-stairs ; nacT)
— , upward,
obalctd)', although,
pbcr, or.
Dfcn, })j. (-0; ^), stove,
offcn, open
Dffi,iicv',w.(-C'3;-c), officer,
bffiicn (lid)), to open.
oft (^ci), often, free, .ntly.
C'!;cim, ;«. (-cS ; -c), uncle.
oOiie (34), without; but for.
Dilfel, w. (-§; —), uncle.
^Hilnft, m (-eg ; -"e), palace,
^'rtiuoffcl, ;«. (-3; -u), slip-
per.
'I'npicr', «. (-e6;-e), paper.
';-ini"t, w. (-c'3; ^c), [-ope.
i'luio-', «. (.I'll _) Par
paffeiib, fit, suitable.
Pfeifen(ii8), to whistle.
VknniQ, m. (-e9; -e), f,!h,
one hundredth part of a
mark), penny.
~;=fnb, «. (-C8; -e), horse.
■;!ferbc()Qf)ii, / (-en), tram,
way, tram; street- cars,
horse-cars.
i«fIaume,/(-n), plum.
Pfteaeit (7m»/C'), to attend to;
to be accustomed, wont ; —
(strong, A^Y>. I.), toprac-
tise, e- ercise.
i'fiinb, «. (-C3; -e), pound.
%i)movW,/. (-„), philo.
sophy.
%[an, m. (-0 ; -c or "e),
plan, design.
-;:ianct', m. (-en; -en),
planet.
%\<\%, nt. (-eg; ^c), place;
— nef)mcn, to sit down, be
seated.
<Plnt5rc,ieit, »«. (-§; _-)^
shower, down-pour.
pFnnbern, to chat, talk.
4-'ovti-ii', / (-in;, portion,
plate (of meat, etc).
^'Pft, /• (-en), post, post-
office.
^oftt'Otc, VI. (-n ; -n), post-
man.
pi"ad)ti(], nugnificent.
HJrciS, (-c§; -e), price;
prize,
preifcii (120), to praise,
^^rocciit', «. (-00 ; -e), per
cent.
'^Jiofeffcv, m. (-5; -en), pro-
fessor.
piomouiercn, to take a de,
gree, graduate.
^'MOIitnin, n. (-0), public;
audience,
^iinft, m. (-c§; -c), point?
— 3c[)ii lU)r, at ten o'clock
precisely.
i<unftlid;.teit. punctuality
VOCABULARY.
417
fi.
Cliia'bcrftein, m. (-e8 ; -e),
cut-stone, freestone.
queUen (124; fein), to gush.
iRabatt, m. (-cS; -e), dis-
CO' nt, abatement.
[Hunb, m. (-eo; "er), edge,
rim, brim.
9*at, w. (-eo), counsel, ad-
vice,
ratcn (188), to counsel, ad-
vise.
SWaiicf), m. (-eft), smoke.
SRaiipe,/ (-11), caterpillar.
5Recf)iicn, «. (-0), arithmetic.
SWecfinuitsv / (-011), account,
bill, reckoning ; calcida-
tion; ciit StricI) bmd) bio
— , disappointment ; fcf)iei;
bew Sie bn'j oiif iiieiiic — ,
charge that to rne.
rec^t, right.
5Hed)t, n. {hided.), right ;
— Ijnbeii, to be right, bo in
the right.
reittS, to (on) the right.
red;t'ji'itti], at the right time,
punctually.
SRebe, / (-11), speech; ora-
tion,
rebcu, to sp'jak, talk.
S^efovmatioii',/ (-01), refor-
mdtion.
SjeiT_cn, m. (-§), rain.
Dle'cieiiti-ovfcn, m. (-6 ; — ),
drop of rain,
reaievcii, to reign, rule, go-
vern.
SRenienmn,/ (-eii), govern
ment, reign ; iiitter ber — ,
in the reign (of).
Slegimciit', «. (-e6 ; -cv), re-
giment,
rciiiicii, to rain.
veiDcii (120), tomb.
rei(f), rich, wealthy.
ri:icf;e)t, to reach, hand.
reif, ripe.
;)(cifc, / (-tt), journey, voy-
age; eiiie — moc^cii, to
take a journey,
illcifcf often, //., travelUng-
expenses.
leifeii (fciit and Ijnbcii), to
travel, journey, go.
;Ueifeilbe {adj. subst.), tra-
veller.
vcificii(ii8), to tear, pull.
tcitcii(iiS; fein), to ride,
finnen (99; fein), to run,
race.
.Heftiiuintion',/ (-en), eat-
ing-lujuse, restaurant,
lettcn, to save, r.scue; id)
vcttctc il)m bao Celu'n, I
saved his life,
icncn {iiiipers.), to repent ; eo
vent micl) {ffen.), 1 repent
(of).
^)l[)einnnti«tnn'3, ;«. {gen. —),
rheumatism.
ricfltiil, right, correct ; cor-
rectly ; — i]et)eii, to be cor-
rect (of a time-piece); anf
bic — e fficije, in the right
way.
:)ltd)tnnii, / (-en), direction.
iiod)eii (123), to sm Jl.
^Hiefc, ;//. (-n ; -n), ginnt.
-HinbfKifd;, «. (-eo), beef.
:Hiiiii, ,n. (-Cj; -e), ring.
iin.3en (i.^), to wring,
viitnen (158), to run, flow.
;Hi.icf, ;«. (-e'3; ^e), coat.
:)kiinnn', m. (-3 ; -e), ro-
mance, novel.
Xbiner, ;«. (-0; — ), Roman
{wbst.).
■ot, adj. C'ei), red.
:)fot'fiip,d)en, «. (-5 ; — ),
Little Red (Riding) Hood.
;)iot'iuein, ;«. (-eo), red-
wine.
:}(iibe._/. (-11), turniii. acIDe
— , carrot.
JtilOii.', m. (-e-5; -e), ruby
nibern, to row.
rnfen (18S), to call.
rubifl, quiet.
iHiil)m, in. (-ed), praise.
rnnb, round.
iHuffe, m. (-n ; -n), Russian.
Saol, m. (-C8'; Saie), hall.
3nd)e,/. (-n), thing, matter,
affair, bu.siness ; bift bii
beincr — aeiuif), are you
certain of your information,
etc.
fageii, to say, tell ; — Ijbren,
to hear say, hear.
2al)nc,/,crc.im.
famintUd), complete (of lite-
rary works).
5anft Soren(, w., St. Law-
rence,
can.ieviii,/ (-nen), (female)
singer.
Znxn,/. (-6), Sarah.
3ntj, in. (-CC; "e), sentence,
fiuifen (123), to drink (0^
beasts),
faiijcn (App. L), to suck.
Sd)abe(ii), m. (-113 ; -^n),
damage, injury, harm, mis-
chief ; eo ift fdjabe, it is a
pity.
3d)rifei-, ;«. (-§ ; — ), shep-
herd,
fdliiffen (1S6), to create.
ld)rilkn (123), to sound, re-
sound.
Sd)ii(tcr, ;«. (-0; — ), wick-
et, ticket-office,
idiiiinen (fi.() ; gen. or iiber
-|- ace), to L^ ashamed
ld)iUi (-ei), sharp.
fd)eiDcn (120), to separate.
Idjeinen (120; dal.), to shine;
appear, seem.
fc()e!ten (15;), to scold
fdienfen {dit. -.if /■cn.un and
ncc. 0/ thing), to give,
make a prtsent of, present.
i
f 1: f:
m
: ,';f'l
►;■' ;
4i8
VdCABULA. V.
1*er«n(iji, B.), to shear.
f(f)t(frtt, to s«ml.
fcbicben ( 131), to hIuivc. push.
fi1)ic6ett (12O, «o shiM>t.
SAiff, H. (-09 ; -f), ship,
vessel.
Sitilb, «. (-co; -ci), sign-
board.
«(tilbfr5tc,/ (-11), torioise.
fctiiiircii (App. L.), to Hay.
3(f)liul)t, / (-fit), battle.
fAloftn (188), to sleep; firt)
— Iciu'lt, to retire to rest,
Ro to l)ed.
S(f)(ufio(f, w. (-eo; ^'e),
dressing-gown.
Scblaf'jimiticv, «. (o; — ),
bedroom.
fAlaflCii (18^,), to beat, sjrike.
fAlcrfit, bad; badly.
fcl)leid)cii (i 18 ; fcin), to slink,
sneak,
frfllcifcii (118), to sharpen,
grind.
fAleificii (App. L.), to slit.
fc^Iieficii(i23), to lock, shut,
close ; conclude, finish,
fc^liinm, bad.
fc^linflcii (144), to sling.
Sdjlitteii, tn. (-3; — ),
sleigh.
©c()(itt'fd)ulj[aufcn, «. (-3),
(act of) skating.
©d^Iofi, «. (-e<J ; -cv), castle,
palace,
fc^mecfeii, to taste, relish;
roie f^iitecft ^l)nc» biefes?
how do you like (the taste
of) this?
(2c^meid)eloi', /■:, flattery.
fd)mctd)CllI (dat.), to Hatter,
fc^mciftcii (118), to throw,
fling.
fd)mcli|cn(i24),to melt, smelt.
Sdimerj, tn. (-eo or -ens;
-en), pain.
cfinoiiDoii (App. I, ), to snort,
"gdincf, >n. (-0), snow.
fd)ncibcn(ii8), to cut; reap;
ficl> In bit j^anb — , to cut
one's hand.
' SAneibfr, »«.(-); — ), tai-
i lor.
i fifineifn, to snow.
I fdincU, quick ; quickly.
5d)llClljUtl, w. (-i'4; "c),
express-train,
fcflon, ilre.idy, as early ,is,
re.idily, easily, indeed; —
IrtnjU', for a long time
(past),
fcftbn, fine, beautiful, hand-
some.
cdionlH'it, / (-CM), beauiv.
3il)ottc, III. (11 ; -11), Scotch-
man,
jiiliniibcii (.App.I..^, to screw.
fd)rccfCM (1(17), to be sf.irtled.
j fd)rci(H'ii (ijo), to write (to,
I </(f/. (>rilll -\- ,/,(. i>//>frs.).
I fdncicH (lio), to cry, scream,
\ shout.
I fcl)vcttcii(ii8; fcin), to stride,
step, st.ilk.
! .rdiriftftcUcr, in. (-5; - ),
writer, author.
Scbiitt, tit. (-C'3; -c), stride,
sto]), iiace.
3d)u'licit, ;//. (-0), .Schubert
(derman musician).
5d)ul), III. (-c<3 ; -c), shoe.
5dmlb,/, guilt; (-on), debt;
idmlb aw etiuivj fein, to be
to blame for anything.
3d)ulc, / (-n), school.
wAiilcr, ;«. (-«; — ), puiiil,
scholar, school-boy.
3d)uftcr, tit. (-0; — ), shoe-
maker, cobbler.
)d)iittcln, to shake,
fdnuad) (^'cr), weak, infirm.
Sdjiuadie, / (-n), weakness,
infi;mity. I
2d!atrtiicr, m. (-0; -"), bn.- |
ther-in-law. I
3rt)miiHic, y: (-11), swallow,
fdiminoii (App. I,.), to fester.
fd)iv)iu-j ("ci), black.
fdjrociflfnd.'o), to be »ilent,
keep silenie.
5d)tiici|UMI, M. (-0), keeping
siliiuT, (iict of) Nilence.
3rt)iitci< (6ic, A',//, bcv
3d)uiciO, Switzerland.
fd)U)cUcn(iJ4; feini, to swell,
fdmicv, heavy, hartl, .lirtkuli.
fAiDcrlid), !v)nllv, scarcely.
3d)U)cftci, /; (-|^), sister.
fd)n>jmmcn (ij.s), to swim.
rdJiuimmcn, n. (-.>), swim-
ming (act of).
fdm>iiibcn(i44\ to v.inish.
iMmiiiijIcin 1 14), toswing ; fill)
- , to le.»i), hound.
fd)iui)ren {\\,i), »o swear.
fd)iuill, .ultry, close.
2<t, til. (-.>; -en), hike.
3ccvcifc,y; (-11), voyage.
3eiiclid)iff, //. (-C'j; -e), sail-
ing-ve.ssel, ship,
felicn (181), to .see, perceive;
look, behold,
fclir, very, very nuich, ex-
ceedingly,
fcin, feinc, fein, his, its, one's,
fein (5.>; fein), \o be; (<«
fj/c.r.), to be, have.
feit (4(1), since; — uiann,
since when, ' 'v long; —
adit IrtjU'ii, I : a week
past,
feitbem', amj., since,
felbft, self; even,
fenben (90), to send.
3eri)iette, / (-n), table-
napkin,
fe^cit, to set, i)ut, place; fid)
— , to seat one's self, sit
down,
fid), pron. refl. aa: and dat.,
one's self, himself, herself,
itself, tliem.selves; to liiin-
.self, themselves, etc. ; re-
(/'/•r., one another.
fie, she, it; h: r, it ; they
them.
3ie (/or bu attU il)i), you.
VOCAHULARY,
419
flebfii, seven.
eieli'eiucl, «. (o; — ), se-
venih part,
ficboii (i2\), 111 In.il.
(SillH'V, «. ('J), silviT.
flllrteil(i44), losing.
ftllfcil (14.) ; iiili), to sink.
finncii (i3«), to iitlvci.
fi(|cn(«8i), toMt.
SdiUU', ///. (-It; -It), slave.
Stlliuartb, «/. ( i'(i ; -c), enu--
ralcl.
Jo, so, thus, in suih a man-
ner, iiiiietd (;/«/ iniiisiiih-ii
in the apodosis to a condi-
tio>i,ilil,tii.u')\ --olu'it, just,
just now; — eiit, eiiic, ciit,
Kllcil ,1.
'obitlb, as soon ;is.
^ofort, ininu'di.itcly, ilircctly.
fOrtiU', evi-n.
eollii, HI. (-fJ; "0), son.
old)(er), adj. and proH.,
SUC'll.
6olbiU', ;//. (-cit ; -on), sol-
dier.
folli'ii (i(/)-202 ; duty or obli-
gation), to lie in duty
boiuid, be to; shall; be
s.nid.
eoimuof, ///. (-'3 , — ), sum-
mer.
Joiibi'Vil {after mxaiives on-
ly), but.
Soiiiinbciib, ///. (-e'j ; -c),
.Saturday.
Sonne, y: (-11), sun.
oonntrtfl, m. (-c>5; -e), Sun-
day.
foiift, else, otherwise; —
nod), any more, any other,
any besides.
fonftifl, other, different.
Sophie,/. (-U0), .Sophia.
forrt'faltii^, careful; care- |
fully. I
fptlt, late. I
<po,uereii(,jAv> — ju'lten, i.S8), '
to take 4 walk, go for a '
walk, go walking; — fal)« |t*(^fn (167), to sti
ren (i8()), to go for a drive.
SpiVMCi'tianrt, m. (-co; "c),
walk; otmn — Miiu1)eii, to
take a walk.
Spert, w. ( CO), Inicn.
fpciiMi (120), to spit.
cpeijefai-tf, / (-11), bill oi
fare.
fpcifen, to eat, dine.
j Spevlinn, ui. ( cs; -e),
s|)arrow.
I fpielen, to play.
I ipinnen (15S), to spin.
fplcifieu (.App. I..), to split.
I opfailio, / (-11), language.
3pina)tiUent', «. (-t''5;-<),
talent for (learning) lan-
guages.
Spiad)'ftnbinm, «.(-<}; -ten),
linguistic study.
fprecben (1^)7), to speak, say,
tell ; to sjieak or talk to or
with.
«piert)en, «. (-«S), speaking
(act of), speech.
Sprtdiiuoit, II. (-e'S; "cr),
jmiverb.
fptieffon (123), to sprout.
fpriniu'it (144; fein), to
spring, leap, jump.
St. H^o'ieit^, ;«., St. Law-
rence.
Stunt, m. (-C'j; -en), state.
Stabt,/. Ct), town, city.
Stabt'thov, fi. (-eo; -c),
t(>wii-i;ate, city-g.ite.
Stabt'iil)i-, /. (-en), town-
clock.
Stillil, ;;/. (-eo), steel.
5tanb, »i. (-ci ; "e), stand;
condition ; \\{ — e (onintcn,
to be completed, be done ;
ini — c fein, to be able, be
in a position to.
ftUft ("cr), strong, powerful;
severe.
ftiUt'finben (i.h), to take
place, happen.
167;, to sting,
;tc(fen (App. I-.), to stick.
ftelKn (1.S6; fein or Ijaben),
to stand, be; be nituated.
ftcl)len (167), to steal.
! fteitien (uo; fein; aiif +
'/(I.), to climb, mount,
ascend , descend, gel down
or off, alight.
Stelle, /. (-11), place, s|H)t.
, ftcUen, to put, pKice, set (up-
I right),
fteilien (159; fein), to die.
ftiebeit (.App. L.), to scatter,
ftill, still ; (piiet.
Stintnte, / (-n), voice.
\ ftinfen (App. L.), to stink.
j Storf, m. (-eo; "e), stick,
j cane.
ftiJren, to interrupt, di.sturb,
j trouble,
ffofien (iMH), to pu.sh, kick,
strike, bump, knock.
Stiafte, / (-n), street, road,
ftveiiten (118), to stroke,
ftreiten (ii«), to quarrel,
ftrcnjl, severe; severely.
Stricb, HI. (-C'J; -e), .stroke,
dash ; etn — bnvc^ bie
;)(ect)nnn(j, disappojntmei::.
Strom, w, (-e<3; "e),
stream, current.
Strnntpf, ;«. (-69; "e),
stocking.
Stilcf, HI. (-eo ; -e), piece.
Stiicfdjen, ;/. (-0; — ), little
piece, ni'.irsel, bit.
Stnbent', /«. (-ett : -en),
student.
Stnbinm, «. (-3; Stubion),
study,
ftnbievcn, to study.
Stnbieien, //. (-0), studying
(act of).
Stnl)l, m. (-c<S; "e), chair.
Stiinbc, / (-11), hour, les-
son.
Stnnbenjeiflev, vt. (-ij; — ),
huur-haiid.
,.
,!f
("
420
VOCABULARY.
6turm, m. (-eS ; ''e), stonn,
tempest.
fubtra[)ieren. to subtract,
fudien, to seek, search, look
for.
'^v.vVi, /. (-n;, soup, broth.
«.
ta'bein, to blame, find fault
with.
2;ofl, m, (-eS; -e), day; ncOt
— e, a week; jcit adjt — cii,
for a week past; ciu — urn
ben anbeni, every other
(alternate) day ; alle brct
— e, every third day.
S;o'ge§aii'bruct), m. (-es),
day-break.
Sante, /. (-n), aunt. ;
tapfcr, brave, valiant ; brave-
ly, valiantly. i
Xapfeiteit, /., courage, va-
lour.
%a.\<{)i, J. (-n), pocket.
aafie, ./. (-11), cup.
S;ouct)er, in. (-§; —), diver.
taucii, to thaw.
S^cil, m. (-C'3; -e), part, por-
tion.
teilcii, to divide, share.
teil§, partly, in part; teilS
. . . teit'j, partly . . . partly.
Seleflvapt/, m. (-cu; -en),
telegraph.
S;elepl)on', n. (-3; -e), tele-
phone.
a,eUcv, m. (-5 ; — ), plate.
Seppid), m. (-e^; -c),- car-
pet.
S;eftamtfiit', «. (-e§; -c),
testament, (last) will.
teuer, dear, cobtly.
%W>-, n. (-c5 ; "cr), valley.
atialev, in. (-3 ; — ) dollar.
a;()at, /. (-C11) deed; ex-
ploit, achievement.
t^iuicii, to thaw.
%\)fi, in. (-0) tea.
l;^em|e,/., Thame*.
ZW, n. (~eS; -e), gate,
gateway.
if)oi-, 111. (-en; -en), fool.
2I)roM, in. (-co; -e), throne.
t()yn (196), to do.
i-()iir(e),/. (-n), door.
Xier, n. (-e§; -e), beast,
animal.
1\\i\), in. (-e3 ; -e), table.
Jitcl, «/. (-'3; — ), title; mit
— , with title (printed on
the back).
Joc()tcr, / ("), daughter.
2bc[)tci-d)cn, n. (-0; — ), lit-
tle daughter,
lorontoer, adj., (of) To-
ronto,
tot, dead,
tbtcn, to kill,
till )e idle, lazy, indolent.
tiajcn (186), to carry,
tl'illirisl, sad, ■sorrowful, me-
lancholy.
Iriuiiinj,/. (-en), marriage
(-ceremony),
trcffeii (167), to hit, happen
upon, meet with; hit upon,
fall in with.
tvcit'cu (120), to drive.
3;i-ci.ip^', / (-n) stairs, stair-
case,
tvetcn (iSi), to tread, step,
trcn, faithful, true,
tiiefcn (123). to drop, drip,
trintcr (144), to drink.
2iinfcn, n. (-6), (act or ha-
bit of) drinking.
Xi'iul'i',elt), 11. (-C'j; -ei),
driiiking-money, gratuity,
tip.
tvo^j (223), in spite of.
tfol^bcni' !uao, in spite of
what.
SiLrni/tenboIb, m. (-ec; -e),
drunkard.
Ind), n. (-eS ; "cr and --:),
cloth.
Ju'flenb, /. (-en), virtue.
n.
Ht'er, «,(-§; — ), evil.
iiOcf (65), over, above, a'^,
through, by way of; I;eute
— brci iffiod)en, this day
three weeks.
iibeil;anpt', in general, gene-
rally ; as a matter of fact,
at any rate.
ii'benuor(3cn,the day after to.
morrow,
ii&enc'oen, to persuade,
iiberfc^'cn, to translate ; in§
2>eutfd)C — , to translate in.
to German.
ii'tcrjicljcr, in. (-S , — ),
overcoat,
iibrii], remaining, left over;
bu'j lUu"' 'C, the remainder,
what is loft; — Ulciden, to
be remaining or left,
iibiinj, / (-en), exercise;
practice.
Ufcr, n. (-3; — ), bank,
shore.
\\{)x, f. (-on), clock, watch ;
UMt uiCf — , at four o'clock ;
luie uiel — ift co? what
o'clock is it ?
linmog'fid), impossible ; id)
faun — , I cannot possibly.
Un'vcd;t, n. (-1-6), wrong; —
(jabcn, to b2(ii. the) wrong,
iinfcr, nnfcrc, nnfer, our.
iintcn, below, down-stairs,
nnta- (65), under, beneath,
below ; among; — bcv 3iee
aionm.i eiiuUica^S, in the
r^ign of Elizabeth,
untei-ncl/mcn (167), to un.
dertake.
Untciiicl/incn, n. (-S),
enterprise, undertaking.
Un'tci)d;icb, m. (-e3 ; -c>
difference.
Un'iuaOflicit, / (-en), ud
truth, f,iV 'lood.
un'iuaOvfdjcinlic^, improb*
ble.
Vocabulary.
4^t
im'iceft i^en.), not far from.
Ui/jufriebcn, discontented,
dissatisfied,
ur'teilcit, to judge.
U. f. in., abbrev. for unb fo
Tuejter, and so forth, etc.
O.
aSatcr, m. (-§; "), father.
oeiDcvgeii (159), to conceal,
hide.
uerDrcniteii C99), to burn, con-
sume with fire.
oerbevbcii (159), to spoil
(iMtr.) ; — {iveak), to spoil
{tr.), injure.
oerbvicjini (123), to vex.
SScrciiiijten Stnatcii (bie),
pL, The United States.
oerge()Cii§, in vain.
oti-fleltcit (159), to requite,
reward.
oerijcffeii (iSi), to forget.
S8eri3nii,jcit, «. (-c), pleasure,
dcliglit, amusement.
S3evI)iiltnio, «.(-fe5 ; -fe), cir-
cumstance.
Dei-I;ci'iatcu (fici) mit), to
marry.
oerfaiifcn, to sell ; bicjcS
^an^j ift ju — , this house is
for sale.
J)ei-Iafieii (iSS), to leave, de-
sert, quit; fid; — auf (+
ace), to rely upon, depend
upon.
oer'eibcn, to render disagree-
able, spoil.
oerletcu, to hurt, wound
tKrnercii(i3i), to lose.
SSerluft, in. (-65 ; -e), loss.
ocnnicteii, to let, rent.
cermittelft {gen.), by means
of.
«)evreifen, to go on a jour-
ney.
oerreift, absent on a journey.
tJerfammelit, to collect, as-
semble.
oerfcfiretBen (120), to pre-
scribe.
oevfcOiuenben, to squander,
waste.
ccrfcljiuinben (144; fein), to
disappear, vanish.
t)Ci')prcd)en (iC7),to promise.
ui'rftet)cn (:86}, to under-
stand ; fid; — aiii (-}- ace),
to be a judge (of).
ucrftoiDcii, deceased.
ucvfud;cii, to try.
SSenuanbte, >«. and/, [adj.
subst), relative.
oerjei^eii (120 ; dat.), to par-
don, excuse.
SBerjeiOuiu], /. (-en), pardon,
forgiveness; uiit — Dittcii,
to beg pardon.
uei-jiueifclii, to despair.
Setter, in. (-'J ; -n), cousin.
uiel ;.iici;i, ineift), much,
many, a great deal of; luic
— UI;r, what o'clock.
uiel(cid;t', perhaps, posi:bly.
uielmal, uielmal'j, many
times, frequently, often.
uier, four.
Sicrtcl, «. (-§; — ■), fourth
part, quarter.
SSicrtelftiiii'be, y: (-n), quar-
ter of an hour.
DierjcOn, fourteen; — 2:age,
a fortnight.
aSioIouccU', n. (-e§; -e), vio-
loncello.
aSoflel, m. (-3; ^), bird.
OoU {gen. or con), full.
UCUeii''ocil,tofinish,complete.
DOit (46), of, from, by, about,
concerning.
cor (65), before, of, in front
of, ago ; — ad;t 'Jagen, a
week ago.
oorbei, over, past.
oovDeicjcljen (188), to go by,
pass by.
BorDereitcn (fidi), to prepare
(for, ouf + ace).
corfc^ren (186 ; fetn),
d-ive up to the door, etc.
rorgefjeu (188; fein), to go
(or be) fast (of a time-
piece),
Dov'gefiern, the day before
yesterday.
uor[)abeu, to contemplate, in-
tend,
3}orhang, m. (-e3 ; ^e), cur-
tain.
uovij, preceding, last.
oorloufi.5 {adv.), temporarily,
for the present.
oorlefcit (181 ; -f dat. of per'
son), to read to.
aSormiiiib, w. (-eS ; -"er),
guardian.
aSovrat, w. (-eS; ^e), stock,
provision.
O0rftd)tij, cautious, prudent.
SBorftabt,/ ('e), suburb.
tJOiftcUcu, to present, intro-
duce.
Dortcil^aft, advantageous.
ooriiber, past.
ooriibcvflicfecn (131 ; fein), to
flow past.
ooriiberge^eit (188; fein), to
go past, pass by ; om ^aufe
— , to go by, go past, the
house,
oorjiei^en (131), to prefer
nja^fen (186), to grow.
SBagen, m. (-<> ; — ) waggon,
carriage.
jodgen (131, B.), to weigh.
rod^len, to choose, select.
roafir, true, real; nid;t — ?
am (I, etc.) not? is it not
so?
luafiren, to last, coi.tinue.
rod^venb (^*«. ; 223), during;
while.
SBa^v^eit,/, (-en), truth.
tDal)rfc^)einli(l& {adv.), pro-
bably.
'11 '
¥'
V.n
422
VOCAIJULARY.
I
SBaifcnr;au^, «. (e?; ^n),
otj)han-asyluni.
aajalb, »/. f-cQ; ^cr), forest,
wood.
SJanb,/ (■■e),^vall.
aBanb(e)rer, >«. (-0 ; —I, tra-
veller.
wann '< when >
il)avm( \n), warm,
luartcn (mif + «-,-.), to wait
for.
luavum, why, wherefore.
inaS, what, that which, which,
that; — fiir ein, citie, ciii,
what kind of a, what,
toafctjen (186), to wash.
Sffiaffer, «. (-.3 ; -), vsater;
ill — , by water,
roeben (131), to weave.
iued}fel[)aft, changeable,
toecfen, to wake, awake,
waken.
SaSed'ufii-, /. (-en), alarm-
clock.
• toebev, neither ; — . . . noc^,
neither , . . nor.
ffieg, »t. (-e'3; -c), way, road ;
fic^ nuf ben — macfien, to
set out, be off.
iDCgen (^e». ; 223), on account
of, because of, for the sake
of, for.
SBeib, «. (-C'i; -cr), woman;
wife.
WetCl)en(iiS), to yield,
iffieibe, / (-11), pasturage,
pasture.
SSdl)ltnd;tCii, //., Christmas,
tucil, because.
''Meiw, m. (-co ; -c), wine.
tUCilteil, to weep, cry.
aBeintartc, / (-it), wine-
card,
toeifc, adj., wise.
Sa}eife,/.(-n), manner, mode,
way ; aiif bicjc — , in this
way.
njetfcii (120), to point out.,
show.
lueiji, whitp.
lucit, .far.
lucitcr, farther, further.
aBei^cii, ,n. (-'3 ; -), wheat.
U)cU(;er, luctdic, iuc(rf)c«, rel.
pro'i., who, which, that;
ititcrrogaih'e mij., which?
w hat ? ; — , adj. {in exda-
nnitions), what a ! wliat !
~i^>i'It, / (-C11), world; a.if
bi'v — , in the world.
lucm, dat. 0/ uicr, to whom ?
iuenbcii(y9), to turn; fid}—,
to api)ly (to, <\\\ -f ace).
lueni.ii, little, few.
mciut, when, whenever, as
soon as; if; — and), even
if.
IDCr, who; he who, who-
' ever; who?
lUfibcn (159), to sue.
merbcit (159), to become,
grow; {as mix. of tfie pass-
ive voice, 112-114), to be;
— aiiS, to become of.
luerfen (159), to throw.
a.^CVt, «. (-e§ ; -c), work,
lueffcii, whose ; whose ?
luesr^alb, wherefore? why?
better, «. (-0), weather; bet
biefein — , in this weather,
lutbcr {ace. ; 34), against,
contrary to.
luic, how; how?; — fclu'
audj, however much,
luicbcr, agani, once more.
uiie'bcrfef)cii (181), to see
again, meet again.
^ilMc'ooifcl;cn, «.(-o), meeting
again ; oiif — , good-b •• till
we meet again,
luicgcu (131), to weigh.
ilMlIjCim, m. (-3), William.
aBillc, ;;;. (-no), will ; wish ;
urn. . . uiilleit {gen.), for
the sake of.
i«iub, m. C-C'3 ; -;'j, wi'id.
luinben (144), to whid.
loinbtg, windy.
2Bi»ter, ;«. (-<5; •-), winter,
lotr, we.
unrflid), adv., really, truly.
iLMrtiii, / (-nen), hostess;
landlady,
niifien (,96), to know {said
of knowledge); \\\i)i bag
id) luit^te, not that I know
of
-JvMiienfd)aft, f (-en), sci-
ence,
unffentlirf;, knowingly.
U'OV where; where?
llJod)c,y:(-n), week.
U'Ol)!, pred. adj., well {of
hciith); ntir ift nid)t — ju
I'iiit, I do not feel well; — ,
adv., well, then, indeed, I
suppose ; ja — , yes, to be
sure.
iuol;nen, to dwell, live, reside.
■i8oI)nnnci,/ (-en), dwelling,
house, residence,
uiollcn (196-202), to will, de-
sire, wish, want, intend,
mean, like; — Sje ein
®Iao SKaffev? will you
have a glass of water ?
luornii, whereon, on which,
on what, of what,
iporauf, whereon, on which,
for which, on what.
movauS, wherefrom, from
what, of what.
)UDvin, wherein, in which, in
what.
ilUu't, n. (-cS ; '=ei- and -e),
word.
nioriUu'i? about what? at
what ? over what ?
)inmbern (fidi), to wonder, be
astonished (at, iibcv -j-
acc.) ; c§ uuiiibert mid)
{i>n/>ers.), I wonder.
Siinfd;, m. (-eo ; ^e), wish.
unlnfd)cn, to wish, desire,
want ; (MM — , to congra-
tulate, wish success.
Muxm, m. (-e§; "cr), worm,
VOCABULARY.
425
SBurjel, / (-n), root.
2But,/, rage, fury.
roUtenb, furious.
ja^len, to pay.
3a^n, Ml. (-co; "e), tooth.
3al)nroe^, n. (-eji), tooth-
ache.
ge^n, ten.
Beicfjen, «. (-§ ; — ), sign.
jeigen, to show.
jeifien (120), to convict.
Seit,/ (-?n), time ; ju nUen
— en, in all ages.
^ixtxmo^,/. (-en), newspaper.
((crreigen (uS), to tear (to
pieces).
jerrinnen (158), to vanish,
run away (of liquids).
jie^cn (131), to draw; pull,
take.
3immcr, «. (-§ ; — ), room.
JU (46), to, at ; — meitiem
Dn!el, to my uncle's ; —
berfelben 3tit, at the same
time; adv., too; closed,
shut.
jubringcit (99), to pass, spend
(said of time).
.^ucfer, m. (-6), sugar.
uterft', first, first of all.
^ilfolge {gen. or dat. ; 223),
in consequence of, accord-
ing to. [fied.
jufrieben, contented, satis-
3iig, m. (-e§ ; ''e), train.
^umac^en, to shut, close.
jurudbringen (99), to bring
back.
jurUcfbkibeu (lao; felti), to
remain behind; remain at
home.
jurildf ommen (i67),to return,
come back.
juriidlegen, to put by, lay up.
jufaiumen, together.
jufammenftogen (188), to col-
lide.
5iif c^icteii, to send to (dat.).
jufc^Uejjen (123), to lock up,
fasten, shut.
3ioect, vt. (-eo ; -e), aim, ob-
ject.
jioei, two.
jrocitenS, secondly.
jioingen (144), to force.
jroifdieti (65), between.
jrodlf, twelve.
ENGLISH — GERMAN.
Note. — The government of verbs is given only where it differs from English usage.
A.
able, ftibig, gefc^icft ; to be
— , fbnneii, ig6; tm Staiis
be feiii.
about, prep, (around), iitn,
34, 226, (a); (the person),
bei, 46, 226, {d) ; ixdv.,
(nearly), ungefdl)v ; etiua,
226, (/'), {c)\ to be — to,
im Segrtffe fcin.
above, prep., iiber, 65.
absent, abiuefenb ; — mind-
edly, jerftreiit.
abuse, v., miftljnii'bedt.
accept, anne^meii, 167.
accompany, begletten
{tr.).
account; on — of, luegen,
223 ', ^alb(eu), ^alber, 223 ;
on that — , be§roegen, be5=
l^alb.
accusation, 2(nflage,y; (-n).
accuse (of), auflagen {gen.
of thing), befc^ulbigen
{gen. of thing).
accustomed, geiuofjut ; to be
— , bie0eiDo{)n[)eit l)abcn.
acknowledge, anerfennen,
(99).
acquaintance, ^Jefaniitfcbnft,
f. (-en); to make the —
of, (ennen lerncn.
acquit (of), Ioofpred)en (1C7;
gen. of thing).
act; to — amiss, mi6'()anbe[n.
add, abbiercii.
address, subst., SMbreffc, f.
(-n).
address, v., aurebeii.
admire, berounbern.
advance, oorriicten {intr.).
advantage, SSorteil, m. (-e3 ;
advantageous, oor'tei(f)aft.
advice, ^Itat, m. (-c§).
advise, raten (t88; dat.).
affair, Sac^e, /, (-n).
afraid; to be — (of); ftcf)
fiircf)ten (uor -f dat.).
after, nac^, 46.
afternoon, Ufac^niittag, m.
(-e§ ; -e).
afterwards, nnd^^er, ^ernac^,
baranf.
again, roieber, nod^matS.
against, tuiber, gegen, 34.
ago, Dor (prep, + dat), 65 j
424
VOCABULARY.
many years — , nor t)ie[cn
3al)»'eii ; a week — to-day,
[;eiiti' uov ac()t Tnu'".
agreeable, ninjeiicf)m.
ail, fcOtcii; what — s you?
wivi fc()lt 3l)tuii?
Ebs! ad) !
all(the), nlI,9Ulc«; aller, nlle,
allco ; — tile same, ciiii'i'lci.
allow, crliiiiOcii((/fA) ; Inficit,
i88: to be — ed, hiirieii, 196.
Almn (river), ?((mn, /.
almost, fiift, bcimilje.
alone, alk'iii.
alonj?, [iiitij?, cntlniin (223,
iS, 19).
alphabet, 9llp[)abtt', n. (-eS;
-c).
already, fcfjon.
also, lUld).
always, immer.
America, Jlmovifa, «. (-0).
amiss; to act — , ini|yOnit=
belli, 209,
amontr, ruiioiigst, iiiitcv, 65.
a, an, I'iii, ciiic, ciii.
ancient, alt ; the — s, bit'
3(ltcii,/S/.
and, imb.
anecdote, Hiiefbote, _/. (-it),
angry, Obfi' ; be — at, boie
feiii niif (+ ncc).
animal, Jicv, «. (-cj ; -c).
another (a different one), ciit
niibi'i't'v; (one more), iiocl)
etii, cine, eiii.
answer, subst., Slntiuort, /.
C-cn).
answer, v., aiitiuofteit(rf'rti'.);
beaiitiuorteit {ace. of
thing, dat. of pers.).
answering (act of), Slittioofs
ten, «. (-0).
ant, 9lmctfe,_/ (-11).
any {partitive, 2, 2); irgcnb,
ein, cine, cin ; —thing, ir,-
g?nb otti'aS, ction^;; —
thing but, nid)t§ n)eiiti]cr
aI3; pi., tt)el4)e, eintge;
not —body, not —one, nfe»
manci; not ~, teiit, feiite,
feiii.
apartment, GJemact), «. (-cS ;
-■er).
appear, frf;einen, crfdjeincn,
apple, ?(ptel, m. (-5 ; -") ;
— -tree, JlufcUmiini, in.
(-C'3; e).
apply to anyone, firf) an jcs
nuiiibcit {ate ) lueiibcn, 99.
appoint ^ns), cnteniien (99;
approval, "ik'ifad, ;«. (-eS).
A;n-il, ^^luviC, „/. (-,;,).
architect, 3(rd)itoft', m. (-en;
-en),
arm, Jinn, m. (-C'3 ; -c) ;
~s, pL, ilBanen.
army, 3lrmec, / (-n).
arrival, "iXwXwmx , f (^e).
nrrivc,(intoninten(i67; fi'in).
ni-t, .«Mnf;./. ( e).
article, Jlrti'fel, vi. (-S ; — ).
artillery, Sri'ttHcvic, / ; 0c=
fiOiilj, n. (-co).
artist, .riiinfllcr, m. (-5 ; _),
as(24T, 8-11), alS; mie; fo ;
ba; — soon — , foOatb
(mic) ; — a, al'3 ; — . . .
— , (obeit)io . . . iDictir r.Ici.
ascend, anfftetGcn, ftcincit,
120.
ashamed ; to be — of, fief)
frf)ameit {gen. or iidcr -f
aec.).
ask, francn (186) ; — for,
bitten (181, iim);r)cr(an(icn
(nndi).
asking questions (act of),
i^ra.icn, «. (-0).
assert, bcF)niiptcti,
assist, beifteOcn (186; fetn ;
dat.).
astonish ; to be — ed (at), fiit)
iDiinbevit (iJDcr -|- ace.).
astonishing, cvi'tannenb.
at {of locality), in, an, auf,
Jtt, 327 (fl) ; {oj time) unt,
511, lu't, 227, (^); {of price)
urn, 22', {c); not — all,
nai- nidit ; —my brother's,
bet met n em syinber; —
last, —length, eitblicO.
att:ick, ?'., anu'cifen, 118.
sri!>st. ,^'( M u'i fi w.(-e§;-e).
attempt, suht., Sevfiicl), in.
(-^'C ; -c).
attendant, »e<jletter, m. (-3 ;
-).
attention, Olitfrnerffamfeit;
to pay —, ^J(if)t (leben
(181; awi -lease.).
attentive, iiiifiiu'iffain.
August, "Jlii.iiifi', m. (-0).
aunt, 3:ante, / (-n).
author (of a particular work),
'-i'orfaffev, m. (-0; -).
autumn, .ioerbft, m. (-e5 ; -c).
avoid, ineiben, ucnneiben,
120.
away, foit, abiuefenb ; —
from home, con ^onfe.
B.
back, adv., j^wxM.
bad, badly, idjlecTji.
bag, Sad, m. (-c?; ^e).
bank, 23anF, / (-en).
bark (of trees, etc.), 93aiiins
rinbe,/
basket, .(Tovb, m. (-eS ; "c).
battery, ^Batteric, / (-n).
liattle, Sd)(adn,/ (-en).
be, feiii (52); luorbeii (159;
as aux. of passive, 112,
R. 5): ftclicn (186); there
is, there are, e5 i-)iebt, c§
tft, etc., 220; {of health)
ftd;6efinben(i44);howare
you? luic ncOt egjjjtinen?
I am to, id; foU.
bear, subst., SSar, m. {-en;
-en),
bear (bring forth), v., (je«
baven (167).
beat, f/., f c^Iagen (i8(3).
beautiful, fc^bn ; tho --, bo8
Sdibiie.
beauty, 3cf)onr;eit, / (-sn).
because, lucil; ba.
become, uiorbcu(is9S I'teljen
(i86; i/a^).
bdd, a3ctt, «. (-CS; -en); to
go to — , ju SOette flel)cn,
ficO fif)(afen lenen; in — ,
JU 33ctte.
bee, SUtcnc, y; (-n).
beef, Jliubfleifd), «. (-c§).
beer, Sicr, «. (-ce; -c).
Sefore, prep., uor (65; rf^/.
<7r acc.)\ conj., bcpor;
cl)c (bnfi).
beg (ask), Dittcii (iSi ; for,
lim); to — pardon, iim
aSciiciI)uiiii bitten; — (lor
alms), ('cltclii.
beggar (-man), 50ettlcr, m.
(-5 ; — ); —-woman, "^ett;
U-iiii,/ (-11C11),
begin, niifnii;icu (18^); be*
niiiueii (15S).
behave, ficO OctntcicnfiSrj).
behind, [jintor (65; fiat, or
ace).
beli-ve, filnuDcii {dat. 0/ per-
son).
belong (to), (]e()in-cit (du/.).
beloved, iiclicbt, uunt.
below, /^^/., unti'v (dat. or
ace. ; 65) ; mita'ljnlb (g'en.;
223); (icfv., iinten,
besides, ac/v , nufiCVbcm.
between, }iuifct)en (dat. or
ace. \ 65).
beverage, CSetvdiif, «. (-e«;
-e).
bid, V. (order), Ijcifieu (188).
big, QVOfj.
bill, S!cd)iniiU], /. (-cu).
bird, aJoijcl, m. (-0; '^).
bird-cage, SSo(5eIbnucr, «.
H;-).
birth -Jay, ffic&iii't'5ta(i, r«.
(-C'j ; -c) ; as a — -present,
jum ©ebuvtotai],
28
VOCABULARY.
( bishop, 53ifc5Df, m. (-e8; ''e).
bite, v., bei6cn(ii8).
bitter, Ditter.
black, adj., frf)iDnrj ("er).
black, V. {o/dooh), roidjfeit.
blame, v., tabeln.
blindly, 0nnblin(]3.
blow, v., Dlafcn (188).
blue, DIaii.
board ; on — (^ ^ skip), am
SBorb.
boat, SOoct, «. (-e3; -e or
53i3tc).
bodily, fiirperdd).
bombard, DomDarbicven.
bone, .Uiiod)on, m. (-S; — ).
book, 'i\\\d\, n. (-co; -'er).
bookseller, . 93iidil)iiiiblcr, m.
(-0; -).
born, par(., nefiorcit (167).
Iiorne; having been — down
by the stream, uom StVOs
ine foitncviffcit.
botanist, ^Jotn'nifcr, m. (-§;
-).
both, beibc; al(e Ocibe, beis
be§.
bough, S>(ft, m. (e5; ^'e).
Hoston, 'i^oftoii, «. (-S); the
— train, bcr,!^u(] 0011 (nadi)
3(oftoii.
boy, .rtnnOc, m. (-n; -it),
brave, tnpfer.
bread, ^hpt, «. (-c§ ; -e).
break, (ucdjcu (167); —
through, ciiiDrcdjcit.
breakfast, v., friiEjftiicfcii ;
sieist., '^■viil)ftiicf, tt. (-C5). ,
bridge, SlUiictc,/ (-U). |
bring, efiiiiicn (99); f)o[eit; ''
to — with one, — along,
mttDriucicit; to— in, f)ev= 1
ciitDiiucicu; to — up, fjers j
nufOriiis]cit.
broad, breit.
brother, 5hiibcr, m (-§; ").
brother-m-law, ed)ioager, m
(-0; -■■).
build, bauen.
' building, (SeBaube, «. (-«;
j — ); (act of), Sl^auen, «.
I (-3).
: bullet, ,niioe(,/(-n).
burn, brciinen (99; /«/r.);
ocrbrctiiien (99; /r. and
intr.).
business, 0efd)fift, n. (-c? ;
-c).
business -matter, Wefd)aft§»
aitgelegeiif;eit,/ (-eu).
but, aber; ndetii (241, i);
foitben; {on/y after a tie-
gative, 236, R. i).
buttrti, .flnopf, m. (-e§; "e).
buy, toufcn.
buying (action of), .(Taufen, «.
(-0).
by, 228; (near by), bet (<i^^);
[of agent with pass, voice)
tJOit {dat.); {of means or
instrument) bmc() {ace),
iitit {drtt.); — rail(way),
mit bcr Ci)eiiba{)ii.
O.
call (out), rufen 188; (name),
ncitucit, 99; be— ed, r»ci»
. jjen, 188.
I call, subst. (visit), SOefud^,
I w. (-e§; -e).
can, fiinucit, 196-202.
cannon, ilauoite,/. (-11).
capable, fafiig (gen., or -j-
capital, sitbst., .gauptftabt,/
("e).
cardinal-point (jf* point),
care, i?(d)t, / ; to take -, fic^
ill 3ld;t iteOmcii (167); do
you — to? Ijaben Sie Suft ?
for all I — , iiteiitetmegeii.
carpet, 2epptd), m. (-c§; -e).
carriage, fflagen, m. (-9;
-).
carry, tragen, 186; to — up,
Ijinaiiftragen.
case, Joll, m. (-c§; "e).
castle, (Sc^log, «. (-eg; Hx)
426
VOCABULARY.
cat, .vmge,/ (-11).
cntch, faiiflC'i, iss; — cold,
fid) eifalti'ii.
muse; to — to, laffeii (i88;
+ infin.).
celebrate, feterii ; — d, hi-,
vilhmt.
< •ntiiry, ^saf)rl)uitbert, tt.
(-I'o; -c).
crtaii', — ly, iiciDifi, jo&oii
fiillo.
chair, Btiihl, J.'i. (-co; ''e^.
cliaiiccUor, Maiijlcr, »i. (-§;
-).
change, v. tr., (iiibeni ; 7/.
iii/r., fid) iinbeni.
Charles, .ttdfl, m. (--j) ; little
— , .Uavlclicn, «. (0).
charming, adj., vtMU''tb
cheap, billicv
clieese, .Hdfc, m. (-0 ; — ).
cluny, Mirfdic, / (-ni.
chicken, ,t>iil)ii, n. (-cS ; "or),
cliild, Atiiib, n. (-CO' -or).
_ Christinas, 'ilUMl)iuid)tcn, //. i
chinch, .^Urdio, _/; (-11).
Cinderella, ^.}(fdienputte(, «., !
(-.5).
cily, rtilbt, y: ("0).
claim to be, lliollcti, 196.
clear, tdir.
clever, iicfdiicft.
climate, ,U(inia, n. (-•5).
climb up, biiinufflcttoni.
cloak, lUniitel, m. {-?,; ").
cl(.ck, Uhr,/ (on),
close, jiiiitiuhoii ; \A) iofton,
Aiifdiliofjoii, 12;.
cloth, ittd), «.(-co; -f or "or).
clothes, Jlleiber, « //. {.:cc
.Ulcib).
cloud, liBolfo,/. (11).
coachman, Ahitfrfior. m. (-<3 ;
-).
coal, Ao\)l(,/. (-1;).
coat, ;)locI, m. (-rCi ; "c).
coffee, Jluffoo, m. (-§).
cold, fuU (-or); to catch — ,
(id) •ifcilten.
I colour ofnrbo, /. ( lO.
I combat,. ft a mpf, /«•( 00 ; "0).
i come, fommoii (107; fotu);
i — in, ^orciiifoiiimcii; —
I here, l)ieii)eitomtiicn ; —
down, bei .nitcrtommeii ;
— out, 1)01- .U'jtoiiimon ; —
back, uiriictfommen ; —
again, uijooortommon; what
isto— , bivriU'iiorftoljoiibi'.
coming (a(t of), .Common, «.
! command, 7>., iH'feljleii (167 ;
j dat.).
• commandment, (^lol'Pt, >r.,
I (-05 ; -0).
' company, (iSoioKfdnift, /,
(oil).
complain, fhtai'ii (iilu'r 4-
_ ace).
complete, uoUi'tcinbii].
concert, .^tOllH'it', u. (-00 ;
-0).
condition, 'i<obilli-|iiiU], /.
(eit).
confusion, ilkriuivniiiiT, /
(-011); ^iU'itiiriuitii,/ (-on),
congratulate, Wliirf uiiiiifdu'it,
iU"iUiiHorcit {d,t/.).
conscious, lu'unifu (+.c<v/.).
co-'sequence ; in — of, jn*
fotsie (22,0.
consider, lH'trad)ton; [jattoit
fiir, J 88.
con.sist (of), boftofjcn (nuS),
1S6.
contented, ,5ufrieben.
contradistinction, Wegcnfa|,
111. (-00 ; "e).
contrary; on the — , int (^)C;
iiontoil.
convent, ,«[oftor, n. (-<3 ; ").
convince (of), iiborjeii'rtoii
(i'<?//. 0/ thi>:g).
cool, adj., fill)(.
copy, subst., (Srciuphu', «.
(-ecS; -c); v., nbf^rcibcit,
120.
corner, (S(te, /. (-ti).
] correct, adj., ricfitiii.
i cost, v., toftoii (-f. ace. or
dat. 0/ person).
\ counsellor, STJatiieber, m. (-8;
! ~^-
\ Count,j«/v^., Wraf, w. (-en;
-en).
Countess, (SJvafiii, / (-ncn).
country, i*niib, >i. (-05; ^er);
in the — , auf botn i'anbe ;
man, ^yniior, m. (-u
or -0 ; -11).
couple, *Vniir, «. (-eo; -e).
courtier, .sSijfliiid, m. (-eS ;
-0).
cousin, iyettev, m. (-0 ; -it),
cover, v., bocfeii.
create, fd)affen, i85.
creditor, WfiiiidiiU'r, w. (-5 ;
-).
creep, friod)Cii, 123.
crime, iPcrbrodien, n. (,-g ;
~).
crop, crops, Ciritto, /
cry (call), niton, 1,88; (weep),
moinon.
cup, Tcifjo,/ (-11).
curtain, SBortinng, in. (-oo ;
cut, )d)noibcn,ii8: — off, nbs
fd)itoiboit ; to — one's
hand, fid) iit bte .'giaiib
fd)iioibon.
D.
danger, Wcfa[)r, / (-en),
dangerous, i]ofaf)Vtid}.
dare, fii6 unterfte^en, 186;
biiu'on, 196.
daughter, Joc^tor, _/; (-).
day, Joii, m. (-e§; -e); in
broad —light, bet ^eHem
^a.jo.
dead, tot.
deal ; a great — of, uiel.
dealer, .^Miiihlor, m. (-g;
-).
dear, lieb, teuer.
dearly-bought, teiier.
VOCABULARY.
427
P
decide, intr., \\ij enifd&Iiegen,
123 ; ~(\,aiij., cntjcfiiebdi.
defence, aU'vtcibifiunn, /.
(-en),
definition, iCeftnition, /.
(-en),
deserve, Bcibienen.
desire, 'JSerlanflen, n. (-^ ;
-);fcuft,/re).
desperate, oerjroeifett.
devote, loibmcii.
diamond, ^iamant', m. (-S
or -in; -cn).
dictionary, SBBrterbud^, «.
(-e«; "er).
die, fterben (159; feiii).
difference, V.nterfc^ieb, m.
(-eS; -c).
difficult, fc^inev.
dig, grabeii, 186.
diligence, ^-leife, m. (-e§).
diligently, fletfeig.
dinner, WtttagSefi'en, «. (-S ;
-).
disagreeable, unaiigeiieljm.
disappoint, ciUtdiifd)en.
discover, etttbecten.
discoverer, Gntbecfev, m. (-§;
-).
discovery, Gntbecfuug, /.
(-en).
disgrace, od^anbe, /. (-n).
displeased, uiisufiii'beit.
dissatisfied, unjufrieben.
distant, cntfenit.
disturb, ftoreit.
diver, ^'andier, »«. (-§ ; — ),
divide, teilen.
divine, gottlid).
do, tOnn (196); (make), ttia=
dien ; {as aux. is jwi trans-
lated by a separate form ;
see 31, R. 3) ; how — you
— ? roie ge()t eS ;:3l)nen?
doctor, Softer, m. (-8 ;
Softo'ren) ; (physician),
Sliji, m. (-e-jj-e); that is
Dr. B., ba8 ift ber JJoftor
dog, .§unb, m. (-c9; -e).
dollar, iDaler, tn. (-«; — ).
door, Jf)iir(e), / (-en) ; at
the — , <xv. ber 3:t)Ur(e).
doubt, subsi., ^xot\\t\, m.
(-§;-).
doubt, v., jroeifeln (an -f
dat!)\ I liave no — of it,
id) ijabe feinen^iueifel bas
ran.
down, fierunter ; — -stairs,
uitten.
dozen, ^u^enb, «. (-c5; -e).
draw, ,^ic[)en, 131; seid)nen.
dress, .Uleib, n. (-e5 ; -cr).
dress, v. tr., anfleiben; v.
intr., fief) nnfleiben.
drink, trintcii, 144; — {0/
beasts), fniifen, 123.
drive, v. tr., tvciben, 120;
I intr., (go in a conveyance),
j far)i-cu(i86; fein) ; go for
j a— , fpa,5icren fa[)ren.
driving (act of), '^ai)ren, n.
(-6).
drop, Ivopfen, ;«. (-§ ; — ).
drown, intr. \ be — ed, ers
tiinfen, 144.
duke, .f<cr,5cig, m. (-cS ; -e or
"e).
during, uia()venb {gen. ; 223).
duty, 'W^Ajt, /. (-en),
dwelling-house, 2Bo£)n^au§,
«. (-eo; ^er).
E.
each, jeber, jebe, jebe§ ; —
other, einanber.
eagle, 3(b[er, m. (-§; — ).
ear, Dfjr, n. (-e§ ; -en),
early, frill).
earn, uerbienen.
earth, ©rbe, / ; — -quake,
Grbfieben, «. (-§; —,.
east, Cft(en), tn.
easy, — ily, [eid^t.
eat, effen, 181; freffen, 181,
{said of beasts).
effort, Slnftrengung,/ (-en).
I !8emill&ung,/(-en); 9Jcr«
' fiic^, ;«. (-o;-e).
either, eiUrocber; — . . .
or, entioeber . . . ober.
elect (as), errodl^lcn (jum).
elm, U[ntc,y. (-n).
else, or — , fonft.
embarrassment, Serlegens
f)ett,/ (-en).
emperor, ^aifcr, m. (-s; — ).
endure, au^Jftefjen, 186.
enemy, ^t'\n)i, m. (-e§;
-e).
engaged, uerfagt; I have an-
other engagement, I am —
elsewhere, ic^ bin anber§»
mo oevfagt.
English, englifi^; — (Ian-
j guage), englifcf) (beS ©ngs
< Itfcfien) ; into — , im ©ngs
Itfdie.
Englishman, engtSnbev, m.
enjoy, gcniegen (123; gen.
j or more generally ace).
enough, genug ; be — , suf-
fice, geniigen.
err, irven.
escape, cntfliefien (131 ; dai).
esteem, acf)ten.
I etc., U. f. XO. {ablfreviation
\ for: unb fo roeitcv).
Europe, Giiropa, «. (-0).
I even, adv. fogar, felbft ; not
— , nid)t einmal'; — if,
I roenu aud^.
evening, SIbenb, /«. (-o§;-e).
ever, je, jemalo.
every, jebcr, jebe, jebe^ ;
—body, —one, jebermann,
jeber, jebiueber, jeglirfier ;
— week, alle ac^t 2:age.
everywhere, iiberalf.
evil, sitbst., 3?ii[c§, n.
exactly, gerabe, tbtn.
examination, esamen, «. (-5 ;
-).
examine, unterfud^'en, beob'«
ad^ten.
428
VOCABULARY.
exceeding, — ly, f)Z(^% fe^r,
(iiifjevft.
except, Qugcr (tia(. ; 46).
exci'je,!/., ciiticlnit&ii]cn(/r.),
ve\-ic\l)cn (dat.) ; subst.,
Giitfc()u[6i;-!uii,i,/(-eii).
exercise, subst., 2liifviQbe, /.
(-11).
expect, crroarteit.
expens2, iloftcii, pl,\ at the
— of, niif .(lofleit.
eye, Mnije, «. (-§; -ti).
P.
fail fin business), fnnicren.
fnll, fnUcii(i88j fciii).
family, ^amilic, /. (-n).
farr.ine, .£tuii'.]Cidnot, /,
far, lucil; as — as, biS iinrf;
(dat.)\ not — from, unfent,;
uinocit (^e«. ; 223,23,24).
farewell, ^cbciuoOl, ft. (-6).
fast (quick), gcfrfjitiiiib,
fcfineU.
father, SJutcr, w. (-§ ; ^).
favour, Ocfallcii, ;«. (-3 ; — ),
fear, 7yurit)t, /. ; for — , QiiS
rtiti-ctjt.
feather, rt-eber.y: (-n).
February, ^cbntar, m. (-€).
feel, fii;;Icii ; (perceive), cmpj;
filiboii, 144; V. inU: {of
health), fid) [icftubcii ; jit
2)hitc iciii; I— ill, mir ift
fct)led)t jii SDhite.
few, loenig, uicnige; a — ,
ei:ti;ie, tin pnnr.
field, ^clb, «. (-C3 ; -cr).
fi'^'ht, fecl)ten, 124; ftreiten,
118.
fill, fiiUcii.
find, fiiibeii, 144;— out, ciiSs
fii.'ri'ii; — again, toiebers
fiiiben.
fine, |c()i5n.
finger, finger, >«. (-8; — ).
finish, oollcn'ben : to have
— ed (with), fertig Jein
(mit); —ed, fertig.
I fire, Jeiier, n. (-6;—).
I firs:, arij., ber, bie, bo3 crfte;
I ail'., jiierft, erftenS ; —of
all, jiicvft.
fish, ^i)i[), ;«. (-C9 ; -e).
fishing, AifujC", n. (-3).
fit for, — to, gut ju.
five, fiiiif.
flatter, fcf)meid)e[n {dat).
flatterer, 3d&mcicf)lcr, m. (-3;
-).
fleet, subsf., ^lotte, /. (-n).
floor, rtiiB-'obeii, m. (-§ ; '-).
flour, aWefjI, n. (-es).
flow, v., flicfjeii, 123, jein.
flower, iJhiine, / (-11).
fly, flicgeii 131, fciii;— away,
uiejfriciicit.
follow, fo[.]Cii (iciii ; dat.).
foot, Siifi, "I. (-C'j-; ^'c).
for, 229, prep, {in behalf of),
filr, acc.f 34 i (of purpose)
JU, dat., 46; — rjadiug,
auin Scfeii; {of past time)
feit, (if/.,45; —three days
(past), feit brei ingeit; {of
fut. time) aiif, ace, 229,
{b), 2 ; — three days (to
come), nuf brei Sage.
forbid, Dei-&ietcn(i3i; dat.).
force, jioinjeii, 144 ; to be
— d, obliged (to), miiffen,
196-202.
ford, %\v:t, f. (-en),
forest, SBnlD, m. (-e5; "ev).
forgery, aSerfaifdjung, /.
(-cii).
forget, ocrgeffen, 181.
forgive, oerge()cn(i8i; dat.).
former, jencr, jene, jene^.
fort, rt'cftc,/ (-11).
fortieth (part), ajierjtgftel, «
fox, ^ut^B, »»». (-e«;«e).
Francs, jyranfreicf), «. (-8).
Francis, Sronj, m. (-cn3).
Fred(dy), ^^itu, m. (-en3).
Frederick, J^itebric^, m.
(-3) ; Frederick-Street, btc
Jyriebridjftrafie.
free, frei.
freeze, 131, frieren.
French, fronjofifc^; —(Ian-
guage), i^ranaiififc^, „.
(be3 Sranjdfifc^en).
fresh, frifcf).
Friday, ^reitog, m. (-eS;
friend, (^reunb, tn. (-e8 ;
-c).
friendless, frciinbloS.
friendly, frcunblid'.
friendship, ^-rennbfc^aft, /
(-en).
frighten (terrify), erfdjrecfen ;
tobe— ed, eifd;rccleii, 167.
frog, eyrofd), w. (-co; "c).
from {direction), uon, ou3
{dat. ; 46) ; {cause) m<i ;
{time) iibci- -^ act., 63;
a week — to-day, Ocute
iiOer ad)t Sngc ; {disease)
an, dat., 65; cv ift an
bicfer JTrnnf{)cit gcftov*
ben, he died of that dis-
ease.
front ; in — of ; t)or {dat.
or ace. J 65).
fully, ganj.
funeral, SSegrdbnlS, «. (-fe§;
-fc).
furious, -ly, iDiltenb.
future, 3nfunft,/
(-S;-).
fortnight, tterje^n Sage.
f jrtunately, glitdtidierroeife ;
gUicf(id;er 2Beifo.
fortune, good — , ®[iic!, «.
(-e§).
four, Dler.
G.
gallop, galoppieren.
garden, CJavten, m. (-3; ^).
gardener, ©artner, m. (-3 ;
-).
gathsr, fnmmeln.
general, ©eneral', m. (-e9 ;
generally, (5en)5[)nnc5.
generous, fn'ijclig.
gentleman, !qc\:\: m. (-11 ;
-en).
George, Gcorj, m. (-c).
German, adj., bciitfd; ; —
(language), 'Jcutfcl;, «.
(bc3 2!ciitfc[)ci!); in — ,
aiif Sc-tfcf;; into — , in-i
Sciitfcf)c.
Germany, 2)entfd)Ianb, «.
(-e).
get (become), rocvbeii, 15,;.
girl, I'dibcIjCli, «. (-§; — ),
give, gcDcit, iSi; — up, am'.
llC&Cll.
glad, fiol) {gen.)\ be — , fid;
ficiicii ; I am — , ccS ficut
liticf); I should be — to,
should like to, icf) iniidUc
OCi-n.
glass, Ojlao «. (-ci; ^'er).
glove, i^oublcIjuO, »«. (-cS ;
-e).
go, ocI)cn(i88;fcin);veifen;
— away, iuC33Cl;cn, foitj
OcOcii; — back, jiiiilcf--
ilcOcii; —out, (()in)aiio=:
gcOcii; — down, Ijiii;
iiittcrflcl)en; — up, I)tiis
aufjcrjcii; — past the
place, an ciiicm ^^{aijc doi'=
ii&erocricn; —for, fetch,
Tjotcn.
goal, 3icl, «. (-c5 ; -c).
God, god, 03ott, tn. (-cS;
^'ci).
Goethe, Goct()C, m. (-0).
gold, subst., Wolb, «. (-cc).
gold, rt(^'., golden, iiolbcu.
{:ood, fliit ; be — enou-h,
OiUicii 3ic Sic Giitc ; —
niorr.ing, (jntcii 2J}orfjcit.
j^codncss, Giite,,/;
tracjfi.l, -ly, aiumitij.
rrand-parjnts, Oi'ofeclteni,
J. 7
J'-
grapes, 5'rnuDen, //.
grass, ©IMS, «. (^-c5; -ev).
VOCABULARY.
grateful, banftnr.
great, qvou ("cv, gibfu).
green, .jviiit; subst.,(&x\\\\,
n. (-0).
grind, frfjicifcn, 118.
:. round, 53obcii, »«. (-?.);
Crbr,/.
::row, rondjfcn, i&'j;rocvbcn,
159.
nucss, crrntcn, 1S8.
guest, PJaft, m. (-eS; "e).
H.
habit, ©cn)0()nl)cit,/ (-en);
to be in the — of, bic Ges
iuo(;ii[)cit [;nDt'u jii, etc. ;
pfICi}cn.
half, adj., f)a[b ; — an hour.
Cine IinlOc 3tinibc.
half, sitbst., 4ni(ftc, /. (-n).
hand, ^iniib, / ("c).
handsome, fdion.
handwriting, .{ianbfcf)rift, /
(-CM),
hang, V. ir., Ijiinncn; v.
intr., t)nH.;-ien, 188.
'lappy. i''"^f'i '•'()•
harbour, .^Mifcn, m. (-d; ^').
Iiard, fd)iDCr.
hardly, fniim.
hare, .sTiflfc, m. (-n; -n).
harvest, subst., 6vnte,_/ ; v.,
ciiiteii.
haste, Gile, y:; to make—,
eilcn.
hat, 4iiit, m. (-co; -e).
have, Oabcu, 24; fciii, 52,53;
Iiiffcn, 1S8, 200, 7; to —
to, be obli^:ed to, luiifien,
196-202 ; will you — a cup
of tea? wollen 3ie eiuc
Suifc J(;cc?
hay, veil, n. (-co).
he, cr ; bcr, — who, bcrjen
jciti^c lucldjei, etc., lucr.
head, fiopf, m. (-cS ; "e).
Iioalth, Gcfimbfieit,/
hear, Ooien; to — say, fagen
429
1 hearing, GcOSr, n. (-c5).
j heart, ,Cicr^, n. (-ci!5 ; -en);
I by — , nuciucnbi(j.
heat, 4m(!C, /
heath, ^}cib'', /. (-n).
heaven, .''imntcl, m. (-5; — ).
heavy, fd)n;ci-; — ily, fd;njcv;
{0/ rain) ftiuf ; heaviest of
all, nm nUcif.Omcrften.
help, subst., ^lilfc.
help, v., [iclfcn (159; dat.');
it cannot be — ed, cS liifjt
fid; uidjt (iiibcvn.
Henry, .Ciciniid), vi. (-§).
her, pcrs. fron., fie {acc.)\
\\.)X {dat.).
her, pass, adj., \\.)X, if)re, i^r.
here, \)\ix.
hide, v., ucvbcvgen, 159.
high, ;;od), (jLiljcr, Ijijd'ft {loses
C in inflcxioti); to think
— ly of, uicl Ijaltcit con,
iSS.
him, iOn {ace), \\)\\\ {dat.).
himself (he), er fclDft ; (to)
— , fid; {ace. or dat.).
his, pass, adj., feiu, fetiie,
fcin.
his, poss. pron., fcinev, fcis
nc, fcineS; bcr, bie, ba3
fcinc; ber, bie, ba9 fets
Iliac
hoarse, I;cifer.
hold, (;nltcn, 188; — ti ge-
thcr, 3iiiainmenl;ultc;:.
holiday, ^cicrtaij, vi. (-cO ;
-0; — s, Acncn,//.
home, i^cilitut, /. ; adv.,
niid; .^vnife; at -, \\\
^iniife ; to go — , nad) ^;aufe
(jcl;cn, 1S8.
honest, cJ)vlid;, reblid;, auf.
vid;tio.
honey, .^lonifj, m. (-co),
hope, stibst., i^offnung, f.
(-C11); v., I;offcn.
horse, %\zxu, n. (-CO; -i).
hospital, ^-(O'pitat, Gpital,
n. (-c3; --cr).
r\
430
VOCABULARY.
hostess, aUirttn,/. (-neit>.
hot, l)ei6.
hour, Stuiibe, /. (-11) ; -
-hand, Stiiiibenjeiger, m.
(-S;-).
house, .^aii9, «. (-e9 ; "ei);
at your — , bei 5S')iH'it.
how, luie ; — do you do ?
iDie fle{)t e§ Sfjnen? luie
6efiiibeit Sie fid) ?
however, obcr; jebod).
howl, fjculcn.
human, meiifcl)ltc^ ; — being,
ajlcitfcf), «/. (-cit ; -en),
hundred, l^uiibcvt ; sttisi.,
|»uiibert, ft. (-e^; -c).
hjnger, ^^unacv, t/t. (-^;.
hungry, l&uu(iiig; be — ,
^imjer Ijobeit.
huntur, OSi'iU'i', ;//. (-0; — ).
hunting (act of), .^ageii, «;
(-6); (chase) o«rti),/.; go
— , nuf bie $^agb gcOcn.
huntsman, ^'ifl^'^* ***■ (-^J
-)•
hurry, (Jile, y! ; I am in a — ,
id) ['ill in ber(£i(e, ic^ fjabc
e3 citicj.
hurt, v., uevle^en.
husband, SWonn, w. (-C'3;
^er).
hussar, ^ufar, >«. (-en or ~§;
-en).
I.
ice, ©is, «. (-e3).
idea, S^ee,/., Wcbante, »«.
(-n«; -n).
idle, fniit, tviige.
idleness, idling, ^DhiBiggang,
M. (-C'3).
if, iwenn; (whether), ob.
ignorant, uniuilfcnb.
ill, tvanf ; — -health, frf)I?d)te
©efunbljeit,/ i
illness, .(Iranfbeit, /. (-en),
iniagiiiii, iiili (</,// ^hi'nfi'u (.^y
«). ' 'i
immediately, (fo)flUic^).
imp. ;e, aLMdjtigfeit.
importrt..., jptdjtig, bebeu»
tcnb.
impossible, unmogli^.
in, in, dat.,(yt,\ auf, </(»/., 65,
230, (") ; — the country,
auf bemi'anbe.
inch, 30U, tit- (-eS).
induce, bciucgen, 131, B.
industrious, — ly, ficifjtg.
industry, Ts^i'x^, m. (-eS).
inform, inittcilen.
inhabitant, (JiniBOl)nei', m.
ink, Xinte <»r 35intc, /
innocence, Unfd)nlb, f.
inquire, fief) crfunbigen, fiai
gcii, 1S6.
inside of, innerf)alb {gen. ;
223)-
insist on, bcftcf)en (11 uf +
accl).
instead of, ftatt, anfiatt
{gen.% 223).
intend, bcatifidjtigcn, uor't
Oabcn, gcbcnfcu ''■jo, 2).
intention, 9(bfid)t, f. (-en),
interrupt, nnteibved)'on, 167.
into, in {ace. ; 65).
invent, eifi)iben, 144.
invitation, Ginlabung,_/.
(-ni).
L.vite, einfabou, 186.
iron, (Sifon, «. (-<5); adj.,
eifern.
it (3«, 39), t-'-j; ev; fii- ; bcr,
joyous, frbtiUti^.
July, ^u'li, m. {-> .
jumi), fpiingcn, 144; _
down, f)erunterfprtnflen,
Ijiniintcrfpringeji.
June, %\\'\\\, m. (-0).
just, gerabc, eben ; — now,
foeben, — as, ebcnfo.
justify, redt)tfertigen.
K.
kick, ftogen, i83.
kind ; what — of, nja9 filr
(ein, einc, cin); of many
— s, Jelcrlei; adj., gnt,
rennblid); to be so — as
; to, )o gnt feiit unb.
j kindue:,s, GJiite, OUtigfett,
5rcunblic{)fcit, /
king, Mijnig, m. (-es; -e);
King-street, bic flBnig^
ftvaf.e.
kingdom, ^Bntgreid;, it. (-eo;
-0.
knife, TOeffer, «. (-s;— ).
knock down, I)eninterfd)la=
gen, 186.
know {0/ acquaintance), fen;
nen, 99; {of knmvledge
acquired by mental effort)
luiffcn, u)h\ — how, tLin=
lien, 196.
knowledge, JtenntniS, f.
f-fe), SKiffenfdjaft,/ (-en).
known, bctunnt.
bio, biio|cU)e;in— , biiiin; lady, 35ame, / (-11); young
for — , bnfiir ; of — , bn=
uon , with — , bamit ; to
- , bnjn.
its, /oM. adj., fein, \X)x.
itself, eS felbft.
J.
T .nius, ^^atob, m. (—j).
January, viannav, m. (-0),
Julu!, ^\0l!rtin'/ ;;,-, (Ci).
journey, Sieife,/. (-11).
— (Miss), j^rdiilcin, n.
H;-).
lake, ©ec, >«. (-§; -en),
landscape, i.'anbfd)aft, f.
(-en),
language, Sprnc^e, / (-n).
lantern, JiJuteine, f. (-n).
large, gvoft (^er, iui3tit).
last, te§t, I'orig; at — , enb»
\\<^; v., bnueni.
late, fpat.
'ately, neultc^, fUrijIic^.
Latin, subst., fiatein', «. (-3).
lattLT, the — , jeiicr.
laugh, lncl)cn; — (at), lac^eii
(gen. or iiber + ace.) ; he
—8 at (makes sport of) you,
er moc^t fic^ iibcr ®ie
?uftifl.
lawyer, SMboolat', m, (-eii;
-en),
lay, legeii.
lazy, fnul, trtiac
lead, SOIci, «. (-e3).
lead, v., fU()VCli.
lead-pencil, SBkiftift, m.
(-c^: -e).
leaf, SBIatt, «. (-C9; "ei).
learn, lenicii.
learned, uifj., sii'lcljit.
learning (action of), I'ernen,
«. (-^).
least; at — , luciiigfteiio.
leave, laffcii, i88 ; — behind,
.desert, abandon, oerlaffcn ;
— out, aii'3(affeit.
left, lint; be — , iibiii] blei=
bcii.
leg, tScm, ,t. (-eo; -c).
lemonade, Simoiiabc,/ (-n).
lend, lei^eit, 120.
lesson, 2[ufflalu',/.(-n); Vcf^
tion, _/ (-C11).
let, lofjen, 188,
letter {0/ alphabet), «uc^i
ftade, >«. (-110; -ti); (epis-
tie), SBfief, «». (-C3; -e).
liar, I'liancv, m. (-5; — }.
library, 53ibltotf)et',/ (-ett).
lie (be recumbent), (iegeii
181; — down, fief) tiinleiK tt.
life, iiJcben, n. (-'o ; — ).
liSiliten (flash), Dli^eii.
hghtning, ^ri^, -.v. (-co ; -e).
hke, mbijeii, 196-202 ; gefu
hiUicii, 24; I should—, iff)
mi.H()tc (ijcrn) ; to — to
learn, gem !er!!!'it ; I —
music, id) bill ciii rtvetmb
UOil Dhlfif ; how do you —
VOCABULARY.
London ? tuie gcfdUt ^\\\\t\\
fionbjttV
lily, fiilie, / (-n).
Limburg, adj., iiimbmger,
lion, SiiJipc, (-11; -11).
listen to, anl)bi cu (/r.).
literature, l.'itefatuv', f.
little (of size), ilcin ; (0/
quautit}^ U'Cllig.
live, lebcii; (dwell), looljneii.
living, Ic'bciib, (ebeii'big.
locality, QJogciib, /. (-en).
London, i^ionboii, n. (-&);
adj., iioiiboiiev.
long, rtrt>'., laiii] ("ci); adv.,
laitfleC'r); have you been
here — ? fiiib 2ie fc(}oit
langc Ijiev 'i hj has not
been here for a — time, ix
tft (aiige utAt bier goiue;
fen; three months — er,
nod; brei llioimte ; no — er
(///., not more), iiiibt iitebr.
long for, v., fid) fcl)iieii luul).
look for, fiidH'it, fiicbeii iiad);
— like, aii':.fel;cii (uije or
tliul)), iSi ; it — s (appears,
seems) like rain, Cj fie()t
nac^ ;)(egeit au'3 ; — up,
f)inaiiffct)en, i8i.
lose, Devlieren, i.^i.
lost, uevloreit.
loud, — ly, Uiut.
Louisa, Snuifey: (-ltd),
love, v., lieben.
lower, iiiiter, niebev (adjs.)
431
M.
magnificent, vrdd)tig.
majesty, lliajcftdt', / (-eii^
make, Mad)eii.
man, Dinnii, m. (-es; "ei);
— (human being), aJJettfd),
tn. (-en; -cii); —kind,
i)!eilfd;, HI. ; men (soldiers),
3oIbiitcn ; little —,a«ami=
lein, n. (-3; - -).
manikin, \'.l(iiiinleiil, ;/. (-0;
-)■
manner, ajeife; in that — ,
auf bie iCeife.
many, uiele ; — a, — a one,
titand;er, mand)c, miuic^e«.
March, Didrj, m. (-e«).
Margaret, TOaigmete, /
I (-n«).
market, iUJarft, m. (-eg;
I '-'e).
I marriage (-ceremony), Jruu.
ling, /. (-rn).
j married, ueibeiratct.
i marry, f)Ctrateii, j)crbeiriUen
! (fid) mit).
marsh, 5uinpf, >». (-es; "e).
M.<ry, Wiuie,/ (-no),
matter, 3nd)c, / (-11) ; what
is the — ? luU'Jgiebto^ iiia'3
ift (oS '< what is the — with
you? tuas feblt Olbiien'^
' May (month of), yjhli, m.
j (-e§ or -en I.
niay, 7'., biii'feii ; fbniien ;
inijgeii, 196-202.
mayor, iHitrgenneiftei-, m.
I (-5; -).
^ me, mid) {acr.), mil {dut.).
: mean ; in the — time, u:(tei=
beffeii ; by — s of, uermits
tclft; iH-rmbge, j^w/,, 223. '
mean, 7'., meiiieii; to - to,
intend to, luoUeii, i(,6-2.)2.
meat, Aleifd), ,1. (,-eo).
meet, v., begegneii {dut. ;
fein); to go to — , eiitge=
geiigebeii(i88; dat.).
meeting, Syei-fammlung, /
(-en),
mental, geiftig.
merchant, Jlaiifmaitit, ;;/.
(-e«; -rente),
mere, — ly, blofj.
merry, merrily, lllftig.
messenger, 'i^ote, 711. (n;
-n).
metal, iiictall', «. (-ec- ; -e).
microstope, yjhfvoffpp'', ;/.
(-I'o; -e).
middle, WxiXi,/.: in the -«
432
VOCABULARY.
•jf summer, mitten tm
Sv>mmer.
mile, Jlcilt,/.(-n),
milk, SOi Ihi). /.
mine, meiiier,ii!Mne,meine9;
bcr, bie, bn« uieiiic; ber,
bie, bn mciiiigc.
minute, TOimite,/ (-n); —
•hand, 5Jhiuitenjciijer, m.
(-« ; --).
misfortune, UiiijIUcf, «.
(-Ci).
Miss (young lady), Srauletn,
'«•(-«; -).
mistake, ^e^ler, vi. (-9;
-).
mock, fpottci; (^*/f. or iibn'
■\- ace).
moisten, beiicjjcn.
moment, *iluaciibU(f, m.
(-c« ; -c).
monarch, Wouorcf/, ;;/.(-en ;
-en).
Monday, OToMtiig, »«. (-5;
-0.
money, cyelb, «. (-ci; -cr).
month, 5)ioiiat, m. (-cS ; -c) ;
a — ago, oor cineiit liJo?
iiat.
more, tne^r; nod); one — ,
nof() eincf.
morning, Worgen, m. (-e-J;
— ); in the — , bc« DJiovs
gcKO ; good—, niiteii *JJfoi-=
oeii.
mostly, nteiftenS.
mother, Wiittcr,/ ("),
mountain, SScnj, m. (-ci;
-C).
mourning, 3;rawer, /.
Mr., .<:u'rr, m. (-n; -en),
much, uiel; very — , feljr ;
as—, cbcn fo uicl.
music, '^\\\S\V,f.
musician, iDin'fifer, m. (-3 ;
-).
must, tnijffen, 196-202.
ta-jyposs. adj., mein, meine,
tnein {also expressed by
dat. of pert. pron. + dtf.
art.).
myself (I), (id)) felbft.
N.
name, subst., iHame, tn. (-n«;
-n); ncnnin, v., 99; wh,,t
is the — of.' uiie Oeifjt V
wivtisyour— PiDicljeiBen
Sic?
nation, Dlntion, / ("-en).
native town, ®£i.:titoflabt, /
natural, nntilrltc^.
naughty, unartij].
near, prep., neben (,/<//. or
ace. \ 65).
neces.sity, 'Jlot, /
need, t/., bnuid^en ; be in
— of, bebiiifcii (196; ge>i.
or ace.) \ in —of, bebilrfs
'ill (.gen.).
neglect, v., uernarfjlciffiijen.
neighbour, *}iiu()bar, /«. (-0;
-11): ~{/em.), i«iuObariu
(-neii).
neither, lueber ; — . . . nor,
lucber . . . nod),
nest, SJcft, «. (-C3; -cr).
never, nic; ntcmalS ; — yet,
nod; nie.
new, nen.
news, -liadjridjt, / (-t n).
newspaper, ,^citun!i,/. (- en).
next, niidjft {see nnljc).
Niagara Falls, bie 3Mn(joras
niece, 9Jid;te, y: (-11).
night, 9!iul)t,/; (-'c); at — ,
niu()tS, bed 9lad)t3. I
no, adj., fcin, teinc, fein ; I
adv., nein; —body, — j
person, niemanb, tciuer,
feinc, feinecS ; — more, -
longer, nidjt nu'f;r ; — ,
thank you, tdj banfe {%\),
nen).
noble, ebel.
noise, Sorm, m. (-e3).
noon, mittag, »,. (-e9 ; _,).
north, 'Jlorb, m. (-?«) ; («or«
ben, m. (-0).
not, nid;t; - a, tcin, feine,
fein; — yet, noili nidjt; —
at all, nnr nid)t; arc (you,
etc.) — ? nicOtitjnfir?
nothing, )iid)t9.
notwithstanding, nnnenc^t-t,
gen , 223.
novel, subst., DJoman', m.
(-CS; -c).
Novenil)er, 5Wooember, m.
(-0).
now, je(}t.
nowhere, nir.u'nb*.
•>"t, yiujj,/(«c).
O.
oak, eic^e, /, (-n).
obey, aol;oici)eii {dat.).
oblige, neibiuben, 144; be
— d or compelled (to),
miiffen.
occasion, subst., ©cfi'oenOeit,
/ (~i'iO; v., iH'iinfodjcit.
o'clock, Uljv {invariable) ;
what — IS it? luie oicl llljr
ift e3 .
of (231), uon, dat., 46, 231;
{material) ani, dat., 46;
{cause) nil, dat.; 2-^1, {d);
the treaty — Paris, ber
Sertniii jit'^SaiiS; the bat-
tle — \Vaterloo,bieod)[ad;t
bci sajnteiloo ; — the Alma,
nu bcr ?Hma.
off, nb
otfcr, bieten, 131, dat. 0/
Pers.; niibietcn, 131, dat.
of per s.
officer, Dffijter, m. (-eS ;
-e).
often, oft (^cr), oftmaU,
maitd'tnal.
oh : C ! of; !
old, nit (-er).
on, 232, nuf, nn, dat. or ace,
65; {.0/ time) on, dat.
•VOCABULARY.
433
«3>. (a) ; (<tf'i>»0 ttBcr,
ace, ^15.
once, ciiimal.
one, ciiiC; olii, elite, ein ;
the small — , bcr, bic, hc.i
Sllcinc ; — and the sanr",
eiii5; — and a half, cits
bevt()nl(i.
only, nuv; (ly/ time) cut;
not — . . . but also, iticOt
nnr . . . foiibcvn auct).
open, aifj'., offcit; v., nitfs
inac()oii.
opinion, ''.'■:iiiiiiiti,/ (-cii).
opportunity, 0elciicnl)cit, /.
(-CII).
oppressive, briideiib.
or, obcr; three — four, bvci
bi4 oier; either ... — ,
entiocber . . . obcv; ~
else, foiift.
orator, 9iebiicr, ?//. (-9; — ).
order, v, (command), I'C'
fehlcit, 167, {/(if. 0/ pers. ;
(prescribe), ucicrbncii ; De»
ftcUcii.
othei, anbcr ; every — day,
cinen ^ai] iitn bcii aiibcvii.
otherwise, loiift ; niibcv§.
our, adj., uiifer, uiifcre,
imfcr.
ours, pron., iinfer, iiiifere,
uufcreS; ber, bic, baS
inifcrc; bev, bic, ba^
unfriiic
out of, au§ {dat. ; 46) ;
(or at) the window, }unt
[Veiiftcr [)iiinii'^.
over, ilt>er {dat. or ace. ; 65);
— there, — the way, briii
ben.
overcoat, ll'berroct, ;«. (-e6 ;
■'-c); il'&er}icf)ev, vi. (-5;
own, adj., eii]cn. [ — ).
paint, malcti ; to — (other
than pictures), anftveic^en, '
118.
paincir, iUlnfcr, tn. (-9 ; — ).
ijaint". g (art of), *J)(n[crci',/
paliice, Ijalnft', m. (-c«;
"e)i Sc()lo(!, n. (-Cj; "cr).
pale, Citciit).
paper, t'lipicr, «. (-c6; -c)!
news—, p)eitiiit;i,/ (-en).
paradise, 'i'livabico', «. (-c5).
pardon, 5Scncif)iiit;i,yi
parents, (iUcnt,//. only.
P,iri% '^.Savii', «.(ooit *:}.5.-,fic).
Paris, adj. (= Parisian^
^^aviicr.
part, TcK, ;//. (-C'3, -o); for
tlie most — , mciitoit'J,
im-iflwitcili?.
party, Cicfiiifdjnft,/ (-en).
pass, v., tr., {of time, to
spend, etc.), 5iiluui;,eu
(09, 2); — (;ni ex;imina-
tion), (icfte!;':ii, 1S6; iiitr.,
uer,ic!)Cit (1S8, 2, fci:;);
uevflicfjcii (123 ; fciii); —
through, biivdifcmmeit
(167; fciii).
passing, mij., uoriiberaeOcii.
past, t)cviiaii;]eM, uoviiDci,
uorbei ; to ;'o — the house,
am .^iiufe uoriibevjcl)cii,
iiovbeii]cI)cii.
patient, jlrnnte, adj. subst.,
m. /.
pay, [H"}a()(eii ( ■:<:£•. of thing,
dat. offers.; ace. of pcrs.
when pers. only is iiti^n-
tioned) ; — attention, 2tcl)t
(jeliCii; — a visit, eiiieit
^•Ik'f'ub imiiteit {dat. of
pers) ; bchuflCll {ace. of
pcrs. ).
paying (action of), ^yejnljlen,
«. (-0).
peice, TiviebcCiO, »;/. (-ii5).
pear, 'iUviio,/ (-!i).
pcasai.t, 93nuer, m. (-it or
-6; -11).
pen, (vcbci',/,' (-it).
people ipl.), Scute, pi. {no
sing.)\ — {indef), mnn;
— My, man fn^t ; — , na.
tisn, ^>nlf, (-C9; "cr).
pepper, "J'Kner, tn. (-«).
perfect, — ly, (janj, uolI«
font me It.
perhaps, DlclU'idjt'.
jirrmisfiion, CilfliibiiiS,/;
permit, CVlnil' Clt {dat. of
pers.).
I person, ^cri.ii',/. (-en).
personal, pcvfbnlid).
philosopher, *V'f)il'>topl)', »«.
(-C11; -en).
physician, 3U'^t, w. (-eS; "e).
picl< up, aiifl)cbcn, 131.
I picture, iUlb, n. (-C'j ; -er);
j (ycntiitbe, «, (-'5 ; — ).
inece, Stiicf, {-<:<!> ; -c).
p.igeon, Xniibe, y; (-11).
pinch, fiieifcii, iiS.
pity, 7>., bcbinieni; it is a — ,
(.■j ift fdjcibe.
place, jK^j/., ^I'lat',, ;//. (-c3;
-e) ; Oit, VI. (-c6; -e or
"ei); to tal . — , ftilttfili*
bcu, 144; iu that — , ba,
bajcUift, bciit(cii).
place, v., ftcllcii, ic(5eit.
plant, "lifhKtiC,/ {-w).
plate, ^^cllcv, ;«. (-0 ; — ).
play, I'., fviclcii.
pleasant, an.jcneljut.
please, iiefallcu {i?>^-, dat.)\
(if you) please, (idi) [littc,
mciui '\A) bitten barr, ^e;
falltiift.
pleasure, ^criiitii.icii, «.
(-'t'); — trip, (siiort) ex-
cursion, ?(iioflii.!, in. (-C'3;
-c); to take a (•;iort) —
-trip, cinen Jfuofluj mas
d)Clt.
plum, '^^flaiime, f. (-11).
poem, Gcoidjt, n. (-C'3 ; -e).
poet, i)id)tcv, in. (-5 ; — ).
point ; cardinal — (of the
coir.pnf?.),.Cv;i!'.melS;^eiie!>.b,
f. (-en); to be upon tiie —
of, tin 43e(jrtfjc ''cin.
434
VOCABULARY.
poison, j«^j/., @ift, „. (_es.
-e); v., oergtf ten.
policeman, ?!oliaetbtener, m.
(-^; — ); Sc^ii^mnnn, m.
(-e«; -leute).
poor, arm ('er).
position, Stette, / (-n);
StcUuiig,/ (-en),
possess, defi^cn, i8i.
possible, mBgHd^.
post, — -office, <t(oft, y: ~
-man, '^oftDoti-, m. (_„;
-"); by return — , mit
iimgefienbci ^JSoft.
postage-stamp, SOrrefmarte,
/. (-11).
postpone, niiffdfticdeti, 131.
pound, >i!fiinb, w. (-ee).
power, flraft,y: (-^e).
praise, z-., [oben; preifen,
120.
pray, v., h iitw; inter j., bitte!
p-ecise, — ly, genau.
prefer, uorjiefien, 13.; I —
to walk, \^ ge^e Ueber.
prei)are ; to - for, firf) i.or=
t'Cieitcu aiif {ace).
presence, (Bcgcnmavt,/
present, adj., gegenioavtig ;
for the — , fur- J grftc.
present, stibst., ©efcfjenf, «
(-fS;-c).
president, !J5iafibeiit', m.
(-en ; -en),
press, v., bringen, 144.
pretty, Ijiibfcl), fdui,,; Wt;.
(tolerably), jifuUii-l).
P ^vent, uerl;inborn.
price, *tirei«, ;«. (-en ; _e).
prince, Jviivft, ;«. (-en ; -en) ;
iU-inj, ;«. (-fii; _en).
prison, ©cfangnis, «. (-fe>3 •
-fe).
probable, probably, lualn--
f^icinlidt); probably, luolit.
professor, *;(rofcff or, ,„. (-§; |
-en). I
promise, v., nerfpvedien,
1(7. I
propose, oorfc^Iagen, i86.
proud (of), ftofs (auf -f
(uc).
proverb, 5pric^iuoit, „,.
(-e^;"er).
province, giiooinj',/ (-en),
prudent, uorficbtig.
Prussia, ^Prcufeen, n. (->3).
Prussian, sttbst., *;(retific, ,«.
(-it;-n).
public, bffcMtlid).
punish, beftrnfon, ftrafen.
punishment, Strafe,/ (-n).
pupil, edf)ii(cr, nt. (-0; _).
pure, rein,
put on (coat, etc.), anjietie'i,
'3' ; (hat), anf»
fegen.
Q.
quality, ©ige'tfctjaft, / (-en),
quarrel, 7/., ftveiten, 118; fid)
ftreiteit (mit).
quarter, %wii\, «. (-0;— );
— of an hour, Syicrtefs
ftunbe,/ (-11).
queen, ^(pniijin, _/ (-nen).
quick, —ly, fd;„ell; quickly,
flugS.
quit, v., oerlaffen, 188.
quite, ganj.
K.
railway-station, SOafin^of, v
(-eci; ^e).
lain, sitbst., 3iegcn, m. (-0) :
v., regneii.
raise, fjebeii, 131.
rather, eljer, Hebe;.
raven, !7labe, m. (-n ; -n).
[ read, lefen, 181 ; to — to.
uorlefen {d,. ■.).
reading (act of), Vefen, ,>.
(-^.).
ready, fertig, bereit; readily,
leidjt.
reason. (5)vnnb, m. (-e'3 ; "e).
revive r.-x't^, -rfxUton, 188;
bctoniiiicn, xu-j ; — (,,« a I
I host), oufne^men, J67 ; 1 y
receiving, bnrc^ ^JZehmen.
recover (from illness), ge=
tiefen (181 ; fetn).
red, a«y., rot(-"er); subst.,
9iot, n.
Reformation, SHeformatton
/ (-en),
refuse, tntr., fic^ lueigern.
regard, anfef)en (181; fiir -f
acc.)\ befrad^ten (alS).
regret ; I regret, e5 tfiut mir
leib.
reign, .^Jegierung,/ (-en),
relate, erjiibtcn.
related, tierwanbt {dat. or
mit).
rely upon, fid) uerlnffen (i8S;
niif+«a-.).
remain, Meiben (120; fein);
— at home, - behind, jiiJ
riicfbleiben; — over, itbrig
bleiben; — standing, fteOcn
(186) bleiben.
remarkable, mertiuiirbig.
remember, fid) eriiinern
{gen.) ; I wish to be — ed
to him, idj laffe \\)\x grii=
remind of, erinncm nn (-f
rtnt, v., uermietcii. [ace).
repeat, loieber^o'len.
j reply, sid,si., Stntmoi;, f.
\ (-CM).
reply, v., antiuortcn, eru)i=
bern, ucrfe^en.
report, v. , Oertd^ten.
representation, aJorftellnnii
/■ (-en).
resemble, dt^nli,^ fein (./rt/.);
gleicfien {ii?\dat.).
reside, ipotjnen.
resist, luiberflc'geit (186;
d,;t.).
resolve, v., fid) rntt'ijiicficn,
«23.
rest; all the —, aX(f nnbern;
retire to — . fid; fdifnfen
(i^^s) legen.
VOCABULARY.
435
return, oergelten (159); —
;;ood for evil, oergelte 935s
fe« mit (Sutcm ; by — of
post, mit umgeljenber ipoft,
imiLjeOenb.
reward, subst., So^it, m.
(-65).
rheumatism, ^heumatiSnuiS,
M. (be?—),
ribbon, Saiib, «. (-e§; ^er).
rich (in), reicf) (ail + dat.).
rid, lo?; to get — of, ID'S
rocrbetl {-^ gen. or ace).
ride, reiten (118); (in a con-
veyance), ffl()roii (i,s6).
riding (act of ; not in a con-
veyance), Sik'itcii, ;/. (-<3).
right (adj.), vcd)t; (correct), j
vicf)tin; in the — way, aiif |
bie nc(;ti(-|e aBciii", sudst., I
9Jcd^t,«. (-co;-0; to be (in '
the) — , j)(cc()t IjiUicn. !
righteous, aeredjt ; the —
(man), bcr ©erod^tc.
ring, j«/;j/., :1iiiiii, m. (-eS ;
-e); — , v., luuteii (of a
large bell), fliiirtctii (of a
small bell) ; there is a —
at the door, CO tliniielt.
ripe, vcif.
rise (get up), aufftohcii, (isr,;
feiii); (ascei.d), auffteigeit
(120; feiii).
river, ^liig, w. (-cS ; "c).
road, *3C(), ;«. (-eS ; -c);
Stvafje,/ (-n).
Roman, ;)iijmcr, ;«. (-'5; — ).
room (apartment), Stiibe, _/.
(-11); v^immer, «.(-o; — ).
rose, iKofc, / (-11).
row, v., luboiti.
run, laiifen (1S8; feiii) ; —
after, iiacf)(aufcii (iSS;
fcili; dai.); — away, b;U
i)on'hiiifi.'ii.
Rus;ia, ;)hif;(aiib, «. (-0).
"•u^si.an, subst., fliiiffe, »i.
(-••■ «).
8.
sad, tranrig.
safe, fic^er.
sailing-ship, Segelfd)iff, «.
(-es; -e).
sale ; for — , ju oerfaufeii.
same, adj. and prcn., ber,
bie, baSfelDe; ber, bie,
bnSfeUnge; ber, bie, ba«
ncimlirfie; at the — time,
jii gleicfjer ,^eit; all the— ,
one and the — , etiierlei.
j Sarah, Sara,/ (-g).
j satisfied, ^ufrieben.
Saturday, Somiabeiib, m.
I (-c6; -f); Samotna m.
j (-e§;-e).
j save, retu'ii; I — d his life,
id) rettete it)m baS 2cDcii.
say, fagen; to hear — , fagen
Ijbren; (assert, claim to
be), iDoUeit (196-202); to
be said, folleu (196-202).
.scholar (i)upil), srfiiilcr, m.
scliool, 3rt)llle,y:(-ll) ; —boy,
«i.l)U(ei-, ;«. (-§; — ).
scold, fdielteii, 159.
Scotland, 5rf)0ttlailb, //.
(-'3).
.scream, fdivcieii, 120.
I search (for), fiid)Cii.
j seat one's self, sit down, fid)
i fclu'ii.
second, uuiit. ««(/'., jiucitf.
second (of time), subst, Se=
cimbc, /. (-11).
secret, — ly, gcljtim, Ijeiiiis
lid),
.-^ee, idjeii, 181.
seek, flld)Cll.
seem, |.[)eiiteii, 120.
.self, fi'Ibft.
sell, uertaiifoii.
send, fd;icteu; — to, ^u-
fdiirfoii; — word to, bc=
!li1d)iid)t!gen(f:<r.fy>;-j.);
— for, boleii taffeii (188),
f cf)icfeu nad;.
September, September, ,//.
(-«).
servant, Dieiier, ;«. (-0 ;
— ); Dieitftbote, >«. (-n;
-n); gjhigb,/. ("e).
serve, biciteii {dat.) ; — (of
a meal), feroicren.
set, tr. (of a time-piece), ftcU
fen ; hitr. (of the sun), iir.'=
tergcf)en (188; fein); —
tree, befrcten.
settler, 2tnftebler, in. (-S;
-)■
seven, fiebcii.
several, cinige; etlic^e;
me^rere.
shake, fd)iUtelii.
shall, foHen (196-202).
she, fie.
shield, Sd)ilb, m. (-co; -e).
ship, Scbiff, n. (-cO; -e).
shoe, Scf^iif), in. {-i% -e).
slioemaker, 2d)iifter, in. (0;
— ); Sdiutjmaci^ev, m. (-5;
-).
shoot, fc^ie^en, 123.
shop, I'aben, m. (-5; -').
shore, lifer, n. (-0; — ).
short, tiirr, — ly, nncbftcnfs.
shout, fdjreieii, 120.
show, jetgen.
sluitter, ilabcii, in. (-S; — ).
shy, intr. (of horses), fd)Cit
luerbcii, 159.
sick, trant; the —(man), bcr
.ftraiife.
side, 2citc,/ (-11); on this
— oi.prep., bieoieit {gen. ;
22,0 ; on that — of, /^/•/.,
icil)ott(^^«. ; jj,;; on this
— , adv., bieofeito;oiitliat
— , adv., jcitfcitO.
sign, subst., ;^cid)Cii, «. (-0;
— ); v., uiiteru'id/itoii.
silence, Sd)iueiaen, n. (-S),
silent, flumtit.
.silly, eiiifiiltig.
silver, oilbev, «. (-g).
since (241, 12), prep., (eit,
I
i
436
dat., 46; adv., feltbem;
conj., ba.
sing, finncn, 144.
singer, Sniicjcriit,/ (-ncn).
single, etnjiij.
sink, fiiifi'ii, 144.
sister, Sd)iucftcr,/ (-n).
sit, fi^eit (181; feiii); _
down, ftcf) fe(}<?ii; - up,
nnininup, aufbleibcn, 120
six, fcc^d.
skate, v., ScftUttfc^ul^ Iqu=
fen, 188.
skill, Glc|cf;icf(ic^feit,/
slave, Sflaoe, m. (-n; -11).
slay, totcii.
sleep, v., fcljtafeii, 188;
subst., 3d)[Qf, m. (-C5).
sleighing, Sd)UttenbQt)ii, /
(-en),
slipper, *)3antoffe(, m. (-S;
-11).
slow, — ly, (ani]fam.
small, f(cin.
smelt, fd)meljen, 124.
smile, v., lodjein; subst,
Sadjcln, «. (-0).
sneak, fd)U'id;cn (118; fcin).
sno^, subst., Sdmoc, m. (-0);
»., fd)ncien.
so, fo; — are we, toil- ftnb
r5 and;.
soldier, Solbnt', m. (-en;
-en).
VOCABULARY.
some, cinirte, etHd)c, tcclcl^c,
niand)e;ctit)aS;iiiicnbcin,
etne, cin; — one, —body,
jenianb, —thing, —what,
etiund, —where, ii\icnb=
luo; ■- of it, bnuon; for —
time {past), fcit oiniiu'r
3cit.
son, Sobn, m. (-c«; -e) ;
little — , «ol)nd)en, «.(-§;
— )■
Bong, ateb, n. (-c§;-cr;.
soon, balb {co}7ip. erjer,
s-tiperl. \Xxa eEjrften); as —
as, fobalb. I
Sophia, eopfite,/ (-nS).
sorry; I am — , c5 ift mir
fcib, c5 tt;nt ntjr tcib.
sound, — ly, fcft.
sour, fiincr.
South, 3iib(cn), m. (-§),
Spnin, Spoiiicii, n. (-6).
speak, fpred;cn, 167, rcbcn;
I — with or to, f pi-cd;cn {ace.
0/ pers.).
speaking (act of), (Sprcd&cn,
«. (-?0.
spectacles (pair of), SnUc,/.
(Ht).
speech, !)Jebe, / (-n).
spite; in — of, trot} {gen. ;
223, 16).
spoil, V. tr., ucilciben.
sport ; to make — of anyone,
fid) iiticv jentanb(en) {ace.)
Inftin nuidjcn.
spread out, fid; lu'rbieiten.
spring, o., fprin.icn (144;
\i\\\)\ subst., 'eyrilOrinq, m.
(-eo; -0).
square (in a town), ipfa^j, m.
(-C-3 ; ^c),
St. Lawrence, Snnct Soreiij,
ftt.
stand, ftor;en, 186.
start (for), abvcifcn (nad)).
state (condition), 3uftanb,;«.
(-co: ^-e).
statesman, gtaatSniann, m.
(-co; -iMiinncf).
stay, I'lciticii (120; fein) ; —
up, nnftdcibon; — away,
foftlileibcn.
steal, ftchlcn, 167.
steam-ent;ine, l'antpfm(jfd;i =
lie, / (-n).
steamer, j:}ampffd;iff, «.(-c5 ;
-c).
steel, itiilil, nt. (-eS).
stick, j«'>j/., Stoct, m. (-e§;
-c).
still, adv., nod;, bod^; nod;
inniii-.
sting, ftec^en, 167.
stockitig, Struntpf, «. (-e9;
■"e).
stop, V. hitr., anfl;ijren.
storm, .= ti:rnt, ;«. (-e3; H).
story, «cfd;id;tc, /. (-n).
stove, Cfcn, >«. (-§; ^).
stranger, ^yrcmbling, m. (-e3;
-c); ;^•l•ClnDc {adj. subst.).
stream, Stiont, m. (-e§; ^e).
street, Strafje, / (-n).
strong, ftart (-ei).
student, otubent', m. (-en;
-CM).
study, subst., Stnbinnt, «,
(-S; etnbien); (room),
3tnbicrjimnu'r, «.(-.3;— );
■v., ftubiercn; — (pre.
pare) for, fid; DorOereiten
lUif (+ ace),
studying (act of), subst., 3tu«
bicicn, 11. (-0).
submit, fid) nntcnuci'fen,is9.
subscribe, iintorfd^rei'ljcn,
120.
succeed, gcliniicn, impcrs.,
144; I — , C'j !icliMi]t mir.
such, fold), |ord;er, fo[d;e§ ; fo.
sudden, — ly, plbljlidj.
suffer, (cibcii, 118.
su.''nce, ijciuincn {dnt.).
sufficient, r;inveid;ciib.
summer, ®om)ncr, >«. (-§•
-).
sun, Sonne,/, (-n); — -dial,
2oMnc)uiI;v, f. (-en) ; —
-set, 5onnonuntei-c)nng, m.
(-00).
Sunday, roiintug, m. (-e§;
-0.
support, untcrftu^'en.
sure, fid;ci-; to be — , frets
lid); i(iuar.
Switzerland, bie 2d)iocij(ber
®d;tueij).
T.
table. Sif*, m. ^cS: -c),
tailor, Sc[)neibcr, m. (-6; — ).
take, nefjmen, 107; — a walk,
VOCABULARy.
437
elnen ©pojicrgang ma*
tf)eii; fpnjieren gefien, i88;
— a voyaje, p ne Seercijc
maclicii; — up, (()in)nufs
neOmcn; — care, M) in
Sld)t nel)mcn ; — place,
ftattfinbcii, 144 ; — cold,
fid) crf'^Iten.
talk, fprc-.;eii (167; mit).
tall, avofi (-er, stiperl. Qvogt).
tea, Z\)Zt, m. (-§).
teacher, Seljrev, m. (-§; — ).
tear (to pieces), jerreilieit,
118.
telegram, siibst., %z^t\i\t,f.
(HI).
tell, filiicn {dat. of per s. or
Jii) ; Ci-}d()[eii {dat. of
pers.).
te'.ler, Gr,vif)[cv, m. (-§; — ).
tempest, Stiivm, m. (-e^ ;
ten, }el)n.
terrible, --ly, fiircfjlcvlicl).
than, nl'3; a IS bnfj.
thank, bniitcii \dai.)\ no —
you, id) banfc (Jljucit).
that, demoHstr. adj., bicfcr,
biefc, bicfco; jciici-, jcitc,
jeneS; rel. proit., bcv,
bic, bnS; inclrfjcr, luchtic,
nH'[i[)C6; deiHonsfr. pron.,
ber, bic, bac; conj., bafj.
the, bci", bic, baS; adv.,\t,
bcfto; 11 in fo.
their, iOr, il)vc, if)v.
them {acc>,, fie ; {dat!) if)neit.
then, baiin; since — , feits
bem.
there, bn ; — is, — are, eS ift,
eS fiiib; C'j nicDt, 220.
therefore, biinim.
thereupon, liarauf.
they, fic, C'J ; {hide/.), man.
thief, Sled, m. (-eS; -c).
thin, bitnn.
think, bcnft'n, 99, 2; — of,
benfen, gen. or an -f- ace. ;
(believe), glaiiDen; I should
' —so, t^ foKte eS tnelnen;
— highly of, esteem, etc.,
uiel (patten (188) oon.
third, bvittc.
thirst, Imrft, ;«. (-eS).
thirsty, bnvftig ; to be — ,
2;urft Oabcn.
thirty, bvciSii].
j this, adj. and pron., btefer,
I bicfe, bicjco.
■ those, biejcniijcn; bic; jene.
though, obilcid).
I thousand, tauienb ; subst.,
I 2:aiifciib, «. (-cS; -e).
\ three, brci.
I through, bnrd), ace. ; 34.
I throw, vocrfcn, 159 ; fdnneis
fecn, 118; — away, roei];
UH'vtcn.
thunder-storm, Wciuittcr, n.
(-« ; -).
Thursday, ^onncrStag, m.
(-co; -c).
tie, Oinbcn, 144.
till, bio, 34.
time, ^cit, /. (-en); (occa-
sion), Hial, «. (-c3; -c);
what — is it? lotc oicl Ui)v
ift C'J ? for the third — ,
5nm bvittcn SJiale; at tha
right — , vcd;t}citi!i ; at th'-
same — , ju gleidjer 3eit.
tired, miibc.
title, Sitcl, VI. (-5 ; — ).
to, 233, JU {d.it.\ 46); {with
names cf places) nad) {dat.\
46); an, anr, in {ace. ; 65,
233> 2); — tbc concert, inS
Jtonjcrt; {before inf.) jn,
273-274 ; {of purpose) um
jn, 273.
to-day, Ocute.
to-morrow, inoigen ; — mor-
ning, niorgcu friif).
too, jn; (also), flud;.
top, Gipfcl, >«. (-'3; — ).
tortoir.e, '2cl)il*)frotc, f.
(-»).
towards, gegeit {ace. ; 34).
town, etabt,/(*e); --hall,
SRntfiaue, «. (-e5; ^er).
tragedy, Jvancrfpict, n. (-e§;
-c); Xrag(3bie,/.(-n).
train (on r. railway), 3ug, m.
(-cS; ^'c); Boston — , ber
3ng Don (nadi) 3Jofton.
translate, iiberfcj'en.
transparent, bnrd)'fic^tig.
travel, veifen (Onben, fein).
traveller, iReifenbc, adj.
subst.
treasure, 'hi.)^%, m. (-e§; ^e).
treaty, iBevtrag, m. (-c§ ;
tree, SSaum, tn. (-cS; ^c) ;
little — , 53aiimd)en, «. (-S;
-).
triumph, JriumpI)', ni. (-e^;
-e).
true, roa()r ; (faithful), treii
{dat.).
trunk (of a tree), SBoum*
flamni, ;«. (-cS; "e).
trust, v., traucn {dat.).
truth, ^Ji?al)v!)cit, / (-en).
try, vcrfudien.
Tucsdav, 3ien§tag, >«. (-eg;
-0.
two, siuei; bcibo; — at a
time, je jioci ; — and a
half, britteljalb.
U.
umbrella, Sncgenfcftivm, m.
(-co; -c).
uncle, Cf)cim, >«■ (-c§ ; -e);
Cnfcl, m. (-'3; — ).
under, nntcv {dat. or aec. ;
65).
understand, Dcgreifen, ii^' ;
ocvftcljen, 186; to mak •
one's self understood, fi i
ticrftiinblid) inad;cn.
undertaking, UnterncI/nTcii,
«. (-0).
unfortunate, ungriicfrid);—ly..
Iciocv.
ur.'iindered, iingcl)inbert.
438
VOCABULARY.
United States (The), bie i8er»
ciitiiiti'n Staotcii.
university, Uiitoerfitat', f.
(-eii).
until, conj., big (bafe).
untruth, Unn)af)r()eit,/(-eii).
upon, auf {dat. or ace. ; 65);
upper, ober.
up -stairs, obeii, ;tac^ oben,
Ijiuauf.
use ; of no — , uit'iiii^.
useful, nil^ltd); the — , bn§
iJJii^ridK.
utmost, tnoglidjft.
V.
vainly, in vain, Der^eblic^;
uei-gebenS.
valley, %\)oX, «. (-e§; "ev).
venture, v., roageii.
verse, aSevg, >«. (-eg; -e).
very, fe^r; red^t; — much,
fef;r.
vex, argent ; be — ed (at), ftc^
argent (ilbcr + ace).
victory, eieg, tn. (-e^; -e).
vUlage, 3)orf, «. (-e3; ^ev).
vinegar, G)|i(i, w. (-«; -e).
violet, 3?cilcf)eii, «. (-3; — ).
virtue, 2ngei:b, /. (-cii).
visit, 58cfiid^, tn. (-eS; -e);
to be on a — at any one's,
betiemQnbauf«efud;feiii;
v., befu($cn; ciiien S13efud^
nbftatti'it, marf;ett (dat. 0/
pers.).
visitor; to have — s, ^Befud^
^aben.
voice, Stimme, y: (-ti).
voyage, 9ieife,/ (-n), Sec=
reife, / (-n).
W.
wait for, itarten auf (ace.,.
waiter, ^eUuer, m. (-§; — ).
Walk, subst., Spajiei-gaiig,
w. (-c« ; "e) ; take a — ,
einenSpaaiergnngtttad^en;
fpajieren geljeit, 188.
walk, v., gci)en, tSg ; fpn»
liereit ge{)en.
walking (aci of), ©e{)eii, n.
(-0); Spa^ierengeben, «.
(-0).
want, roiinfrf)cn; iuoUen(i96).
wanting; to be — fchlen
(dat.), mangeln(^rt^).
war, flricg, m. (-co; -e).
warm, — ly, iparm (-er).
warning, SBavmiiig, / (-ea).
waste, uerfcfiipcnbcn.
watch, suhst., \\{)x,/. (-eit) ;
SafdjcniiOr, /. (-en); 7,,,
bciuadjcn.
watchful, roadE)fam.
watch-key, Ut)rfc£)IUffeI, m.
(-S; -).
water, aBaffer, «. (-§; — ).
waver, fd)iuaitten.
way, SBeg, vi. (-eg ; -e) ;
(manner), ffieife, /. (-1,);
in this — , auf biefe SHJeife.
we, u>ir.
weak (in), fdiiuac^ (an +
dat.).
wear, v. intr. (of clothes), fic^
ttageu, 186.
weather, SSctter, «. (-§) ; in
fine — , bei fd)ouem Sffict*
tcr.
Wednesday, SDHtttood;, m.
(-S).
week, SffiodK, / (-n) ; ac^t
2^afle; for a — past, feit
ac^t 2:ngeu.
weigh, hitr., luiegeit, 131.
welcome, luilltom'men.
well, pred. adj., tooE)l, gcs
fuub; adv., gut; as —as,
foiuol;! aV-i; — known, be.
taunt.
West, 'IBe(l(cn), m. (-§).
wet, I'.aft C'cr).
what, iiiterrog. prou., n)a§?
inierrog. adj., tuelc^er,
uieKi;i', iiiclctjc'jj _. j-j^^i
of,u3a§ filr(ein, eine, etii);
rel. pron. (= that which),
^^^\ ■- a! tnelc^! — b
that in German ? tpte ^ei§t
bo^auf Tcutfc^?
when, interrog., roann? )U
lueldjer 3eit ? conj., roenn;
ala, 58.
where, too,
whether, ob.
which, interrog. adj., xotlm
c^cr, n)cld)e, racIc^eS; r<r/,
rfieS; ber, bie, bo3; that
— , tt)a§.
while, whilst, mdfjrenb (baft),
tubeffen.
whistle, pfeifen, 118.
white, rocift.
who, interrog., toer ? r^/.
d)eQ; ber, bie, ba§; he—,
the one — , mer.
whole, ganj; the — of,
gans.
whom, roen (ace.), roetn
(dat.).
whose, interrog., loeffen?
ret., beffeu, >«. «. j/>/_^. ;
beven, /. si^ig. ; //.
why, roarum? rocSEjalb?
wide, breit.
will, luoUen, 196-202.
William, aBilbfltn, m. (-8).
wilHng; to be — , rooUen,"
196.
wind, 2Binb, m. (-e9; -e).
wind up, aufjictjen, 131.
window, Senfter, «. (-3; _).
windy, luiubig.
wine, SBeiu, m. (-e3; -e),
wing, iJIiigel, tn. (-9 ; _).
winter, Sffiinter, tn. (-§; — ).
wise, luetfe ; t(ug (-'er).
wish (for), loUnfd^en.
with, 234, mit (dat. ; 46) ; M
I (dat.; 46).
, without, obue (ace. : i^V
i . . . ■ ■ "■""■
witty, iut(}ig.
I wolf, iffiolf, m. (-e3 ; «e).
woman, grau, / (-en).
woiiHcr, Wimber, «. (-«; —);
1 — , e4 luunbert mic^, ic^
luunbcie mtd^ ; — of the
world, aBeltroiiitber, «. (-9 ;
-).
wood, fflatb, m. (-c^ ; "er).
word, Sort, «. (-e^; -e or
"er); to send — , 5eiittc^j
ri^tigen.
work (Iabour),3libcit,/. (-en);
(thing done), 2Beif, «. (-c?. ;
-e); v., arbeiten.
world, 2Bert,y: (-en); in the
— , auf bcr SBelt.
worth, «^'., toert; —while,
beriUlii^eioert.
wound, v., »ertpunben.
VOCABULARY.
wriiiR, riitr^cit, 144.
write (to), fcf)reibcii (120;
dat. or <x\\-\. ucc. offers.).
writing (act of), Sd)rei(ieit, «.
(-^).
wrong ; to be (in the) — , Ult*
redtt ^nbcii.
Y.
yard (measure), (J«c,/ (-u).
year, ^jaljr, «. (-e«;-e).
yellow, gelb.
yes, ja.
yesterday, ge'fterii; — 's, oon
flefteni, geftvig.
yet, uoc^; not — , noc^ nic^t.
yonder, bort.
439
you, 38, 40, \\)x\ ®ie; bu;
end); ©ie; bid),
young, junn; — man, ^iings
linji, ;«. (C'j ; -e).
your, 40, 4 !, oner, enre, euer;
bein, bcine, bein ; Jj^r,
Stive, 3^r.
yours, bcr, bie, ba§ enre, en»
riiic; b?r, bie, ba3 ^^re,
S^rige ; bcr, bie, ha^S beine,
beinige ; enrcr ; betner ;
S^ver.
youth (time of), ^ugenb, / ;
(young man), SSiingling, nt
(-c^;-e).
II
INDEX.
V Tlie references are to thu s-.ctions and subsections, unless otherwise specified;
N. = Note ; R. == Remark ; O. = Observation; p. = page.
Abbreviations, p, 404,
abcv, coni., 230.
Ablaut, 105, R., 110.
' About,' how rendered in
GL-rm., 220.
Absolute accusative, 256; ab-
solute supeilative, of aci;-.,
127,2; ofadvs.,l«0,4 6.
Abstract sulists., take article,
44, 1 (/.); pluralof, (JO, 3;
App. H.
Accentuation, p. 10; in com-
pound verbs, 117,3, 204,
?05, 3, 20s, 20», 212; of
compound adv. prefixes,
200,2, N. r.
Accusative, use (jf, S, 252-
265; place of, 2{)0, 4; af-
ter preps., iU, 60, 05,
223, 1'.), R. 2; expresses
time, 184,1 ; measure, 185,
4 ; after reflexive verbs,
210; after inipers. verbs,
217, 2, (.0,219, 220; after
adjs., replacing gen., 244,
R. 1, 2; double ace., 253,
after intrans. verbs, 254;
cognate ace, 254, 1; ad-
verbial ace, 265; absolute
ace, 265, 2; before advs.
of direction, 224, 1.
Address, modes of, 40, 43,
47. I
Adjects, place of, 200, 1, ,
297, R. 1. i
Adjectives, when speK witii a |
capital, pp. II, 12; predi- j
cative, not declined, 14,
100; place of, 18, 20,0
3,2«6,2«0,8;at;ributive,
djcl. ( f, 101; stronc, 102,
weak, 115, mixed, 110, la-
bk", 121, general r marks,
122; ihicj of, 290, (/'),
N. 2, 298, 1, 299; in-
declinable in =or, 122, 0;
as advs., 122, 8; of colour,
122, 3; in -.d, -,at, =er,
122, (J ; a succession of,
122, •") ; after pers. prons.,
122, 1(»; after iudcf. ] rons.
and numerals, 122, 11, 12;
after !iH'ld)C, 122,13; us.d
as substs., 122, 2; compa-
rison of, 126-127; wiihout
Umlaut, Api). I, ; incapa-
ble of coir]pari;-,on, 101,
N. ; adjs. u'-ed as attri-
butes onlj', 100 ; as iTcdi-
cates only, 101 ; as i^re-
iixes to verbs, 200,4,212.
governing gen. and aec,
244; dative, 251; preps,
291 ; possessive adjs., 43,
44,G,(rz); iuterrot;;ative,S4-
80 ; api:o itive r.dj , 290
concord, 288; derivation,
by suffixes, 313; by pre-
fix:'s, 310 ; composition,
320.
Adverliial clauses, 300.
.■\ Iverl.ial conjunctions, co-
ordinalin-, 237 ; tln-ow the
subject after the verb, R. 1.
Adverbial expressions, place
of, 45, 297.
Adverbs, 187 ; place of, 46,
297; formation, 582, (a),
183, ((■}, 189; compari-
son, 128, J 90 ; mimeral
adverbs, 182, 183; idio-
matic uses of certain ad-
verbs, 195 ; advs. with an
accusative, 224, 1 ; with
preps., 224, 3, 4.
sdiie, substs. in, gender. 89,
2, W.
.Agent, with passive, 112,
R. 3.
=(il, foreign substs. in, de-
clension, 22, 0.
'all ' expressed bv c\ai\\, 170,
1; 'at all,' 157.
aKciit, conj., 230, 241, 1.
nller, -c, -co, 109; aller= be-
fore superlatives, 127, 1,
N. ; filIO'5 of a number of
persons or things, 102,2;
before adjs., 122, 12.
Alphabet, German, pp. i, 5,
nl'j, conj., 239, 3 (6); after
a comparative, 120, 1 ; dis-
tinguished from luciiit and
luiiiii;, 6S, 241, C, 8 ;
■but.'Stl, 19; a(§ clause
replaces Engl. part, of time,
284, 1, (a) ; introducing
nil. apposition, 289,6: with
conviaintive clauses, 300,
R. 1
44c.
.:!1
fltS ba%, after adjs. with ju,
273, N.
al§ Ob, a[3 roenn, 289, 3, (6),
and R, 4.
am, before a superl., 127, 1,
(i), 128, 190, 3.
on, prep., 05 ; expresses
date, 184, 2, («); of loca-
lity, 227, (a), 2, 232, (c),
2, 233, (f), 2 ; of can<;e,
with diseases, 231, , ;
with names of battles, 231,
(d), 2 ; after verbs and
adjs., 244,245,1, 291,0,
8, 9, 12.
»an, foreign substs. in, vu-
clension, 22, C.
anber, ordinal numeral, 1(>6,
1, N. ; anbtnieit'S, 238 ;
anbertljaU', 183, (/>), R.2.
angcfid)t§, 223, 20.
anftatt, 223, 14 ; governing
an infin. or ba^ clause, 270.
'any,' how n iidercd in Ger-
man, 2, 2, 157, ISO.
Apposition, apjaositive sub-
stantive, 289 ; participle,
280, (/.), 281, R. 3; ad-
jective or participle, 290;
clauses, 304.
«av, foreign substs. in, de-
clension, 22, 0.
Article, not used before words
in partitive .sense, 2,2; de-
finite, declen;ion, 4; agree-
ment, 6, 1 ; repetition of,
5,2; use, 44; contraction
with preps., 34, R., 40,
R. 1, p. 83, O., 05, R.;
with proper names, 44, 2,
3, 73, 70, 2, 5, 78; for
poss. adj., 44, 6.
Article, indefinite, declen-
sion, 9; use, 44, 4, 5.
Aryan languages, 322, 2, 3.
'as,' how rendered in Germ.,
162, 4, 241, S-11.
Associatives, how formed,
816, 2, (i).
29
INDKX.
• afl, foreign substs. iu, de-
clension, 22, 6.
sat, foreign substs. in.declen-
sion, 22, 2, 0.
'at,' of time of day, 184,3,
(<r); how rendered in Germ ,
227; after verbs, etc., 291,
1.
'at all"; see 'all.'
Attributive adj., see Adjec-
ti e.
aiicl), adv., after rel. prons.,
96, (>, idiomatic use of,
196, 9; c ,,j , 2.10, 237,
R. 2. 238.
auf, prep., 65; ith abs.
superl. of .idvs., 190,G; of
local,, >, 227. (a), 3, 230,
(a), 232, ((•), 233, (r), 2 ;
of future time, 229, (^),
2; after adjs. ai.d verbs,
245, 1,291,2, 7,10; after
r '<:,\ive verbs, 215, l,(i).
aitf Oiifi, 239, 3, (^■), 208, 3.
an-i, prep., 40; of cause,
229, (c).
aiifjcn, adv., 189, 3; com-
liariso:;, i;JO.
niifjcr, ; rcp., 40.
niif!Ci-;!a!&, 223, 3.
(iiificrji, with absolute superl,
127, 2, 190, 4
Auxiliary is verb in com-
pound tenses, 20, 32.
Auxiliary verbs of mood, see
' Modal Auxiliaries.'
Auxiliary verbs of tense, 26,
53; place of, with Modal
Auxiliaries,199, 3 ; omitted
in dependeiit clauses, 287.
bnib, compprison of, 190;
fialb . . . Dalt>, 238.
«bar, .suflix of adjs., 313, 1.
'be,' with p. part., how ren-
dered in Germ., 112, R. 5.
bes, insep. prefix, 85, R. 6,
204; meaning of, 314, 1.
6ei, prep,, 46; = 'with/
44t
• about,' 22b, (rf) ; of time,
227, (d), 3; idioms, 228,
W, (6), 282, (rf); of bat-
tics, 231, (</), ,.
('cibe, bcibi'-S, 105, 3.
• beifjcu Model, 118.
i bcuor, 241, 13, 14.
Oiniicii, 51, 1.
6i«, prep., 34, 60,4; conj.,
239, 3, (i).
blcibcn Model, 120.
SBIiimo Model, 50.
'both . . . and,' 238.
' l)ut,' rendered by nl6, 241,
19.
'by,' with passive, 112, R.
3 ; ])uw rendered in Germ.,
228.
Capitals, use of, p. n; 122,
2, 9, N., 11, O.
Calling, verbs of, 242, 3,
253; with p. part., 281, 6.
Cardinal numerals, 103,106;
gender as substs., 80, 2,
(c), 105, 10.
Cases, use of, 3 ; syntax of,
242-256 ; place of, 296.
Cause, adverbial expressions
of, 284, 1, (i,), 300, R. 2 ;
their place in a sentence,
45, Rule 5.
• cl}cit, sulists. in, declension,
10, 17; .render, 89, 3, («) ;
sub.st. suffix, 312, 2; pro-
duces Umlaut, 326, R. 2
Choosing, verbs of, 242, 8,
N., 253.
Clau.ses, conditional, 59, 267,
293, (a), 3; proportional,
see ' Comparative clauses,'
below; dependent, preced-
ing principal, 298, (i), R.
4, 294, (i), R. 2, 806;
with benn, 241. 18, 298,
(c), R. '; ; incomplete or
elliptical, 299 ; order of
clauses, 802-806; apposU
442
INDEX.
live, 804; relative, 805;
subjective, objective, ad-
verbial, 806.
Cognate accusative, 264, 1.
Collectives, declension of
those with prefix 01f=, 16,
17,2; gender, 89, 3, {<i);
concord of with verb, 285,
R. 4; formation, 815, 2,
('0-
Colour, adjs. of, used as
stibsts., 122, 3.
Coninin, before dependent
sentences, 98, 3, X., 801,
N. 5 ; before infin. clauses,
273, R. 2.
Conij^arative degree, 125,
126; declension of, 126, 5.
Comparative clau.is, witli
befto, etc., 120, 4, 2»3„
{i), R. 4, N. 3 ; 806, R. 4
and N.
Comparison, of adjs., 125-
130; of equality, 126, .'!,
241, 8; irregular, 12»; de-
fective, 130 ; of advs.,
128, 190 ; adjs. inc:ipahle
of, 161, N.
Compass, points of, ji. 104,
top; gender, 80, 1, (tj.
Complex sentences, 802-
806.
Composition of words, 818-
821; of numerals, 165,
5-7, 182, 188; of Verbs,
208-213; of substs.,319;
of adjs., 320 ; of advs.,
321.
Compounds, accentuation of,
p. 1 1 ; how formed, 818-
321 ; primary and secon-
dary, 819, 1, N. ,,2; spu-
rious, 819, 2, N.
Compound substantives, of
irregular declension, 68 ;
of irregular gender, 90, 4,
App. I., p. 388 ; how
formed, 819.
Compound tenses, formation,
25, 108 ; ron-^tnirti.Mi, £6,
33.
Compound sentences, 302.
Compound verbs, 203-213,
separable, 109, 117, 205-
207; inseparable, 35, R.
«, 100, 204; compounded
with substs., 206, 3; with
adjs., 200, 4, 212; sepa-
rable and insei>aral)li-, 208;
with double prefixes, 207,
213;, with miC., 209; with
l)cr« and ()iiu, 210 ; from
compound substs., 211.
Concord, of Subject and
Verb, 285 ; other concords,
288.
Condilir.nal cliiu.ses, 59, 239,
R. 1, 1!, 4, 267, 293, {a),
3, (/'), R. 4, N. I. 2; ellip-
tical, 268, 2, X.,293,(,),
R. 2 ; use of fo in, 69, N. ;
293, [h), R. 4, N. 2.
CnM'Jitionnl conjunctions, 59,
239, R. 1, 2, 4.
( 'onditionnl mood, formation
of tenses of, 25, 2, 3;
.shorter forms, 111, 112,
R. 1 ; in Modal Auxilia-
ries, 199, 4 ; use, 263, 267.
Conjugation of verbs; siv
"Verbs," "Modal Auxili-
aries."
Conjunctions, 235-241 ; co- |
oniuiating, proper, 236; |
not counted, 293, (,M T^, I
2; adverbial, 237, -J(13, j
{,/'), R. 2 ; correlativ.^, 238 ;
place of, 298, 3.
Conjunctive Mood, .see
" Subjunctive."
Consiilering, verbs of, 242,
3, 253.
Consonants, pronunciation,
P- 9» top; digraphs and
tri^raphs, pp. 5, 8, ,^;
doubling of, in verbs, 118,
R. 1,123, R. 1, t«7, A.^
R. 2, 181,0.6.
Construction of Sfntenwii,
292-806; i)rincii ai, 20.
26, 293, (/.), 294, {b),
295, 2, 297, R. 1, 2; de,
pendent, 82, 85, 298, (t),
294, (0,295, 2, 297, R. 2,
306; direct interrog., 28,
!J»3, (,0,i.294,(<,),295,
2, .'100; indirect statements,
87, 293, (r),R.l; indirect
qn.'stions, 88 ; relative
sentences, 98, 306 ; im-
perative, 293, {a), 2 ; of
clauses with bcim, 298,
(c), R. 4; of incomplete
clauses, 299; general re-
marks, 301 ; compound and
complex, 302, 803; see
also "Clauses," "Condi-
tional clauses."
< ontracted form of strong de-
clension, 70, R. A.
Contraction of def. art. and
pri ps., 34, 1^, 46, K. 1,
p. S,, O., 65, R.
Co;)i-dinating Conjunctions,
I n-p'-r, 236, adverbial,
237, correlative, 238.
Copula, 292 ; place of, 293,
301, 1.
tcrrelative prons., 43, R. 3,
4; conjunctions, 238; clau-
ses, 241. 9, 298, f/), R. 4,
N.3.
Countries, names of, gender,
80, 3, {c) ; see al.so "Places,
names of."
-b, suffix of substs., 812, 1.
ba, adv., with prep, annexed,
38, R. 5,142; conj., 289,
3, {F) ; various uses of,
241, 12, id), 20; whh
preps., representing an in-
fin. or bn& clause, 277; re-
places Engl. part, of time
and cause, 884.
bamit, conj., expresses pur-
pose, 289, 3, (b), 268, 3.
»a« Wow the verb fein, J 41
of a number of person" iv
things, 162, 2.
bag, conj., omitted, 81, 3,
241,3, 13, 266,R. 2;use,
2«9, (/;), 241, 3; express
ing purpose, 268, 3.
bag clauses governed b>
preps., 224,2, (a); for in-
fin., 272, R. 1, 235, 276,
R. 2, 277.
Date, how expressed, 18-(-,
2, («).
Dative, use of, 8, 248; placr
of, 296, 4; ethical dat,,
249 ;dat. after verbs, 250;
after adjs., 251 ; after
preps., 46, ol, 65, 2j?.> ;
after reflexive verbs, 216,
2 ; after impersonal vevbs,
217, 2, (i), 219, If aficr
fein and tucvbett, 2A7, 2,
(c); after inti.TJections, 240,
4, {i).
i)am.i)ten, see beudjteii, biiiu
ten.
»be, subst. suffix, Slil, 1.
Declension ; see " Substan-
tives," "A^ijectives," "Pro-
nouns," "^lamemls."
Definite Article; see "Arti-
cle."
Degrees of compajison ; see
"Comparison."
bcm after \dn, 250, (e),
268, G.
Demonstrative proufiuns; see
" Pronouns "
benn, conj., 2«16; adv. conj.,
237,239,241,7,18,293,
(c), R. 4.
bennod;, ad* . conj , 237.
Dependent seiiteitces ; see
" Construction,'' " .Sen-
tences."
Dependert iu?%5i.ons ; see
" (:onstrn>»ijn," " Sen-
tences," "Ir<iject ques-
tionB."
INDEX.
bet, bte, ba3; see "Article,
definite"; demonst. pron ,
182, 188, 186, 2, 140, 1,
(a), id), 142, 143, 1, 2;
after roer, 162; relative
proii., declension, 98 ; use,
95, 140, 2 ; replaced by wo
before preps., 95, 2 ; used
for luor, 806, R. 3, N.
bcrii(cid)cn, rel. pron., 97;
(Ifiiionstr. pron., 182,
139, 2.
be ten, gen. pi. of demonstr.
pron., when used, 188,
2, N.
Derivation, 807-317; of nu-
m.'rals, 182, 188;ofadvs.,
189; see also "Adjective,"
etc.
berjcniijc, 132, 135, 140,
1, (^).
bero, 49.
ber)cl('(iil)e, 132, 136; re-
places poss. adjs. and pers.
prons., 143, 2-4.
bc'5n[eid}cn, rd. pron., 97;
demonst. pron., 139, 1;
adv., 139, 1, N.
beffon, used for gen. of rods
dm-, 95, 1, (a); precedes
its case, 95, 3; of neut.
pers. pron., 143, 1 ; for
poss. adj., 143, 2.
be))cnun.vad)tot, adv. conj.,
237, 241, 21.
befto, 126, 4, 237, 241, 2,
293, (/.i, R. 4, N. 3.
bend) ten, 99, 2.
biefer Model, 6.
biefer, declension, 6; use,
132, 134, 140, 1,(^), 141:
replaces pers. prons. ,143, 3.
bieoiett(o), 223, 12, R.
Digraphs, consonantal, pp. 4,
8, 14.
Diminutives, gender, 89, 3,
(a); formation, 312, 2;
origin, 826, R. 2, (c). I
Diphthongs, pp. 4, 6, 14. 1
443
Direct abjecte, claaM or neut
pron. as, 250, R. 2 ; infin.
as, 272, R. 2; see also
"Accusative," "Cases,"
" Object."
Direct questions; see also
" Questions," " Interroga-
tive Sentences."
Direction, expressed by f;in;
and bev= before verb-,
210; with an accusative,
224. 1.
Distance, measure of, 185, 4.
bod), adv., idiomatic use,196,
8; adv. conj., throws subj.
after verb, 287, R. .% 298,
(A), R. 3 ; in questions,
300.2, N. I.
3)orf Model, 36, 37 ; origin
of Umlaut in, 326, R.2,(<5).
Double Accusative, 253.
Gender, 91 ; App. J.
" Plurals, 64; App. G.*
" Prefixes, 207, 210,
218.
" Vowels, pp. 4, 6, 14;
do not take Um-
laut, p. 12.
brei, declension, 165, 2.
biinten, 99, 2.
burd;, prep., 34; prefix, 208.
biivfcn, conjugation of, 196-
199; use, 200,1.
e, in conjugation of verbs,
81, R. 1, 85, R. 2-4, 107,
R. 1 ; in imperative, etc.,
167, B., R. .3, 181, O. 4;
in subjunctive, 81, R. 2,
107, O. 3; in dat. of.
substs., 21, (a), O. 4, 46,
R. 2; in adjs., 102, R,
2, 122, 6, 125, R. 5, 6,
126, 0; in poss. adjs., 48, .
R. 2; in poss. prons., 119,
M Obs., (c), N. i; re-
presents Umlaut of a, 826,
R. 3.
sc, adjs. in, declension, 102,
'~-«'-«Sfe
444
R. S ; oompsrliton, IIS,
R. 6, I
»e, substs. in, dccletihion, Bl, ,
«7, 1, 61; gender, 8», •.', ^
(<.); bubst. suffix, «1'2, I I
ebtn, 105, '2.
ebcnfo, 287,211, 8,
tl)C, coiij., 241, 13, 14; com-
parison, 180.
sei, substs. in, gender, 89, 2,
(a); subst. sulfix, 812, 5.
eiii, see "Article, Indefi-
nite."
ein, numeral, 168, 165, I ;
with def. art., 165, 1, (c),
etiinnbiT, 42, 2. f'Tid \.
eiticv, indef. pron., 145, 150;
cardinal numeral, 163,
166, 1, (/')•
eMievlei, 182, (c), N.
eiiierfeito, 288.
ciitii]C, oiiii.ic'j, ft[id)c, ct(i=
cf)e§, indef. pron., 145,
152; numeral, 168, 173,
180; buf<.rendjs.,122, 12.
ei)uiu-,l, 182, (iz), N. 2, 3.
cinS in counting, 165, 1, (</).
cinft, 182, (a), N. 2; 187,
1, w.
»c[, substs. in, declension,
16, 17 ; fcnis. in, 57, R.
2; gender, 89, 1, (n), App.
I-; adjs. in, declension,
122, 6; comparison, 125,
R. 6; subst. suffix, 312, 6.
»el, verb-stems in, drop c, 35,
R. 4.
scKf)eii, diminutive suffix,
312, 2, N. 2.
Elliptical constructiors, 59,
239, R. 2, 4, 266, N. 4,
267, C, N., 268, 2, N.,
269, R. 6, 278, 293, (/').
R. 4, N. 2, 299.
»elii, verbs in, conjugation,
35, R.4; formation, 311,1.
sent, substs. in, declension,
10, 17, 69, 1 ; gender, 89,
1, («).
INDEX.
•my., hwp. prefix, U, F
e, 204 i /ncaning, 814,2.
»«lt, 5'ibsts. in, declension,
16,17; gender, 89, 1, (a),
App. I.; adjs. in, declen-
sion, 122,0; comparison,
125, R. ; hut used as
predicates, 160; advs. in,
189, 3; subst. suftix, 81g,
7; adj.suffix, 818, 2.
»eii for sC'3 in gen. sing, of
aoljs., 102. R. 1.
seiiD, sulists. in, gender, H9,
2, (6); subst. suffix, 312,
18.
Endings of weak verbs in
simple tenses, 35 ; of strong
do., 107 ; of substs., 70;
of adjs., 121.
Knt;lisli, its relations to Ger-
man, 322
EnlarL;ed f oi m of strong de-
cbnsion, 70, 4.
iCtlO, tcrnnnntion of advs.,
1S3,(6-},1S9, I,(r/j,190,7.
cut:, insep. p-efix, 35, R. 6,
204; meaning, 314, 2.
cnts]Ciiat, 51, 2.
cntlanii, 223, W, R. 2.
OMtiiH'bov. ., cbr, 238,285,
R. 6, N. I.
=en,5, foreign substs. in, gen-
der, 89, 2, (e).
cr--, insep. prefix, 35, R. 6,
204; meaning, 314. 3.
= cr, substs. in, declension;
16,17; fems. in,57, R. 2,
gender, 89, l,(rt),Aiip. I ;
adjs. in, declensioii, 122,
6; comparison, 125, R. 0,
126, N. ; subst. suffix,
312, 8.
scv, verb-stems in, drop e,
35, R. 4.
scr, Plural ending, 36; ori-
gin, 320, R. 2, ^(^).
>crci, subst. sufiix, 312, 5,
N. 2.
»ern, Adjs. in, not used a.i
prtdlcttM, 160; ad). suT-
fix, 818, 2.
»cni, Verbs in, conjugation,
Sfi, R 4; formation, 811,2.
nfl, adv., idiomatic use,
105, 4.
cvftciiS, adv., distill ^'uished
from r-iftft, 196, . N.
G;j=, subst. prefix, i. '5, 1.
C^, neut. pron., usi -. uf, 80;
omission of, 113, 2, N. j
for a number of persons or
things, 162, 2 ; as subject
of impersonal verbs, 217,
220, 2, R. 2, N.; afte.
adjs. governing gen., 24*.
R. 1; representing a fol-
lowing infill., 272, R. 2.
e« ijiebt, e3 ift, etc., 220.
efici- iModel, 181.
Ethical dative, 249.
ctlidic ; -co, see cinii]e.
ctum, 187, III., 226, (c).
etnufj, indef. pron., 146,
149; indef. minieral, 108,
177 ; before adjs., 122, 11.
' even,' rendered bv tiil>fl, 42,
3, R.
' ever,' after rel. prons. , 96, 6.
Exclamatory clauses, 269,
R. 6, 293, (i), R. 3, 300,
N.2.
= fact), sfaftis], form multipli-
cative numerals, 182, (/').
faUcn Model, 188.
faII3, subord. conj., 239,3,
sftiltifl; see sfacf).
Factitive accusative, 258.
Factitive predicate, 25^,
254, 3.
Family names, 74, 76,4,6.
fcd)ten Model, 124.
'few,' how rendered in Ger.,
145, 152, 168, 173, 175.
■fui',' how rei.u led iii Ger.,
229; after verbs, substs.
and adjs., 291, 2-4.
IKDEX.
445
Foreign substs., accentua-
tion, p. u), bottom; d;-
clensioii, 22, fl, 37, 4,
App. D.,. 57, 5, 08,3,;.;
gender, 8f), 2, (.;.
f>actioiial nin '>er.s, 188, (a),
{(,).
freilicl), 187, IV. ; docs not
count as ,1 member . s a
sentence, 293, (. i R. 2,
N.
Frequentative";, how formed,
31.1,2, (c).
fricrcii Modi.1, l.'JI.
'from,' after verb';, 201, '/.
fiir, prep., 84; uot usi;d of
purpose, 22(>, {a) \ :.iter
verbs of couiidcrin'j-. 25i{.
Future T?nse, Iiow I ,rned,
23,2, use, 201; reiilacud
! • present, 2o7, 5. |
Future-perfect I'cnse, how
formed, £5, 3 ; uss, 2«-* ; .
replaccdby perfect, 259, 4. '
gam, '• idef, numeral, 108.
170.
(jCs, prefix of p. irt., 30 ; I
when omiited, 3."j. R. 5, ti, j
109, 112, U. ?, ,:01; of
verbs, 3.J, R. 0, 201 nil,
4 ; with Sep. verbs, 1 ' 7. 2, |
205,2; withmif;= 'ji) ; of '
substs., 815, 2; of adjs.,
316 : declension of substs. !
beginning with gcj, 16,17,
2,80, 37. '■ gender, 89,
3, {d).
geiicn, prep., ,'A.
gegcintt'cr, 51, 4.
gef)eii vith infin., 271, {<.■).
nemiif;, 51, 5.
lien, 50, 2.
Gender of substs., a ording
to meaning, 80, and form,
89; of compound substs.,
double gender, itl, App.
J.; gene: ' remarks on,
90 ; exceptional gender,
App. I.
Genitive, use .f, 3, 243; af-
ter .-^djs., 24 1 ; after verbs,
245; nch. !,!'!. f<f time
and manner, 184, 2, {/>),
189, 2, 246; of, lace, 240;
after redexiv- verbs, -.'15,
216; afti.-i Inper^, verh^,
219, 2, (,/); af.er interjcc-
•ions, 240, J, (a): after
preps., 222, 223 ; unin-
flpcted a] [iositive geniiivc,
289, 3, N. 2 ; iiositi. of
i'l a Sentence, 296, 4-7.
fieiiUii, indcf. num. and adv.,
108, 178 ; followed by
inf., 273,3.
uennan language, its rela-
tions to l.nvlish, 32 'lis-
torical sketcl), 322 .».
Germanic lan;.Hia.e,es, 322.
323; diagram of, p. 3;'.
!H.'ni, comparison if, l':,0, !;
idiiiin.itic usj of, 195, ;>. 1
' 'lerunds, or Infin. in -ing, '
;. ' to be confoimded witl)
pres. part., 277, R.3, 4,6
Gerundive, 282.
giaitl'Cit, infin. ,\ r, 275,
(](ei..), prep,, 51, (">. [R '
=glcid;cn, 4s, «7, 139.
Graf Model, 55.
Grimm's Law, 325.
grof;, comi),irison, 125, -k
0i-unbfpvad!C, 322. ■
gut, comparison, 129; as
adv., 195, ](), N.. -Mm, <i), i
R. 2,N
1), mute before coi
after \owels and ai
T, when rejected alter t,
1'. 12. I
l)alm\, conjugati -n, 24; use, '
25; with infin., 271, (/^), !
and R. 1, 27-:-,R.2; omis- j
■ sion of in ■ ndent sen- I
tencps,287,f . (.), R. 6. '
{ '^aft, suffix of adjs.,818, 3.
l)(^"\ numeral, 183, (a), N.
2,(6).
I)air(cii), balbiv, prep., 22l',
223, 1.
' naif,' !iow rendered in Gei.,
isn, („), N 2 ; (/.;.
halt-lioi.rs, 1S4, ::, („;.
icijjiii with infni., 271, (7).
, 'A)t\t, substs. in, genuer, 89,
■ 2, (,f); subst. suffix, 3x2, 0.
! ()i'lfcii Model, 159.
l)CV, prefix, 210.
: Ilia-, 187, II., (rt); before
preps., 142.
High German, history of,
'i:i, prct'x, 210.
oiittcii, adv., 189, 3: com-
pari oil, i;{0.
OilitCf, prep., 65: sep. and
insep. prefix, 208.
lio.l), declension, 122, 7 ;
comparison, 129.
!)bcl)ft, with absolute superl.,
127,2, 190,4.
'liDWever,' adv. coiij., how
rendered in Germ., 241,
1.").
Hours of the day, 184,3.
.Oilllb Model, 21, [6).
umbevt, 165, 8, 10, (c).
11 i>li'n, its u.se in com-
potmds, 818,3, X.,a;ul4.
i, prod'.K s Unil.i ■ 326.
sid), substs. in, dtlcn-inn,
22,2; gender, 89, 1, (.,,.
id)t, subst. suffix, 812, 18;
adj. suftl\, ;!13, 4
= ic, foreign substs. •' :
der, 89, 2, (e).
iier, foreign substs. in, de-
clension, 22, 6.
stercii, foreign verbs in, talte
no gCi in p. part., 35, R.
5; VLib sun <, 311, 3.
'if,' when rendered by od,
241, 4.
446
INDEX.
•ifl, 8ub«ts. in, declension,
22,2; gnuler, 89,1,(0:
adjs. In, not used as predi-
cates, IflO; atlvs. in, super!,
of, 100, 5; s'lffix of poss.
prons., 110, (c:);8ubst. suf-
fix, 812, 18; adj. suffix,
813, :>; before =tcit, 812,
10, N. ; after ,l)aft, 313,
3, N. ; produces Umlaut,
820, (/).
30n->, 49.
»if, foreign substs. in, pmi-
dt-r, 80, .', (c).
tmniov, adv., 187, I., (ci;
after rel. prons., })«, a.
Imperative Mood, true forms
of, 31, R. 4; endings, in
vve.il< verbs, 35 ; in strong,
107 ; expressed by lafieii,
200, 7, (</); replaced by
subjunctive, 208, 1 ; use
of, 2(>9. [190.
Imperfect-Present Verbs,
Imperfect Tense, formation,
in weak verbs, 30 ; in
strong, 104; endings, in
weak verbs, 35 ; in strong,
107.
Imperfect lndic;itive, use,
258; distinguiJied from
Perfect, 259, 2, 3; replaced
by present, 257, 3.
Imperfect Subjunctive, fcjr
conditional, 111, 203, 2,
N.; in Iiypotlietical peri-
ods, 2C7, 2; to express
wish, 208, 2; to express
possibility, 308, 5; origin
of Umlaut in, 320, (^).
Impersonal Verbs, 217 ; i on-
jugation, 218; govern-
ment, 219; 'there is,'
etc., 220; impersonal use
of passive voice, 113, 2.
' in,' how rendered in Germ.,
230, 291. G, 7,
in, prep., 05 ; rendered by
•at,'227,(..f, 1, and4.
»ln, substs. in, declension,
67, R. 3; g.^nder, 80, 2,
(a); subst. suffix, 812, 11;
produces Umlaut, 826,
Indefinite article, see "Arti-
cle, Indcf." [ISO.
Indefinite numerals, 108-
Indefinite pronouns, 145-
157.
iittcin, iubord. conj., 23t<
241, IG; replaces Eii^:l.
participle, 284, 1, (,?), (/>).
inbiflon, conj., 237, 239,
241,15.
Indicative mood, usr, 250;
tenses of, 257-202; in in-
direct statements, 200, R.
3; in hypothetical periods,
207, R. 5.
Indirect statement, 87, 205;
tense (if, 200; construction
of, 293, (r), R, 1.
Indirect or dependent cjues-
tions, 88, 2«i3, (,); object-
ive, with iiihn., 275, R. 4;
use of Ob in, 277. R. 5.
Indo-European or Iiido-Ger-
manic languages, 322.
Infinitive, [lice of, 20, 33,
295, ;;, 299 ; endings, 35 ;
for p. i;art. in Modal Auxi-
liaries, etc., 199, 2; with
passive sense after (affcii,
200, 7, (<), N. ; for im-
perative, 209, R. 5 ; as
subst., 270; wiiliout \n,
271; with 511, 272 ; of
purpose, 273 ; aftersubsts.,
274; accusative with inf.,
not used in Germ., 275 ; in
objective indirectquestions,
275, R. 4; governed liy
preps., 270, 277; infin. in
-ing, or gerund, 237, R.
3-6 ; ill elliptical construc-
tions, 278: replaced by p.
part., 281, R. fi, . T ; as
part of predicate, 295.
inc,' infinitive in, or gerund
277, R. 3-C.
>iiiil, substs. in, declension,
22. 2; gender, 80, 1, («),
subst. suflJi.v, 81J, 18.
inmitteii, 223,21.
tnnen, adv., 189,3; compa*
rison, 180.
iiiitcvOrtlt', 223, 4, and R.
Inseparable prefixes, 86, R.
«. 109, 203. 204, 207,
209, 212, 213; meaning
of, 314.
Interjections, 240.
Inversion, inverted sentence,
»01,2. N. ,,2.
IiUerrogntive pronoii.is and
adjs., 81-80.
Interrogative sentences, con-
struction, direct, 23; 293,
(a), I, 294, (a), 295, 2,
300. 301, \. 2 ; ii, direct
or dependent, 88, 275, R,
4, 277, R. 5,293, (0.
Intransitive verbs, used only
iniijersonallyin the passive,
113, 2; accusative after
254.
lioit, foreign substs. in, gen-
der, 89, 2, (.■).
=itcii, verbs in ; see siereit.
ii-i)ciiD, 157.
'\\d), adjs. in, not used as
predicates, ](J0; adi. suf.
fix, 313, <•,.
Italics, not u.sed in (Jerm.,
p. I-'.
'it,' when rendered by ct;, fie,
13.
j, produces Umlaut, 826.
ja, idiomatic use, 196, II.
jn, iaiUD(;l, not counted ar
member of sent., 293, (i),
R. 2, N.
je, before cardinal inimerals.
1G5, 9.
je . . . b?fto, 120, 4, 289,
3, {i), 298, ^d), R. 4, .i. i.
INDEX.
447
lc(maU), adv., 187. !..(#).
lebcr, declension, 6j Indef.
pron., 145, 168 ; indef.
numeral, 168,171; jebeS,
of a number of persons or
thi'igs, 102, 2.
|ebert..aiui, 145, 147.
iebod), 287.
jebioeber; see jcber.
iegltd)cr; we feber.
jemanb, 145, 148.
jencr, declension, 6 ; use,
182, 184. 140,1, (c), 141,
142.
jeiifeU(o), 228, 13, and R.
jctt, 187, 1., {b).
Icin, declension, 8 ; indef.
numeral, 1(18, 172.
feiitcv, indet. pron., 145;
used for niemanb, 151.
• fcit, substs. in, gender, 89,
2, ((j); subst. suffi.x, 312,
10.
iCiim'ti, 196, R. 4, N. i
flnabc Model, 54.
fomint;n, with p. part., 281,
R. Tj.
fonneit, conjugation, 196-
199 ; use, 200, 2, 202.
frnft, prep., 228. 7.
•I, forms fractions, 183, (a).
Iciig^, 228, 18, andR. 1.
Language, German, histori-
cal sketch of, 322-326.
LaiiL^uage-names from adjs. ,
122, R. 2.
Languages, Indo-Gtrmanic,
etc., 322, 2,3; Germanic,
328.
la'icu, its use, for passive
voice, 114, (/'); as Modal
Auxiliary, 200, 7.
Iniit, 228, 8. j
Sautucvidiicbunij, 825.
sU'i, fiiriiis varialive nume- ,
rals, 182, {c).
»lt\c, substs. in, declension,
16, 17 ; gender, 89, 8,
(rO; subst. suffix. 812, 3;
produces Umlaut, 826, R.
Letters, German, shape and
' pronunciation of, see In-
j troduction, pp. 1-/2.
! leet, 130.
.Icutc, plurals in, 68, 1.
eticf), adjs. in, not used as
predicates, 160; supcrl. of
advs. in, 190, -5 ; suffix of
advs., 189, 1,((^); of adjs.,
813, 8.
(iebor, compar. of c^crn, 190;
j use, 195, .'i.
! sHiiil, substs. in, declension,
22,2; gender, 89. \,{a);
subst. suffix, 312, 12.
»liiii\0, suffix of advs., 189,
: 1. (^)-
lotu'ii, paradigm of, 'active,
31 ; reflexive, 41 ; passive,
112.
-m, substs. in, decleui-.ion,
69; gender, 89,1, (,r).
I'Jhlidt, irregular compounds
of, 68, 2.
-mn(, forms numeral advs.,
182, {a).
■Dialer Model, 16, 17, App.
A.
man, indef. pron., for passive
voir-, 114, {a); use, 145,
IKJ ; r.i)laced by ciiicv, j
150; "itli imperative, 269,
R. 2. j
maucl)cr, indef. pron., 145, '•
154; indef. nuniernl, 168, I
174 ; before adjs., 122, 12. \
'tuanit, substs. in, declen- I
sion, 68, 1.
Manner, advs. of, 189;
their place in a sentence,
45, Rule 0.
Materials, names of, take
art., 44, 1, (3); plural of,
66, 'i.
I 'may,' when expre«»ed by
I bUrfcn, 200, .1, {!,), N.
i 'meanwhile,' how rendered
I in Germ., 241, l.j.
; Measure, expressions of,
j 185; advs. of, 187, in.
I nuijr, when used in comi)ari-
I son of adjs., 126, 2, 161,
I N. ; adv. of quantity, 129,
N. I ; indef. numeral, 168,
179.
I nti'hrcif, -c«(, indef. pron.,
I 145, 152: indef. numeral,
168, 176 ; before adjs.,
122,12.
niciii Model, 8.
Middle High {}erman,824,2.
aiiillioil, declension, 165, 10,
Minutes of the hour, 184, Z,
\n\\\-., verb-prefix, 204, 209,
814, 5; subst. prefix,
315. 3.
mit, 40 ; after reflexive verbs,
215, 1, {a).
mutcl, comparison, 130.
tiiitti'Ift, see ocrmituift.
Mixed declension, of substs.,
60-03, 70; of adjs., 116,
121, II L
-Modal auxiliaries, 196-202;
peculiar forms, 190, R. 1-
3; paradigms, 198; fur.
ther peculiarities, 1{,() ; idi-
omatic use, 200-202.
Modern High German, 324,3.
iNloditication of vowels ; see
Umlaut..
mbi]iii, conjugation, 190-
199; use, 200,3,202.
MonosylLibleb, declension,
22, 1, 3, ;,, App. B., C,
E., 37; gender, 89, 1, (rt).
Month, day of, how ex-
pressed, 106, 3.
Months, names of, p. 104,
top; gender, 80, 1, (3).
Moods of the verb, then usc,
448
INDEX.
9M-21S, see also "Con-
ditional," '* Indicative,"
etc.
'most,' with absolute super-
lative, 127,2.
Motion, neuter verbs i>{, con-
jugated wiih feiit, 53, (i).
miificit, conjugation, 196-
109; use, 200, 4, 202.
^hit, fLin. compounds of,
App. I, p. 3SS; 511 SKute
fein, lucr.on, 250, (e).
Mutes, progression or shift-
ing of, 325.
nttcf), prep., 4«, 184, ;), (/;),
233, (,), . ; after adjs.,
244 J after verbs, etc., 291 ,
3; after reflexive verbs
215. 1, («).
9Jnc(;luiv Model, 62, 63.
nacl;bem, subord. conj. clause
with, replaces Engl. perf.
part., 284, R. 1.
«acl;ft, 51, 7.
itttOe, compari.son, 129.
Slnntc Model, 60. 61.
Names, see "Materials,"
" Persons," " Places,"
"Proper Names."
Jiamlidic, ber, 132, 137.
nefcen, prep., 65.
•ttbft, 51,8.
neniicn, infni. with, 271, i,</).
Neuter verbs conjugated witli
feiii, 53.
New High German, 324, 3.
liiclit, place of, 12.
Md)t iiur . . . fonbent nucD
238.
iiif(}t )ouiol)l . . . nici^ 238.
r>icf)tg, indef. pron., 145,
149 ; before adj.s., 122, 11.
iiicf}t5boftouieniger, ciionl.
adv. conj., 237.
nid)ti roeniflcv al§, 241 lo
N.
nib, obsolete adv., compari-
son, 180,
iiu(miii.:,), 187, !.,(*).
iiicfir, 130.
iticmanb, 145, 148; re-
placed by tcincr, 151, 1.
iiimmer, 187, L,(c).
=niS, substs. in, declension,
22,4; gender, 89,2, (r/),
•", (c); subst. suffix, 312,
13; produce-' Umlaut, 826.
(e).
itod), adv., idiomatic use, 193,
7; conj., 237, 238.
Nominative, use of, 3, 242.
Niniiber, in .Substs., 3; cx-
r-res.sions of, 185.
Numerals, cardinal, Uttl,
105; ordinal, 164, 166 ;'
Kiiman, Ikav rendered in I
Germ., 166.2, N. ; indefi-
nite, 168-180 ; derivative, I
182, 1'''8 ; nndtiplicative,
182, (d); variative, 182,
(t); fractional, 185, (a),
HUM, 195, 1.
nuv, 1JJ5, 12.
8, 46, R. 3 ; 231 ; omitted
before infm. clauses, 277,
R. 1; after verbs, etc..
291, S-ll.
of)i;c, prep., 34; jjoverning
infm. or baft clause, 224,
•^, (/'), 276.
oljitcbcm, 50, 3.
tl)i- Model, 62, C3.
Old High German, 324, 1.
=on, foreign mascs. in, dc-
clension, 22, fi,
■ on,' how rtiulered in Germ.,
232 ; after verl.s, etc
291, 7.
'"uc,' render. (1 Ly o:., 39, R.
''^l indef. , n;:.., U^^ n^^
1«0; not r.x; icvsed after
•"U^-, 122. -I.
^i^f, for.Jj^n substs. in, de-
clension, 22,0, 63,3.
Ordinal innncrals, 164, 166.
Origin, genitive of, 243,1.
Orthography, p. u; recent
changes in, p. ,2.
0(1, prei)., 51,10; conj., 241,
4; when omitted, 239, R
4, 267, R. 0, N.; i„'i„;
direct questions, 277
R. 5.
0;' lUtrf', 239, R. 3, 4.
I'iH-it, adv., 189,3; com,)ari-
son. 130.
j iHicr(!iiU), 223, .5.
olnjlcid), olifc()oit, obmobl
239, R. .3, 4.
Object, direct, see "Accusa-
tive"; indirect, see "Da-
tive " ; renujte, with reflex-
ive verbs, 216.
0'>jects placu (,f, 45, 296,
297, R. ^,•2.
Objective clau.se before the
verb, 306.
Objective genitive, 248, 3.
ooer, 2S6, 238.
'of,' how rendered in (iorni.
Vacii- (cm), indef. numeral
173,3, X.
P.iiticipia! const luctions,
English, how rendered in
Germ., 284; English pres.
part, after 'come,' 281, k.
■"1; not to be confo nided
with inf. in -ing, or ge-
rund, -^77, R. ,"?.
Participl. , past, how formed,
in we.ik verbs, 30; in
strong, 105 ; of Modal
Auxiliaries, 199,2.
Pa^tieipk^, i)lace of, 26,88,
283,4,295,1,3, and N.,
2J(8, 299; endings, 80,
S5; used as adjectives,
122, 1; assub.'-ts., 122,2;
compari-son of, 126,4 ;iso.
lated strong, 194, N. ; use
of, 279-284; present part.,
2SO; n..t used with 'to be,'
31, K. 3; past, 281; with
INDEX.
449
Imperative force, 269, R. 5;
fut. pass, part., or gerund-
ive, 282 ; general remarlcs,
283; no perfect part, in
Germ., 284, R. 1; apposi-
tive particiiiles, 280, (5),
281, R. 3, 283, :J, 290.
Partitive genitive, 243, 6.
Parntive sense, words used
in, take no art., 2,2.
Passive voicj, 112-114; pa-
radigm. 112; agent witii,
R. 3; li.nitatioiis of, 113;
subsiitutL^s for, 114; pass-
ive of transitive verbs, 113,
1 ; of intransitive verbs,
118,2.
Past participle, see " Parti-
ciples."
'people,' indef. pron., 145,
146.
Periphrastic forms of conju-
gation, EnglLsh, 31, R. 3.
Perfect participle, none in
Germ., 284, R. 1.
Perfect tense, formation , 26,
1; use, 259; replaced by
present, 257, 4.
Personal pronouns, declen-
sion, 38; use, 39-42,44,
6, {b) ; place of, 45, Rules
3, 4, 294, (c), N., 296, 3,
4 ; replaced by demonstra-
tives, 143 ; jifter i)tcid)cn,
48 ; after (jaUicn, roeiieii,
223, 1, 2, R. 3; omitted
with imperative, 269, R. 1.
Persons, before things, 45,
Rule2, 29k , 5; names of,
how decHned, 73, 74, 76, [
2-7; article with names of, ^
73, 1, 2, 76, 2, 5, 78.
Place, advs. of, 187, 11.;
positioi in a sentence, 11,
45, Rule 5, 297, 3, and
R. i.
Places, proper names of, 72,
76, 1; article with, 44,3.
pluperfect tense, formation,
25, 1 ; plupf. ir,dicative,
use, 260; plupf. subjunc-
tive, used for conditional,
263, 267, 2, and R. 4; to
express a wish, 268, 2.
Plural, see " Concord,"
" Number," " Substan-
tives."
Possessive adjs., 43; agree-
ment, 43, 5 ; replaced by
def. art., 44, 0.
Possessive case, rendered in
Germ, by the genitive, 3,
243, 4.
Possessive dative, 44, 6, 249.
" pronouns, 119.
Possibility, advs. of, 187,
VI.; expressed by impf.
subj , 268, 5.
Prediciie, defuiition of, 292,
1,295; place of , 2' 5 ; fac-
titive pred., 253, 254, 3.
Prcdicati>'e nominative, 242.
Predicative adj., not de-
clined, 14, 100; place of,
18, 20, O. 3, 2(;5, 3, 296,
8; factitive, 254, '^.
Prefixes, of verbs, 203-213,
314; inseparable, 35, R.
C, 109, 204, 207, 208,
209, 212; meaning of,
814;sep.nrable, 117, 205-
208, 210, 295 ; s, -xuable
and inseparable, 208; com-
pound, 206, 2; double,
207 ; accent of, 204, 205,
3; place of, 117, 285, 3,
and N. ; subst. prefixes,
315 ; adj. prefixes, 816.
Prepositions, governing accu-
s.-itive only, 34, 50: dative
only, 46, 61; dat. ora:c., I
66 ; genitive, 222, 223 ; |
contracted with def. art., j
84^R.,46, R.l,p.83,0.,
65» R. ; general remarks j
on, 224; joined to advs., \
224; governing the infin., \
224, 2. {d), 276, 277 :
English preps, and their
OLim. equivalents, 226-
234 ; 1 lace of, 48, 51,
223, 298, 2; after verbs,
etc., 21; 1.
Present \ ariiciple ; see
" Particii i,,l Construc-
tions, Enylish," and
"ParticipLs."
Present ten, j, endings, in
weak verbs, 35, in -trong,
107; pres. indicative, 257,
267, R. 5 ; pres. subj., re-
places imperative, 268, 1,
269, and R. 2.
Preterite, see " Impi^rfect."
Primary Form of strong
declension, 70, R. 2.
Principal assertive sentences,
construction, 20, 26, 69,
N., 293, (A), 294, (/.),
295,2,297, R. 1,2,301,
2, 302. R, 303.
Principal parts of a verb,
28.
Progression of mutes, 825.
Pronouns, agreement of, 13;
place of, 45, 286, 2-4;
personal, decle;i:.ioii, 38;
use of CO, 89; use in ad-
dress, 40, 47, 49 ; dative
of, replaces po.ss. adj., 44,
6, {b)\ reflexive, 41, 42;
reciprocal, 42 ; interroga-
tive, 81-83; relative, 92-
97, place of, 98; posses-
sive, 119 ; demonstrative,
132-143 ; indefniite, 145-
157; remarks on, 162.
Pronunciation, Introduction,
pp. I-I2.
Probability, expressed by
future, 261, 2 ; by future-
perfect, 262.
Proper names, declension of,
66, 1, 72-74, 76.
Proportional Clauses ; see
" Comparative Clauses."
Purpose, conjs. oi, 289, 9
450
INDEX.
(b), expreMed by ju, M9,
(a) ; by subj. with bag,
etc., 268,3; by infin. with
JU or urn . . , JU, 278, R.
1, 276, 1.
Quality, genitive of, 248, 5.
Quantity of vowels, pp. 9, 10.
Quantity, expressions of,
185.
Quarters of the hour, 184,3,
(«).
Questions, dir, ct, construc-
tion of, 23, 203, {a), i,
294, (a), 296, 2, 300; in-
din ct or dependent, 88,
298, (c).
Question-word, begins sen-
tence, 23, O. 2, 298, (a),
t, 294, (a).
Reciprocal pronouns, 42.
Reflexive pronoun ., 41, 42,
44, 6, (6), N. ; used in re-
ciprocal sense, 42; place
of, 294, (c), N. !
Reflexive verbs, paradigm of, i
41; for passive, 114, (d); \
use, 214 - 215 ; govern-
ment, 21«.
Relative clauses, replace Engl .
part.,284, 2, (a);placeof,
805, 806, R. 3, and N.,
R. 4.
Relative pronouns, 92-97 : !
place of, 98, 294, (c), 306 ; !
introduce dependent clau-
ses, 98 ; not omitted in
Germ., 96, 7, O.; concord
of, 96, 1, (i>), 288, 2, N.
Rilr.tive superlative, of adjs.,
127; of advs.,190, 3.
Roman numerals, how read
in Germ., 166,2, N.
•8, plurals in, 77, 6.
»8, suffix of advs., 189, 1, 2,
821, 1, N. ; suffix in subst.
compounds, al9, 1, N. 3, 3.
•fal, subtti. In, declension,
22,4; gender, 89, 3, (c);
subst. suflfix, 8k2, 14.
• fant, adj. in, superl. of, 190,
5; adj. suflix, 818, 9.
famt, 51, 9.
•fcfjaft, substs. in, gender,
89, 2, (a); subst. suffix,
812, 15.
fdjtegen Model, 128.
fc^Iaflcn Model, 186.
fd^on, idiomatic use, 195, 6.
Script, German, pp. 13-16.
feOr, with absolute superl.,
127, 2, 190, 4.
feiii, 'to be,' use as auxilia-
ry, 25, 4 ; conjugation,
62; verb- coi)ju;;ated with,
63; with past part., 112,
R- 6, (^); m jBipersoual,
217,220; wkh dat.,250,
(<f); with infin.,272,R. 2;
omitted iu dependent sen-
tences, 287.
feit,prep.,46, 241, 12, (a) ;
conj., 239, 241, 12.
feitbcm, adv. conj., 237 ;
subord. conj., 239, 241,
12, (c).
»f<r, substs. in, gender, 89,
3, (c); subst. suffix, 812,
14.
fel6cr, fetbft, 42, 3, and R.
felbifl, 186, N.
fel6ft;see)eIDer.
Sentences, construction of,
292-306; essential parts
of, 282 ; construction of
assertive principal, 20, 26,
59, N., 293, (d), 294, (6),
295,2, 297, R. 1, 301,
2, 306; of dependent,
82, 33, 98, 293, (c), 294, |
(c), 295, 2; relative, 98,
806, 306;, R. 3 au4 N.,
R. 4; interrogative, 28,
88, 298, {u), I, 293, (c),
294, (a), 295, 2, 800; ex-
clamatory, 298, (6), R. 3 i
expreadng command of
wish, 298, (a), 2 ; condi.
tional, 59, 293, (a), 3; po-
sition of verb in, 298 ; of
subject, 294 ; of predicate,
295 ; of objects, etc., 296;
of advs., etc., 297 ; of
other members, 298; in-
verted, 801, N. .,2; com-
pound and complex, 802-
806.
Separable prefixes, when se-
parated, 117 ; place of,
29.->, Sand N., 808,4.
■ shail,' how rendered in
Germ., 201.
Shifting of mutes, 825.
' since,' how rendered in
Germ., 241, 12.
fingeM Model, 144.
Singular, see " Cowwd,*'
" Substantives."
'so,' renJc.\:aby c3, 89,3.
fo, after conditional and ad-
verbial clauses, 69, 239,
R. 2, 267, R. 3, 293, (i),
R. 4, N. I, 2, 294, id), R.
2; replaces folcf) before ein,
188, N. 2 ; adv. conj.,
237.
fo . . . fo, 241, 9.
fo ein, followed by wte,
162, 4.
fo.jav, adv. conj., 287, R. 2.
3o^n Model, 21 ; origin of
Umlaut in, 326, R 2, (a).
lo(if)(cr), demoDstr. pron.,
132, 138 ; followed by
luie, 162,4; before adjs.,
122, 12.
folfcii, conjugation, 196-199;
use, 200, 5, 201, 202.
'some,' how rendered ii-
Genn., 2, 2, 150, 162,
155, 168, 173, 177, 180.
fo'ibcr, 50, 1.
funbern, 286, R. 1.
foioo[)I ... al% (ouc^), 288;
285, R. 6.
S
S
INE>EX.
451
rfftnnen Model, 168.
\pttdi)en Model, 167.
ff/ i> P- S; i" verbs, 118,
R. 2, 128, R. 1, 181, O.
1, 188, R. 3.
ftott, see anftatt.
»ft, subst. suffix, 312, 1.
ftel^en, withinfin., 272, R. 2.
Stem of verbs, 27.
Strong declension; see " Sub-
stantives, declension of."
Strong conjugation ; see
" Verbs, conjugation of."
Subject, definition of, 292 ;
place of, 294 ; in principal
sentences, 20, 59, N. ;
in direct questions, 23,
O. 1; in dependent sen-
tences, 33, N. ; inver-
sion of, 801, 2, X. I, 2;
expressed l)y noni. case,
3, 242, 1 ; agreement with
verb, 285; repetition of,
286.
Subjective clause, 306; rela-
tiv 806, R. 3.
Subjective genitive, 243, 2
Subjunctive Mood, use, 264-
SSa, for conditional. 111,
^t$^ V. ; in indirect state-
i»pnt^ «7, 265, 266; in
indirect questions, 88 ; in
hypothetical periods, 239,
R. 1, 267 ; for imperative,
81, R. 4, 268, 1, 269;
expressing a wish, 268, 2 ;
of purpose, 268, 3; „fter
a negative, etc., 208, 4; of
possibility, 268, 5 ; origin
of Umlaut in i;iipf. »ubj.,
826, (^).
Substantives, their declen-
sion, '■MaUx Model, 16,
17; Sof)ii do., 21, (n), 22,
App. C. ; jpuitb do., 21,
(<^),5!2, App. E.;XLn!do.,
86, 87; ^nabc, 0raf,
aUiime do., 54 67, App.
*. i 'JJome, ^ac^biu, Ctji
do., 60-68, App. G. ; with
double plurals, 64, App.
G.*; Summary and tables,
70; essential parts, 71;
anomalous, 66-69 ; substs.
without plural, 66 ; without
sing., 67; of measure, weight
and number, 185 ; as verb
prefixes, 206, 3, 212; ir-
regular compound substs.,
68; appositive subst., 289;
derivation, by internal
change, 310; by suffixes,
812 ; by prefi.ves, 315 ;
composition, 319; see also
under " Accentuation,"
" Compound Substan-
tives," " Foreign Substan-
tives," "Gender."
Suffixes, of verbs, 311; of
substs., 312; of adjs.,
313.
Superlative degree, of adjs.,
relative, 127, 1; absolute,
127, 2 ; of advs., 190,
3-7.
st, substs. in, gender, 89, 2,
(i); subst. suffix, 312, 1.
stat, foreign substs. in, gen-
der, 89, 2, (e).
taiifeitb, 165, 8, and 10, (c).
teil§ . . . teil'3, 238.
Tense, in indirect state-
ments, 87 ; in indirect
questions, 88; auxiliariesof,
use, 25, 53; place of with
auxiliari -f mood, 199, 3.
Tenses, simple, how formed |
in w^»k V. rbs, 80 J in
strong, 104 107, 110 ;
endings <,f, in ..^k verbs,
85 ; in strong, |#S ; cum-
poiiti*!, how Uirmtid, 25,
lOH cibti-uction, 26,
83 ; ,j«quenc€ <3>f ten<ic!i in
indirect statewieiit.s and |
questions not observed in
Germ., 87, 2, 8S, 2, 266,
1 ; of the indicative, how
used, 257-262 (see also
under the various tenses);
of the conditional, 263,
N.; the tense in indirect
statements, 87, 266; in
hypothetical periods, 267.
Terminations; see "End-
ings."
' than ' after the compara-
tive, 126, 1, 241, 7.
'that,' how rendered in
Germ., 140.
' the . . . the ' before compa-
I ratives, 126, 4.
■ 'there,' rendered by ii, 89,
I 1, R. ; ' there is, there are,'
j 220.
\ 'they,' indefinite, 145, 146.
I stl^um; see stmn.
i Time, expressions of, 184 ;
• place of, 11, 45, 297, L',
I 306, R. 2; advs. of, 187,
I, ; English participial con-
structions of, how rendered
in Germ., 284, (a); time
! of day, 184, 3, 285, R. 6
N. 2.
Titles of rank, 49 ; 76, 5, 6
' to,' how rendered in Germ.,
46, R. 4; 233.
Towns, names of, gender,
80, 3, (c); see also "Places,
names of."
Transitive verbs, Englibh,
; with object unexpressed,
rendered by reflexive verbs
in Germ., 215, 2; often
intrans. in Germ., 250, R.
1, 252, R.
Trigraphs, consonantal, pp.
4, 8, 14.
trot), 2*23, IB, and R. 2.
=tiiin, substs. in, declension,
87; gender, 89, 3, (^) ;
subst. suffix, 812, 16.
Uber, prep., 65 ; after inter-
jections, 240, 4, (a) ; after
452
INDEX.
verbs, etc., 231, 1; prefix,
208 ; after reflexive verbs,
215, 1.
urn, prep., 84, 184, 3, (c),
226, (a), (b\ 227, {b), I ;
after verbs, 291, 4 ; go-
verning an infin. of pur-
pose, 224, 2, {b), 273,
276; prefix, 208.
Utrt fo, before c mparatives,
126, 4, 241, 293, (/'),
i<. 4, N. 3. [12.
urn.. . iDillcii, 223,22, R. 1,
Umlaut, pp. -, 6, 12, 14; in
declension of substs. , 17,
(a), 21, (a), 22,36, 70, R.
6, App. A., C. ; in subj.
mood, 107, O 2; in com-
parison of ,->djs., 125, R. 1,
in strong verbs, 186, 188,
192, R. 1; in Modal Aux-
iliaries, 196, R. 1 ; in deri-
vation, 308, N., 309, 311,
1, 2, 312, 2 4, 8, 11-13,
813, 5 ; orisin, 826.
mis, subst. prefix, 315, 4.
iiitb, 236.
iiiifeni, 223, 23.
sliltii, substs. in, gender, 89,
2, {a) ; subst. suffix, 312,
17.
UliiU'iirf'lct, prep., 223, 15;
conj. 239, 3, {b), 241, 21.
units, before tens, 165, 7.
'unless,' how rendered in
Germ., 241, 18.
untcn, adv., 189, 3; com-
parison, 130.
UUtcv, prep., 66; prefix,
208.
untcrbt'ffen.adv. conj., 237 ;
subord. conj., 239,3, (/-),
241, 15.
uittcrfialb, 223, C.
uiiiueit, 223, 24.
nr=, subst. prefix, 816, 5
»ur, substs. in, gender, S>9,
2, ie).
Urfpvadie, 322,
Variative numerals, 182, (c).
tUTs, in.sep.verb prefix, 36, R.
6, 204 ; meanin;,;, 314, 6.
Verlj, place of, 20, 32, 33,
87, 2, 88, 2, 266, K. 2,
267, R. 2,292, 2J(3, 301:
English periphrastic fori is
of, huw rendered in Ger.,
31, R. 3; tenses of, 256-
262, 263, 266 (see also
under the various tenses};
moods of, 266-278 (see
also under the various
moods); concord of, 285;
when omitted, 269, R. 6,
287.
Verbs, stem of, 27; principal
parts of, 28; weak conjuga-
tion of, 30, 31 ; cniiingsof
simple tenses, 35 ; verbs
conjugated with fciii, 53 ;
neut., of motion, etc., 53 ;
irrecrularweak, 99 ; strong,
103-108, App. L. ; bcificii
Model, 118 ; tUeiDcit do.,
120; lM)ic{icn do., 123 ; '
fccljicn do., 124; fi'icmt
do., 131; fiii(]i'u do., 144 ;
fpiiiiu'ii do., 158 ; Ijclfcn |
do., 159; fprt'u)cudo.,167; ;
offcii do., 181 ; fuiliv^cii '
do., 186; fallen do., 188;
table of strong verbs, 192;
passive voice, 112-114 ; j
rellexive verbs, paradigm
of, 41 ; use, 214-216; im-
personal verbs, 217-220 ;
compound verbs, inse]).,
35, R. C. 109, 204, 207-
209, tlll-iU; -separable,
117. 205-208, 210;
auxiliaries of tense, 25,
53 ; irregular strong, 194,
li'6; auxiliaries of mood,
196-202 ; verbs with two
nominatives, 242,2,3: with
genitive, 245; with dative,
250; with accusative, 252,
263; verbs of choosing,
242, N.; of calling, coiv
sidering, 253; verbs fol-
lowed by the sujjjnnctive,
266; by the infin. without
3U, 271; with ,511, 272;
prepositions after, 291 ;
derivation of, withouf
change, 308; «iih in-
ternal clianre, 309 ; by
suffixes, 811 ; by prefixes,
314.
Dcvmittelft, 223, 9.
ucnnlige, 223, 10.
uiel, comparison of. 129 ;
indef. pron., 145 ; indef.
numeral, 168, 176;beforo
adjs.,122, 11, 12.
Vocative, 242, 1.
UoU, prefix, sep. and insep.,
208; adj., 244.
uon, prep., 46, 228, {a\
231, (/;,, 234; used for
genitive, 46, R 3; with
passive voice, 112, R. 3;
with names of places, 72,
3, 4; with names of per-
sons, 76, 6; replaces geni-
tive of quality, 243, 5, N. ;
after partitives, 243, 6, N.;
after uoll,244 ; after verbs,
245,2
BOf, prep., 65, 184, 3, (b),
234 ; after vfcibs, etc., 291,
5, 11; after reilexivT verbs,
216, 1, (/.),
Bont, adv., 189, .;;compari.
son, 13(1.
Vowels, niodiiied, pp. 3, 6,
12, 14, double, pp. 4, 6,
12, 14; importance of, p.
8, bottom ; long and short,
pp. 9, 10; see also " Um-
laut,"
touOrcnb, prep., 75,2, 228,
17; conj., £89,3, (/.), 241,
13; replaces Kiejl.jjarticipl*
of time, 284, 1, ia).
'.'Janii, 58, 187, \.,{d).
ronriun, 83, R. 3, N.
v>
'v
tUi
\v
ID I
Wl
n)i
nil
'^^
tPaS, Sntarrog. pron., dedan-
sion and use, 83; f.omc-
times =- ' why,' 83, 6, 102,
3; used for etiuao, 149,
1; relative pron., 92, 96;
followed by hai, 162, 1 ;
of a number of persons
or things, 162, "2 ; not gov-
crrcd by prups., 83, 3,
96, 7 ; couitructio* of sen-
tences with, 98, 3.
iuQ§ far (ciii), 80.
'we,'indef., 146.
Weak conjugation, see
" Verbs " ; declensir-.i, see
" Substantives," " Adjec-
tives."
roebcr . . . nodi, 238.
lUCQCn, 75,1, 223,2, and R.
3.
Weight, expiessionsof, 185.
meil, 239. 3, (6), 241, 17.
njcldjer intcrrog. pron, and
adj., 6, 81, 82, 84, i^o;
in exclamations, 85, 1,2;
relative pron., 92, 94, 95;
indefinite pron. and num-
eral, used for ' some,"
145, 135, 180; before
adjs., 122, 13.
wciii], comparison of, 129;
iudef. pron., 145; indcf.
numeral, 168, 176 ; before
ddjs., 122, 12.
rocnii, 58, 239, 3, (6), R. 1-
4, 267 ; omission of, 239,
R. 2-1, 207, R. 2, 3, 6,
N., 293, (a), 3, R. 4, N.
2, (c), R. 2, •!94, (i), R.
2.
INDeX
Won, 289, 5, (6), and R.
8, N.
itjenn . . . nitht, 289, 3, (i),
241, 18.
lucv, interrog. pron., 81, 83;
relative pron., 92, 96,135,
(3), N.; followed by bcv,
162, 1 ; replaced by ber,
306, R. 3, N'.; construc-
tion of sentences with, 98,
3.
toerbcit, jires. and impf, of,
19 ; conjugated with feiii,
53, (a); use as auxiliary
of ten.se, 25,2; as auxili-
ary of jiassive voice, 112,
118; con]u;.;ati()ii, 112;
as impersonal verb, 217,
2,(c); wilhdat., 250, (,e).
, 'when,' how rendered in
\ Germ., 68.
' whether,' expressed by mbs
i iien, 200, li, (c).
' while, whilst,' liosv rendered
: in Germ., 241, 15.
' whole,' how rendered in
Germ., 108, 170.
' itiibev, prep., 34 ; prefix,
i ^04.
luie, in comparisons, 126, •'!,
! 241, II, S: after joUl) ciii,
; fo oiii, 162, 4; subord.
I conj., 239, 3, (l>) ; in com-
I parative clauses, 806, R.
4, N.
luicbev, prefix, 208, N. .-.
loicuielfte, bcv, 164, 166, .h,
N. 2.
* will,' hc)\v rendeied in
Germ., 201.
Wish, exprebsed by the Sub-
* 453
junctiv«, 2«S, 2; construc-
tion of sentence.'* express-
ing, 293, (a), 2.
tuiffen, 196, and N. i.
IDO, 187, II., (t); before
preps., replacing interrog.
prons., 83, 3, and relative
prons., 95, 2, 96, 7.
n)o()I, comparison of, 190;
idiomatic use, 195, 10.
luoilen. its conjugation, 196-
199. its use, 200, 1, 201
202.
tuorbcn, for ijeioovben, in
passive voice, 112, R. 2;
when omitted, 112, R. 4.
' you,' how rendered in Ger.,
40; indef. pron., 140.
=Se^tl/ in compound num-
erals, 165, 5.
5CVj, msep. prefix, 35, R. 6,
204; meaning, 314, 7.
-\\Cj,, in numerals, 165, C.
SU, prep., 46,227,00, 4, (^),
2, (.), 228, 0), 229, {a),
230,(.-),232,(/;), 233,(/;).
(c), 2, (ii) ; with Infinitive,
272-277; place of, 109,
117, R. 2; wUh inscp.
verbs, 205, 2 ; followed by
rtl§ bajj or iiin ,^u, with
verbs of choosing, 242, 3,
N., 253; after adjs., 244.
.Vicrft, 195, 5.
"ifoliic, 223, 11, R.
Vmiulift, 51, 7.
iuuiiber, 51, 3.
Ui'ci, declension of, 165, 2.
jiDijrfien, prep., 65.
I